Report of the Committee on William McCombs, Emergency One, Inc., FL [M] (Alt. to A. Saulsbury) Fire Department Apparatus Thomas H. McCullough, II, PA [I] (Alt. to G. P. Carlson) Jeffrey Bowman, Chair John McDonald, International Association of Fire Fighters, VA [SE] Anaheim Fire Department, CA [E] (Alt. to W. K. Menke) Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service, CA [U] Kenneth L. Koch, Secretary (Alt. to G. L. Gholson) Sutphen Corporation, OH [M] Tom Reser, Edwards Manufacturing, OR [M] (Alt. to W. Ballantyne) William Ballantyne, Hypro Corporation, MN [M] Thomas G. Stites, Sutphen Corporation, OH [M] Rep. Fire Apparatus Manufacturers Association (Alt. to K. L. Koch) Robert J. Barraclough, Plano, TX [SE] Edward F. Straw, Insurance Services Office, Inc., GA [I] Gene P. Carlson, VFIS/Glatfelter Insurance Group, PA [I] (Alt. to W. M. Pietsch) Rep. Volunteer Firemen’s Insurance Services, Inc. Dean David Ulrich, Los Angeles City Fire Dept. #1, CA [U] Peter F. Darley, W. S. Darley & Company, IL [M] (Alt. to D. L. Frazeur) Rep. National Truck Equipment Association Donald L. Frazeur, Los Angeles Fire Department, CA [U] Nonvoting Ron W. French, JDK Management Inc., IL [SE] Gordon L. Gholson, Department of Forestry and Fire Protection, CA [U] William F. Foley, Orland Fire Protection District, IL Gary Handwerk, Hale Products Inc., PA [M] (Member Emeritus) Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Howard L. McMillen, City of Fort Worth Fire Department, TX W. Kenneth Menke, Fire Service Research Institute, MO [SE] (Member Emeritus) J. Allen Metheny, Sr., Hartly Volunteer Fire Company, DE [U] Heinz E. Otte, Mendota Heights, MN Rep. National Volunteer Fire Council (Member Emeritus) Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company, MN [M] David A. Ogilvie, Pierce Manufacturing Inc., WI [M] Staff Liaison: Carl E. Peterson William C. Peters, City of Jersey City Fire Department, NJ [E] Jeff Piechura, Northwest Fire District, AZ [E] Committee Scope: This Committee shall have primary responsibility for W. Michael Pietsch, Insurance Services Office, Inc., TX [I] documents on the design and performance of fire apparatus for use by the Gary R. Pope, Fairfax County Fire/Rescue Department, VA [U] fire service. Carl E. Punkay, Champaign Fire Department, IL [U] James A. Salmi, American LaFrance Aerials, PA [M] This list represents the membership at the time the Committee was Alan Saulsbury, Saulsbury Fire Rescue Inc., NY [M] balloted on the text of this report. Since that time, changes in the Thomas A. Stalnaker, Goshen Fire Company, PA [U] membership may have occurred. A key to classifications is found at the John M. Terefinko, KME Fire Apparatus, PA [M] front of the document. Robert D. Tutterow, Jr., Charlotte Fire Department, NC [U] William von Zehle, Jr., Wilton Fire Department, CT [E] The Report of the Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus Rep. International Association of Fire Chiefs is presented for adoption. David White, Fire & Safety Specialists, Inc., TX [SE] John R. Witt, Safetek Emergency Vehicles Ltd., Canada [M] This Report was prepared by the Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus and proposes for adoption, a complete revision Alternates to NFPA 1901, Standard for Automotive Fire Apparatus, 1999 edition. NFPA 1901-1999 is published in Volume 9 of the 2001 National Fire Codes James T. Currin, KME Fire Apparatus, VA [M] and in separate pamphlet form. (Alt. to J. M. Terefinko) Ronald L. Ewers, Class I, FL [M] This Report has been submitted to letter ballot of the Technical (Alt. to G. Handwerk) Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, which consists of 28 voting Jim Johannessen, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., PA [RT] members. The results of the balloting, after circulation of any negative (Alt. to T. A. Hillenbrand) votes, can be found in the report. Brad C. Kobielusz, Poudre Fire Authority, CO [U] (Alt. to R. D. Tutterow) J. Roger Lackore, Pierce Manufacturing Inc., WI [M] (Alt. to D. A. Ogilvie)

822 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #66) (3) contracted for on or after January 1, 2004 1901-1-(Entire Document) : Reject 1.4.2 Nothing shall prevent the use of the standard prior to January 1, 2004 SUBMITTER: Roger Terry, Phoenix Fire Systems, Inc. if the purchaser and contractor both agree. RECOMMENDATION: None. 1.4.3 This standard shall not apply to wildland fire apparatus which are SUBSTANTIATION: We compared the 1901 standards to the MK systems covered by NFPA 1906, Standard for Wildland Fire Apparatus. standards and find a marked difference between our specifications and the Add an appendix to 1-4.1 to read as follows: standards for 1901. The MK systems meet or exceed the 1901 standards A.1.4.1 The requirements of this standard apply to fire apparatus that has where they are applicable such as in the electrical, labeling, seating, power a GVWR of 10,000 lb (4500 kg) or greater. While the standard was not train, gauges, access to the various areas by the end user, and vehicle written specifically to cover vehicles below that size, fire departments should performance to name some. The other areas, some of which are listed below consider using those portions of this standard that address safety issues with do not pertain to the MK systems. It is our hope that the NFPA will place smaller emergency vehicles. This would apply particularly to the restraint of the MK systems standards as an addendum to the 1901 standards or allow equipment in the driving and crew areas and to providing adequate optical the publication of a separate standard that addresses this very diverse and warning devices and reflective striping to increase the visibility of the new type of fire fighting equipment. vehicle. When reading the standards we do not “meet”, remember that the MK SUBSTANTIATION: The application is being expanded to include the systems are a dry agent extinguishment system with quad agent capabilities GVWR of the apparatus being covered which was formerly in the definition as well as a rapid response first out rescue unit. of fire apparatus. The date after which the standard is intended to apply Examples: has been updated to reflect approximately 3 months after the 2003 edition Scope 1-1. Scope in your definition states “sustained”. The MK systems is expected to be available. A statement specifically excluding wildland fire are not designed for sustained pumping but are instead designed to deliver a apparatus from being covered by this standard has been added so there is no rapid fire knock down over a period of a few minutes rather than hours. confusion with NFPA 1906. 4-1 Speaks to pumps and pump performance. The MK systems do not have The appendix material is moved from A-1-1 and editorially revised. pumps. A few examples are listed below. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 4.1.1 Speaks to pump ratings. The MK systems do not have pumps but are NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 pneumatically driven. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 4.1.2.1 Speaks to capacity whereas the MK system again is pneumatically AFFIRMATIVE: 28 driven and has only one rate of discharge of water other than gating at the nozzle. ————————————————- 4-1.3 Speaks to pump suction capacity. There is no pump therefore not applicable. (Log #CP38) 5-1 Speaks to tank capacity. The MK systems use a dry chemical as its 1901-4-(1-5 (New) ) : Accept primary extinguishment agent therefore water is a secondary agent and the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, volume is not more than 100 gal. RECOMMENDATION: Add a new section on retroactivity to read as 7-1 Involves the equipment carried on the vehicle. The MK systems are follows. designed to be rapid response while the follow-up units arrive with the 1.5 Retroactivity. This standard shall not be applied retroactively. needed extra equipment. The MK systems are designed to be light weight Add an appendix to the new section to read as follows. and maneuverable with the intent that they may be able to move around A.1.5 It is not intended that this standard be applied retroactively to structures and traffic problems by going off road or any place needed to gain existing apparatus. However, if major renovations are made to an existing access to the emergency scene. piece of apparatus, it is suggested that the apparatus be brought into line with 8-1 Again speaks to pumps. this standard as closely as possible. NFPA 1912, Standard for Fire Apparatus 9-1 Speaks to tests for acceptance. The MK systems are tested for flow, Refurbishing, covers the requirements for refurbishing a fire apparatus. leakage and safety at 1.5 times the rated capacity of the pressure at which SUBSTANTIATION: This is moving a statement that was under any of the systems will operate. application to its own section. The appendix material was mostly from We at Phoenix Fire Systems, Inc. are always willing to answer any existing A-1-1 with the last sentence referencing NFPA 1912 added for questions you may have and are also willing to take an active role in the guidance to users. formulation of any new standard that would address our new and growing COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept technology. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Note: Supporting material is available for review at NFPA headquaters. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 27 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The submitter has not provided specific NEGATIVE: 1 recommendations for text that should be changed in NFPA 1901. EXPLANATION OF NEGATIVE: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 FRAZEUR: It is not intended that this standard to be applied retroactively VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: to existing apparatus. However, If major renovations are made to an existing AFFIRMATIVE: 28 piece of apparatus, it is suggested that the apparatus be brought into line with this standard as closely as possible. NFPA 1912, Standard for Fire Apparatus ————————————————- Refurbishing, covers the requirements for refurbishing a fire apparatus. The term “as closely as possible” is ambiguous. As written, Section A.1.5 (Log #CP36) does not create the means necessary to ensure that modifications are made 1901-2-(1-1) : Accept uniformly across fire department jurisdiction. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 1-1 to read as follows ————————————————- This standard defines the requirements for new automotive fire apparatus designed to be used under emergency conditions to transport personnel and (Log #CP128) equipment and to support the suppression of fires and mitigation of other 1901-5-(1-5 and 1-6) : Accept hazardous situations. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, Revise A-1-1 to read as follows: RECOMMENDATION: Move sections 1-5 and 1-6 to become Sections The term “new” as applied in this standard is intended to refer to the 4.3 and 4.4. original construction of a fire apparatus using all new components and parts. Delete the existing appendix to 1-5. SUBSTANTIATION:The scope is being rewritten to better explain the Add an appendix to the new 4.3 to read as follows: scope of the document. As currently written, it is more of an application It is the responsibility of the purchaser to provide the contractor with statement. Much of the current appendix material is being moved to be sufficient information to enable the contractor to prepare a bid and a appendix material to sections 1-4 and 1-5. complete description of the apparatus the contractor proposes to supply. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Completion of the Purchasing Specification Form in Annex B should provide NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 the information required in the various sections of this document. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: Sections 1-5 and 1-6 are being moved to comply AFFIRMATIVE: 28 with the NFPA Manual of Style which limits what can be in Chapter 1. The new appendix to 4.3 (old 1-5) is to steer people to Annex B where most of ————————————————- the old appendix material to 1-5 has been used to develop a better section on Specifying and Procuring Fire Apparatus. See Annex B in the draft. (Log #CP37) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-3-(1-4) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Revise 1-4 to read as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 1-4 Application. 1.4.1* This standard shall apply to new fire apparatus: (1) of 10,000 lb (4536 kg) or greater gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) ————————————————- (2) designed for structural fire fighting or for supporting associated fire department operations 823 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP48) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-6-(1-7 Automatic Electrical Load Management System) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Revise the definition of Automatic Electrical AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Load Management System to read as follows: A device that continuously monitors the electrical system voltage and ————————————————- automatically sheds predetermined loads in a selected order to prevent over discharging of the apparatus’ batteries. Shedding of the loads occurs without (Log #CP18) human intervention and is capable of being manually overridden. 1901-11-(1-7 Fire Apparatus) : Accept SUBSTANTIATION: If the Load Manager is installed in a way that it SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, can not be overridden, it is still an Automatic Electrical Load Management RECOMMENDATION: Revise the definition of fire apparatus to read as System. If there is a requirement that a manual override capability be follows: provided, or if a comment is appropriate that such an override is allowed, it Fire Apparatus. A vehicle designed to be used under emergency conditions should be made in 11-3.5. Also, adding the word automatically in the first to transport personnel and equipment, and to support the suppression of fires sentence negates the need to have the first part of the second sentence. and mitigation of other hazardous situations. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept SUBSTANTIATION: As currently defined, the definition is limiting. Not NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 all fire apparatus is over 10,000 lb GVWR although it is the intent to cover VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: only apparatus over 10,000 lb GVWR in NFPA 1901. This is being handled AFFIRMATIVE: 28 with the revised application statement. The revised definition better defines fire apparatus. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #CP1) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-7-(1-7 Breathing Air) : Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Change the definition of Breathing Air to ————————————————- correspond to the definition in proposed NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection which (Log #CP13) reads as follows: 1901-12-(1-7 Fire Pump) : Accept Breathing Air. A respirable gas mixture derived from either normal SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, atmospheric air for from manufactured synthetic air, stored in a compressed RECOMMENDATION: Revise the definition of Fire Pump to read as state in storage cylinders and supplied breathing air cylinders, and supplied follows. to the user in gaseous form. A water pump with a rated capacity of 250 gpm (1000 L/min) or greater at Add a definition for Synthetic Breathing Air as follows: 150 psi (10 bar) net pump pressure that is mounted on a fire apparatus and A manufactured breathing air that is produced by blending nitrogen and used for fire fighting. oxygen. SUBSTANTIATION: This will make the definition consistent with the SUBSTANTIATION: The current wording is not a definition and definition in NFPA 1911. references should not be part of a definition. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP2) (Log #CP26) 1901-13-(1-7 Generator (Alternator), Portable) : Accept 1901-8-(1-7 Class B Fires) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Delete the definition of “Generator (Alternator), RECOMMENDATION: Adopt the preferred definition from the NFPA Fixed.” Glossary of Terms for the following term: Revise the definition of “Generator (Alternator), Portable” in 1-7 to read as Class B Fires. (preferred) NFPA 1, 2000 ed. follows: Fires in flammable liquids, combustible liquids, petroleum greases, tars, oils Portable Generator. A mechanically driven power source that can be oil-based paints, solvents, lacquers, alcohols, and flammable gases. removed from the vehicle and operated at a location that is remote from SUBSTANTIATION: Adoption of preferred definitions will assist the user the vehicle. The device has an integral distribution panel with overcurrent by providing consistent meaning of defined terms throughout the National protection and receptacle outlets. Fire Codes. Add a definition for power source to read as follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Power Source. A device that produces line voltage electricity. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Add a definition for fixed power source to read as follows: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Fixed Power Source. Any line voltage power source except a portable AFFIRMATIVE: 28 generator. SUBSTANTIATION: The definition of generator (alternator) fixed is ————————————————- being deleted as it is no longer used in the document. The 7 kW is information, not requirement, and is unnecessary to the (Log #CP17) definition of portable generator. Throughout the document an 8 kW divider 1901-9-(1-7 Compressed Air Foam System (CFAS)) : Accept is used for other characteristics. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, The new terms Power Source and Fixed Power Source is used in the line RECOMMENDATION: Move the second sentence to the appendix. voltage chapter and the committee feels a definition would be helpful. SUBSTANTIATION: The second sentence is not part of the definition but COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept explanatory material. As such it belongs in the appendix. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP92) (Log #CP97) 1901-14-(1-7 Line Voltage Circuit, Equipment, or System) : Accept 1901-10-(1-7 Fill Station) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise the definition of “Line Voltage Circuit, RECOMMENDATION: Delete the definition of Fill station. Equipment, or System” to read as follows: Add a definition for SCBA Fill Station to read as follows: An ac or dc electrical circuit, equipment, or system where the voltage to A containment enclosure for re-filling self contained breathing cylinders to ground or from line to line is 30 volts (V) rms (ac) or 42.4 V peak (dc) or guard personnel from fragments due to accidental cylinder rupture. greater, but does not exceed 250 V rms (ac) or peak (dc). SUBSTANTIATION: The definition change better describes the “fill SUBSTANTIATION: As a result of changes to 21-2.1 (see Proposal 1901- station” application and safeguards in compliance to this standard. 186 (Log #CP70), the upper limitation of 250 volts is being removed. Since the introduction of the 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, there has been no COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept reported injuries with the new containment systems and new designs in fill NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 stations are evolving, a major step forward in standards improvement for fire apparatus. 824 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: proposal to use this term. Secondly, it is not always possible to draft 100 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 percent of the capacity of a pump through a single inlet particularly as the size of the pump increases. Note that on larger pumps, Table 14-2.4.1(a) ————————————————- allows multiple suction lines for pumps of 1500 gpm or greater. See also 14-2.4.2(3) which allows the purchaser to specify if single suction line (Log #34) performance is required. 1901-15-(1-7 Master Discharge Outlet (New) ) : Reject Large auxiliary suctions are generally intended to bring a hydrant supply SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates into the pump and often cannot be configured to allow 100 percent of RECOMMENDATION: Add new text to read as follows: capacity from draft. However, if that is an operational requirement, the Master Discharge Outlet. Any fire pump discharge outlet with a fire hose purchaser can specify specific performance for any intake and can measure connection 3.50 in. or larger intended for use with large diameter fire hose, that performance as part of acceptance tests. or any discharge intended to flow a minimum of 50% of the capacity of the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 fire pump from draft @ 150 psi. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: a. When a large diameter discharge outlet is AFFIRMATIVE: 28 specified, the intent of the purchaser is job specific - that of discharging a large volume of water not capable of being delivered by a standard 2.50 in. ————————————————- discharge outlet. b. Section 14-7.3 with Appendix is the only area under 14-7 Pump (Log #71) Discharge Outlets which addresses piping and valves in conjunction with 1901-17-(1-7 Ramp Breakover Angle (New) ) : Reject intended flow rates and said area is specific only to smaller preconnected SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service lines. RECOMMENDATION: Add the following new definition: c. The table in Section 14-7.1 refers to outlet size and flow rate without Ramp Breakover Angle. The angle measured between two (2) lines tangent mention of limitations or cautioning that the design of the installation can tot he front and rear tire static loaded radius, and intersecting at a point on affect performance (as it did with suction piping in Section A-14-2.4.2). the underside of the vehicle that defines the largest ramp over which the d. The use of large diameter hose is becoming common place and there vehicle can roll. exists an infinite number of possible locations and methods to pipe discharge SUBSTANTIATION: The ramp breakover angle is important for a very outlets, some of which may not be capable of delivering “large flows” or may small ramp breakover angle can limit the operations of the apparatus. not be able to deliver large flows with reasonable friction loss(es). COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject e. There does not exist a definition, common to all manufacturers and COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The term is not used in the document. purchasers, of a large diameter or master discharge outlet. Standard 1901 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 does not state what performance is expected of one. (i.e. pumping a certain VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: gpm into a large diameter hose line, supplying an apparatus mounted master AFFIRMATIVE: 28 stream and/or as a certain percentage of a fire pump’s capacity). f. By specifically defining a large or master discharge outlet being capable ————————————————- of flowing a measurable large volume (i.e. in excess of 50% of the pump’s (Log #CP39) capacity): 1901-18-(1-8) : Accept 1) Purchasers have a means to define the performance expected. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, 2) Manufacturers can assure piping designs and installations will be RECOMMENDATION: Revise the text associated with 1-8 to read as appropriate for the intended use. follows: 3) A means will be provided to measure, test and, if required, certify the 1-8 Units and Formulas. In this standard, values for measurement in installation. inch-pound units are followed by an equivalent in metric units. Either set COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject of values can be used but the same set of values (either inch-pound units or COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is rejecting this proposal metric units) shall be used throughout. for 2 reasons. First, definitions are not added to a document unless they SUBSTANTIATION: The committee is including both inch-pound units define terms that are going to be used in the document and there is no and metric units but is cautioning persons not to mix and match units. If proposal to use this term. Secondly, the committee feels that 14-7.1 and its the apparatus is to be built using inch pound units, those units must be used table already address the concern of the submitter. A purchaser can specify throughout. Likewise, if the apparatus is to be built using metric units, those specific performance from any discharge and can measure that performance units must be used throughout. as part of acceptance tests. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #35) (Log #88) 1901-16-(1-7 Master Suction Inlet (New) ) : Reject 1901-19-(Table 2-2.2) : Reject SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates SUBMITTER: Bill McCombs, Alan Saulsbury, Federal Signal Fire Rescue RECOMMENDATION: Add new text to read as follows: Group Master Suction Inlet. Any pump suction inlet with a fire hose connection RECOMMENDATION: Add a line item in Table 2-2.2 for Rescue 3.50 in. or larger intended to supply 100% of the capacity of the fire pump Pumpers. from draft @ 150 psi. SUBSTANTIATION: The justification for adding an additional chapter SUBSTANTIATION: a. When a large or master suction inlet is specified, stems from the increasing percentage of “Rescue Pumpers” being utilized the intent of the purchaser is job specific - that of supplying the fire pump by the fire service, as they adapt their equipment to new and more varied with enough water to pump 100% of the pump capacity. roles. The increased EMS, Rescue, and Haz-mat roles are forcing many b. There exists an infinite number of possible locations and methods to departments to combine these functions into vehicles also serving the pipe large or master suction inlets, some of which may not be capable of traditional pumper role. This is resulting in over weight vehicles when all of delivering sufficient flows to pump 100% of the fire pump capacity from the additional equipment for these functions is added to vehicles designed for draft. normal pumper service. c. There does not exist a definition, common to all manufacturers and An additional chapter is needed to give guidance on recommended purchasers, of a large or master suction inlet. Standard 1901 does not state equipment for “Rescue Pumpers” as well as define a miscellaneous what performance is expected of one. equipment allowance that will more accurately define the intended service d. Standard 1901 is very specific in detailing suction hose sizes, numbers of function of the vehicle. This should more clearly communicate the fire suction lines, lift, etc., but does not address the area of piping, friction loss departments intentions to a vehicle manufacturer during a bid request and and the like in the physical area between the point of suction hose attachment reduce the number of surprises when the vehicle is delivered and loaded with and the fire pump, which in the case of “auxiliary” large or master suction equipment. inlets could drastically affect performance. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject e. By specifically defining a master suction inlet as being capable of COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See committee meeting action on public delivering 100% of the fire pump capacity: proposal 1901-43 (Log #43) which adds a requirement for additional weight 1) Purchasers have a means to define the performance expected. when larger cubic footage of compartmentation is provided. The committee 2) Manufacturers can assure piping designs and installations will be does not want to establish a pumper-rescue type of fire apparatus but does appropriate for the intended use. feel the changes made to provide for additional weight should solve the 3) A means will be provided to measure, test and, if required, certify the problem of overweight vehicles. installation. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is rejecting this proposal AFFIRMATIVE: 28 for 2 reasons. First, definitions are not added to a document unless they define terms that are going to be used in the document and there is no ————————————————- 825 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #108) piping and equipment have been installed on the apparatus. The tests shall 1901-20-(2-4) : Accept in Principle be conducted at the manufacturer’s approved facility and certified by the SUBMITTER: Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. contractor. The certification shall include at least the pumping test (see 14- RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follow: If applicable, all vehicles 13.2), the pressure control system test (see 14-13.4), the priming device tests shall meet the requirements contained in the CMVSS, and the applicable (see 14-13.5), and the vacuum test (see 14-13.6). If the apparatus is equipped Provincial requirements. with a water tank, the water tank to pump flow test (see 14-13.7) shall be SUBSTANTIATION: The ULC Harmonization/Adoption Task Group included. The test results shall be certified by the apparatus manufacturer. recommends including a reference to the CMVSS in the NFPA Standard. Revise 18-24 to read as follows: This wording was adopted from ULC S515-M88 3.1.1.1. 18-24 Certification Tests. The completed apparatus with the aerial device COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle shall be tested to the criteria defined in this section at the manufacturer’s Revise 2-4 (4.6 in the draft) to read as follows: approved facility and the test results certified by an independent third party The apparatus shall comply with all applicable federal and state or independent testing certification organization approved by the purchaser. provincial motor vehicle laws and regulations. SUBSTANTIATION: Currently the standard has no requirements that an COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels that including the independent testing organization must meet. Likewise the purchaser has word “Provincial” accomplishes what the submitter is requesting. no requirements to evaluate the expectations of the manufacturer’s testing NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 capability. Adding the 2 sections define some basic requirements that an VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: independent testing organization and the manufacturer must meet. This AFFIRMATIVE: 28 should lead to more consistent quality in testing. The changes to 11-14.1, 14-13.1.1, 14-13.1.2 and 18-24 are to clean up ————————————————- language related to testing and certification of results. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #CP47) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-21-(2-5 and 2-6 (New) ) : Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Add two new section after current section 2-4 (after section 4.6 in the draft) to read as follows: ————————————————- 2-5 Third Party Certification of Test Results. Where this standard requires the results of tests to be certified by a independent third party certification (Log #CP46) organization, that organization shall meet the requirements of this section. 1901-22-(2-6.2) : Accept 2-5.1 All certification shall be performed by a certification organization SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, that is accredited for testing systems on fire apparatus in accordance with RECOMMENDATION: Revise 2-6.2 (4.10.2 in the draft) to read as ANSI Z34.1, Standard for Third-Party Certification Programs for Products, follows: Processes, and Services. 2-6.2* All required signs, plates, and labels shall be permanent in nature, 2-5.2 The certification organization shall not be owned or controlled by securely attached, and shall meet the requirements of Section 2-5.3 and UL manufacturers or vendors of the product that is being tested. 969, Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems. 2-5.3 The certification organization shall be primarily engaged in Add an appendix item to 2-6.2 to read as follows: certification work and shall not have a monetary interest in the product’s A-2-6.2 All required signs, plates, and labels should be highly visible and ultimate profitability. placed on the vehicle where they are not subject to wear and tear damage. 2-5.4 The certification organization shall witness all tests and shall refuse to Add a new 2-6.2.1 and 2-6.2.2 to read as follows: certify any test results for a system if all components of that system requiring 2-6.2.1 The signs, plates and labels shall have resistance to damage from testing do not pass the testing required by this standard. temperatures between -30°F and 160°F (-35°C and 71°C) and exposure to oil, 2-5.5 There shall be no conditional, temporary, or partial certification of fuel, water, hydraulic fluids, or other fluids used on the apparatus. test results. 2-6.2.2 The exterior mounted labels relating to safety or critical operational 2-5.6 Appropriate forms or data sheets shall be provided and used during the instructions shall be reflective or lighted as required by 2-6.1 to assure testing. operator attention. 2-5.7 Programs shall be in place for training, proficiency testing, and SUBSTANTIATION: The reference to UL 969 has been incorporated as performance verification of any staff involved with certification. it covers the testing of marking and labeling systems to ensure they perform 2-5.8 The certification organization’s operating procedures shall provide a over time. The new wording for lighting and reflective type labels is addition mechanism for the manufacturer to appeal decisions. The procedures shall appendix level safety awareness. include provisions for the presentation of information from representatives of COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept both sides of a controversy to a designated appeals panel. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 2-6 Manufacturer Certification of Test Results. Where this standard requires VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: the results of tests or the performance of a component to be certified by the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 manufacturer, the manufacturer shall meet the requirements of this section. 2-6.1 A representative of the manufacturer shall witness all tests and shall ————————————————- refuse to certify any test results for a system if all components of that system requiring testing do not pass the testing required by this standard. (Log #CP45) 2-6.2 There shall be no conditional, temporary, or partial certification of 1901-23-(2-7) : Accept test results. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, 2-6.3 The manufacturer shall have the facilities and equipment necessary to RECOMMENDATION: Revise 2-7 (renumbered as 4-11 in the draft) to conduct the required testing, a program for the calibration of all instruments, read as follows: and procedures to ensure the proper control of all testing. 2-7 Component Protection. 2-6.4 Appropriate forms or data sheets shall be provided and used during the 2-7.1* Hydraulic hose lines, air system tubing, control cables, and electrical testing. harnesses shall be mechanically attached to the frame or body structure of 2-6.5 Programs shall be in place for training, proficiency testing, and the apparatus. This type of equipment shall be furnished with protective performance verification of any staff involved with certification. looms, grommets, or other devices at each point where they pass through 2-6.6 An official of the company that manufactures or installs the product body panels or structural members or wherever they lay against a sharp shall designate in writing who is qualified to witness tests and certify results. metal edge. Revise 11-14.1 to read as follows: 2-7.2 A through-the-frame connector shall be permitted to be used in place 11-14.1* The apparatus low-voltage electrical system shall be tested as of metal protective looms or grommets. required by this section and the test results and certified by the apparatus Add an appendix to 2-7.1 to read as follows: manufacturer. The certification shall be delivered to the purchaser with the A-2-7.1 The attachment of electric, air, hydraulic and other control lines and apparatus. hoses should be with removable mechanically attached fastening devices. Revise 14-13.1.1 to read as follows: The attachment of such equipment with adhesive or glue on clamps or clips 14-13.1.1 If the fire pump has a rated capacity of 750 gpm (2850 L/min) has been found to be inadequate for long term performance on fire apparatus. or greater, the pump shall be tested after the pump and all its associated The use of plastic ties to bundle wire harness and hoses are permissible, but piping and equipment have been installed on the apparatus. The tests shall should not be used to attach such items to a cab, body, frame, or other major be conducted at the manufacturer’s approved facility and certified by an structure. independent testing organization that is approved by the purchaser. The Also revise 11-2.5 to read as follows: certification shall include at least the pumping test (see 14-13.2), the 11-2.5 Wiring shall be mechanically attached to the frame or body structure pumping engine overload test (see 14-13.3), the pressure control system test to prevent damage caused by chafing or ice buildup, and protected against (see 14-13.4), the priming device tests (see 14-13.5), and the vacuum test heat, liquid contaminants, or other environmental factors (see 14-13.6). If the apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the water tank SUBSTANTIATION: The use of plastic clips and adhesive pad type to pump flow test (see 14-13.7) shall be included. The test results shall be electrical holders have proved to be unreliable attachment devices. This certified by an independent third party certification organization. wording does not eliminate plastic zip-ties for bundling wire harness or hose Revise 14-13.1.2 to read as follows: assemblies. The word “restrained” should be replaced to reflect wording in 14-13.1.2* If the fire pump has a rated capacity of less than 750 gpm (2850 other sections. Note section 21-9.3 for line voltage wiring attachment. L/min), the pump shall be tested after the pump and all its associated 826 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (13) Limitations of use NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (14) Inspection procedures VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (15) Recommended maintenance procedures AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (16) Troubleshooting guide (17) Apparatus body, chassis, and other component manufacturer’s ————————————————- warranties (18) Special data required by this standard (Log #CP44) (19) Copies of completed manufacturer testing and certifications, third party 1901-24-(2-8.3) : Accept testing and certifications, and other component manufacturer certifications SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, (20) A material safety data sheet (MSDS) shall be provided for any fluid that RECOMMENDATION:Revise 2-8.3 (4.12.2.3 in the draft) to read as is specified for use on the apparatus follows: SUBSTANTIATION:The revised requirement is defining additional 2-8.3 Load Distribution. information that the apparatus manufacturer needs to provide on all major 2-8.3.1* Using the information supplied by the purchaser, the apparatus components, including their warranty, service, and parts data information. manufacturer shall calculate the load distribution for the apparatus. This is important so the purchaser will be able to maintain the apparatus and 2-8.3.2 The manufacturer shall engineer the vehicle to comply with the components properly. Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) , the overall G.V.W.R. and the chassis COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept manufacturer’s load balance guidelines. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 2-8.3.3* The purchaser shall locate the equipment on the apparatus to VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: assure the difference in weight, from side to side on the end of each axle AFFIRMATIVE: 28 shall not exceed 7 percent or the limit allowed by the axle or component manufacturer. ————————————————- Add appendix material as follows: A-2-8.3.1 It is critical that the purchaser provide the manufacturer the (Log #23) equipment inventory and mounting locations for equipment on the apparatus. 1901-26-(2-14) : Reject This should include existing equipment and estimated future equipment SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates to be carried. The projections of total equipment payload and mounting RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: locations are essential for proper engineering of a new fire apparatus. It (7) Chassis weight distribution in pounds with water and manufacturer is the responsibility of the purchaser to properly load the vehicle and place mounted equipment (front and rear) (front, rear and each side). equipment to comply to GVWR, front to rear weight distribution, and right SUBSTANTIATION: The Standard is explicit in specifying weight to left load balance of this standard. distribution front to rear and side to side, however, testing is only required A-2-8.3.3 The projections of total equipment payload and mounting for the front to rear weight loading. Improper weight distribution can locations are essential for proper engineering of a new fire apparatus. directly affect vehicle stability and performance characteristics. By SUBSTANTIATION: The present wording could mean that the nature of loading equipment on a vehicle after delivery and acceptance, a manufacturer could be responsible for the uneven loading of an apparatus Purchaser can alter the handling characteristics and safe operation of a new after delivery of the apparatus. Positioning of equipment is critical on high vehicle. Verifying conformity to the weight distribution requirement at the cubic foot apparatus with full depth compartments. The change makes the time of delivery will: (1) insure a vehicle is compliant with the Standard purchaser responsible for load placement and limitations thereof based on the upon delivery, (2) assist the Purchaser in safe equipment load distribution information the purchaser provided to the manufacturer. after delivery and (3) establish a basis to help alleviate and resolve COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept possible problems in the future in regard to weight distribution, handling NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 characteristics and warranty claims. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels this will add cost with limited benefit. The weight is important after the apparatus is inservice. ————————————————- NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (Log #CP32) AFFIRMATIVE: 28 1901-25-(2-11.3(2)) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, ————————————————- RECOMMENDATION: Revise the wording of 2-11.3 (4.19.2 in the draft) to read as follows: (Log #24) 2-11.3 Operations and Service Documentation. 1901-27-(2-14) : Reject 2-11.3.1 The contractor shall supply, at time of delivery, at least two sets SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates of complete operation and service documentation covering the completed RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: apparatus as delivered and accepted. (19) (i) Weight documents from a certified scale - showing actual loading 2-11.3.2 The documentation shall address at least the inspection, on the front axle, rear axle(s), left side, right side, and overall vehicle (with maintenance, and operations of the vehicle and all major components water tank full but without personnel, equipment, and hose) - shall be thereof. supplied with the completed vehicle to determine compliance with Section 2-11.3.3 The contractor shall also provide documentation of the following 10-1 and Section 2-8. items for the entire apparatus and each major operating system or major SUBSTANTIATION: The Standard is explicit in specifying weight component of the apparatus. distribution front to rear and side to side, however, certification is only (1) Manufacturer’s name and address required for the front to rear weight loading. Improper weight distribution (2) Country of manufacture can directly affect vehicle stability and performance characteristics. By (3) Source for service and technical information nature of loading equipment on a vehicle after delivery and acceptance, a (4) Parts replacement information Purchaser can alter the handling characteristics and safe operation of a new (5) Descriptions, specifications, and ratings of the chassis, pump (if vehicle. Certifying conformity to the weight distribution requirement at the applicable), and aerial device (if applicable) time of delivery will: (1) insure a vehicle is compliant with the Standard (6) Wiring diagrams for low voltage and line voltage systems to include the upon delivery, (2) assist the Purchaser in safe equipment load distribution following information: after delivery and (3) establish a basis to help alleviate and resolve a) Pictorial representations of circuit logic for all electrical components and possible problems in the future in regard to weight distribution, handling wiring characteristics and warranty claims. b) Circuit identification COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject c) Connector pin identification COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels this will add cost with d) Zone location of electrical components limited benefit. The weight is important after the apparatus is inservice. e) Safety interlocks NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 f) Alternator -battery power distribution circuits VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: g) equivalent circuit logic implemented in multiplexing systems AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (7) Lubrication charts (8) Operating instructions for the chassis, any major components such as a ————————————————- pump or aerial device, and any auxiliary systems (9) Precautions related to multiple configurations of aerial devices, if (Log #CP43) applicable 1901-28-(2-14 (New) ) : Accept (10) Instructions regarding the frequency and procedure for recommended SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, maintenance RECOMMENDATION: Add a new section before the existing 2-14 to (11) Overall apparatus operating instructions read as follows (This will be 4.18 in the draft): (12) Safety considerations Documentation. Any documentation provided with the apparatus shall be permitted to be in printed or electronic format, audio-visual format, or a combination thereof. 827 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Add an appendix to read as follows: Colorado, did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently It is important for the purchaser and contractor to agree on the format available wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with that the documentation is to be delivered in. It is also important that the a 6-inch pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the purchaser consider the long term ramifications of the changing media SAE J348 chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With technology if electronic format is used for delivery of the documentation. no chock tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, Software and hardware will need to be maintained over the years to utilize especially with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock electronic documentation. along without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. Add a definition of documentation to read as follows: The requirement for 2 extra wheel chocks if the apparatus is equipped with Documentation. Any data or information supplied by the manufacturer or an aerial device is being deleted as these were originally furnished to assist contractor relative to the apparatus, including information on its operation, with the stability during aerial operations. Changes to stabilizer systems service and maintenance. make these unnecessary in many cases. If the manufacturer feels that extra SUBSTANTIATION: The new wording will allow documentation to wheel chocks are necessary when an aerial device is used, they should be on video tape, CD ROM, and other electronic means which some fire be furnished with the apparatus and their use discussed in the operating departments find is more useful for documentation of the apparatus instruction. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #112) (Log #CP41) 1901-32-(3-8.2, 4-7.2, 6-8.1, 7-8.2) : Reject 1901-29-(2-14(i) (New) ) : Accept SUBMITTER: Charles F. Studley, Cross & Studley, Inc. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follows: RECOMMENDATION: After (h) add the following wording (this is Manual pierce and pull forcible entry tool. 4.19.1(i) in the draft): SUBSTANTIATION: Response time is critical to the saving of lives (i) If the apparatus has a fixed line voltage power source, the certification of and property. From placing bunker gear, so that the firefighter only has to the test for the fixed power source. step into his boots and pull up his suspenders, back up to quick release air SUBSTANTIATION: Adoption of the changes proposed to Chapter 21 will pack, change traffic light patterns from the cab of the truck, first truck in require third party testing of fixed line voltage power sources and this will does not spend time catching a hydrant, number one nozzle man advances alert purchasers to the fact they need to get this documentation. with preconnect only to find the door locked: At this point all our careful COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept planning and hundreds of training hours, and our $200,000 to $350,000 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 fully equipped trucks, Fail! The fire service does not have a comprehensive VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: forcible entry training program nor until now has there been a manual pierce AFFIRMATIVE: 28 and pull forcible entry tool specifically to defeat locked doors. The fastest way to breach a locked door is to apply a concentrated force to the door so as ————————————————- to move the door in the direction it is intended to open. In swinging doors require using a maul or ram. Out swinging doors require using a manual (Log #CP42) pierce & pull entry tool. 1901-30-(2-14(l)) : Accept Over the last three years a manual pierce & pull entry tool has proven itself SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, by defeating locked doors encountered by U.S. Customs, DEA, various RECOMMENDATION: Add a new item to the list to read as follows (this SWAT and Narcotics Teams in the US and Europe. This method of forcible is 4.19.1(j) in the draft): entry is being used in both federal and state training for fire service and law (l) If the apparatus is equipped with an air system, test results of the air enforcement. quality, the SCBA fill station, and the air system installation (see chapter In my personal career as a Firefighter-Paramedic, I would have saved more 23). lives with this type of entry tool then with the defibrillator. SUBSTANTIATION: Additional certification requirements have I submit to you in this day and age, with all the resources available to us, been added in chapter 23 and they need to be added here to ensure they that it is absurd that a locked door breaks the chain of efficiency and we are documentation is delivered with the apparatus. reduced to a “work around.” In some cases the “work around” will exceed COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept the elapsed time that it has taken to arrive on scene. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 In summation, pierce and pull forcible entry tools of this type have opened VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 90% of the doors in less than five (5) seconds, and it is the first entry tool AFFIRMATIVE: 28 that can effectively be used in training. A pierce and pull forcible entry tool belongs on all Quints, Aerials, ————————————————- Pumpers & First Attack vehicles. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject (Log #75) COMMITTEE STATEMENT: There are a number of generic tools 1901-31-(3-8.2) : Accept in Principle required to be carried on fire apparatus that can be used for forcible SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service entry. The recommendation is for the addition of a tool that is of a very RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last paragraph with: specific design and available from a single source. The committee cannot Two wheel chocks, mounted in a readily accessible location. With the recommend single source products. apparatus on hard surface (pavement or concrete), a wheel chock shall NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 be placed against the tire of the most heaviest loaded axle and the wheel VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: chock shall hold the fully load apparatus on a 10% grade. The apparatus AFFIRMATIVE: 28 transmission shall be in neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and all brakes released. The ————————————————- apparatus tire shall not climb over, damage, or slide the chock(s). SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance (Log #81) requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent 1901-33-(3-8.2.1) : Reject grade is a reasonable performance requirement. SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle RECOMMENDATION: Replace section 3-8.2.1 with the following: Revise the requirement for wheel chocks in 3-8.2 (5.8.3 in the draft) to read If the pumper is equipped with an aerial device, two additional wheel as follows: chocks shall be provided, mounted in readily accessible locations. Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. grade is a reasonable performance requirement. Delete 3-8.2.1. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The current wording about wheel chocks COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See public Proposal 1901-31 (Log #75) has proved to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 which deletes this paragraph. Standard for Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 fire service. It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: carry them, or if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has AFFIRMATIVE: 28 been a danger for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE standard is a theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without ————————————————- any reference to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake performance, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations instead of performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel chocks. Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, 828 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #85) SUBSTANTIATION: The justification for adding an additional chapter 1901-34-(Chapter 4) : Reject stems from the increasing percentage of “Rescue Pumpers” being utilized SUBMITTER: Bill McCombs, Alan Saulsbury, Federal Signal Fire Rescue by the fire service, as they adapt their equipment to new and more varied Group roles. The increased EMS, Rescue, and Haz-mat roles are forcing many RECOMMENDATION: Create new - Chapter 4 - Rescue Pumper Fire departments to combine these functions into vehicles also serving the Apparatus Requirements traditional pumper role. This is resulting in over weight vehicles when all of 4-1 General. If the apparatus is to function as a rescue pumper, it shall the additional equipment for these functions is added to vehicles designed for meet the requirements of this chapter. normal pumper service. 4-2 Fire Pump - Same words as 3-2 An additional chapter is needed to give guidance on recommended 4-3 Aerial Device equipment for “Rescue Pumpers” as well as define a miscellaneous 4-3.1 If the rescue pumper fire apparatus is equipped with an aerial device, equipment allowance that will more accurately define the intended service the aerial device shall meet the requirements of Chapter 18. function of the vehicle. This should more clearly communicate the fire 4-3.2 Same words as 3-3.2 departments intentions to a vehicle manufacturer during a bid request and 4-3.3 Same words as 3-3.3 reduce the number of surprises when the vehicle is delivered and loaded with 4-4 Water Tank. Same words as 3-4. equipment. 4-5 Equipment Storage A minimum of 160 cu. ft. of enclosed weather- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject resistant compartmentation that meets the requirements of Chapter 13 shall COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See committee meeting action on public be provided for storage of equipment. Proposal 1901-43 (Log #43) which adds a requirement for additional weight 4-6 Hose Storage. Same words as 3-6. when larger cubic footage of compartmentation is provided. The committee 4-7 Equipment supplied by the Contractor. Same words as 3-7 does not want to establish a rescue-pumper type of fire apparatus but does 4-7.1 Ground Ladders. Same words as 3-7.1 feel the changes made to provide for additional weight should solve the 4-7.2 Suction hose. Same words as 3-7.2 problem of overweight vehicles. 4.7.2.1 Same as 3-7.2.1 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 4-7.2.2 Same as 3-7.2.2 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 4-8 Minor Equipment. Same words as 3-8 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 4-8.1 Fire Hose and Nozzles. Same as 3-8.1 4-8.2 Miscellaneous Equipment Same as 3-8.2 with the following ————————————————- additions: 535# (Log #76) Two 3-ft to 4-ft (1-m to 1.2m) plaster hooks with D-handles mounted in 1901-35-(4-7.2) : Accept in Principle brackets fastened to the apparatus. 20# SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service Two crowbars mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 38# RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last paragraph with: Two claw tools mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. 22# Two wheel chocks, mounted in a readily accessible location. With the Two 12-lb (5.4 kg) sledgehammers mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus on hard surface (pavement or concrete), a wheel chock shall apparatus. 30# be placed against the tire of the most heaviest loaded axle and the wheel Two scoop shovels mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. 30# chock shell hold the fully load apparatus on a 10% grade. The apparatus Two brooms mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. 5# transmission shall be in neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus One pair of bolt cutters, 24 in (610 mm) minimum, mounted in brackets is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and all brakes released. The fastened to the apparatus. 14# apparatus tire shall not climb over, damage, or slide the chock(s). Two class one life safety harnesses meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983 SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and Systems Components. 8# requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent One 150-ft (46m) one-person life safety rope meeting the requirements grade is a reasonable performance requirement. of NFPA 1983 Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and Systems COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle Components. 8# Revise the requirement for wheel chocks in 4-7.2 (6.7.3 in the draft) read as One 150-ft (46 m) two-person Life safety rope meeting the requirements follows: of NFPA 1983 Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and Systems Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each Components. 12# designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the Two 150-ft (46m) utility ropes having a breaking strength of at least 5,000 transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. lb. (2268 kg.) 24# COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The current wording about wheel chocks One tool box to include the following: 12# has proved to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 One hacksaw with three blades 1.5# Standard for Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the One keyhole saw 1.5# fire service. It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not One 12-in (305 mm) pipe wrench 3.5# carry them, or if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has One 24-in (610 mm) pipe wrench 5.5# been a danger for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE One ballpeen hammer 2.5# standard is a theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without One pair of tin snips 1.5# any reference to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake One pair of pliers 1# performance, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations One pair of lineman’s pliers 0.6# instead of performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel Assorted types and sizes of screw drivers 2# chocks. Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, Assorted adjustable wrenches 3# Colorado, did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently Assorted combination wrenches 2# available wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with Total tool box #37 a 6-inch pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the Three 2-wire to 3-wire adapters 1# SAE J348 chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With Two 10-ton (9072-kg) hydraulic jacks mounted in brackets fastened to the no chock tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, apparatus 50# especially with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock Two 20-ton (18,144-kg) hydraulic jacks mounted in brackets fastened to the along without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. apparatus 70# NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 One roll 15-lb (6.8-kg) tar paper or plastic sheeting at least 8-mil thick 18# VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Two pairs of safety goggles 2# AFFIRMATIVE: 28 One power saw (chain or heavy duty rotary type) 30# One rescue-type tool with extension rams and assorted lengths of chain or ————————————————- one minimum 4-ton (3629-kg) hydraulic porta-power kit. Rescue tool 43#, Spreader 52#, Cutter 31#, Power unit 80#, Ram short 18#, Ram long 36#, (Log #77) Mounting Brackets 25# - total 285# 1901-36-(5-7.2.1) : Accept in Principle One set of air bags 24x24-38#, 36X36-88#, 15x15-12#, Brackets-5# - total SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service 146# RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last paragraph with: Assorted rolls of tape (duct tape, electrical tape, cellophane tape, etc.) 5# Two wheel chocks, mounted in a readily accessible location. With the Two pairs of lineman’s gloves with leather glove protectors 2# apparatus on hard surface (pavement or concrete), a wheel chock shall Two blankets 3# be placed against the tire of the most heaviest loaded axle and the wheel 500-ft (150-m) of plastic “emergency scene” or equivalent crowd control chock shell hold the fully load apparatus on a 10% grade. The apparatus tape 2# transmission shall be in neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus Forty-eight 30-minute road flares 35# is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and all brakes released. The Twelve road hazard traffic control devices 12# apparatus tire shall not climb over, damage, or slide the chock(s). One 3000 watt (minimum) portable or fixed generator, and slide out tray. SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance 185# requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent Two 500 watt portable lights 12# grade is a reasonable performance requirement. Two cable reels with a minimum 200-ft (61-m) of power cable on each with COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle connectors that are compatible with generator and lights 120# Revise the requirement for wheel chocks in 5-7.2.1 (7.7.3.1 in the draft) read Weight of additional recommended equipment 1226# as follows: 829 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. grade is a reasonable performance requirement. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The current wording about wheel chocks COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle has proved to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 Revise the requirement for wheel chocks in 7-8.2 (9.8.3 in the draft) to read Standard for Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the as follows: fire service. It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each carry them, or if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the been a danger for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. standard is a theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The current wording about wheel chocks any reference to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake has proved to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 performance, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations Standard for Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the instead of performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel fire service. It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not chocks. Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, carry them, or if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has Colorado, did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently been a danger for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE available wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with standard is a theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without a 6-inch pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the any reference to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake SAE J348 chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With performance, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations no chock tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, instead of performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel especially with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock chocks. Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, along without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. Colorado, did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 available wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: a 6-inch pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SAE J348 chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With no chock tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, ————————————————- especially with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock (Log #79) along without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. 1901-37-(6-8.1) : Accept in Principle The requirement for 4 wheel chocks because the apparatus is equipped with SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service an aerial device is being changed as these were originally furnished to assist RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last paragraph with: with the stability during aerial operations. Changes to stabilizer systems Four wheel chocks, mounted in a readily accessible location. With the make these unnecessary in many cases. If the manufacturer feels that extra apparatus on hard surface (pavement or concrete), a wheel chock shall wheel chocks are necessary when an aerial device is used, they should be placed against the tire of the most heaviest loaded axle and the wheel be furnished with the apparatus and their use discussed in the operating chock shell hold the fully load apparatus on a 10% grade. The apparatus instruction. transmission shall be in neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and all brakes released. The VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: apparatus tire shall not climb over, damage, or slide the chock. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent ————————————————- grade is a reasonable performance requirement. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle (Log #CP40) Revise the requirement for wheel chocks in 6-8.1 (8.8.2 in the draft) to read 1901-39-(8-5) : Accept as follows: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each RECOMMENDATION:Revise the requirement in 8-5 (10.5.2 in the draft) designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the to read as follows: transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The current wording about wheel chocks designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the has proved to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. Standard for Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the SUBSTANTIATION: The current wording about wheel chocks has proved fire service. It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 Standard for carry them, or if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the fire service. been a danger for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not carry them, or standard is a theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has been a danger any reference to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE standard is a performance, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without any reference instead of performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake performance, chocks. Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations instead of Colorado, did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel chocks. available wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, Colorado, a 6-inch pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently available SAE J348 chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with a 6-inch no chock tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the SAE J348 especially with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With no chock along without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, especially The requirement for a total of 4 wheel chocks because the apparatus is with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock along equipped with an aerial device is being deleted as these were originally without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. furnished to assist with the stability during aerial operations. Changes COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept to stabilizer systems make these unnecessary in many cases. If the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 manufacturer feels that extra wheel chocks are necessary when an aerial VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: device is used, they should be furnished with the apparatus and their use AFFIRMATIVE: 28 discussed in the operating instruction. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ————————————————- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #78) 1901-40-(9-9.2) : Accept in Principle ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last paragraph with: (Log #80) Two wheel chocks, mounted in a readily accessible location. With the 1901-38-(7-8.2) : Accept in Principle apparatus on hard surface (pavement or concrete), a wheel chock shall SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service be placed against the tire of the most heaviest loaded axle and the wheel RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last paragraph with: chock shell hold the fully load apparatus on a 10% grade. The apparatus Four wheel chocks, mounted in a readily accessible location. With the transmission shall be in neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus apparatus on hard surface (pavement or concrete), a wheel chock shall is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and all brakes released. The be placed against the tire of the most heaviest loaded axle and the wheel apparatus tire shall not climb over, damage, or slide the chock(s). chock shell hold the fully load apparatus on a 10% grade. The apparatus SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance transmission shall be in neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and all brakes released. The grade is a reasonable performance requirement. apparatus tire shall not climb over, damage, or slide the chock. 830 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle (Log #43) Revise the requirement for wheel chocks in 9-9.2 (11.9.3) in the draft to 1901-43-(10-1) : Accept in Principle read as follows: SUBMITTER: Thomas A. Stalnaker, Goshen Fire Company Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each RECOMMENDATION: Revise the text of 10-1 to read as follows: designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the 10-1* Carrying Capacity. The GAWR and the GCWR or GVWR of the transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. chassis shall be adequate to carry the weight of the unequipped apparatus, Delete 9-9.2.1. the fully loaded water and other tanks, the specified hose load, unequipped COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The current wording about wheel chocks personnel weight, ground ladders, permanently mounted equipment such as has proved to be unsatisfactory. The reference to SAE standard J348 generators, mounted reels, air systems, and other permanent installations, Standard for Wheel Chocks has required a wheel chock no satisfactory to the and a miscellaneous equipment allowance of 15 pounds per ft3 (240 Kg fire service. It is so large and unwieldy that many companies choose to not per m3) of space in enclosed compartments and open bins available for carry them, or if they are carried they are not used. The folding version has miscellaneous equipment. Any space occupied by permanently mounted been a danger for injured fingers and has not been well accepted. The SAE equipment shall not be included in this calculation. as defined in table 10-1. standard is a theoretical geometric analysis of part of the problem, without Delete table 10-1. any reference to actual performance. It uses the automobile parking brake Change the reference in A-10-1 paragraph 3 to refer to the allowance performance, an 80,000 pound GVW, and strictly geometric considerations described in Section 10-1 instead of the allowance shown in table 10-1. instead of performance in defining the parameters for designing the wheel SUBSTANTIATION: The minimum required equipment in many chocks. Brad Kobielusz of the Poudre Fire Authority in Fort Collins, cased does not weigh nearly as much as the weight allowance. Some Colorado, did extensive research and testing of a wide variety of currently apparatus, such as quints, may not have available weight capacity, or space available wheel chocks. The field tests were performed on a 16% slope with for compartment to hold the Table 10-1 weight allowance. Some large a 6-inch pre-roll before hitting the wheel chock. His tests found that the apparatus, especially ladders and large rescue pieces have space for, and SAE J348 chocks were no more effective than other, smaller, chocks. With after delivery will carry, much greater loads than the Table 10-1 allowance. no chock tested did the wheel climb over the chock. The common failure, COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle especially with the SAE J348 type chock, was for the tire to push the chock Revise 10-1 (12.1 in the draft) to read as follows: along without stopping the truck. This issue is not addressed in SAE J348. 10-1* Carrying Capacity. The GAWR and the GCWR or GVWR of the The requirement for 2 extra wheel chocks if the apparatus is equipped with chassis shall be adequate to carry the weight of the unequipped apparatus, an aerial device is being deleted as these were originally furnished to assist the fully loaded water and other tanks, the specified hose load, unequipped with the stability during aerial operations. Changes to stabilizer systems personnel weight, ground ladders, and miscellaneous equipment allowance make these unnecessary in many cases. If the manufacturer feels that extra as defined in Table 10-1. If the purchaser provides a list of equipment to be wheel chocks are necessary when an aerial device is used, they should carried with weights, or a specified miscellaneous equipment allowance, be furnished with the apparatus and their use discussed in the operating and that value exceeds the minimum specified in table 10-1, then this value instruction. shall be used for the miscellaneous equipment allowance. Compartment NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 space for pumpers is calculated based on total enclosed compartment inside VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: dimensions. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Revise A-10-1 (A.12.1 in the draft) to read as follows: A-10-1 The carrying capacity of a vehicle is one of the least understood ————————————————- features of design and one of the most important. All vehicles are designed for a maximum GVWR or maximum total weight, which should not be (Log #82) exceeded by the apparatus manufacturer or by the purchaser after the vehicle 1901-41-(9-9.2.1) : Reject has been placed in service. For tractor-drawn vehicles, the in-service weight SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service of the apparatus should not exceed the GCWR. There are many factors that RECOMMENDATION: Replace section 9-9.2.1 with the following: make up the rated GVWR, including the design of the springs or suspension If the mobile foam apparatus is equipped with an aerial device, two system, the rated axle capacity, the rated tire and wheel loading, and the additional wheel chocks shall be provided, mounted in readily accessible distribution of the weight between the front and rear wheels. locations. SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance Water Tank. One of the most critical factors is the size of the water tank. requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent Water weights approximately 8.3 lb/gal (1 kg/L). A value of 10 lb/gal (1.2 grade is a reasonable performance requirement. kg/L) can be used when estimating the weight of the tank and its water, COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject making a 500-gal (19002000-L) tank and its water about 2.5 tons (2268 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See public Proposal 1901-40 (Log #78) kg2,400 kg). which deletes this paragraph. Miscellaneous Equipment. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 If the finished apparatus is not to be overloaded, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: the purchaser should provide the contractor with the weight of equipment to AFFIRMATIVE: 28 be carried if it is in excess of the allowance shown in Table 10-1. Large Compartment Capacity. The manufacturer is only obligated by the ————————————————- standard to provide a miscellaneous equipment allowance in compliance with the minimum allowance listed in table 10-1. Purchasers who specify (Log #1) vehicles with large compartment capacity should work closely with the 1901-42-(10-1) : Reject vehicle manufacturer to ensure that the GVWR is sufficient to carry the NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-37(Log #16) which was intended equipment. A vehicle with average compartment loading will held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-217. have a miscellaneous equipment weight of about 8 lb/ft3 (125 kg/m3) of SUBMITTER: John J. Chadwick, Jr., American LaFrance Corp. compartment space available for miscellaneous equipment. A very lightly RECOMMENDATION: Add text to read as follows: loaded vehicle may have as little as 4 lb/ft3 (65 kg/m3). A heavily loaded The vehicle cab shall meet the requirements of United Nation Agreement, vehicle can reach 12 lb/ft3 (200 kg/m3). This volume does not include space Addendum 28, Revision 1: Regulation No. 29, March 15, 1974, Uniform occupied by generators, reels, air systems, ladders, hose, etc. which are not Provisions Concerning the Approval of Vehicles with Regard to the in the miscellaneous equipment allowance. Total equipment weight varies Protection of the Occupants of the Cab of a Commercial Vehicle significantly depending on the density of the equipment and how tightly the Note: Supporting material available upon request at NFPA headquarters. fire department chooses to pack it. SUBSTANTIATION: Use of this standard will establish a recognized, international standard for specifying the structural integrity of the vehicle Overloading. Overloading of the vehicle by the manufacturer through design cab with regard to the safety and protection of the occupants. This or by the purchaser adding a great deal of equipment after the vehicle is in Regulation is an established UN standard for vehicles and provides for service will materially reduce the life of the vehicle and will undoubtedly reasonable qualitative requirements which allow for the design, testing and result in increased maintenance costs, particularly with respect to the certification of vehicle cabs. The current NFPA standards do not provide for transmissions, clutches, and brakes. Overloading can also seriously affect a definitive standard for cab structural integrity and safety. handling characteristics, making steering and braking particularly difficult. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is a minimum standard and the purchaser can specify additional testing or certification if they desire. The data on fire fighter fatalities shows that most often when fire fighters are killed in apparatus accidents and rollovers, they are thrown from the cab or thrown around in the cab because they are not properly seated and belted, not that the disintegration of the cab is causing crushing fatal injuries . NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————-

831 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Add an appendix to the definition of miscellaneous equipment allowance to Table 10-1 Miscellaneous Equipment Allowance read as follows: Apparatus Chassis Equipment Miscellaneous equipment allowance does not include the weight of fixed Type GVWR Allowance generators, hose reels, cord reels, breathing air systems or other major Apparatus equipment or components specified by the purchaser to be permanently Size mounted as received from the apparatus manufacturer, nor does it include the weight of suction hose, fire hose, ground ladders, or personnel specified by this standard. Pumper fire All COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Special service apparatus such as rescue apparatus Less than 250 cu. ft. 2000 lb (900 908 kg) trucks are often configured with the sole purpose of carrying miscellaneous compartment space. equipment. The size can run from a small utility body to a tractor-trailer haz-mat or trench rescue equipment truck. The current miscellaneous 250 cu. ft. or more of 2500 lb (1350 kg) equipment allowance does not change as the vehicle GVWR grows large. compartment space. The proposed changes to Table 10-1 will account for additional equipment capacity as larger chassis are specified. There is no clear definition of miscellaneous equipment other than Initial attack fire 10,000 lb to 15,000 lb 900 lb (400 410 kg) the minimum list of equipment found in each of the apparatus chapters. apparatus GVWR Manufactures are interpreting the miscellaneous equipment allowance in (4540 kg to 6810 kg) difference ways. The proposed definition attempts to clarify the intent. (4500 kg to 6800 kg) Purchasers who specify very large compartment volume should be aware 15,001 lb to 20,000 lb 1500 lb (675 680 kg) that their chassis may or may not be specified to carry all the equipment that GVWR may physically fit in a compartment. Table A-10-1 provides some guidance. (6810 kg to 9080 kg) This table is based on measurements of equipment weights on numerous (6801 kg to 9000 kg) pieces of in-service apparatus. I f the purchaser plans to load the apparatus with a lot of heavy equipment, 20,001 lb and up lb 2000 lb (900 908 kg) and provides the apparatus manufacturer with a list of that equipment as GVWR called for in 1-5, that information should be used by the manufacturer in 9080 kg and up) selecting chassis ratings. (9001 kg and up) A minimal apparatus, such as a pumper with the minimum required 40 cubic feet of compartment space, may have problems with under loading. Mobile water All 1000 lb (450 454 kg) The new paragraph in the appendix makes the purchaser and manufacturer supply fire aware that this may be an issue to address. apparatus The metric equivalents have been incorporated into this proposal. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Aerial fire All 2500 lb (1125 1134 kg) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: apparatus AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Quint fire All 2500 lb (1125 1134 kg) ————————————————- apparatus Special service 10,000 lb to 15,000 lb 2000 lb (900 908 kg) (Log #87) fire apparatus GVWR 1901-44-(Table 10-1) : Accept in Principle (4540 kg to 6810 kg) SUBMITTER: Bill McCombs, Alan Saulsbury, Federal Signal Fire Rescue (4500 kg to 6800 kg) Group RECOMMENDATION: Add to Table 10-1: An equipment allowance of 15,001 lb to 20,000 lb 2500 lb (1125 1134 kg) 3,000 lbs. for rescue pumpers. GVWR SUBSTANTIATION: The justification for adding an additional chapter (6810 kg to 9080 kg) stems from the increasing percentage of “Rescue Pumpers” being utilized (6801 kg to 9000 kg) by the fire service, as they adapt their equipment to new and more varied roles. The increased EMS, Rescue, and Haz-mat roles are forcing many 20,001 lb and up departments to combine these functions into vehicles also serving the (9080 kg and up) traditional pumper role. This is resulting in over weight vehicles when all of 20,001 lb - 30,000 lb 3000 lb (1,350 1360 kg) the additional equipment for these functions is added to vehicles designed for GVWR normal pumper service. (9001 kg to 14,000 kg) 4000 lb (1,800 kg) An additional chapter is needed to give guidance on recommended 30,001 lb – 40,000 lb equipment for “Rescue Pumpers” as well as define a miscellaneous GVWR 6000 lb (2,700 kg) equipment allowance that will more accurately define the intended service (14,001 kg to 18,000 kg) function of the vehicle. This should more clearly communicate the fire 40,001 lb – 50,000 lb 8000 lb (3,600 kg) departments intentions to a vehicle manufacturer during a bid request and GVWR reduce the number of surprises when the vehicle is delivered and loaded with (18,001 kg to 23,000 kg) 10,000 lb (4,500 kg) equipment. 50,001 lb – 60,000 lb COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle GVWR COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See committee meeting action on public (23,001 kg to 27,000 proposal 1901-43 (Log #43) which adds a requirement for additional weight kg) when larger cubic footage of compartmentation is provided. The committee 60,001 lb and up does not want to establish a pumper-rescue type of fire apparatus but does GVWR feel the changes made to provide for additional weight should solve the (27,001 kg and up) problem of overweight vehicles. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Mobile foam fire All 2000 lb (900 908 kg) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: apparatus AFFIRMATIVE: 28

Under Loading. Brake equipment on heavy vehicles can be sensitive to the ————————————————- weight distribution of the vehicle. Specifying a GVWR significantly greater than the intended in-service weight can lead to poor brake performance, (Log #CP50) chatter, and squeal. Purchasers who specify configurations with limited 1901-45-(10-2.2.2) : Accept compartment volume on a high capacity chassis should consult the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, manufacturer to ensure that a vehicle with an under loaded condition will not RECOMMENDATION: Delete the paragraph. result. SUBSTANTIATION: This is obsolete language as vehicles do not use radiator shutters any more. Fire apparatus should be able to perform its intended service under adverse COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept conditions that might require operation off paved streets or roads. Chassis NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 components should be selected with the rigors of service in mind. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Add a new definition of Miscellaneous Equipment Allowance to read as follows: ————————————————- That portion of the GVWR or GCWR allocated intended to account for the weight of the miscellaneous equipment and it’s mounting associated minor equipment (brackets, boards, or trays, etc…) stored in or on a fire apparatus. 832 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP49) distributors, and delivered to the endpoints in the off-cycle of the lubricating 1901-46-(10-2.3.3) : Accept pump. This feature brings positive pressure to the points so they are SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, lubricated in a timely fashion, ensuring that the grease does not go the way RECOMMENDATION: Add 2 items to the list in 10-2.3.3 (12.2.3.3 in the of least resistance. Monitoring of the system will indicate a fault in the cab, draft) so the fault may be corrected. (15) Front Tire Cold Pressure COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject (16) Rear Tire Cold Pressure COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is a minimum standard and the SUBSTANTIATION: Tire manufacturers do not necessarily recommend proposal goes beyond what the committee feels needs to be on every fire maintaining tire pressures at the maximum allowed pressure, which is apparatus. The purchaser can specify an automatic lubrication system if they stamped on the tire sidewall. If the tire is being used at less than the want one on their apparatus. maximum allowed weight, it normally should be filled to a reduced pressure. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 This number is not easy for the user to determine, but should be easily VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: available to the manufacturer in the tire manufacturer’s information. The AFFIRMATIVE: 28 post office, and many trucking companies put a label above every tire like “T.P. 95”. The label in the cab would provide this information to any ————————————————- firefighter or mechanic checking the tires. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #68) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-48-(10-3.1.1) : Reject VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Add the following text: The breaking system shall meet Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards ————————————————- No. 105, “Hydraulic and electric brake systems” if equipped with a hydraulic braking system or No. 121; “Air brake systems” if equipped with an air (Log #30) braking system. 1901-47-(10-3) : Reject SUBSTANTIATION: By law vehicles must meet one of these FMVSS (105 SUBMITTER: Bob Wall, Vogel Lubrication, Inc. or 121). RECOMMENDATION:Add new text to read as follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM (ALS) SPECIFICATIONS COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels that fire apparatus FOR EMERGENCY VEHICLE CHASSIS AND ACCESSORIES braking is extreme service and the stronger standard should apply. UTILIZING FLUID GREASES OF GRADED NLGI 00 OR NLGI 000 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 The ALS shall provide automatic grease application to the following VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: lubrication wear points, with the recommended dosages per system interval AFFIRMATIVE: 28 cycle. 1. Spring Pins and Spring Hanger Pins 0.6 ccm ————————————————- 2. King Pins, Upper and Lower 0.4 ccm 3. Tie Rod Ends and Drag Link 0.2 ccm (Log #CP51) 4. Brake S-Cams and/or Caliper Screws 0.1 ccm 1901-49-(10-3.1.2) : Accept 5. Automatic Slack Adjusters 0.1 ccm SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, 6. Steering Gear Box (if applicable) 0.1 ccm RECOMMENDATION:Revise 10-3.1.2 (12-3.1.2 in the draft) to read as 7. Steering Mitre Box (if applicable) 0.1 ccm follows: 8. Tilt Cab Lift Assembly (if applicable) 0.05 ccm Service brakes and parking brakes shall be independently applied. All brakes 9. (OPTION A) Brake Caliper Slide Pins 0.1 ccm shall be readily accessible for adjustment. 10. (OPTION B) Pump Bearing, Fire Pump 0.1 ccm Delete A-10-3.1.2 11. (OPTION C) Aerial Support Outriggers 0.6 ccm SUBSTANTIATION: Almost all braking systems now integrate the 12. (OPTION D) Booster Hose Reel 0.1 ccm parking and service brakes but they should be independently applied for The ALS shall be powered by an electrically driven Gear Pump, 12 or 24 safety purposes. Volt D.C., 192 Watts. The gear pump shall be top mounted to a reservoir COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept assembly with a capacity of 2.7 liters (6 lb.) or optional 6 liters (14 lb.). The NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 pump shall operate against a back pressure of 38 BAR (550 PSI) nominal, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: with an output of 160 cc/min. The pump assembly shall be mounted in AFFIRMATIVE: 28 a suitable location to facilitate care and maintenance of the system by removal of the cover assembly for access to the refill valve connection for ————————————————- replenishment of the grease reservoir. Distribution of lubricant shall be via Piston Distributors utilizing the (Log #CP3) POST LUBRICATION PRINCIPLE, dispensing lubricant during the off 1901-50-(10-3.1.6) : Accept cycle of the system or pump run time, with metering nipples bearing dosage SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, identification and capable of being changeable without disruption of other RECOMMENDATION: Change the word “hard” to “paved” in 10-3.1.6 lubrication point connections. (12.3.1.7 in the draft) The ALS shall be operated via an electronic control module with System SUBSTANTIATION: This proposal was generated as a result of an Monitoring capabilities of the main line pressure and operating cycle with editorial review of this document at the final production stage during the last dash mounted visual indication to the vehicle operator. The control module code cycle. The recommendation contains suggested editorial changes. will have a cycle interval of pump pause time from 0.1 to 99.9 hours, and COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept pump running time from 0.1 to 99.9 minutes. The control module shall NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 have numerical LED display, and a system reset button to initiate a lube VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: cycle for diagnostic purposes and/or reset the control module in the event AFFIRMATIVE: 28 a fault has occurred. Upon a fault, the system is inoperable until the fault has been corrected and a system reset has been initiated by the operator or ————————————————- serviceman. OPTION A - The ALS shall be extended to include the Air Disk Brake (Log #69) caliper slide pins. The ADB slide pins shall be modified by the ALS 1901-51-(10-3.1.6) : Reject manufacturer to predetermined specifications to facilitate lubrication of SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service the disc brake calipers, and shall not be disapproved by the Air Disk Brake RECOMMENDATION: Add the following at start of paragraph: System Manufacturer. “If the braking system is an air brake system the service brake shall...” OPTION B - The ALS shall be extended to include the Fire Pump Bearing Add the following at end of paragraph: on fire apparatus so equipped. “If the braking system is a hydraulic braking system the service brake shall OPTION C - The ALS shall be extended to include Aerial Support be capable of bringing the fully laden apparatus to a complete stop from an Outriggers on fire apparatus so equipped. initial speed of 30 mph (48 kph) in a distance not exceeding 88 ft (26.8 m) OPTION D - The ALS shall be extended to include the Booster Reel on fire by actual measurement, on a hard, level surface road that is free of loose apparatus so equipped. material, oil, or grease.” SUBSTANTIATION: The benefit of the system will provide: SUBSTANTIATION: The stopping distance now in NFPA 1901 is from • Less Maintenance FMVSS 121 (Air braking systems) which is less than from FMVSS 105 • Less Downtime (hydraulic braking systems) resulting in a hydraulic braking system equipped • Less consumption of grease chassis may not meet NFPA 1901 as supplied by a truck manufacturer. A • Better Planned Preventative Maintenance Intervals truck manufacturer is required to meet FMVSS, which is now less than • Increase in the life of pins and bushings by up to 400% required in NFPA 1901. NFPA 1901 is considered a minimum standard; • The system is electrically controlled, wired through the ignition therefore, NFPA should only require that the braking systems meet FMVSS circuit and provides grease to endpoints in a timed interval. The post 105 or 121. lubrication principle allows grease to be held under spring pressure in piston 833 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels that fire apparatus NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 braking is extreme service and the stronger standard should apply. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #40) 1901-56-(Table 11-8.11) : Reject (Log #38) SUBMITTER: W. Kenneth Menke , III, The Fire Products Company 1901-52-(Chapter 11) : Accept in Principle RECOMMENDATION: Change wording in table under Calling for Right- SUBMITTER: W. Kenneth Menke , III, The Fire Products Company of-Way referencing Yellow to allow Yellow in Zone A. RECOMMENDATION: Add all current language and changes found in SUBSTANTIATION: End users are demanding brighter warning lights Chapter 4, Low-Voltage Electrical Systems and Warning Devices, of the and have already determined that the addition of yellow warning signals current edition of 1906 to Chapter 11 of 1901 if does not already exist. on the back of apparatus has dramatically improved visibility and safety. SUBSTANTIATION: Improve commonality between the two standards. As a manufacturer of emergency warning lights, we are now experiencing COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle more requests from end users for yellow warning signal to the front, on In 11-2.6 (13.2.6 in the draft), change the word “schema” to “diagram. multi-colored lightbars. Optically, yellow is a very bright color improving In 11-8.12 and 11-8.13 (13.8.13 and 13.8.14 in the draft), change 22 ft (6.7 visibility; it simply is not a nationally recognized emergency color in the m) to 25 ft (7.6 m). response mode. If the end user deems it of value to add yellow to their COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee reviewed the differences forward emergency warning lights while responding because of safety, between Chapter 11 in NFPA 1901 and Chapter 4 in NFPA 1906 and found NFPA should not prohibit it. If there is concern that a fire department may that with the exception of the 2 changes noted above and a couple of editorial think they can respond with an all yellow lightbar, language could be added changes, the differences need to remain as wildland fire apparatus has a few stating that yellow may be used to the front in Clearing Right-of-Way mode unique characteristics. only when used in combination with the recognized emergency colors red NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 and blue. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels the current color scheme is correct subject to the authority having jurisdiction. ————————————————- NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #10) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-53-(11-3.2(d)) : Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Kevin W. Word, Ferrara Fire Apparatus Inc. RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: ————————————————- (d) The lighting necessary to produce 1 footcandle (11 lx) of illumination on all walking surfaces on the apparatus and on the ground at all egress (Log #39) points onto and off the apparatus, 5 footcandles (54 lx) of illumination on 1901-57-(11-8.13.2) : Accept in Principle all control and instrument panels, and 50 percent of the total compartment SUBMITTER: W. Kenneth Menke , III, The Fire Products Company lighting loads in the absence of sufficient ambient lighting. RECOMMENDATION: Delete entire paragraph 11-8.13.2. SUBSTANTIATION: The average fire apparatus already has a demanding Alternatively, require some minimum level optical power requirements and load on its electrical system. The requirement of illumination even if there clarify if one light or two lights are required on each forward corner. is sufficient ambient lighting adds to the parasitic loads. The lighting should SUBSTANTIATION: On large apparatus, the upper level lighting system only be required when ambient lighting does not meet the listed footcandle is traditionally 9 to 10 ft above the ground requiring lower level warning specifications. Therefore, it should be allowed to equip the apparatus with lights for visibility. This is not true on small vehicles. The standard has features for evening and dark operations that would automatically trigger the already deemed that the separation of the upper and lower level lights to be lighting of the areas mentioned in 11-3.2(d). insignificant allowing the performance values to be combined. The chassis COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject design of smaller vehicles is making installation of grille and fender lights COMMITTEE STATEMENT:There is no way of defining what is more difficult, and at times may significantly impact the air flow to the ”sufficient ambient lighting.” It would add another level of electrical engine. Customers may certainly request more lights, but as a minimum complexity and NFPA 1901 is a minimum standard. standard, I do not think lower level front warning lights should be required NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 unless they are deemed a safety issue, and if that is true, performance VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: numbers should be required for these lights as found in large vehicles. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle Revise 11-8.13.2 (13.8.14.2 in the draft) to read as follows: ————————————————- One or more lower-level optical warning devices shall be visible from the front and side of the apparatus. The optical center of the lower level (Log #CP28) optical warning devices in the front of the vehicle shall be mounted forward 1901-54-(11-3.2(d) ) : Accept of the front wheel centerline and as close to the front corner points of the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, apparatus as practical. mounted as close as practical to each front corner of RECOMMENDATION: Revise 11-3.2(b) (13.3.3(2) in the draft) to read as the apparatus with The optical center of the device(s) shall be at a distance follows: between 18 in. and 48 in. (457 mm and 1220 mm) above level ground. (2) All legally required clearance and marker lights, headlights, and other COMMITTEE STATEMENT:The committee is revising 11-8.13.2 to electrical devices. clarify that one of more optical warning device(s) can be used but an optical SUBSTANTIATION: The changed wording makes the requirement more warning device must be seen from both the front and sides of the vehicle international as it is not tied to United States government regulations. near the front corner points. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #41) (Log #CP30) 1901-58-(11-8.13.3) : Accept 1901-55-(11-4.4) : Accept SUBMITTER: W. Kenneth Menke , III, The Fire Products Company SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Under Blocking Right-of-Way, At any H point, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 11-4.4 (13.4.4 in the draft) to read as for Zone B & D change values from 10,000 to 8,000. follows: SUBSTANTIATION: Develop consistency in the table between Clearing The batteries shall be mounted to prevent movement during fire apparatus Right-of-Way and Blocking Right-of-Way for the H value at any point. operation and shall be protected against accumulations of road spray, snow COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept and road debris. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Add a new paragraph after 11-4.4.1 to read as follows: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 11-4.4.2 A means shall be provided for jump starting the engine if the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 batteries are not accessible without lifting the cab of a tilt-cab apparatus. SUBSTANTIATION: It is impractical and unnecessary to totally protect ————————————————- batteries from contact with road spray. The paragraph dealing with jump starting apparatus is being added to provide a safe way of jump starting a fire apparatus if the battery arrangement is such that they are not accessible unless the cab is tilted up. 834 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #37) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-59-(11-8.14.1) : Accept in Principle NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: W. Kenneth Menke , III, The Fire Products Company VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Add language to include the Testing parameters AFFIRMATIVE: 28 for LED’s found in SAE J1889, L.E.D. Lighting Devices. SUBSTANTIATION: This addresses current testing parameters on new ————————————————- technology. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle (Log #CP33) Revise the first sentence of 11-8.14.1 (13.8.15.1.1 in the draft) to read as 1901-63-(11-10.4) : Accept follows: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, All optical warning devices shall be tested to the requirements of SAE RECOMMENDATION: Add a sentence after 11-10.3 (see 13.10.7 in draft) J595, Flashing Warning Lamps for Authorized Emergency, Maintenance, to read as follows: and Service Vehicles, SAE J1318, Gaseous Discharge Warning Lamp for All work lights mounted in wet locations shall tested in conformance Authorized Emergency, Maintenance, and Service Vehicles, or SAE J1889, with SAE J575, Test Methods and Equipment for Lighting Devices and L.E.D. Lighting Devices. Components for Use on Vehicles Less Than 2032 mm in Overall Width, and COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is incorporating the shall comply with the following performance requirements of that standard: submitters request and clarifying that the optical warning devices need to be (1) Vibration tested to these standards. (2) Moisture NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (3) Dust VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (4) Corrosion AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (5) High temperature (6) Low temperature ————————————————- (7) Durability (8) Warpage (Log #64) SUBSTANTIATION: During night operation, reliable work lights of 1901-60-(11-8.14.2) : Accept compliant brightness and positioned at work locations are essential to the SUBMITTER: W. Kenneth Menke, III, The Fire Products Company safe performance of many tasks on and about the apparatus. RECOMMENDATION: Add text to read as follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept The results of the testing shall be used by the apparatus builder or purchaser NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 to determine compliance with this standard and shall be available upon VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: request from the optical warning device manufacturer. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: In Section 11-8.14.2, the current edition requires the use of photometric test data obtained by or on behalf of the device ————————————————- manufacturer to determine compliance but does not require the device manufacture to provide this data upon request. (Log #CP31) Note: Supporting material is available for review at NFPA headquarters. 1901-64-(11-11(5)) : Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise 11-11(5) (13.11.1(5) in the draft) to read as VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (5) Any other device that is permanently attached to the apparatus and is capable of opening, extending or being deployed in a manner that is likely to ————————————————- cause damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved. Add a new sentence after current (5) to read as follows: (Log #CP29) This section shall not apply to manually raised pole lights with an extension 1901-61-(11-10.3) : Accept of less than 5 feet. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, Add an annex to read as follows: RECOMMENDATION: Add wording to 11-10.3 (13.10.4.2 in the draft) to A-11-11 Manually operated floodlights on telescoping poles are not read as follows: required to be tied into the hazard light in the driving compartment. If the Compartments such as ladder tunnels, pikepole storage tubes, or underbody purchaser wishes that these devices be tied into the hazard light or otherwise compartments designed around the volumetric requirements of specific equipped with an indicator to warn the operator the floodlights are in the up equipment that can be removed without the use of article illumination shall position, they should specify that in their purchase specification. be permitted to be exempted for the requirement for compartment lighting. SUBSTANTIATION: The change to 11-11.5 is to add the fact that SUBSTANTIATION: There is no need for internal illumination if permanently attached devices is what is being monitored by the hazard light. the stored object can be safely located and removed from the storage The other change is because the installation of micro switches for extending compartment without such illumination. floodlights and fixed or removable tripod lights becomes very complicated COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept and costly to the purchaser. The low probability and small cost of damage NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 caused by moving the vehicle with small, manual flood lights extended does VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: not justify the cost of detecting such extension. This change will make tying AFFIRMATIVE: 28 these devices into the hazard light optional with discussion in the appendix to assist the purchaser. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #CP35) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-62-(11-10.3) : Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise 11-10.3 (13.10.3 in the draft) to read as follows: ————————————————- 11-10.3 Interior Work Lighting. 11-10.3.1 The apparatus shall have sufficient lighting to provide a minimum (Log #CP34) level of 1 foot-candle (10 lx) on all work surfaces, steps, and walkways. 1901-65-(11-13) : Accept 11-10.3.2 The apparatus shall have sufficient lighting to provide an average SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, level of 3 foot-candle (30 lx) in the driving and crew compartments. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 11-13 (13.13 in the draft) to read as 11-10.3.3 Each engine compartment and pump compartment shall have a follows: light of at least 20 candlepower (250 Lumens) 11.13 Stop, Tail, and Directional Lights. Add wording to pick up the compartment lighting as 11-10.4. 11.13.1 The apparatus shall be equipped with all legally required stop, tail, 11-10.4 Equipment Compartment Lighting. Each enclosed tool and and directional lights. equipment compartment greater than 4 ft3 (0.1 m3) in volume and having an 11.13.2 Directional lights shall be visible from the front, sides, and rear of opening greater than 144 in.2 (0.9 m2) shall have an average minimum level the apparatus. of lighting of 1 footcandle (10 lx). 11.13.3 On apparatus 30 ft (10 m) or longer in length, a turn signal shall Delete the second sentence of 14-9.2 be mounted approximately midway along the apparatus at approximately SUBSTANTIATION: This change clarifies the various lighting levels running board height. required. A distinction is made between minimum and average levels 11.13.4 Equipment shall not be mounted in a manner that obscures the stop, as required. Compartment lighting has been moved to 11-10.4. crew tail, or directional lights. compartment lighting level has been raised to 3 footcandles as an average to SUBSTANTIATION: The changed wording makes the requirement more allow reading or to the visual activities. Specifying a lighting level does not international as it is not tied to United States government regulations. It also work in an odd shaped area such as an engine or pump compartment, but a better organizes the material. 20 candlepower light at least gives some general lighting. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept The second sentence of 14-9.2 is being deleted as it is now covered in the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 changes to 11-10.3. 835 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: need to ensure that fire apparatus occupants have sufficient head clearance in AFFIRMATIVE: 28 all seating positions, while recognizing the inherent limitations of apparatus built on commercial vehicle products. The committee reached the following ————————————————- consensus: 1. The bouncing motion of a suspension seat hinders the driver’s ability (Log #CP56) to maintain precise control of the throttle, brake, steering wheel, and other 1901-66-(12-1.1) : Accept driving controls. The bouncing action of a poorly adjusted suspension SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, seat can also increase the potential for injury. For these reasons, the RECOMMENDATION: Add wording as part of 12-1.1 (this will be subcommittee feels that the fixed seat is a more appropriate selection for 14.1.3.5 in the draft) to read as follows: most fire apparatus. Each seating position that is not intended to be used during transit shall 2. The current seat to ceiling requirement in NFPA 1901 does not specify be individually labeled: WARNING: THIS SEAT IS NOT TO BE the state of adjustment that the seat must be in when the measurement OCCUPIED WHILE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION. is taken. This leaves the recommendation open to a wide variety of SUBSTANTIATION: Accessory chairs or benches used in command interpretations. vehicles, during rehab, and for other purposes are often provided without a 3. The composition of headliners and the location of structural members seat belt, but these need to be marked so there is no misunderstanding about in the roof area above seating positions should be addressed. A layer of soft which seats can be used when the vehicle is in motion. headliner material should not be considered in the same manner as rigid COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept structural members. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 4. The density of seat cushion foam, cushion shape, and covering materials VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: varies between seat model, seat manufacturer, and customer specifications. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 It is therefore difficult to obtain consistent measurement of head room using the current procedure described in NFPA 1901 paragraph 12-1.5. While ————————————————- the use of the H-Point provides a much more precise measurement, it is not a point that can be physically located on the seat, nor is it commonly (Log #63) understood outside the automotive engineering community. H-Point 1901-67-(12-1.5) : Accept in Principle determination requires an H-Point measurement tool. This tool simulates SUBMITTER: Roger Lackore, Pierce Manufacturing Inc./Rep. FAMA a human hips and torso of a specific size and weight. H-Point will vary (Fire Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association) with the size, shape, and material of the seat back, seat frame, and seat RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: cushion. For this reason, the seat manufacturer must be required to provide a 12-1.5 Head height at any seat shall be at least 940 mm (37 in.) from the reference point that can be measured to by anyone interested in checking for seat to the ceiling with the seat depressed 25 mm (1 in.) NFPA 1901 compliance. The minimum vertical dimension from the seat H-point to the ceiling for Effect of Proposed Change on Commercial Chassis Apparatus each belted seating position shall be as follows: An informal survey of commercial chassis seating has revealed that a Suspension Style Seats: 931 mm (37 in.) measured with the seat adjusted requirement that is overly generous will force commercial chassis suppliers to its lowest position and the suspension inflated and/or raised to the upper to reduce their seat mounting height even with a fixed seat. This would limit of its travel. be counterproductive to vehicle safety by compromising the forward Fixed Seats: 882 mm (35 in.) measured with the seat adjusted to its lowest visibility of the operator. The attached spreadsheet shows that by selecting position. 35 in. as the fixed seat criteria, and 37 in. as the suspension seat criteria, The seat manufacturer or chassis manufacturer shall provide each seat the most popular commercial chassis could comply with the standard by with a label indicating the vertical location of the seat H-Point relative to providing fixed seats at approximately the mid-travel position of their the horizontal plane of the seat mounting surface. Ceiling height shall be current suspension seats. These criteria will still increase the headroom measured at the lowest surface in the area immediately above the projected requirements over today’s standard by 2.2 in. for fixed seats, and 4.2 in. for area of the seat with any soft headliner material depressed by hand. suspension seats. Each seating space shall have a minimum width of (560 mm) 22 in. at Under the proposed changes, a 95-percentile male will have 1 in. of the shoulder level. Seat cushions shall be a minimum of 457 mm (18 in.) in clearance between his head an the headliner when sitting perfectly upright width and 381 mm (15 in.) from the front of the cushion to the face of the in a fixed seat. Since the sitting height of a large person can be as much as seat back. A back cushion that extends from the face of the seat vertically at 3.5 in. lower in a natural posture, the practical head clearance will be more least 457 mm (18 in.) and that is a minimum of 457 mm (18 in.) wide shall be like 4.5 in. In a suspension seat, the head clearance will be 3 in. when sitting provided. The back cushion shall be permitted to be split to accommodate perfectly upright, and 6.5. in. in a natural slump. a fully recessed SCBA and bracket. Where the back cushion is split, a Survey Assumptions headrest shall be supplied. 1. I assumed that the test fixture that measures H-Point would settle into Add text to read as follows: every seat cushion by 0.62 in. I obtained this estimate from representatives A-12-1.5 Suspension style seats have been developed for long-haul of Seats Inc. The amount that the test fixture (and an actual human) will truck operations where the operator is driving for many hours at a time. settle will obviously vary with seat cushion shape and the firmness of the Acceleration and braking is controlled, with an eye to fuel economy. The material used. suspension style seat in this duty profile provides a smoother ride and 2. The survey assumes that those commercial manufactures that may not reduces fatigue from long hours in the seats. In contrast, the operator of a offer fixed seats could provide a fixed seat option at the same height as the fire apparatus is typically making short runs with fast acceleration, quick mid-travel of their suspension seat offerings. maneuvers, and sudden braking. The bouncing motion of the suspension 3. Anthropometrical data comes from SAE J833 seat may hinder the driver’s ability to maintain precise control of the throttle, 4. Physical measurements were taken without depressing the headliner or brake, steering wheel, and other driving controls. the seat cushion. Selection of seating options should be made with consideration to the The subcommittee feels it is important that the decision makers at NFPA frequency of time that the driver will spend in the vehicle each day, and recognize that while custom cab manufacturers in the fire industry have whether the department SOP requires or encourages the occupant of the greater flexibility to respond to changes in the NFPA requirements, it is seat to equipped with head gear during travel. The use of headgear reduces unlikely that large manufacturers of commercial trucks will be willing headroom, and increases the chance of injury should the vehicle encounter to adjust their cab roof designs in response to an NFPA mandate. Most unexpected road undulation or speed bumps. The effect of such road commercial chassis designs will not accommodate the proposed changes conditions during high-speed operation may be intensified by the action of a when offering suspension style seats. While the subcommittee does not seat suspension. Potential for injury is greatly increased by failure to use or see this as a crucial issue (it may in fact begin to move the industry in a properly adjust the seat belt. positive direction away from the use of suspension seats), some purchasers Proper seat adjustment is another issue that should be addressed by the fire of commercial chassis fire apparatus may not be pleased with the new department SOPs if apparatus are equipped with suspension seats. Too much requirements. Purchasers intent on purchasing commercial apparatus with pressure in a suspension seat air bag will reduce static headroom height suspension seats always have the option of signing a waiver indicating their and will negate the potential benefits of the suspension. Too little pressure acceptance of a product not in compliance with this aspect of NFPA 1901. will cause the seat to bounce excessively. The proper amount of pressure COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle is dependent on the weight of the occupant. Departments where multiple Replace the first sentence of 12-1.5 (see 14.1.7 in the draft) with the drivers share an apparatus must consider that adjustments should be made following: between each shift. Seat adjustment should not be postponed until the driver 12-1.5 Seat Head Height. is exiting the station on the way to a call. 12-1.5.1* The minimum vertical dimension from the seat H-point to the The H-Point is the mechanically hinged hip point of the torso and thigh on ceiling for each belted seating position shall be as follows. the devices used in defining and measuring vehicle seating accommodation 1) For suspension style seats with independent height adjustment, the in SAE J826. It is an imaginary point located in two-dimensional space minimum vertical dimension shall be 37 in (940 mm) measured with the above the seat cushion. H-Point is measured using a tool that simulates a height adjustment in its lowest position and the suspension inflated and/or human hips and torso of a specific size and weight. H-Point will vary with raised to the upper limit of its travel. the size, shape, and material of the seat back, seat frame, and seat cushion. 2) For suspension style seats without independent height adjustment, the SUBSTANTIATION: The issue of seat to ceiling height was discussed by minimum vertical dimension shall be 37 in (940 mm) measured with the members of the Chassis Technical Subcommittee of FAMA at its summer suspension inflated and/or raised to the upper limit of its travel. meeting August 25, 2001 in New Orleans. The subcommittee recognizes the 836 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 3) For non-suspension style seats, the minimum vertical dimension shall 13.6.2 The clear opening shall have no one dimension measure less than 18 be 35 in (882 mm) measured with the seat adjusted to its lowest position. in. (460 mm). 12-1.5.2 When independent vertical and or horizontal seat adjustment is 13.6.3 Additional door(s) or panel(s) that require no more than standard tools provided, it shall be fully adjustable within 10 seconds. to open or remove shall be provided for access to the pump and plumbing 12-1.5.3 Ceiling height shall be measured at the lowest surface in the area area. immediately above the projected area of the seat with any soft headliner 13.6.4 All valves, gauges, controls, and other plumbing equipment shall be material depressed by hand. accessible for service and replacement. Accept the submitted appendix to the new 12-1.5.1 but add one sentence to 13.6.5* The clear space required by the pump manufacturer to perform in- the end to read as follows: truck overhaul and maintenance shall be provided. If H-point data is not available, it can be approximated by measuring 5 A.13.6.5 The purchaser should consider specifying additional doors or inches (130 mm) ahead of the seat back and 3 inches (75 mm) up from the removable panels for service, maintenance, or replacement of components in non-depressed seat cushion surface. the fire pump installation. Make the remainder of 12.1.5 a new paragraph (see 14.1.8 in the draft). SUBSTANTIATION: The committee has rewritten the section to separate COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee accepted the proposal in the requirements for access to the pump compartment to visually determine principle but decided to provide a means of “approximating” the H-point if something is wrong from the access needed to maintain, repair or replace rather than adding labels to the seats. A requirement was added to ensure components of the pump system. The new provisions provide for quick that any seat can be adjusted within 10 seconds so that complicated or slow visibility and inspection of the pump and the plumbing area when it is not adjustments are not provided. Seat to ceiling height wording was revised to necessary for a person to crawl into the area. The use of any tools to gain differentiate between suspension seats with and without independent height access to a pump enclosure is not practical on the fire ground. Hinged or adjustments. quickly removable panels do not add substantial costs to a vehicle. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Panels that meet the present requirement are too small to permit a person VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: to gain access to the pump area or really work on the plumbing. The new AFFIRMATIVE: 28 requirement will provide for that access when it is necessary to service or repair the pump or its piping system. It is also important that the opening ————————————————- area be “clear” and not blocked by piping, valves, tanks, generator, foam systems, ladders, or other fixtures. (Log #CP53) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-68-(12-1.6) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Revise 12-1.6 (renumbered as 14.1.9 in the draft) AFFIRMATIVE: 28 to read as follows: 12.1.6 SCBA Mounting. ————————————————- 12.1.6.1 Where SCBA units are mounted within a driving or crew (Log #27) compartment, a positive automatically latching mechanical means of holding 1901-71-(13-7.3) : Accept the SCBA device in its stowed position shall be provided. SUBMITTER: Jeffrey Bowman, Anaheim Fire Department A-12.6.1 SCBA units and other equipment stored in the crew compartment RECOMMENDATION: Replace 13-7.3 with the following: can cause injuries to occupants of the compartment if they fly around the 13-7.3 Slip resistance. compartment as the result of an accident or other impact. 13-7.3.1 All materials used for exterior surfaces designated as stepping, 12.1.6.2 The bracket holding device and its mounting shall retain the SCBA standing, and walking areas and all interior steps shall have a minimum slip unit when subjected to a 9-G force and shall be installed in accordance with resistance in any orientation of 0.68 when tested wet using the English XL the bracket manufacturer’s requirements. tester in accordance with ASTM F 1679, Standard Test Method for Using 12.1.6.3 Mounting devices shall be of a type that positively latch around the a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT), or 0.52 when tested wet using the cylinder Brungraber Mark II Tester in accordance with ASTM F 1677, Standard Test 12.1.6.4 If the SCBA unit is mounted in a seatback, the release mechanism Method for Using a Portable Inclinable Articulated Strut Slip Test shall be accessible to the user while seated and without having to reach (PIAST). A standard Neolite® test sensor shall be used with either tester. behind them. 13-7.3.2 All materials used for interior floors shall have a minimum slip 12.1.6.5 The bracket holding device and its mounting shall retain the SCBA resistance in any orientation of 0.58 when tested dry using the English XL unit when subjected to a 9-G force and shall be installed in accordance with tester in accordance with ASTM F 1679, Standard Test Method for Using the bracket manufacturer’s requirements. a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT), or 0.47 when tested dry using the SUBSTANTIATION: The existing straps are frequently not used resulting Brungraber Mark II Tester in accordance with ASTM F 1677, Standard in SCBA missiles in an accident. Automatically latching brackets are Test Method for Using a Portable Inclinable Articulated Strut Slip Tester available and do not allow the SCBA to be placed in the bracket without (PIAST). A standard Neoliteâ test sensor shall be used with either tester. latching it in place in compliance with the standard. This change clarifies 13-7.3.3 Sampling Strategy. the apparent intent of the 1996 standard requiring a bracket to “positively 13-7.3.3.1 For uniformly patterned materials, at least 16 readings latch around the cylinder” (See 13-5.1). shall be taken on each sample. Each reading shall be taken 90 degrees COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept clockwise from the previous orientation, resulting in at least 4 readings in NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 each orientation. The readings shall be averaged and reported as the slip VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: resistance for the material. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 13-7.3.3.2 For directionally patterned materials, at least 32 readings shall be taken on each sample. Each reading shall be taken 45 degrees clockwise ————————————————- from the previous orientation, resulting in at least 4 readings in each orientation. The 4 readings in each direction shall be averaged and reported (Log #CP55) as the slip resistance for the material in that orientation. 1901-69-(12-4.5) : Accept 13-7.3.4 The contractor shall supply at the time of delivery of the apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, a certification that all materials used for exterior surfaces designated as RECOMMENDATION: Revise the second sentence of 12.4.5 (14.4.5.2 in stepping, standing, and walking areas; all interior steps; and all interior the draft) to read as follows: floors meet the requirements of 13-7.3. The communication system shall be operable without the tiller operator 13-7.3.5 Where the fuel fill is located at or near a stepping surface, the having to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. surface shall be construction of an open grate-type material to facilitate SUBSTANTIATION: As currently written, there could be an arrangement draining of accidentally spilled fuel to lessen any slipping hazard. that required the tiller operator to push a remote button to talk. In a case Add the following reference to 25-1.2.4. where immediate action is necessary, this could present a problem. ASTM F 1677, Standard Test Method for Using a Portable Inclinable COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Articulated Strut Slip Tester (PIAST), 1996. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: The purpose of the TIA is to allow for use of another VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: test instrument in measuring slip resistance, clarify the test procedure, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 add slip resistant requirements for interior floor surfaces and make the requirements for steps consistent whether exterior or interior. ————————————————- The TIA adds provisions to allow for the use of the Brungraber Mark II Tester in addition to the English XL Tester when testing the slip resistance of (Log #CP57) stepping, standing and walking surfaces on fire apparatus. On some surfaces 1901-70-(13-6) : Accept with widely spaced pattern designs, the English XL Tester with its 1.25-in. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, diameter test sensor is not able to properly test the surface. The Brungraber RECOMMENDATION: Revise 13-6 (renumbered as 15.6 in the draft) to Mark II Tester with its 3-in. by 3-in test sensor is able to test these widely read as follows: spaced pattern design surfaces. Without the TIA to allow the use of another 13.6 Pump and Plumbing Access. tester, some surface materials that may appear to be appropriate for use 13.6.1 One or more doors or panels that open or are removable without on fire apparatus will not be able to be tested. This could exclude these the use of tools shall be provided to allow visual inspection or access for materials from use, as the manufacturer could not provide slip resistance checking the fire pump and plumbing area. data on the product using the defined test instrument. 837 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA The TIA is changing the requirement for interior steps to require them to 13-11.3 A label shall be placed on or near each receiver or anchor that meet the exterior stepping, standing and walking surface requirements as states the maximum winch load rating and the maximum rope load rating these steps are often wet and many injuries are associated with wet steps. that the receiver or anchor can support. Requirements are being added for interior floor areas which were not Renumber existing 13-11 as 13-12 addressed initially and about which questions have been raised. These floor Add a definition of removable winch to read as follows: areas need to be able to be decontaminated easily and therefore a lower slip Removable winch. A winch with quick disconnects for power and controls resistance is being allowed to accommodate materials that have been used that can be temporarily mounted on the apparatus at a permanently installed successfully in these applications without a history of slip injuries. mounting receiver. The implementation of the requirement in 13-7.3 has also raised other SUBSTANTIATION: The installation of receivers for rescue rope and issues that the TIA proposes to clarify. One is what material is to be used as removable winches on rescue vehicles has become very popular as it allows the test sensor. It was the intent of the committee that Neoliteâ be used as winches to be used on any side of vehicle and provides anchors for rope the test sensor material and adding this requirement will provide consistency operations. Trailer hitch receivers are used as receivers with removable to the tests. Another issue deals with how many repetitions and in what winches. The type III commercial hitch receiver is designed to a safety orientation are required when testing and wording is being added to address factor of 1.5 to 1, therefore the mounting of the receiver should be designed that issue. Wording is being changed to clarify that the material can be type to the same safety factor. If these same receivers are to be used to anchor tested, it is not the intent to have each final step or walking surface tested rope operations where personnel are being lifted, the rating should be after manufacture. Finally a requirement for certification to the purchaser downgraded to provide a larger safety factor similar to that required for that the material meets the requirements is being added OSHA approved overhead hoist design. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #84) (Log #89) 1901-72-(13-8) : Reject 1901-75-(14-2.3.3) : Accept in Part SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company RECOMMENDATION: Change “1 in.” to “3/4 in.” for minimum diameter RECOMMENDATION: Change first sentence to read: “The completed of handrails. pumping system shall be capable of developing a vacuum of 22 in. Hg (74.5 SUBSTANTIATION: Some commercial trucks come with 3/4 in. handrails kPa) at altitudes up to 2000 feet by means of the pump priming device and and they have to be changed in order to meet NFPA 1901. This is additional sustaining...” expense that may not be necessary. Add additional sentence at end of paragraph: The pump priming device COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject shall be capable of operating with no lubricant or a biodegradable nontoxic COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has standardized on 1 inch lubricant. as a minimum size for handrail and feels it offers a better grip to firefighters SUBSTANTIATION: This proposal provides all the performance with gloves climbing on and off the apparatus. requirements for the priming device to the “Design and Performance NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Requirements” section rather than having some of the requirements stated in VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: the section and some in section 14-10.8. See related proposal to 14-10.8. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Part Make the change in the first sentence but do not add the additional ————————————————- sentence. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The proposed additional sentence is (Log #107) currently in 14-10.8 and the committee feels it is better where it currently 1901-73-(13-9) : Accept in Principle is located. Paragraph 14-10.8 deals with priming devices whereas this SUBMITTER: Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. section deals with the pump integrity and the priming device is a tool used in RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follows: “Where dissimilar determining that integrity. metals are to be mounted together, the mounting base material shall be NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 primer painted and covered with insulation material prior to installation to VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: prevent dissimilar metal reaction.” AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: NFPA 1901 does not address dissimilar metals. The ULC Harmonization/Adoption Task Group recommends including this ————————————————- requirement in the NFPA Standard. This wording was adopted from ULC S515-M88 3.8.4. (Log #32) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle 1901-76-(14-2.4) : Reject Add a new 13-9.1 (see 15.9.1 in the draft) to read as follows: “Where SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates dissimilar metals are to be mounted together, the mounting base material RECOMMENDATION: Add new text to read as follows: shall have an isolation barrier prior to assembly to prevent dissimilar metal 14-2.4.1.1 and 14-2.4.2.1 The pump manufacturer shall indicate at which reaction.” suction inlet(s) the certified test was performed. Renumber existing 13-9.1 and 13-9.2 as 13-9.2 and 13-9.3 SUBSTANTIATION: a) Neither Section 14-2.4.1 or Section 14-2.4.2 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee agrees with the submitter specifies which master suction inlet can, shall or may be used to certify fire but has revised the wording to require an isolation barrier without getting pump capacity. specific on materials. b) Fire pumps, of the single suction variety, are commonly found midship NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 mounted as well as being rear mounted and front mounted; and may or may VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: not be configured with a side master suction inlet. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 c) Traditional midship mounted fire pumps are commonly found with both rear and front master suction inlets; and likewise may or may not be ————————————————- configured with a master suction inlet on each side of the apparatus. d) The purchaser should be aware at which suction inlet the certified test (Log #CP101) was performed and concurrently at which inlet or inlets the fire pump is 1901-74-(13-11) : Accept capable of pumping capacity and equally as important the purchaser should SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, be aware at which inlet or inlets the fire pump is not capable of meeting RECOMMENDATION: Add a new 13-11 (see 15.11 in the draft) to read pump capacity. as follows: Concurrently, an advisory could be included in the appendix advising 13-11 Receivers And Anchors For Rope And Removable Winches. purchasers to specify if the manufacturer shall provide a “flow certification” A-13.11 Trailer hitch type receivers are commonly used as anchor points for a particular “auxiliary” master suction inlet(s) - especially if the same for both removable winches and rope operations. Removable winches are might be used for drafting purposes. intended for equipment recovery operations only. Rope operations may COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject involve personnel rescue that require the receiver and its anchorage to be COMMITTEE STATEMENT: These paragraphs require the pump designed using higher safety factors. manufacturer to certify that the pump is capable of certain performance. 13-11.1 Receivers or anchors installed at any location on the apparatus for The information on which inlet arrangement that may have been used during use as removable winch anchors shall be designed and affixed to provide at certification will not be relevant after the pump is installed on the apparatus least a 1.5 to 1 safety factor over the load rating of the removable winch. and the body builder adds the piping and valving to plumb out the pump. 13-11.2 Receivers or anchors installed at any location on the apparatus for NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 use with rope operations shall be designed and affixed to the apparatus to VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: provide at least a 5 to 1 safety factor over the breaking strength of the rope AFFIRMATIVE: 28 that will be used. ————————————————- 838 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #19) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-77-(Table 14-2.4.1(a)) : Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Delete 450, 600 and 700 gpm rating capacity. SUBSTANTIATION: These pump sizes are not being sold or requested. ————————————————- If nobody wants them, why have them in the standard. Extra ratings add confusion for the reader. You will also not find these sizes in the Hale, (Log #CP4) Darley or Waterous catalogues. 1901-81-(14-5.7) : Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, Also delete the 2750 gpm pump size and the relevant suction loss data RECOMMENDATION: Delete paragraph 14-5.7. from Tables 14-2.4.1(a) and 14-2.4.1(b). SUBSTANTIATION: This paragraph is confusing and contains non- COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The 2750 gpm size is also not a size that definable requirements. Other requirements in the standard are sufficient to is used. In larger sizes, the 2500 gpm or the 3000 gpm pumps are the sizes ensure the pump will not be damaged under the conditions. used. The deletion of the suction loss data is to make table 14-2.4.1(b) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept consistent with table 14-2.4.1(a). NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #20) (Log #CP11) 1901-82-(14-6.1.1) : Accept in Principle 1901-78-(Table 14-2.4.1(a)) : Accept SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add new sentence: RECOMMENDATION: Add a footnote to the column titled “Maximum Adapter couplings with special threads or other means for hose attachment Number of Suction Lines” that states “Where more than one suction line is shall be permitted to be furnished on any or all inlets. used, all suction lines do not have to be the same hose size.” SUBSTANTIATION: This allows people in other countries to buy the SUBSTANTIATION: Many times a smaller second hose line can be used suction connections they need (NH is only good in North America). This to achieve the necessary capacity during the pumping test. Without the also follows 14-7.2 lead. footnote, the implication is that both suction lines need to be the same size. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Revise 14-6.1.1 (16.6.1.1 in the draft) to read as follows: The intakes NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 specified in 14-6.1 shall have male National Hose threads if the apparatus is VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: to be used in the United States of America. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels it is important to be able to attach hose from one apparatus to another in mutual aid situations ————————————————- and the use of NH thread allows that. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #106) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-79-(14-2.4(a) & (b)) : Accept in Principle AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. RECOMMENDATION: All tables referencing pump requirements, i.e., ————————————————- Table 14.2.4.1(a) and 14.2.4.1(b), should be developed to include L/min and/ or IGPM. (Log #128) SUBSTANTIATION: The current Tables in NFPA 1901 reference GPM 1901-83-(14-6.1.3) : Reject and L/min only. The ULC Harmonization Task Group recommends a SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN Canadian application chart be developed to include English, metric, and RECOMMENDATION: Delete entire paragraph. Imperial Gallon readings in the pump requirement tables. SUBSTANTIATION: The warning does not state who is in danger and COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle why. The pump operator will not know what to do to prevent “Serious Add a metric table for the information contained in table 14-2.4.1(b) [see Injury or Death”. The only two logical conclusions that can be reached by table 16.2.4.1(c) in the draft]. Revise Table 14-2.4.1(a) (Table 16.2.4.1(a) in the operator are: 1) Don’t supply the inlet from a pressurized source or; 2) the draft) to reflect metric trade sizes for the rated capacity of pumps and Open the valve before the line is charged. Both of these conclusions are hose sizes (see draft). impractical from a firefighting perspective. A valved inlet must be used COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reviewed the metric when operating from a pressurized source, and opening the valve prior values in table 14-2.4.1(a) and modify them where necessary to conform to to charging the line will cause loss of prime when drafting. The warning trade sizes. The committee is also adding a metric table for the information could also be interpreted to mean that the valve should not be shut off when contained in table 14-2.4.1(b) [see table 14-2.4.1(c) in the draft] and is flowing water through it from a pressurized source, in which case it makes reviewing all metric values throughout the document to be sure they are no sense to have a valve. If the warning is in fact true, then valved intakes valid numbers or trade sizes. The committee is not adding imperial gallons should not be allowed at the pump operator’s position or they should be as they have been eliminated from the ULC documents. designed in such a way as to not cause “Serious Injury or Death” if supplied NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 by a pressurized source when the valve is closed. Finally, it is unclear VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: why the warning is required only for inlets located at the pump operator’s AFFIRMATIVE: 28 position. The same risk of injury is present no matter where the inlet is located. ————————————————- If the subject paragraph is not deleted, at least an explanation should appear (Log #42) in the Appendix to address the issues mentioned above. 1901-80-(14-5.4) : Reject COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject SUBMITTER: John D. Plout, Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. COMMITTEE STATEMENT:See Proposal 1901-84 (Log #CP58) which RECOMMENDATION: Revise text as follows: changes the wording of 14-6.1.3. “The entire discharge...shall be designed for a minimum working pressure NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 of 500 psi (3450 kPa) or 100 psi (690 kPa) over the maximum close VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: off pressure (whichever is greater) capable of withstanding a minimum AFFIRMATIVE: 28 hydrostatic burst pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa).” SUBSTANTIATION: In service and in testing, plumbing systems can see ————————————————- working pressures approaching or exceeding 500 psi. The components of the (Log #CP58) plumbing system that see these pressures must be designed to handle them 1901-84-(14-6.1.3) : Accept as part of their working pressure. With regard to hose, good design practice SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, stipulates, “maximum working pressure is just that - the highest possible RECOMMENDATION: Revise the wording of 14-6.1.3 (16.6.1.3 in the pressure at which a hose safely operates”. draft) to read as follows: Additionally when parts are pushed to their “burst” limits, permanent 14.6.1.3 A plate shall be provided on the pump operators panel that damage to hoses, clamps, valves, etc., can result. This can create situations states: “Warning: Death or serious injury might occur if proper operating of immediate or premature failure of the plumbing system. This would bring procedures are not followed. The pump operator, as well as individuals standard 14-5.4 in line with 14-7.4 as the same issues are present in either connecting supply or discharge hoses to the apparatus must be familiar with case. the operator’s manual, water hydraulics hazards and component limitations.” COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject Add an appendix to 14.6.1.3 to read as follows: COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is not aware of problems A.14.6.1.3 Pressurizing a valved suction inlet could create a dynamic water in the field resulting from the design of plumbing systems to the current hammer that might cause a hose or fitting failure resulting in injury or death standard and does not feel the cost of this change would match the expected to anyone in the immediate vicinity. Valves should be opened and closed results. slowly. 839 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA SUBSTANTIATION: Poor operating procedures have lead to injuries and (Log #CP60) deaths when hose has failed as a result of valves being opened or closed 1901-88-(14-6.6) : Accept too quickly. The committee feels that adding a plate on the pump panel SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, with a warning will advise users of the apparatus to be aware of the proper RECOMMENDATION: Revise the last sentence of 14-6.6 (see 16.6.6.1 in operating procedures and to use caution in opening and closing valves on the draft) to read as follows: both intakes and discharges. The pressure relief device shall discharge to atmosphere and the discharge COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept shall be piped or directed away from the pump operators position. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: The discharge from larger relief devices is such VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: that a pump operator could be injured when the valve opens. Therefore it is AFFIRMATIVE: 28 necessary for that discharge to be directed away from the pump operator. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept ————————————————- NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (Log #111) AFFIRMATIVE: 28 1901-85-(14-6.3) : Accept in Principle SUBMITTER: Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ————————————————- RECOMMENDATION: Add new text to read as follows: If the valve suction inlets are mounted by siamese or adapters on the drafting inlets they (Log #132) shall not project beyond the apparatus running board. 1901-89-(14-6.8) : Accept in Principle SUBSTANTIATION: The UL Harmonization/Adoption Task Group SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN recommends that the requirements for the inlets should not have hardware RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: that projects beyond the running boards. This wording was adopted from Caps or closures for 3.5 in. (89 mm) and smaller intakes shall be easily ULC S515-M88 4.2.3.2. removable from the intakes, but remain secured to the apparatus. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle SUBSTANTIATION: Delete the mandatory use of “chains or cables” to Add wording as 14-6.9 (16.6.10 in the draft) to read as follows: secure the caps and closures to the apparatus. This requirement is design If the suction inlets are to be equipped with a valve, siamese, or adapter that restrictive. It should not matter how they are secured. will remain in place while the apparatus is in motion, that valve, siamese, or COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle adapter shall not project beyond the apparatus running board. The purchaser Revise 14-6.8 (16.6.9 in the draft) to read as follows: shall specify if any valve, siamese, or adapter is to be permanently installed Caps or closures for 3.5 in. (89 mm) and smaller intakes shall be removable on an intake and identify the brand and model of such item. from the intakes, but remain secured to the apparatus. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Equipment that projects beyond the sides Also make the same wording change in 15-4.2.2 (17.5.2.2 in the draft) of the apparatus poses a safety problem as things could be struck when the COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The word “easily” is not being used as it is apparatus is in motion. This requirement will give the apparatus builder the not a measurable condition. needed information to design the apparatus correctly to accommodate the The change to 15-4.2.2 is for consistency of terminology and requirements loose components the fire department plans to install on pump suction inlets in the document. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP59) (Log #135) 1901-86-(14-6.5) : Accept 1901-90-(14-7.1) : Reject SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first sentence of 14-6.5 (16.6.5 in the RECOMMENDATION: Add the following (bold) heading to this draft) to read as shown: paragraph: Each valved intake shall be equipped with a bleeder valve having a minimum Quantity and Size. 3/4-in. (19-mm) pipe thread connection to bleed off air or water from a hose SUBSTANTIATION: Since there are three subparagraphs (14-7.1.1, 14- connected to the intake. 7.1.2, 14-7.1.3), this paragraph should have a heading to make the document Add an appendix to read as follows: easier to follow. The bleeder valve should be used prior to the removal of a hose or a cap or COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject other closure connected to an intake. The bleeder valve should also be used COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The NFPA style is to use bold headings at while filling a hose connected to an intake with water. Failure to use the each section (two digit level). At the subsection level, use of headings must bleeder valve in these situations might result in serious injury or death. be consistent within a section. Adding a heading here would require adding SUBSTANTIATION: The bleeder valve should be used for more that just headings to the other 9 subsections which are not currently numbered. bleeding off air or water from a hose connected to an inlet. If the inlet is Headings can be used without every subsection having a heading where a valved, pressure could be trapped between the valve and the cap or closure. subsection number appears with only a heading (no requirement). The appendix helps explain the use of the bleeder valve. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #15) 1901-91-(14-7.1.3) : Reject (Log #131) SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. 1901-87-(14-6.6) : Accept in Principle RECOMMENDATION: Add text to read as follows: SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN Each discharge rated outlet size of 3 1/2” or larger shall be equipped with RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: an adjustable automatic pressure relief device installed on the output side Each valved intake having a connection size of 3.5 in. (89 mm) or larger of the valve to bleed off excess pressure. The pressure relief device shall shall be equipped with an adjustable automatic pressure relief device discharge to atmosphere. installed on the supply side of the valve to bleed off pressure from a hose SUBSTANTIATION: This is to prevent over pressure on LDH, it also will connected to the valved intake. The pressure relief device shall discharge to help to take up return shockwaves from a water hammer in that line. atmosphere and be adjustable from 135 psi (or lower) to 185 psi (or higher). COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject SUBSTANTIATION: Currently the adjustable range of the pressure relief COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is a minimum standard, and the device is not specified. NFPA 1962 limits the operating pressure of large committee feels the requested requirement is beyond what is necessary as a diameter hose to 135-185 psi. If the goal of this paragraph is to prevent minimum. rupture of the large diameter hose due to excessive pressure, then the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 operator should be able to set the pressure relief device within the 135-185 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: psi range. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See committee action on Proposal 1901-92 ————————————————- (Log #22) which addresses the submitters concerns. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- 840 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #22) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-92-(14-7.1.3 (New), 14-6.6 & 14-10.7.3 (New)) : Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This sentence is being deleted. See SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. Proposal 1901-96 (Log #CP19). RECOMMENDATION: Add an additional sentence to read: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Automatic pressure relief device shall be adjustable from 90 to 185 psi with VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: a performance rating of a maximum of 60 psi pressure rise across the device AFFIRMATIVE: 28 while flowing 1000 gpm. SUBSTANTIATION: This adds performance requirements to the pressure ————————————————- relief device. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle (Log #CP19) Add additional text to 14-6.6 (16.6.6.2 and 16.6.6.3 in the draft) to read as 1901-96-(14-10.1.1) : Accept follows: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, The pressure relief device shall be adjustable from a minimum of 90 psi RECOMMENDATION: Delete the second sentence of 14-10.1.1. (620 kPa) to at least 185 psi (1275 kPa). The pressure relief device, when SUBSTANTIATION: With electronic controlled engine systems, the preset at 125 psi (860 kPa), shall not allow a pressure rise greater than 60 requirement stated in in this sentence is not necessary. psi (400 kPa) at the device inlet while flowing a minimum of 150 gpm (570 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept L/min). NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT:The committee did not add a new 14-7.1.3 in VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Proposal 1901-91 (Log #15) but did add appendix material which included AFFIRMATIVE: 28 information related to pressure relief devices on large diameter discharges and suggested performance requirements similar to those listed here for ————————————————- inclusion in 14-6.6. The committee has reduced the flow at which the (Log #123) pressure rise is measured as 1000 gpm is too much water to expect a pressure 1901-97-(14-10.2) : Reject relief device to discharge. SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN See also Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-118 (Log #14) which RECOMMENDATION: Delete the word “automatic”. adds a new requirement after current 14-6.6 instead of after 14-10.7.2 and SUBSTANTIATION: As currently written, only vehicles with automatic includes the revised wording recommended here in the committee action. chassis transmissions are required to have an interlock and indicators (as NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 required by 14-10.2.1, 14-10.2.2, 14-10.2.3). Vehicles with manual chassis VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: transmissions should also have an interlock and indicators for safety and ease AFFIRMATIVE: 28 of use. This recommendation is consistent with the requirements of 14-10.3 which covers pumps driven by transmission-mounted (SAE) PTO’s, front- ————————————————- of-engine crank shaft PTO’s and flywheel PTO’s. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject (Log #124) COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Manual transmissions do not need 1901-93-(14-7.4) : Accept in Principle interlocks, they are self correcting. The committee has reworked sections SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN 14-10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: the fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual All discharge outlets, except outlets to which a hose will be preconnected, chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 shall be equipped with caps or closures capable of withstanding a minimum (Log #125). hydrostatic burst pressure of 100 psi (690 kPa) over the maximum pump NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 close-off pressure or 500 psi (3450 kPa), whichever is greater. Where VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: adapters are provided on the discharge outlets, the closures shall fit on AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the adapters. Caps or closures for outlets 3.5 in. (89 mm) and smaller is size shall be easily removable from the outlet, but remain secured to the ————————————————- apparatus. SUBSTANTIATION: Delete the mandatory use of “chains or cables” to (Log #125) secure the caps and closures to the apparatus. This requirement is design 1901-98-(14-10.2) : Accept in Principle restrictive. It should not matter how they are secured. SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle RECOMMENDATION: Add the following (bold) heading to this Revise the third sentence of the suggested text to read as follows: paragraph: Caps or closures for outlets 3 1/2 in. (90 mm) and smaller is size shall be Stationary pumps driven through split shaft PTO’s. removable from the outlet, but remain secured to the apparatus. SUBSTANTIATION: Currently the requirements of 14-10.2, 14-10.3 and Also make the same wording change in 15-4.2.2 14-10.4 as they apply to different pump drive arrangements are difficult for COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The word “easily” is not being used as it is the reader to distinguish. Adding the heading to the paragraph will make the not a measurable condition. document easier to understand. The change to 15-4.2.2 is for consistency of terminology and requirements COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle in the document. Revise 14-10.2 through 14-10.5 to read as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 14-10.2 Stationary Pump Driven Through Split Shaft PTO – Automatic VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with an automatic AFFIRMATIVE: 28 chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine through the transmission’s main driveline, and the apparatus is to be used for ————————————————- stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode (Log #134) of operation so that the pumping system can be operated from the pump 1901-94-(14-10.1) : Accept operator’s position. SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN 14-10.2.1* A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving RECOMMENDATION: Add the following (bold) heading to this compartment to indicate that the pump shift process has been successfully paragraph: completed. General Provisions. 14-10.2.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving SUBSTANTIATION: The length and complexity of the subsections of 14- compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission 10 make it difficult for the reader to distinguish. Adding the heading to the is in pump gear, and the parking brake is engaged. paragraph will make the document easier to understand. 14-10.2.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 14-10.3 Stationary Pump Driven Through Split Shaft PTO – Manual AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with an manual chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine through ————————————————- the transmission’s main driveline, and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure (Log #90) that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode 1901-95-(14-10.1.1) : Reject of operation so that the pumping system can be operated from the pump SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company operator’s position. RECOMMENDATION: Change the last sentence to read: “Where 14-10.3.1* A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving an engine fan clutch is furnished which is capable of being engaged or compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully disengaged through external controls, the fan shall be automatically engaged completed. for pumping operations. 14-10.3.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving SUBSTANTIATION: Clarifies intent. Current wording of automatic fan compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is clutch is unclear. Also provides better syntax with first sentence. engaged. 841 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 14-10.3.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump 14-10.7.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode operator’s panel that is energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is or that the parking brake is engaged. energized or when the parking brake is engaged. 14-10.4 Stationary Pump Driven Through Transmission-Mounted PTO, 14-10.8 Stationary Pumps Driven Through Transfer Case PTO’s Front-Of-Engine Crank Shaft PTO, Or Engine Flywheel PTO – Automatic – Automatic Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with an automatic an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted engine through the transmission’s main driveline and through a transfer case, (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only with the chassis system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components transmission in neutral, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that are engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the pumping system the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode of can be operated from the pump operator’s position. operation so that the pump system can be operated from the pump operator’s 14-10.8.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving position. compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully 14-10.4.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving completed. compartment and on the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump 14-10.8.2 An “Ok to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving shift has been successfully completed. compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission 14-10.4.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving is in pump gear, the transfer case drive to the chassis wheels is in neutral and compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission the parking brake is engaged. is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. 14-10.8.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump 14-10.4.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “Ok to Pump” mode or operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 14-10.9 Stationary Pumps Driven Through Transfer Case PTO’s – Manual 14-10.5 Stationary Pump Driven Through Transmission-Mounted PTO, Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with a manual Front-Of-Engine Crank Shaft PTO, Or Engine Flywheel PTO – Manual chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine through Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with an manual the transmission’s main driveline and through a transfer case, and the chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only with the chassis the pumping mode of operation so that the pumping system can be operated transmission in neutral, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that from the pump operator’s position. the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode of 14-10.9.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving operation so that the pump system can be operated from the pump operator’s compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully position. completed. 14-10.5.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving 14-10.9.2 An “Okay to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment and on the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the transfer case drive to shift has been successfully completed. the chassis wheels is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 14-10.5.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 14-10.9.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “Ok to Pump” mode or engaged. that the parking brake is engaged. 14-10.5.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump 14-10.10 Pump Operator’s Panel Engine Speed Advancement -– Automatic operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode Chassis Transmission. An interlock system shall be provided to prevent or that the parking brake is engaged. advancement of the engine speed at the pump operator’s panel unless the 14-10.6 Stationary and “Pump and Roll” Pump – Automatic Chassis chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged, or the Transmissions. Where the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” mode. (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, 14-10.11 Pump Operator’s Panel Engine Speed Advancement -– Manual and the apparatus is designed to be used in both the stationary pumping Chassis Transmission. An interlock system shall be provided to prevent mode and the “pump and roll” pumping mode with the automatic chassis advancement of the engine speed at the pump operator’s panel unless the transmission in neutral for stationary pumping and in a road gear for pump parking brake is engaged or the apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” mode. and roll pumping, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the Add appendix material to A-14-10.2.1 to read as follows: pump drive system components are properly engaged in the pumping mode A-14-10.2.1 Completion of the pump shift might require that the chassis of operation so that the apparatus can be operated in either stationary or transmission be shifted into pump gear. pump and roll pumping mode. Add appendix material to A-14-10.3.1 to read as follows: 14-10.6.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving A-14-10.3.1 Completion of the pump shift might require that the chassis compartment and at the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump shift transmission be shifted into pump gear. has been successfully completed. Renumber existing 14-10.6 through 14-10.9 as 14-10.12 through 14-10.15 14-10.6.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Paragraphs 14-10.2 through 14-10.5 are compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission being rewritten to better clarify the requirements based on whether the fire is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. An “OK to Pump and apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual chassis Roll” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment and shall be transmission. energized when the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in road NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 gear, and the parking brake is released. When the “OK to Pump and Roll” VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: indicator is energized, the “OK to Pump” indicator shall not be energized. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 14-10.6.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that is energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is ————————————————- energized or when the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. (Log #94) 14-10.7 Stationary and “Pump and Roll” Pumps -– Manual Chassis 1901-99-(14-10.2.1) : Reject Transmissions. Where the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and RECOMMENDATION: Change text to read: “A “Pump Engaged” the apparatus is designed to be used in both the stationary pumping mode indicator and an “Ok to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving and the “pump and roll” pumping mode with the chassis transmission in compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully completed neutral for stationary pumping or in a road gear for pump and roll pumping, and the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in neutral, and the an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system parking brake is engaged.” components are properly engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that SUBSTANTIATION: Identifies indicator requirements as required by the apparatus can be operated in either stationary or pump and roll pumping 14-10.1 and identifies those indicators that are to be provided in the driving mode. compartment with one paragraph. See related proposal to delete 14-10.2.2. 14-10.7.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject compartment and at the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump shift COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- has been successfully completed. 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the 14-10.7.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 is engaged. An “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator shall be provided in the (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. driving compartment and shall be energized when the pump is engaged and NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 the parking brake is released. When the “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator is VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: energized, the “OK to Pump” indicator shall not be energized. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————-

842 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #121) identified in 14-10.2 and its sub-paragraphs. The only indicator on 1901-100-(14-10.2.1) : Reject operator’s panel is “Throttle Ready”. SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject RECOMMENDATION: Delete entire paragraph. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- SUBSTANTIATION: Delete the requirement for having a “Pump 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the Engaged” indicator in the driving compartment. The “OK to Pump” fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual indicator required by 14-10.2.2 is sufficient for safe, efficient operation. chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 The only legitimate reason for a “Pump Engaged” indicator is to warn the (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. operator that the pump is engaged when the vehicle is in motion (which NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 would damage the pump) and this is not possible when the pump is driven VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: by the chassis engine through the transmission’s main drive line. If the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 rationale behind this requirement is to aid the operator in the proper shifting sequence, it is not working. In many cases it is not possible to engage the ————————————————- pump without engaging the chassis transmission (due to butt tooth conditions with the meshing of gears). Therefore, the sequence of steps the operator (Log #122) must take to achieve the “OK to Pump” mode is the same whether or not 1901-104-(14-10.3.1) : Reject the pump shift has been successfully completed before shifting the chassis SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN transmission into pumping gear. The presence of the “Pump Engaged” light RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: is confusing to the operator and may compromise scene safety if the operator A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment incorrectly concludes that it is not possible to engage the pump because the to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully completed. “Pump Engaged” light does not illuminate immediately after the control is SUBSTANTIATION: Delete the requirement for having a “Pump moved to the “Pump” position. Engaged” indicator at the pump operator’s position. The “Throttle Ready” COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject indicator required by 14-10.3.3 is sufficient for safe, efficient operation. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- The pump operator does not need to know if the pump is engaged (when 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the standing at the pump operator’s position) as evidenced by the absence of fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual this requirement when dealing with pumps driven through split shaft PTO’s chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 (ref 14-10.2.1). Also, the only time the “Pump Engaged” indicator would be (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. energized without the “Throttle Ready” indicator being energized is if the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 pump is engaged and the chassis transmission is not in neutral and/or the VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: parking brake is not engaged - both of which must be corrected by the pump AFFIRMATIVE: 28 operator before he/she leaves the driving compartment. Similarly, the only reason for a “Pump Engaged” indicator is to warn the operator that the pump ————————————————- is engaged when the vehicle is in motion and providing this indication at the pump operator’s position is useless. (Log #96) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-101-(14-10.2.2) : Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the RECOMMENDATION: Delete paragraph. fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual SUBSTANTIATION: Information combined in 14-10.2.1 via another chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 proposal. (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 ————————————————- (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #98) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-105-(14-10.3.2) : Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company RECOMMENDATION: Delete paragraph. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: Information combined in 14-10.3.1 via another proposal. (Log #126) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-102-(14-10.3) : Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the RECOMMENDATION: Add the following (bold) heading to this fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual paragraph: chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 Stationary pumps driven through transmission- mounted, front-of-engine (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. crank shaft, or engine flywheel PTO’s. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: Currently the requirements of 14-10.2, 14-10.3 and VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 14-10.4 as they apply to different pump drive arrangements are difficult for AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the reader to distinguish. Adding the heading to the paragraph will make the document easier to understand. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- (Log #119) 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the 1901-106-(14-10.3.3) : Reject fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 panel that is energized when the chassis transmission is in neutral and the VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: parking brake is engaged. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: Simplify. It is redundant to state that the “Throttle Ready” indicator be energized when the ‘OK to Pump” indicator is energized ————————————————- since per 14-10.3.2, for the “OK to Pump” indicator to be energized, the chassis transmission must be in neutral and the parking brake must be (Log #97) engaged. This recommendation does not change the requirements, it simply 1901-103-(14-10.3.1) : Reject eliminates unnecessary text. SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject RECOMMENDATION: Change text to read: “A “Pump Engaged” COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- indicator and an “Ok to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully completed fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual and the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in neutral, and the chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 parking brake is engaged. (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. SUBSTANTIATION: Identifies indicator requirements as required by NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 14-10.1 and identifies those indicators that are to be provided in the driving VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: compartment with one paragraph. See related proposal to delete 14-10.3.2. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Change also eliminates placing “Pump Engaged” indicator on the pump operator’s panel. This change provides consistency with requirements ————————————————- 843 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #120) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-107-(14-10.4) : Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the RECOMMENDATION: Delete the word “automatic”. fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual SUBSTANTIATION: As currently written, only vehicles with automatic chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 chassis transmissions are required to have an interlock and indicators (as (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. required by 14.10.4.1, 14.10.4.2, 14-10.4.3). Vehicles with manual chassis NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 transmissions should also have an interlock and indicators for safety and ease VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: of use. This recommendation is consistent with the requirements of 14-10.3 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 which covers the exact same types of pumps that do not have pump and roll capabilities. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- (Log #100) 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the 1901-111-(14-10.4.2) : Reject fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 RECOMMENDATION: Change first sentence to read as follows: “A (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. “Pump Engaged” indicator and an “Ok to Pump” indicator shall be provided NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 in the driving compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: successfully completed and the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is AFFIRMATIVE: 28 in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged.” SUBSTANTIATION: Identifies indicator requirements as required by ————————————————- 14-10.1 and identifies those indicators that are to be provided in the driving compartment with one paragraph. (Log #127) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-108-(14-10.4) : Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the RECOMMENDATION: Add the following (bold) heading to this fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual paragraph: chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 “Pump and roll” pumps driven through transmission-mounted, front-of- (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. engine crank shaft, or engine flywheel PTO’s. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: Currently the requirements of 14-10.2, 14-10.3 and VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 14-10.4 as they apply to different pump drive arrangements are difficult for AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the reader to distinguish. Adding the heading to the paragraph will make the document easier to understand. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle (Log #118) COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- 1901-112-(14-10.4.2) : Reject 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in neutral, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 and the parking brake is engaged. An “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: shall be provided in the driving compartment and shall be energized when AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in pump and roll gear, and the parking brake is released. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: 1. Replace “road gear” in the last sentence with “pump and roll gear” for clarity. Most apparatus designed for pump and (Log #99) roll are required to be in a particular road gear for efficient operation. The 1901-109-(14-10.4.1) : Reject indicator should not indicate that it is OK to pump until a proper road gear SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company is selected. For example, if a particular apparatus will not pump when the RECOMMENDATION: Delete paragraph. chassis transmission is in reverse gear, then the “OK to Pump and Roll” SUBSTANTIATION: Information regarding the “Pump Engaged” indicator should not be energized when the chassis transmission is in reverse indicator in driving compartment combined in 14-10.4.2 via another gear. proposal. Change also eliminated placing “Pump Engaged” indicator on the 2. Delete the last sentence for simplification (When the “OK to Pump pump operator’s panel. This change provides consistency with requirements and Roll” indicator is energized, the “OK to Pump” indicator shall not be identified in 14-10.2 and its sub-paragraphs. The only indicator on energized.). It is impossible for them to be energized at the same time since operator’s panel is “Throttle Ready”. one requires the parking brake to be engaged and the other requires it to be COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject released. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #117) 1901-110-(14-10.4.1) : Reject (Log #115) SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN 1901-113-(14-10.4.3) : Reject RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully completed. A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s SUBSTANTIATION: Delete the requirement for having a “Pump panel that is energized when the chassis transmission is in neutral and the Engaged” indicator at the pump operator’s position. The “Throttle Ready” parking brake engaged. indicator required by 14-10.4.3 is sufficient for safe, efficient operation. SUBSTANTIATION: Simplify. It is redundant to state that the “Throttle The pump operator does not need to know if the pump is engaged (when Ready” indicator be energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is standing at the pump operator’s position) as evidenced by the absence of energized since per 14-10.4.2, for the “OK to Pump” indicator to be this requirement when dealing with pumps driven through split shaft PTO’s energized, the chassis transmission must be in neutral and the parking brake (ref 14-10.2.1). Also, the only time the “Pump Engaged” indicator would be must be engaged. This recommendation does not change the requirements, it energized without the “Throttle Ready” indicator being energized is if the simply eliminates unnecessary text. pump is engaged and the chassis transmission is not in neutral and/or the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject parking brake is not engaged - both of which must be corrected by the pump COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- operator before he/she leaves the driving compartment. Similarly, the only 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the reason for a “Pump Engaged” indicator is to warn the operator that the pump fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual is engaged when the vehicle is in motion and providing this indication at the chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 pump operator’s position is useless. (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. 844 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #14) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-118-(14-10.7.3) : Accept in Principle AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. RECOMMENDATION: Add a new paragraph after 14-10.7.2 to read: ————————————————- An adjustable automatic pressure relief device shall be installed on the pump system to bleed off pressure from a hose connected to the pump intake. The (Log #116) pressure relief device shall discharge to atmosphere. 1901-114-(14-10.5) : Reject SUBSTANTIATION: This reinstates suction pump valve lost in 1996 SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN rewrite. RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle An interlock system shall be provided to prevent advancement of the engine Add a new 14-6.7 (see 16.6.7 in the draft) to read as follows: speed at the pump operator’s panel unless the “Throttle Ready” indicator is If the pump is equipped with one or more intakes larger than 3 1/2 in. (89 energized. mm) that are not valved, an adjustable automatic pressure relief device shall SUBSTANTIATION: Simplify the text. This recommendation does not be installed on the pump system to bleed off excess pressure from a hose change the requirements - the “Throttle Ready” indicator is only energized connected to the pump intake. The automatic pressure relief device shall when all of the current requirements listed in this paragraph are met (chassis be adjustable from a minimum of 90 psi (620 kPa) to at least 185 psi (1275 transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged, or the apparatus kPa). The pressure relief device, when preset at 125 psi (860 kPa), shall not is in “OK to Pump” mode). allow a pressure rise greater than 60 psi (400 kPa) at the device inlet while COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject flowing a minimum of 150 gpm (570 L/min). The pressure relief device shall COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has reworked sections 14- discharge to atmosphere. 10.2 through 14-10.5 to better clarify the requirements based on whether the Renumber current 14-6.7 and 14-6.8 as 14-6.8 and 14-6.9. fire apparatus is driven by an automatic chassis transmission or a manual COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is adding the requested chassis transmission. See Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-98 requirement for a pressure relief device together with the performance (Log #125). The rewrite took into consideration the submitters concerns. requirements for the pressure relief device. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————-

(Log #3) (Log #16) 1901-115-(14-10.7.1) : Accept in Part 1901-119-(14-10.7.3 & 14-10.7.4) : Reject NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-127 (Log #83) which was SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-217. RECOMMENDATION: Change 14-10.7.3 to 14-10.7.4 and change 14- SUBMITTER: L. H. Stevens, Fire Rescue Magazine/Rep. JEMS 10.7.4 to 14-10.7.5. RECOMMENDATION: Delete 30 psi. List as 10 psi and change 100 psi SUBSTANTIATION: This makes room for new 14-10.7.3. to 70 psi. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject SUBSTANTIATION: 30 psi jump will not protect firefighters on NFPA COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See committee meeting action on Proposal smooth bore tips on NFPA hose compliments. Dangerous surges will 1901-118 (Log #14) which added this wording in a different section so it is increase nozzle reaction to unsafe levels. Departments using low pressure not necessary to renumber. tips will have the same problems. The range of pressure falls below a 2 in. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 tip of a 150 ft 2 1/2 in. hose. So 70 psi should be the base line not 100 psi. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Part AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Change 100 psi to 70 psi in 14-10.7.1(1) [16.10.13.1(1) in the draft]. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels the 30 psi rise is ————————————————- reasonable given the fact that pressure control systems are mechanical systems. A 30 psi rise at the pump will not translate to a 30 psi at the nozzle (Log #93) given the increased friction loss as more water moves through the hose. The 1901-120-(14-10.7.4) : Accept purchaser can specify a lower increase if they feel it necessary. SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Delete paragraph. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: The pressure control system is certified as one of AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the requirements included in 14-13, specifically stated in 14-13.1.1 and 14- 13.4. Also, 2-14, Data Required of the Contractor, makes no mention of this ————————————————- certification and it historically has not been provided. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #13) Also move the appendix material currently associated with 14-10.7.4 to 1901-116-(14-10.7.1(1)) : Accept in Principle become the appendix to 14-10.7.1. SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The appendix material is helpful and RECOMMENDATION: Over a range of pressure from 100 50 psi to 300 should be retained. psi. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: This expands the relief valve/governor performance VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: to operate with up to 100 psi hydraulic relay lines. It also improves control at AFFIRMATIVE: 28 low pressure handline operations. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle ————————————————- COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Committee Meeting Action on (Log #91) Proposal 1901-115 (Log #3). 1901-121-(14-10.8) : Accept in Part NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Revise second sentence to read: “It shall be AFFIRMATIVE: 28 capable of meeting the requirements of 14-2.3.2 and 14-2.3.3. Delete the remainder of the paragraph.” ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: 14-10 provides requirements for pump controls. The performance capability requirements of the priming device are provided (Log #92) in 14-2.3.2 and 14-2.3.3. No need to repeat here. Note that performance 1901-117-(14-10.7.1(2)) : Accept requirements in original text have been proposed for inclusion in 14-2.3.3 SUBMITTER: Thomas J. Mettler, Waterous Company via a separate proposal. Substantiation for elimination of text stating: “An RECOMMENDATION: Change text to read: “With initial engine and exhaust shall not be used” - this requirement is design restrictive and also is pump controls set to produce a range of flows from 150 gpm (568 L/Min) to not defined. The priming device should be performance based. the rated capacity of the pump.” COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Part SUBSTANTIATION: Requirement of original wording is impossible to Revise the second sentence as shown and delete the third sentence. Retain meet when all discharge valves are closed. the fourth sentence. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The fourth sentence is being left here NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 rather than being moved to 14-2.3.3 because it really deals with the primer VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: and not the capability of the pump to maintain a vacuum. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- 845 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #136) (Log #CP62) 1901-122-(14-12.1) : Accept 1901-126-(14-13.2.1.3) : Accept SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add the following (bold) heading to this RECOMMENDATION: Delete the last sentence of 14-13.2.1.3 and add paragraph: the following text to that paragraph (see 16.13.2.1.3.2 and 16.13.2.1.3.3 in the Pump operator’s panel. draft): SUBSTANTIATION: Since there are three sub-paragraphs (14-12.1.1, If the vehicle is equipped with a fixed power source driven by the same 14-12.1.2, 14-12.1.3), this paragraph should have a heading to make the engine that drives the fire pump, it shall be running at a minimum of 50 document easier to follow. percent of its rated capacity throughout the pumping portion of the pump COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept test. The following devices shall be permitted to be turned off or not NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 operating during the pump test. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (1) Aerial hydraulic pump AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (2) Foam pump (3) Hydraulically driven equipment ————————————————- (4) Winch (Log #137) (5) Windshield wipers 1901-123-(14-12.1.4) : Reject (6) Four-way hazard flashers SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN SUBSTANTIATION: As a minimum standard, the committee has tried to RECOMMENDATION: Develop a specification for a pump overheat make the pumping test reflective of real use conditions by defining certain indicator and/or automatic bypass line. devices that do not need to be running during the pump tests. The purchaser SUBSTANTIATION: To warn the operator when the pump overheats. can specify these devices be running during the test if their needs are such in Overheating can cause catastrophic failure of the pump without warning and actual application. is a significant safety concern. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels a requirement for a VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: pump overheat indicator and/or automatic bypass line is beyond what should AFFIRMATIVE: 28 be required in a minimum standard. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ————————————————- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #CP14) 1901-127-(14-13.2.2.6) : Accept ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 14-13.2.2.6 (16.13.2.2.6 in the draft) to (Log #133) read as follows: 1901-124-(14-12.2) : Reject The engine speed-measuring equipment shall consist of a nonadjustable SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN tachometer supplied from the engine or transmission electronics, a revolution RECOMMENDATION: Combine 14-12.2 and 14-12.2.1 and renumber the counter on a checking shaft outlet and a stop watch, or other engine speed- combination as 14-12.1.4. Accordingly, renumber 14-12.2.1.1 as 14-12.1.4.1; measuring means that is accurate to within + 50 rpm of actual speed. and renumber 14-12.2.1.2 as 14-12.1.4.2. SUBSTANTIATION: This proposed wording is clearer than the existing SUBSTANTIATION: The material in this section applies to 14-12.1, not wording and consistent with wording in NFPA 1911. 14-12. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: While it may make logical sense to VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: move the material that is in 14-2.2 and its subparagraphs under 14-2.1, the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NFPA manual of style now requires each paragraph to contain only one requirement. Accordingly, 14-2.2 and its subparagraphs are being further ————————————————- subdivided (see draft). Moving the text would require numbering to the seventh and eighth levels which is unwieldily. The committee feels that the (Log #CP9) current requirements are understood and should be maintaining as a separate 1901-128-(14-13.2.3.1) : Accept subsection. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first sentence of 14-13.2.3.1 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (16.13.2.3.3 of the draft) to read as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump rated at 750 gpm (3000 2850 L/min) or greater, the pump shall be subjected to a 3-hour pumping test from ————————————————- draft consisting of 2 hours of continuous pumping at rated capacity ..... (Log #26) SUBSTANTIATION: The document does not actually say that the test 1901-125-(14-12.2.1) : Accept in Principle has to be from draft although it is implied. Adding the 2 words clarifies the SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates conditions. The change to the metric value is for consistency with the metric RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: values stated in the document. Master pump intake and pump discharge pressure indicating devices shall COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept be located within 8 in. (200 mm) of each other edge to edge, with the intake NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 pressure indicating device to the left of or above the pump discharge pressure VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: indicating device. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: Mandating the intake gauge be located only to the left of the discharge gauge restricts the physical parameters in which a pump ————————————————- panel can be laid out - placing an undue limitation upon the design process. With emphasis being placed upon multi-functional roles of fire apparatus, (Log #CP10) physical space is at a premium. Pump manufacturer(s) are manufacturing 1901-129-(14-13.2.3.2) : Accept pumps allowing smaller width pump houses. The side to side requirement SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, prohibits designing a pump panel that is narrow in width and long vertically. RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first sentence of 14-13.2.3.2 Allowing the master gauges to be placed vertically will give manufacturers (16.13.2.3.4 of the draft) to read as follows: flexibility in design. Specifying the intake pressure device be located below If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump rated at less than 750 gpm the discharge pressure device follows the established custom of water “in on (3000 2850 L/min), the pump shall be subjected to a 50-minute pumping the bottom” and “out on the top”. test from draft consisting of 1/2 hour of continuous pumping at rated COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle capacity ...... Revise 14-12.2.1 (16.12.2.1 in the draft) to read as follows: SUBSTANTIATION: The document does not actually say that the test Master pump intake and pump discharge pressure indicating devices has to be from draft although it is implied. Adding the 2 words clarifies the shall be located within 8 in. (200 mm) of each other edge to edge, with the conditions. The change to the metric value is for consistency with the metric intake pressure indicating device to the left of or below the pump discharge values stated in the document. pressure indicating device. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Suction intakes are lower than discharge NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 outlets on the pump so the intake gauge should be lower rather than higher if VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: they are not side-by-side. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: ————————————————- AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- 846 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #7) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle in Part 1901-130-(14-13.4) : Reject Add a new section 15-2 (17.2 in the draft) to read as follows. NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-140 (Log #161) which 15-2 Pump Performance. was held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-217. 15-2.1 Auxiliary pumps shall be rated as either high pressure or medium SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN pressure. RECOMMENDATION: Add additional steps to test the Pressure Control 15-2.2 The performance of a high pressure auxiliary pump shall be a System from a pressurized water source pursuant to the requirements of 14- minimum of 66 gpm (250 L/min) at 600 psi (40 bar) discharge pressure 10.7.1. for each high pressure hose reel connected to it that can be operated SUBSTANTIATION: To fulfill the requirements of 14-10.7.1, some type of simultaneously. device is required to control intake pressure. As evidenced by the numerous 15-2.3 Medium pressure auxiliary pumps. changes to this standard over the past several years as it relates to the use 15-2.3.1 The pump shall have one of the following rated capacities: 30 of large diameter hose and excessive intake pressures, NFPA obviously gpm (115 L/min), 60 gpm (230 L/min), 90 gpm (345 L/min), 120 gpm (460 regards the intake pressure control device as an important safety concern. L/min), 250 gpm (1000 L/min) or 350 gpm (1300 L/min). Even though these devices were first required by this standard in 1991, 15-2.3.2 The pump shall be capable of pumping 100 percent of its rated they are still relatively new and in many ways unproven in the fire industry. capacity at 150 psi (10 bar) discharge pressure, 70 percent of its rated Coupled with the fact that many pressure control systems contain interactive capacity at 200 psi (14 bar) discharge pressure, and 50 percent of its rated components supplied by different manufacturers, the only way to ensure that capacity at 250 psi (17 bar) discharge pressure. they function correctly is to test them. The submitter realizes that this is a 15-2.4 The rating for auxiliary pumps shall be based on the pump taking minimum standard, and that the reader is advised in A-14-10.7.4 that “due to water from the apparatus water tank. the importance of these systems, the authority having jurisdiction might wish Delete the last sentence of A-15-1. to have performance tests conducted”. The submitter further realizes that COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has developed a new mandatory testing of the complete system will add expense to the apparatus. section dealing with the performance requirements for auxiliary pumps. However, the pressure control system plays a vital role in fireground safety The ratings for high pressure pumps is being tied to the number of hose and complete testing of the system should be required. reels that can be operated simultaneously from the pump, which could be COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject different from the number of hose reels on the apparatus. This new section COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Additional testing is unnecessary as the also addresses the performance of medium pressure pumps as requested in requirement in 14-10.7.1 is for net pump pressure. The committee feels the proposal 1901-134 (Log #17). The performance is being tied to operation test is verifying that the pressure control is working properly. Net pump from the water tank on the apparatus as that is the typical fire fighting pressure does not change with suction conditions. Pressure relief systems are application. required to work on net pump pressure. The last sentence of A-15-1 is being deleted as it no longer applies with the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 changes defined in this proposal. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP15) (Log #17) 1901-131-(14-13.5.1, 14-13.6) : Accept 1901-134-(15-1.2 (New) ) : Accept in Principle SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. RECOMMENDATION: Delete 14-13.5.1 RECOMMENDATION: Add min. pump ratings: Add a new sentence after the first sentence of 14-13.6 to read as follows Medium pressure auxiliary pumps shall meet the following performance, (see 16.13.6 of the draft): 100% capacity @ 150 psi, 70% capacity @ 200 psi and 50% capacity @ 250 At altitudes above 2000 ft (610 m), the vacuum attained shall be permitted to psi. Performance is from the apparatus water tank(s). Pump rating shall be be less than 22 in. Hg (0.75 bar) by 1 in. Hg (0.034 bar) for each 1000 ft (305 30, 60, 90, 120 or 250 gpm. m) of altitude above 2000 ft (610 m). SUBSTANTIATION: We need rating points to allow for products to be SUBSTANTIATION: The purpose of the priming device test is to ensure built and tested to. that the pump can be primed within the time frames established in the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle standard. Paragraph 14-13.5.1 really deals with the vacuum test which is COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Committee Meeting Action on covered in 14-13.6 and adding the proposed sentence the 14-13.6 provides Proposal 1901-133 (Log #18). the capability to perform vacuum tests at higher elevations without penalty. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #12) 1901-135-(Chapter 16) : Accept (Log #70) SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. 1901-132-(14-13.7(i)) : Accept RECOMMENDATION: Eliminate Chapter 16, Water Transfer Pump & SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service Associated Equipment. RECOMMENDATION: Change 5 psi to 10 psi in 14-13.7(i) and the SUBSTANTIATION: This class of pumps is not sold or installed on following paragraph. NFPA 1901 trucks. This chapter could cause a very dangerous safety related Also add at end of paragraph following 14-13.7(i): “ Other means maybe problem. If someone built a truck with one of this kind of pump, they may used to determine the volume of water pumped from the tank such as a believe it can replace a real fire pump and get into trouble and kill someone. totalizing flow meter, weighing the truck before and after, or refilling the Why have a chapter in 1901 to cover a range of pump not normally used tank using a totalizing flow meter.” which could cause a problem. SUBSTANTIATION: Ten psi pressure drop is much easier to observe than COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept a 5 psi drop. More accurate and easier methods of determining tank water NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 volume should be allowed and used. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT:The pressure is being changed in 2 places, once in 14-13.7(i) and once in the paragraph following 14.13.7(i) (see ————————————————- 16.13.7.1(i) and 16.13.7.2 in the draft). NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #28) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-136-(17-4.1) : Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Ron W. French, W. Chicago, IL RECOMMENDATION: Add new paragraph 17-4.1.1 to read: ————————————————- “If the tank fill required by paragraph 17-4.1 is more than 65” above the ground or more than 24” from the outside of the vehicle, a second tank fill 1 (Log #18) shall be provided. The second tank fill shall consist of a 2 /2 in. NH female 1901-133-(15-1.1 (New) ) : Accept in Principle in Part swivel inlet with plug and chain and a check valve. It shall be mounted on SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. the exterior of the water tank and not more than 60” above ground level. RECOMMENDATION: Add min. pump ratings: SUBSTANTIATION: To reduce fireman fall injuries caused by a For each high pressure hose reel the pump rating shall be 66 gpm @ 600 psi requirement to ascend to the top of the vehicle in order to fill the water tank. (250 lpm @ 40 bar). COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject SUBSTANTIATION: This is the international standard for high pressure COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels this is beyond what hose reels performance. should be required in a minimum standard and the purchaser can specify additional tank fill arrangements if they desire such capability. 847 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP64) (Log #44) 1901-140-(18-2.9) : Accept 1901-137-(18-2.5) : Accept in Principle SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA RECOMMENDATION:Revise the first sentence of 18-2.9 (20.2.9 of the RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: draft) to read as shown: The ladder rungs shall be spaced on maximum 356 mm (14 in. ) centers Two folding steps with skid-resistant surfaces that meet the skid-resistant and minimum 11.8 in. (300 mm) and shall have a skid resistant surface or requirements of 13-7.3 shall be provided on the ladder for use by the ladder covering. pipe-monitor operator. SUBSTANTIATION: 300 mm (11.8 in.) is a dimension that is used SUBSTANTIATION: The added wording clarifies that these steps need world wide for rung spacing on aerial ladders. Short people and female to meet the requirements for skid resistance defined in chapter 13 of the fire fighters feel safer and more comfortable on a ladder with shorter steps. document. Furthermore fire fighters are used to 12 in. rung spacing from their ground COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept ladders (NFPA 1931, Section 2-1.3.5 Rungs shall be spaced on between 12 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 in. and 14 in. (305-356 mm) centers). A ladder with shorter rung spacing has VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: more rungs, which makes the ladder stiffer against torsion. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle Revise 18-2.5 (20.2.5 of the draft) to read as follows: ————————————————- The ladder rungs shall be equally spaced on a maximum 14 in. (356 mm) centers and minimum 11.75 in. (300 mm) centers and shall have a skid (Log #45) resistant surface or covering. 1901-141-(18-2.11) : Accept COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is adding the word equally SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA so as to ensure that rung spacing does not change along the length of the RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: ladder. Steps, with the exception of the ground to the first step, shall be spaced on NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 no more than 457 mm 366 mm (18 in.) centers. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: 18 in. equals 457 mm. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ————————————————- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #29) 1901-138-(18-2.8) : Reject ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Craig Davis, The City of Midwest City, Fleet Services Department (Log #CP65) RECOMMENDATION: Continuous top rails shall be provided on the 1901-142-(18-2.11) : Accept ladder, shall have a minimum width of 1 in. (25 mm), and shall be at a SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, minimum height of 12 in. (305) above the centerline of the all rungs, RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first sentence of 18-2.11 (20.2.11 of including the outermost rung of the outermost fly section. the draft) to read as follows: SUBSTANTIATION: The problem that the standard, as written, caused The apparatus shall be equipped with skid-resistant steps that meet the skid was a difference in interpretation between the aerial manufacturer and us. resistance requirements of 13-7.3 or with rungs that provide a path at any Our city accepted delivery of a non-compliant apparatus because the aerial degree of elevation from the bottom rung of the aerial ladder to the ground. manufacturer was able to interpret the standard to their benefit. SUBSTANTIATION: The added wording clarifies that these steps need The aerial manufacturer convinced our purchasing agent that since the to meet the requirements for skid resistance defined in chapter 13 of the ladder actually measured longer than their advertised length they only document. needed top railing for the advertised length, not the “extra”. A stack of COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept memos accompanied this statement, from the aerial manufacturer’s president NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 and other various people, that guaranteed the aerial device in question was VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: totally compliant. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 The top rail standard 18-2,8 did not provide us with enough design explanations to discount their statements and memos. This resulted in the ————————————————- final acceptance of an apparatus that has, in my opinion, a top rail design flaw that has the potential to produce an unsafe condition for firefighters and (Log #CP66) citizens. I feel a minor wording change to this standard would be sufficient 1901-143-(18-2.16.6, 18-7.7.6) : Accept to help purchasing agents around the country ward off aerial devices with SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, similar non-compliant designs. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 18-2.13.6 and 18-7.7.6 (20.2.13.6 and In the future, the City of Midwest City will use our specification writing 20.7.7.6 of the draft) to read as follows: to address this issue. Included with this proposal is the supporting The quality of the breathing air shall meet the requirements of NFPA documentation for the apparatus mentioned above. 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Supporting material is available for review at NFPA Headquarters. Respiratory Protection. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject SUBSTANTIATION: NFPA is processing a new document that defines COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels the user should be the requirements for breathing air and this change is to reference the new able to designate a tapered ladder tip to provide better egress from the ladder document. tip to a window or parapet. See Committee Proposal 1901-139 (Log #CP24) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept which clarifies this requirement. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP5) (Log #CP24) 1901-144-(18-4.1) : Accept 1901-139-(18-2.8) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 18-4.1 and split it into 2 paragraphs to RECOMMENDATION: Revise 18-2.8 (20.2.8 of the draft) to read as read as follows (see 20.4.1 and 20.4.2 of the draft): follows: 18-4.1 Indicating devices that are lighted and marked with a label shall be Top rails shall be provided on the ladder, shall have a minimum width of 1 visible from an operator’s position and shall indicate the following: in. (25 mm), and shall be at a minimum height of 12 in. (305 mm) above the (1) Rungs are aligned for climbing centerline of the rungs excluding the outermost two rungs of the outermost (2) Aerial ladder is aligned with the travel bed fly section. 18-4.2 A system that is lighted and marked with labels shall be visible SUBSTANTIATION: Some users prefer that the ladder tip be tapered to from the operators position to indicate the elevation, extension, and rated improve access to windows and ledges. capacities. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Renumber current 18-4.2 as 18-4.3 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: The NFPA Style manual does not allow exceptions and by rewriting this requirement, the current exception is avoided. 848 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #49) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-148-(18-6.1.2) : Reject VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: The aerial ladder and its waterway system shall be capable of flowing 1000 ————————————————- gpm (3785 l/min) its rated capacity at 100 psi (690 kPa) nozzle pressure at a minimum of 80% of the full elevation and extension. (Log #110) SUBSTANTIATION: As a result of the proposed changes to [18-6.1(b), 1901-145-(18-4.1) : Accept in Principle (c)] to “...a minimum of 500 gpm”, the requirement should be changed to SUBMITTER: Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. “...its rated capacity”. RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follows: “Indication that the Full elevation and extension are the weakest position of an aerial ladder. truck is level shall be provided at operator’s station.” When flowing water in this position the ladder is put under extreme stress SUBSTANTIATION: NFPA 1901 does not currently require this. The and fire fighters at the ladder tip are put in danger. By reducing length and ULC Harmonization/Adoption Task Group recommends this be included elevation angle in this requirement fire fighters are encouraged to use their in the NFPA Standard. This wording was adopted from ULC S515-M88 ladder safely. 8.8.5.5. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable Add text to 18-21.2.1 (20.21.4.1.2 of the draft) to read as follows: time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial An indicator(s) shall be provided to denote when the vehicle is operable ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved within the manufacturer’s range of level conditions. the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels this requirement is the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet better in the section with stabilization requirements. Also, as manufacturers this standard. may have a range of conditions within which the aerial device can be NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 operated, the wording has been revised to reflect that the indicator needs to VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: show when the apparatus is within that range. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: ————————————————- AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #50) ————————————————- 1901-149-(18-6.1.2) : Reject SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA (Log #CP20) RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: 1901-146-(18-5.3.1) : Accept The aerial ladder and its waterway system shall be capable of flowing 1000 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, gpm (3785 l/min) its rated capacity at 100 psi (690 kPa) nozzle pressure at RECOMMENDATION: Add text to 18-5.3.1 (see 20.5.3.3 through 20.5.3.6 a minimum of 80% of the full elevation and extension. For ladders with a of the draft) to read as follows: rated vertical height of 34 m (100 ft) or less, the friction loss (total system Rollers, pulleys and roller guides shall be equipped with self lubricating loss less head loss) between the monitor outlet and at a point below the bearings or readily accessible grease fitting. Slide pads, rollers and bearings, waterway swivel shall not exceed 100 psi (690 kPa) at its rated capacity 1000 when used, shall be readily accessible for replacement. When wire rope, gpm (3785 l/min) flow with the ladder at full horizontal extension. chains, or cables are used to extend the ladder sections, the system shall SUBSTANTIATION: As a result of the proposed changes to [18-6.1(b), be redundant with a minimum of two wire ropes, chains or cables used (c)] to “...a minimum of 500 gpm”, the requirement should be changed to per ladder section. A means shall be provided to prevent damage to the “...its rated capacity”. extension system at full retraction or full extension. Full elevation and extension are the weakest position of an aerial ladder. Delete 18-5.3.2, 18-5.3.2.1, 18-5.3.2.2, and 18-5.3.2.3. When flowing water in this position the ladder is put under extreme stress SUBSTANTIATION: The bearings on the rollers and roller guides of an and fire fighters at the ladder tip are put in danger. By reducing length and aerial device are a critical component of the extension/retraction capability elevation angle in this requirement fire fighters are encouraged to use their and the proper lubrication of those bearings is important to the proper ladder safely. operation of the aerial device. The addition of this requirement will also COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject bring NFPA 1901 in line with a similar requirement in ULC 515, Standard COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable for Automotive Fire Apparatus. The third and fourth sentences being added time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial replace out of date language about ladder pawls which is being deleted with ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved the deletion of the identified paragraphs. the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 this standard. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #48) 1901-147-(18-6.1.1) : Reject (Log #46) SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA 1901-150-(18-6.1(b)) : Reject RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA The horizontal traverse of the monitor shall not exceed the aerial ladder RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: manufacturer’s recommendations. The monitor shall be capable of swiveling A permanently attached monitor capable of flowing a minimum of 500 gpm 135 degrees from a line parallel to the ladder and down. the horizontal (1893 l/min) 1000 gpm (3785 l/min). traverse of the monitor shall be at least 45 degrees from each side of center SUBSTANTIATION: The requirement, that the monitor must be capable but shall not exceed the aerial ladder manufacturer’s recommendation. of flowing 1,000 gpm prevents the use of lightweight medium duty ladders. SUBSTANTIATION: This is the same wording as for the detachable Departments with limited space cannot get a pre-piped waterway/monitor water pipe [18-6.2.2]. There is no reason why the requirements for a remote assembly that would allow them to flow 500 to 700 gpm. controller monitor should be different. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet this standard. this standard. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————-

849 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #47) A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform 1901-151-(18-6.1(c)) : Reject strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: should be available as an option. A 1000 500 gpm (1893 l/min) nozzle. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Part SUBSTANTIATION: The requirement, that the monitor must be capable Delete the requirement for maximum height on the continuous guard of flowing 1,00 gpm prevents the use of lightweight medium duty ladders. railing. Departments with limited space cannot get a pre-piped waterway/monitor COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is not changing the size assembly that would allow them to flow 500 to 700 gpm. of the platform floor area as it feels that 7 sq. ft. of platform floor area is COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject inadequate for fire fighters with protective clothing and SCBA, and allows COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable no room when it is necessary during a rescue to bring a victim from a time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial window or other opening onto the aerial platform. ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet AFFIRMATIVE: 28 this standard. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ————————————————- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #CP67) 1901-155-(18-7.6.2) : Accept ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 18-7.6.2 (20.7.6.4 of the draft) to read as (Log #51) follows: 1901-152-(18-6.2.1) : Accept The steps and the floor of the platform shall be provided with skid-resistant SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA surfaces that meet the requirements of 13-7.3. RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: SUBSTANTIATION: The added wording clarifies that these step and A bracket for carrying the detachable ladder pipe shall be provided on the the floor of the platform need to meet the requirements for skid resistance apparatus. This bracket shall have two metal rungs of the same spacing as defined in chapter 13 of the document. the ladder rungs so be so designed that the ladder pipe clamps will not have COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept to be readjusted to secure the pipe to the aerial ladder. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: There are different ways of securing a monitor to VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: a ladder. It doesn’t necessarily have to be secured to the ladder rungs. So AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the mounting bracket may vary depending on the method of securing the monitor to the ladder. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #53) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-156-(18-7.6.5) : Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: ————————————————- Where a water curtain system is provided it shall be capable of providing a cooling spray under the entire floor of the platform and flowing a minimum (Log #CP12) of 75 gpm (284 l/min) shall be provided. The system shall be controlled by 1901-153-(18-7.2 and 18-13.2) : Accept a single, quick-acting valve with an actuator accessible from the platform. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBSTANTIATION: A water curtain system (together with the pre-piped RECOMMENDATION: Delete the word “assembly” in both paragraphs. waterway) adds to the total weight (and cost) of the apparatus. A department SUBSTANTIATION: Elevating platforms and water towers are defined that wants to use this unit mainly for rescue should be able to choose the types of aerial devices and the word “assembly “ adds confusion as it sounds water curtain system as an option. like something different from the device is intended. A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a minimum capacity of 750 lb., and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing ————————————————- at least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. (Log #52) A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very 1901-154-(18-7.6) : Accept in Part seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with The platform shall have a minimum floor area of 1.3 m2 (14 ft2) 0.65 m2 Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) (7 ft2) and shall be provided with a continuous guard railing, a minimum of rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least 1069 mm (42 in.) and a maximum of 1118 mm (44 in.) high, on all sides. important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only SUBSTANTIATION: A large platform with a payload of 750 lb. or more other option would be a straight ladder. increases the size and weight of the aerial apparatus, so that small town Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters departments might not be able to use them in tight areas in town. A platform and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to with a floor area of 0.65 m2 (7 ft2) (with a reduced payload) would still be climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket sufficiently large enough for two fire fighters and would reduce the size of or a platform and bring them to the ground. the vehicle. More small town and volunteer departments would benefit from A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform the advantages of having a platform. A maximum height requirement for the strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man guard railing does not seem necessary. platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and should be available as an option. weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: It is a safety issue not to have a water The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, curtain under the platform to protect the occupants. where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 minimum capacity of 750 lb., and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: at least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform ————————————————- equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with (Log #54) Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) 1901-157-(18-8.1) : Reject rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only RECOMMENDATION: The rated capacity of the elevating platform other option would be a straight ladder. shall be a minimum of 340 kg (750 lb) 227 kg (500 lb), with no water in the Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters water delivery system, in any position of operation. The rated capacity of and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to the elevating platform shall be a minimum of 227 kg (500 lb) 114 kg (250 climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket lb), with the water delivery system full of water but not discharging, in any or a platform and bring them to the ground. position of operation. 850 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA SUBSTANTIATION: By reducing the minimum capacity of an elevating (Log #139) platform the entire apparatus may be built smaller and lighter. A department 1901-159-(18-9.2) : Reject would then be able to choose a 2, 3, or 4-man platform, depending on their SUBMITTER: Karl Marzolf, Surfside Beach, SC needs. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 18-9.2 to read as follows: A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and Provisions shall be made for lower station controls to override the platform weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to station controls. This provision shall be in the form of a “RED” button a wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. minimum of 1 1/2” diameter marked “EMERGENCY STOP” or a foot pedal The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, at the lower station control. where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a SUBSTANTIATION: There are elevating platforms where the platform minimum capacity of 750 lb, and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing at operations can only be overridden by placing the “Platform” toggle switch least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. in the OFF position. This means the operator/safety person stationed on the A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very turntable must look for the platform toggle switch. This could take valuable seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform time and set up a dangerous situation if the person operating the platform equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. controls doesn’t see wires or other obstruction that could put the firefighters Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with in danger. Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least COMMITTEE STATEMENT:The aerial controls that currently exist important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only provide the lower operator the override functionality for aerial platform other option would be a straight ladder. movement. If the submitter wants a special arrangement, that should be Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters specified in the purchase specifications. and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: or a platform and bring them to the ground. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man ————————————————- platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor should be available as an option. (Log #CP21) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-160-(18-11.1) : Accept COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, time and effort to develop the rated capacities for aerial ladders, elevating RECOMMENDATION: Add 18-4.1 to the list of paragraphs in 18-11.1 platforms and water towers. These ratings have produced safe vehicles for which an elevating platform must meet if the boom incorporates a ladder or the fire service. The committee feels it is regressive to reduce the current ladder sections. minimum capacities. SUBSTANTIATION:The requirements in 18-4.1 apply equally to a ladder NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 on an elevating platform that someone has to climb. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: ————————————————- AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #55) 1901-158-(18-8.2) : Reject ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: (Log #56) Where a water delivery system is provided, the elevating platform shall be 1901-161-(18-12) : Reject capable of delivering the rated capacity set forth in Section 18-19 a minimum SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA of 1000 gpm (3785 l/min) from the platform with the booms or sections and RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: the monitors and nozzles positioned in any configuration allowed by the On elevating platforms of 34 m (110 ft) or less rated vertical height, a manufacturer while carrying a minimum load of 227 kg (500 lb) 114 kg (250 permanent water delivery system shall may be installed. lb) on the platform. SUBSTANTIATION: A water delivery system should be optional on SUBSTANTIATION: A water delivery system should be optional on elevating platforms like it is on aerial ladders. A permanent waterway adds elevating platforms like they are on aerial ladders. Permanent waterways weight to the aerial apparatus and significantly increases its cost . The add weight to the aerial apparatus and the department should be able to department should be able to decide whether they need one or not. decide whether they want one or not. The rated weight capacity while A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and flowing water should be reduced according to our proposal on section 18-8.1. weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, minimum capacity of 750 lb, and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing at where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. minimum capacity of 750 lb, and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing at A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least other option would be a straight ladder. important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters other option would be a straight ladder. and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to or a platform and bring them to the ground. climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform or a platform and bring them to the ground. strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man should be available as an option. platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject should be available as an option. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels this product should COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject have a built in waterway system. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved AFFIRMATIVE: 28 the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet ————————————————- this standard. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- 851 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #57) COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable 1901-162-(18-12.1) : Reject time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce Where a The water delivery system is provided it shall be capable of the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet delivering a minimum of 500 gpm (1893 l/min) 1000 gpm (3785 l/min) this standard. at 100 psi (690 kPa) nozzle pressure with the elevating platform at rated NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 vertical height. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: A water delivery system should be optional on AFFIRMATIVE: 28 elevating platforms like it is on aerial ladders. A permanent waterway adds weight to the aerial apparatus and significantly increases its cost. The ————————————————- department should be able to decide whether they need one or not. By reducing the required water flow the apparatus may be built smaller and (Log #CP22) lighter. 1901-164-(18-15.3) : Accept A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first sentence of 18-15.3 (20.15.3 of wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. the draft) to read as follows: The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, If the water tower has a rated water delivery capacity of 3500 gpm (14000 where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a L/min) or less, a power-operated turntable shall be provided that shall allow minimum capacity of 750 lb, and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing at continuous rotation in either direction under all the rated conditions of least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. loading. A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very SUBSTANTIATION: Large flow water towers are used in industrial fire seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform fighting applications where continuous rotation is not as important as the equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. major flow rates being applied by the device. Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only AFFIRMATIVE: 28 other option would be a straight ladder. Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters ————————————————- and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket (Log #CP23) or a platform and bring them to the ground. 1901-165-(18-16.1) : Accept A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man RECOMMENDATION: Revise the third sentence of 18-16.1 (see 20.16.3.2 platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor of the draft) to read as follows (see : should be available as an option. If the water tower has a rated water delivery capacity of 3500 gpm (14000 L/ COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject min) or less, the monitor, as distinct from the supporting boom, shall provide COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee has invested considerable for rotation through at least 45 degrees either side of center. time and effort to develop a standard for water system flows from aerial SUBSTANTIATION: Large flow water towers are used in industrial fire ladders, elevating platforms and water towers. These ratings have improved fighting applications where nozzle rotation is not required and major flow the safety of these devices and the committee feels it is regressive to reduce rates are critical. the current minimums. Manufacturers have had to redesign products to meet COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept this standard. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #59) (Log #58) 1901-166-(18-17.2) : Reject 1901-163-(18-12.2) : Reject SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: An interlock shall be provided that prevents operation of the aerial device One or more permanently installed or removable monitors with nozzles until the parking brakes have been set and the transmission has been placed capable of discharging the rated minimum flow 1000 gpm (378 l/min) shall in neutral or the transmission is in the drive position with the driveline to the be provided on the platform or on the ladder. They shall be supplied by the rear axle disengaged. The interlock system shall also prevent switching the permanent water system or by supply hoses. Where removable monitors are transmission in the drive position with the rear axle engaged until the aerial used the equipment furnished shall meet the requirements of Section 18-6.2. device is in the travel position. SUBSTANTIATION: Permanently installed monitors add weight to SUBSTANTIATION: This prevents movement of the apparatus with the the ladder tip, which results in an increased overall weight of the aerial aerial raised or the outriggers extended. apparatus. There are removable monitors available that can be mounted to COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject the platform or to the ladder. The department should be able to decide what COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The number of problems does not king of monitor they would like to use. justify the added complexity of the system. This would create additional A typical NFPA compliant elevating platform is at least 45 ft long and service problems and potential failures. A warning light in the driving weighs up to 80,000 lb. The resulting turning radius of 80 to 90 ft wall to compartment to indicate that stabilizers are not in the stowed position is wall is too large to maneuver such an apparatus through small town streets. already required by the standard. See also 18-17.4. The size of these apparatus is a result of the requirements of NFPA 1901, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 where elevating platforms have to be equipped with a large platform with a VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: minimum capacity of 750 lb, and a pre-piped waterway capable of flowing at AFFIRMATIVE: 28 least 1000 gpm through one or more permanently mounted monitors. A small town department that uses their aerial mainly for rescue and very ————————————————- seldom for fire fighting, would still have to purchase an elevating platform equipped with a pre-piped waterway and a permanently mounted monitor. (Log #60) Although according to different studies and essays (i.e. Leading with 1901-167-(18-17.4) : Reject Ladders, by Michael A. Wieder, National Fire and Rescue July/August 2001) SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA rescue is the first priority of an aerial apparatus and fire fighting is the least RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: important. If this truck would be too big to operate in their town, the only An interlock system shall be provided to prevent rotating the aerial device other option would be a straight ladder. until the stabilizer(s) is in a configuration to meet the stability requirements Performing a rescue from a straight ladder, however, puts both fire fighters of Section 18-21. and victims at great risk. The safest way to rescue people that are not used to Where the jack operation provides variable jacking configurations, an climbing ladders (like senior citizens and children) is to put them in a basket interlock system shall be provided that prevents the aerial ladder from being or a platform and bring them to the ground. extended, lowered or rotated into an area that could produce instability of A department should have the choice to purchase an elevating platform the apparatus. The interlock system shall also prevent the movement of the strictly for rescue and they should be able to choose from a 2,3, or 4-man stabilizers unless the aerial device is in the travel position. platform. A pre-piped waterway and a 500, a 750, or a 1000 gpm monitor SUBSTANTIATION: There are reliable system available that can be should be available as an option. used to determine the exact extension of individual outriggers. These COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject measurements can be used to limit the extension of the aerial and still 852 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA meeting the stability requirements of Section 18-21. Using these systems SUBSTANTIATION: The term “normal” is vague and subject to makes aerial operation much safer than overriding (deactivating) the misinterpretation. interlocks. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Language in the standard already VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: accomplishes the objective to be achieved by this proposal. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: ————————————————- AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #109) ————————————————- 1901-172-(18-22.3) : Accept in Principle SUBMITTER: Tom Hillenbrand, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (Log #61) RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follows: “If applicable, all 1901-168-(18-17.6) : Accept welding in the ladder assembly and associated mounting and supporting SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA structure shall be performed by fabricators and welders approved by RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: the Canadian Welding Bureau under the Standard for Certification of Where a three-lever system is used to control the basic functions of the Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures, W41.1.5, the Aluminum aerial device, the levers shall be distinctively different from the other Welding Qualification Code W47.2, published by the Canadian Standards controls on the panel and arranged adjacent to each other with the extension Association (CSA), or the equivalent qualifications of the American Society control being the left lever, the rotation control being the center lever, and the of Mechanical Engineers.” elevation control being the right lever. Where a two-lever system is used, the SUBSTANTIATION: The ULC has been approving both standards in this extension control shall be to the left and a combination lever for rotation and area. The ULC Harmonization/Adoption Task Group recommends including elevation shall be to the right. the use of Canadian weld certification in NFPA 1901. This wording was SUBSTANTIATION: Since combination levers are available there has to adopted from ULC S515-M88 8.5 Fabrication. be a regulation for their use. The proposal is conforming to the requirement COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle for the three-lever system for extension and elevation. Add a new sentence after the first sentence of 18-22.3 (see 20.22.3.2 of the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept draft) to read as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Welding performed by fabricators and welders approved by the Canadian VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Welding Bureau to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) W47.1, Standard AFFIRMATIVE: 28 for Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures, or W47.2, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum, shall ————————————————- be considered as equivalent. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is adding the 2 CSA (Log #138) standards and editorially revising the sentence but not the reference to 1901-169-(18-17.8) : Reject ASME as there is no specific standard being designated that the welding SUBMITTER: Karl Marzolf, Surfside Beach, SC performance is to be measured to. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 18.17.8 to read as shown: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 All controls regulating the movement of the aerial device shall VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: automatically return to the neutral position, with that aerial function coming AFFIRMATIVE: 28 to an immediate stop, upon release by the operator. SUBSTANTIATION: There are elevating platforms where both the ————————————————- turntable and platform controls are electric controlling hydraulic valves. (Log #CP25) When any function is performed there is a 2 to 3 second delay built-in to the 1901-173-(18-24.4 (New) ) : Accept system when you bring the control handle to the center or neutral position. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, This means if you are rotating and move the control handle to the neutral RECOMMENDATION: Add a new requirement after 18-24.3 (see 20- position the platform will continue to move 2 to 3 seconds before it stops. 24.3 in the draft) to read as follows: This makes it next to impossible to come up to a window for a rescue and do 18-24.3 If the aerial device is an aerial ladder, the test defined in 18-24.3.1 it safely. The same applies to extension and elevation. When going to the roof through 18-24.3.2 shall be conducted. of a building with the intention of setting the platform on or near the roof, 18-24.3.1 With the aerial ladder out of the cradle in the fully extended with the 2 to 3 second delay the platform comes down hard on the roof and position at zero degrees elevation, a test load shall be applied in a horizontal puts reverse strain on the ladder which will eventually cause a ladder failure. direction normal to the ladder centerline. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 18-24.3.1.1 For aerial ladders with a pre-piped waterway, a 350 lb (160 kg) COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Ramping is proper for safe operation as test load shall be applied at the ladder tip. immediate stops are potentially hazardous to the platform operator and place 18-24.3.1.2 For aerial ladders without a pre-piped waterway, a 220 lb (100 excessive loading on the aerial device. kg) test load shall be applied at the ladder tip. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 18-24.3.2 The turntable shall not rotate and the ladder shall not deflect VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: beyond the what the manufacturer’s specification allows. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: This test will provide a validation of the holding capability of the rotation system brake and sets a higher standard for an ————————————————- aerial ladder with a waterway that can discharge horizontally. (Log #62) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-170-(18-18.1) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Steffen Kohleisen, METZ Aerials USA VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 If the operator’s position is on the turntable, the turntable platform shall be provided with a railing at least 1067 mm (42 in.) high. The railing design ————————————————- shall be capable of withstanding a 102 kg (225 lb) force applied at any point (Log #36) from any direction without permanent deformation. Where the operator’s 1901-174-(Chapter 19) : Reject position is equipped with an operator’s seat, the seat shall be provided with SUBMITTER: Ken Rigney, The Snuffer Corporation a railing or an armrest withstanding a 102 kg (225 lb) force applied at any RECOMMENDATION: Delete references to compressed air operation point from the inside of the seat. controls and testing and set CAFS up under a separate standard. SUBSTANTIATION: Some aerial manufacturers use operator seats at the SUBSTANTIATION: CAFS are developing under two operating systems: turntable. There needs to be a requirement for the railing. Low Pressure (LP) Systems and High Pressure (HP) Systems. LP CAF COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Systems are available in at least three distinct categories and both the LP and NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 HP Systems offer a wide range of installations and drives. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Evolution of CAFS AFFIRMATIVE: 28 The development of Compressed Air Foam Fire Fighting Systems (CAFS) in Canada and the USA has evolved into two basic CAFS foam operational ————————————————- systems. High pressure CAF Systems (125 to 150 psi) have been used for some time (Log #CP6) and is in part a carry over from water knowledge (use of high pressure) and 1901-171-(18-20.3) : Accept in certain parts of the country some departments want to use small diameter SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, hand lines one inch (25 mm). It has been long known that high pressure in RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first sentence of 18-20.3 (20.20.3 in standard hand lines cause deterioration of foam quality. Along with this the draft) to read as follows: thinking some people want two or more gallons of water per cubic foot of Wire ropes, chains, and attaching systems used to extend and retract the fly air. Some developers of these systems talk about providing safety through sections or booms shall have a 5:1 safety factor based on ultimate strength additional water so that if the foam chemical runs out, the fire fighter still under all normal operating conditions allowed by the manufacturer. has water to use, but in reality the milky solution being applied provides 853 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA little protection and so the reverse is true. There is less likelihood of running (Log #11) out of CAFS foam at 0.2 – 0.3% than there is of having a power or water 1901-175-(19-3.6) : Reject related problem. There is less protection using this extra water technique SUBMITTER: Tom Reser, Edwards Manufacturing Inc. which makes a very watery milky foam and really cannot be called CAFS. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 19-3.6 to read as follows: It is much closer to aspirated foam, not nearly as effective or good quality A means shall be provided to prevent water backflow into the foam CAFS foam. proportioning system and the foam concentrate storage tank. Where water is It is important to understand why the low pressure concept in CAF Systems supplied directly from a potable water source, a means shall be provided to offers greater safety and is much more effective over the full range of fire prevent foam solution backflow into the water source. situations most fire departments have to contend with. The reason is most SUBSTANTIATION: The requirement for a means to prevent foam low pressure systems usually use medium foam 9 – 10:1 expanded foam. solution backflow into a potable water supply was eliminated from this This applies a 1/4 to 3/8 in. (6 to 8 mm) thick foam layer for most knock revision. For reasons of public safety, this requirement needs to be down and protection which provides excellent fire fighter protection. reinstated. The proposed language does not pose undue hardship on any When a fire fighter paints his or her way into a structure fire situation with foam proportioning system manufacturer or user since the water source that medium CAFS foam, there is always greater safety if something goes wrong is being protected is defined and qualified. – power supply, water side or foam side fails. The fire fighter, by painting COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject his or her way into the structural fire, always has a way out. Anyone who COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is an operator training issue. There is has ever tried to set fire to a room after it has had good CAFS foam applied not a practical, cost effective way to solve this issue. knows how hard it is to get a fire started again. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 CAFS Designations VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: With the development of CAFS in Canada and the USA, different types of AFFIRMATIVE: 28 CAF Systems have evolved. For the lack of a better designation, I have for time being used the following criteria to indicate the basic differences in the ————————————————- systems – Low pressurized systems Type A and high pressure Type B. Low-pressure systems generally operate between forty and one hundred (Log #2) and twenty pounds per square inch (psi) and these systems normally operate 1901-176-(19-3.7) : Reject in the 50 to 80 psi range when delivering CAFS foam. Low pressure systems NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-168 (Log #42) which was are also capable of pushing foam more than 4000 ft in a 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-217. hose on level land and can deliver foam seven to eight hundred feet in height SUBMITTER: Roger A. Ruth, Nat’l Foam, Inc./Rep. Fire Apparatus Mfrs in the same size of hose. These systems deliver 35 to 400 gallons of foam Assn. solution per minute. RECOMMENDATION: Insert new paragraph to read as follows: Low pressure CAF Systems can be grouped into three basic sizes – Low 19-3.7* A means shall be provided to prevent contamination of an external pressure Type I CAFS 35 to 60 gpms single line CAF Systems. On the water source with foam concentrate or foam solution. smaller end of these systems an aspirated foam line is often used as a back SUBSTANTIATION: Automatic controlled foam proportioning systems up line. that inject foam concentrate into the water pump discharge at a higher The Low-Pressure Type II CAFS range of low pressure CAF Systems pressure than the water discharge pressure have the potential to force foam operate 70 to 120 gpm of foam solution. These systems generally operate two concentrate or foam solution into the external water source. 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) CAFS lines, a small monitor and also may supply a tele a COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject squirt – or ladder units. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is an operator training issue. There is The Low Pressure Type III CAFS range of low pressure CAF Systems not a practical, cost effective way to solve this issue. operate from 140 to 400 plus gpms. Generally these systems will operate NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 one 2 1/2 in. and two to three 1 1/2 in. – 1 3/4 in. hand lines and a monitor of VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: coarse elevated devices – ladders etc. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 All of these CAF systems are capable of making the four types of CAFS foam – wet, medium, dry and very dry foam. ————————————————- It should be noted that there are several hundred low-pressure rapid response CAF Systems operating in Canada and USA of the I and II sizes. (Log #5) Most of these systems have been put in place within the last five years 1901-177-(19-3.7) : Reject and they for the most part are first line units or the only unit for the fire NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-170 (Log #152) which departments. These units are not to be confused with wild land units or was held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-217. brush trucks of which there are many hundreds of units. Most of these SUBMITTER: Mark Haider, Waterous Co. fire department systems can be evenly divided between AI and AII CAF RECOMMENDATION: Add new paragraph 19-3.7 and renumber Systems, with the trend to more type A-II units in the 80 – 100 gallon dual subsequent paragraphs. CAFS units. Paragraph to read “A means shall be provided to prevent foam solution Most low pressure CAF Systems incorporate the following: backflow into the water supply.” • Four wheel drive trucks either two man or four man cabs with ratings Appendix A-19-3.6 should then be changed to A-19-3.7. of 12,000 to 19,000 lb GVW. SUBSTANTIATION: The paragraph stresses the importance of protecting • Truck bodies of either nine foot or 12 foot full bodies. the water supply. Some means or method is needed to insure the water • The CAF Systems on board this unit incorporate 200 to 500 (US) supply is safe from foam solution/concentrate contamination. gallon water tanks, single or double CAF Systems. Section A-19-3.6 is more relevant to this new paragraph 19-3.7 then the • Most have roll out CAF Systems for easy maintenance and service. present 19-3.6. The High Pressure Type systems are well documented in NFPA but even COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject they need work, such as using two gallons of water for one SCFM of air. This COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is an operator training issue. There is should be changed to one SCFM of air to one gallon of water. If there is a not a practical, cost effective way to solve this issue. requirement for extra water for a specific department, then it may be added. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Again High Pressure systems need to be capable of producing the four types VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: of foam. Wet, Medium, dry and very dry. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Testing should be such that at least the four types of foam have been produced and the recommended size of the hand line valve and tip is ————————————————- outlined for each CAF unit. (Log #4) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-178-(19-3.8) : Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: NFPA 1901 defines the requirements for NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-171 (Log #123) which systems and components installed on fire apparatus and CAFS is one such was held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-137. system. The committee is not interested in developing a separate standard SUBMITTER: Tom Reser, Edwards Manufacturing Inc. for one of the component systems. Systems designed to the current CAFS RECOMMENDATION: Add text to read as follows: requirements are being used in the field and are acceptable to users. If the 19-3.8 “A means shall be provided to prevent foam concentrate or foam submitter feels a need for change to the current requirements, he should solution from contaminating the water source.” submit specific wording together with test data to show that such systems SUBSTANTIATION: Many injection type or balanced pressure will work effectively in dealing with the fires that fire fighters using proportioned foam systems can introduce foam concentrate into the water apparatus designed to NFPA 1901, expect to extinguish. pump and water source. Contamination of the water source must be avoided, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 certainly when operating on a hydrant system. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is an operator training issue. There is not a practical, cost effective way to solve this issue. ————————————————- NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- 854 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #6) (Log #67) 1901-179-(19-3.8) : Reject 1901-182-(19-10) : Accept in Principle NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-172 (Log #155) which SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service was held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-123. RECOMMENDATION: Replace the last two sentences with: “Foam SUBMITTER: Phil Turner, Elkhart Brass proportioning system accuracy shall be +30 percent of proportioner setting RECOMMENDATION: The March 1998 draft had a Section 19-3.8 that below 1 percent foam and for 1 percent and above percent foam +15 percent should remain in the standard. “If the foam proportioning system injects of proportioner setting.” foam concentrate on the discharge side of the water pump, a means shall be SUBSTANTIATION: Foam proportioners are used with both class A provided to automatically prevent foam concentrate and foam solution from and class B foams. A proportioner used with class A foam is now set up flowing back into the water pump or water tank. with a target of the proportioner actual setting while the proportioner or SUBSTANTIATION: This is an important feature of a foam system that class B foam is set up with a target of 115 percent of the proportioner actual the user and designer must be aware of. Further, a means to prevent the setting. They both should be set up with a target of the proportioner actual water source from becoming contaminated must be supplied. setting. Many proportioners now in use can hit the target is 115 percent of COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject proportioner setting this means they are using more foam than necessary and COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is an operator training issue. There is this will result in the foam pumping operation not lasting as long as it could. not a practical, cost effective way to solve this issue. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Revise the third sentence of 19-10 (see 21.10.2.1 of the draft) to read as VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Systems designed to produce foam solution at ratios of less than 1 percent shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of -0+40 percent. ————————————————- COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Class B foams are tested at a specific ratio of foam concentrate to water. Because of the manner in which class B foams (Log #9) work in suppressing the release of flammable liquid vapors, the foam may 1901-180-(19-3.8) : Reject not work properly if used at a ratio less than its tested ratio. Some foams NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-173 (Log #191) which for application on Class B fires are now starting to appear on the market was held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-123. that have suggested ratios of less than 1 percent. Therefore the committee SUBMITTER: Thomas High, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. feels that no minus percent should be allowed in the accuracy of foam RECOMMENDATION: Add text to read as follows: proportioners. If total capacity of the foam proportioning system is less than 15 gallons NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 per minute (56.8 l/min) of foam concentrate, and injects foam concentrate VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: into the discharge side of the water pump, a means shall be provided to AFFIRMATIVE: 28 automatically prevent foam concentrate and foam solution from flowing back into the water pump or water tank. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: In response to Mr. Ruth’s concern about adding additional seemingly unnecessary expense to a foam system, this argument (Log #114) is valid in the large industrial balanced pressure foam systems, where the 1901-183-(19-10) : Accept in Principle pump operator can see the discharge lines and would be aware if a line was SUBMITTER: William Ballantyne, Hypro Corporation/Rep. FAMA Tech. shut down. Committee, Foam Sub Committee This is rarely the case with the typical municipal engine. The hose lines RECOMMENDATION: Current Language: are stretched from the engine into the building. The foam systems currently Systems designed to produce foam solution at ratios of less than 1 percent used on the municipal apparatus are typically designed to proportion Class shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of +/- 20 percent. A type foam concentrates. The Class A concentrates are very susceptible to Systems designed to produce foam solution at ratios of 1 percent or greater back flow into the water pump, which can then back flow into the municipal shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of -0/+30 percent or 1 water system. The check valve in the discharge side of the water pump percentage point, whichever is less. would prevent the foam concentrate from entering the municipal water system. This is more of a concern to the municipal Fire Department than it would be to the industrial department. The typical municipal Fire Department pump operator is required to perform many different tasks at an emergency scene. The operator may not always be able to observe the handlines and shut off the foam system if the handlines are shut down. The addition of an automatic check valve in the discharge piping would make the system more user friendly and prevent any unnecessary contamination of a public water supply. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is an operator training issue. There is not a practical, cost effective way to solve this issue. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- (Log #CP69) 1901-181-(19-7.3) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 19-7.3 (21.7.3 in the draft) to read as follows: The drivetrain components that transmit power to the foam concentrate pump shall be capable of providing the performance listed on the plate required in 19-9.3 on a continuous duty basis. SUBSTANTIATION: The current wording is ambiguous and the revised wording is to clarify the intent of the requirement. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Current Accuracy Standard NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Revise text as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Systems designed to produce foam solution at ratios of less than 1 percent shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of +/-20 percent. Systems ————————————————- designed to produce foam solution at ratios of 1 percent or greater Foam systems shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of -0/+30 percent, or 1 percentage point, whichever is less.

855 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP16) 1901-185-(20-7.5) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add the wording “If flowmeters are provided” to the beginning of 20-7.5 so the paragraph reads as follows (see 22.7.5 of the draft): If flowmeters are provided, the flowmeter displays shall be located at the pump operator’s panel and shall indicate the airflow in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM) (cubic meters per minute (SCMS)) and indicate the water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) (liters per minute (L/min)). Flowmeters shall be rated to a hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 500 psi (34 bar) if located on the pressure side of the system. SUBSTANTIATION: Flowmeters are not required or needed for proper operation on every CAFS and the existing wording would imply that they are part of every system. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- (Log #CP70) 1901-186-(21-2.1) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Delete 21-2.1 and its appendix SUBSTANTIATION: The paragraph is poorly written but it is being Proposed Accuracy Standard deleted because it precludes generators at 480 volts, or others that sometimes are needed for large motor driven air compressors. While these applications SUBSTANTIATION: Why the need for new language: are few, there are some cases where these voltages are appropriate, and 1. Class A concentrates are typically proportioned at ratios between 0.2 and should not be precluded by the standard. 1.0 percent. Over this range, two accuracy standards apply, (+/-20 percent COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept for ratios less than 1 percent and -0/+30 percent at a ratio of 1 percent). This NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 creates undo hardship on manufacturers who design the proportioners and VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: installers who must calibrate them. A single accuracy range is preferable to AFFIRMATIVE: 28 allow compliance with this important foam proportioner accuracy standard. 2. Many proportioners are used to proportion more than one type of ————————————————- concentrate, (i.e., Class A and B foams). Again, under these conditions, two accuracy standards apply, (+/- 20 percent and -0/+30 percent). The current (Log #CP71) standard attempts to address the variances between Class A and Class B 1901-187-(21-2.5.3) : Accept foam concentrates. However, since Class B foams must be proportioned at SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, a -0 percent from the selected injection rate of 1 percent or higher, a single RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-2.5.3 (see 23.2.5.3 of the draft) to read accuracy standard would be preferable and provide a firefighter with a safer as follows: foam system under all conditions plus, ease the burden of testing on the foam 21-2.5.3 Any equipment, except a power take-off driven generator, used in system installer. an underbody or underchassis location that is subject to road spray shall be 3. There are a number of concentrates on the market that are used for both either listed as Type 4 or mounted in an enclosure that is listed as Type 4. Class A and B fires. Under the current standard language, two accuracy Add a new 21-2.5.4 and appendix to read as follows: standards apply to one concentrate, depending on the application. This can 23.2.5.4* If a power take-off driven generator is located in an underbody or be extremely confusing to the operator, resulting in a potentially unsafe underchassis location, the installation shall include a shield to prevent road situation. A single accuracy standard would be preferable and increase spray from splashing directly on the generator. safety. A.23.2.5.4 While a splash shield will lessen the amount of road spray that 4. There is at least one new Class B concentrate being produced in Europe reaches the generator, it will not protect the generator if the apparatus is which is proportioned at ratio of 0.5 percent. As these new concentrates driven through deep water. Care should also be taken of the apparatus is receive UL approval and are marketed in the U.S., the NFPA standards driven off-road as a splash shield is not a skid pan and will not protect the would apply. Under the current standard the accuracy standard that would generator from physical abuse. apply is +/-20 percent. The accuracy standard for a Class B concentrate SUBSTANTIATION: This change will allow a PTO driven generator to must have a lower limit of -0 percent for safety reasons. By using one be used in under chassis and under body locations but will require a splash common performance accuracy standard, variance below the injection rate shield when they are in those locations. They cannot be in a total enclosure would not be allowed, thereby increasing firefighter safety and foam system for cooling reasons. performance during use. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Committee Meeting Action on public VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Proposal 1901-182 (Log #67) which addresses proportioning accuracy at AFFIRMATIVE: 28 less than 1 percent. The current accuracy required at 1 percent or greater is the same as the submitter states. The committee felt that at less than one ————————————————- percent ratio, it should maintain the 40 percent spread as some equipment (Log #CP72) that is currently being used successfully might not be more accurate. Using 1901-188-(21-4.4) : Accept too much concentrate will not affect fire fighter safety, using too little SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, concentrate could affect firefighter safety. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-4.4 (23.4.4 of the draft) to read as NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 follows: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 21-4.4 For power sources of 8 kW or larger, the power source manufacturer AFFIRMATIVE: 28 shall certify that the power source is capable of supplying the continuous duty rating on the power source specification label at 120°F (49°C) air intake ————————————————- temperature. (Log #CP68) SUBSTANTIATION: The existing requirement is redundant and non- 1901-184-(20-3.4.3) : Accept specific. Section 2-3 already requires installation per manufacturer’s SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, installation instructions. RECOMMENDATION:Delete the first sentence of 20-3.4.3 which reads: The new section requires that the power source is appropriate for use in this “Air tanks shall be permanently stamped or identified in accordance with application. If necessary to de-rate at 120°F, the power source manufacturer DOT or ASME regulations.” should provide this information. This allows manufacturers in cool and SUBSTANTIATION:This is already covered by other requirements in this warm climates to have confidence that the power sources they install will be section. able to pass the required testing. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- 856 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP73) (Log #103) 1901-189-(21-4.7.1 and 21-4.7.2) : Accept 1901-192-(21-5.1.6.3) : Accept in Principle SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Lisa S. Breu, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-4.7.1 and 21-4.7.2 (renumbered as RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follows: “An “OK to Operate 23.4.8 in the draft) to read as follows: Generator” indicator shall be provided at the operators panel that is 21-4.7.1 If the power source is rated at less than 8 3 kW, a “power on” energized when the “OK to operate generator” indicator is energized in the indicator shall be provided. driving compartment.” 21-4.7.2 If the power source is rated at 3 kW or more but less than 8 kW, a SUBSTANTIATION: The section for generators driven by the main voltmeter shall be provided. driveline, 21-5.1.6, does not specify an indicator at the operator’s panel. 21-4.7.2 21-4.7.3* If the power source is rated at 8 kW or more, the This section should be similar to the PTO Driven generator section 21-5.1.7 following instrumentation shall be provided at an the operator’s panel: The indicator at the operator’s panel should notify the operator when the (1) Voltmeter generator is ready for use. (2) Amperage Current meters for each ungrounded leg COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle (3) Frequency (cycle) meter COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Proposal 1901-191 (Log #CP75) (4) Power source hourmeter which the committee believes meets the submitter’s intent. Move the first paragraph of A-21-4.7.2 to be A-21-5.3.1 and leave the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 existing second paragraph as the annex to A-21-4.7.3 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: The new wording for 21-4.7.2 covers medium size AFFIRMATIVE: 28 generators that are more likely to power electric motors where low voltage is more serious, rather than just lights. Many 3 to 6.5 kW generators ————————————————- incorporate this voltmeter as standard. The appendix material that applies only to fixed auxiliary engine driven (Log #102) generators has been moved to that section. 1901-193-(21-5.1.7.2) : Accept in Principle COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept SUBMITTER: Lisa S. Breu, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise text as follows: A “Throttle Ready” VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: “Generator Engaged” indicator shall be posted at the operator’s panel that AFFIRMATIVE: 28 is energized when the “Ok to operate generator” “Generator Engaged” indicator is energized. or when the chassis transmission in in neutral and the ————————————————- parking brake is engaged SUBSTANTIATION: The indicator at the operators panel should be (Log #CP74) consistent with the driving compartment indicator. Also, there may not be a 1901-190-(21-4.10) : Accept means to control the throttle at the operator’s panel. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, The “ok to operate generator” indicator is not defined in the PTO Generator RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-4.10 (23.4.11 of the draft) to read as section 21-5.1.7. Only a “generator engaged” indicator is defined. follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle 21-4.10 If there is permanent wiring on the apparatus that is designed to be COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Proposal 1901-191 (Log #CP75) connected to the power source, a power source specification label shall be which the committee believes meets the submitter’s intent. permanently attached to the apparatus at the operator’s control station. The NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 label shall provide the operator with the information detailed in Figure 21- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 4.10. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 In Figure 21-4.10, change the words “Nominal Rating” to “Continuous Duty Rating.” ————————————————- Delete the words “at rated voltage(s).” SUBSTANTIATION: Changing “nominal rating” to “continuous (Log #101) duty rating” is a minor correction will assure that the generator rating is 1901-194-(21-5.2.2) : Reject continuous duty rating for the applicable installation. SUBMITTER: Lisa S. Breu, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. The phrase “at rated voltages” is superfluous. RECOMMENDATION: Delete entire section. The exception in the text means that portable generators not connected to SUBSTANTIATION: This section limits the size of the generator which wiring in the apparatus do not require a power source specification label. may be used without affecting pumping operations. For example, the torque COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept and speed requirements for a pump on a 30 kW generator may not allow NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 operation at idle. If the engine speed is automatically increased to allow VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: generator operation, the pressure control system for the pump may not AFFIRMATIVE: 28 operate. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject ————————————————- COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels this paragraph is still important and has actually strengthened the requirement. See Proposal (Log #CP75) 1901-195 (Log #CP76). 1901-191-(21-5) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Add new section as 21-5 (see 23.5 in the draft) AFFIRMATIVE: 28 and renumber 21-5 Chassis Engine Driven Generators. Where the generator is driven by ————————————————- the chassis engine, the following requirements shall apply: 21-5.1 A “GENERATOR ENGAGED” indicator shall be provided in (Log #CP76) the driving compartment to indicate that the generator shift has been 1901-195-(21-5.2.2) : Accept successfully completed. Completion of the generator shift may require that SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, the chassis transmission be shifted into the proper gear (split shaft PTO’s RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-5.2.2 to read as follows (See 23.6.2.3 only). This indicator is not required if the generator is always engaged. and 23.6.2.4 of the draft): 21-5.2 An “OK TO OPERATE GENERATOR” indicator shall be provided 21-5.2.2 A hydraulic generator system shall operate at all engine speeds, or in the driving compartment to indicate that the generator is engaged, an automatic engine speed control system shall be provided. If the apparatus transmission is in the proper gear (automatic transmissions only), and the is equipped with a fire pump driven by the chassis engine, the generator shall parking brake is engaged. This indicator is not required if the generator is be capable of output at idle as specified on the power source specification always engaged and operating. label. 21-5.3 An interlock system shall be provided to prevent advancement of the SUBSTANTIATION: Due to pressure governor operation on a pumper, the engine speed in the cab or at an operator’s panel unless the transmission is in engine could return to idle quite often, therefore, the generator must be sized neutral and the parking brake is engaged, or the apparatus is in the “OK TO to operate with a fire pump and have capability to operate at idle. This may PUMP” or “OK TO OPERATE GENERATOR” mode. eliminate 30 KW hydraulic generators on pumpers or aerials, but normally Delete sections 21-5.1.6, 21-5.1.6.1, 21-5.1.6.2, 21-5.1.7, 21-5.1.7.1, 21-5.1.7.2, smaller size hydraulic generators are acceptable for these applications. The 21-5.1.8, 21-5.2.4, 21-5.2.4.1 and renumber as needed. power source label might specify a reduced output below some RPM to limit SUBSTANTIATION: This rewrite is for simplification and unification of torque requirements on the PTO. requirements. It brings these requirements in line with changes made in the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept fire pump chapter. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- 857 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #104) SUBSTANTIATION:Corrosion resistant metals such as aluminum, 1901-196-(21-5.2.4) : Reject stainless steel, and copper are acceptable as well as corrosion protected SUBMITTER: Lisa S. Breu, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. metals such as galvanized steel, plastic coated steel and enameled steel. RECOMMENDATION: Revise text as follows: “Where the generator COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept is hydraulically or direct drive driven by a transmission mounted (SAE) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO , and the VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: apparatus is to be used for either stationary or ...” AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: Section 21-5.2 only applies to hydraulically driven generators. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject (Log #CP83) COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Proposal 1901-191 (Log #CP75) which 1901-201-(21-10.5.2) : Accept totally deletes this paragraph. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-10.5.2 (23.12.5.2 in the draft) to read VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 21-10.5.2 All receptacles located in a dry location shall be of the grounding type. Receptacles shall be not less than 30 in. (762 mm) 12” (300 mm) above ————————————————- the interior floor height. SUBSTANTIATION: If it is a dry location there is no need for the (Log #105) receptacles to be over 12 inches high. Typical receptacles in a building are 1901-197-(21-5.2.4.1) : Reject 12 inches off the floor. This will allow receptacles inside of crew cabs near SUBMITTER: Lisa S. Breu, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. seat areas. RECOMMENDATION: Revise text as follows: “A “Generator Engaged” COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept indicator shall be provides in the driving compartment to indicate that the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 generator shift has been successfully completed. If a generator engagement VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: control is provided, a “generator engaged” indicator shall be provided in the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 driving compartment to indicate that the generator shift has been completed successfully. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: The two sentences in this section are redundant. I believe this was a revision error during the last update. (Log #CP89) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-202-(21-11.5) : Accept COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Proposal 1901-191 (Log #CP75) which SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, totally deletes this paragraph. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-11.5 (23.13.5 in the draft) to read as NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 follows: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Electrical cord shall be Type SEOOW-A, SOOW-A or Type STOOW-A. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: The cable should be oil resistant (the extra O) as well as wet location (the W) and outdoor (the A). ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #CP80) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-198-(21-5.5.1, 21-5.5.2) : Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add a new paragraph after 21-5.5.1 to read as ————————————————- follows (see 23.6.5.2 in the draft): 21-5.5.2 The alternator and/or battery system shall be adequate to provide (Log #CP84) power to the power source for continuous operation for a minimum of 2 1901-203-(21-12.4) : Accept hours at full output. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, Revise 21-5.5.2, renumbered as 21-5.5.3, to read as follows (see 23.6.5.3 in RECOMMENDATION: Add a new paragraph as 21-12.4 (23.14.4 in the the draft): draft) to read as follows: 21-5.5.2 3 A means shall be provided to advance engine speed to obtain the 21-12.4 Manually operated floodlights shall be operable from the ground power stated on the power source specification label. This control shall work or access steps that meet the requirements of Section 13-7 and handrails that in coordination with other engine speed controls and interlocks as required meet the requirements of Section 13-8 shall be provided to allow the user to in this standard. reach the floodlights. SUBSTANTIATION: These changes will assure a user that the system will SUBSTANTIATION: Pole lights that extend need to be safely operable. operate without shutdown for a minimum of 2 hours and that the apparatus The requirements for steps and handles are spelled out in Chapter 13, but this has a properly engineered alternator and battery system to provide adequate specifies that they need to be provided for this function. power to the power source. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP86) (Log #CP82) 1901-204-(21-13.2.3) : Accept 1901-199-(21-8.3.1) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-13.2.3 (23.15.2.3 in the draft) to read RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-8.3.1 (23.10.2.1 of the draft) to read as as follows: follows: Appropriate warning labels on the hazards of electrocution shall be Any panelboard shall have a main breaker when the panel has six or more installed. individual branch circuits, or the power source is rated 8 kW or larger. Revise A-21-13.2.3 to read as follows: SUBSTANTIATION: On larger generators the single master breaker will To reduce the electrocution hazards associated with the operation of masts allow quick shut down of all circuits at the main panel, which could be of a above the apparatus, the purchaser should consider specifying one or more of safety factor is something goes wrong. the following: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (1) A slide-out operator’s platform NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (2) A raised remote platform on the vehicle VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (3) A wireless remote control AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (4) Appropriate warning labels SUBSTANTIATION: Existing 21-13.2.3 is being replaced as it is not ————————————————- measurable. The committee feels warning labels should be required, with or without other safeguards and so is moving the requirement from the a (Log #CP7) suggestion in the appendix to a requirement in the body of the standard. 1901-200-(21-9.3) : Accept Item 2 in the appendix list is being deleted because it is undefined. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept RECOMMENDATION: Revise the second sentence of 21-9.3 (23.11.3.1 in NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 the draft) to read as follows: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Supports shall be made of nonmetallic materials or corrosion resistant or AFFIRMATIVE: 28 corrosion protected metal. ————————————————- 858 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP90) 21-14.5.3.4.3 Frequency shall be maintained within ±5 cycles of the 1901-205-(21-13.2.7) : Accept frequency specified on the power source specification label during the entire SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, test. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-13.2.7 (23.15.2.7 in the draft) to read as 21-14.5.3.5 The following conditions shall be recorded at least every 1/2 follows: hour during the test. Where the tower is powered by the chassis air brake system, the air supply (1) The voltage, frequency, and amperes at full rated load. shall be from an auxiliary air circuit that is equipped with a pressure (2) The prime mover’s oil pressure, water temperature, transmission protection valve and an auxiliary air tank(s). temperature, hydraulic fluid temperature, and the battery charge rate, as SUBSTANTIATION: This change avoids having to cite a United States applicable. federal motor vehicle standard making the document more international and (3) The ambient temperature and altitude. also makes the document consistent with a similar requirement in 23-12. 21-14.5.3.6 The electrical loads and conditions specified in 13.14.3.4 shall COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept be applied during the testing unless an auxiliary engine drives the power NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 source. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 21-14.5.3.7 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the 2-hour AFFIRMATIVE: 28 operational test of the fixed power source shall be completed with the fire pump pumping at 100 percent capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump ————————————————- pressure. The test shall be permitted to be run concurrently with the pump certification test required in 16.13.1. (Log #CP87) 21-14.5.3.8 Accessories driven by the power source prime mover shall not 1901-206-(21-14.2) : Accept be functionally disconnected or otherwise rendered inoperative during the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, line voltage electrical tests. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-14.2 (23.16.2 in the draft) to read as 21-14.5.3.9 The following devices shall be permitted to be turned off or not follows: operating during the fixed power source test. 21-14.2 Dielectric Voltage Withstand Test. (1) Aerial hydraulic pump 21-14.2.1 The wiring and permanently connected devices and equipment (2) Foam pump shall be subjected to a dielectric voltage withstand test of 900 volts for 1 (3) Hydraulically driven equipment minute. (4) Winch 21-14.2.2 The dielectric tester shall have a 500 volt-amperes (VA) or larger (5) Windshield wipers transformer, with a sinusoidal output voltage that can be verified. (6) Four-way hazard flashers 21-14.2.3 The testing shall be performed after all body work has been 21-14.5.3.10 If the line voltage power is derived from the vehicle’s low- completed. voltage system and is the primary source for line voltage, the power source 21-14.2.4* The test shall be conducted as follows: shall not be shed by a load management system during the two-hour test. (1) Isolate the power source from the panel board, and disconnect any solid 21-14.6 The results of each test shall be recorded on an appropriate form state low voltage components. and provided with the delivery documentation (2) Connect one lead of the dielectric tester to all the hot and neutral busses Delete the last sentence of 14-13.2.1.3. tied together. Delete A-21-14.1. (3) Connect the other lead to the vehicle frame or body Renumber A-21-14.4.1 as A-21-14 (4) Close any switches and circuit breakers in the circuit(s) Add an appendix item to A-21-14.5 to read as follows: (5) Apply the dielectric voltage for one minute in accordance with the Commercially available smaller or intermittent duty low cost generators testing equipment manufacturer’s instructions. generally are advertised with power ratings tested under the most favorable Revise A-21-14.2 to read as follows: operating conditions. Also, some generators are advertised at peak output or A.21-14.2.4 Solid state equipment is generally hi-pot tested by the intermittent duty ratings, rather than continuous duty output. manufacturer. It is very important to connect all hot and neutral busses Where a generator will be subjected to higher than ideal operating together so that no current flows through connected loads. temperatures, or the advertised rating is not a continuous duty rating, the SUBSTANTIATION: This simplified test still detects the same faults, apparatus manufacturer should de-rate the generator and provide the de- but is a single 1-minute test that does not require unwiring connected loads. rated data on the power source specification label. The generator should Any equipment connected to line voltage circuits should be undamaged by then be tested at this de-rated condition. It is important that the power source this test. The resulting test is similar to the test required for recreational specification label on the apparatus meets the fire department requirements vehicles by the National Electric Code 551-60(a), and by RVIA, the for generator output as it indicates the rating to which the generator is tested. Recreational Vehicle Industry Association. The Power Source Specification Label referred to in this paragraph will COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept indicate the rating to which the generator will be tested and will represent NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 the de-rated condition. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: In response to a request for formal interpretation of AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NFPA 1901, paragraph 14-13.2.1.3, the committee has reviewed the wording of this section. The proposed changes to the wording accomplish the ————————————————- following objectives: The pump and power source interact with each other. They must be tested (Log #CP91) together but the statement in the 1999 version is ambiguous. The revised 1901-207-(21-14.4) : Accept wording allows the pump and power source to be tested together, but a SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, failure of the power source will not prevent finishing the complete pump test RECOMMENDATION: Add new text after 21-14.3 (see 23.16.4 in the and then repeating the 2-hour portion of the test with the pump at capacity draft) to read as follows: along with the power source. 21-14.4 Electrical light towers, floodlights, motors, fixed appliances Pump and generator testing require certification by a third party due to including cord reels, and portable generators shall be operated at their full the critical nature of both generator and fire pump operations. Performance rating or capacity for 30 minutes to assure proper operation. of line voltage power sources used to operate ventilation fans, lighting, or Replace current 21-14.4 through 21-14.4.5 with the following text (see other fire scene equipment is considered mission critical. The proposed 23.16.5 of the draft). modification adds a requirement that line voltage power sources be certified 21-14.5* Operational Test of Fixed Power Source. by a third-party independent testing agency. 21-14.5.1 If the apparatus is equipped with a fixed power source, the Portable generators are exempted from the certification and 2-hour test apparatus manufacturer shall perform an operational test on the fixed power because they are completely independent of the apparatus. sources. Many commercial generators or poorly installed generators will not be able 21-14.5.2 The results of the tests of the fixed power source shall be certified to perform on a continuous basis at their advertised rating. The procedure by an independent third-party certification organization. described requires the apparatus manufacturer to de-rate power sources 21-14.5.3 Test Procedure. when necessary to a demonstrable continuous performance level. 21-14.5.3.1 The prime mover shall be started from a cold start condition An appendix paragraph is being added to explain the relationship between and the line voltage electrical system loaded to 100 percent of the wattage generator output and heat, and educate the purchaser with regard to specified on the power source specification label. advertised ratings vs reality. 21-14.5.3.2 Testing with a resistive load bank shall be permitted. All fixed power sources are required to pass the same test, which mirrors 21-14.5.3.3 The power source shall be operated in the manner specified realistic usage on the fire ground. The exception covers a short-term power by the apparatus manufacturer as documented on instruction placards or in source used only in-route until a generator is started at the fire ground. operation manuals. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 21-14.5.3.4 The power source shall be operated at 100 percent of the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 continuous rated wattage as specified on the power source specification label VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: for a minimum of 2 hours. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 21-14.5.3.4.1 Wattage shall be maintained at or above the continuous rated wattage during the entire test. 21-14.5.3.4.2 Voltage shall be maintained within ±5 % of the voltage ————————————————- specified on the power source specification label during the entire test. 859 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP93) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-208-(22-2.3) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Delete existing 22-2.3. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Add wording as 12-1.10 (14.1.13 in the draft) to read as follows: 12-1.10* Any interior area to be occupied by personnel shall have a ————————————————- minimum of two (2) means of escape. The opening shall be large enough for a person to escape through the opening. (Log #CP100) Add an appendix to the new paragraph to read as follows: 1901-213-(23-2.8) : Accept A-12-1.10 If the purchaser does not specify seating for personnel in an SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, enclosed body area, a secondary means of escape is not required. If the RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-2.8 (25.2.9 in the draft) to read as purchaser “might” install such seating in the future, then it is recommended follows: that the secondary escape provisions be provided when apparatus is Operator’s panel and controls. purchased. Revise 23-2.8.1 (25.2.9.1 and 25.2.9.2 in the draft) to read as follows: SUBSTANTIATION: The new wording better describes when escape 23-2.8.1 The air operator’s panel containing gauges, instruments, and provisions are required. Appendix items denotes the recommendation for valves shall face the operator’s position and shall be lighted in compliance providing the same, if seating is to be provided in future. with 2-6.1. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 23-2.8.2 Any instrument that is to be used as a basis for manual control NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 shall be visible and controlled from the operator’s position. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Add a new paragraph after 23-2.8.1 (see 25.2.9.3 in the draft) to read as AFFIRMATIVE: 28 follows: 23-2.8.3 Accessory gauges or controls that are not critical to the mission of ————————————————- the air system shall be permitted to be mounted remotely from the operator’s panel or at another location where they can be monitored. (Log #CP94) SUBSTANTIATION: The new wording changes the operator’s panel to 1901-209-(22-9.2.1, and 22-9.2.2 (new)) : Accept reflect verbiage in the fire pump section. The accessory instruments and SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, controls that are not vital to normal operations, (i.e. oil temperature gauge RECOMMENDATION: Add two new paragraphs after 22-9.2 as follows on compressor) may be remote mounted, but not necessarily on the air (see 24.9.3.1 and 24.9.3.2 in the draft): operator’s panel. 22-9.2.1 Floor surfaces, walking surfaces, and access steps, shall comply COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept with Section 13-7. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 22-9.2.2 Access handrails shall comply with Section 13-8. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBSTANTIATION: This wording will clarify that the command area AFFIRMATIVE: 28 needs to comply with section 13-7 and 13-8. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept ————————————————- NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #CP102) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-214-(23-2.10) : Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-2.10 to read as follows (see 25.2.11, ————————————————- 25.2.12 and 25.2.13 in the draft): 23-2.10 Labels and Plates. (Log #CP95) 23-2.10.1 All major components and accessories shall be identified with a 1901-210-(22-11.2) : Accept label. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, 23-2.10.2 Caution and warning signs shall be affixed where necessary. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 22-11.2 (24.11.2 in the draft) to read as 23-2.10.3 Instruction plate(s) shall be installed, as applicable, to advise the follows: operator on the proper adjustment or setting of controls for safe operation. All equipment not used during transit such as computer equipment shall be 23-2.10.4 Controls, gauges, valves, and other equipment shall be marked stored in cabinets or mounted to comply with Section 12-1.7. with a label indicating their function. SUBSTANTIATION: This wording will assure that equipment is 23-2.10.5 All controls and valves shall have a label to indicate movement adequately secured in the command or crew cab areas. direction. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 23-2.10.6* The major component manufacturers and installers of the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 air system shall provide electrical diagrams and air piping drawings that VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: document the system and its operation. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 A-23-2.10.6 The purchaser may wish to require the air compressor assembler and final stage installer of the proposed air system to provide ————————————————- drawing of the air equipment arrangement, operator’s panel layout, and air piping to allow pre-purchase evaluation of the operational characteristics of (Log #CP96) the system proposed. 1901-211-(22-11.3) : Accept 23-2.10.6.1 All symbols used shall be described in a key chart on the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, drawing. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 22-11.3 (24.11.3 in the draft) to read as 23-2.10.6.2 All drawings shall be delivered with the fire apparatus. follows: 23-2.10.6.3 The following information shall be shown: 22-11.3 Computer Electrical Outlets. (1) The general arrangement of the air system, including air storage, air 22-11.3.1 Electrical outlets specifically for computer use, whether 12 volt compressor (if provided), air panel, SCBA fill station (if provided), and air or 120 volt, shall be marked with a label for their intended usage and power inlets and outlets output. (2) The electrical wiring arrangement and controls, denoting shore- 22-11.3.2 The outlet shall be tested by the apparatus builder to insure they power, low voltage, and line voltage equipment meet the voltage and amperage specified on the label. (3) The air operator’s control panel surface showing all controls, gauges, SUBSTANTIATION: There should be no requirement for the fire valves, outlets, and other specified equipment including the labeling on the apparatus to be responsible for computer manufacturer’s electrical panel and controls. requirements. (4) The air piping arrangement with air flow direction indicated and COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept showing all valves, gauges, controls, cylinders or vessels, and furnished NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 equipment. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 23-2.11 Documentation. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 23-2.11.1 Two complete sets of documentation that cover the operation and maintenance of the system shall be provided. ————————————————- 23-2.11.2 The documentation shall be permitted to be in printed or electronic format, audio-visual format, or a combination thereof. (Log #CP99) 23-2.11.3 Nomenclature for switches, controls, and indicators shall be 1901-212-(23-2.5.3) : Accept consistent with that used on the diagrams required in 23-2.10.6 and on SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, equipment nameplates. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-2.5.3 (25.2.6.3 in the draft) to read as 23-2.11.4 The manuals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the follows: following: Prior to the initial air quality test and commissioning, the breathing air (1) An illustrated parts lists system shall be purged with pure air until moisture and other contaminants (2) A schedule of maintenance and adjustment checks have been removed. (3) A lubrication schedule SUBSTANTIATION: Wording changes removes hard to define (4) Troubleshooting information to enable a technician to locate trouble terminology. and to make repairs or adjustments to the equipment 860 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (5) Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping the is adequate cooling to keep the air compressor within the compressor equipment manufacturer’s operating temperature range. 23-2.12 Training and Instruction. SUBSTANTIATION:The new material assures that the compressor has the 23-2.12.1* If a breathing air system without a compressor/purification pre-installation approval of the air compressor assembler. Even though the system is provided, the contractor shall provide training to fire department final stage installer tests the air compressor for 2 hours, air flow provisions personnel may be insufficient for long term operations in hot weather. The above A-23-2.12.1 If the apparatus is equipped with a breathing air system such appendix item will assist in highlighting the need for additional cooling as an air cascade system or air booster system, the purchaser might still wish provisions. to require the system manufacturer rather than just the contractor to provide COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept on-site training on those systems. Expectations for training should be NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 carefully defined in the purchase specifications. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 23-2.12.1.1 This training shall include: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (1) Complete system component familiarization/walk around (2) A complete review of the system and its safety features ————————————————- (3) A review of all operation, service, and maintenance documentation (4) Hands on familiarization of the safe operation of the fill station and (Log #CP105) air management panel, including actual SCBA filling, air reel operations and 1901-216-(23-3.6.1) : Accept other pertinent operations of the system. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, 23-2.12.1.2 The trainer shall be certified by the air compressor system RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-3.6.1 (25.3.6.1 in the draft) to read as assembler as qualified to perform such training. follows: 23-2.12.2* If a breathing air system that includes a compressor/ All compressors shall have automatic audible and visual alarms and purification system is provided, a representative of the breathing air system controls at the main operator’s panel that shut down the compressor and manufacturer shall provide training to fire department personnel. prevent automatic restart when any of the following conditions occur: A-23-2.12.2 Due to the extremely complicated nature of breathing air (1) Low oil level or low oil pressure compressor systems, training is a critical component of the safe use of the (2) Discharge air temperature is higher than recommended by the system. Expectations for training should be carefully defined in the purchase manufacturer specifications. (3) Moisture in the compressed air at the purification system outlet 23-2.12.2.1 The training shall include the items defined in 23-2.12.1.1. exceeds 24 ppm 23-2.12.2.2 The training shall also include the following: (4) Carbon monoxide level within the processed air exceeds 10 ppm (1) A review of the compressor/purification system operations and SUBSTANTIATION: The requirement to have all safety alarms at the maintenance including the operations and maintenance documentation and main operator’s panel is important as the compressor and compressor the name, address and phone number of the local distributor. monitoring panel could be very remote from the operator’s position. (2) Procedures to change purification cartridges COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (3) Hands on familiarization of the safe operation of the compressor and NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 purification system. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 23-2.12.3 The Fire Department shall designate one or two individuals that AFFIRMATIVE: 28 are to be the focal points for all of the breathing air system training and equipment indoctrination. ————————————————- 23-2.12.4 The Fire Department shall designate where the training is to take place. (Log #CP108) SUBSTANTIATION: The current 23-2.10 is being divided into three parts, 1901-217-(23-4.1) : Accept one dealing with requirements for labels and plates, one for documentation, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, and one for training and instruction. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-4.1 (25.4.1 f the draft)to read as New wording clarifies the intent of the committee and removes non- follows: specific language. It provides more complete descriptions of the exact If the processed air is to be used as breathing air, the purification system labeling, documentation and training required on the completed product. shall produce breathing air that meets the requirements of NFPA 1989 The training requirements have been enhanced as air systems that include a Standard On Breathing Air Quality For Fire And Emergency Services compressor/purification system are extremely complex. It is important that Respiratory Protection. the users fully understand the operation, service and maintenance of these Add new appendix material as A-23-4.1 to read as follows: systems. Misuse could be a serious safety issue. Since the purchaser’s are The purchaser may require a quality of air other than that used for fire usually purchasing their first air compressor vehicle or it is a replacement fighting. In those situations, it is important that the purchaser specify the of a unit that is several years old, it is essential that the breathing air standards that such air quality has to meet. system manufacturer properly train the users on the new equipment, SUBSTANTIATION: NFPA is processing a new standard for breathing system installation, service, maintenance, the operating hazards as well as air quality that will be in place by the time the next edition of NFPA 1901 is safeguards of the new system. Normally the installers of such equipment adopted and it should be referenced rather than CGA and NFPA 1500. are not qualified to perform such training. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept An air cascade system and booster systems are less complicated and NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 normally fire apparatus manufacturer’s or their representatives can train fire VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: departments on normal operations. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ————————————————- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #CP109) 1901-218-(23-4.3) : Accept ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add an additional sentence to the end of 23-4.3 (Log #CP104) (25.4.3.3 of the draft) to read as follows: 1901-215-(23-3.3.2) : Accept The purifier system shall be protected from mechanical damage caused by SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, loose equipment stored on the apparatus RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-3.3.2 (25.3.3.2 in the draft) to read as Add an appendix as A-23-4.3 (see A.25.4.3.2 of the draft)to read as follows follows: Provisions shall be made by the final installer to ensure there is adequate The purification system should be located where it is easily accessible cooling to keep the air compressor within the compressor manufacturer’s for service, preferably on slide out tracks or in location where purifier operating temperature range while it is operating in an ambient temperature cartridges and filter elements can be installed from the top. These units can range between 32°F and 110°F (0°C and 43°C). be remote mounted from the air compressor and operator’s panel. Add a new 23-3.3.2.1 to read as follows: SUBSTANTIATION: It is important that the purifier system be protected The final stage installer of the air compressor shall submit air system from mechanical damage as damage could affect the performance of the arrangement drawings, air flow schematic drawings, body drawings, and system or the quality of the breathing air. The appendix provides additional other pertinent data to the air compressor assembler for written approval. information on the location of purification system and available mounting A copy of this approval shall be retained by final assembler in apparatus system or accessibility. documentation. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Add a new appendix to 23-3.3.2 to read as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Special air flow engineering, supplement fans, additional doors and vents VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: may be required for the release of heated air from the air compressor during AFFIRMATIVE: 28 long periods of operation. These could include automatic operating doors in the roof of the apparatus, manually opened roof doors, large electric driven exhaust fans, etc. These ————————————————- extra provisions installed by the final stage installer could ensure there 861 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #CP110) of multiple cylinders, the other chambers shall contain air cylinders of equal 1901-219-(23-5.7.2) : Accept size filled to a gauge pressure of 4500 psi (30,000 kPa) during the test. These SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, cylinders shall not rupture during the test. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-5.7.2 (see 25.5.7.2 through 25.5.7.2.3 of 23-9.4.2 The testing shall prove that the air refill station is capable of the draft) to read as follows: containing all fragments of a failed cylinder so as to protect the operator The air tank mounting shall facilitate removal of air tanks for inspection, and not rupture cylinders in adjacent chambers and prove that the venting testing, or service. Air tanks shall be installed so that all air tanks, control provisions direct the air concussive release away from the operator. valves, and associated piping are readily accessible. Air tanks shall be 23-9.4.3 All test results shall be certified by an independent third-party mounted in such a fashion to permit visual inspection of external surfaces certification organization. and emergency access to shut off of tank valves. The air tank location shall SUBSTANTIATION: The changes are editorial to clarify that the testing be away from any heat-producing devices such as the generator engine or is single article type testing, not testing each refill station. It also removes exhaust. some ambiguous wording and brings the wording of 23-9.4.3 in line with SUBSTANTIATION: The current second sentence has been deleted as it changes being made regarding the third party being called a certification is not measurable. The rewording is to clarify the requirements and remove organization rather than a testing organization. non-measurable language. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP114) (Log #CP111) 1901-223-(23-10.9.2) : Accept 1901-220-(23-7.1) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Delete 23-10.9.2 RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-7.1 (25.7 of the draft) to read as SUBSTANTIATION: Air reels can be mounted in remote areas or follows: compartments, equipped with protective rollers or guides for hose. 23-7.1 Air supply regulation shall include the following provisions on an Visibility of reel spool area is not required. Only access to the reel for operator’s air control panel: service or removal. (1) One air pressure gauge marked with a label that reads: “Supply COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Pressure” between the air supply line valve and the pressure self-relieving NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 regulator VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (2) One slow-operating air supply valve on the intake supply line AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (3) One self-relieving adjustable pressure regulator equipped with a device to prevent unintentional adjustment ————————————————- (4) One air pressure gauge downstream of the pressure regulator (5) One pressure relief valve preset at not over 10 percent above the (Log #CP115) pressure regulator output setting 1901-224-(23-11.1) : Accept (6) A warning label shall be installed next to the pressure regulator to SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, indicate working pressure setting and that a relief valve will release at 10% RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-11.1 (25.11.1 of the draft) to read as higher than the working pressure. follows: Delete 23-7.2 and 23-7.3 and A-23-7.1 All air hose and couplings supplied shall comply to their intended SUBSTANTIATION: The changes are editorial in nature. The appendix is application and shall have a pressure rating equal to or greater than the being deleted since it is redundant. Paragraphs 23-7.2 and 23-7.3 have been highest pressure expected to be encountered as input to the hose with a test incorporated into 23-7.1. safety factor of at least 3:1. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept SUBSTANTIATION: Air hose should be the type required for a particular NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 application, i.e. low pressure utility air vs. high pressure breathing air. Low VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: pressure hose does not have 4 to 1 safety factor. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ————————————————- VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (Log #CP112) 1901-221-(23-8.2) : Accept ————————————————- SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-8.2 (25.8.2 of the draft) to read as (Log #65) follows: 1901-225-(23-11.3) : Accept in Principle When a cascade system is installed an air control panel and system piping SUBMITTER: Dave Weinaug, Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. arrangement shall allow the operator to perform the following functions: RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: (1) Fill the storage system directly from a remote air compressor. The discharge end of any high-pressure breathing air hose shall have (2) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from a remote air compressor. a slow-operating valve with a right hand female thread fitting of the (3) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from the storage system appropriate type and pressure rating for its intended purpose. the air (4) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from a booster pump that is supplied by cylinders to be refilled and a removable threaded dust plug attached with a the storage system, if provided chain. The discharge end of any low pressure other types of air hose shall (5) Utilize the “cascade method,” the “bulk fill method,” or both for filling have either a slow-operating valve and a threaded connection or a quick SCBA cylinders, as appropriate to the design of the system. disconnect-type connection. (6) Regulate the maximum SCBA fill pressure. SUBSTANTIATION: Current wording of the first sentence incorrectly (7) Meter airflow to control the SCBA fill rate with a slow-operating valve. implies that all hoses used in high pressure applications are used for filling (8) Take an air sample to check air quality (at the panel or at the end of an cylinders. Not all high pressure hoses are used for this purpose, as in the air reel hose, if applicable). case of a refill hose that connects to a system refill fitting on a cascade SUBSTANTIATION: The proposed revisions are editorial in nature. system control panel. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept The word “thread” should be deleted, because it excludes the high pressure NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 quick disconnect fittings used by MSA. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Regarding the dust plug, I am unable to locate either a supplier or a AFFIRMATIVE: 28 manufacturer that will produce threaded male CGA 346, 347, or 677 dust plugs with chains. It appears this statement is requiring the use of fittings ————————————————- that do not exist . In addition, there would be no need for such dust plugs on fill hoses inside of fill enclosure stations, most of which are equipped with (Log #CP113) holders for their fill hoses. 1901-222-(23-9.4) : Accept The reference to “other types” of hose in the second sentence seems too SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, general. Breathing air system pressures are typically classified in very broad RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-9.4 (25.9.5 of the draft) to read as terms as either high pressure or low pressure. The first sentence clearly follows: addresses all high pressure hoses, so the second sentence should clearly 23-9.4 Testing and Certification. address all low pressure hoses. All possible hoses will then be addressed in 23-9.4.1 The manufacturer of the enclosed air refill station shall type test the combination of these two sentences. a standard production model to validate the design. The test shall include Without the word “either”, this sentence reads that all low pressure hoses pressurizing a 1-hour SCBA cylinder rated at a gauge pressure of 4500 psi must have a valve, and the end fitting can be either threaded or a quick (30,000 kPa) to failure. If the system provides for simultaneously refilling disconnect. The majority of these low pressure quick disconnects shut 862 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA themselves off internally when they are disconnected, so a valve would be (Log #CP118) redundant. Adding the word “either” clarifies that a valve is required only 1901-228-(23-14) : Accept without a quick disconnect. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle RECOMMENDATION: Revise Section 23-14 (Section 25.14 in the draft) Revise 23-11.3 (25.11.3 in the draft) to read as follows: to read as follows: 23-11.3 Discharge Ends. 23-14* Testing. 23-11.3.1* The discharge end of any breathing air hose shall have a threaded A-23-14 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being connection. certified by an independent testing organization, the purchaser might 23-11.3.1.1 If no other fittings are installed at the end of the hose, a wish to specify that these tests also be certified by the independent testing temporary protective cap shall be installed to prevent internal contamination organization. of the hose during shipping. 23-14.1 The complete air system shall be tested by the final system 23-11.3.1.2 If the discharge end of hose will terminate with a threaded installer after its installation on the fire apparatus is complete, using the connection when in use, it shall be equipped with a slow-operating valve. testing procedure prescribed by the system manufacturer. 23-11.3.1.3 If the threaded end of the hose terminates in a quick connection 23-14.2 The following items shall be tested or verified on all air systems. fitting, a slow operating valve and protective cap shall not be required. a) Pressurize the storage system to its maximum operational pressure 23-11.3.1.4 Connections to hose shall comply with 25.2.7. and check all connections made as a part of the installation for leaks with 23-11.3.2 The discharge end of utility air hose shall have either a threaded an appropriate leak detection device which could include bubble fluid or connection and slow-operating valve or a quick connection fitting. electronic means. Add a new appendix to read as follows: b) Visually verify the relief valve set points and working pressure of the A.23-11.3.1 The discharge end of any breathing air hose may have various air storage vessel. fittings, threads, or quick connections installed on the threaded end of c) Verify the accuracy of all pressure gauges. the discharge hose. The purchaser needs to specify the particular hose d) Fully test the operational capabilities of the fill station as established by termination, thread size, valve control, quick connection fitting, expected the manufacturer of the fill station. application of hose, and other pertinent information if the manufacturer is to e) All fill adapter connections shall be sealed to eliminate the introduction provide appropriate connections. of contaminants prior to shipment. COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee is changing the 23-14.3 If the system’s air supply includes a compressor/purification requirements to focus on breathing air hose regardless of pressure and utility system, the following additional items shall be verified or tested. air hose. There can be applications where breathing air is supplied by hose a) Confirm that the fluid levels are at the manufacturer’s recommended at pressures below 300 psi. Breathing air hose needs to be protected from levels including the lubricant and coolant, if liquid cooled. contamination. The wording was changed to reflect common applications in b) Verify the expiration date of the purification filters and cartridges and the market place. that they have been installed as required by the manufacturer of the system . NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 c) Operate the air compressor for a minimum of two hours or the period VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: required to completely fill the onboard air storage cylinders or vessels, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 whichever is longer. d) Confirm that all compressor interstage pressures are within guidelines ————————————————- as established by the compressor manufacturer. e) Confirm the operation of the compressor shutdown switch at the (Log #CP116) pressure requested by the purchaser. 1901-226-(23-12) : Accept f) Confirm the set point of the final pressure safety relief valve and SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, pressure maintaining valve. RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-12 (25.12 of the draft) to read as g) Confirm the factory set limits of all electrical shutdown devices follows: including low oil pressure, automatic condensate drain system, high air Low Pressure Utility Air Supply. Where the non-emergency use air outlets temperature, excessive processed air moisture, high carbon monoxide and are supplied by the chassis air brake system, the air supply shall be from an motor amperage draw. auxiliary air circuit that is equipped with a pressure protection valve (PPV) h) Perform a cooling airflow test in the compartment where the and auxiliary air tanks. compressor is installed and assure the flow meets the compressor Revise A-23-12 (A.25.12 of the draft) to read as follows: manufacturer’s requirements. The size of the air supply piping, chassis air compressor cubic feet per 25.14.4 Air Quality. minute rating, and auxiliary air reservoir(s) cubic foot capacity are of critical 25.14.4.1 Prior to delivery of the apparatus to the end user, the final system importance in supplying non-emergency application utility air outlets. installer shall draw an air sample from the system and submit the sample to These air outlets could be used to fill truck tires, pressurized water fire be tested in accordance with NFPA 1989. extinguishers, etc. Such air brake connections are not intended to be used 25.14.4.2 The breathing air shall meet the air quality standards defined in for rescue air bags, air tools, air reels, and other rescue applications, due to NFPA 1989. their limited duration, volume, and pressure. Air supply for low pressure 23-14.5 If the system has a compressor/purification system, the person utility applications should be from dedicated air compressors or air cascade performing the tests for the final system installer shall have been trained storage tanks. by the compressor/purification system manufacturer and shall be able to SUBSTANTIATION: The changes remove air supply from air brake provide proof of such training. system to air reels and rescue equipment. Air supply from an air brake 23-14.6 The results of all tests including the air quality analysis shall be system should be limited to air outlets for miscellaneous applications. documented and shall be included in the documentation that is given to the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept purchaser upon acceptance of the fire apparatus. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: The test requirements have been updated to reflect VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: the type of testing that should be done to ensure the system is fully function. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 This included adding a minimum of a 2 hour test at full capacity. This will also ensure that the results of all testing and air quality analysis are delivered ————————————————- with the documentation. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #CP117) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-227-(23-13.3) : Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise 23-13.3 (see 25.13.3 through 25.13.3.2 of the draft) to read as follows: ————————————————- All components of the piping system shall meet the requirements of (Log #CP119) Sections 23-2. The piping system shall be arranged with an air regulator 1901-229-(24-1) : Accept that shall limit the air pressure in the piping to the desired operating SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, pressure. A pressure relief valve set to relieve the pressure at 10% above the RECOMMENDATION: Revise 24-1 (26.1 of the draft) to read as follows: desired operating pressure shall be installed on the downstream side of the If a chassis-mounted winch is installed on the apparatus, it shall meet the regulator. requirements of this chapter. SUBSTANTIATION: The changes are editorial to reduced verbiage. Add a new 24.1.1 (see 26.1.1 of the draft) to read as follows: Changed pressure relief valve setting to similar setting as found in other The winch shall be designed for the intended use and shall be installed in sections of the air chapter—relating to pressure regulators. accordance with winch manufacturer’s recommendations. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept Add an appendix to 24-1.1 (see A.26.1.1 of the draft) to read as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Winches are classified by manufacturers for different applications and VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: uses. The purchaser may wish to specify winches meet requirements of AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SAE J706, Rating of Winches. Winches installed on fire apparatus are not designed nor suited for lifting or lowering personnel in rescue applications. ————————————————- Winches of under 20,000# rating on fire apparatus are not designed for removal of apparatus from “buried” off road conditions. A heavy duty wrecker should be used for towing and lifting of fire apparatus. 863 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA SUBSTANTIATION: Since there will be no minimum rating or type of (Log #CP123) winch required by the standard, the user now can specify a winch suitable 1901-234-(24-3.1.1) : Accept for their requirements. Winches should be selected and installed per winch SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, manufacturer’s recommendations for the type of service expected. The RECOMMENDATION: Revise 24-3.1.1 (see 26.3.1.1 and 26.3.1.2 in the appendix help the purchaser understand winch classifications. draft) to read as follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 24-3.1.1* Operation of the electric motor shall be by means of a handheld NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 control with forward, neutral, and reverse positions. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 24-3.1.2 The control shall be located at the end of an electrical cord that is AFFIRMATIVE: 28 a minimum 25 ft (7.6 m) long and that plugs into a receptacle near the winch location or shall be integrated into a handheld transmitter operating on a ————————————————- Federal Communications Commission-approved radio frequency for the winch control device. (Log #CP120) Renumber existing 24-3.1.2 as 24-3.1.3 1901-230-(24-1.1 (New) ) : Accept SUBSTANTIATION: The revised wording does not require the controlling SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, device to be operated only by switches. RECOMMENDATION: Add two new paragraphs after 24-1 (see 26.1.2 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept and 26.1.3 of the draft) to read as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 24-1.1 All winches shall be equipped with rollers, guides or both to prevent VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: damage to winch cable or the vehicle. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 24-1.2 All rollers and guides shall be designed to match the winch capacity and rope size. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: These were missing from the last standard and are commonly used on all winch installations. (Log #CP124) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-235-(24-3.2) : Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: RECOMMENDATION: Revise 24-3.2 (see 26.3.2 in the draft) to read as AFFIRMATIVE: 28 follows: 24-3.2 Power Supply. ————————————————- 24-3.2.1 Dedicated power and ground circuits shall be utilized. 24-3.2.2 Wiring shall be sized in accordance with the winch (Log #CP121) manufacturer’s installation instructions and shall comply to Chapter 11 of 1901-231-(24-2) : Accept this standard. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, 24-3.2.3 The power supply line shall be equipped with a resettable circuit RECOMMENDATION: Change the title of 24-2 (26.2 in the draft) to protection device and properly sized for the winch’s power requirements. Winch Wire or Synthetic Rope SUBSTANTIATION: The new wording improves the installation Delete 24-2.1 and its appendix requirements considering the heavy electric draw by winch motors. Add an appendix to 24-2 to read as follows: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept A-24-2 Most electric (12-volt or 24-volt dc) winches used for fire NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 apparatus applications are rated at between 5,000 lb and 12,000 lb line pull. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Smaller winches of the removable type may be specified by the purchaser. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Hydraulic driven winches are typically rated for 6000 lb to 30,000 lb (26.7 kN to 133.5 kN) line pull. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: The removal of the minimum rating allows users to specify a winch size suitable for their specific application. The appendix (Log #CP125) reflects common applications and sizes of winches and discusses the 1901-236-(24-3.3 (New) ) : Accept minimum winch size as an aid to purchasers in deciding on procuring a SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, winch on a fire apparatus. RECOMMENDATION: Add new wording after 24-3.2 to cover removable COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept winches to read as follows (see 26.3.3 through 26.3.4.4): NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 24-3.3 Removable electric winches. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 24-3.3.1 Electric winches that are temporarily attached to the apparatus AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (at sides, rear, or front) shall meet the same requirements as permanently mounted winches. ————————————————- 24-3.3.2 The attachment to the apparatus shall be with quick release devices. (Log #74) 24-3.3.3 The attachment system on the apparatus shall meet the 1901-232-(24-2.2) : Accept requirements of section 15.11 SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service 24-3.4 Electric Power for Removable Winches. RECOMMENDATION: Change “breaking strength” to “design load 24-3.4.1 The electrical power supply(ies) from the apparatus to the rating”. removable winch shall terminate at a quick disconnect receptacle with a SUBSTANTIATION: Wire rope should have a factor safety and not work connector plug. up to the breaking strength. 24-3.4.2 The receptacle shall have a label indicating its use. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 24-3.4.3 The power cord from the receptacle to the winch shall be sized for NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 the power requirements of the winch. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 24-3.4.4 The power cord shall be highly flexible and shall be protected AFFIRMATIVE: 28 from mechanical damage. SUBSTANTIATION: The use of removable winches on rescue apparatus ————————————————- has become very popular as it reduces costs and potentially can be used on any side of apparatus. These are often used for stabilization of vehicles (Log #CP122) during rescue operations. 1901-233-(24-2.2) : Accept The new wording addresses these new applications and the attachment of SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, removable winches to the apparatus. RECOMMENDATION: Change the first sentence of 24-2.2 (26.2.1 in the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept draft) to read as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 The winch shall have a minimum wire rope or synthetic rope length of 75 ft VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (22 m) 100 ft (30 m). AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: The reduced wire rope capacity reflects smaller winch sizes now used on apparatus. Also, synthetic rope is now provided on ————————————————- some type of winches. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (Log #CP126) NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 1901-237-(24-4.2) : Accept VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Add new wording after 24-4.1 to read as follows (see 26.4.2 through 26.4.2.2 of the draft): ————————————————- 24-4.2 The forward-neutral-reverse hydraulic control for the winch shall be electrically operated to permit remote control of the hydraulic winch operations. 24-4.2.1 Operation of the hydraulic winch shall be by means of a handheld control with forward, neutral, and reverse positions. 864 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 24-4.2.2 The control shall be located at the end of an electrical cord that COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept is a minimum 25 ft (7.6 m) long and that plugs into a receptacle near the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 winch location or shall be integrated into a handheld transmitter operating VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: on a Federal Communications Commission-approved radio frequency for the AFFIRMATIVE: 28 winch control device. Delete the first paragraph of the appendix to 24-4.4. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: Remote control operation of the hydraulic winch should be the same as an electric winch installation. The requirements are (Log #113) being moved into the body of the standard and removed from the appendix 1901-240-(Appendix A) : Accept in Principle of 24-4.4 SUBMITTER: Richard B. Mills, Akron Brass/Rep. FAMA COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept RECOMMENDATION: Add new text as follows: NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 “The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard, i.e., VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: nozzles, hose, ladders, etc., may not meet ISO standards for point credits AFFIRMATIVE: 28 that individual fire departments may need or require. Please refer to the ISO schedules for this information.” ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: Placement in the standard could be relative to the following paragraphs and their sub-paragraphs -NFPA 1901 Paragraphs 4-6, (Log #CP127) 4-7; 5-6, 5-7; 6-7, 6-8; 7-7, 7-8; 8-4, 8-5; and 9-8, 9-9. 1901-238-(24-4.5) : Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, Add an appendix to 3-7 to read as follows: RECOMMENDATION: Revise 24-4.5 (26.4.6 of the draft) to read as The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard, i.e., follows: nozzles, hose, ladders, etc., may not maximize a community’s grading The hydraulic winch engagement controls shall be located in the driving by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should compartment. check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for Revise 24-4.5.1 (26.4.6.1 of the draft) to read as follows: information on what tool and equipment should be carried to maximize their A “HYDRAULIC WINCH ENGAGED” indicator shall be provided in the community’s grading. driving compartment to indicate that the hydraulic pump engagement has Add an appendix to 3-8 that reads as follows: been successfully completed. See A-3-7. Add an appendix to 24-4.5.1 (see A.26.4.6.1 of the draft) to read as follows: Add the same wording as appendix to 4-6 and 4-7, 5-6 and 5-7, 6-7 and 6- Completion of the engagement might require that the chassis transmission be 8, 7-7 and 7-8, 8-4 and 8-5, and 9-8 and 9-9. shifted into the proper gear (split shaft PTO’s only). COMMITTEE STATEMENT: A direct reference to ISO is being deleted Revise 24-4.5.2 (26.4.6.2 of the draft) to read as follows: as ISO is not the rating authority in all states and a more generic discussion An “OK TO OPERATE WINCH” indicator shall be provided in the driving will apply in the international arena as well. Also, the Fire Suppression compartment to indicate that the winch is engaged, the transmission is in Rating Schedule which is used by ISO is not a standard and only grades the proper gear (automatic transmissions only), and the parking brake is what a community has. Therefore the wording “maximize a community’s engaged. grading” is being used rather than imply that ISO tells a community they are Add a new 24-4.5.3 to read as follows(see 26.4.6.3 of the draft): required to have certain thing. An interlock system shall be provided to prevent advancement of the engine NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 speed in the cab or at any operator’s panel unless the transmission is in VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: neutral and the parking brake is engaged, or the apparatus is in the “OK TO AFFIRMATIVE: 28 OPERATE WINCH” mode. SUBSTANTIATION: The revised wording simplifies the requirement and ————————————————- makes it consistent with wording corrected in other chapters on pumps and generators. (Log #83) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 1901-241-(A-3-8.2, A-4.7.2, A-5.7.2.1, A-6.8.1, A-7.8.2, and A-9.9.2) : NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 Reject VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service AFFIRMATIVE: 28 RECOMMENDATION: Add the following wording: Wheel chocks provide an increased margin of safety for vehicle stability ————————————————- when parked on slopes. This standard (NFPA 1901) requires apparatus to carry two or four wheel chocks depending on the type of unit. One wheel (Log #CP79) chock on hard surface (pavement or concrete) with the transmission in 1901-239-(32-5.3.1) : Accept neutral, transfer case in two-wheel drive if apparatus is all wheel drive, tires SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, at correct pressure, and all brakes released shall hold the apparatus on a 10% RECOMMENDATION: Revise 21-5.3.1 (23.6.3.2 i the draft) to read as grade. Purchasers with steeper grades in their response area should consider follows: specifying higher performance wheel chocks. When making a wheel chock 21-5.3.1 Power sources powered by a non-chassis engine shall include the selection, the fire department should take into consideration the type of following equipment or shall be installed as follows: surface encountered in their area of operations. For example, wheel chocks (1) Installed so that fumes, vapors, heat, and vibrations do not enter the may perform differently when used on slippery or non-paved soft surfaces. interior passenger compartment The following two methods test wheel chock performance: (2) Have the exhaust outlet piped to the exterior and located so that exhaust (1) Place the fully loaded apparatus on a 10% or greater grade having a is directed away from any operator’s position hard surface (pavement or concrete) and place a wheel chock on the downhill (3) Generators 8 kW and over shall be equipped with a high temperature side of a wheel of the most heavily loaded axle. The transmission must be automatic shut down system and low oil automatic shut down in neutral; if apparatus is all wheel drive, the transfer case must be in two (4) Generators shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s wheel drive; tires at correct pressure; and all brakes must be released. Under installation requirements for ventilation and service accessibility. these conditions if the wheel chock holds the apparatus without the apparatus (5) Generators installed in compartments requiring the compartment tire climbing over, damaging, or sliding the chock; the chock is deemed to doors to be open during operation shall be equipped with a compartment hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10% grade. If a grade greater than 10% door interlock system, or the compartment shall be equipped with a high is used and the wheel chock holds the fully loaded apparatus on the grade temperature alarm. without the apparatus tire climbing over, damaging, or sliding the chock (6) Generators installed in compartments on slide trays and designed for the wheel chock is also deemed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10% operation in the “slide out” position shall have interlocks to assure such grade; and therefore, meets the 10% requirement for a wheel chock of this operation or the compartment shall be equipped with a high temperature standard (NFPA 1901). alarm. (2) Weigh the apparatus and place it on a hard (pavement or concrete) level (7) Permanently installed generators shall have easily accessible engine oil surface. Place the wheel chock at a wheel of the most heavily loaded axle in drain provisions or piping to a remote location for oil changing. the direction of pull. With the transmission in neutral, transfer case in two- (8) Generators located away or remote from the main operator’s area (top of wheel drive if the apparatus is all wheel drive, tires at correct pressure, and vehicle, over pump, hidden in body, etc.) shall have a remote operating panel all brakes released. Pull the apparatus using a dynamometer to measure the with required instrumentation, start and stop controls, and other controls force of pull. Pull the apparatus until the wheel chock no longer can prevent necessary for safe operation. the fully loaded apparatus from moving. Using W as the weight of the fully Add an additional paragraph to A-21-5.3.1 after the paragraph moved from loaded apparatus and P as the maximum reading on the dynamometer when A-21-4.7.2. the wheel chock can no longer prevent the fully loaded apparatus from The purchaser may want to specify a high temperature indicator to help moving, the following formula will give the percent grade at which the wheel troubleshoot automatic shutdowns. chock will no longer hold the fully loaded apparatus. SUBSTANTIATION: These additional requirements are common practice Percent grade = 100 x P/W for generators and found in good generation installations. This will bring the SUBSTANTIATION: Wheel chocks should and can have a performance standard in line with general industry practice. requirement. One wheel chock holding a fully loaded truck on a ten percent grade is a reasonable performance requirement. 865 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject Examples of auxiliary braking systems include: engine retarders, COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee does not feel there is transmission retarders, exhaust retarders, and driveline retarders. These a need to get into a long explanation of how to test wheel chocks. The devices have various levels of effectiveness on braking. In addition, the requirement for wheel chocks is stated in the standard. systems can be activated by various means and settings, both automatic and NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 manual in operation. The purchaser should carefully evaluate all auxiliary VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: braking systems based on truck weight, terrain, duty cycle, and many other AFFIRMATIVE: 28 factors. Some auxiliary braking devices should be disconnected when the apparatus ————————————————- is operated on slippery surfaces. Follow the auxiliary braking device manufacturer’s recommendations for proper instructions. (Log #86) SUBSTANTIATION: The recommendation for auxiliary braking devices 1901-242-(A-4-8.2 (New) ) : Reject for over 31,000 GVWR was removed, since these devices could be provided SUBMITTER: Bill McCombs, Alan Saulsbury, Federal Signal Fire Rescue on any size vehicle. In addition, the systems are applicable for various Group terrain and duty cycle hazards. RECOMMENDATION: A4-8.2 Appendix Equipment. The following Additional wording also provides the user with guidance on selection of list of equipment should be considered for inclusion on the rescue pumper auxiliary braking devices. equipment inventory. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept One smoke ejector, 5000 ft3/min 9142 m3/min) minimum capacity. If NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 electrically driven, a suitable adapter cable should be supplied to fit standard VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: house “U” ground outlets, extension cables, and outlets on generators used in AFFIRMATIVE: 28 fire departments. One 2 1/2 in. (65-mm) hydrant valve (screw type gate) 5# ————————————————- One double gated reducing leader wye, sized to fit hose used in the department 27# (Log #31) Four hose straps 7# 1901-244-(A-10-3.2.3) : Accept in Principle One portable pump 165# SUBMITTER: Ron W. French, W. Chicago, IL Master stream appliance, 1000 gpm (3785 1/min) minimum, w/ tips and RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: stream shaper 40# A-10.3.2.3 The angle of approach or departure affects the road clearance Foam delivery equipment compatible with onboard foam system. Eductor of the vehicle going over short steep grades such as would be found in & pick up tube. 12# a driveway entrance, crossing a high crowned road at right angles, or in One hose clamp 22# off-road service. Too low an angle of approach or departure will result in One portable thermal cutting unit designed for cutting metal 40# the apparatus scraping the ground. The accompanying diagram shows the One stokes basket 22# method of determining the angle (in this case) of departure. The angle of Four assorted hand saws 7# approach (front of the vehicle) is measured in the same fashion. Two telescopic light poles or a folding or telescopic light mast 40# In the illustration the line AT represents the circumstance when the Cribbing of various sizes and lengths. 2x4x18-20 pcs. -70#, 4x4x18-20 pcs.- tailboard is the determining lowest point. (The line BT represents a 140# -total 210# circumstance where the tailboard is not the lowest point, in this case it is a Two 5 gal foam cans 90# fuel tank). The angle of departure is shown as “X”. To determine the angle, Total appendix section equipment weight 757# the rear wheel is backed up on a length of cord. The cord is pulled taut and Utilizing Gary Handwerk’s equipment weight list and adding some weight held while the height (“H”) is measured at a specific distance (“L”) from for mounting brackets, the equipment listed weights as follows: the point where the cord meets the tire/road interface (The actual distance Standard equipment in section 4-8.2 (Current 3-8.2) Gary Handwerk’s “L” is not important, choose a convenient distance). The ratio of “H”/”L” number 535# is the tangent of the angle of departure. Knowing the ratio the angle may Additional recommended standard equipment 1226# be determined from a table of the functions of angles. Since the standard Recommended appendix equipment 757# requires a minimum angle of 8°, and since the tangent of 8° is 0.14054, if the Total Equipment 2518# ratio of “H” divided by “L” is 0.14054 or larger, the angle of departure is 8° SUBSTANTIATION: The justification for adding an additional chapter or greater. stems from the increasing percentage of “Rescue Pumpers” being utilized SUBSTANTIATION: To clarify meaning of angle of approach/departure by the fire service, as they adapt their equipment to new and more varied provide a means to determine angle of approach/departure. roles. The increased EMS, Rescue, and Haz-mat roles are forcing many COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle departments to combine these functions into vehicles also serving the Revise the text of A-10-3.2.3 (A.12.3.2.3 of the draft) to read as follows: traditional pumper role. This is resulting in over weight vehicles when all of The angle of approach or departure affects the road clearance of the vehicle the additional equipment for these functions is added to vehicles designed for going over short steep grades such as would be found in a driveway entrance, normal pumper service. crossing a high crowned road at a right angle, or in off-road service. Too low An additional chapter is needed to give guidance on recommended an angle of approach or departure will result in the apparatus scraping the equipment for “Rescue Pumpers” as well as define a miscellaneous ground. Figure A-10-3.2.3 shows the method of determining the angle (in equipment allowance that will more accurately define the intended service this case) of departure. The angle of approach (front of vehicle) is measured function of the vehicle. This should more clearly communicate the fire in the same fashion. departments intentions to a vehicle manufacturer during a bid request and In the illustration, the line AT represents the circumstance when the rear reduce the number of surprises when the vehicle is delivered and loaded with step is the determining lowest point. The line BT represents a circumstance equipment. where the rear step is not the lowest point, in this case it is a fuel tank. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject The angle of departure is shown as XA or XB. To determine the angle of COMMITTEE STATEMENT: See Committee Meeting Action on public departure, a thin steel strip is placed up against the rear of the tires or a Proposal 1901-43 (Log #43) which adds a requirement for additional weight cord can be stretched tight from one rear tire to the other. By eying and when larger cubic footage of compartmentation is provided. The committee determining the lowest point (the rear step, fuel tank, or other equipment or does not want to establish a rescue-pumper type of fire apparatus and component) that would make the smallest angle of departure, use a plumb therefore does not need an equipment list for such a type of apparatus. The bob hung from this location to determine the location of this point on the changes made to provide for additional weight allowance should solve the ground. Mark this point on the ground (point of the plumb bob). Measure problem of overweight vehicles. the vertical distance from the ground to where the plumb bob was hung NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (distance V). Measure the horizontal distance from the plumb bob point VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: to in front of the steel strip or to the cord running from rear tire to rear tire AFFIRMATIVE: 28 (distance H). Divide the vertical distance (V) by the horizontal distance (H). The ratio of V/H is the tangent of the angle of departure. Knowing this ————————————————- ratio, the angle of departure may be determined from a table of trigonometric functions of angles or from a math calculator. Since the standard requires (Log #CP52) a minimum angle of departure of 8 degrees and the tangent of 8 degrees 1901-243-(A-10-3.1.7) : Accept is 0.1405, if the ratio of V divided by H is 0.1405 or larger, the angle of SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, departure is 8 degrees or greater. RECOMMENDATION: Revise A-10-3.1.7 (A.12.3.1.8 in the draft) to read COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels the additional as follows: explanation and revisions to the figure will further assist users in easily Purchasers of apparatus should consider equipping the apparatus with an determining the angle of approach or departure for their apparatus. auxiliary braking system. Fire apparatus commonly make repeated stops NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 from high speeds which cause rapid brake lining wear and brake fade VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: sometimes leading to accidents. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Auxiliary braking systems are recommended on apparatus that are exposed regularly to steep or long grades, are operating in congested areas where repeated stops are normal, or are responding to a high number of ————————————————- emergencies. 866 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

�

�� � �� �� ��

�� ��

Committee Action to 1901-244 (Log #31) (Log #129) 1901-246-(A-14-5.1) : Reject SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN RECOMMENDATION: Delete the following text: The term “all bronze” indicates that the pump’s main casing, impeller, intake and discharge manifolds, and other principal components that are exposed to the water to be pumped, with the exception of the shaft bearings and seals, are made of a high-copper alloy material. SUBSTANTIATION: The term “all bronze” is no longer used in this standard - it was removed from 14-5.1 in 1991. Therefore, the term does not need definition and in fact is out of context. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The committee feels that even though the term “all bronze” is not used in the standard, it is used in the field sometimes and leaving the explanation provides useful information. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————-

Recommendation to 1901-244 (Log #31) (Log #CP54) 1901-245-(A-12-4.3) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION:Revise the wording in A-12-4.3 (A.14.4.3 in the draft) to read as shown: In many areas, the overall height of the vehicle needs to be restricted in order to clear bridges, station doors, and so forth. The tiller driving compartment roof is normally the highest point on the vehicle. Hence, the height of the tiller driving compartment and the inside headroom might have to be reduced to achieve the desired overall height. Careful consideration should be given to the packaging of the tiller body in deciding ground ladder and body compartment design to achieve the required seat head heights. SUBSTANTIATION: In view of the work done to improve seating areas (see committee meeting action on public proposal 1901-67 (Log #63), the committee does not want to be recommending reducing head height. It is important that adequate head height be maintained for the tiller operator and, if overall height of the apparatus is a concern, the tiller body has to be designed to accommodate the tiller operators position without compromising the head height. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————-

867 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (Log #33) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-247-(A-14-6.1) : Accept in Principle AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: ————————————————- Intakes at the front or rear of the apparatus, or otherwise specially situated, might not allow drafting rated capacity at rated pressure. When provided, (Log #130) the purchaser should consider requiring the manufacturer to certify the flow 1901-250-(A-14-10.1.2) : Accept rates required from auxiliary intakes the same size or larger than the size SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN of the suction hose specified in Table 14-2.4.1(a), especially front and rear RECOMMENDATION: Revise text to read as follows: intakes or other intakes located 10 ft (3m) or more away from the pump. Pumps are operated from the side, top, front or rear of the vehicle, and SUBSTANTIATION: a) When a “large” auxiliary suction inlet is stationary pumping requires that there is no power applied to the wheels specified, the intent of the purchaser is a job specific - that of supplying a while pumping. Therefore, it is essential that any controls which could apply large volume of water to the fire pump from a specific inlet at a specified power to the wheels while pumping, be equipped with a means to prevent location. dislocation of the control from its set position in the pumping mode. b) Section 14-2.4.1 does not specify which master suction inlet can, will or SUBSTANTIATION: As currently written, this section only addresses may be used to provide fire pump capacity. the pump shifting mechanism in a split-shaft PTO drive arrangement. It is c) Fire pumps, of the single suction variety, are commonly found midship equally important to prevent the chassis transmission from being engaged mounted as well as being rear mounted and front mounted; and concurrently when stationary pumping through a transmission-mounted (SAE) PTO, may or may not be configured with side suction inlets. front-of-engine crank shaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO. The revised d) Traditional midship mounted fire pumps are commonly found with wording addresses these other situations. both rear and front master suction inlets; and likewise may or may not be COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept configured with a master suction inlet on each side of the apparatus. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 e) As stated in A-14-2.4.2, “The performance of a fire pump can be VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: adversely affected by the design of the suction piping or the addition of AFFIRMATIVE: 28 valves to the suction side of the pump.” However, friction losses in additional plumbing and valves, should not be calculated but should be certified by the ————————————————- apparatus manufacturer to insure the purchaser of master inlet capabilities. f) Due to the numerous inlet locations available, possible mounting (Log #8) locations of the fire pump and friction losses that must be calculated 1901-251-(A-14-10.7.4) : Reject in valves, piping and fittings, the purchaser may not have the technical NOTE: This Proposal appeared as Comment 1901-221 (Log #168) which expertise to accurately specify a flow rate and should rely on apparatus was held from the May 1999 ROC on Proposal 1901-217. manufacturers to provide said information prior to promulgating SUBMITTER: Steve Morelan, Little Canada Fire Dept., Inc., MN specifications. RECOMMENDATION: Add the following to the last paragraph: Requiring the manufacturer to certify the flow rate, will insure compliance. The table below shows the five critical test points pursuant to the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept in Principle requirements of 14-10.7.1: Add a sentence to the end of A-14.6.1 (A.16.6.1 in the draft) to read as follows: Intake Pressure (psi) Discharge Pressure (psi) When provided, the purchaser should also consider requiring the manufacturer to certify the actual flow rates from auxiliary intakes. -10 90 COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Adding the additional sentence suggests -10 290 getting the actual flow rates certified without changing the meaning of A- 0 300 14.6.1. 185 285 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 185 300 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: The table clarifies the requirements set forth in 14- 10.7.1 for those who might wish to have performance tests conducted on the ————————————————- installed system. The test points are not easily identifiable when reading the text. (Log #21) COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject 1901-248-(A-14-7.1.3, A-14-6.6, A-14-10.7.3) : Reject COMMITTEE STATEMENT: Paragraph 14-10-7.4 is being deleted (see SUBMITTER: Gary Handwerk, Hale Products, Inc. Committee Meeting Action on Proposal 1901-120 (Log #93). Certification RECOMMENDATION: Add to appendix: of the pressure control system is covered under 14-13. The procedure is The pressure relief device should be preset at 125 psi, with the adjustments defined in 14-13.4. not easily accessible to the operator. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 SUBSTANTIATION: By presetting the valve at 125 psi and adding the 60 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: psi allowable pressure rise, you are not going past the 185 psi rating of LDH AFFIRMATIVE: 28 hose. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject ————————————————- COMMITTEE STATEMENT: This is a decision between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The pressure relief devices are required (Log #CP8) to be adjustable and wording like “adjustment not easily accessible to the 1901-252-(A-14-13.2.2.6) : Accept operator” is not definitive enough to provide helpful guidance. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Add an appendix to 14-13.2.2.6 (see A.16.13.2.2.6 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: of the draft) to read as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 If a counter speed shaft is not provided, the engine speed can be read with a photo-tach or strobe light off a rotating element. ————————————————- SUBSTANTIATION: Counter speed shafts are no longer required and the question has arisen of how to get a speed reading when a counter speed (Log #CP61) shaft is not provided. The appendix material will provide guidance in those 1901-249-(A-14-7.5) : Accept situations. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept RECOMMENDATION: Add an appendix to 14-7.5 (see A.16.7.5.2 in the NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 draft) to read as follows: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: Control of discharges on apparatus are now available in pull type actuators, AFFIRMATIVE: 28 trunnion or swing valves, cable control, gear operated hand wheel control, hydraulic, air, and electric operators. These are available with either quick ————————————————- operating and slow operating valve mechanisms. The nozzle and hose reaction and “operational effort” for high flow or high pressure discharges (Log #CP63) are critically important to many fire departments. Due to the variations 1901-253-(A-17-3.2) : Accept in type of individuals or characteristics operator’s involved with pump SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, operations, a purchaser should carefully evaluate valve controls. Slow RECOMMENDATION: Delete the appendix. closing gear operated and other power operated valves should be considered SUBSTANTIATION: The minimum tank size on pumper has been for valves 3-in (75-mm) and larger valves. reduced and the operations discussed in the appendix material cannot SUBSTANTIATION: The committee feels some guidance is warranted on the types of valves available to assist the purchaser in meeting the requirement for a slow operating valve. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 868 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA necessarily be supported with the reduced tank size. The appendix to (Log #CP81) section 3-4 discusses tank size. 1901-258-(A-21-6) : Accept COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 RECOMMENDATION: Revise the first paragraph of A-21-6 (23.7 in the VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: draft) to read as follows: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Portable generator systems are generally 8 kW or less and designed with an integral fuel tank and controls in one modular package. This allows the ————————————————- system to be picked up and transported to a remote location from the vehicle. Generators designed for portable use should be accessible for removal. (Log #73) These generators are generally not suited for “enclosed” compartment 1901-254-(A-19-1) : Reject operation or should be mounted on a slide out tray for adequate ventilation. SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service Such installations require interlocks or a high temperature alarm to assure RECOMMENDATION: Add the following term: generator is operated in “slide out” condition. Foam-Capable: A foam-capable fire apparatus is a fire apparatus carrying SUBSTANTIATION: The designation of a size for portable generators aspirating foam nozzle(s) and is equipped with an automatic regulating is being deleted throughout the chapter and the added wording is to provide proportioning system injecting foam concentrate into the discharge or advise on the mounting of portable generators when they are to be operated pressure side of the water pump. on the apparatus. SUBSTANTIATION: This is a term from NFPA 1906 which should also COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept be in NFPA 1901. NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The term is appropriate and specific to AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NFPA 1906 and does not apply to industrial and municipal fire apparatus covered by NFPA 1901. ————————————————- NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: (Log #CP88) AFFIRMATIVE: 28 1901-259-(A-21-11.4) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, ————————————————- RECOMMENDATION: Revise A-21-11.4 (A.23.13.4 in the draft) to read as follows: (Log #72) A suggested minimum capacity of a reel is at least 100 ft (30 m) of cord 1901-255-(A-20-1) : Reject rated to carry 20 amps at 120 volts ac. When sizing the reel, extra capacity SUBMITTER: Dan W. McKenzie, USDA Forest Service should be provided when multiple receptacles are attached to the cord stored RECOMMENDATION: Add the following term: on the reel. CAFS-Capable. A compressed air foam system (CAFS)-capable fire A cord reel to supply a single 120 volt circuit requires 3 collector rings and apparatus is a fire apparatus equipped with the following: 3 conductors in the cord, for line, neutral and ground. If the power source (1) Automatic regulating proportioning system capable of injecting foam has 120/240 volt outputs, as most power sources do, a second equivalent concentrate in to the discharge or pressure side of the pump circuit with the same rating only requires one additional conductor as (2) Air compressor with the capacity to supply the required scfm and the neutral and ground can be common to both circuits. Thus with automatic air pressure controls approximately 25 percent more reel space and cord cost, the cord reel can (3) Controls to mix the air and foam solution supply twice the number of lights or other loads. SUBSTANTIATION: This is a term from NFPA 1906 which should also Table A.21-11.4 lists the suggested cord size for cord reels based on the be in NFPA 1901. desired circuit ampacity and the cord length. The ratings for 5 amp, 7.5 amp COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Reject and 10 amps should only be used where an appropriate load is permanently COMMITTEE STATEMENT: The term is appropriate and specific to connected. Any cord reel with one or more outlets should be rated at 15 NFPA 1906, Standard for Wildland Fire Apparatus and does not apply to amps or greater. industrial and municipal fire apparatus covered by NFPA 1901. For heavy loads such as large smoke fans and hydraulic rescue tool power NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 plants, the purchaser should consider 240 volt units instead of 120 volt units. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: This will allow the use of smaller cords and reels. For example, a 150 foot AFFIRMATIVE: 28 reel to supply a HRT power plant that draws 15 amps at 240 volts would require 14 gauge wire. The same power unit in a version to run on 120 volts ————————————————- would draw 30 amps and would require 10 gauge wire. Cord reels for 3-phase power or other specialized applications should be (Log #CP77) designed with the assistance of a qualified electrical engineer. 1901-256-(A-21-5.2.4) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise A-21-5.2.4 as shown and move the paragraph to the end of A-21-5.1 (see A.23.6.1.1 in the draft). Table A.21-11.4 Wire size† for various electrical cord lengths Due to variable engine speeds causing uncontrolled voltage and frequency variation, direct drive generators are not acceptable for fire apparatus where Circuit Cord Length Ampacity “generate and roll” capability is required. Hydraulically driven or separate 50 ft 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft engine driven generators are suited for these applications. (15 m) (30 m) (45 m) (60 m) (75 m) (90 m) SUBSTANTIATION: The change is a clarification and correction of wording. It is being moved to the direct drive section to which it applies. 5 16 16 16 16 16 14 COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 7.5 16 16 16 16 16 14 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 10 16 16 16 16 14 14 15 14 14 14 14 12 12 ————————————————- 20 12 12 12 12 12 10 (Log #CP78) 1901-257-(A-21-5.3) : Accept 25 12 12 12 12 10 10 SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Revise the last sentence of A-21-5.3 (A.23.6.3 in 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 the draft) to read as shown: Remote generator controls in the cab should be considered and specified if 35 8 8 8 8 8 8 desired. 40 8 8 8 8 8 8 SUBSTANTIATION: Remote controls at the operator panel are required, but if the desire is to be able to start the generator before arriving on scene, 50 6 6 6 6 6 6 cab controls are needed. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept †Wire size as AWG NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: The selection of cable for a reel is a complex issue that is often misunderstood. This appendix item gives guidance to ————————————————- purchasers and manufactured on what size cable to use. It is based on various NEC sections applicable to these power cords. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept 869 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: AFFIRMATIVE: 28 AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————- ————————————————- (Log #CP85) (Log #CP107) 1901-260-(A-21-13.2) : Accept 1901-264-(A-23-3.6.3) : Accept SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, RECOMMENDATION: Add an appendix to 21-13.2 (see A.23.15.2 in the RECOMMENDATION: Add new appendix as A-23-3.6.3 (see A.25.3.6.3 draft) to read as follows: in the draft) to read as follows: A-21-13.2. When the light mast is mounted above apparatus cab or body, The purchaser should consider a shorepower connection to permit external a brush and tree limb guard should be considered to protect the mast and electric power supply to the electric motor. If a shore power connection is floodlights. provided, it is important to have a transfer switch to allow the user to power SUBSTANTIATION: The committee is adding a new appendix item the air compressor independently from either the onboard generator or to suggest brush guards be considered. Low overhanging tree limbs can shorepower. become entangled in these lights. Three phase 240 volt electric motors with “soft starting” provisions are the COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept most practical electric motors for air compressors. The fire station electrical NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 supply should be checked for capacity and compatibility with the breathing VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: air compressor. The generator should be sized to provided additional AFFIRMATIVE: 28 capacity for floodlight, emergency power applications, and other utility usage. A general guideline would be to specify a generator output with ————————————————- twice the capacity as required for the breathing air compressor. The vehicle should be provided with a compatible shorepower cable and (Log #CP98) plugs, sized to match electric motor requirements. The shorepower cable 1901-261-(A-23-2.1) : Accept shall also be sized to reflect distance from fire station service entrance to the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, vehicle shorepower receptacle. RECOMMENDATION: Revise A-23.2.1 (A.25.2.1 of the draft) to read as SUBSTANTIATION: Shorepower is ideal with electric compressors and follows: a transfer switch is a critical part of any installation that includes the two Special operating conditions such as high temperatures or cold weather different power sources that could be energized at the same time. The operations might require special equipment modifications or design remainder of the appendix items are normal guidelines that should be requirements by component manufacturers and body manufacturers. Fire followed in air compressor design and purchasing. departments need to be specific in stating their operating temperature range COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept and special requirements. Due to high intake air flow with breathing air NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 compressors, special provisions should be made for moisture separator VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: freeze protection in very cold weather operations. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBSTANTIATION: Breathing air moisture separators are critical to operations and must be protected against freezing. ————————————————- COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 (Log #25) VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: 1901-265-(Appendix B, Figure B-1 Page 1901-118, 11th Sentence) : Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 SUBMITTER: Bill Adams, William F. Adams & Associates RECOMMENDATION: Delete the following text: ————————————————- Indicate the reserve GAWR required on each axle (from 0 percent to 20 percent). (Log #CP103) SUBSTANTIATION: Establishing a minimum or maximum reserve 1901-262-(A-23-3) : Accept GAWR on axles should be a function of the chassis manufacturer - no SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, different than the front to rear weight distribution ratio as defined in Section RECOMMENDATION: Revise the third and fourth paragraphs of A-23-3 2-8.2. In view of the fact one chassis manufacturer has publicly stated the (A.25.3 of the draft) to read as follows: allowable weights on his chassis shall be a minimum of 90 percent of the If filling is to be accomplished with both a compressor and an air storage axle GAWR and no more than 100 percent of the GAWR, the NFPA should system in a simultaneous operation, the amount of SCBA fills in the first consider an immediate TIA rescinding or revising the above parameters - 1 to 2 hours would be increase considerably. The number of SCBA fills regardless of the fact they were published for informational purposes only. from the air storage system should be calculated and added to the air COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept compressor fill rate. The total fills per hour would have to be an estimate NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 since the compressor could be refilling the air storage system during SCBA VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: connection and disconnection. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 If only an air compressor is to be used for refilling SCBA cylinders, the minimum size of the air compressor system needed can be determined based ————————————————- on the number of SCBA cylinders that need to be refilled per hour to meet incident demand requirements. Table A-23-3 can assist in determining the (Log #CP129) compressor size. 1901-266-(Appendix B) : Accept SUBSTANTIATION: The table provided in the appendix would lead the SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, purchaser to think that the compressor cfm output should be determined only RECOMMENDATION: Revise Appendix B to read as follows: from this chart. The determining the number, type, and pressure of the air storage vessels or cylinders is extremely important when purchasing an air system and determining air compressor size. Annex B Specifying and Procuring Fire Apparatus COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: included for informational purposes only. AFFIRMATIVE: 28 B.1 General. The purchase of new fire apparatus involves a major investment and should be treated as such. Fire apparatus are complex ————————————————- mechanical equipment that should not be purchased in a haphazard manner. A purchase should be made only after a detailed study of the fire (Log #CP106) department’s apparatus needs, taking into consideration other equipment the 1901-263-(A-23-3.6.2) : Accept department owns or plans to buy. SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, The local fire chief and fire department staff know the conditions under RECOMMENDATION: Add a appendix to A-23-3.6.2 (see A.25.3.6.2 in which the apparatus will be used. However, competent advice should the draft) to read as follows: also be obtained from knowledgeable and informed sources such as other A final stage pressure gauge may also be desired at the air control panel, experienced fire service personnel, trade journals, training instructors, in addition to the gauge near compressor. The hourmeter could be located maintenance personnel, and fire equipment and component manufacturers. either at the compressor or the main operator’s panel. Interstage pressure The fire insurance rating authority should also be consulted. gauges should be mounted at the compressor location. Oil gauge or level The study should look not only at current operations and risks to be protected indicator should be located at the compressor, with alarms located at the but also at how these might change over the life of the fire apparatus. main air operator’s panel. B.1.1 Writing the Specifications. This standard provides the minimum SUBSTANTIATION: The new wording gives additional clarification on technical requirements that new fire apparatus are expected to meet. It is the exact location of certain instruments, controls, gauges, etc. recognized that many purchasers will desire additional features of operation COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept over and above these minimum requirements. The requirements in this 870 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA standard, together with the appendix material, should be carefully studied. assembly and painting. The specifications should detail the particulars of Details, such as anywhere that the apparatus being specified needs to exceed such an inspection trip. the minimum requirements or where a specific arrangement is desired, The chief of the fire department (or a designated representative) normally should be carefully defined in the specifications for the apparatus. This exercises the acceptance authority following satisfactory completion of might include special performance requirements, defining the number of tests and inspections for compliance with purchase specifications. The seats and the seating arrangement for fire fighters riding on the apparatus, or specifications should provide details of delivery expectations, including the providing space for extra hose or equipment the apparatus will be required desired training, the required acceptance tests, and who is responsible for the to carry. Completion by the purchaser of the form shown in Figure B.1.1 various costs associated with the delivery and acceptance. should assist the purchaser in developing their specifications and provide the B.1.1.7 Training of designated fire department personnel is essential to information required in the various sections of this document. ensure that the purchaser and user are aware of, and instructed in, the proper B.1.1.1 The first consideration in the design of a fire apparatus is the fixed operation, care, and maintenance of the apparatus acquired. This training equipment components. These major “support function” components could should provide the initial instruction on the new apparatus. The training represent the most concentrated and heaviest load elements of the vehicle. is typically delivered by a qualified representative of the contractor in the It is vital that these elements be laid out early in the initial designs and be user’s community. The specifications should clearly identify the arrangement situated on the vehicle to provide for the following: for furnishing the training, including where it is to be provided, its duration, (1) Good load distribution and what training aids, such as video tapes or training manuals, are to be (2) Balance (both front to rear and right to left) furnished. (3) Low center of gravity B.1.1.8 The purchaser should also define in the specifications the warranty These fixed components could be located in exterior compartments or in desired for the completed apparatus. The warranty is a written guarantee the interior of the vehicle to be functional and organized in a layout to be of the integrity of the apparatus or its components that defines the user-friendly in emergency applications. Specifically, the following fixed manufacturer’s responsibility within a given time period. The warranty equipment are examples of this: is sometimes extended for a second warranty period beyond the terms of (1) Electrical generators the basic warranty for specific components, such as the engine, pump, (2) Water tanks, fire pumps and other fire-fighting equipment frame, water tank, and so forth. If a secondary manufacturer is involved in (3) Air cascades or compressors modifying components that are warranted by the original manufacturer, the (4) Reels of all types responsibility for warranty work should be clearly understood by the original B.1.1.2 A major support function of any fire apparatus, no matter the type, is manufacturer, the secondary manufacturer, the contractor, and the purchaser. the portable equipment. This is why this document places so much emphasis B.1.1.9 The purchaser might want a warranty bond to ensure that any on final GVWR and carrying capacity of the completed vehicle, which warranty work will be performed, even if the apparatus manufacturer includes both fixed and portable equipment. should go out of business. A warranty bond is a third-party secured bond The listings of portable and fixed equipment are so variable, depending on established by the manufacturer before delivery of a vehicle to guarantee the mission of the vehicle, that the fire department needs to measure and workmanship, quality of material, or other stated performance of the vehicle weigh their specific equipment. components. The fire department should classify the equipment as follows: B.1.1.10 Finally, it is recommended that the fire chief, fire department Existing — equipment they currently own that will be carried staff, or committee assigned to develop the specifications consult with the Proposed — new equipment that will be carried as the apparatus goes in purchaser’s attorney, engineer, and other appropriate officials for assistance service in developing the detailed specifications. Future — equipment that might be carried in the future B.1.2 Obtaining and Studying Proposals. When the specifications are In this way, a chassis with an adequate GVWR can be provided to ensure complete, they should be distributed to apparatus manufacturers and that the vehicle will not be overloaded in the future. contractors with a request for bids or proposals to furnish the specified B.1.1.3 After determining the list of present, proposed, and future apparatus. The request should specify a date, time, and place for the equipment, the fire department should analyze the “actual” cubic footage formal opening of the bids. This date should allow at least 1 month for (cubic meters) of space necessary for the equipment. The actual usable space the engineering departments of apparatus manufacturers to study the in compartments also should be considered, in addition to the individual specifications and estimate the cost of the apparatus. More time could be cubic feet (cubic meters) for each item of equipment to be carried. The required if engineering drawings of the proposed apparatus are required. following factors might increase the required cubic footage (cubic meters) of B.1.2.1 The request also should state the time period during which the storage space required and thus the size of the vehicle body: purchaser expects the bidder to honor the bid price and whether a bid bond (1) Compartment door and box pan interference is required. A bid bond guarantees that if a contract is offered to the bidder (2) Mounting implications within the defined time period, the bidder will enter into the contract under (3) Compartment shelving the terms of the bid. (4) Slide trays B.1.2.2 It is recommended that a pre-bid meeting be held between the (5) Components of the body such as compartment flanges, notches, and purchaser of a piece of fire apparatus and the apparatus manufacturers or other interferences that affect removal of equipment from compartments their agents prior to the official release of the apparatus specifications. (6) Ventilation of generator, air compressor, or other equipment Such a meeting is designed to allow for a detailed review of the draft B.1.1.4 Where local operating conditions necessitate apparatus of unusual specifications by all present at the meeting. Problems with the specifications, design, the purchaser needs to define carefully the special requirements ideas on how to provide the purchaser with the desired apparatus in other in the specifications. Height, width, under-vehicle clearance, wheelbase, ways, clarification of the purchaser’s intent, and other questions can be turning radius, length, and so forth might occasionally need special resolved prior to the formal bid process. The meeting can often solve attention. For example, a community with many narrow, winding streets misunderstandings or problems prior to their occurrence. should have apparatus capable of readily negotiating switchbacks without B.1.2.3 With a performance specification, it is usually possible to delay. obtain more favorable bids, since there is genuine competition and the B.1.1.5 This standard is designed to ensure sound equipment that is capable specifications are not overly restrictive. The bid should be accompanied by of good performance, with the inclusion of restrictive features only where a detailed description of the apparatus, a list of equipment to be furnished, needed to specify minimum requirements. The tests are an important feature and other construction and performance details, including, but not limited to, and the results should be carefully analyzed to ensure that the completed estimated weight, wheelbase, principal dimensions, transmission, and axle apparatus meets the specified performance. ratios. The purpose of the contractor’s specifications is to define what the Since the passage of Public Law 89-563, the National Traffic and Motor contractor intends to furnish and deliver to the purchaser. Vehicle Safety Act of 1966, the federal government has adopted certain B.1.2.4 Manufacturers’ proposals might include amendments and motor vehicle safety standards applicable to all manufacturers of trucks, exceptions. Frequently, these changes are offered to meet price requirements including fire apparatus. It is unlawful for a manufacturer to deliver or because individual manufacturers prefer to build apparatus in a manner a truck not in compliance with these federal standards. These federal more convenient to them. If the intent of the original specification is not safety standards are frequently changed, and their provisions make the changed and the bid is favorable, the purchaser should consider accepting incorporation of certain features and devices mandatory. Apparatus these amendments with the approval of the purchasing authority. On the manufacturers face substantial penalties for infraction of these rules and, other hand, extreme care should be taken to avoid allowing exceptions that therefore, cannot build apparatus to specifications that would require them merely devalue the apparatus and give one bidder an advantage. to perform unlawfully or to delete required items or to include any that are B.1.2.5 The purchaser should study the proposals, look for deviations from illegal. the specifications, and obtain clarification where necessary. If the purchaser Additional requirements are placed on both apparatus and engine has specifically provided for alternatives when calling for bids, extra manufacturers by the Clean Air Act, which is enforced by the Environmental care should be exercised when evaluating the proposals as combinations Protection Agency (EPA). These EPA standards have resulted in major of complicated bid information will need careful analysis. The financial changes in the performance of many engines. Neither the engine arrangements, a delivery date, and the method of delivery should be manufacturer nor the apparatus manufacturer are permitted to modify stipulated and agreed to by the purchasing authority. engines once they are certified to EPA standards. Because of the EPA B.1.3 Awarding the Contract. With the award of a contract, it is important standards, it is often necessary to install larger engines than might have been for the purchasing authority to understand exactly who the contract is with previously used in order to obtain the same apparatus performance. and the nature of the relationship with the apparatus manufacturer. Some B.1.1.6 Many apparatus purchasers find it favorable to provide for an apparatus manufacturers work through a dealer network where the dealer interim inspection at the apparatus assembly plant. The advantages of such purchases the apparatus from a manufacturer, including taking title, and then a provision include the opportunity to evaluate construction prior to final resells the apparatus to the purchasing authority. Other manufacturers work 871 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA through sales agents or representatives who solicit and negotiate a contract 2) Axle ratings higher than the axle manufacturer’s published between a purchasing authority and a manufacturer but who never take title ratings should be accompanied by a written application approval to the apparatus. This difference can affect where the responsibility lies for from the axle manufacturer. the proper fulfillment of the contract. (t) Obtain the nominal suspension rating from the vehicle or suspension B.1.3.1 Some purchasing authorities require a performance bond as part manufacturer. of the contract. A performance bond is a bond executed in connection Note: Suspensions are designed to provide adequate suspension with a contract that guarantees that the contractor will fulfill all of the travel at the rated load. Over-sized suspensions may provide undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements contained in longer suspension life, but the harsher ride quality that results the contract. Should the contractor fail to meet the terms of the contract, the may reduce the life of other vehicle components. bonding company will be responsible for the difference in cost between the (u) Enter the Axle Weight Rating by selecting the lowest value from each original contract price and the new price of the apparatus when it has to be column. This value should match the chassis manufacturer’s supplied by another contractor. certification label affixed inside the cab. B.1.3.2 Before signing a contract, the purchaser should make certain that the successful bidder has a complete and thorough understanding of the specifications. If there are any disagreements, these should be resolved Table B.1.4.1 Typical Hose Weight Data in writing and made part of the contract. If any changes are agreed upon, they should be stated in writing and be signed by both parties. The contract Nominal Hose Diameter Weight per Unit Length should not be signed until the fire chief (or a designee) and the purchasing in mm Lb per foot Kg per meter authority are satisfied. B.1.4 Acceptance. 1 25 0.30 0.45 B.1.4.1 When the apparatus is ready for delivery and acceptance, the 1 purchaser has a responsibility to check the completed apparatus carefully 1 /2 38 0.38 0.57 against the specifications, the contract, and the requirements of this 3 document to ensure all that was required is being delivered. This includes 1 /4 44 0.43 0.64 witnessing any required acceptance tests and verifying that the gross vehicle weight and the axle weight distribution are within the chassis and 2 50.8 0.50 0.75 axle ratings. The Delivery Inspection Form shown as Figure B.1.4.1(a) and 2 1/ 65 0.70 1.04 the As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet shown as Figure 2 B1.4.1(b) can be useful in the inspection process. The weight analysis of in- 3 76.2 1.00 1.49 service fire apparatus is critical to the safe operation of the apparatus. 1 B.1.4.2 The purchaser also should arrange for any training included as part 3 /2 90 1.20 1.79 of the delivery and ensure that it is properly delivered. Only when the purchaser is totally satisfied that the contract has been 4 100 0.85 1.27 fulfilled should payment be authorized. 1 4 /2 114.3 0.90 1.34 Figure B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. 5 125 1.10 1.64 See the draft shown at the end of this report for Figure B.1.1. 6 150 1.35 2.01 Figure B.1.4.1(a) Delivery Inspection Form. See the draft shown at the end of this report for Figure B.1.4.1(a).

Figure B.1.4.1(b) As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet. SUBSTANTIATION: Annex B has been expanded using material that See the draft shown at the end of this report for Figure B.1.4.1(b). was previously the appendix to 1-5, the existing Apparatus Purchasing Specification Form and two new forms and supporting instructions. The Instructions for completing the “As Delivered Weight Analysis “Delivery Inspection Form” and the “As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet” Calculation Worksheet” provide purchasers easy guides to determine if their (a) Obtain vehicle weights from a certified scale with: new apparatus complies with NFPA 1901. The checklist is not all-inclusive 1) All manufacturing work completed. but does include items that are particularly relevant to the safety of the 2) Tanks full of water, fuel, and foam. vehicle. 3) Ground ladders stored on the vehicle. COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept (b) - (k) Calculate the expected hose load by multiplying the length of hose NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 by the standard values for weight per unit length and enter the VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: product in column 8. Use the values in Table B.1.4.1, “Typical AFFIRMATIVE: 28 Hose Weight Data”, or obtain specific values for the brand of hose being used. ————————————————- (l) Multiply the number of seat-belt equipped seating positions by the NFPA allowance of 200 lbs per person and enter the product in column (Log #CP130) 8. 1901-267-(Appendix C (new)) : Accept (m) Enter the Miscellaneous Equipment Allowance from the chart in SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, paragraph 10-1 in column 8. Divide the hose, personnel, and RECOMMENDATION: Add a new Appendix C to read as follows: equipment weights in column 8 between the front and rear axles Annex C Weights and Dimensions for Common Equipment per the indicated percentages (or as appropriate from a detailed weight analysis) This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is (n) Add the values from rows a through m for each of columns 8 through 11 included for informational purposes only. and enter the sum in row n. C.1 The NFPA in co-operation with the Fire Apparatus Manufacturers (o) Record the gross vehicle and gross axle weight ratings from the Association (FAMA) has provided the worksheet shown as Figure C.1 for manufacturer’s data label affixed inside the crew compartment. use by the purchaser in calculating the portable equipment load anticipated (p) Subtract values in row n from row o and enter the difference in to be carryed on the apparatus. In order to ensure the apparatus chassis is row p. This is the expected reserve axle capacity of the in- capable of carrying the installed equipment (pump, tank, aerial device, etc.) service vehicle. If this number is negative, consult the vehicle plus the specified portable equipment load with an appropriate margin of manufacturer. safety, the purchaser should use this worksheet to provide apparatus vendors (q) Obtain tire ratings from the tire manufacturer’s catalog, or from the with the weight of the equipment they anticipate carrying when the apparatus vehicle manufacturer if fire-service ratings apply. is placed in service. Notes: 1) Tire manufacturers often provide special fire service ratings Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire based on the vocational duty cycle differences between fire truck Apparatus. and line haul service profiles. See the draft shown at the end of this report for Figure C.1. 2) Ratings for a specific tire will be difference depending on whether the tire is used as a single tire or as a dual tire. Use the C.1.1 The approximate measurements and weights of equipment that are rating specific to the application. commonly available and used during fire department operations are listed (r) Obtain rim ratings from the tire manufacturer’s catalog or engineering on the worksheet. The purchaser should fill in the number of units of specifications. each piece of equipment they anticipate carrying in the column titles QTY (s) Obtain Axle ratings from the vehicle manufacturer. (quantity) and multiply that by the weight per unit will give the total weight. Notes: The dimensions of each piece of equipment are given to assist in planning 1) Axle manufacturer’s provide published maximum ratings for compartment size or the planned location on the fire apparatus. Where the their axles. Application-specific ratings may be lower depending purchaser desires to carry specific equipment in a specific compartment, that on a variety of factors including wheel and tire offsets and the compartment designation should be shown in the column titled Compartment brakes selected. Location. 872 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA C.1.2 An Excel spreadsheet that contains this list may be downloaded (Log #CP27) from the FAMA website, www.fama.org, and customized to show only the 1901-268-(Entire Document) : Accept equipment your department expects to carry. There are additional columns SUBMITTER: Technical Committee on Fire Department Apparatus, on the spreadsheet to assist the fire department in maintaining records of the RECOMMENDATION: Completely revise NFPA 1901, Standard for equipment it carries on the apparatus. Automotive Fire Apparatus as shown at the end of this report. SUBSTANTIATION: A major problem with fire apparatus is overloading SUBSTANTIATION: As part of the complete revision, the committee of the apparatus after it is in service. This is often attributable to the fact that is restructuring the document to update it to the NFPA Manual of Style. the purchaser does not advise the apparatus manufacturer what they intend This includes moving the list of referenced documents from chapter 25 to to carry for tools and equipment. Annex C is a worksheet from material Chapter 2 and the definitions from Chapter 1 to Chapter 3. Some of the text developed by the Fire Apparatus Manufacturers Association that allows currently in Chapter 1 is being moved to the new Chapter 4 as the Manual of the purchaser to identify specifically what tools and equipment they plan to Style limits what can be in Chapter 1. All chapters have been subsequently carry and to determine the weight of such equipment. Dimensions have also renumbered to accommodate these changes. The metric values were been given for each tool or piece of equipment to allow the purchaser to plan updated as appropriate. The numbering has been changed to reflect the new compartment space and storage needs. method of numbering and the “Appendixes” renamed “Annexes.” COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept The entire document was reviewed and editorially updated to clean up NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 ambiguous language and clarify the requirements. VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: COMMITTEE MEETING ACTION:Accept AFFIRMATIVE: 28 NUMBER OF COMMITTEE MEMBERS:28 VOTE ON COMMITTEE ACTION: ————————————————- AFFIRMATIVE: 28 ————————————————-

873 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA NFPA 1901 ANSI Z34.1, Standard for Third-Party Certification Programs for Products, Processes, and Services, 1993 Standard for ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels, 1998. Automotive Fire Apparatus 2.3.2 ASME Publications. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2003 Edition 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 and NOTICE: An asterisk (*) following the number or letter designating a Division 2, 2001. paragraph indicates that explanatory material on the paragraph can be found ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments, 1998. in Annex A. 2.3.3 ASNT Publication. American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Information on referenced publications can be found in Chapter 2 and Inc., 1711 Arlingate Lane, Columbus, OH 43228-0518. Annex E. ASNT CP-189, Standard for Qualification and Certification of Chapter 1 Administration Nondestructive Testing Personnel, 1995. 1.1* Scope. This standard defines the requirements for new automotive 2.3.4 ASTM Publications. American Society for Testing and Materials, fire apparatus designed to be used under emergency conditions to transport 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. personnel and equipment and to support the suppression of fires and mitigation of other hazardous situations. ASTM B 647, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Aluminum Alloys by Means of a Webster Hardness Gauge, 1984. 1.2 Purpose. This standard specifies the minimum requirements for new automotive fire apparatus. ASTM B 648, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Aluminum Alloys by Means of a Barcol Impressor, 1978. 1.3 Application. ASTM D 4956, Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for 1.3.1* This standard shall apply to new fire apparatus as follows: Traffic Control, 2001. (1) Of 10,000 lb (4500 kg) or greater gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) ASTM E 6, Standard Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical (2) Designed for use under emergency conditions to transport personnel and Testing, 1999. equipment and to support the suppression of fires and mitigation of other ASTM E 10, Standard Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic hazardous situations Materials, 2001. (3) Contracted for on or after January 1, 2004 ASTM E 18, Standard Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell 1.3.2 Nothing shall prevent the use of the standard prior to January 1, 2004 Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials, 2002. if the purchaser and contractor both agree. ASTM E 92, Standard Test Method for Vickers Hardness of Metallic 1.3.3 This standard shall not apply to wildland fire apparatus, which are Materials, 1982. covered by NFPA 1906, Standard for Wildland Fire Apparatus. ASTM E 114, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Straight- 1.4* Retroactivity. This standard shall not be applied retroactively. Beam Examination by the Contact Method, 1995. 1.5 Equivalency. Nothing in this standard is intended to prevent the use of ASTM E 165, Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examinations, systems, methods, or devices of equivalent or superior quality, strength, fire 1995. resistance, effectiveness, durability, and safety in place of those prescribed ASTM E 569, Standard Practice for Acoustic Emission Monitoring of by this standard, provided technical documentation is submitted to the Structures During Controlled Stimulation, 1997. authority having jurisdiction to demonstrate equivalency and the system, method, or device is approved for the intended purpose. ASTM E 650, Standard Guide for Mounting Piezoelectric Acoustic Emission Sensors, 1997. 1.6* Units and Formulas. In this standard, values for measurement in inch-pound units are followed by an equivalent in metric units. Either set ASTM E 709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination, 2001. of values can be used but the same set of values (either inch-pound units or metric units) shall be used throughout. ASTM E 797, Standard Practice for Measuring Thickness by Manual Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Contact Method, 1995. Chapter 2 Referenced Publications ASTM E 1004, Standard Practice for Determining Electrical Conductivity Using the Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Method. 1999 2.1 General. The documents or portions thereof listed in this chapter are referenced within this standard and shall be considered part of the ASTM E 1032, Standard Test Method for Radiographic Examination of requirements of this document. Weldments, 2001. 2.2 NFPA Publications. National Fire Protection Association, 1 ASTM F 1677, Standard Test Method for Using a Portable Inclinable Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101. Articulated Strut Slip Tester (PIAST), 1996. NFPA 70, NationalDRAFT Electrical Code®, 2002 edition. ASTM F 1679, Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT), 2000. NFPA 1914, Standard for Testing Fire Department Aerial Devices, 2002 edition. 2.3.5 AWS Publications. American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJuene Road, Miami, FL 33126. NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire Department Ground Ladders, 1999 edition. AWS B1.10, Guide for Nondestructive Inspection of Welds, 1999. NFPA 1961, Standard on Fire Hose, 2002 edition. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code — Steel, 2002. NFPA 1963, Standard for Fire Hose Connections, 1998 edition. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code — Aluminum, 1997. NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code — Sheet Steel, 1998. Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, 2002 edition. 2.3.6 CSA Publications. Canadian Standards Association, 178 Rexdale NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Boulevard, Toronto, Ontario M9W 1R3, Canada Components, 2001 edition. CSA W47.1, Standard for Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding NFPA 1989 Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency of Steel Structures, 1992 Services Respiratory Protection, 2003 edition. CSA W47.2, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum, 2.3 Other Publications. 1987. 2.3.1 ANSI Publication. American National Standards Institute, Inc., 11 2.3.7 CGA Publications. Compressed Gas Association, 1725 Jefferson West 42nd Street, 13th floor, New York, NY 10036. Davis Highway, Suite 1004, Arlington, VA 22202. G-7, Compressed Air For Human Respiration, 1990. 874 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA G-7.1, Commodity Specification for Air, 1997. Chapter 3 Definitions 2.3.8 SAE Publications. Society of Automotive Engineers, 400 3.1 General. The definitions contained in this chapter shall apply to the Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. terms used in this standard. Where terms are not included, common usage of the terms shall apply. SAE J156, Fusible Links, 2000. 3.2 NFPA Official Definitions. SAE J541, Voltage Drop for Starting Motor Circuits, 1996. 3.2.1* Approved. Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. SAE J551/2, Test Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Vehicles, Motorboats, and Spark-Ignited 3.2.2* Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The organization, office, or Engine-Driven Devices, 1994. individual responsible for approving equipment, materials, an installation, or a procedure. SAE J553, Circuit Breakers, 1996. 3.2.3 Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, SAE J554, Electric Fuses (Cartridge Type), 1987. symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, SAE J575, Test Methods and Equipment for Lighting Devices and that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or Components for Use on Vehicles Less Than 2032 mm in Overall Width, materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance 1992. with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner. SAE J578, Color Specification, 1995. 3.2.4* Listed. Equipment, materials, or services included in a list published by an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and SAE J595, Flashing Warning Lamps for Authorized Emergency, concerned with evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic Maintenance, and Service Vehicles, 1990. inspection of production of listed equipment or materials or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states that either the equipment, SAE J683, Tire Chain Clearance — Trucks, Buses (except Suburban, material, or service meets appropriate designated standards or has been Intercity, and Transit Buses), and Combinations of Vehicles, 1985. tested and found suitable for a specified purpose. SAE J833, Human Physical Dimensions, 1989. 3.2.5 Shall. Indicates a mandatory requirement. SAE J845, Optical Warning Devices for Authorized Emergency, 3.2.6 Should. Indicates a recommendation or that which is advised but not Maintenance, and Service Vehicles, 1997. required. SAE J994, Alarm — Backup — Electric, Laboratory Performance Testing, 3.3 General Definitions. 1993. 3.3.1 Acceptance. An agreement between the purchasing authority and the SAE J1690, Flashers, 1996. contractor that the terms and conditions of the contract have been met. SAE J1127, Battery Cable, 2000. 3.3.2 Acceptance Tests. Tests performed on behalf of or by the purchaser at the time of delivery to determine compliance with the specifications for the SAE J1128, Low Tension Primary Cable, 2000. fire apparatus. SAE J1292, Automobile, Truck, Truck-Tractor, Trailer, and Motor Coach 3.3.3 Active Horizontal Angles of Light Emission. The angles, measured Wiring, 1981. in a horizontal plane passing through the optical center of the optical source, SAE J1318, Gaseous Discharge Warning Lamp for Authorized Emergency, as specified by the manufacturer of the optical device, between which the Maintenance, and Service Vehicles, 1998. optical source contributes optical power. SAE J1330, Photometry Laboratory Accuracy Guidelines, 2000 3.3.4 Aerial Device. An aerial ladder, elevating platform, or water tower that is designed to position personnel, handle materials, provide continuous SAE J1560, Low Tension Thin Wall Primary Cable, 1992. egress, or discharge water. SAE J1690, Flashers, 1996. 3.3.5 Aerial Fire Apparatus. A vehicle equipped with an aerial ladder, elevating platform, aerial ladder platform, or water tower that is designed SAE J1849, Emergency Vehicle Sirens, 1995. and equipped to support fire fighting and rescue operations by positioning personnel, handling materials, providing continuous egress, or discharging SAE J1888, High Current Time Lag Electric Fuses, 1990. water at positions elevated from the ground. SAE J1889, L.E.D. Lighting Devices, 1999. 3.3.6 Aerial Ladder. A self-supporting, turntable-mounted, power-operated SAE J2077, Miniature Blade Type Electrical Fuses, 1990. ladder of two or more sections permanently attached to a self-propelled automotive fire apparatus and designed to provide a continuous egress route 2.3.9 TRA Publication. The Tire and Rim Association, Inc., 175 Montrose from an elevated position to the ground. Ave. West, Copley, OH 44321. 3.3.7 Air Control Panel. A consolidated arrangement of valves, regulators, Tire and Rim Association — Year Book, 2002. gauges, and air system piping at a location that allows the operator to monitor and control the airflow and pressure within the air system from a 2.3.10 UL Publications. Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 333 Pfingsten centralized location. Road, Northbrook, IL 60062. DRAFT3.3.8 Air Quality Monitors. Instruments that monitor the air for such UL 498, Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, 1996. elements as carbon monoxide levels, moisture levels, and percent of oxygen. UL 969, Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems, 1995. 3.3.9 Air Tank. A storage vessel meeting the requirements of either U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) or American Society of Mechanical 2.3.11 U.S. Government Publications. U.S. Government Printing Office, Engineers (ASME) and used to store an accumulation of air under pressure. Washington, DC 20402. 3.3.10 Air Truck. A vehicle used to supply breathing air either to refill Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.169, “Air receivers.” self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or to supply respirators directly Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 571, Subpart B, “Federal through hose lines. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards”: 3.3.11 Angle of Approach. The smallest angle made between the road No. 209, “Seat belt assemblies.” surface and a line drawn from the front point of ground contact of the front tire to any projection of the apparatus in front of the front axle. No. 210, “Seat belt assembly anchorages.” 3.3.12 Angle of Departure. The smallest angle made between the road No. 302, “Flammability of interior materials.” surface and a line drawn from the rear point of ground contact of the rear tire to any projection of the apparatus behind the rear axle. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 178.37, “Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless steel cylinders.” 3.3.13 Articulating Boom. An aerial device consisting of two or more folding boom sections whose extension and retraction modes are Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, paragraph 393.94(c), “Vehicle accomplished by adjusting the angle of the knuckle joints. interior noise levels test procedure.” 3.3.14 ASME Pressure Vessel. A pressure vessel used for the storage or accumulation of air or gas under pressure that is constructed and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 875 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 3.3.15 Authorized Person. A person approved or assigned to perform 3.3.42* Compound Gauge. A gauge that indicates pressure both above and specific types of duties or to be at a specific location at the job site. below atmospheric pressure. 3.3.16 Automatic Electrical Load Management System. A device that 3.3.43* Compressed Air Foam System (CAFS). A foam system that continuously monitors the electrical system voltage and automatically sheds combines air under pressure with foam solution to create foam. predetermined loads in a selected order to prevent over discharging of the apparatus’ batteries. 3.3.44 Continuous Duty. Operation at a constant rated load for an indefinitely long period. 3.3.17 Auxiliary Braking System. A braking system in addition to the service brakes, such as an engine retarder, transmission retarder, driveline 3.3.45 Continuous Egress. A continuous exit or rescue path down an aerial retarder, or exhaust retarders. device from an elevated position to the ground. 3.3.18 Auxiliary Hydraulic Power. A small gasoline engine, diesel engine, 3.3.46* Contractor. The person or company responsible for fulfilling an or electric motor-driven hydraulic pump used to operate an aerial device in agreed upon contract. an emergency or in lieu of the main hydraulic system. 3.3.47 Convenient Reach. The ability of the operator to manipulate the 3.3.19 Auxiliary Pump. A water pump mounted on the fire apparatus in controls from a driving/riding position without excessive movement away addition to a fire pump and used for fire fighting either in conjunction with or from the seat back or without excessive loss of eye contact with the roadway. independent of the fire pump. 3.3.48 Dead Load. The weight of the aerial device structure and all 3.3.20 Back-Up Alarm. An audible device designed to warn that the fire materials, components, mechanisms, or equipment permanently fastened apparatus is in reverse gear. thereto. 3.3.21 Base Rail. The lower chord (rail) of an aerial ladder to which rungs 3.3.49 Defect. A discontinuity in a part or a failure to function that interferes and reinforcements are attached. with the service or reliability for which the part was intended. 3.3.22 Base Section. The first or bottom section of an aerial device. 3.3.50 Discharge Outlet Size. The nominal size of the first fire hose connection from the pump. 3.3.23 Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will ensure electrical continuity and the 3.3.51 Documentation. Any data or information supplied by the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed. manufacturer or contractor relative to the apparatus, including information on its operation, service, and maintenance. 3.3.24 Boom. An assembled section of an aerial device. The boom construction can be of the stressed skin box beam type, the trussed lattice 3.3.52 DOT Cylinder. A pressure vessel constructed and tested in type, or the open “U” truss-type design. accordance with Title 49 CFR 178.37 that is used for the storage and transportation of air under pressure. 3.3.25 Booster Pump. See 3.3.19, Auxiliary Pump. 3.3.53 Drain Time (Foam). The time period it takes for a specified percent 3.3.26 Booster Supplied Air System. A system that is capable of increasing of the total solution contained in the foam to revert to liquid and to drain out air pressure from an air storage system or a compressor system. of the bubble structure. 3.3.27 Breathing Air. A respirable gas mixture derived from either normal 3.3.54 Dry Location. A location not normally exposed to moisture such atmospheric air for from manufactured synthetic air, stored in a compressed as in the interior of the driving or crew compartment, the interior of a fully state in storage cylinders and respirator breathing air cylinders, and supplied enclosed walk-in fire apparatus body, or a watertight compartment opened to the user in gaseous form. only for maintenance operations. 3.3.28 Breathing Air System. The complete assembly of equipment such 3.3.55 Dump Valve. A large opening from the water tank of a mobile water as compressors, a purification system, pressure regulators, safety devices, supply apparatus for unloading purposes. manifolds, air tanks or receivers, and interconnected piping required to deliver breathing air. 3.3.56* Eductor. A device placed in a hose line or a discharge pipe that incorporates a venturi and proportions foam concentrate or other fire fighting 3.3.29 Bubble (Foam). A thin-walled, roughly spherical, film of liquid agents into the water stream. inflated with air. 3.3.57* Electric Siren (Electromechanical). An audible warning device 3.3.30 Burst Pressure. The pressure at which a hydraulic component fails that produces sound by the use of an electric motor with an attached rotating due to stresses induced as a result of the pressure. slotted or perforated disc. 3.3.31 Cable. A wire rope used to transmit forces from one component to 3.3.58 Electrical Equipment, Fixed. Any electrical equipment that is not another for the purpose of extending or retracting an aerial device. removable without the use of tools or is hard wired to the vehicle’s electrical system. 3.3.32 Carbon Monoxide Monitor. A monitoring device that samples a purified air stream for trace elements of carbon monoxide (CO). 3.3.59 Electrical Equipment, Portable. Any electrical equipment that is not fixed. (See 3.3.58, Electrical Equipment, Fixed.) 3.3.33 Cascade System. A method of piping air tanks together to allow air to be supplied to the SCBA fill station using a progressive selection of tanks 3.3.60* Electronic Siren. An audible warning device that produces sound each with a higher pressure level. electronically through the use of amplifiers and electromagnetic speakers. 3.3.34 Center of Gravity. The point at which the entire weight of the fire 3.3.61 Elevating Platform. A self-supporting, turntable-mounted device apparatus is consideredDRAFT to be concentrated so that, if supported at this point, consisting of a personnel-carrying platform attached to the uppermost boom the apparatus would remain in equilibrium in any position. of a series of power-operated booms that articulate, telescope, or both; and that are sometimes arranged to provide the continuous egress capabilities of 3.3.35 Chassis. The basic operating motor vehicle including the engine, an aerial ladder. frame, and other essential structural and mechanical parts, but exclusive of the body and all appurtenances for the accommodation of driver, property, or 3.3.62 Enclosed Compartment. An area designed to protect stored items passengers, appliances, or equipment related to other than control. Common from environmental damage (weather resistant) that is confined on six sides usage might, but need not, include a cab (or cowl). and equipped with an access opening(s) that can be closed and latched. 3.3.36 Class A Fire. A fire in ordinary combustible materials, such as wood, 3.3.63 Expansion Ratio. The ratio of the volume of foam in its aerated state cloth, paper, rubber, and many plastics. to the original volume of nonaerated foam solution. 3.3.37 Class A Foam. Foam intended for use on Class A fires. 3.3.64 Exterior. A nonsheltered location exposed to the environment, either continuously or intermittently. 3.3.38 Class B Fire. A fire in flammable liquids, combustible liquids, petroleum greases, tars, oils, oil-based paints, solvents, lacquers, alcohols, 3.3.65 Fire Apparatus. A vehicle designed to be used under emergency and flammable gases. [1: 2.1.24] conditions to transport personnel and equipment, and to support the suppression of fires and mitigation of other hazardous situations. 3.3.39 Class B Foam. Foam intended for use on Class B fires. 3.3.66 Fire Pump. A water pump with a rated capacity of 250 gpm (1000 3.3.40 Combination Vehicle. A vehicle consisting of a pulling tractor and L/min) or greater at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure that is mounted on trailer. a fire apparatus and used for fire fighting. 3.3.41 Command and Communications Apparatus. A fire apparatus used 3.3.67 Fixed Power Source. Any line voltage power source except a primarily for communications and incident command. portable generator.

876 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 3.3.68 Fly Section. Any section of an aerial telescoping device beyond the 3.3.93 Intake Relief Valve. A relief valve piped to the intake manifold of base section. a pump and designed to automatically relieve excessive pressure from the incoming flow of water by discharging water to the environment. 3.3.69 FMVSS. Abbreviation for Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. Regulations promulgated by National Highway Transportation Safety 3.3.94 Interior. A sheltered location not exposed to the environment. Administration (NHTSA) of the United States under Public Law 89-563, which are mandatory and must be complied with when vehicles or items of 3.3.95 Interlock. A device or arrangement by means of which the motor vehicle equipment are manufactured and certified thereto. functioning of one part is controlled by the functioning of another. 3.3.70 Foam. An aerated fire-extinguishing solution created by mixing air 3.3.96 Knuckle. A point of connection between upper and lower booms of into foam solution to form bubbles. an articulating device; the point at which lower and upper booms are hinged together. 3.3.71 Foam Concentrate. Foam firefighting agent as received from the manufacturer that must be diluted with water to make foam solution. 3.3.97 Label. A visual indication whether in pictorial or word format that provides for the identification of a control, switch, indicator, or gauge, or the 3.3.72 Foam Proportioner. A device or method to add foam concentrate to display of information useful to the operator. water to make foam solution. 3.3.98 Ladder Section. A structural member normally of an open “U” 3.3.73 Foam Proportioning System. The apparatus and techniques used to truss-type design that includes the rungs and comprises the base or fly mix concentrate with water to make foam solution. section of an aerial ladder. 3.3.74 Foam Solution. A homogeneous mixture of water and foam 3.3.99 Line Voltage Circuit, Equipment, or System. An ac or dc electrical concentrate in the proper proportions. circuit, equipment, or system where the voltage to ground or from line to line is 30 volts (V) rms (ac) or 42.4 V peak (dc) or greater. 3.3.75 Fully Enclosed Personnel Area. A driver or passenger compartment on the fire apparatus that provides total enclosure on all sides, top, and 3.3.100 Line Voltage Conductor. An ungrounded current-carrying bottom and has positive latching on all access doors. conductor of a line voltage circuit. 3.3.76 Gallon. United States gallon. 3.3.101 Live Load. Forces acting on the aerial device from personnel, portable equipment, water, and nozzle reaction. 3.3.77 Gauge. A round, analog pressure-indicating device that uses mechanical means to measure pressure. 3.3.102 Load Limit Indicator. A load indicator or an instruction plate, visible at the operator’s position, that shows the recommended safe load at 3.3.78 Gauge Pressure. Pressure measured by an instrument where the any condition of an aerial device’s elevation and extension. pressure indicated is relative to atmospheric pressure. 3.3.103 Low-Voltage Circuit, Equipment, or System. An electrical circuit, 3.3.79* GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The chassis manufacturer’s equipment, or system where the voltage does not exceed 30 volts (V) rms specified maximum, load-carrying capacity of an axle system, as measured (ac) or 42.4 V peak (dc), usually 12 V dc in fire apparatus. at the tire-ground interfaces. 3.3.104 Manufacturer. The person or persons, company, firm, corporation, 3.3.80* GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating). The chassis partnership, or other organization responsible for turning raw materials or manufacturer’s specified maximum, load-carrying capacity for tractor components into a finished product. trailer–type vehicles having three or more axle systems (a multiaxle installation is one system). 3.3.105* Maximum Pump Close-Off Pressure. The maximum pump discharge pressure obtained with all discharge outlets closed, with the pump 3.3.81* Grade. A measurement of the angle used in road design and primed and running with the pump drive engine operating at maximum expressed as a percentage of elevation change over distance. obtainable speed, and with the pump intake pressure at atmospheric pressure 3.3.82 Ground Clearance. The clearance under a vehicle at all locations or less. except the axles and driveshaft connections to the axle. 3.3.106 Minimum Continuous Electrical Load. The continuous electrical 3.3.83 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI). A device intended for current required to operate the minimum requirement of electrical devices the protection of personnel that functions to deenergize a circuit or portion defined by this standard. thereof within an established period of time when a current to ground 3.3.107* Miscellaneous Equipment Allowance. That portion of the exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required to operate GVWR or GCWR allocated for the weight of the miscellaneous equipment the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit. and its mounting brackets, boards, or trays. 3.3.84 Grounding Conductor. A non-current-carrying conductor used to 3.3.108 Mobile Foam Fire Apparatus. Fire apparatus with a permanently connect equipment or the ground circuit of a wiring system to the power mounted fire pump, foam proportioning system, and foam concentrate source grounding system. tank(s) whose primary purpose is for use in the control and extinguishment 3.3.85* GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The chassis of flammable and combustible liquid fires in storage tanks and other manufacturer’s specified maximum load-carrying capacity of a vehicle flammable liquid spills. having two axle systems (a multiaxle axle installation is one system). 3.3.109 Mobile Water Supply Apparatus (Tanker, Tender). A vehicle 3.3.86 Hazardous Material Response Fire Apparatus. An emergency designed primarily for transporting (pickup, transporting, and delivering) vehicle designed to carry various support equipment and personnel to a water to fire emergency scenes to be applied by other vehicles or pumping scene of a hazardousDRAFT material incident. equipment. 3.3.87 High-Idle Speed Control. A control or switch system that provides 3.3.110 Momentary Switch. A switch that returns to the neutral position a means to increase the engine operating speed from an idle condition to a (off) when released. higher preset operating speed. 3.3.111 Multiple Configuration. Variable configurations or positions of the 3.3.88 Industrial Supply Pump. A water pump mounted on a mobile foam aerial device (e.g., elevation, extension) in which a manufacturer’s different fire apparatus with a rated capacity of 3000 gpm (12000 L/min) or greater at rated load capacities are allowed. 100 psi (700 kPa) net pump pressure. 3.3.112 National Hose Thread (NH). A standard screw thread that has dimensions for inside (female) and outside (male) fire hose connections as 3.3.89 Initial Attack Apparatus. Fire apparatus with a permanently Standard for Fire Hose Connections mounted fire pump of at least 250 gpm (1000 L/min) capacity, water tank, defined in NFPA 1963, . and hose body whose primary purpose is to initiate a fire suppression attack 3.3.113* Net Pump Pressure. The sum of the discharge pressure and the on structural, vehicular, or vegetation fires, and to support associated fire suction lift converted to psi or kPa when pumping at draft, or the difference department operations. between the discharge pressure and the intake pressure when pumping from 3.3.90 In-Service Weight. The maximum actual vehicle weight under a hydrant or other source of water under positive pressure. any conditions of mobile operation, sometimes referred to as gross vehicle 3.3.114 Neutral Conductor. The grounded current-carrying conductor of all weight. electrical circuits. 3.3.91 Instability. A condition of a mobile unit in which the sum of the 3.3.115 Nozzle Reaction. Force that occurs when a water stream is moments tending to overturn the unit exceeds the sum of the moments discharged from the nozzle. tending to resist overturning. 3.3.116 Operator’s Panel. A panel containing gauges, switches, 3.3.92 Intake Connection Size. The nominal size of the first fire hose instruments, or controls where an operator can visually monitor the connection from the pump. applicable functions.

877 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 3.3.117 Optical Center. The point specified by the optical warning device 3.3.142 Rated Capacity (Aerial Device). The total amount of weight of all manufacturer of highest intensity when measuring the output of an optical personnel and equipment that can be supported at the outermost rung of an warning device. aerial ladder or on the platform of an elevating platform with the waterway uncharged. 3.3.118 Optical Element. Any individual lamp or other light emitter within an optical source. 3.3.143 Rated Capacity (Water Pump). The flow rate to which the pump manufacturer certifies compliance of the pump when it is new. 3.3.119 Optical Power. A unit of measure designated as candela-seconds/ minute that combines the flash energy and flash rate of an optical source 3.3.144 Readily Accessible. Able to be located, reached, serviced, or into one power measurement representing the true visual effectiveness of the removed without removing other components or parts of the apparatus and emitted light. without the need to use special tools to open enclosures. 3.3.120* Optical Source. Any single, independently mounted, light emitting 3.3.145 Removable Winch. A winch with quick disconnects for power and component in a lighting system. controls that can be temporarily mounted on the apparatus at a permanently installed mounting receiver. 3.3.121 Optical Warning Device. A manufactured assembly of one or more optical sources. 3.3.146 Reserve Capacity. The ability of a battery to sustain a minimum electrical load in the event of a charging system failure or a prolonged 3.3.122 Override. A system or device used to neutralize a given action or charging system deficit. motion. 3.3.147 Road Spray Location. Any underbody or underchassis location that 3.3.123 Override (Aerial Device). The takeover of all aerial device is subject to road spray. movement control functions by an operator at a second control station. 3.3.148 SCBA Fill Hose. Flexible hose plumbed to connect SCBA cylinders 3.3.124 Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for to the compressed air supply for filling purposes. assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses and automatic overcurrent devices, and equipped with or without switches for the control of 3.3.149 SCBA Fill Station. A containment enclosure for re-filling self- light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box contained breathing cylinders to guard personnel from fragments due to placed in or against a wall, partition, or other support; and accessible only accidental cylinder rupture. from the front. [70:100] 3.3.150 Sign. A visual indication whether in pictorial or word format that 3.3.125 Plate. A visual indication whether in pictorial or word format provides a warning to the operator or other persons near the apparatus. that provides instruction to the operator in the use of a component on the apparatus. 3.3.151 Slow-Operating Valve. A valve that has a mechanism to prevent movement of the flow regulating element from the fully closed position to the 3.3.126* Portable Generator. A mechanically driven power source that can fully opened position or vice versa in less than 3 seconds. be removed from the fire apparatus and operated at a location that is remote from the fire apparatus. 3.3.152* Special Services Fire Apparatus. A multipurpose vehicle that primarily provides support services at emergency scenes. 3.3.127 Powered Equipment Rack. A power-operated device that is intended to provide storage of hard suction hoses, ground ladders, or other 3.3.153 Split Shaft PTO. A power takeoff (PTO) drive system that is equipment, generally in a location above apparatus compartments. inserted between the chassis transmission and the chassis drive axle and that has the shift mechanism necessary to direct the chassis engine power either 3.3.128 Power Source. A device that produces line voltage electricity. to the drive axle or to a fire pump or other accessory. 3.3.129 Power Supply Assembly. Any cord or distribution assembly that 3.3.154 Stabilizer. A device integral with or separately attached to the is partly comprised of the neutral conductor, grounding conductor, and line chassis of a fire apparatus with an aerial device that is used to increase the voltage conductors connected from the load side of the power source to the moments tending to resist overturning the apparatus. line side of the primary panelboard. 3.3.155 Stabilizer Pad. A plate inserted beneath a stabilizer shoe to give 3.3.130* Preconnected Hose Line. A hose line that is stored on the greater surface bearing area. apparatus already connected to an outlet on a pump and that can be charged by the activation of one discharge valve. 3.3.156 Stabilizer Shoe. A permanently mounted shoe on a stabilizer to provide a ground surface area. 3.3.131 Proper(ly). In accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications or as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3.157 Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (SCFM). An expression of airflow rate in which the airflow rate is corrected to standard temperature 3.3.132 Psi. Pounds per square inch. and pressure. 3.3.133 PTO. Power takeoff. 3.3.158 Suction Lift. The sum of the vertical lift and the friction and entrance loss caused by the flow through the intake strainers and hose 3.3.134 Pump Operator’s Panel. The area on a fire apparatus that contains expressed in feet of water (meters of water) head. the gauges, controls, and other instruments used for operating the pump. 3.3.159 Sump. A recessed area of a tank assembly designed primarily to 3.3.135 Pump Operator’s Position. The location from which the pump entrap sludge or debris for removal and to serve as a central liquid collection operator operates the pump. point. 3.3.136 Pumper. Fire apparatus with a permanently mounted fire pump of 3.3.160 Swash Partition. A vertical wall within a tank structure designed to at least 750 gpmDRAFT (3000 L/min) capacity, water tank, and hose body whose control the unwanted movement of the fluid within that tank. primary purpose is to combat structural and associated fires. 3.3.161 Switch. Any set of contacts that interrupts or controls current flow 3.3.137 Purchaser. The authority having responsibility for the specification through an electrical circuit. and acceptance of the apparatus. 3.3.162 Synthetic Breathing Air. A manufactured breathing air that is 3.3.138 Purchasing Authority. The agency that has the sole responsibility produced by blending nitrogen and oxygen. and authority for negotiating, placing, and, where necessary, modifying each and every solicitation, purchase order, or other award issued by a governing 3.3.163 Top Rail. The top chord (rail) of an aerial ladder to which body. reinforcements are attached. 3.3.139 Purification System. A combination of mechanical, chemical, 3.3.164 Total Connected Electrical Load. The total current required to and physical devices such as separators, filters, adsorbents, and catalysts operate all of the devices permanently connected to the apparatus that can be designed to remove or alter contaminants within the compressed air stream simultaneously energized but does not include intermittent-type loads such to produce effluent air which is breathable. as primers and booster reel rewind motors. 3.3.140 Qualified Person. A person who, by possession of a recognized 3.3.165* Turning Clearance Radius. One half the larger of the left or right degree, certificate, professional standing, or skill, and who, by knowledge, full circle wall to wall turning diameter. training, and experience, has demonstrated the ability to deal with problems relating to a particular subject matter, work, or project. [1500:1-5] 3.3.166* Turntable. A structural component that connects the aerial device to the chassis and stabilization system through a rotating bearing that 3.3.141* Quint. Fire apparatus with a permanently mounted fire pump, a permits 360-degree continuous rotation of the aerial device. water tank, a hose storage area, an aerial ladder or elevating platform with a permanently mounted waterway, and a complement of ground ladders. 3.3.167 Turntable Alignment Indicator. An indicator that facilitates alignment of the aerial device with the boom support for bedding purposes.

878 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 3.3.168* Type 4 Rating. A rating for electrical equipment that is intended 4.4.1 The contractor shall provide a detailed description of the apparatus, for outdoor use because it provides a degree of protection from falling rain, a list of equipment to be furnished, and other construction and performance splashing water, and hose-directed water. details to which the apparatus shall conform. 3.3.169 Ultimate Strength. The ultimate strength of a material in tension, 4.4.1.1 The detailed description of the apparatus shall include, but shall compression, or shear, respectively, is the maximum tensile, compressive, not be limited to, estimated weight, wheelbase, turning clearance radius, or shear stress that the material can sustain, calculated on the basis of the principal dimensions, transmission, axle ratios, and, if applicable, the rated ultimate load and the original or unrestrained dimensions. capacity of the aerial device. 3.3.170 Unequipped Fire Apparatus. The completed fire apparatus 4.4.1.2 The purpose of these contractor specifications shall be to define what excluding personnel, agent(s), and any equipment removable without the use the contractor intends to furnish and deliver to the purchaser. of tools. 4.4.2 Responsibility for the apparatus and equipment shall remain with the 3.3.171 Utility Air. Air used for purposes other than human respiration. contractor until they are accepted by the purchaser. 3.3.172 Vibration Isolation. Isolation materials used to prevent structure- 4.4.3 A qualified and responsible representative of the contractor shall borne vibrations from reaching attached surfaces. instruct personnel specified by the purchaser in the operation, care, and maintenance of the fire apparatus and equipment delivered. 3.3.173 Water Tower. An aerial device consisting of permanently mounted power-operated booms and a waterway designed to supply a large capacity 4.5 Fire Apparatus Components. All components shall be installed in mobile elevated water stream. The booms can be of articulating design or accordance with the applicable manufacturer’s installation instructions. telescoping design. 4.5.1 Fire Pump. If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the pump 3.3.174 Wet Location. A nonsheltered location inside a compartment with a and its associated equipment shall meet the requirements of Chapter 16. door or cover that, while open, exposes the electrical enclosure or panelboard to the same environmental conditions as the exterior of the fire apparatus. 4.5.2 Auxiliary Pump. If the apparatus is equipped with an auxiliary A location on a nonenclosed, exterior surface of a fire apparatus body or pump, the pump and its associated equipment shall meet the requirements of driving and crew compartment where the enclosure or panel is exposed to the Chapter 17. (See also 3.3.147, Road Spray Location.) environment. 4.5.3 Industrial Supply Pump. If the apparatus is equipped with an 3.3.175 Yield Strength. The stress at which a material exhibits a specified industrial supply pump, the pump and its associated equipment shall meet permanent deformation or set. the requirements of Chapter 18. 4.5.4 Water Tank. If the apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the water Chapter 4 General Requirements tank shall meet the requirements of Chapter 19. 4.1 General. All fire apparatus shall meet the requirements of the following 4.5.5 Aerial Device. If the apparatus is equipped with an aerial device chapters: (aerial ladder, elevating platform, or water tower), the aerial device shall (1) Chapter 1, “Administration” meet the requirements of Chapter 20. (2) Chapter 2, “Referenced Publications” 4.5.6 Foam Proportioning System. If the apparatus is equipped with a foam proportioning system, the system shall meet the requirements of (3) Chapter 3, “Definitions” Chapter 21. (4) Chapter 4, “General Requirements” 4.5.7 Compressed Air Foam System (CAFS). If the apparatus is equipped with a compressed air foam system (CAFS), the system shall meet the (5) Chapter 12, “Chassis and Vehicle Components” requirements of Chapter 22. (6) Chapter 13, “Low-Voltage Electrical Systems and Warning Devices” 4.5.8 Line Voltage Electrical System. If the apparatus is equipped with a line voltage electrical system, the system shall meet the requirements of (7) Chapter 14, “Driving and Crew Areas” Chapter 23. (8) Chapter 15, “Body, Compartments, and Equipment Mounting” 4.5.9 Command and Communications. If the apparatus is equipped with 4.2 Requirements by Apparatus Type. a command and communications area, the area shall meet the requirements of Chapter 24. 4.2.1 In addition to the requirements in Section 4.1, the following also shall apply: 4.5.10 Air System. If the apparatus is equipped with an air system, the system shall meet the requirements of Chapter 25. (1) Pumper fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 5. 4.5.11 Winch System. If the apparatus is equipped with a winch system, the (2) Initial attack fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 6. system shall meet the requirements of Chapter 26. (3) Mobile water supply fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 7. 4.6 Legal Requirements. The apparatus shall comply with all applicable federal and state or provincial motor vehicle laws and regulations. (4) Aerial fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 8. 4.7 Third-Party Certification of Test Results. Where this standard (5) Quint fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 9. requires the results of tests to be certified by a independent third-party (6) Special serviceDRAFT fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 10. certification organization, that organization shall meet the requirements of this section. (7) Mobile foam fire apparatus shall comply with Chapter 11. 4.7.1 All certification shall be performed by a certification organization 4.2.2 Table 4.2.2 shows the required chapters that shall apply to the that is accredited for testing systems on fire apparatus in accordance with construction of the types of fire apparatus in 4.2.1. ANSI Z34.1, Standard for Third-Party Certification Programs for Products, Processes, and Services. 4.2.3 In addition to the types of fire apparatus listed in 4.2.1, other types of fire apparatus shall be permitted by combining the requirements for the 4.7.2 The certification organization shall not be owned or controlled by components to be used in the apparatus as defined in Section 4.5 with the manufacturers or vendors of the product that is being tested. requirements listed in Section 4.1. 4.7.3 The certification organization shall be primarily engaged in 4.3* Responsibility of Purchaser. It shall be the responsibility of the certification work and shall not have a monetary interest in the product’s purchaser to specify the following details of the apparatus: ultimate profitability. (1) Its required performance, including where operations at elevations above 4.7.4 The certification organization shall witness all tests and shall refuse to 2000 ft (600 m) or on grades greater than 6 percent are required certify any test results for a system if all components of that system requiring testing do not pass the testing required by this standard. (2) The maximum number of fire fighters to ride within the apparatus 4.7.5 There shall be no conditional, temporary, or partial certification of test (3) Specific added continuous electrical loads that exceed the minimum results. requirements of this standard 4.7.6 Appropriate forms or data sheets shall be provided and used during the (4) Any hose, ground ladders, or equipment to be carried by the apparatus testing. that exceed the minimum requirements of this standard. 4.7.7 Programs shall be in place for training, proficiency testing, and 4.4 Responsibility of Contractor. performance verification of any staff involved with certification. 879 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Table 4.2.2 Requirements by Apparatus

Pumper Initial Mobile Aerial Fire Quint Fire Special Mobile Apparatus Fire Attack Water Apparatus Apparatus Service Foam Fire Function Apparatus Fire Supply Fire Apparatus Apparatus Fire Apparatus Apparatus Chapter 1 Administration Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Chapter 2 Referenced Publications Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Chapter 3 Definition Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Chapter 4 General Requirements Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Chapter 5 Pumper Fire Apparatus Required N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Chapter 6 Initial Attack Fire N/A Required N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Apparatus Chapter 7 Mobile Water Supply Fire N/A N/A Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Apparatus Chapter 8 Aerial Fire Apparatus N/A N/A N/A Required N/A N/A N/A Chapter 9 Quint Fire Apparatus N/A N/A N/A N/A Required N/A N/A Chapter 10 Special Service Fire N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Required N/A Apparatus Chapter 11 Mobile Foam Fire N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Required Apparatus Chapter 12 Chassis and Vehicle Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Components Chapter 13 Low Voltage Electrical Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Systems and Warning Devices Chapter 14 Driving and Crew Areas Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Chapter 15 Body, Compartments, and Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Equipment Mounting Chapter 16 Fire Pump and Required Required If specified If specified Required If specified Required Associated Equipment Chapter 17 Auxiliary Pump and If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified Associated Equipment Chapter 18 Industrial Supply N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A If specified Pump and Associated Equipment Chapter 19 Water Tanks Required Required Required If specified Required If specified If specified Chapter 20 Aerial Devices If specified If specified N/A Required Required If specified If specified Chapter 21 Foam Proportioning If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified Required Systems Chapter 22 Compressed Air Foam If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified Systems Chapter 23 Line Voltage Electrical If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified DRAFTSystems Chapter 24 Command and If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified Communications Chapter 25 Air Systems If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified Chapter 26 Winches If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified If specified

880 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 4.7.8 The certification organization’s operating procedures shall provide a 4.12.2.1* The front to rear weight distribution of the fully loaded fire mechanism for the manufacturer to appeal decisions. The procedures shall apparatus as defined in Section 12.1 shall be within the limits set by the include provisions for the presentation of information from representatives of chassis manufacturer. both sides of a controversy to a designated appeals panel. 4.12.2.2 The front axle loads shall not be less than the minimum axle loads 4.8 Manufacturer Certification of Test Results. Where this standard specified by the chassis manufacturer under full load and all other loading requires the results of tests or the performance of a component to be certified conditions. by the manufacturer, the manufacturer shall meet the requirements of this section. 4.12.2.3 Load Distribution. 4.8.1 A representative of the manufacturer shall witness all tests and shall 4.12.2.3.1* Using the information supplied by the purchaser, the apparatus refuse to certify any test results for a system if all components of that system manufacturer shall calculate the load distribution for the apparatus. requiring testing do not pass the testing required by this standard. 4.12.2.3.2 The manufacturer shall engineer the fire apparatus to comply with 4.8.2 There shall be no conditional, temporary, or partial certification of test the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR), the overall gross vehicle weight rating results. (GVWR) and the chassis manufacturer’s load balance guidelines. 4.8.3 The manufacturer shall have the facilities and equipment necessary to 4.12.2.3.3* The purchaser shall locate the equipment on the apparatus to assure conduct the required testing, a program for the calibration of all instruments, the difference in weight from side to side on the end of each axle shall not exceed and procedures to ensure the proper control of all testing. 7 percent or the limit allowed by the axle or component manufacturer. 4.8.4 Appropriate forms or data sheets shall be provided and used during the 4.13 Apparatus Performance. testing. 4.13.1* The apparatus shall meet the requirements of this standard at 4.8.5 Programs shall be in place for training, proficiency testing, and elevations of 2000 ft (600 m) above sea level. performance verification of any staff involved with certification. 4.13.2* The apparatus shall meet all the requirements of this standard while 4.8.6 A official of the company that manufactures or installs the product stationary on a grade of 6 percent in any direction. shall designate in writing who is qualified to witness tests and certify results. 4.13.3* The apparatus shall meet the requirements of this standard in 4.9 Personnel Protection. ambient temperature conditions between 32°F (0°C) and 110°F (43°C). 4.9.1* Guards, shields, or other protection shall be provided where 4.14 Roadability. The apparatus, when fully equipped and loaded as defined necessary in order to prevent injury of personnel by hot, moving, or rotating in Section 12.1, shall be capable of the following performance while on dry, parts during non-maintenance operations. paved roads that are in good condition: 4.9.2 Electrical insulation or isolation shall be provided where necessary in (1) From a standing start, the apparatus shall be able to attain a speed of 35 order to prevent electrical shock from onboard electrical systems. mph (55 kmph) within 25 seconds on a level road. 4.9.3 Vehicular workmanship shall ensure an operating environment free of (2)* The apparatus shall be able to attain a minimum top speed of 50 mph accessible sharp projections and edges. (80 kmph) on a level road. 4.9.4 Safety related (caution, warning, danger) signs shall meet the (3)* The apparatus shall be able to maintain a speed of at least 20 mph (30 requirements of ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. kmph) on any grade up to and including 6 percent. 4.10 Controls and Instructions. 4.15 Serviceability. 4.10.1 Illumination shall be provided for controls, switches, instruction 4.15.1* The apparatus shall be designed so that all the manufacturer’s plates, gauges, and instruments necessary for the operation of the apparatus recommended routine maintenance checks of lubricant and fluid levels can and the equipment provided on it. be performed by the operator without lifting the cab of a tilt-cab apparatus or without the need for hand tools. 4.10.1.1 If external illumination is provided, it shall be a minimum of 5 footcandles (50 lux) on the face of the device. 4.15.2 Where special tools are required for routine service on any component of the apparatus, such tools shall be provided with the apparatus. 4.10.1.2 If internal illumination is provided, it shall be a minimum of 4 footlamberts (14 candela/m2). 4.15.3 Apparatus components that interfere with repair or removal of other major components shall be attached with fasteners, such as capscrews and nuts, so that 4.10.2* All required signs, plates, and labels shall be permanent in nature, the components can be removed and installed with ordinary hand tools. These securely attached, and shall meet the requirements of 4.9.4 and UL 969, components shall not be welded or otherwise permanently secured into place. Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems. 4.16 Road Tests. 4.10.2.1 The signs, plates, and labels shall have resistance to damage from temperatures between –30°F and 160°F (–35°C and 71°C) and exposure to 4.16.1 Road tests shall be conducted in accordance with this section to verify that oil, fuel, water, hydraulic fluids, or other fluids used on the apparatus. the completed apparatus is capable of compliance with Section 4.14. 4.10.2.2 The exterior mounted labels relating to safety or critical operational 4.16.2 The tests shall be conducted at a location and in a manner that does not instructions shall be reflective or lighted as required by 4.10.1. violate local, state, or federal traffic laws. 4.10.3 No gaugeDRAFT or visual display shall be more than 84 in. (2.1 m) above 4.16.3 The tests shall be conducted on dry, level, paved roads that are in the level where the operator stands to read the instrument. good condition. 4.10.4 The central midpoint or centerline of any control shall be no more 4.16.4 The apparatus shall be fully equipped and loaded as required in than 72 in. (1.8 m) vertically above the ground or platform that is designed to Section 12.1. serve as the operator’s standing position. 4.16.5 The engine shall not be operated in excess of the maximum governed 4.11 Component Protection. speed. 4.11.1* Hydraulic hose lines, air system tubing, control cords, and electrical 4.16.6 Acceleration tests shall consist of two runs in opposite directions over harnesses shall be mechanically attached to the frame or body structure of the same route. the apparatus. 4.16.6.1 The fire apparatus shall attain a speed of 35 mph (55 kmph) from a 4.11.2 The type of equipment described in 4.11.1 shall be furnished with standing start within 25 seconds. protective looms, grommets, or other devices at each point where they pass through body panels or structural members or wherever they lay against a 4.16.6.2 The fire apparatus shall attain a minimum top speed of 50 mph (80 sharp metal edge. kmph). 4.16.7 If the apparatus is equipped with an auxiliary braking system, 4.11.3 A through-the-frame connector shall be permitted to be used in the manufacturer shall road test the system to confirm that the system is place of metal protective looms or grommets. functioning as intended by the auxiliary braking system manufacturer. 4.12 Vehicle Stability. 4.16.8 The service brakes shall bring the fully laden apparatus to a complete 4.12.1 The height of the fully loaded vehicle’s center of gravity shall not stop from an initial speed of 20 mph (30 kmph), in a distance not exceeding exceed the chassis manufacturer’s maximum limit. 35 ft (9 m) by actual measurement, on a paved, level surface road that is free of loose material, oil, or grease. 4.12.2 Weight Distribution. 881 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 4.17 Tests on Delivery. (11) Weight documents from a certified scale — showing actual loading on the front axle, rear axle(s), and overall fire apparatus (with the water tank 4.17.1* If acceptance tests are desired at the point of delivery, they shall be full but without personnel, equipment, and hose) run in accordance with the provisions of this standard and shall duplicate the tests that the purchaser specifies. (12) Written load analysis and results of the electrical system performance tests required in Chapter 13 4.17.2 Aerial device stability tests shall not be run other than at the manufacturer’s facility. (13) When the apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the certification of water tank capacity (see Section 19.6) 4.18* Documentation. Any documentation provided with the apparatus shall be permitted to be in printed or electronic format, audio-visual format, 4.19.2 Operations and Service Documentation. or a combination thereof. 4.19.2.1 The contractor shall supply, at time of delivery, at least two sets 4.19 Data Required of the Contractor. of complete operation and service documentation covering the completed apparatus as delivered and accepted. 4.19.1 Fire Apparatus Documentation. The contractor shall supply, at the time of delivery, at least one copy of the following documents: 4.19.2.2 The documentation shall address at least the inspection, maintenance, and operations of the fire apparatus and all major components (1) The manufacturer’s record of apparatus construction details, including thereof. the following information: 4.19.2.3 The contractor shall also provide documentation of the following (a) Owner’s name and address items for the entire apparatus and each major operating system or major (b) Apparatus manufacturer, model, and serial number component of the apparatus: (c) Chassis make, model, and serial number (1) Manufacturer’s name and address (d) GAWR of front and rear axles (2) Country of manufacture (e) Front tire size and total rated capacity in pounds (kg) (3) Source for service and technical information (f) Rear tire size and total rated capacity in pounds (kg) (4) Parts replacement information (g) Chassis weight distribution in pounds with water and manufacturer (5) Descriptions, specifications, and ratings of the chassis, pump (if mounted equipment (front and rear) applicable), and aerial device (if applicable) (h) Engine make, model, serial number, rated horsepower and related speed, (6) Wiring diagrams for low voltage and line voltage systems to include the and governed speed following information: (a) Pictorial representations of circuit logic for all electrical components and (i) Type of fuel and fuel tank capacity wiring (j) Electrical system voltage and alternator output in amps (b) Circuit identification (k) Battery make, model, and capacity in cold cranking amps (CCA) (c) Connector pin identification (l) Chassis transmission make, model, and serial number; and if so equipped, chassis transmission PTO(s) make, model, and gear ratio (d) Zone location of electrical components (m) Pump make, model, rated capacity in gallons per minute (liters per (e) Safety interlocks minute where applicable), and serial number (f) Alternator-battery power distribution circuits (n) Pump transmission make, model, serial number, and gear ratio (g) Equivalent circuit logic implemented in multiplexing systems (o) Auxiliary pump make, model, rated capacity in gallons per minute (liters (7) Lubrication charts per minute where applicable), and serial number (8) Operating instructions for the chassis, any major components such as a (p) Water tank certified capacity in gallons or liters pump or aerial device, and any auxiliary systems (q) Aerial device type, rated vertical height in feet (meters), rated horizontal (9) Precautions related to multiple configurations of aerial devices, if reach in feet (meters), and rated capacity in pounds (kilograms) applicable (r) Paint numbers (10) Instructions regarding the frequency and procedure for recommended (s) Company name and signature of responsible company representative maintenance (2) If the apparatus has a fire pump, the pump manufacturer’s certification of (11) Overall apparatus operating instructions suction capability (see 16.2.4.1) (12) Safety considerations (3) If the apparatus has a fire pump, a copy of the apparatus manufacturer’s (13) Limitations of use approval for stationary pumping applications (see 16.3.1) DRAFT(14) Inspection procedures (4) If the apparatus has a fire pump, the engine manufacturer’s certified brake horsepower curve for the engine furnished, showing the maximum (15) Recommended maintenance procedures governed speed (see 16.3.2) (16) Troubleshooting guide (5) If the apparatus has a fire pump, the pump manufacturer’s certification of the hydrostatic test (see 16.5.2) (17) Apparatus body, chassis, and other component manufacturer’s warranties (6) If the apparatus has a fire pump, the certification of inspection and test for the fire pump (see 16.13.1) (18) Special data required by this standard (7) If the apparatus has an aerial device, the certification of inspection and (19) Copies of completed manufacturer testing and certifications, test for the aerial device (see Section 20.24) independent third-party certifications of test results, and other component manufacturer’s certifications (8) If the apparatus has an aerial device, all the technical information required for inspections to comply with NFPA 1914, Standard for Testing (20) A material safety data sheet (MSDS) for any fluid that is specified for Fire Department Aerial Devices use on the apparatus (9) If the apparatus has a fixed line voltage power source, the certification of 4.19.2.4* The contractor shall deliver with the apparatus all manufacturers’ the test for the fixed power source operations and maintenance documents supplied with components and equipment that are installed or supplied by the contractor. (10) If the apparatus is equipped with an air system, test results of the air quality, the SCBA fill station, and the air system installation (see Chapter 25)

882 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Chapter 5 Pumper Fire Apparatus Requirements 5.8.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing 5.1 General. If the apparatus is to function as a pumper, it shall meet the authority. requirements of this chapter. 5.8.2* Fire Hose and Nozzles. The following fire hose and nozzles shall be 5.2 Fire Pump. The apparatus shall be equipped with a fire pump that carried on the apparatus: meets the requirements of Chapter 16 and that has a minimum rated capacity (1) 800 ft (240 m) of 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose of 750 gpm (3000 L/min). (2) 400 ft (120 m) of 1 1/2-in. (38-mm), 1 3/4-in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52 5.3 Aerial Device. -mm) fire hose 5.3.1 If the pumper fire apparatus is equipped with an aerial device, the (3) One combination spray nozzle, 200 gpm (750 L/min) minimum aerial device shall meet the requirements of Chapter 20. (4) Two combination spray nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum 5.3.2 If the aerial device is equipped with a permanently mounted waterway, 1 the fire pump shall be capable of supplying the flow requirements of 20.6.1, (5) One playpipe, with shutoff and 1-in. (25-mm), 1 /8-in. (29-mm), and 1 20.12.1, or 20.16.1 with a maximum intake gauge pressure of 20 psi (150 1 /4-in. (32-mm) tips kPa). 5.8.3* Miscellaneous Equipment. The following additional equipment 5.3.3 Provisions shall be made to ensure that the pump operator is not in shall be carried on the apparatus: contact with the ground. (1) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the 5.3.4 Signs shall be placed to warn the pump operator of electrocution apparatus hazards. (2) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) pickhead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the 5.4* Water Tank. The pumper shall be equipped with a water tank(s) that apparatus meets the requirements of Chapter 19 and that has a minimum certified capacity (combined, if applicable) of 300 gal (1100 L). (3) One 6-ft (2-m) pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 5.5* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 40 ft3 (1.1 m3) of enclosed weather-resistant compartmentation that meets the requirements of Chapter (4) One 8-ft (2.4-m) or longer pike pole mounted in a bracket fastened to 15 shall be provided for the storage of equipment. the apparatus 5.6* Hose Storage. Hose bed area(s), compartments, or reels that comply (5) Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus with Section 15.10 shall be provided to accommodate the following: (6) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum (1) A minimum hose storage area of 30 ft3 (0.8 m3) for 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus larger fire hose (7) One 2 1/2-gal (9.5-L) or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket (2) Two areas, each a minimum of 3.5 ft3 (0.1 m3), to accommodate 1 1/2-in. fastened to the apparatus (38-mm) or larger preconnected fire hose lines (8) One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one 5.7* Equipment Supplied by the Contractor. The contractor shall supply end and one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose the equipment listed in 5.7.1 and 5.7.2 and shall provide and install such carried on the other brackets or compartments as are necessary to mount the equipment. (9) One self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) complying with NFPA 5.7.1 Ground Ladders. 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not 5.7.1.1 All ground ladders carried on the apparatus shall meet the less than four, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in requirements of NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design Verification containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer Tests for Fire Department Ground Ladders. (10) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a 5.7.1.2* At a minimum, the following ladders shall be carried on the bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage apparatus: space (1) One straight ladder equipped with roof hooks (11) One first aid kit (2) One extension ladder (12) Four combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (3) One attic ladder (13) Two hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 5.7.2 Suction Hose. (14) Two double female adapters, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger 5.7.2.1 A minimum of 15 ft (4.5 m) of soft suction hose or 20 ft (6 m) of hard fire hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus suction hose shall be carried. (15) Two double male adapters, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire 5.7.2.1.1 Where hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus furnished. DRAFT (16) One rubber mallet, suitable for use on suction hose connections, 5.7.2.1.2 Where hard suction hose is provided, the friction and entrance loss mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus of the combination suction hose and strainer shall not exceed the losses listed in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table16.2.4.1(c). (17) Two salvage covers each a minimum size of 12 ft × 14 ft (3.7 m × 4.3 m) 5.7.2.1.3 Where soft suction hose is provided, it shall have long-handle female couplings with the local hydrant outlet connection on one end and the (18) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each pump intake connection on the other end. designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. 5.7.2.2 Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard on Fire Hose. 5.8.3.1 If the pumper is equipped with an aerial device with a permanently mounted ladder, four ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, 5.7.2.3* The purchaser shall specify whether hard or soft suction hose is to Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components, shall be be provided, the length and size of the hose, the size of the couplings, the provided. manner in which the suction hose is to be carried on the apparatus, and the style of brackets desired. Chapter 6 Initial Attack Fire Apparatus 5.8* Minor Equipment. 5.8.1 General. The list of equipment in 5.8.2 and 5.8.3 shall be available on 6.1 General. If the apparatus is to function as an initial attack fire the pumper fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. apparatus, it shall meet the requirements of this chapter. 5.8.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and 6.2 Fire Pump. The apparatus shall be equipped with a fire pump that protect the equipment. meets the requirements of Chapter 16 and that has a minimum rated capacity of 250 gpm (1000 L/min).

883 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 6.3 Water Tank. Initial attack apparatus shall be equipped with a water (6) One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one tank(s) that meets the requirements of Chapter 19 and that has a minimum end and one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose certified capacity (combined, if applicable) of 200 gal (750 L). carried on the other 6.4* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 22 ft3 (0.6 m3) of enclosed (7) One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit weather-resistant compartmentation that meets the requirements of Chapter Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for 15 shall be provided for the storage of equipment. each assigned seating position, but not less than two, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA 6.5* Hose Storage. Hose bed area(s), compartments, or reels that meet manufacturer the requirements of Section 15.10 shall be provided to accommodate the following: (8) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage (1) A minimum hose storage area of 10 ft3 (0.3 m3) for 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) space(s) or larger fire hose (9) One first aid kit (2) Two areas, each a minimum of 3.5 ft3 (0.1 m3), to accommodate 1 1/2- in. (38-mm) or larger preconnected fire hose lines (10) Two combination spanner wrenches mounted in a bracket(s) fastened to the apparatus 6.6* Equipment Supplied by the Contractor. The contractor shall supply the equipment listed in 6.6.1 and 6.6.2 and shall provide and install such (11) One hydrant wrench mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus brackets or compartments as are necessary to mount the equipment. (12) One double female adapter, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire 6.6.1 Ground Ladders. hose, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 6.6.1.1 A 12-ft (3.7-m) or longer combination or extension-type ground (13) One double male adapter, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire ladder shall be carried on the apparatus. hose, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 6.6.1.2 All ground ladders on the apparatus shall meet the requirements of (14) One rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire bracket fastened to the apparatus Department Ground Ladders. (15) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each 6.6.2 Suction Hose. designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. 6.6.2.1 A minimum of 15 ft (4.5 m) of soft suction hose or 20 ft (6 m) of hard suction hose shall be carried. Chapter 7 Mobile Water Supply Fire Apparatus 6.6.2.1.1 Where hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be 7.1 General. If the apparatus is to function as a mobile water supply furnished. apparatus, it shall meet the requirements of this chapter. 6.6.2.1.2 Where hard suction hose is provided, the friction and entrance loss 7.2 Pump. If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the pump shall of the combination suction hose and strainer shall not exceed the losses listed meet the requirements of Chapter 16. in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table 16.2.4.1(c). 7.3 Water Tank. The mobile water supply apparatus shall be equipped with 6.6.2.1.3 Where soft suction hose is provided, it shall have long-handle a water tank(s) that meets the requirements of Chapter 19 and that has a female couplings with the local hydrant outlet connection on one end and the minimum certified capacity (combined, if applicable) of 1000 gal (4000 L). pump intake connection on the other end. 7.4* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 20 ft3 (0.6 m3) of enclosed 6.6.2.2 Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard on weather-resistant compartmentation meeting the requirements of Chapter 15 Fire Hose. shall be provided for the storage of equipment. 6.6.2.3* The purchaser shall specify whether hard or soft suction hose is to 7.5 Hose Storage. be provided, the length and size of the hose, the size of the couplings, the manner in which the suction hose is to be carried on the apparatus, and the 7.5.1* A minimum hose storage area of 6 ft3 (0.2 m3) for 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) style of brackets desired. or larger fire hose that meets the requirements of Section 15.10 shall be provided. 6.7* Minor Equipment. 7.5.2 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, two areas, each a 6.7.1 General. The list of equipment in 6.7.2 and 6.7.3 shall be available on minimum of 3.5 ft3 (0.1 m3), to accommodate 1 1/2-in. (38-mm) or larger the initial attack fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. preconnected fire hose lines shall be provided. 6.7.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and 7.6* Suction Hose. If the mobile water supply fire apparatus is equipped protect the equipment. with a pump, the requirements in 7.6.1 through 7.6.3 shall apply. 6.7.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for 7.6.1 A minimum of 15 ft (4.5 m) of soft suction hose or 20 ft (6 m) of hard organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing suction hose shall be carried. authority. 7.6.1.1 Where hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be 6.7.2 Fire Hose and Nozzles. The following fire hose and nozzles shall be furnished. carried on the apparatus:DRAFT 7.6.1.2 Where hard suction hose is provided, the friction and entrance loss of (1) 300 ft (90 m) of 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose the combination suction hose and strainer shall not exceed the losses listed in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table 16.2.4.1(c). (2) 400 ft (120 m) of 1 1/2-in. (38-mm), 1 3/4-in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52- mm) fire hose 7.6.1.3 Where soft suction hose is provided, it shall have long-handle female couplings with the local hydrant outlet connection on one end and the pump (3) Two combination spray nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum intake connection on the other end. 6.7.3* Miscellaneous Equipment. The following additional equipment 7.6.2 Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard on shall be carried on the apparatus: Fire Hose. (1) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) pickhead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the 7.6.3* The purchaser shall specify whether hard or soft suction hose is to apparatus be provided, the length and size of the hose, the size of the couplings, the (2) One 6-ft (2-m) pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket fastened manner in which the suction hose is to be carried on the apparatus, and the to the apparatus style of brackets desired. (3) Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 7.7 Minor Equipment. (4) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 7.7.1 The list of equipment in 7.7.2 and 7.7.3 shall be available on the initial 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus attack fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. (5) One 2 1/2-gal (9.5-L) or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket 7.7.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and fastened to the apparatus protect the equipment.

884 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 7.7.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for 8.3.3 If the aerial fire apparatus is equipped with a fire pump that is organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing intended to supply water to a permanently mounted waterway, the fire pump authority. shall be capable of supplying the flow requirements of 20.6.1, 20.12.1, or 20.16.1 with a maximum intake gauge pressure of 20 psi (150 kPa). 7.7.2 Fire Hose and Nozzles. 8.4 Water Tank. If the aerial fire apparatus is equipped with a water tank, it 7.7.2.1 The mobile water supply apparatus shall be equipped with at least shall meet the requirements of Chapter 19. 200 ft (60 m) of 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose. 8.5* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 40 ft3 (1.1 m3) of enclosed 7.7.2.2* If the mobile water supply apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, weather-resistant compartmentation meeting the requirements of Chapter 15 the following shall be provided: shall be provided for the storage of equipment. (1) 400 ft (120 m) of 1 1/2-in. (38-mm), 1 3/4-in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52- 8.6 Hose Storage. mm) fire hose 8.6.1* Any space on the aerial fire apparatus designed to carry fire hose (2) Two combination spray nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum shall meet the requirements of Section 15.10. 7.7.3 Equipment. 8.6.2 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump and a water tank, two 3 3 7.7.3.1* Mobile water supply fire apparatus shall be equipped with at least areas, each a minimum of 3.5 ft (0.1 m ), to accommodate 1 1/2-in. (38- the following equipment: mm) or larger preconnected fire hose lines, shall be provided. (1) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead or pickhead axe mounted in a bracket 8.7* Ground Ladders. fastened to the apparatus 8.7.1* A minimum of 115 ft (35 m) of ground ladders shall be supplied and (2) One 6-ft (2-m) or longer pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket installed by the contractor. fastened to the apparatus 8.7.2* As a minimum, the following types of ladders shall be provided: (3) Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (1) One attic ladder (4) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum (2) Two straight ladders (with folding roof hooks) 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus (3) Two extension ladders (5) One 2 1/2-gal (9.5-L) or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 8.7.3 The contractor shall provide such brackets or compartments as are necessary to mount the equipment. (6) One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, but 8.7.4 The ground ladders shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1931, not less than two, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire Department containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer Ground Ladders. (7) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a 8.8* Minor Equipment. bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s) 8.8.1 The list of equipment in 8.8.2 and 8.8.3 shall be available on the aerial fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. (8) One first aid kit 8.8.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and (9) Two combination spanner wrenches mounted in a bracket fastened to protect the equipment. the apparatus 8.8.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for (10) One hydrant wrench mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing authority. (11) One double female adapter, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 8.8.2* Aerial fire apparatus shall be equipped with at least the following equipment: (12) One double male adapter, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus (1) Two 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (13) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the (2) Three 6-lb (2.7-kg) pickhead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. apparatus 7.7.3.2 If the mobile water supply apparatus is equipped with a pump, the (3) Four pike poles mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus following equipment shall be carried on the apparatus: (4) Two 3-ft to 4-ft (1-m to 1.2-m) plaster hooks with D handles mounted (1) One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one in brackets fastened to the apparatus end and one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose carried on the other end (5) Two crowbars mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (2) One rubberDRAFT mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a (6) Two claw tools mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus bracket fastened to the apparatus (7) Two 12-lb (5-kg) sledgehammers mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus Chapter 8 Aerial Fire Apparatus (8) Four portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 8.1 General. (9) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 8.1.1 If the apparatus is to function as an aerial fire apparatus, it shall meet the requirements of this chapter. (10) One 2 1/2-gal (9.5-L) or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 8.1.2 If the apparatus is to function as a pumper with an aerial device, it shall meet all the requirements of Chapter 5 instead of Chapter 8. (11) One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for 8.2 Aerial Device. The apparatus shall be equipped with an aerial ladder, each assigned seating position, but not less than four, mounted in brackets elevating platform, or water tower that meets the requirements of Chapter 20. fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA 8.3* Fire Pump. If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the pump manufacturer shall meet the requirements of Chapter 16. (12) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a 8.3.1 Provisions shall be made to ensure that the pump operator is not in bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage contact with the ground. space(s) 8.3.2 Signs shall be placed to warn the pump operator of electrocution (13) One first aid kit hazards. (14) Six salvage covers, each a minimum size of 12 ft × 18 ft (3.6 m × 5.5 m) 885 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (15) Four combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to 9.5* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 40 ft3 (1.1 m3) of enclosed the apparatus weather-resistant compartmentation that meets the requirements of Chapter 15 shall be provided for the storage of equipment. (16) Two scoop shovels mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 9.6* Hose Storage. Hose bed area(s), compartments, or reels that comply (17) One pair of bolt cutters, 24 in. (0.6 m) minimum, mounted in a bracket with Section 15.10 shall be provided to accommodate the following: fastened to the apparatus 3 3 1 (1) A minimum hose storage area of 30 ft (0.8 m ) for 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or (18) Four ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on larger fire hose Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components 3 3 1 (2) Two areas, each a minimum of 3.5 ft (0.1 m ), to accommodate 1 /2-in. (19) One 150-ft (45-m) light-use life safety rope meeting the requirements (38-mm) or larger preconnected fire hose lines of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components 9.7* Equipment Supplied by the Contractor. The contractor shall supply the equipment listed in 9.7.1 and 9.7.2 and shall provide and install such (20) One 150-ft (45-m) general-use life safety rope meeting the brackets or compartments as are necessary to mount the equipment. requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components 9.7.1 Ground Ladders. (21) Two 150-ft (45-m) utility ropes having a breaking strength of at least 9.7.1.1 The quint shall carry a minimum of 85 ft (26 m) of ground ladders to 5000 lb (2300 kg) include at least one extension ladder, one straight ladder equipped with roof hooks, and one attic ladder. (22) One box of tools to include the following: 9.7.1.2 All ground ladders carried on the apparatus shall meet the (a) One hacksaw with three blades requirements of NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire Department Ground Ladders (b) One keyhole saw . (c) One 12-in. (0.3 m) pipe wrench 9.7.2 Suction Hose. 9.7.2.1 A minimum of 15 ft (4.5 m) of soft suction hose or 20 ft (6 m) of hard (d) One 24-in. (0.6 m) pipe wrench suction hose shall be carried. (e) One ballpeen hammer 9.7.2.1.1 Where hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be (f) One pair of tin snips furnished. (g) One pair of pliers 9.7.2.1.2 Where hard suction hose is provided, the friction and entrance loss of the combination suction hose and strainer shall not exceed the losses listed (h) One pair of lineman’s pliers in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table 16.2.4.1(c). (i) Assorted types and sizes of screwdrivers 9.7.2.1.3 Where soft suction hose is provided, it shall have long-handle female couplings with the local hydrant outlet connection on one end and the (j) Assorted adjustable wrenches pump intake connection on the other end. (k) Assorted combination wrenches 9.7.2.2 Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard on Fire Hose (23) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each . designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the 9.7.2.3* The purchaser shall specify whether hard or soft suction hose is to transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. be provided, the length and size of the hose, the size of the couplings, the 8.8.3 If the aerial fire apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the following manner in which the suction hose is to be carried on the apparatus, and the shall be supplied: style of brackets desired. (1) Two double female adapters, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire 9.8* Minor Equipment. hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 9.8.1 The list of equipment in 9.8.2 and 9.8.3 shall be available on the quint (2) Two double male adapters, sized to fit 2 1/2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 9.8.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and (3) One rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a protect the equipment. bracket fastened to the apparatus 9.8.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for (4) One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing end and one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose authority. carried on the other end 9.8.2* Fire Hose and Nozzles. The following fire hose and nozzles shall be (5) Two hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus carried on the apparatus: 1 (1) 800 ft (240 m) of 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose, in any Chapter 9 Quint Fire Apparatus combination DRAFT1 3 (2) 400 ft (120 m) of 1 /2-in. (38-mm), 1 /4-in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52-mm) 9.1 General. If the apparatus is to function as a quint, it shall meet the fire hose, in any combination requirements of this chapter. (3) One combination spray nozzle, 200 gpm (750 L/min) minimum 9.2 Fire Pump. (4) Two combination spray nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum 9.2.1 The apparatus shall be equipped with a fire pump that meets the 1 requirements of Chapter 16 and has a minimum rated capacity of 1000 gpm (5) One playpipe with shutoff and 1-in. (25-mm), 1 /8-in. (29-mm), and 1 (4000 L/min). 1 /4-in. (32-mm) tips 9.2.2* The fire pump shall be capable of supplying the flow requirements of 9.8.3* Miscellaneous Equipment. The following additional equipment 20.6.1 or 20.12.1 with a maximum intake gauge pressure of 20 psi (150 kPa). shall be carried on the apparatus: 9.2.3 Provisions shall be made to ensure that the pump operator is not in (1) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the contact with the ground. apparatus 9.2.4 Signs shall be placed to warn the pump operator of electrocution (2) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) pickhead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the hazards. apparatus 9.3 Aerial Device. The apparatus shall be equipped with an aerial ladder or (3) One 6-ft (2-m) pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket fastened an elevating platform with a permanently installed waterway that meets the to the apparatus requirements of Chapter 20. (4) One 8-ft (2.4-m) or longer pike pole mounted in a bracket fastened to 9.4 Water Tank. The apparatus shall be equipped with a water tank(s) the apparatus that meets the requirements of Chapter 19 and that has a minimum certified capacity (combined, if applicable) of 300 gal (1100 L). (5) Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 886 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (6) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 10.4.2.3* The purchaser shall specify whether hard or soft suction hose is 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus to be provided, the length and size of the hose, the size of the couplings, the manner in which the suction hose is to be carried on the apparatus, and the 1 (7) One 2 /2-gal (9.5-L) or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket style of brackets desired. fastened to the apparatus 10.5* Minor Equipment. (8) One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one end and one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose 10.5.1 The list of equipment in 10.5.2 shall be available on the special carried on the other service fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. (9) One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit 10.5.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for protect the equipment. each assigned seating position, but not less than four, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA 10.5.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for manufacturer organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing authority. (10) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage 10.5.2* The following equipment shall be carried on the apparatus: space(s) (1) Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (11) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried (2) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum (12) One first aid kit 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 1 (13) Four combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to (3) One 2 /2-gal (9.5-L) or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket the apparatus fastened to the apparatus (14) Two hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (4) One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for 1 (15) Two double female adapters, sized to fit 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire each assigned seating position, but not less than two, mounted in brackets hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer 1 (16) Two double male adapters, sized to fit 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (5) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage (17) One rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a space(s) bracket fastened to the apparatus (6) One first aid kit (18) Four salvage covers, each a minimum size of 12 ft × 14 ft (3.7 m × 4.3 m) (7) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the (19) Four ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard transmission in neutral and the parking brake released on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components

(20) One 150-ft (45-m) light-use life safety rope meeting the requirements Chapter 11 Mobile Foam Fire Apparatus of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components 11.1 General. If the apparatus is to function as a mobile foam fire (21) One 150-ft (45-m) general-use life safety rope meeting the apparatus, it shall meet the requirements of this chapter. requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components 11.2 Fire Pump. The apparatus shall be equipped with a fire pump that has a minimum rated capacity of 750 gpm (3000 L/min) and meets the (22) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each requirements of Chapter 16 or an industrial supply pump that meets the designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the requirements of Chapter 18. transmission in neutral and the parking brake released. 11.3 Aerial Device. Chapter 10 Special Service Fire Apparatus 11.3.1 If the mobile foam fire apparatus is equipped with an aerial device, 10.1 General. If the apparatus is to function as a special service fire the aerial device shall meet the requirements of Chapter 20. apparatus, it shall meet the requirements of this chapter. 11.3.2* The aerial device shall be equipped with a permanently mounted 10.2 Pump. If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the pump shall waterway, and the fire pump shall be capable of supplying the flow meet the requirements of Chapter 16. requirements of 20.6.1, 20.12.1, or 20.16.1 with a maximum intake gauge pressure of 20 psi (150 kPa). 10.3* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 120 ft3 (3.4 m3) of enclosed weather-resistant compartmentation meeting the requirements of Chapter 15 11.3.3 Provisions shall be made to ensure that the pump operator is not in shall be provided for the storage of equipment. contact with the ground. 10.4* EquipmentDRAFT Supplied by the Contractor. The contractor shall supply 11.3.4 Signs shall be placed to warn the pump operator of electrocution the equipment listed in 10.4.1 and 10.4.2 and shall provide and install such hazards. brackets or compartments as are necessary to mount the equipment. 11.4 Foam Proportioning System. The apparatus shall be equipped with a 10.4.1 Ground Ladders. If ground ladders are carried on the apparatus, foam proportioning system that meets the requirements of Chapter 21. they shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire Department Ground Ladders. 11.5 Foam Tank. The mobile foam fire apparatus shall be equipped with a foam concentrate tank(s) that meets the requirements of Chapter 21 and that 10.4.2 Suction Hose. If the special service fire apparatus is equipped with a has a minimum certified capacity (combined, if applicable) of 500 gal (2000 pump, the requirements in 10.4.2.1 through 10.4.2.3 shall apply. L). 10.4.2.1 A minimum of 15 ft (4.5 m) of soft suction hose or 20 ft (6 m) of 11.6* Equipment Storage. A minimum of 40 ft3 (1.13 m3) of enclosed hard suction hose shall be carried. weather-resistant compartmentation that meets the requirements of Chapter 15 shall be provided for the storage of equipment. 10.4.2.1.1 Where hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be furnished. 11.7* Hose Storage. Hose bed area(s), compartments, or reels that comply with Section 15.10 shall be provided to accommodate the following: 10.4.2.1.2 Where hard suction hose is provided, the friction and entrance 3 3 1 loss of the combination suction hose and strainer shall not exceed the losses (1) A minimum hose storage area of 30 ft (0.8 m ) for 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or listed in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table 16.2.4.1(c). larger fire hose

3 3 1 10.4.2.1.3 Where soft suction hose is provided, it shall have long-handle (2) Two areas, each a minimum of 3.5 ft (0.1 m ), to accommodate 1 /2-in. female couplings with the local hydrant outlet connection on one end and the (38-mm) or larger preconnected fire hose lines pump intake connection on the other end. 11.8* Equipment Supplied by the Contractor. The contractor shall supply 10.4.2.2 Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard the equipment listed in 11.8.1 and shall provide and install such brackets or on Fire Hose. compartments as are necessary to mount the equipment. 887 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 11.8.1 Suction Hose. (14) Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each designed to hold the fully loaded apparatus on a 10 percent grade with the 11.8.1.1 A minimum of 15 ft (4.5 m) of soft suction hose or 20 ft (6 m) of transmission in neutral and the parking brake released hard suction hose shall be carried. 11.9.3.1 If the mobile foam fire apparatus is equipped with an aerial 11.8.1.1.1 Where hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be device with a permanently mounted ladder, four ladder belts meeting the furnished. The friction and entrance loss of the combination suction hose requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and and strainer shall not exceed the losses listed in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table System Components, shall be provided. 16.2.4.1(c). Chapter 12 Chassis and Vehicle Components 11.8.1.1.2 Where soft suction hose is provided, it shall have long-handle female couplings with the local hydrant outlet connection on one end and the 12.1* Carrying Capacity. The GAWR and the GCWR or GVWR of the pump intake connection on the other end. chassis shall be adequate to carry the weight of the unequipped apparatus, the fully loaded water and other tanks, the specified hose load, unequipped 11.8.1.2 Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard personnel weight, ground ladders, and miscellaneous equipment allowance on Fire Hose. as defined in Table 12.1. 11.8.1.3* The purchaser shall specify whether hard or soft suction hose is to be provided, the length and size of the hose, the size of the couplings, the Table 12.1 Miscellaneous Equipment Allowance manner in which the suction hose is to be carried on the apparatus, and the style of brackets desired. Apparatus Chassis Equipment Type GVWR Allowance 11.9* Minor Equipment. Pumper fire apparatus Less than 250 ft3 (7 m3) 2000 lb (900 kg) 11.9.1 General. The list of equipment in 11.9.2 and 11.9.3 shall be available compartment space† on the mobile foam fire apparatus before the apparatus is placed in service. 250 ft3 (7 m3) or more 2500 lb (1350 kg) 11.9.1.1 Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and of compartment space† protect the equipment. 11.9.1.2 A detailed list of who is to furnish the items and the method for Initial attack fire 10,000 lb to 15,000 lb 900 lb (400 kg) organizing and protecting these items shall be supplied by the purchasing apparatus (4500 kg to 7000 kg) authority. 15,001 lb to 20,000 lb 1500 lb (675 kg) 11.9.2* Fire Hose and Nozzles. The following fire hose and nozzles shall (7001 kg to 9000 kg) be carried on the apparatus: 20,001 lb and up 2000 lb (900 kg) 1 (9001 kg and up) (1) 800 ft (240 m) of 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose, in any combination Mobile water supply fire All 1000 lb (450 kg) 1 3 apparatus (2) 400 ft (120 m) of 1 /2-in. (38-mm), 1 /4-in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52- mm) fire hose, in any combination Aerial fire apparatus All 2500 lb (1125 kg) (3) Four foam or spray nozzles, 200 gpm (750 L/min) minimum Quint fire apparatus All 2500 lb (1125 kg) (4) Two foam or spray nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum Special service fire 10,000 lb to 15,000 lb 2000 lb (900 kg) (5) One preconnected monitor, rated to discharge a minimum of 1000 apparatus (4500 kg to 7000 kg) gpm (4000 L/min), mounted on top of the fire apparatus with a spray or foam nozzle rated at a minimum of 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) 15,001 lb to 20,000 lb 2500 lb (1125 kg) (7001 kg to 9000 kg) 11.9.3* Miscellaneous Equipment. The following additional equipment shall be carried on the apparatus: 20,001 lb to 30,000 3000 lb (1350 kg) (9001 kg to 14,000 kg) (1) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) pickhead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 30,001 lb – 40,000 lb 4000 lb (1800 kg) GVWR (2) One 6-ft (2-m) pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket (14,001 kg to 18,000 fastened to the apparatus kg) (3) Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the 40,001 lb – 50,000 lb 6000 lb (2700 kg) apparatus GVWR (18,001 kg to 23,000 (4) One approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum kg) 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 50,001 lb – 60,000 lb 8000 lb (3600 kg) (5) One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one GVWR end and one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose (23,001 kg to 27,000 carried on the otherDRAFTkg) (6) One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit 60,001 lb and up 10,000 lb (4500 kg) Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for GVWR each assigned seating position, but not less than four, mounted in brackets (27,001 kg and up) fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer Mobile foam fire All 2000 lb (900 kg) apparatus (7) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage †Compartment space for pumpers is calculated based on total space enclosed compartment inside dimensions. (8) One first aid kit (9) Four combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to 12.1.1 If the purchaser provides a list of equipment to be carried with the apparatus weights, or a specified miscellaneous equipment allowance, and that value exceeds the minimum specified in Table 12.1, then this value shall be used (10) Two hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus for the miscellaneous equipment allowance. 1 (11) Two double female adapters, sized to fit 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger 12.1.2* The unequipped personnel weight shall be calculated at 200 lb fire hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (90 kg) per person multiplied by the number of seating positions on the 1 apparatus. (12) Two double male adapters, sized to fit 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger fire hose, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus 12.1.3 A final manufacturer’s certification of the GVWR or GCWR, along with a certification of the GAWR, shall be supplied on a label affixed to the (13) One rubber mallet, suitable for use on suction hose connections, vehicle. mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus 888 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 12.2 Engine and Engine System Design. (14) Generator system lubricant 12.2.1* Chassis Engine. (15) Front tire cold pressure 12.2.1.1* An engine governor or electronic fuel control system shall be (16) Rear tire cold pressure installed that will limit the speed of the engine under all conditions of operation to that speed established by the engine manufacturer; this shall be 12.2.4 Fuel and Air System. the maximum governed speed. 12.2.4.1* Diesel Engines. 12.2.1.2 Audible and visual warning devices that are visible from the driver’s position shall be provided to alert the driver to high engine 12.2.4.1.1 Air Intake System. temperature or low oil pressure conditions. 12.2.4.1.1.1* An air filter shall be provided in the engine’s intake air system. 12.2.1.3* Automatic engine shutdown systems shall not be permitted unless 12.2.4.1.1.2 Air inlet restrictions shall not exceed the engine manufacturer’s they are an integral part of the standard engine management system, that recommendations. cannot be disabled. 12.2.4.1.1.3* The air inlet shall be protected so as to prevent water and 12.2.1.4 Engine Speed Control. burning embers from entering the air intake system. 12.2.1.4.1* An engine speed control device shall be installed to allow an 12.2.4.1.1.4 An air restriction indicator shall be mounted in the driving increase in the engine speed when the apparatus is parked. compartment and visible to the driver. 12.2.1.4.2* An interlock shall prevent the operation of this engine speed 12.2.4.1.2* The fuel supply lines and fuel filters shall meet the engine control device unless the parking brake is fully engaged and the transmission manufacturer’s recommendations. is in neutral or park, or unless the engine speed control device is used with chassis engine-driven components, in which case it shall be interlocked with 12.2.4.1.3 Electric Fuel Priming System. the engagement of those components. 12.2.4.1.3.1* Where an electric fuel priming system is furnished, the valving 12.2.1.5 The installation of the engine, transmission, and engine- and and piping shall be arranged and marked with a label so that it can be transmission-driven accessories (PTOs, etc.) shall meet the engine and operated only to reprime the fuel system. transmission manufacturer’s installation recommendations for the service intended. 12.2.4.1.3.2 When the system is not being intentionally operated, it shall be isolated from the fuel system and inoperable. 12.2.1.6 An engine hourmeter shall be provided. 12.2.4.2 Gasoline Engines. 12.2.2 Cooling System. 12.2.4.2.1 Air Intake System. 12.2.2.1* The engine’s cooling system shall maintain a temperature in the engine at or below the engine manufacturer’s maximum temperature rating 12.2.4.2.1.1 An air filter shall be provided in the engine’s intake air system. under all conditions for which the apparatus is designed. 12.2.4.2.1.2 Air inlet restrictions shall not exceed the engine manufacturer’s 12.2.2.2 Drain Valves. recommendations. 12.2.2.2.1 Readily accessible drain valves shall be installed at the lowest 12.2.4.2.1.3 The air inlet shall be protected so as to prevent water and point of the cooling system and at such other points as are necessary to burning embers from entering the air intake system. permit complete removal of the coolant from the system. 12.2.4.2.1.4 An air restriction indicator shall be mounted in the driving 12.2.2.2.2 Drain valves shall be designed such that they will not open compartment and visible to the driver. accidentally due to vibration. 12.2.4.2.2 Fuel System. 12.2.2.3 The radiator shall be mounted so as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over 12.2.4.2.2.1 Fuel lines and filters or strainers that meet the engine uneven ground. manufacturer’s recommendations shall be provided. 12.2.2.4 Radiator cores shall be compatible with commercial antifreeze 12.2.4.2.2.2 The filters or strainers shall be of a serviceable type and solutions. mounted in an accessible location. 12.2.4.2.2.3 Where two or more fuel lines are installed, separate fuel 12.2.3 Lubrication System. pumps operating in parallel with check valves and filtering devices shall be 12.2.3.1* The engine shall be provided with an oil filter of the type provided. approved by the engine manufacturer. 12.2.4.2.2.4 The fuel line(s) shall be located or protected so as not to be 12.2.3.2 The engine oil fill pipe shall be large enough and located so as to subjected to excessive heating from any portion of an exhaust system. allow easy filling. 12.2.4.2.2.5 The line(s) shall be protected from mechanical damage. 12.2.3.3 A permanent plate in the driving compartment shall specify the 12.2.4.2.2.6 A gasoline feed system shall include an electric-powered fuel quantity and type of the following fluids used in the vehicle: pump located within or adjacent to the fuel tank. (1) Engine oil DRAFT12.2.5 Exhaust System. (2) Engine coolant 12.2.5.1* The exhaust piping and discharge outlet shall be located or (3) Chassis transmission fluid shielded so as not to expose any portion of the apparatus or equipment to excessive heating. (4) Pump transmission lubrication fluid 12.2.5.2 Exhaust pipe discharge shall be directed away from any operator’s (5) Pump primer fluid position. (6) Drive axle(s) lubrication fluid 12.2.5.3 If the apparatus is equipped with stabilizers, the exhaust piping discharge shall be directed away from the contact area between the stabilizer (7) Air-conditioning refrigerant and the ground when deployed. (8) Air-conditioning lubrication oil 12.2.5.4 Silencing devices shall be provided. (9) Power steering fluid 12.2.5.5 Exhaust back pressure shall not exceed the limits specified by the (10) Cab tilt mechanism fluid engine manufacturer. 12.2.5.6 Where parts of the exhaust system are exposed so that they are (11) Transfer case fluid likely to cause injury to operating personnel, protective guards shall be (12) Equipment rack fluid provided. (13) Air compressor system lubricant 12.3 Vehicle Components. 12.3.1 Braking System.

889 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 12.3.1.1 The vehicle shall be equipped with an all-wheel antilock braking 12.3.2.6.1 If a tractor-drawn vehicle is provided for an aerial fire apparatus, system if such a system is available from the chassis manufacturer. it shall consist of a tractor with a permanent, nonkingpinned “fifth wheel” mounted upon the rear of the chassis to carry the forward end of the aerial 12.3.1.2 All brakes shall be readily accessible for adjustment. ladder trailer unit. 12.3.1.3 Service brakes and parking brakes shall be independently applied. 12.3.2.6.2 The fifth wheel and body design shall be of a type that allows full 12.3.1.4 The service brake application valve, when applied, shall operate all 90-degree jackknifing of the tractor trailer combination with the stabilizers the service brakes on the vehicle or combination vehicle. in the stored position. 12.3.1.5* Where air-actuated braking systems are provided, they shall 12.3.2.6.3 A steering wheel shall be provided to steer the rear wheels of the include the following: trailer unit. (1) An automatic moisture ejector 12.3.2.6.3.1 The steering shall be of the power or power-assisted type. 12.3.2.6.3.2 A minimum wheel cramp angle of 20 degrees right and left (2) An air dryer shall be provided. (3) A pressure protection valve to prevent the use of all air-operated 12.3.2.6.4 An audible and visual warning system shall be provided to warn accessories except air-operated windshield wipers and air-assist steering, if both drivers when the jackknife position approaches the manufacturer’s provided, when the system air pressure drops below 80 psi (550 kPa) maximum allowable position. (4) A quick buildup section in the air reservoir system arranged so that 12.3.2.6.5 If the manufacturer’s design does not permit the load from the if the apparatus has a completely discharged air system, it is able to move aerial device to be transferred to the rear springs of the tractor, a device shall within 60 seconds of start up. be installed that will prevent such a weight transfer. 12.3.1.5.1 The quick buildup system shall provide sufficient air pressure so that the apparatus has no brake drag and is able to stop under the intended 12.3.3* Transmission. operating conditions following the 60-second buildup time. 12.3.3.1 The transmission shall be rated for heavy-duty service and shall be 12.3.1.5.2 On a chassis that cannot be equipped with a quick buildup designed to match engine torque and speed to the load demand. air brake system, an onboard automatic electric compressor with an 12.3.3.2 The transmission shall provide the driver with the selection of automatically ejected electric shoreline or a fire station compressed air individual gears, or ranges of gears, necessary to meet the performance shoreline hookup shall be permitted in order to maintain full operating air requirements of this standard. pressure while the vehicle is not running. 12.3.4 Fuel Tank. 12.3.1.6* Parking Brakes. 1 12.3.4.1* The fuel capacity shall allow the engine to drive the pump for 2 /2 12.3.1.6.1 Parking brakes shall control the rear wheels, or all wheels, and hours at rated pump capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure and at shall be of the positive, mechanically actuated type. the suction conditions specified in this standard or to operate at 60 percent of gross engine horsepower for 21/ hours, whichever is greater. 12.3.1.6.2 The parking brake system shall hold the fully loaded apparatus 2 on at least a 20 percent grade. 12.3.4.2 The tank fill opening shall be marked with a label indicating the 12.3.1.6.3 A lockup device to retain applied pressure on hydraulically type of fuel to be used. actuated service brake systems or the use of the “park” position on an 12.3.4.3 If two fuel tanks are furnished, the fuel system shall not require automatic transmission shall not be substituted for a separate parking brake manual intervention to provide fuel to the engine. A single fuel gauge shall system. indicate the proportional amount of fuel in the fuel system. 12.3.1.6.4 Parking brakes on steerable axles of tiller vehicles shall be 12.3.4.4 The tank fill piping shall be placed so it is protected from provided where necessary to meet the requirements of this standard. mechanical damage. 12.3.1.6.5 Air-applied brakes or mechanically actuated brakes shall be 12.3.4.5 The tank and the fill piping shall be placed so that they are not permitted on these axles. exposed to heat from an exhaust system or other source of ignition. 12.3.1.7 The service brakes shall be capable of bringing the fully laden 12.3.4.6 The tank shall be placed so it is removable for repairs. apparatus to a complete stop from an initial speed of 20 mph (30 kph), in a distance not exceeding 35 ft (9 m) by actual measurement, on a paved, level 12.3.4.7 A means for draining the tank without removing the tank shall be surface road that is free of loose material, oil, or grease. supplied. 12.3.1.8* All apparatus with a GVWR of 36,000 lb (16,000 kg) or greater 12.3.5* Tow Hooks. Front and rear tow hooks or tow eyes shall be attached shall be equipped with an auxiliary braking system. to the frame structure to allow towing (not lifting) of the apparatus without damage. 12.3.2 Suspension and Wheels. Chapter 13 Low-Voltage Electrical Systems and Warning Devices 12.3.2.1* Each load-bearing tire and rim of the apparatus shall not carry a weight in excess of the recommended load for the operation of truck tires of 13.1* General. Any low-voltage electrical systems or warning devices the size used, as published in the Tire and Rim Association — Year Book, installed on the fire apparatus shall be appropriate for the mounting location and as recommended by the tire manufacturer, when the apparatus is loaded and intended electrical load and shall meet the specific requirements of as indicated in DRAFTSection 12.1. Chapter 13. 12.3.2.1.1 Where the vehicle tires are utilized as part of an aerial device 13.2 Wiring. All electrical circuit feeder wiring supplied and installed stability system, the maximum loads imposed on the tires shall not exceed by the fire apparatus manufacturer shall meet the requirements of 13.2.1 the tire manufacturer’s maximum static load rating. through 13.2.8. 12.3.2.2 Axle housings and any components other than wheels and tires 13.2.1* The wire shall be stranded copper or copper alloy conductors of shall clear the road surface by at least 8 in. (203 mm). a gauge rated to carry 125 percent of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected. 12.3.2.3* An angle of approach and an angle of departure of at least 8 degrees shall be maintained at the front and rear of the vehicle when it is 13.2.1.1 Voltage drops in all wiring from the power source to the using loaded as indicated in Section 12.1. device shall not exceed 10 percent. 12.3.2.4 Clearance for tire chains shall be provided in accordance with SAE 13.2.1.2 The use of star washers for circuit ground connections shall not be J683, Tire Chain Clearance — Trucks, Buses (except Suburban, Intercity, permitted. and Transit Buses), and Combinations of Vehicles. 13.2.1.3 All circuits shall otherwise be wired in conformance with SAE 12.3.2.5 Steering. J1292, Automobile, Truck, Truck-Tractor, Trailer, and Motor Coach Wiring. 12.3.2.5.1 The steering mechanism shall be capable of turning the front 13.2.2 Wiring and Wire Harness Construction. wheels to an angle of at least 30 degrees to either the right or left for nondriving front axles and at least 28 degrees for driving front axles. 13.2.2.1 All insulated wire and cable shall conform to SAE J1127, Battery Cable; SAE J1128, Low Tension Primary Cable, type SXL, GXL or TXL; or 12.3.2.5.2 Power steering or power-assisted steering shall be provided. SAE J1560, Low Tension Thin Wall Primary Cable. 12.3.2.6 Tractor-Drawn Aerial Fire Apparatus. 13.2.2.1.1 All conductors shall be constructed in accordance with SAE J1127, Battery Cable; SAE J1128, Low Tension Primary Cable; or 890 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA SAE J1560, Low Tension Thin Wall Primary Cable, except when good (4) The lighting necessary to produce 1 footcandle (10 lx) of illumination engineering practice dictates special strand construction. on all walking surfaces on the apparatus and on the ground at all egress points onto and off the apparatus, 5 footcandles (50 lx) of illumination on 13.2.2.1.2 Conductor materials and stranding, other than copper, shall all control and instrument panels and 50 percent of the total compartment be permitted if all applicable requirements for physical, electrical, and lighting loads. environmental conditions are met as dictated by the end application. (5) The minimum optical warning system required in Section 13.8, where 13.2.2.1.3 Physical and dimensional values of conductor insulation shall be the apparatus is blocking the right-of-way. in conformance with the requirements of SAE J1127, Battery Cable; SAE J1128, Low Tension Primary Cable; or SAE J1560, Low Tension Thin Wall (6) The continuous electrical current required to simultaneously operate Primary Cable; except when good engineering practice dictates special any fire pumps, aerial devices, and hydraulic pumps. conductor insulation. (7) *Other warning devices and electrical loads defined by the purchaser 13.2.2.2 The overall covering of conductors shall be moisture-resistant as critical to the mission of the apparatus. loom or braid that has a minimum continuous rating of 194°F (90°C) except when good engineering practice dictates special consideration for loom 13.3.4* The condition of the low-voltage electrical system shall be installations exposed to higher temperatures. monitored by a system that provides an audible and visual warning to persons on, in, or near the apparatus of an impending electrical system 13.2.3 The overall covering of jacketed cables shall be moisture resistant failure caused by the excessive discharge of the battery set. and have a minimum continuous temperature rating of 194°F (90°C) except when good engineering practice dictates special consideration for cable 13.3.4.1 The charge status of the battery shall be determined either by direct installations exposed to higher temperature. measurement of the battery charge or indirectly by monitoring the system voltage. 13.2.4 All wiring connections and terminations shall use a method that provides a positive mechanical and electrical connection. 13.3.4.2 If system voltage is monitored, the alarm shall sound if the system voltage at the battery or at the master load disconnect switch drops below 13.2.4.1 The wiring connections and terminations shall be installed in 11.8 volts for 12-volt nominal systems or 23.6 volts for 24-volt nominal accordance with the device manufacturer’s instructions. systems for more than 120 seconds. 13.2.4.2 All terminal strips shall have protective covers. 13.3.5 A voltmeter shall be mounted on the driver’s instrument panel to allow direct observation of the system voltage. 13.2.4.3 Wire nut, insulation displacement, and insulation piercing connections shall not be used. 13.3.6 Load Management. 13.2.5 Wiring shall be restrained to prevent damage caused by chafing 13.3.6.1* If the total connected electrical load exceeds the minimum or ice buildup, and protected against heat, liquid contaminants, or other continuous electrical output rating of the installed alternator(s) operating environmental factors. under the conditions specified in 13.3.2, an automatic electrical load management system shall be required. 13.2.6* Wiring shall be uniquely identified at least every 2 ft (0.6 m) by color coding or permanent marking with a circuit function code. The 13.3.6.2 The minimum continuous electrical loads defined in 13.3.3 shall identification shall reference a wiring diagram. [See 4.19.2.3(6).] not be subject to automatic load management. 13.2.7 Circuits shall be provided with properly rated low-voltage 13.4* Batteries. overcurrent protective devices. 13.4.1 Batteries shall be of the high-cycle type. 13.2.7.1 Such devices shall be readily accessible and protected against heat in excess of the overcurrent device’s design range, mechanical damage, and 13.4.2 With the engine off, the battery system shall be able to provide the water spray. minimum continuous electrical load for 10 minutes without loosing more than 50 percent of the reserve capacity rating and then restart the engine. 13.2.7.2 Circuit protection shall be accomplished by utilizing fuses, circuit breakers, fusible links, or solid state equivalent devices. 13.4.3 The battery system CCA rating shall meet or exceed the minimum CCA recommendations of the engine manufacturer. 13.2.7.3 If a mechanical-type device is used, it shall conform to one of the following SAE standards: 13.4.4 The batteries shall be mounted to prevent movement during fire apparatus operation and shall be protected against accumulations of road (1) SAE J156, Fusible Links spray, snow, and road debris. (2) SAE J553, Circuit Breakers 13.4.4.1 The batteries shall be readily accessible for examination, test, and maintenance. (3) SAE J554, Electric Fuses (Cartridge Type) 13.4.4.2 A means shall be provided for jump-starting the engine if the (4) SAE J1888, High Current Time Lag Electric Fuses batteries are not accessible without lifting the cab of a tilt-cab apparatus. (5) SAE J2077, Miniature Blade Type Electrical Fuses 13.4.4.3 Where an enclosed battery compartment is provided, it shall be ventilated to the exterior to prevent the buildup of heat and explosive fumes. 13.2.8 Switches, relays, terminals, and connectors shall have a direct current (dc) rating of 125 percent of maximum current for which the circuit 13.4.4.4* The batteries shall be protected against vibration and is protected. DRAFTtemperatures that exceed the battery manufacturer’s recommendation. 13.3 Power Supply. 13.4.5* An onboard battery conditioner or charger, or a polarized inlet, shall be provided for charging all batteries. Where an onboard conditioner or 13.3.1 A 12-volt or 24-volt electrical alternator shall be provided. charger is supplied, the associated line voltage electrical power system shall 13.3.2* It shall have a minimum output at idle to meet the minimum be installed in accordance with Chapter 23. continuous electrical load of the fire apparatus as defined in 13.3.3, at 200°F 13.4.6 A master load disconnect switch shall be provided between the (93°C) ambient temperature within the engine compartment, and shall be starter solenoid(s) and the remainder of the electrical loads on the apparatus. provided with full automatic regulation. 13.4.6.1 The batteries shall be connected directly to the starter solenoid(s). 13.3.3 The minimum continuous electrical load shall consist of the total amperage required to simultaneously operate the following in a stationary 13.4.6.2 Electronic control systems and similar devices shall be permitted to mode during emergency operations: be otherwise connected if so specified by their manufacturer. (1) The propulsion engine and transmission. 13.4.6.3 The alternator shall be wired directly to the batteries through the ammeter shunt(s), if one is provided, and not through the master load (2) All legally required clearance and marker lights, headlights, and other disconnect switch. electrical devices. 13.4.6.4* A green “battery on” pilot light that is visible from the driver’s (3) The radio(s) at a duty cycle of 10 percent transmit and 90 percent position shall be provided. receive. (For calculation and testing purposes, a default value of 5 amperes continuous shall be used.) 13.4.7* A sequential switching device shall be permitted to energize the optical warning devices required in 13.3.3 and other high-current devices, provided the switching device energizes the electrical devices required in 13.3.3 first and within 5 seconds.

891 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 13.5 Starting Device. source, without a warning signal at a distance of 100 ft (30 m) from the geometric center of the apparatus. 13.5.1 An electrical starting device shall be provided for the engine. 13.8.11* Flash Rate. 13.5.2 Where the electrical starting device is operating under maximum load, the voltage drop of the conductors between the battery and the starting 13.8.11.1 The minimum flash rate of any optical source shall be 75 flashes device shall be in accordance with SAE J541, Voltage Drop for Starting per minute, and the minimum number of flashes at any measurement point Motor Circuits. shall be 150 flashes per minute. 13.6 Temperature Exposure. Any alternator, electrical starting device, 13.8.11.1.1 Steady burning nonflashing optical sources shall be permitted ignition wiring, distributor, or ignition coil shall be moisture resistant to be used. and protected such that it is not exposed to a temperature that exceeds the component manufacturer’s recommendations. 13.8.11.1.2 The optical energy provided by these nonflashing optical sources shall not be included in the calculations of the zone’s total optical 13.7 Electromagnetic Interference. power. 13.7.1* Electromagnetic interference suppression shall be provided, as 13.8.11.2 The flasher of any current-interrupted flashing device shall required, to satisfy the radiation limits specified in SAE J551/2, Test Limits otherwise meet the requirements of SAE J1690, Flashers. and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Vehicles, Motorboats, and Spark-Ignited Engine-Driven Devices. 13.8.12* Color of Warning Lights. 13.7.2 The purchaser shall indicate if testing and certification under SAE 13.8.12.1 Permissible colors or combinations of colors in each zone, within J551/2, Test Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance the constraints imposed by applicable laws and regulations, shall be as Characteristics of Vehicles, Motorboats, and Spark-Ignited Engine-Driven shown in Table 13.8.12.1. Devices, is required. 13.8 Optical Warning Devices. Each apparatus shall have a system of optical warning devices that meets or exceeds the requirements of this Table 13.8.12.1 Zone Colors section. 13.8.1* The optical warning system shall consist of an upper and lower Calling for Blocking warning level. Color Right-of-Way Right-of-Way 13.8.2 The requirements for each level shall be met by the warning devices Red Any zone Any zone in that particular level without consideration of the warning devices in the Blue Any zone Any zone other level. Yellow Any zone except A Any zone 13.8.3 For the purpose of defining and measuring the required optical performance, the upper and lower warning levels shall each be divided into White Any zone except C Not permitted four warning zones. 13.8.3.1 The four zones shall be determined by drawing lines through the geometric center of the apparatus at 45 degrees to a line lengthwise of the 13.8.12.2 All colors shall be as specified in SAE J578, Color Specification, apparatus through the geometric center. for red, blue, yellow, or white. 13.8.3.2 The four zones shall be designated A, B, C, and D in a clockwise 13.8.13* Requirements for Large Apparatus. direction with zone A to the front of the apparatus in accordance with Figure 13.8.3.2. 13.8.13.1 If the apparatus has a bumper-to-bumper length of 25 ft (7.6 m) or more or has an optical center on any optical warning device greater than 8 ft (2.4 m) above level ground, the requirements of 13.8.13.2 through 13.8.13.6 Figure 13.8.3.2 Warning Zones for Optical Warning Devices. shall apply. [Existing Figure 11-8.2, 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] 13.8.13.2 Upper-Level Optical Warning Devices. 13.8.4 Each optical warning device shall be installed on the apparatus and connected to the apparatus’s electrical system in accordance with the 13.8.13.2.1 The upper-level optical warning devices shall be mounted as requirements of this standard and the requirements of the manufacturer of high and as close to the corner points of the apparatus as is practical in order the device. to define the clearance lines of the apparatus. 13.8.5 A master optical warning device switch that energizes all of the 13.8.13.2.2 The upper-level optical warning devices shall not be mounted optical warning devices shall be provided. above the maximum height, specified by the device manufacturer, that gives an intensity value at 4 ft (1.2 m) above level ground and 100 ft (30.5 m) from 13.8.6 The optical warning system on the fire apparatus shall be capable of the optical warning device of less than 50 percent of that required at the two separate signaling modes during emergency operations. optical center. 13.8.6.1 One mode shall signal to drivers and pedestrians that the apparatus 13.8.13.3 Lower-Level Optical Warning Devices. is responding to an emergency and is calling for the right-of-way. 13.8.13.3.1 In order to define the clearance lines of the apparatus, the 13.8.6.2 One modeDRAFT shall signal that the apparatus is stopped and is blocking optical center of the lower-level optical warning devices in the front of the the right-of-way. vehicle shall be mounted forward of the front axle centerline and as close to the front corner points of the apparatus as is practical. 13.8.7 A switching system shall be provided that senses the position of the parking brake or the park position of an automatic transmission. 13.8.13.3.2 The optical center of the lower-level optical warning devices at the rear of the vehicle shall be mounted behind the rear axle centerline and 13.8.7.1 When the master optical warning system switch is closed and the as close to the rear corners of the apparatus as is practical. parking brake is released or the automatic transmission is not in park, the warning devices signaling the call for the right-of-way shall be energized. 13.8.13.3.3 The optical center of any lower-level device shall be between 18 in. and 62 in. (460 mm and 1600 mm) above level ground. 13.8.7.2 When the master optical warning system switch is closed and the parking brake is on or the automatic transmission is in park, the warning 13.8.13.4 Midship Optical Warning Devices. devices signaling the blockage of the right-of-way shall be energized. 13.8.13.4.1 A midship optical warning device shall be mounted on both the 13.8.7.3* The system shall be permitted to have a method of modifying the right and left sides of the apparatus if the distance between the front and rear two signaling modes. lower-level optical devices exceeds 25 ft (7.6 m) at the optical center. 13.8.8 The optical warning devices shall be constructed or arranged so as 13.8.13.4.2 Additional midship optical warning devices shall be required, to avoid the projection of light, either directly or through mirrors, into any where necessary, to maintain a horizontal distance between the centers of driving or crew compartment(s). adjacent lower-level optical warning devices of 25 ft (7.6 m) or less. 13.8.9 The front optical warning devices shall be placed so as to maintain 13.8.13.4.3 The optical center of any midship mounted optical warning the maximum possible separation from the headlights. device shall be between 18 in. and 62 in. (460 mm and 1600 mm) above level ground 13.8.10 The optical sources on each level shall be of sufficient number and arranged so that failure of a single optical source does not create a measurement point, in any zone on the same level as the failed optical 892 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 13.8.13.5* For each operating mode, the combined optical power of all the optical sources shall meet or exceed the zone total optical power requirements shown in Table 13.8.13.5.

Table 13.8.13.5 Minimum Optical Power Requirements for Large Apparatus

Mode of Operation Clearing Right-of-Way Blocking Right-of-Way At Any Point 5° Up At Any Point 5° At Any or 5° Down from H At Any Up or 5° Down Zone Level H H Point H H Point from H A Upper 1,000,000 10,000 3,500 400,000 10,000 3,500 B Upper 400,000 10,000 3,500 400,000 10,000 3,500 C Upper 400,000 10,000 3,500 800,000 10,000 3,500 D Upper 400,000 10,000 3,500 400,000 10,000 3,500 A Lower 150,000 3,750 1,300 150,000 3,750 1,300 B Lower 150,000 3,750 1,300 150,000 3,750 1,300 C Lower 150,000 3,750 1,300 150,000 3,750 1,300 D Lower 150,000 3,750 1,300 150,000 3,750 1,300 Notes: 1. All values are in candela-seconds/minute. 2. H = Horizontal plane passing through the optical center.

13.8.13.6 No individual measurement point shall be less than that shown in 13.8.14.3.3 The optical center of the device(s) shall be between 18 in. and Table 13.8.13.5. 48 in. (460 mm and 1220 mm) above level ground. 13.8.14* Requirements for Small Apparatus. 13.8.14.4 For each operating mode, the combined optical power of all the optical sources mounted on both the upper and lower levels shall meet or 13.8.14.1 If the apparatus has a bumper-to-bumper length of less than 25 exceed the zone’s total optical power requirements shown in Table 13.8.14.4. ft (7.6 m) and has the optical center of all optical warning devices at 8 ft (2.4 m) or less above level ground, the requirements of 13.8.14.2 through 13.8.14.5 No individual measurement point shall be less than that shown in 13.8.14.5 shall apply. Table 13.8.14.4. 13.8.14.2 Upper-Level Optical Warning Devices. 13.8.15 Tests of Optical Warning Devices. 13.8.14.2.1 The upper-level optical warning devices shall be mounted as 13.8.15.1 Mechanical and Environmental Test. high as practical, but not over 8 ft (2.4 m), at the optical center. 13.8.15.1.1 All optical warning devices shall be tested to the requirements 13.8.14.2.2 The upper-level optical warning devices shall be permitted to be of SAE J595, Flashing Warning Lamps for Authorized Emergency, combined in one or more enclosures and shall be permitted to be mounted on Maintenance, and Service Vehicles; SAE J1318, Gaseous Discharge the cab roof or any other convenient point. Warning Lamp for Authorized Emergency, Maintenance, and Service Vehicles; or SAE J1889, L.E.D. Lighting Devices. 13.8.14.3 Lower-Level Optical Warning Devices. 13.8.15.1.2 Optical devices and components designed for mounting only in 13.8.14.3.1 One or more lower-level optical warning devices shall be visible weatherproof, interior spaces shall be tested in conformance with SAE J845, from the front and side of the apparatus. Optical Warning Devices for Authorized Emergency, Maintenance, and Service Vehicles, and shall comply with the vibration test and the warpage 13.8.14.3.2 The optical center of the lower level optical warning devices test for plastic components. in the front of the vehicle shall be mounted forward of the front wheel centerline and DRAFTas close to the front corner points of the apparatus as practical. Table 13.8.14.4 Minimum Optical Power Requirements for Small Apparatus

Mode of Operation Clearing Right-of-Way Blocking Right-of-Way At Any At Any Point At Any At Any Point H 5° Up or 5° H Point 5° Up or 5° Zone H Point Down from H H Down from H A 1,000,000 10,000 3,500 400,000 10,000 3,500 B 200,000 8,000 3,500 200,000 8,000 3,500 C 400,000 10,000 3,500 800,000 10,000 3,500 D 200,000 8,000 3,500 200,000 8,000 3,500 Notes: 1. All values are in candela-seconds/minute. 2. H = Horizontal plane passing through the optical center.

893 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 13.8.15.1.3 Optical devices and components designed for mounting on the 13.9.1.1 The siren manufacturer shall certify the siren as meeting the exterior of the apparatus or in non-weatherproof interior spaces shall be requirements of SAE J1849, Emergency Vehicle Sirens. tested in conformance with SAE J845, and shall comply with the following performance requirements of that standard: 13.9.1.2* A means shall be provided to allow the activation of the siren within convenient reach of the driver. (1) Vibration 13.9.2 Where furnished, air horns, electric siren(s), and electronic siren (2) Moisture speaker(s) shall be mounted as low and as far forward on the apparatus as practical. (3) Dust 13.9.3 Audible warning equipment shall not be mounted on the roof of the (4) Corrosion apparatus. (5) High temperature 13.10 Work Lighting. (6) Low temperature 13.10.1 The work area immediately behind the vehicle shall be illuminated to a level of at least 3 footcandles (30 lx) within a 10 ft × 10 ft (3 m × 3 m) (7) Durability square to the rear of the vehicle. (8) Warpage 13.10.1.1 If a hose bed is provided, lighting on this hose bed shall be at a 13.8.15.2 Photometric Test Procedures for Optical Devices. level of 3 footcandles (30 lx) or higher. 13.8.15.2.1 Testing shall be performed by, or on behalf of, the device 13.10.1.2 Lateral hose beds (crosslays) that are permanently covered shall manufacturer to ensure compliance with the requirements of 13.8.15.2.2 not be required to be illuminated. through 13.8.15.2.5.2. 13.10.2 The fire apparatus shall be equipped with lighting that is capable of 13.8.15.2.1.1 The results of the testing shall be used by the apparatus providing illumination at a minimum level of 1 footcandle (10 lx) on ground builder or purchaser to determine compliance with this standard and shall be areas within 30 in. (800 mm) of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed available upon request from the optical warning device manufacturer. for personnel to climb onto the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level. 13.8.15.2.1.2 The goniometer, integrating photometer, and other equipment used to take the test measurements shall meet the requirements of SAE 13.10.2.1 Lighting designed to provide illumination on areas under the J1330, Photometry Laboratory Accuracy Guidelines. driver and crew riding area exits shall be activated automatically when the exit doors are opened. 13.8.15.2.2 The optical source shall be mounted in a goniometer and operated as it would be in a normal system application. 13.10.2.2 All other ground area lighting shall be switchable. (For pump control panel light requirement, see 16.9.2.) 13.8.15.2.2.1 The minimum distance between the light emitting surface of the source being tested and the front face of the photometer detector shall be 13.10.3 Interior Work Lighting. 59 ft (18 m). 13.10.3.1 The apparatus shall have sufficient lighting to provide a minimum 13.8.15.2.2.2 The goniometer shall be oriented and the integrating level of 1 foot-candle (10 lx) on all work surfaces, steps, and walkways. photometer shall be set to integrate light pulses from the source for 20 13.10.3.2 The apparatus shall have sufficient lighting to provide an average seconds. level of 3 foot-candle (30 lx) in the driving and crew compartments. 13.8.15.2.3 For all tests performed with the power applied, the lighting system, or component thereof, shall be operated at 12.8 volts ±0.1 volt for 13.10.3.3 Each engine compartment and pump compartment shall have a 12-volt rated equipment and 25.6 volts ±0.2 volt for 24-volt rated equipment light of at least 20 candlepower (250 lumens) 13.8.15.2.3.1 If the equipment is rated for operation on both 12 volts and 24 13.10.4 Equipment Compartment Lighting. volts, the tests shall be performed at both voltages. 13.10.4.1 Each enclosed tool and equipment compartment greater than 4 3 3 2 2 13.8.15.2.3.2 Voltage shall be measured at the point of entry into the ft (0.1 m ) in volume and having an opening greater than 144 in. (0.9 m ) component. shall have an average minimum level of lighting of 1 footcandle (10 lx). 13.8.15.2.4 The technique described in 13.8.15.2.2 through 13.8.15.2.2.2 13.10.4.2 Compartments such as ladder tunnels, pikepole storage tubes, shall be performed along the horizontal plane that passes through the optical or underbody compartments designed around the volumetric requirements center beginning at the optical center and repeated at 5-degree intervals to of specific equipment that can be removed without the use of article the left and right of the optical center throughout the active horizontal angle illumination shall not be required to have compartment lighting. of light emission of the optical source. 13.10.5 Switches for all work lighting shall be readily accessible. 13.8.15.2.5 Measurements shall be repeated at 5 degrees up and 5 degrees 13.10.6 The lights shall be arranged or protected to minimize accidental down from the horizontal plane that passes through the optical center, breakage. beginning at a point on a line passing through the optical center, and perpendicular to the horizontal plane and passing through the optical center. 13.10.7 All work lights mounted in wet locations shall tested in conformance with SAE J575, Test Methods and Equipment for Lighting 13.8.15.2.5.1 The measurements shall be repeated at 5-degree intervals to Devices and Components for Use on Vehicles Less Than 2032 mm in Overall the left and rightDRAFT of this line throughout the active horizontal angle of light Width, and shall comply with the following performance requirements of emission of the optical source. that standard: 13.8.15.2.5.2 If the optical warning device contains more than one optical (1) Vibration source, the test shall be repeated for each optical source. (2) Moisture 13.8.16* The apparatus manufacturer shall be permitted to demonstrate compliance of the warning system by one of the following methods: (3) Dust (1) Certification that the system was installed within the geometric (4) Corrosion parameters specified by the manufacturer of the system and referencing the optical source test reports provided by the manufacturer of the system (5) High temperature (2) Certification that a mathematical calculation based on test reports (6) Low temperature for individual optical sources provided by the manufacturer of the devices and performed by a qualified person demonstrates that the combination of (7) Durability individual devices as installed meets the requirements of this standard (8) Warpage (3) Actual measurement of the lighting system after installation on the 13.11 Hazard Light. apparatus 13.11.1 A red flashing or rotating light, located in the driving compartment, 13.9 Audible Warning Devices. shall be illuminated automatically whenever the apparatus’s parking brake is 13.9.1 Audible warning equipment in the form of at least one automotive not fully engaged and any of the following conditions exist: traffic horn and one electric or electronic siren shall be provided. (1) Any passenger or equipment compartment door is open (2) Any ladder or equipment rack is not in the stowed position 894 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (3) Stabilizer system not in its stowed position 13.14.3.4.4 An alarm sounded by excessive battery discharge, as detected by the system required in 13.3.4, or a system voltage of less than 11.8 volts dc (4) Powered light tower is extended for a 12-volt nominal system or 23.6 volts dc for a 24-volt nominal system, (5) Any other device that is permanently attached to the apparatus and is for more than 120 seconds, shall be considered a test failure. capable of opening, extending, or being deployed in a manner that is likely to 13.14.4 Low-Voltage Alarm Test. cause damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved 13.14.4.1 Following the completion of the tests described in 13.14.3.2 13.11.2* This section shall not apply to manually raised pole lights with an through 13.14.3.4, the engine shall be shut off. extension of less than 5 ft (1.5 m). 13.14.4.2 The total continuous electrical load shall be activated and shall 13.11.3 The hazard light shall be marked with a sign that reads: “Do Not continue to be applied until the excessive battery discharge alarm activates. Move Apparatus When Light Is On.” 13.14.4.3 With the load still applied, the battery voltage shall be measured at 13.12 Backup Alarm. An electric or electronic backup alarm shall be the battery terminals. provided that meets the Type D (87 dBa) requirements of SAE J994, Alarm — Backup — Electric, Laboratory Performance Testing. 13.14.4.4 A reading of less than 11.7 volts dc for a 12-volt nominal system or 23.4 volts dc for a 24-volt nominal system shall be considered a test failure. 13.13 Stop, Tail, and Directional Lights. 13.14.4.5 The battery system shall then be able to restart the engine. 13.13.1 The apparatus shall be equipped with all legally required stop, tail, and directional lights. 13.14.4.6 Failure to restart the engine shall be considered a test failure. 13.13.2 Directional lights shall be visible from the front, sides, and rear of 13.15 Documentation. At the time of delivery, the manufacturer shall the apparatus. provide the following: 13.13.3 On apparatus 30 ft (10 m) or longer in length, a turn signal shall (1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests be mounted approximately midway along the apparatus at approximately running board height. (2) A written load analysis, including the following: 13.13.4 Equipment shall not be mounted in a manner that obscures the stop, (a) The nameplate rating of the alternator tail, or directional lights. (b) The alternator rating under the conditions specified in 13.3.2 13.14 Electrical System Performance Tests. (c) Each component load specified in 13.3.3 comprising the minimum 13.14.1* The fire apparatus low-voltage electrical system shall be tested continuous load as required by this section and the test results certified by the apparatus manufacturer. The certification shall be delivered to the purchaser with the (d) Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, apparatus. determine the total connected load 13.14.2 Tests shall be performed when the air temperature is between 0°F (e) Each individual intermittent load and 110°F (–18°C and 43°C). Chapter 14 Driving and Crew Areas 13.14.3 Test Sequence. 14.1 General. 13.14.3.1 The three tests defined in 13.14.3.2 through 13.14.3.4 shall be 14.1.1 Each crew riding position shall be within a fully enclosed personnel performed in the order in which they appear. area. 13.14.3.1.1 Before each test, the batteries shall be fully charged until the voltage stabilizes at the voltage regulator set point and the lowest charge 14.1.2 A label that states the number of personnel the vehicle is designed to current is maintained for 10 minutes. carry shall be located in an area visible to the driver. 14.1.3* Each crew riding position shall be provided with a seat and an 13.14.3.1.2 Failure of any of these tests shall require a repeat of the approved seat belt designed to accommodate a person with and without sequence. heavy clothing. 13.14.3.2 Reserve Capacity Test. 14.1.3.1 All forward-facing seats adjacent to a side wall shall be provided 13.14.3.2.1 The engine shall be started and kept running until the engine with a Type 2 pelvic and upper torso restraint-style seat belt assembly and engine compartment temperatures are stabilized at normal operating conforming to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 209, temperatures and the battery system is fully charged. “Seat belt assemblies.” 13.14.3.2.2 The engine shall be shut off and the minimum continuous 14.1.3.2 All seat belt assembly anchorages shall conform to the Federal electrical load shall be activated for 10 minutes. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 210, “Seat belt assembly anchorages.” 13.14.3.2.3 All electrical loads shall be turned off prior to attempting to restart the engine. 14.1.3.3 Tiller seats shall have a lap belt. 13.14.3.2.4 The battery system shall then be capable of restarting the 14.1.3.4 Signs that read “Occupants must be seated and belted when engine. DRAFTapparatus is in motion” shall be visible from each seated position. 13.14.3.2.5 Failure to restart the engine shall be considered a test failure. 14.1.3.5 Each seating position that is not intended to be used during transit shall be individually labeled as follows: 13.14.3.3 Alternator Performance Test at Idle. WARNING: THIS SEAT IS NOT TO BE OCCUPIED WHILE VEHICLE 13.14.3.3.1 The minimum continuous electrical load shall be activated with IS IN MOTION. the engine running at idle speed. 14.1.4 Materials used within the driving and crew compartment shall 13.14.3.3.2 The engine temperature shall be stabilized at normal operating comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 302, temperature. “Flammability of interior materials.” 13.14.3.3.3 The battery system shall be tested to detect the presence of 14.1.5 All interior crew and driving compartment door handles shall be battery discharge current. designed and installed to protect against accidental or inadvertent opening. 13.14.3.3.4 The detection of battery discharge current shall be considered a 14.1.6 At any seat location, the maximum noise level shall be 90 dBA test failure. without any warning devices in operation, as measured by the test procedure defined in 49 CFR 393.94(c), “Vehicular interior noise levels test procedure,” 13.14.3.4 Alternator Performance Test at Full Load. except that the test shall be performed with the vehicle traveling at a steady 13.14.3.4.1 The total continuous electrical load shall be activated with the speed of 45 mph (72 kph) on a level, paved, smooth surface road. engine running up to the engine manufacturer’s governed speed. 14.1.7 Seat Head Height. 13.14.3.4.2 The test duration shall be a minimum of 2 hours. 14.1.7.1* The minimum vertical dimension from the seat H-point to the 13.14.3.4.3 Activation of the load management system shall be permitted ceiling for each belted seating position shall be as follows. during this test.

895 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (1) For suspension style seats with independent height adjustment, the 14.2.3 The control of the cab tilt mechanism shall be accomplished clear of minimum vertical dimension shall be 37 in (940 mm) measured with the the cab travel area while still having the travel area in clear view. height adjustment in its lowest position and the suspension inflated and/or raised to the upper limit of its travel. 14.2.3.1 A mechanical means shall be provided to hold the cab in a fully raised position. (2) For suspension style seats without independent height adjustment, the minimum vertical dimension shall be 37 in (940 mm) measured with the 14.2.3.2 If the cab is able to be raised to a defined intermediate position, a suspension inflated and/or raised to the upper limit of its travel. mechanical means shall also be provided to hold the cab in that intermediate position. (3) For non-suspension style seats, the minimum vertical dimension shall be 35 in (882 mm) measured with the seat adjusted to its lowest position. 14.3* Driving Compartment. 14.1.7.2 When independent vertical and or horizontal seat adjustment is 14.3.1* A fully enclosed driving compartment with seating capacity for not provided, it shall be fully adjustable within 10 seconds. less than two persons shall be provided except at a tiller operator’s driving position. (See 14.4.1.) 14.1.7.3 The seat to ceiling height shall be measured at the lowest surface in the area immediately above the projected area of the seat with any soft 14.3.2 Driver’s Seat. headliner material depressed by hand. 14.3.2.1 The driver’s seat shall be readily adjustable by the driver. 14.1.8 Seat Arrangement. 14.3.2.2 The seat shall be arranged to accommodate a human conforming to 14.1.8.1 Each seating space shall have a minimum width of 22 in. (560 mm) at least the fifth percentile female through 95th percentile male as defined in at the shoulder level. SAE J833, Human Physical Dimensions. 14.1.8.2 Seat cushions shall be a minimum of 18 in. (460 mm) in width and 14.3.3* The passenger side mirror shall be so mounted that the driver has 15 in. (380 mm) from the front of the cushion to the face of the seat back. a clear view of the mirror when the passengers are in their normal seated positions. 14.1.8.3 A back cushion that extends from the face of the seat vertically at least 18 in. (460 mm) and that is a minimum of 18 in. (460 mm) wide shall 14.3.4 Instrumentation and Controls. be provided. 14.3.4.1 The following instrumentation and controls shall be mounted in the 14.1.8.3.1 The back cushion shall be permitted to be split to accommodate a driving compartment and shall be identified and visible to the driver while fully recessed SCBA and bracket. seated: 14.1.8.3.2 Where the back cushion is split, a headrest shall be supplied. (1) Speedometer 14.1.9 SCBA Mounting. (2) Tachometer 14.1.9.1 Where SCBA units are mounted within a driving or crew (3) Odometer compartment, a positive automatically latching mechanical means of holding the SCBA device in its stowed position shall be provided. (4) Oil pressure indicator or gauge 14.1.9.2 The bracket holding device and its mounting shall retain the SCBA (5) Coolant temperature indicator or gauge unit when subjected to a 9-G force and shall be installed in accordance with (6) Automatic transmission temperature indicator or gauge, if applicable the bracket manufacturer’s requirements. (7) Voltmeter 14.1.9.3 Mounting devices shall be of a type that positively latch around the cylinder (8) Hazard indicator light (see Section 13.11) 14.1.9.4 If the SCBA unit is mounted in a seatback, the release mechanism (9) Air pressure gauge(s), if applicable shall be accessible to the user while seated and without having to reach behind them. (10) Turn signal control and indicator lights 14.1.10 Equipment Mounting. (11) Headlight/DOT light switch 14.1.10.1 All equipment required to be used during an emergency response (12) High beam headlight switch and indicator shall be securely fastened. (13) Fuel level gauge(s) 14.1.10.2 All equipment not required to be used during an emergency response, with the exception of SCBA units, shall not be mounted in a (14) Master ignition switch (if a key is provided, it shall be unable to be driving or crew area unless it is contained in a fully enclosed and latched removed from the driving compartment interior) compartment capable of containing the contents when a 9-G force is applied (15) Heater/defroster controls in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle or a 3-G force is applied in any other direction, or the equipment is mounted in a bracket(s) that can contain the (16) Warning lights and siren switches equipment when the equipment is subjected to those same forces. (17) Master electrical load switch 14.1.11 Steps and access handrails that comply with 15.7.1 through 15.7.3 and Section 13.8 shall be provided as necessary for access to all driving and (18) “Battery on” indicator light crew compartments.DRAFT (19) Windshield wipers and windshield washer control 14.1.12 Where the crew compartment and the driving compartment are separated, prohibiting direct voice communication, a two-way buzzer or (20) PTO-engaged indicator, if applicable two-way voice intercom system shall be provided. (21) Height of vehicle sign 14.1.13 Means of Escape. (22) Pump controls, if applicable 14.1.13.1* Any interior area to be occupied by personnel shall have a 14.3.4.2 Controls and switches that are expected to be operated by the driver minimum of two means of escape. while the apparatus is in motion shall be within convenient reach for the 14.1.13.2 Each opening shall be large enough for a person to escape through driver. the opening. 14.4 Tractor-Drawn Vehicles. Where a tractor-drawn vehicle with tillered 14.2 Cab Tilt Systems. If the apparatus has a cab tilt system, the system steering is provided, the requirements of this section also shall apply. shall meet the requirements of 14.2.1 through 14.2.3.2. 14.4.1 A fully enclosed tiller operator’s compartment with seating for one 14.2.1 If the operation of the tilt cab system is accomplished by hydraulic person shall be provided at the rear wheel’s steering position. means, the system shall be equipped with devices to prevent the motion of 14.4.2 No side compartmentation shall be installed that obscures the ability the cab in the event of any hydraulic hose failure. of the tiller operator to see the tiller axle fender area. 14.2.2 If the cab has a powered tilting system, the system shall be 14.4.3* Seat Arrangement. interlocked to operate only when the parking brake is engaged and shall be configured so that the failure of a single component will not result in 14.4.3.1 The manufacturer shall provide a seat with an approved seat belt unintentional tilting of the cab. within the enclosure.

896 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 14.4.3.2 The seating space shall be a minimum of 22 in. (560 mm) in width 15.4.7 The outward ends of the equipment rack that protrude beyond the at the shoulder level. body of the apparatus shall have reflective material to indicate a hazard or obstruction. 14.4.3.3 The seat cushion shall be a minimum of 18 in. (460 mm) in width and 15 in. (380 mm) from the front of the cushion to the face of the seat 15.5* SCBA Storage. Storage of complete SCBA units or SCBA cylinders back. shall be arranged so as to prevent damage, injury, or abrasion to the SCBA from other equipment stored in the general area. 14.4.3.4 A back cushion shall be provided. 15.5.1 If a SCBA unit or cylinder is stored within a driving or crew 14.4.3.5 The seat shall have an adjustment range of at least 3 in. (76 mm) compartment, the mounting shall comply with the requirements of Section from front to rear and be adjustable by the tiller operator. 15.5 and 14.1.9. 14.4.4 A warning indicator in the driving compartment shall activate if 15.5.2 If the SCBA cylinder is mounted in a vertical position with the valve the parking brake is released and the tiller operator is not signaling his/her down, it shall be supported with a brace or yoke under the cylinder or valve presence. area to prevent downward movement. 14.4.5 Communications. 15.5.3 The holding or clamping device shall not injure, wear, scrape, or otherwise affect the SCBA unit or cylinder, including damage to the paint or 14.4.5.1 A two-way buzzer system or a two-way voice intercom shall be reflective finish, while the cylinder is being placed in, stored in, or removed provided for communication between the driver and the tiller operator. from the holder. 14.4.5.2 The communication system shall be operable without the tiller 15.5.4 The SCBA storage area shall be a ventilated, dry area away from all operator having to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. heat sources that could damage the SCBA (e.g., mufflers, engines). 14.4.6 A heater or ventilation system and defroster shall be provided. 15.5.5* Vertical Storage of SCBA Cylinders in Tubes. 14.4.7 A windshield wiper and washer fluid system shall be provided. 15.5.5.1 The base of the storage tube shall have a rubber, plastic, or similar 14.4.8 The following instrumentation and controls shall be mounted in the device to prevent wear on the cylinder and to prevent damage if the cylinder tiller operator’s compartment and shall be identified and visible to the tiller is accidentally dropped into the storage position. operator while seated: 15.5.5.2 Each storage tube shall have a drain to prevent accumulation of (1) Heater/defroster controls moisture. (2) Turn signal indicator lights 15.5.6* Horizontal Storage of SCBA Cylinders. (3) Two-way buzzer signal switch 15.5.6.1 The storage rack or tube assembly shall be designed to prevent the cylinder from accidentally sliding out from the storage rack or tube (4) Windshield wiper and washer fluid control and shall be installed so as to keep the cylinder from hitting or rubbing on compartment doors by preventing movement or shifting when in transit. 14.4.9 Controls and switches that are expected to be operated by the tiller operator while the apparatus is in motion shall be within convenient reach 15.5.6.2 The rear wall of each SCBA storage area or tube shall be covered for that operator. with a rubber, plastic, or similar material to prevent wear on cylinders. 14.4.10 Exterior rearview mirrors shall be provided at the tiller position. 15.6 Pump and Plumbing Access. 15.6.1 One or more doors or panels that open or are removable without Chapter 15 Body, Compartments, and Equipment Mounting the use of tools shall be provided to allow visual inspection or access for checking the fire pump and plumbing area. 15.1 Compartmentation. 15.6.2 The clear opening shall have no one dimension measure less than 18 15.1.1* Any enclosed external compartments shall be weather resistant, in. (460 mm). ventilated, and have provisions for drainage of moisture. 15.6.3 Additional door(s) or panel(s) that require no more than standard 15.1.2 All electrical junctions or wiring within compartments shall be tools to open or remove shall be provided for access to the pump and protected from mechanical damage resulting from equipment stored in the plumbing area. compartment. 15.6.4 All valves, gauges, controls, and other plumbing equipment shall be 15.2* Radio Space. A protected space or compartment shall be provided for accessible for service and replacement. the installation of radio equipment. 15.6.5* The clear space required by the pump manufacturer to perform in- 15.3 Equipment Containment. truck overhaul and maintenance shall be provided. 15.3.1* Equipment holders or compartments shall be provided for all tools, 15.7 Stepping, Standing, and Walking Surfaces. equipment, and other items that are on the apparatus. 15.7.1* Steps, platforms, or permanently attached ladders shall be provided 15.3.2* Equipment holders shall be attached and shall be designed so that so that fire fighters have access to all working and storage areas of the equipment remains in place under all vehicle operating conditions. apparatus. 15.3.3 All toolsDRAFT and equipment shall be readily accessible. 15.7.1.1 The maximum stepping height shall not exceed 18 in. (460 mm), with the exception of the ground to first step, which shall not exceed 24 in. 15.4 Powered Equipment Racks. When a powered equipment rack is (610 mm). provided, it shall meet the requirements of this section. 15.7.1.1.1 A permanently attached supplemental access/egress means from 15.4.1 The equipment rack shall be constructed of materials that are capable the ground to these steps, platforms, or permanently attached ladders shall of carrying the equipment that is intended to be mounted on the equipment be provided where the ground to the first step, platform, or ladder exceeds 24 rack. in. (610 mm). 15.4.2 A lock shall be provided that will retain the equipment rack in the 15.7.1.1.2 The supplemental access means shall consist of a step(s), road travel position when the vehicle is in motion. platform(s), or ladder(s). 15.4.3 An interlock shall be provided to prevent operation of the equipment 15.7.1.1.3 The ground to first step height shall be determined with the rack unless the apparatus parking brake has been activated. apparatus on level ground. 15.4.4 Controls shall be provided in a position where the operator can 15.7.1.1.4 Where the apparatus is supplied with stabilizers, the ground to visually follow the travel of the equipment rack. first step height shall be determined with the apparatus on level ground and the stabilizers deployed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions 15.4.5 A visual signal shall be provided at the driver’s position to indicate so that the aerial device meets the stability requirements of Section 20.21. that the equipment rack is in motion, or in the down position, and that the parking brake is not engaged. 15.7.1.2* All steps shall have a minimum area of 35 in.2 (22,580 mm2), shall be of such a shape that a 5-in. (125-mm) diameter disk does not overlap 15.4.6 Flashing lights facing the front and rear shall be provided on the any side when placed on the step, and shall be arranged to provide at least equipment rack and shall be illuminated whenever the equipment rack is in 8 in. (200 mm) of clearance between the leading edge of the step and any the down position. obstruction.

897 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 15.7.1.3 All platforms shall have a minimum depth of 8 in. (200 mm) from 15.9.2.2 The paint or coating, including any primer, shall be applied in the leading edge of the platform to any obstruction. accordance with the paint or coating manufacturer’s recommendation. 15.7.1.4 All ladders shall have at least 7 in. (175 mm) of clearance between 15.9.2.3 The purchaser shall specify if nonferrous body components are any rung and the body or other obstruction. to be painted and any lettering, numbering, or decorative striping is to be furnished. 15.7.2 All steps, platforms, or ladders shall sustain a minimum static load of 500 lb (200 kg) without deformation. 15.9.3 A reflective stripe(s) shall be affixed to the perimeter of the apparatus. 15.7.3* Slip Resistance. 15.9.3.1 The stripe or combination of stripes shall be a minimum of 4 in. 15.7.3.1 All materials used for exterior surfaces designated as stepping, (100 mm) in total width and shall conform to the minimum requirements standing, and walking areas and all interior steps shall have a minimum slip of ASTM D 4956, Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for resistance in any orientation of 0.68 when tested wet using the English XL Traffic Control, Type I, Class 1 or Class 3. tester in accordance with ASTM F 1679, Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT), or 0.52 when tested wet using the 15.9.3.2 At least 50 percent of the cab and body length on each side, at least Brungraber Mark II Tester in accordance with ASTM F 1677, Standard Test 50 percent of the width of the rear, and at least 25 percent of the width of the Method for Using a Portable Inclinable Articulated Strut Slip Test (PIAST). front of the apparatus shall have the reflective material affixed to it. 15.7.3.2 All materials used for interior floors shall have a minimum slip 15.9.3.3 A graphic design meeting the reflectivity requirements of this resistance in any orientation of 0.58 when tested dry using the English XL paragraph shall be permitted to replace all or part of the required striping tester in accordance with ASTM F 1679, Standard Test Method for Using material if the design or combination thereof covers at least the same a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT), or 0.47 when tested dry using the perimeter length(s) required above. Brungraber Mark II Tester in accordance with ASTM F 1677, Standard Test Method for Using a Portable Inclinable Articulated Strut Slip Tester 15.10* Hose Storage. If a hose storage area(s) is provided, it shall comply (PIAST). with this section. 15.7.3.3 A standard Neolite® test sensor shall be used with both the English 15.10.1* The hose storage area(s) shall be reinforced at the corners. XL tester and the Brungraber Mark II tester. 15.10.2 The bottom shall be made of removable sections fabricated from 15.7.3.4 Sampling Strategy. noncorrosive materials. 15.7.3.4.1 For uniformly patterned materials, at least 16 readings shall be 15.10.3 The bottom shall be constructed to prevent the accumulation of taken on each sample. water and allow ventilation to aid in drying of hose. 15.7.3.4.1.1 Each reading shall be taken 90 degrees clockwise from the 15.10.4 The interior shall be smooth and free from all projections, such as previous orientation, resulting in at least four readings in each orientation. nuts, sharp angles, or brackets, that might cause damage to the hose. 15.7.3.4.1.2 The readings shall be averaged and reported as the slip 15.10.5 Reels, handrails, ladders, and equipment holders shall be placed so resistance for the material. as not to obstruct the laying or removal of hose from the storage area. 1 15.7.3.4.2 For directionally patterned materials, at least 32 readings shall be 15.10.6 Any hose storage area designed to carry 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger taken on each sample. hose shall be a minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m) in length. 15.7.3.4.2.1 Each reading shall be taken 45 degrees clockwise from the 15.11 Receivers and Anchors for Rope and Removable Winches. previous orientation, resulting in at least four readings in each orientation. 15.11.1 Receivers or anchors installed at any location on the apparatus for 15.7.3.4.2.2 The four readings in each direction shall be averaged and use as removable winch anchors shall be designed and affixed to provide at reported as the slip resistance for the material in that orientation. least a 1.5 to 1 safety factor over the load rating of the removable winch. 15.7.3.5 The contractor shall supply at the time of delivery of the apparatus 15.11.2 Receivers or anchors installed at any location on the apparatus for a certification that all materials used for exterior surfaces designated as use with rope operations shall be designed and affixed to the apparatus to stepping, standing, and walking areas, all interior steps, and all interior provide at least a 5 to 1 safety factor over the breaking strength of the rope floors meet the requirements of 15.7.3. that will be used. 15.7.3.6 Where the fuel fill is located at or near a stepping surface, the 15.11.3 A label shall be placed on or near each receiver or anchor that states surface shall be construction of an open grate-type material to facilitate the maximum winch load rating and the maximum rope load rating that the draining of accidentally spilled fuel to lessen any slipping hazard. receiver or anchor can support. 15.7.4 A label shall be located on the vehicle at the rear step areas and at any 15.12 Slip-on Fire-Fighting Module. If the pump, piping, and tank are cross walkways to warn personnel that riding in or on these areas while the built as a slip-on, self-contained unit, it shall meet the requirements of this vehicle is in motion is prohibited. section. 15.8* Access Handrails. 15.12.1 The major components of the slip-on unit, pump, pumping engine, tank, electrical, and plumbing shall meet the requirements of the applicable 15.8.1 Access handrails shall be provided at each entrance to a driving or chapters of this standard covering those components. crew compartment and at each position where steps or ladders for climbing are located. 15.12.2* The weight of a completed skid-mounted fire-fighting package, DRAFTincluding fuel, oil, and standard equipment carried, shall be distributed on 15.8.2 Access handrails shall be constructed of, or covered with, a slip- the frame so as to provide a balanced unit when it is lifted or moved. resistant, noncorrosive material. 15.12.3 Intake and discharge piping shall not interfere with the routine 5 15.8.3 Handrails shall be between 1 in. and 1 /8 in. (25 mm and 42 mm) maintenance of the pump, engine, or auxiliary systems and shall not unduly in diameter and have a minimum clearance between the handrails and any restrict the servicing of these components. surface of at least 2 in. (52 mm). 15.12.4 Mounting. 15.8.4* All handrails shall be designed and mounted to reduce the possibility of hand slippage and to avoid snagging of hose, equipment, or 15.12.4.1 The slip-on unit shall be mounted in a manner that allows access clothing. to the engine, pump, and auxiliary systems for routine maintenance. 15.9 Metal Finish. 15.2.4.2 The slip-on unit shall be removable using common hand tools. 15.9.1 Where dissimilar metals are to be mounted together, the mounting 15.12.4.3 The slip-on unit shall be mounted in a manner that prevents base material shall have an isolation barrier prior to assembly to prevent damage by vibration. dissimilar metal reaction. 15.12.4.4 Special anchorage shall be provided on the vehicle chassis and 15.9.2* Painting. on the skid-mounted fire-fighting package to secure the skid-mounted fire- fighting package to the vehicle chassis. 15.9.2.1 All exposed ferrous metal surfaces that are not plated or stainless steel shall be cleaned and prepared and shall be painted or coated. 15.12.4.5 The anchorage described in 15.12.4.4 shall be designed to prevent movement of the unit during rapid acceleration or deceleration.

898 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Chapter 16 Fire Pump and Associated Equipment 16.2.3.2.4* Where pumps are of the parallel/series type, they shall complete the requirements of 16.2.3.2.1 through 16.2.3.2.3 in both parallel and series 16.1 Application. If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the operation. provisions of this chapter shall apply. 16.2.3.3 Vacuum. 16.2 Design and Performance Requirements. 16.2.3.3.1 The completed pumping system shall be capable of developing a vacuum of 22 in. Hg (75 kPa) at altitudes up to 2000 ft (600 m) by means of 16.2.1 Fire Pump Rated Capacity. the pump priming device and sustaining the vacuum for at least 5 minutes 16.2.1.1 The fire pump shall be mounted on the apparatus and shall have a with a loss not to exceed 10 in. Hg (34 kPa). minimum rated capacity of 250 gpm (1000 L/min) at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net 16.2.3.3.2 The requirement in 16.2.3.3.1 shall be met with all intake valves pump pressure. open, all intakes capped or plugged, all discharge caps removed, and without 16.2.1.2 Pumps of higher capacity shall be rated at one of the capacities the use of the pump primer during the 5-minute period. specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a). 16.2.4 Pump Suction Capability. 16.2.2 Where the apparatus is designed for pump and roll operations, the 16.2.4.1* The pump manufacturer shall certify that the fire pump is capable minimum performance shall be 20 gpm (76 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) at an of pumping 100 percent of rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump apparatus ground speed on level ground of 2 mph (3.2 kmph). pressure from draft through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose with a strainer 16.2.3 Pumping System Capability. attached under the following conditions: 16.2.3.1 The pumping system provided shall be capable of delivering the (1) An altitude of 2000 ft (600 m) above sea level following: (2) Atmospheric pressure of 29.9 in. Hg (101 kPa) (corrected to sea level) (1) 100 percent of rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure (3) Water temperature of 60°F (15.6°C) (2) 70 percent of rated capacity at 200 psi (1400 kPa) net pump pressure (4) Suction hose size, number of hose, and lift as indicated in Table (3) 50 percent of rated capacity at 250 psi (1700 kPa) net pump pressure 16.2.4.1(a) 16.2.3.2 When dry, the pump system shall be capable of meeting the (5) Friction and entrance loss in suction hose, including strainer, as given requirements of 16.2.3.2.1 through 16.2.3.2.4. in Table 16.2.4.1(b) or Table 16.2.4.1(c) 16.2.3.2.1 Where pumps are rated at less than 1500 gpm (6000 L/min), they 16.2.4.2* The pump manufacturer shall certify that the pump is capable of shall be capable of taking suction through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose under pumping rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure at any of the conditions specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) for the rated capacity of the the following special conditions when these conditions are specified by the pump and discharging water in not more than 30 seconds. purchaser: 16.2.3.2.2 Where pumps are of 1500 gpm (6000 L/min) or larger capacity, (1) At an elevation above 2000 ft (600 m) they shall be capable of taking suction through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose under the conditions specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) for the rated capacity of (2) At lifts higher than those listed in Table 16.2.4.1(a) or through more the pump and discharging water in not more than 45 seconds. than 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose, or both 16.2.3.2.3 Where the pump system includes an auxiliary 4-in. (100- (3) For pumps having a rated capacity of 1500 gpm (6000 L/min) or larger, mm) or larger intake pipe having a volume of 1 ft3 (0.03 m3) or more, an through a single suction hose only, or through the number of hose listed in additional 15 seconds beyond that allowed in 16.2.3.2.1 and 16.2.3.2.2 shall Table 16.2.4.1(a) attached to one side of the apparatus only be permitted.

Table 16.2.4.1(a) Suction Hose Size, Number of Suction Lines, and Lift for Fire Pumps Rated Maximum Suction Maximum Number of Maximum Capacity Hose Size Suction Lines† Lift gpm L/min in. mm ft m 250 1,000 3 75 1 10 3 300 1,100 3 75 1 10 3 350 1,300 4 100 1 10 3 500 2,000 4 100 1 10 3 1 750 3,000 4 /2 110 1 10 3 1,000DRAFT4,000 5 125 1 10 3 1,250 5,000 6 150 1 10 3 1,500 6,000 6 150 2 10 3 1,750 7,000 6 150 2 8 2.4 2,000 8,000 6 150 2 6 1.8 2,250 9,000 8 200 3 6 1.8 2,500 10,000 8 200 3 6 1.8 3,000 12,000 8 200 4 6 1.8 †Where more than one suction line is used, all suction lines do not have to be the same hose size.

899 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table 16.2.4.1(b) Friction and Entrance Loss in 20 ft of Suction Hose, Including Strainer (inch-pound units) Flow Rate Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) (gpm) 1 1 One 3 in. One 3 /2 in. One 4 in. One 4 /2 in. ft in. ft in. ft in. ft in. water Hg water Hg water Hg water Hg 250 5.2 (1.2) 4.6 175 2.6 (0.6) 2.3 125 1.4 (0.3) 1.2

300 7.5 (1.7) 6.6 3.5 (0.8) 3.1 210 3.8 (0.8) 3.4 1.8 (0.4) 1.6 150 1.9 (0.4) 1.7 0.9 (0.2) 0.8

350 4.8 (1.1) 4.2 2.5 (0.7) 2.1 245 2.4 (0.5) 2.1 1.2 (0.3) 1.1 175 1.2 (0.3) 1.1 0.7 (0.1) 0.6

500 5.0 (1.3) 4.4 3.6 (0.8) 3.2 350 2.5 (0.7) 2.1 1.8 (0.4) 1.6 250 1.3 (0.4) 1.1 0.9 (0.3) 0.8

Table 16.2.4.1(b) Continued Flow Rate Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) (gpm) 1 1 One 4 in. One 4 /2 in. One 5 in. One 6 in. Two 4 /2 in. ft in. ft in. ft in. ft in. Ft in. water Hg water Hg water Hg water Hg water Hg 750 11.4 (2.9) 9.8 8.0 (1.6) 7.1 4.7 (0.9) 4.2 1.9 (0.4) 1.7 525 5.5 (1.5) 4.9 3.9 (0.8) 3.4 2.3 (0.5) 2.0 0.9 (0.2) 0.8 375 2.8 (0.7) 2.5 2.0 (0.4) 1.8 1.2 (0.2) 1.1 0.5 (0.1) 0.5

1000 14.5 (2.8) 12.5 8.4 (1.6) 7.4 3.4 (0.6) 3.0 700 7.0 (1.4) 6.2 4.1 (0.8) 3.7 1.7 (0.3) 1.5 500 3.6 (0.8) 3.2 2.1 (0.4) 1.9 0.9 (0.2) 0.8

1250 13.0 (2.4) 11.5 5.2 (0.9) 4.7 5.5 (1.2) 4.9 875 DRAFT 6.5 (1.2) 5.7 2.6 (0.5) 2.3 2.8 (0.7) 2.5 625 3.3 (0.7) 2.9 1.3 (0.3) 1.1 1.4 (0.3) 1.2

1500 7.6 (1.4) 6.7 8.0 (1.6) 7.1 1050 3.7 (0.7) 3.3 3.9 (0.8) 3.4 750 1.9 (0.4) 1.7 2.0 (0.4) 1.8

1750 10.4 (1.8) 9.3 11.0 (2.2) 9.7 1225 5.0 (0.9) 4.6 5.3 (1.1) 4.7 875 2.6 (0.5) 2.3 2.8 (0.6) 2.5

2000 14.5 (2.8) 12.5 1400 7.0 (1.4) 6.2 1000 3.6 (0.8) 3.2

900 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table 16.2.4.1(b) Continued Flow Rate Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) (gpm) Two 5 in. Two 6 in. Three 6 in. One 8 in. Two 8 in. ft in. ft in. ft in. ft in. ft in. water Hg water Hg water Hg water Hg water Hg 1500 4.7 (0.9) 4.2 1.9 (0.4) 1.7

1050 2.3 (0.5) 2.0 0.9 (0.3) 0.8 750 1.2 (0.2) 1.1 0.5 (0.1) 0.5

1750 6.5 (1.2) 5.7 2.6 (0.5) 2.3 1225 3.1 (0.7) 2.7 1.2 (0.3) 1.1 875 1.6 (0.3) 1.4 0.7 (0.2) 0.6

2000 8.4 (1.6) 7.4 3.4 (0.6) 3.0 4.3 (1.1) 3.8 1400 4.1 (0.8) 3.7 1.7 (0.3) 1.5 2.0 (0.6) 1.8 1000 2.1 (0.4) 1.9 0.9 (0.2) 0.8 1.0 (0.3) 0.9

2250 10.8 (2.2) 9.5 4.3 (0.8) 3.8 2.0 (0.5) 1.8 5.6 (1.4) 5.0 1.2 (0.4) 1.1 1575 5.3 (1.1) 4.7 2.2 (0.4) 1.9 1.0 (0.2) 0.9 2.5 (0.9) 2.2 0.6 (0.2) 0.5 1125 2.8 (0.5) 2.5 1.1 (0.2) 1.0 0.5 (0.1) 0.5 1.2 (0.4) 1.1 0.3 (0.1) 0.3

2500 13.0 (2.4) 11.5 5.2 (0.9) 4.7 2.3 (0.6) 2.0 7.0 (1.7) 6.2 1.5 (0.4) 1.3 1750 6.5 (1.2) 5.7 2.6 (0.5) 2.3 1.2 (0.2) 1.1 3.2 (1.0) 2.8 0.8 (0.2) 0.7 1250 3.3 (0.7) 2.9 1.3 (0.3) 1.1 0.6 (0.1) 0.5 1.5 (0.4) 1.3 0.4 (0.1) 0.4

3000 7.6 (1.4) 6.9 3.4 (0.6) 3.0 10.1 (3.0) 9.0 2.3 (0.6) 2.1 2100 3.7 (0.7) 3.4 1.7 (0.3) 1.5 4.7 (1.3) 4.2 1.0 (0.3) 0.9 1500 1.9 (0.4) 1.7 0.9 (0.2) 0.8 2.3 (0.7) 2.1 0.6 (0.2) 0.5 Note: FiguresDRAFT in parentheses indicate increment to be added or subtracted for each 10 ft of hose greater than or less than 20 ft.

901 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table 16.2.4.1(c) Friction and Entrance Loss in 6 m of Suction Hose, Including Strainer (metric units)

Flow Rate Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) (L/min) One 75 mm One 90 mm One 100 mm One 110 mm Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa 1000 1.6 (0.04) 16

700 0.8 (0.02) 8

500 0.4 (0.01) 4

1100 .22 (0.05) 22 1.1 (0.02) 10 770 .11 (0.02) 12 0.6 (0.01) 5 550 .06 (0.01) 6 0.3 (0.01) 3

1300 1.5 (0.03) 14 0.7 (0.02) 7 910 0.7 (0.01) 7 0.4 (0.01) 4 650 0.4 (0.01) 4 0.2 (0.01) 2

2000 1.5 (0.04) 15 1.1 (0.02) 11 1400 0.7 (0.02) 7 0.5 (0.01) 5 1000 0.4 (0.01) 4 0.3 (0.01) 3

Table 16.2.4.1(c) Continued

Suction Hose Size (inside diameter)

Flow Rate One 100 mm One 110 mm One 125 mm One 150 mm Two 110 mm. (L/min) Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa

3000 3.5 (0.09) 33 2.4 (0.05) 24 1.4 (0.03) 14 0.6 (0.01) 6

2100 1.7 (0.05) 17 1.2 (0.02) 11 0.7 (0.01) 7 0.3 (0.01) 3

1500 0.9 (0.02) 8 0.6 (0.01) 6 0.4 (0.01) 4 0.2 (0.01) 2

4000 4.4 (0.08) 42 2.6 (0.05) 25 1.0 (0.02) 10 2800 2.1 (0.04) 21 1.2 (0.02) 13 0.5 (0.01) 5 2000 1.1 (0.02) 11 0.6 (0.01) 6 0.3 (0.01) 3

5000 4.0 (0.07) 39 1.6 (0.03) 16 1.7 (0.04) 17 3500 DRAFT2.0 (0.04) 19 0.8 (0.02) 8 0.9 (0.02) 8 2500 1.0 (0.02) 10 0.4 (0.01) 4 0.4 (0.01) 4

6000 2.3 (0.04) 23 2.4 (0.05) 24 4200 1.1 (0.02) 11 1.2 (0.02) 12 3000 0.6 (0.01) 6 0.6 (0.01) 6

7000 3.2 (0.05) 31 3.6 (0.07) 33 4900 1.5 (0.03) 16 1.6 (0.03) 16 3500 0.8 (0.02) 8 0.9 (0.02) 8

8000 4.4 (0.08) 42 5600 2.1 (0.04) 21 4000 1.1 (0.02) 11

902 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table 16.2.4.1(c) Continued

Flow Rate Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) (L/min) Two 125 mm Two 150 mm Three 150 mm One 200 mm Two 200 mm Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa Meters water kPa 6000 1.4 (0.03) 14 0.6 (0.01) 6 4200 0.7 (0.02) 7 0.3 (0.01) 3 3000 0.4 (0.01) 4 0.2 (0.01) 2

7000 2.0 (0.04) 19 0.8 (0.02) 8 4900 0.9 (0.02) 9 0.4 (0.01) 4 3500 0.5 (0.01) 5 0.2 (0.01) 2

8000 2.6 (0.05) 25 1.0 (0.02) 10 1.3 (0.03) 13 5600 1.2 (0.02) 13 0.5 (0.01) 5 0.6 (0.02) 6 4000 0.6 (0.01) 6 0.3 (0.01) 3 0.3 (0.01) 3

9000 3.3 (0.07) 32 1.3 (0.02) 13 .06 (0.01) 6 1.7 (0.05) 17 0.4 (0.01) 4 6300 1.6 (0.03) 16 0.7 (0.01) 6 .03 (0.01) 3 0.7 (0.03) 7 0.2 (0.01) 2 4500 0.9 (0.02) 8 0.3 (0.01) 3 .02 (0.01) 2 0.4 (0.01) 4 0.1 (0.01) 1

10000 4.0 (0.07) 39 1.6 (0.03) 16 .07 (0.02) 7 2.1 (0.05) 21 0.5 (0.01) 4 7000 2.0 (0.04) 19 0.8 (0.02) 8 .04 (0.01) 4 1.0 (0.03) 9 0.2 (0.01) 2 5000 1.0 (0.02) 10 0.4 (0.01) 4 .02 (0.01) 2 0.5 (0.01) 4 0.1 (0.01) 1

12000 2.3 (0.04) 23 .10 (0.02) 10 3.0 (0.09) 30 0.7 (0.02) 7

8400 1.1 (0.02) 12 .05 (0.01) 5 1.4 (0.04) 14 0.3 (0.01) 3

6000 0.6 (0.01) 6 .03 (0.01) 3 0.7 (0.02) 7 0.2 (0.01) 2

Note: Figures in parentheses indicate increment to be added or subtracted for each 3 m of hose greater than or less than 6 m.

16.3 Pumping Engine Requirements. 16.3.5.2 The heat exchanger shall maintain the temperature of the coolant in the pump drive engine not in excess of the engine manufacturer’s 16.3.1 The apparatus manufacturer shall approve the use of the pumping temperature rating under all pumping conditions. engine for stationary pumping applications based on the size of the fire apparatus and theDRAFT rating of the pump being furnished. 16.3.5.3 A drain(s) shall be provided to allow draining of the heat exchanger so as to prevent damage from freezing. 16.3.2 Engine Speed. 16.3.6 Indicator or Light. 16.3.2.1 The engine shall be capable of performing the pumping tests herein specified without exceeding the maximum governed speed of the engine 16.3.6.1 Where a separate engine is used to drive the pump, an indicator or as shown on a certified brake horsepower curve of the type of engine used light that is energized when the pump engine is running shall be provided in without accessories. the driving compartment. 16.3.2.2 The brake horsepower curve certification shall be signed by a 16.3.6.2 The indicator or light shall be marked with a label that reads “Pump responsible official of the engine manufacturer. Engine Running.” 16.3.3 On fire pumps of 750 gpm (3000 L/min) or greater, the engine/pump 16.4 Power Train Capability. combination shall be capable of delivering the rated pump capacity at 165 psi (1100 kPa) net pump pressure. 16.4.1 All components in the power train from the engine to the fire pump shall be capable of transmitting the torque necessary to power the pump, 16.3.4* If a separate pumping engine is provided, it shall meet the as installed in the apparatus, for the pump performance points specified in requirements of 12.2.1.1, 12.2.1.2, 12.2.1.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.3.1, 12.2.3.2, 12.2.4, 16.2.3.1 without exceeding the component manufacturer’s continuous duty 12.2.5, and Sections 13.4 and 13.5. torque rating. 16.3.5 A supplementary heat exchanger cooling system shall be provided for 16.4.2 When pumping continuously at each of the pump performance points the pump drive engine. specified in 16.2.3.1, lubricant temperatures in any power train component installed in the apparatus from the engine to the pump shall not exceed the 16.3.5.1 Valving shall be installed to permit water from the discharge component manufacturer’s recommendation for maximum temperature. side of the pump to cool the coolant circulating through the engine cooling system without intermixing.

903 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

1 16.4.3* When the engine and pumping system, under any pumping 16.6.6 Each valved intake having a connection size of 3 /2 in. (90 mm) or condition, have the capability to exceed the component manufacturer’s larger shall be equipped with an adjustable automatic pressure relief device continuous duty torque rating, a means shall be provided to control the installed on the supply side of the valve to bleed off pressure from a hose engine output to a level equal to or below the component manufacturer’s connected to the valved intake. continuous duty torque rating. 16.6.6.1 The pressure relief device shall discharge to atmosphere and the 16.5 Construction Requirements. discharge shall be piped or directed away from the pump operator’s position. 16.5.1* Wetted moving parts shall be constructed of a corrosion-resistant 16.6.6.2 The automatic pressure relief device shall be adjustable from a material. minimum of 90 psi (620 kPa) to at least 185 psi (1275 kPa). 16.5.2 Hydrostatic Test. 16.6.6.3 The pressure relief device, when preset at 125 psi (860 kPa), shall not allow a pressure rise greater than 60 psi (400 kPa) at the device inlet 16.5.2.1 The pump body shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test to a gauge while flowing a minimum of 150 gpm (570 L/min). pressure of 500 psi (3400 kPa) minimum for 10 minutes. 16.6.7 If the pump is equipped with one or more intakes larger than 3 1/2 in. 16.5.2.2 The pump manufacturer shall provide a certificate of completion for (89 mm) that are not valved, an adjustable automatic pressure relief device the hydrostatic test. shall be installed on the pump system to bleed off excess pressure from a 16.5.3 Where an auxiliary pump is provided in combination with a fire hose connected to the pump intake. pump and where the pumps are interconnected so that pressure from one 16.6.7.1 The automatic pressure relief device shall be adjustable from a pump can be transmitted to the other pump, check valves, intake or discharge minimum of 90 psi (620 kPa) to at least 185 psi (1275 kPa). relief valves, pump drive gear ratios, or other automatic means shall be provided to avoid pressurizing either pump beyond its maximum rated 16.6.7.2 The pressure relief device, when preset at 125 psi (860 kPa), shall hydrostatic pressure. not allow a pressure rise greater than 60 psi (400 kPa) at the device inlet while flowing a minimum of 150 gpm (570 L/min). 16.5.4 The entire discharge and intake piping system, valves, drain cocks and lines, and intake and outlet closures, excluding the tank fill and tank to 16.6.7.3 The pressure relief device shall discharge to atmosphere. pump lines on the tank side of the valves in those lines, shall be capable of withstanding a minimum hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 500 psi (3400 16.6.8 All intakes shall be provided with caps or closures capable of kPa). withstanding a hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 500 psi (3400 kPa). 16.5.5 Pulsation-Free Fire Streams. 16.6.8.1 Intakes having male threads shall be equipped with caps; intakes having female threads shall be equipped with plugs. 16.5.5.1 The pump shall be capable of producing fire streams that are free from pulsations. 16.6.8.2 Where adapters for special threads or other means for hose attachment are provided on the intakes, closures shall be provided for the 16.5.5.2 When an accumulator is used to provide pulsation-free fire streams, adapters in lieu of caps or plugs. the accumulator shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the 1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 2. 16.6.9 Caps or closures for 3 /2-in. (90-mm) and smaller intakes shall be removable from the intakes but remain secured to the apparatus. 16.5.6 The pump shall allow a positive pressure water source to directly add to the pump’s net pump pressure. 16.6.10 If the suction inlets are to be equipped with a valve, siamese, or adapter that will remain in place while the apparatus is in motion, that valve, 16.6 Pump Intake Connections. siamese, or adapter shall not project beyond the apparatus running board. 16.6.1* Intake(s) of the same or larger size and quantity than the maximums 16.6.11 The purchaser shall specify if any valve, siamese, or adapter is to be specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) for suction hose size and number of suction permanently installed on an intake and identify the brand and model of such lines shall be provided. item. 16.6.1.1 The intakes specified in 16.6.1 shall have male National Hose 16.7 Pump Discharge Outlets. 1 threads if the apparatus is to be used in the United States of America. 16.7.1* Discharge outlets of 2 /2 in. (65 mm) or larger shall be provided to discharge the rated capacity of the pump at the flow rates shown in Table 16.6.1.2 If the couplings on the suction hose carried on the apparatus are of 16.7.1. a different size than the pump intake(s) or have means of hose attachment other than that provided on the intake(s), an adapter(s) shall be provided to allow connection of the suction hose to the pump intake(s). Table 16.7.1 Discharge Rates by Outlet Size 16.6.1.3* A plate shall be provided on the pump operators panel that states Outlet Size Flow Rates the following: in. mm gpm L/min “Warning: Death or serious injury might occur if proper operating procedures are not followed. The pump operator, as well as individuals 2 1/2 65 250 1000 connecting supply or discharge hoses to the apparatus, must be familiar with the operator’s manual, water hydraulics hazards, and component limitations.” 3 75 375 1400 16.6.2 Intake Strainer. 3 1/2 90 500 2000 16.6.2.1 Each intakeDRAFT shall have a removable or accessible strainer inside the 4 100 625 2400 connection. 4 1/2 110 750 3000 16.6.2.2* The strainer(s) shall restrict spherical debris that is too large to pass through the pump. 5 125 1000 4000 16.6.3 At least one valved intake shall be provided that can be controlled 6 150 1440 5500 from the pump operator’s position.

1 16.7.1.1 If the apparatus is equipped with an aerial device with a waterway 16.6.3.1 The valve and piping shall be a minimum 2 /2 in. (65 mm) nominal size. that is permanently connected to the pump, the discharge from that waterway shall be permitted to be credited as a 1000-gpm (4000-L/min) outlet. 16.6.3.2 If the intake is 21/ in. (65 mm) nominal size, the intake shall be 2 16.7.1.2 A minimum of two 21/ -in. (65-mm) outlets shall be provided on equipped with a female swivel coupling with National Hose threads. 2 any pump rated at 750 gpm (3000 L/min) or greater, and a minimum of one 1 16.6.4 Any 3-in. (75-mm) or larger intake valve except the tank to pump 2 /2-in. (65-mm) outlet shall be provided on any pump rated at less than 750 intake valve shall be a slow-operating valve. gpm (3000 L/min). 16.6.5* Each valved intake shall be equipped with a bleeder valve having a 16.7.2 Discharge Outlet Connections. 3 minimum /4-in. (19-mm) pipe thread connection to bleed off air or water. 1 16.7.2.1 All 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger discharge outlets shall be equipped 16.6.5.1 The bleeder valve shall be operational without the operator having with male National Hose threads. to get under the apparatus. 16.7.2.2* Adapter couplings with special threads or other means for hose 16.6.5.2 If a valved appliance is attached to an intake, it shall be equipped attachment shall be permitted to be furnished on any or all outlets. 3 with a /4-in. (19-mm) bleeder valve on each intake. 904 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 16.7.3* The piping and valves supplying any preconnected 1 1/2-in. (38- 16.10.1.2* Any control device used in the pumping system power train mm), 1 3/4-in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52-mm) hose line include the piping to the between the engine and the pump, except a manual pump shift override preconnected hose storage areas specified in Section 5.6(2), Section 6.5(2), device if provided, shall be equipped with a means to prevent unintentional 7.5.2, 8.6.2, Section 9.6(2), or Section 11.7(2), as applicable, shall be at least movement of the control device from its set position in the pumping mode. 2 in. (52 mm) in size. 16.10.1.3 A label indicating the chassis transmission shift selector position 16.7.4 All discharge outlets, except outlets to which a hose will be to be used for pumping shall be provided in the driving compartment and preconnected, shall be equipped with caps or closures capable of located so that it can be read from the driver’s position. withstanding a minimum hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 100 psi (700 kPa) over the maximum pump close-off pressure or 500 psi (3400 kPa), 16.10.1.4 Where the pump is driven by the chassis engine and transmission whichever is greater. through a split shaft PTO, the driving compartment speedometer shall register when the pump drive system is engaged. 16.7.4.1 Where adapters are provided on the discharge outlets, the closures shall fit on the adapters. 16.10.1.5 Where chassis transmission retarders are furnished, they shall be automatically disengaged for pumping operations. 1 16.7.4.2 Caps or closures for outlets 3 /2 in. (90 mm) and smaller in size shall be removable from the outlet but remain secured to the apparatus. 16.10.2 Stationary Pump Driven Through Split Shaft PTO — Automatic Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with 16.7.5 Each discharge outlet shall be equipped with a valve that can be an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis opened and closed smoothly at the flows shown in Table 16.7.1 at pump engine through the transmission’s main driveline, and the apparatus is to be discharge gauge pressures of 250 psi (1700 kPa). used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping 16.7.5.1 The flow-regulating element of each valve shall not change its mode of operation so that the pumping system can be operated from the position under any condition of operation that involves discharge pressures pump operator’s position. to the maximum pressure of the pump; the means to prevent a change in position shall be incorporated in the operating mechanism and shall be 16.10.2.1* A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving permitted to be manually or automatically controlled. compartment to indicate that the pump shift process has been successfully completed. 16.7.5.2 Any 3-in. (75-mm) or larger discharge valve shall be a slow- operating valve. 16.10.2.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission 1 16.7.6 All 1 /2-in. (38-mm) or larger discharge outlets shall be equipped is in pump gear, and the parking brake is engaged. 3 with a drain or bleeder valve having a minimum /4-in. (19-mm) pipe thread connection for draining or bleeding off pressure from a hose connected to 16.10.2.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump the outlet. operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 16.7.7 Any 2-in. (52-mm) or larger discharge outlet that is located more than 42 in. (1067 mm) off the ground to which hose is to be connected and 16.10.3 Stationary Pump Driven Through Split Shaft PTO — Manual that is not in a hose storage area shall be supplied with a sweep elbow of at Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with an manual least 30 degrees downward. chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine through the transmission’s main driveline, and the apparatus is to be used for 16.7.8 Valves. stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode 16.7.8.1 Each pump discharge shall have a valve that can be controlled from of operation so that the pumping system can be operated from the pump the pump operator’s position. operator’s position. 16.7.8.2 A secondary valve shall be permitted to be provided at a discharge 16.10.3.1* A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving outlet if required for special applications. compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully 16.7.9* Location of Discharge Outlets. completed. 1 16.10.3.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 16.7.9.1 No discharge outlet larger than 2 /2 in. (65 mm) shall be located at the pump operator’s panel. compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is engaged. 16.7.9.2 If the apparatus has a top console–type pump operator’s panel, 1 16.10.3.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump vertical discharge outlets larger than 2 /2 in. (65 mm) shall be permitted at the top midship position of apparatus where the outlets are used for directly operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode connected deck guns or monitors and no fire hose is used for coupling the or that the parking brake is engaged. components. 16.10.4 Stationary Pump Driven Through Transmission-Mounted 16.7.10 Where the valve operating mechanism does not indicate the position PTO, Front-of-Engine Crank Shaft PTO, or Engine Flywheel PTO of the valve, an indicator shall be provided to show when the valve is closed. — Automatic Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by a 16.8 Pump Drains. transmission-mounted (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping 16.8.1 A readily accessible drain valve(s) that is marked with a label as to its only with the chassis transmission in neutral, an interlock system shall be function shall be provided to allow for draining of the pump and all water- provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in carrying lines andDRAFT accessories. the pumping mode of operation so that the pump system can be operated 16.8.2 The drain valve(s) shall be operational without the operator having to from the pump operator’s position. get under the apparatus. 16.10.4.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving compartment and on the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump 16.9 Pump Operator’s Panel. shift has been successfully completed. 16.9.1* Each pump control, gauge, and other instrument necessary to 16.10.4.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving operate the pump shall be located on a panel known as the pump operator’s compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission panel and shall be marked with a label as to its function. is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. 16.9.2 All gauges, discharge outlets, pump intakes, and controls shall be 16.10.4.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump illuminated to a minimum lighting level of 5 footcandles (50 lx). operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or 16.10* Pump Controls. that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 16.10.1 General Provisions. Provisions shall be made for placing the pump 16.10.5 Stationary Pump Driven Through Transmission-Mounted PTO, drive system in operation using controls and switches that are identified and Front-of-Engine Crank Shaft PTO, or Engine Flywheel PTO — Manual within convenient reach of the operator. Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with a manual chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted 16.10.1.1 Where the pump is driven by the chassis engine and engine (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and compression brakes or engine exhaust brakes are furnished, they shall be the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only with the chassis automatically disengaged for pumping operations. transmission in neutral, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the pump system can be operated from the pump operator’s position.

905 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 16.10.5.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving 16.10.8.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump compartment and on the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or shift has been successfully completed. that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 16.10.5.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 16.10.9 Stationary Pumps Driven Through Transfer Case PTOs compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is – Manual Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with a engaged. manual chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine through the transmission’s main driveline and through a transfer case, and 16.10.5.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are or that the parking brake is engaged. engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the pumping system can 16.10.6 Stationary and “Pump and Roll” Pump —– Automatic Chassis be operated from the pump operator’s position. Transmissions. Where the water pump is driven by a transmission- 16.10.9.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving mounted (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully PTO, and the apparatus is designed to be used in both the stationary completed. pumping mode and the “pump and roll” pumping mode with the automatic chassis transmission in neutral for stationary pumping and in a road gear for 16.10.9.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving pump and roll pumping, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the transfer case drive to the pump drive system components are properly engaged in the pumping the chassis wheels is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. mode of operation so that the apparatus can be operated in either stationary or pump and roll pumping mode. 16.10.9.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode 16.10.6.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving or that the parking brake is engaged. compartment and at the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully completed. 16.10.10 Pump Operator’s Panel Engine Speed Advancement — Automatic Chassis Transmission. An interlock system shall be provided to 16.10.6.2 Indicators. prevent advancement of the engine speed at the pump operator’s panel unless the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged or the 16.10.6.2.1 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” mode. compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. 16.10.11 Pump Operator’s Panel Engine Speed Advancement — Manual Chassis Transmission. An interlock system shall be provided to prevent 16.10.6.2.2 An “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator shall be provided in the advancement of the engine speed at the pump operator’s panel unless the driving compartment and shall be energized when the pump is engaged, the parking brake is engaged or the apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” mode. chassis transmission is in road gear, and the parking brake is released. 16.10.12 Parallel/Series Control. 16.10.6.2.3 When the “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator is energized, the “OK to Pump” indicator shall not be energized. 16.10.12.1 With parallel/series centrifugal pumps, the control positions for parallel operation (volume) and series operation (pressure) shall be indicated. 16.10.6.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that is energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is 16.10.12.2 The control for changing the pump from series to parallel, and energized or when the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking vice versa, shall be operable at the pump operator’s position. brake is engaged. 16.10.13* Pressure Control System. 16.10.7 Stationary and “Pump and Roll” Pumps — Manual Chassis Transmissions. Where the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted 16.10.13.1* A system shall be provided that, when set in accordance with (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and the manufacturer’s instructions, will automatically control the discharge the apparatus is designed to be used in both the stationary pumping mode pressure to a maximum of 30 psi (20 kPa) pressure rise above the set and the “pump and roll” pumping mode with the chassis transmission in pressure(s) when all discharge valves are closed no more rapidly than in neutral for stationary pumping or in a road gear for pump and roll pumping, 3 seconds, and no more slowly than in 10 seconds, during the following an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system conditions: components are properly engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that (1) Over a range of pressures from 70 psi to 300 psi (500 kPa to 20 kPa) net the apparatus can be operated in either stationary or pump and roll pumping pump pressure with intake gauge pressure between -10 psi and 185 psi (-70 mode. kPa and 1300 kPa) and discharge gauge pressure between 90 psi and 300 psi 16.10.7.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving (600 kPa and 2000 kPa) compartment and at the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump shift (2) With initial engine and pump controls set to produce a range of flows has been successfully completed. from 150 gpm (550 L/min) to the rated capacity of the pump 16.10.7.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 16.10.13.2 If the pump is equipped with a relief valve system where the compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is system does not control engine speed, the system shall be equipped with a engaged. means to indicate when the system is in control of the pressure. 16.10.7.3 An “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator shall be provided in the 16.10.13.2.1 If the pump is equipped with a governor system that controls driving compartment and shall be energized when the pump is engaged and engine speed, an indicator shall show when the system is turned on and the parking brakeDRAFT is released. whether it is controlling the engine speed or pump pressure. 16.10.7.4 When the “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator is energized, the “OK 16.10.13.2.2 Either system shall be controllable by one person at the pump to Pump” indicator shall not be energized. operator position. 16.10.7.5 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump 16.10.13.3 If the system discharges water to the atmosphere, the discharge operator’s panel that is energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is shall be in a manner that will not expose personnel to high-pressure water energized or when the parking brake is engaged. streams. 16.10.8 Stationary Pumps Driven Through Transfer Case PTOs — Automatic Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with 16.10.14* Priming Device. A priming device shall be provided and an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis controlled from the pump operator’s position. engine through the transmission’s main driveline and through a transfer case, 16.10.14.1 The priming device shall be capable of meeting the requirements and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock of 16.2.3.2 and 16.2.3.3. system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the pumping system 16.10.14.2 The priming device shall be capable of operating with no can be operated from the pump operator’s position. lubricant or a biodegradable nontoxic lubricant. 16.10.8.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving 16.10.15 Protection of Pump Controls. All pump controls and devices compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully shall be installed so as to be protected against mechanical damage or the completed. effects of adverse weather conditions on their operation. 16.10.8.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 16.11 Pump Engine Controls. compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission is in pump gear, the transfer case drive to the chassis wheels is in neutral, 16.11.1* A throttle control that holds its set position shall be provided to and the parking brake is engaged. control the pump engine speed. 906 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 16.11.2 The throttle control shall be located not higher than 72 in. (1800 16.12.2.1.6.3 Digital master pressure indicating devices shall have an mm) nor lower than 42 in. (1067 mm) from the operator’s standing position accuracy of ±3 percent over the full scale. with all instruments in full view. 16.12.3 Discharge Outlet Instrumentation. 16.12 Instrumentation. 16.12.3.1 A flowmeter or a pressure indicating device shall be provided for 1 16.12.1 Pump Operators Panel. each discharge outlet 1 /2 in. (38 mm) or larger in size and shall be marked with a label to indicate the outlet to which it is connected. 16.12.1.1* The following controls and instruments shall be provided and 1 installed as a group at the pump operator’s panel: 16.12.3.2* Any discharge outlet 3 /2 in. (90 mm) or larger that is equipped with a flowmeter shall also be provided with a pressure indicating device. (1) A master pump intake pressure indicating device 16.12.3.3 The pressure indicating device or flowmeter display shall be (2) A master pump discharge pressure indicating device located adjacent to the corresponding valve control with no more than 6 in. (150 mm) separating the pressure indicating device or flowmeter bezel and (3) A pumping engine tachometer the valve control midpoint or centerline. (4) A pumping engine coolant temperature indicator 16.12.3.4 If both a flowmeter and pressure indicating device are provided (5) A pumping engine oil pressure indicator for an individual discharge outlet, the pressure indicating device shall be located within 6 in. (150 mm) of the valve control midpoint or centerline, and (6) A voltmeter the flowmeter display shall be adjacent to and within 2 in. (52 mm) of the pressure indicating device bezel. (7) The pump pressure control(s) 16.12.3.5 Pressure indicating devices shall be connected to the outlet side (8) The pumping engine throttle of the valve. (9) The primer control 16.12.3.6 Flowmeters shall display flow in increments no greater than 10 (10) The water tank to pump valve control gpm (38 L/min). 16.12.3.7 Where analog pressure gauges are used, they shall have a (11) The water tank fill valve control minimum accuracy of Grade B as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure (12) The water tank level indicator Gauges and Gauge Attachments. 5 16.12.1.2 The instruments and controls required by 16.12.1.1 shall be placed 16.12.3.7.1 Numerals for gauges shall be a minimum /32 in. (4 mm) high. so as to keep the pump operator as far as practicable from all discharge and 16.12.3.7.2 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi (70 intake connections and in a location where they are visible and operationally kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures functional while the operator remains stationary. at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). 16.12.1.3 Any instrumentation exposed to the elements shall be 16.12.3.7.3 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure pulsation weatherproof. dampened, be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have 16.12.1.4 The pumping engine oil pressure and engine-coolant temperature internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. indicators shall be equipped with audible and visual warnings. 16.12.3.8 If a digital pressure indicating device is used, they shall meet the 16.12.1.5 All engine operation indicators on the pump operator’s panel shall requirements of 16.12.3.8.1 through 16.12.3.8.3. be in addition to those on the vehicle’s instrument panel. 16.12.3.8.1 The digits shall be at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) high. 16.12.2 Master Pump Intake and Discharge Pressure Indicating Devices. 16.12.3.8.2 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in 16.12.2.1 Master pump intake and pump discharge pressure indicating increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). devices shall be located within 8 in. (200 mm) of each other, edge to edge, with the intake pressure indicating device to the left of or below the pump 16.12.3.8.3 Digital pressure indicating devices shall have an accuracy of ±3 discharge pressure indicating device. percent over the full scale. 16.12.3.9 Each flowmeter shall be calibrated to an accuracy of ±5 percent 16.12.2.1.1 The intake pressure indicating device shall read from 30 in. Hg when flowing the amount of water shown in Table 16.12.3.9 for the pipe size (100 kPa) vacuum to at least a gauge pressure of 300 psi (2000 kPa). in which it is mounted. 16.12.2.1.2 The discharge pressure indicating device shall read from a gauge pressure of 0 psi or lower to a gauge pressure of at least 300 psi (2000 kPa). Table 16.12.3.9 Flowmeter Calibration Flow for Each Pipe Size 16.12.2.1.3 Pressure indicating devices shall not be damaged by a 30 in. Hg (100 kPa) vacuum. Pipe size Flow 16.12.2.1.4 Pressure indicating devices shall be marked with labels that in. mm gpm L/min read “Pump Intake” for the intake pressure indicating device and “Pump Discharge” forDRAFT the discharge pressure indicating device. 11 25 40 150 16.12.2.1.5 Where analog gauges are used, there shall be at least a 1-in. 1 1/ 38 90 340 (25-mm) diameter differential in viewing area between the master gauges 2 and the individual discharge gauges, with the master gauges being the larger. 2 52 160 600 16.12.2.1.5.1 The accuracy of gauges shall be a minimum of Grade 1A as 1 defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. 2 /2 65 250 950 16.12.2.1.5.2 Numerals for master gauges shall be a minimum of 0.25 in. 3 75 375 1400 (6.4 mm) high. 16.12.2.1.5.3 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi 4 100 625 2400 (70 kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). 5 125 1000 4000 16.12.2.1.5.4 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure 6 150 1440 5500 pulsation dampened be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. 16.12.2.1.6 If digital master pressure indicating devices are used, they shall meet the requirements of 16.12.2.1.6.1 through 16.12.2.1.6.3. 16.12.4 Each pressure indicating device or flowmeter, and its respective display, shall be mounted and attached so it is protected from accidental damage and excessive vibration. 16.12.2.1.6.1 The digits shall be at least 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) high. 16.12.2.1.6.2 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in 16.12.5 Connections for test gauges shall be provided at the pump operator’s increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). panel.

907 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 16.12.5.1 One test gauge connection shall be connected to the intake side of 16.13.2.1.4 All structural enclosures, such as floorboards, gratings, grills, the pump, and the other shall be connected to the discharge manifold of the and heat shields, not furnished with a means for opening them in service pump. shall be kept in place during the tests. 16.12.5.2 The test gauge connections shall have a 0.25-in. (6.4-mm) 16.13.2.2 Equipment. standard pipe thread, shall be plugged, and shall be marked with a label. 16.13.2.2.1 Suction Hose. 16.13 Required Testing. 16.13.2.2.1.1 The suction hose shall be of the appropriate size for the rated 16.13.1 Pump Certification. capacity of the pump [see Table 16.2.4.1(a)]. 16.13.1.1 If the fire pump has a rated capacity of 750 gpm (3000 L/min) or 16.13.2.2.1.2 A suction strainer and hose that will allow flow with total greater, the pump shall be tested after the pump and all its associated piping friction and entrance loss not greater than that specified in Table 16.2.4.1(b) and equipment have been installed on the apparatus. or Table 16.2.4.1(c) shall be used. 16.13.1.1.1 The tests shall include at least the pumping test (see 16.13.2), the 16.13.2.2.2 Sufficient fire hose shall be provided to discharge the rated pumping engine overload test (see 16.13.3), the pressure control system test capacity of the pump to the nozzles or other flow measuring equipment (see 16.13.4), the priming device tests (see 16.13.5), and the vacuum test (see without exceeding a flow velocity of 35 ft/sec (10 m/sec) [approximately 500 1 16.13.6). gpm (2000 L/min) for 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose]. 16.13.1.1.2 If the apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the water tank to 16.13.2.2.3 Where nozzles are used, they shall be smoothbore, and the 3 pump flow test (see 16.13.7) shall be included. inside diameters shall be from /4 in. to 2 1/2 in. (19 mm to 63.5 mm). 16.13.1.1.3 The tests results shall be certified by an independent third-party 16.13.2.2.4 Test Gauges. certification organization. 16.13.2.2.4.1 All test gauges shall meet the requirements for Grade 16.13.1.2 If the fire pump has a rated capacity of less than 750 gpm (3000 A gauges as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge L/min), the pump shall be tested after the pump and all its associated piping Attachments, and shall be at least size 3 1/2 per ASME B40.100. and equipment have been installed on the apparatus. 16.13.2.2.4.2 A mercury manometer shall be permitted to be used in lieu of 16.13.1.2.1 The tests shall include at least the pumping test (see 16.13.2), a pump intake gauge. the pressure control system test (see 16.13.4), the priming device tests (see 16.13.5), and the vacuum test (see 16.13.6). 16.13.2.2.4.3 The pump intake gauge shall have a range of 30 in. Hg (100 kPa) vacuum to zero for a vacuum gauge, or 30 in. Hg (100 kPa) vacuum to a 16.13.1.2.2 If the apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the water tank to gauge pressure of 150 psi (1000 kPa) for a compound gauge. pump flow test (see 16.13.7) shall be included. 16.13.2.2.4.4 The discharge pressure gauge shall have a gauge pressure 16.13.1.2.3* The tests results shall be certified by the apparatus range of 0 psi to 400 psi (0 kPa to 2800 kPa). manufacturer. 16.13.2.2.4.5 Pilot gauges shall have a gauge pressure range of at least 0 psi 16.13.1.3 Test Plate. to 160 psi (0 kPa to 1100 kPa). 16.13.1.3.1 A test plate shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel 16.13.2.2.4.6 All gauges shall be calibrated in the month preceding the tests that gives the rated discharges and pressures together with the speed of the using a dead weight gauge tester or a master gauge meeting the requirements engine as determined by the certification test for each unit, the position of for Grade 3A or 4A gauges, as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges the parallel/series pump as used, and the governed speed of the engine as and Gauge Attachments, that has been calibrated within the preceding year. stated by the engine manufacturer on a certified brake horsepower curve. 16.13.2.2.5 All test gauge connections shall include a means for “snubbing,” 16.13.1.3.2 The plate shall be completely stamped with all information at such as needle valves to damp out rapid needle movements. the factory and attached to the vehicle prior to shipping. 16.13.2.2.6* The engine speed-measuring equipment shall consist of 16.13.2 Pumping Test. a nonadjustable tachometer supplied from the engine or transmission electronics, a revolution counter on a checking shaft outlet and a stop watch, 16.13.2.1 Conditions for Test. or other engine speed-measuring means that is accurate to within + 50 rpm 16.13.2.1.1 The test site shall be adjacent to a supply of clear water at least of actual speed. 4 ft (1.2 m) deep, with the water level not more than 10 ft (3 m) below the 16.13.2.3 Procedure. center of the pump intake, and close enough to allow the suction strainer to be submerged at least 2 ft (0.6 m) below the surface of the water when 16.13.2.3.1* The ambient air temperature, water temperature, vertical lift, connected to the pump by 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose. elevation of test site, and atmospheric pressure (corrected to sea level) shall be determined and recorded prior to and after each pump test. 16.13.2.1.2* Tests shall be performed when conditions are as follows: 16.13.2.3.2* The engine, pump, transmission, and all parts of the apparatus (1) Air temperature: 0°F to 110°F (-18°C to 43°C) shall exhibit no undue heating, loss of power, or other defect during the (2) Water temperature: 35°F to 90°F (2°C to 32°C) entire test. 16.13.2.3.3 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump rated at 750 gpm (3) Barometric pressure: 29 in. Hg (98.2 kPa), minimum (corrected to sea (3000 L/min) or greater, the pump shall be subjected to a 3-hour pumping level) DRAFTtest from draft consisting of 2 hours of continuous pumping at rated capacity 1 16.13.2.1.3 Engine-driven accessories shall not be functionally at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure, followed by /2 hour of continuous disconnected or otherwise rendered inoperative during the tests. pumping at 70 percent of rated capacity at 200 psi (1400 kPa) net pump 1 pressure and /2 hour of continuous pumping at 50 percent of rated capacity 16.13.2.1.3.1 If the chassis engine drives the pump, the electrical loads and at 250 psi (1700 kPa) net pump pressure. conditions specified in 13.14.3.4 shall be applied during the pumping portion of this test. 16.13.2.3.3.1 The pump shall not be stopped until after the 2-hour test at rated capacity, unless it becomes necessary to clean the suction strainer. 16.13.2.1.3.2 If the vehicle is equipped with a fixed power source driven by the same engine that drives the fire pump, it shall be running at a minimum 16.13.2.3.3.2 The pump shall be permitted to be stopped between tests in of 50 percent of its rated capacity throughout the pumping portion of the order to change the hose or nozzles, clean the strainer, or add fuel for the pump test. pump drive engine. 16.13.2.1.3.3 The following devices shall be permitted to be turned off or 16.13.2.3.3.3 The capacity, discharge pressure, intake pressure, and engine not operating during the pump test: speed shall be recorded at least every 15 minutes but not less than three times for each test sequence. (1) Aerial hydraulic pump 16.13.2.3.3.4 The average net pump pressure shall be calculated and (2) Foam pump recorded based on the average values for discharge and intake pressure. (3) Hydraulically driven equipment 16.13.2.3.4 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump rated at less than 750 gpm (3000 L/min), the pump shall be subjected to a 50-minute (4) Winch 1 pumping test from draft consisting of /2 hour of continuous pumping at rated (5) Windshield wipers capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure, followed by 10 minutes of (6) Four-way hazard flashers 908 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA continuous pumping at 70 percent of rated capacity at 200 psi (1400 kPa) net 16.13.6 Vacuum Test. The vacuum test shall consist of subjecting the pump pressure, and 10 minutes of continuous pumping at 50 percent of rated interior of the pump, with all intake valves open, all intakes capped or capacity at 250 psi (1700 kPa) net pump pressure. plugged, and all discharge caps removed, to a vacuum of 22 in. Hg (75 kPa) by means of the pump priming device. 1 16.13.2.3.4.1 The pump shall not be stopped until after the /2-hour test at rated capacity, unless it becomes necessary to clean the suction strainer. 16.13.6.1 At altitudes above 2000 ft (600 m), the vacuum attained shall be permitted to be less than 22 in. Hg (75 kPa) by 1 in. Hg (3.4 kPa) for each 16.13.2.3.4.2 The pump shall be permitted to be stopped between tests in 1000 ft (305 m) of altitude above 2000 ft (600 m). order to change the hose or nozzles or clean the strainer. 16.13.6.2 The vacuum shall not drop more than 10 in. Hg (34 kPa) in 5 16.13.2.3.4.3 The capacity, discharge pressure, intake pressure, and engine minutes. speed shall be recorded at least every 10 minutes but not less than three times for each test sequence. 16.13.6.3 The primer shall not be used after the 5-minute test period has begun. 16.13.2.3.4.4 The average net pump pressure shall be calculated and recorded based on the average values for discharge and intake pressure. 16.13.6.4 The engine shall not be operated at any speed greater than the governed speed during this test. 16.13.3 Pumping Engine Overload Test. If the pump has a rated capacity of 750 gpm (3000 L/min) or greater, the apparatus shall be subjected to an 16.13.7 Water Tank to Pump Flow Test. overload test consisting of pumping rated capacity at 165 psi (1100 kPa) net pump pressure for at least 10 minutes. 16.13.7.1 A water tank to pump flow test shall be conducted as follows: 16.13.3.1 This test shall be performed immediately following the pumping (1) The water tank shall be filled until it overflows. test of rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa). (2) All intakes to the pump shall be closed. 16.13.3.2 The capacity, discharge pressure, intake pressure, and engine speed shall be recorded at least three times during the overload test. (3) The tank fill line and bypass cooling line shall be closed. 16.13.4 Pressure Control System Test. The pressure control system on the (4) Hose lines and nozzles for discharging water at the rated tank to pump pump shall be tested as follows: flow rate shall be connected to one or more discharge outlets. (1) The pump shall be operated at draft, delivering rated capacity at a (5) The tank to pump valve(s) and the discharge valves leading to the hose discharge gauge pressure of 150 psi (1000 kPa). lines and nozzles shall be fully opened. (6) The engine throttle shall be adjusted until the required flow rate -0+5 (2) The pressure control system shall be set in accordance with the (see 19.3.2) manufacturer’s instructions to maintain the discharge gauge pressure at 150 percent is established . psi (1000 kPa) ±5 percent. (7) The discharge pressure shall be recorded. (3) All discharge valves shall be closed no more rapidly than in 3 seconds’ (8) The discharge valves shall be closed and the water tank refilled. (9) The time and no more slowly than in 10 seconds’ time. bypass line shall be permitted to be opened temporarily, if needed, to keep (4) The rise in discharge pressure shall not exceed 30 psi (200 kPa) and shall the water temperature in the pump within acceptable limits. be recorded. (10) The discharge valves shall be reopened fully and the time noted. (5) The original conditions of pumping rated capacity at a discharge gauge (11) If necessary, the engine throttle shall be adjusted to maintain the pressure of 150 psi (1000 kPa) shall be reestablished. discharge pressure recorded as noted in 16.13.7.1(7). (6) The discharge pressure gauge shall be reduced to 90 psi (620 kPa) by (12) When the discharge pressure drops by 10 psi (70 kPa) or more, the time throttling the engine fuel supply, with no change to the discharge valve shall be noted and the elapsed time from the opening of the discharge valves settings, hose, or nozzles. shall be calculated and recorded. (7) The pressure control system shall be set according to the manufacturer’s 16.13.7.2 Volume Discharge Calculation. instructions to maintain the discharge gauge pressure at 90 psi (620 kPa) ±5 percent. 16.13.7.2.1 The volume discharged shall be calculated by multiplying the rate of discharge in gallons per minute (L/min) times the time in minutes (8) All discharge valves shall be closed no more rapidly than in 3 seconds’ elapsed from the opening of the discharge valves until the discharge pressure time and no more slowly than in 10 seconds’ time. drops by at least 10 psi (70 kPa). (9) The rise in discharge pressure shall not exceed 30 psi (200 kPa) and shall 16.13.7.2.2 Other means shall be permitted to be used to determine the be recorded. volume of water pumped from the tank such as a totalizing flow meter, (10) The pump shall be operated at draft, pumping 50 percent of rated weighing the truck before and after, or refilling the tank using a totalizing capacity at a discharge gauge pressure of 250 psi (1700 kPa). flow meter. (11) The pressure control system shall be set in accordance with the 16.13.7.3 The rated tank to pump flow rate shall be maintained until 80 manufacturer’s instructions to maintain the discharge gauge pressure at 250 percent of the rated capacity of the tank has been discharged. psi (1700 kPa) ±5 percent. 16.13.8* Manufacturer’s Predelivery Test. (12) All dischargeDRAFT valves shall be closed no more rapidly than in 3 seconds’ 16.13.8.1 The manufacturer shall conduct a piping hydrostatic test prior to time and no more slowly than in 10 seconds’ time. delivery of the apparatus. (13) The rise in discharge pressure shall not exceed 30 psi (200 kPa) and 16.13.8.2 The test shall be conducted as follows: shall be recorded. (1) The pump and its connected piping system shall be hydrostatically tested 16.13.5 Priming Device Tests. With the apparatus set up for the pumping to a gauge pressure of 250 psi (1700 kPa). test, the primer shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions until the pump has been primed and is discharging water. (2) The hydrostatic test shall be conducted with the tank fill line valve, the bypass line valve if so equipped, and the tank to pump valve closed. 16.13.5.1 This test shall be permitted to be performed in connection with priming the pump for the pumping test. (3) All discharge valves shall be open and the outlets capped. 16.13.5.2 The interval from the time the primer is started until the time the (4) All intake valves shall be closed, and nonvalved intakes shall be capped. pump is discharging water shall be noted. (5) This pressure shall be maintained for 3 minutes. 16.13.5.3 The time required to prime the pump shall not exceed 30 seconds if the rated capacity is 1250 gpm (5000 L/min) or less. Chapter 17 Auxiliary Pump and Associated Equipment 16.13.5.4 The time required to prime the pump shall not exceed 45 seconds 17.1* Application. If the apparatus is equipped with an auxiliary pump, the if the rated capacity is 1500 gpm (6000 L/min) or more. provisions of this chapter shall apply. 16.13.5.5 An additional 15 seconds shall be permitted in order to meet the 17.2 Pump Performance. requirements of 16.13.5.3 and 16.13.5.4 when the pump system includes an auxiliary 4-in. (100-mm) or larger intake pipe having a volume of 1 ft3 (0.3 17.2.1 Auxiliary pumps shall be rated as either high pressure or medium m3) or more. pressure.

909 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 17.2.2 The performance of a high-pressure auxiliary pump shall be a 17.7.1 Each pump control, gauge, and other instrument necessary to operate minimum of 66 gpm (250 L/min) at 600 psi (4000 kPa) discharge pressure the auxiliary pump shall be located on a panel and shall be marked with a for each high-pressure hose reel connected to it that can be operated label as to its function. simultaneously. 17.7.2 All gauges, instruments, discharge outlets, pump intakes, and controls 17.2.3 Medium Pressure Auxiliary Pumps. located on the auxiliary pump operator’s panel shall be illuminated to a minimum lighting level of 5 footcandles (54 lx). 17.2.3.1 The pump shall have one of the following rated capacities: 30 gpm (115 L/min), 60 gpm (230 L/min), 90 gpm (345 L/min), 120 gpm (460 L/ 17.8 Pump Controls. min), 250 gpm (1000 L/min), or 350 gpm (1300 L/min). 17.8.1 Provisions shall be made for placing the pump in operation. 17.2.3.2 The pump shall be capable of pumping 100 percent of its rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) discharge pressure, 70 percent of its rated 17.8.2 The control for the pump engagement mechanism shall be marked capacity at 200 psi (1400 kPa) discharge pressure, and 50 percent of its rated with a label to indicate when the pump is properly engaged in pumping capacity at 250 psi (1700 kPa) discharge pressure. position. 17.2.4 The rating for auxiliary pumps shall be based on the pump taking 17.8.3 Parallel/Series Control. water from the apparatus water tank. 17.8.3.1 With parallel/series centrifugal pumps, the positions for parallel 17.3* Power Train Capability. operation (volume) and series operation (pressure) shall be indicated. 17.3.1* All components in the power train from the engine to the pump shall 17.8.3.2 The control for changing the pump from series to parallel, and vice be capable of transmitting the continuous duty power required by the pump versa, shall be located on the pump operator’s panel. for at least 50 minutes at the pump’s rated capacity and pressure. 17.8.4 If more than one discharge outlet is provided, a relief valve or other 17.3.2* When pumping rated capacity and pressure, lubricant pressure control device shall be provided that is capable of limiting the pump temperatures in any power train component shall not exceed the component discharge pressure. manufacturer’s recommendation for maximum temperature. 17.8.5 All pump controls and devices shall be installed so as to be protected 17.4 Construction Requirements. The pump, piping, and valves shall be against mechanical damage or the effects of adverse weather conditions on capable of withstanding a minimum hydrostatic burst pressure of 100 psi their operation. (700 kPa) above the maximum system operating pressure. 17.8.6 Drain Valve(s). 17.5 Pump Intake Connections. 17.8.6.1 A readily accessible drain valve(s) that is marked with a label as to 17.5.1* Each pump intake connection shall be sized to permit the full rated its function shall be provided to allow the pump and all water-carrying lines performance of the pump and shall be equipped with a valve that can be and accessories to be drained. controlled from the pump operator’s position. 17.8.6.2 The drain valve(s) shall be operational without the operator having 17.5.2 Each external intake shall be equipped with National Hose threads, a to get under the apparatus. removable or accessible strainer, and a bleeder valve to bleed off air or water 1 17.8.7 A bypass line of not less than /4 in. (6.3 mm) diameter, which has from a hose connected to the intake. a valve that can be controlled from the pump operator’s position or an 17.5.2.1 Adapter couplings with special threads or other means for hose automatic-type control, shall be installed from the discharge manifold attachment shall be permitted to be furnished on any or all intakes. directly to the water tank or ground. 17.5.2.2 All intakes shall be provided with closures capable of withstanding 17.9 Pump Drive Systems. a hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 500 psi (3400 kPa). 17.9.1 Where the pump is driven by a transmission-mounted (SAE) PTO, 17.5.2.2.1 Intakes having male threads shall be equipped with caps; intakes front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or flywheel PTO, the provisions of 16.10.4 having female threads shall be equipped with plugs. through 16.10.7 shall be applied as applicable. 17.5.2.2.2 Where adapters for special threads or other means for hose 17.9.2 Where the pump is driven by a chassis transmission-mounted attachment are provided on the intakes, closures shall be provided for the (SAE) PTO and the pump system does not conform to 16.4.2, a visible or adapters in lieu of caps or plugs. audible warning device shall be provided on the pump operator’s panel that is actuated if the temperature of the lubricant in the chassis transmission 1 17.5.2.3 Caps or closures for 3 /2-in. (90-mm) and smaller intakes shall be exceeds the transmission manufacturer’s recommended maximum removable from the intakes, but remain secured to the apparatus. temperature. 17.6* Pump Discharge Connections. 17.9.3 Indicator Light. 17.6.1 Each pump discharge shall be equipped with a valve that can be 17.9.3.1 Where a separate engine is used to drive the auxiliary pump, an controlled from the pump operator’s position. amber indicator light shall be provided in the driving compartment that is energized when the pump engine is running. 17.6.2 Any discharge outlets that are fed by lines from both the auxiliary pump and the main pump shall have check valves in both supply lines. 17.9.3.2 This light shall be marked with a label that reads “Pump Engine Running.” 17.6.3 Discharge Outlet Connections. DRAFT17.9.4* If a separate pumping engine is provided, it shall meet the 17.6.3.1* All discharge outlets shall be equipped with male National Hose requirements of 12.2.1.1, 12.2.1.2, 12.2.2, 12.2.3.1, 12.2.3.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.5, threads. and Sections 13.4 and 13.5. 17.6.3.2 Adapter couplings with special threads or other means for hose 17.10 Engine Controls. attachment shall be permitted to be furnished on any or all outlets. 17.10.1 A throttle control that holds its set position shall be provided to 17.6.4 All discharge outlets, except outlets to which a hose will be control the engine speed. It shall be located so that it can be manipulated preconnected, shall be equipped with caps or closures capable of from the pump operator’s position with all instrumentation in full view. withstanding a minimum hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 100 psi (700 kPa) over the maximum pump close-off pressure or 500 psi (3400 kPa), 17.10.2 This throttle control shall be permitted to be the same throttle whichever is greater. control that is used for the main fire pump. 17.6.4.1 Where adapters are provided on the discharge outlet, the closures 17.11 Gauges and Instruments. shall fit on the adapters. 17.11.1 Master Pump Discharge Pressure Indicating Device. A master 1 17.6.4.2 Caps or closures for outlets 3 /2-in. (90-mm) and smaller in size discharge pressure indicating device shall be provided. shall be removable from the outlet but remain secured to the apparatus. 17.11.1.1 It shall read from a gauge pressure of 0 to at least 300 psi (2100 17.6.5 If a water tank fill line is provided, the line shall be connected from kPa) but not less than 100 psi (700 kPa) higher than the maximum pressure the pump discharge manifold directly to the water tank and shall include a that can be developed by the pump when it is operating with zero intake valve that can be controlled from the pump operator’s position. pressure. 17.7 Pump Operator’s Panel. 17.11.1.2 Where an analog pressure gauge is used, it shall have a minimum accuracy of Grade 1A as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.

910 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 17.11.1.2.1 Numerals for master gauges shall be a minimum 0.25 in. (6.4 Chapter 18 Industrial Supply Pump and Associated Equipment mm) high. 18.1 Application. If the apparatus is equipped with a industrial supply 17.11.1.2.2 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi (70 pump, the provisions of this chapter shall apply. kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). 18.2 Design and Performance Requirements. 17.11.1.2.3 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure pulsation 18.2.1 Rated Capacity. dampened, be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have 18.2.1.1 The industrial supply pump shall be mounted on the apparatus and internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. shall have a minimum rated capacity of 3000 gpm (12000 L/min) at 100 psi 17.11.1.3 If a digital pressure indicating device is used, the digits shall be at (700 kPa) net pump pressure. least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) high. 18.2.1.2 Pumps of higher capacity shall be rated at one of the capacities 17.11.1.3.1 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in specified in Table 18.2.4.1(a). increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). 18.2.2 A label on the pump panel shall state “This apparatus is equipped 17.11.1.3.2 Digital master pressure indicating devices shall have an with an industrial supply pump that has a different performance envelope accuracy of ±3 percent over the full scale. than a fire pump.” 17.11.2 Discharge Outlet Instrumentation. If the apparatus is equipped 18.2.3* Pumping System Capability. 1 with 1 /2-in. (38-mm) or larger discharge outlets that can only be supplied by the auxiliary pump, these discharge outlets shall be equipped with pressure 18.2.3.1 The pumping system provided shall be capable of delivering the indicating devices or flowmeters. following: 17.11.2.1 The pressure indicating device or flowmeter display shall be (1) 100 percent of rated capacity at 100 psi (700 kPa) net pump pressure located adjacent to the corresponding valve control with no more than 6 in. (2) 70 percent of rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure (150 mm) separating the pressure indicating device or flowmeter bezel and the valve control centerline. (3) 50 percent of rated capacity at 200 psi (1400 kPa) net pump pressure 17.11.2.2 Pressure indicating devices shall be connected to the outlet side of 18.2.3.2 Priming Capability. the valve. 18.2.3.2.1 When dry, the pump system shall be capable of taking suction 17.11.2.3 Flowmeters shall display flow in not greater than 10 gpm (38 through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose under the conditions specified in Table L/min). 18.2.4.1(a) for the rated capacity of the pump, and discharging water in not more than 45 seconds. 17.11.2.4 Where an analog pressure gauge is used, the gauge shall have a minimum accuracy of Grade B as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure 18.2.3.2.2 An additional 15 seconds shall be permitted to meet these Gauges and Gauge Attachments. requirements where the pump system includes an auxiliary 4-in. (100-mm) or larger intake pipe having a volume of 1 ft3 (0.3 m3) or more. 5 17.11.2.4.1 Numerals for gauges shall be a minimum /32 in. (4 mm) high. 18.2.3.3 Vacuum. 17.11.2.4.2 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi (70 kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures 18.2.3.3.1 The completed pumping system shall be capable of developing a at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). vacuum of 22 in. Hg (75 kPa) at altitudes up to 2000 ft (600 m) by means of the pump priming device and sustaining the vacuum for at least 5 minutes 17.11.2.4.3 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure pulsation with a loss not to exceed 10 in. Hg (34 kPa). dampened, be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. 18.2.3.3.2 The requirement in 18.2.3.3.1 shall be met with all intake valves open, all intakes capped or plugged, all discharge caps removed, and without 17.11.2.5 If a digital pressure indicating device is used, the digits shall be at the use of the pump primer during the 5-minute period. least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) high. 18.2.4 Pump Suction Capability. 17.11.2.5.1 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). 18.2.4.1* The pump manufacturer shall certify that the industrial supply pump is capable of pumping 100 percent of rated capacity at 100 psi (700 17.11.2.5.2 Digital pressure indicating devices shall have an accuracy of ±3 kPa) net pump pressure from draft through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose with a percent over the full scale. strainer attached under the following conditions: 17.11.3 Protection of Gauges and Instruments. Each pressure indicating (1) An altitude of 2000 ft (600 m) above sea level device or flowmeter, and its respective display, shall be mounted and attached so it is protected from accidental damage and excessive vibration. (2) Atmospheric pressure of 29.9 in. Hg (101 kPa) (corrected to sea level) 17.12 Testing. The pump, piping, valves, and caps or plugs shall be (3) Water temperature of 60°F (15.6°C) hydrostatically tested to 100 psi (700 kPa) above the maximum system operating pressure, and the apparatus manufacturer shall certify the test (4) Suction hose size, number of hose, and lift as indicated in Table results in writing. 18.2.4.1(a) DRAFT(5) Friction and entrance loss in suction hose, including strainer, as given in Table 18.2.4.1(b) or Table 18.2.4.1(c)

Table 18.2.4.1(a) Suction Hose Size, Number of Suction Lines, and Lift for Industrial Supply Pumps

Rated Maximum Suction Maximum Number of Maximum Capacity Hose Size Suction Lines Lift gpm L/min in. mm ft m 3,000 12,000 8 200 4 6 1.8 3,500 14,000 8 200 4 6 1.8 4,000 16,000 8 200 4 6 1.8 4,500 18,000 8 200 4 6 1.8 5,000 20000 8 200 4 6 1.8

911 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table 18.2.4.1(b) Friction and Entrance Loss in 20 ft of Suction Hose, Including Strainer (inch-pound units)

Flow Rate Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) (gpm) Two 6 in. Three 6 in. Four 6 in. ft. In ft. In ft. In water* Hg water* Hg water* Hg 3000 7.6 (1.4) 6.9 3.4 (0.6) 3.0 2100 3.7 (0.7) 3.4 1.7 (0.3) 1.5 1500 1.9 (0.4) 1.7 0.9 (0.2) 0.8

3500 2.6 (0.5) 2.3 2450 1.2 (0.3) 1.1 1750 0.7 (0.2) 0.6

4000 4.8 (0.9) 4.3 3.4 (0.6) 3.0 2800 2.8 (0.5) 2.5 1.7 (0.3) 1.5 2000 1.4 (0.3) 1.2 0.9 (0.2) 0.8

4500 7.6 (1.4) 6.7 4.3 (0.8) 3.8 3150 3.7 (0.7) 3.3 2.2 (0.4) 1.9 2250 1.9 (0.4) 1.7 1.1 (0.2) 1

5000 7.6 (1.4) 6.7 4.5 (0.9) 4 3500 3.8 (0.7) 3.4 2.3 (0.5) 2 2500 2.4 (0.4) 2.1 1.3 (0.3) 1.2

Table 18.2.4.1(b) continued

Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) Flow Rate One 8-in Two 8 in. Three 8-in Four 8-in. Gpm ft. In ft. In ft. In ft. In water* Hg water* Hg water* Hg water* Hg 3000 10.1 (3.0) 9.0 2.3 (0.6) 2.1 2100 4.7 (1.3) 4.2 1.0 (0.3) 0.9 1500 2.3 (0.7) 2.1 0.6 (0.2) 0.5

3500 3.2 (0.8) 2.8 1.4 (0.4) 1.3 0.8 (0.2) 0.7 2450 DRAFT1.5 (0.4) 1.3 0.7 (0.2) 0.6 0.4 (0.1) 0.4 1750 0.7 (0.2) 0.7 0.4 (0.1) 0.4 0.2 (0.1) 0.2

4000 4.3 (1.1) 3.8 1.9 (0.5) 1.8 1.0 (0.3) 0.9 2800 2.0 (0.6) 1.8 0.9 (0.3) 0.8 0.5 (0.2) 0.5 2000 1.0 (0.3) 0.9 0.4 (0.2) 0.4 0.25 (0.1) 0.25

4500 5.6 (1.4) 5.0 2.5 (0.7) 2.3 1.2 (0.3) 1.1 3150 2.5 (0.9) 2.2 1.1 (0.4) 1.0 0.6 (0.2) 0.5 2250 1.2 (0.4) 1.1 0.5 (0.2) 0.4 0.3 (0.1) 0.3

5000 7.0 (1.7) 6.2 3.1 (0.8) 3.0 1.5 (0.4) 1.3 3500 3.2 (1.0) 2.8 1.5 (0.5) 1.3 0.8 (0.2) 0.7 2500 1.5 (0.4) 1.3 0.7 (0.2) 0.6 0.4 (0.1) 0.4 * Figures in parentheses indicate increment to be added or subtracted for each 10 ft of hose greater than or less than 20 ft.

912 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table 18.2.4.1(c) Friction and Entrance Loss in 6 m of Suction Hose, Including Strainer (metric units)

Suction Hose Size (inside diameter)

Two 150 mm Three 150 mm Four 150 mm Flow Rate (L/min) m of water* kPa m of water* kPa m of water* kPa 12,000 2.3 (0.4) 23 1.0 (0.2) 10

8,400 1.1 (0.2) 12 0.5 (0.1) 5 6,000 0.6 (0.1) 6 0.3 (0.1) 3

14,000 0.8 (0.2) 8 9,800 0.4 (0.1) 4 7,000 0.2 (0.1) 2

16,000 1.5 (0.3) 15 1.0 (0.2) 10 11,200 0.9 (0.2) 8 0.5 (0.1) 5 8,000 0.4 (0.1) 4 0.3 (0.1) 3

18,000 2.3 (0.4) 23 1.3 (0.2) 13 12,600 1.1 (0.2) 11 0.7 (0.1) 6 9,000 0.6 (0.1) 6 0.3 (0.1) 3

20,000 2.3 (0.4) 23 1.4 (0.3) 14 14,000 1.2 (0.2) 12 0.7 (0.2) 7

10,000 0.7 (0.1) 7 0.4 (0.1) 4

Table 18.2.4.1(c) continued Suction Hose Size (inside diameter) One 200 mm Two 200 mm Three 200 mm Four 200 mm Flow Rate (L/min) m of water* kPa m of water* kPa m of water* kPa m of water* kPa 12,000 3.1 (0.9) 31 0.7 (0.2) 7 8,400 1.4 (0.4) 14 0.3 (0.1) 3 6,000 0.7 (0.2) 7 0.2 (0.1) 2

14,000 1.0 (0.2) 9 0.4 (0.1) 4 0.2 (0.1) 2 9,800 0.5 (0.1) 4 0.2 (0.1) 2 0.1 (0.1) 1 7,000 DRAFT0.2 (0.1 2 0.1 (0.1) 1 0.1 (0.1) 1

16,000 1.3 (0.3) 13 0.6 (0.2) 6 0.3 (0.1) 3 11,200 0.6 (0.2) 6 0.3 (0.1) 3 0.2 (0.(1) 2

8,000 0.3 (0.1) 3 0.1 (0.1) 1 0.1 (0.1) 1

18,000 1.7 (0.4) 17 0.8 (0.2) 8 0.4 (0.1) 4 12,600 0.8 (0.3) 7 0.3 (0.1) 3 0.2 (0.1) 2

9,000 0.4 (0.1) 4 0.2 (0.1) 1 0.1 (0.1) 1

20,000 2.1 (0.5) 21 0.9 (0.2) 10 0.5 (0.1) 4

14,000 1.0 (0.3) 9 0.5 (0.2) 4 0.2 (0.1) 2

10,000 0.5 (0.1) 4 0.2 (0.1) 2 0.1 (0.1) 1

* Figures in parentheses indicate increments to be added or subtracted for each 3 m of hose less than or greater than 6 m. 913 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 18.2.4.2* The pump manufacturer shall certify that the pump is capable 18.5.4 The entire discharge and intake piping system, valves, drain cocks of pumping rated capacity at 100 psi (700 kPa) net pump pressure at any of and lines, and intake and outlet closures, excluding the tank fill and tank to the following special conditions when these conditions are specified by the pump lines on the tank side of the valves in those lines, shall be capable of purchaser: withstanding a minimum hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 500 psi (3400 kPa). (1) At an elevation above 2000 ft (600 m) 18.5.5 Pulsation – Free Fire Streams. (2) At lifts higher than those listed in Table 18.2.4.1(a) or through more than 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose, or both 15.5.5.1 The pump shall be capable of producing fire streams that are free from pulsations. 18.3 Pumping Engine Requirements. 18.5.5.2 When an accumulator is used to provide a pulsation-free fire 18.3.1 The apparatus manufacturer shall approve the use of the pumping streams, the accumulator shall be constructed and tested in accordance with engine for stationary pumping applications based on the size of the fire the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 2. apparatus and the rating of the pump being furnished. 18.5.6 The pump shall allow a positive pressure water source to directly add 18.3.2 Engine Speed. to the pump’s net pump pressure. 18.3.2.1 The engine shall be capable of performing the pumping tests herein 18.6 Pump Intake Connections. specified without exceeding the maximum governed speed of the engine as shown on a certified brake horsepower curve of the type of engine used 18.6.1* Intake(s) of the same or larger size and quantity than the maximums without accessories. specified in Table 18.2.4.1(a) for suction hose size and number of suction lines shall be provided. 18.3.2.2 The brake horsepower curve certification shall be signed by a responsible official of the engine manufacturer. 18.6.1.1 The intakes specified in 18.6.1 shall have male National Hose threads if the apparatus is to be used in the United States of America. 18.3.3* If a separate pumping engine is provided, it shall meet the requirements of 12.2.1.1, 12.2.1.2, 12.2.1.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.3.1, 12.2.3.2, 12.2.4, 18.6.1.2 If the couplings on the suction hose carried on the apparatus are of 12.2.5, and Sections 13.4 and 13.5. a different size than the pump intake(s) or have means of hose attachment other than that provided on the intake(s), an adapter(s) shall be provided to 18.3.4 A supplementary heat exchanger cooling system shall be provided for allow connection of the suction hose to the pump intake(s). the pump drive engine. 18.6.1.3* A plate shall be provided on the pump operators panel that states 18.3.4.1 Valving shall be installed to permit water from the discharge the following: side of the pump to cool the coolant circulating through the engine cooling system without intermixing. “Warning: Death or serious injury might occur if proper operating procedures are not followed. The pump operator, as well as individuals 18.3.4.2 The heat exchanger shall maintain the temperature of the coolant connecting supply or discharge hoses to the apparatus, must be familiar with in the pump drive engine not in excess of the engine manufacturer’s the operator’s manual, water hydraulics hazards, and component limitations.” temperature rating under all pumping conditions. 18.6.2* Intake Strainer. 18.3.4.3 A drain(s) shall be provided to allow draining of the heat exchanger so as to prevent damage from freezing. 18.6.2.1 Each intake shall have a removable or accessible strainer inside the connection. 18.3.5 Indicator or Light. 18.6.2.2* The strainer(s) shall restrict spherical debris that is too large to 18.3.5.1 Where a separate engine is used to drive the pump, an indicator or pass through the pump. light that is energized when the pump engine is running shall be provided in the driving compartment. 18.6.3 At least one valved intake shall be provided that can be controlled from the pump operator’s position. 18.3.5.2 The indicator or light shall be marked with a label that reads “Pump 1 Engine Running.” 18.6.3.1 The valve and piping shall be a minimum 2 /2 in. (65 mm) nominal size. 18.4 Power Train Capability. 1 18.6.3.2 If the intake is 2 /2 in. (65 mm) nominal size, the intake shall be 18.4.1 Indicator or Light. All components in the power train from the equipped with a female swivel coupling with National Hose threads. engine to the fire pump shall be capable of transmitting the torque necessary to power the pump, as installed in the apparatus, for the pump performance 18.6.4 Any 3-in. (75-mm) or larger intake valve except the tank to pump points specified in 18.2.3.1 without exceeding the component manufacturer’s intake valve shall be a slow-operating valve. continuous duty torque rating. 18.6.5* Each valved intake shall be equipped with a bleeder valve having a 3 18.4.2 When pumping continuously at each of the pump performance points minimum /4-in. (19-mm) pipe thread connection to bleed off air or water. specified in 18.2.3.1, lubricant temperatures in any power train component installed in the apparatus from the 18.6.5.1 The bleeder valve shall be operational without the operator having to get under the apparatus. engine to the pump shall not exceed the component manufacturer’s recommendation for maximum temperature. 18.6.5.2 If a valved appliance is attached to an intake, it shall be equipped 3 with a /4-in. (19-mm) bleeder valve on each intake. 18.4.3* When the engine and pumping system, under any pumping DRAFT1 condition, have the capability to exceed the component manufacturer’s 18.6.6 Each valved intake having a connection size of 3 /2 in. (90 mm) or continuous duty torque rating, a means shall be provided to control the larger shall be equipped with an adjustable automatic pressure relief device engine output to a level equal to or below the component manufacturer’s installed on the supply side of the valve to bleed off pressure from a hose continuous duty torque rating. connected to the valved intake. 18.5 Construction Requirements. 18.6.6.1 The automatic pressure relief device shall be adjustable from a minimum of 90 psi (620 kPa) to at least 185 psi (1275 kPa). 18.5.1* Wetted moving parts shall be constructed of a corrosion-resistant material. 18.6.6.2 The pressure relief device, when preset at 125 psi (860 kPa), shall not allow a pressure rise greater than 60 psi (400 kPa) at the device inlet 18.5.2 Hydrostatic Test. while flowing a minimum of 150 gpm (570 L/min). 18.5.2.1 The pump body shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test to a gauge 18.6.6.3 The pressure relief device shall discharge to atmosphere and the pressure of 500 psi (3400 kPa) minimum for 10 minutes. discharge shall be piped or directed away from the pump operator’s position. 18.5.2.2 The pump manufacturer shall provide a certificate of completion for 18.6.7 If the pump is equipped with one or more intakes larger than 3 1/2 in. the hydrostatic test. (89 mm) that are not valved, an adjustable automatic pressure relief device shall be installed on the pump system to bleed off excess pressure from a 18.5.3 Where an auxiliary pump is provided in combination with an hose connected to the pump intake. industrial supply pump and where the pumps are interconnected so that pressure from one pump can be transmitted to the other pump, check valves, 18.6.7.1 The automatic pressure relief device shall be adjustable from a intake or discharge relief valves, pump drive gear ratios, or other automatic minimum of 90 psi (620 kPa) to at least 185 psi (1275 kPa). means shall be provided to avoid pressurizing either pump beyond its maximum rated hydrostatic pressure. 18.6.7.2 The pressure relief device, when preset at 125 psi (860 kPa), shall not allow a pressure rise greater than 60 psi (400 kPa) at the device inlet flowing a minimum of 150 gpm (570 L/min). 914 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 18.6.7.3 The pressure relief device shall discharge to atmosphere. connection for draining or bleeding off pressure from a hose connected to the outlet. 18.6.8 All intakes shall be provided with caps or closures capable of withstanding a hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 500 psi (3400 kPa). 18.7.7 Any 2-in. (52-mm) or larger discharge outlet that is located more than 42 in. (1067 mm) off the ground to which hose is to be connected and 18.6.8.1 Intakes having male threads shall be equipped with caps; intakes that is not in a hose storage area shall be supplied with a sweep elbow of at having female threads shall be equipped with plugs. least 30 degrees downward. 18.6.8.2 Where adapters for special threads or other means for hose 18.7.8 Valves. attachment are provided on the intakes, closures shall be provided for the adapters in lieu of caps or plugs. 18.7.8.1 Each pump discharge shall have a valve that can be controlled from the pump operator’s position. 1 18.6.9 Caps or closures for 3 /2-in. (90-mm) and smaller intakes shall be removable from the intakes but remain secured to the apparatus. 18.7.8.2 A secondary valve shall be permitted to be provided at a discharge outlet if required for special applications. 18.6.10 If the suction inlets are to be equipped with a valve, siamese, or adapter that will remain in place while the apparatus is in motion, that valve, 18.7.9* Location of Discharge Outlets. siamese, or adapter shall not project beyond the apparatus running board. 1 18.7.9.1 No discharge outlet larger than 2 /2 in. (65 mm) shall be located at 18.6.11 The purchaser shall specify if any valve, siamese, or adapter is to be the pump operator’s panel. permanently installed on an intake and identify the brand and model of such item. 18.7.9.2 If the apparatus has a top console–type pump operator’s panel, 1 vertical discharge outlets larger than 2 /2 in. (65 mm) shall be permitted at 18.7 Pump Discharge Outlets. the top midship position of apparatus where the outlets are used for directly connected deck guns or monitors and no fire hose is used for coupling the 1 18.7.1* Discharge outlets of 2 /2 in. (65 mm) or larger shall be provided to components. discharge the rated capacity of the pump at the flow rates shown in Table 18.7.1. 18.7.10 Where the valve operating mechanism does not indicate the position of the valve, an indicator shall be provided to show when the valve is closed. Table 18.7.1 Discharge Rates by Outlet Size 18.8 Pump Drains. Outlet Size Flow Rates 18.8.1 A readily accessible drain valve(s) that is marked with a label as in. mm gpm L/min to its function shall be provided to allow for draining of the pump and all 2 1/2 65 250 1000 water-carrying lines and accessories. 3 75 375 1400 18.8.2 The drain valve(s) shall be operational without the operator having to get under the apparatus. 3 1/2 90 500 2000 4 100 625 2400 18.9 Pump Operator’s Panel. 4 1/2 110 750 3000 18.9.1* Each pump control, gauge, and other instrument necessary to operate the pump shall be located on a panel known as the pump operator’s 5 125 1000 4000 panel and shall be marked with a label as to its function. 6 150 1440 5500 18.9.2 All gauges, discharge outlets, pump intakes, and controls shall be illuminated to a minimum lighting level of 5 footcandles (50 lx).

18.7.1.1 If the apparatus is equipped with an aerial device with a waterway 18.10* Pump Controls. that is permanently connected to the pump, the discharge from that waterway 18.10.1 General Provisions. Provisions shall be made for placing the pump shall be permitted to be credited as a 1000-gpm (4000-L/min) outlet. drive system in operation using controls and switches that are identified and 1 within convenient reach of the operator. 18.7.1.2 A minimum of two 2 /2-in. (65-mm) outlets shall be provided. 18.7.2 Discharge Outlet Connections. 18.10.1.1 Where the pump is driven by the chassis engine and engine compression brakes or engine exhaust brakes are furnished, they shall be 1 automatically disengaged for pumping operations. 18.7.2.1 All 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or larger discharge outlets shall be equipped with male National Hose threads. 18.10.1.2* Any control device used in the pumping system power train 18.7.2.2* Adapter couplings with special threads or other means for hose between the engine and the pump, except a manual pump shift override attachment shall be permitted to be furnished on any or all outlets. device if provided, shall be equipped with a means to prevent unintentional movement of the control device from its set position in the pumping mode. 18.7.3* The piping and valves supplying any preconnected 1 1/2-in. (38- mm), 1 3/4 in. (45-mm), or 2-in. (52-mm) hose line including the piping to 18.10.1.3 A label indicating the chassis transmission shift selector position the preconnected hose storage areas specified in Section 11.7(2) shall be at to be used for pumping shall be provided in the driving compartment and least 2 in. (52 mm) in size. located so that it can be read from the driver’s position. 18.7.4 All discharge outlets, except outlets to which a hose will be 18.10.1.4 Where the pump is driven by the chassis engine and transmission preconnected, DRAFTshall be equipped with caps or closures capable of through a split shaft PTO, the driving compartment speedometer shall withstanding a minimum hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of 100 psi (700 register when the pump drive system is engaged. kPa) over the maximum pump close-off pressure or 500 psi (3400 kPa), whichever is greater. 18.10.1.5 Where chassis transmission retarders are furnished, they shall be automatically disengaged for pumping operations. 18.7.4.1 Where adapters are provided on the discharge outlets, the closures shall fit on the adapters. 18.10.2 Stationary Pump Driven Through Split Shaft PTO — Automatic Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with 1 an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis 18.7.4.2 Caps or closures for outlets 3 /2 in. (90 mm) and smaller in size shall be removable from the outlet but remain secured to the apparatus. engine through the transmission’s main driveline, and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to 18.7.5 Each discharge outlet shall be equipped with a valve that can be ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping opened and closed smoothly at the flows shown in Table 18.7.1 at pump mode of operation so that the pumping system can be operated from the discharge gauge pressures of 250 psi (1700 kPa). pump operator’s position. 18.7.5.1 The flow-regulating element of each valve shall not change its 18.10.2.1* A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving position under any condition of operation that involves discharge pressures compartment to indicate that the pump shift process has been successfully to the maximum pressure of the pump; the means to prevent a change in completed. position shall be incorporated in the operating mechanism and shall be permitted to be manually or automatically controlled. 18.10.2.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission 18.7.5.2 Any 3-in. (75-mm) or larger discharge valve shall be a slow- is in pump gear, and the parking brake is engaged. operating valve. 18.10.2.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump 1 18.7.6 All 1 /2-in. (38-mm) or larger discharge outlets shall be equipped operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or 3 with a drain or bleeder valve having a minimum /4-in. (19-mm) pipe thread that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 915 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 18.10.3 Stationary Pump Driven Through Split Shaft PTO — Manual 18.10.6.2.3 When the “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator is energized, the Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped with an manual “OK to Pump” indicator shall not be energized. chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine through the transmission’s main driveline, and the apparatus is to be used for 18.10.6.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure operator’s panel that is energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is that the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode energized or when the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking of operation so that the pumping system can be operated from the pump brake is engaged. operator’s position. 18.10.7 Stationary and “Pump and Roll” Pumps — Manual Chassis 18.10.3.1* A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving Transmissions. Where the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and completed. the apparatus is designed to be used in both the stationary pumping mode and the “pump and roll” pumping mode with the chassis transmission in 18.10.3.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving neutral for stationary pumping or in a road gear for pump and roll pumping, compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system engaged. components are properly engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the apparatus can be operated in either stationary or pump and roll pumping 18.10.3.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump mode. operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or that the parking brake is engaged. 18.10.7.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving compartment and at the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump shift 18.10.4 Stationary Pump Driven Through Transmission-Mounted has been successfully completed. PTO, Front-of-Engine Crank Shaft PTO, or Engine Flywheel PTO — Automatic Chassis Transmission. Where the apparatus is equipped 18.10.7.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving with an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by a compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is transmission-mounted (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engaged. engine flywheel PTO, and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only with the chassis transmission in neutral, an interlock system shall be 18.10.7.3 An “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator shall be provided in the provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are engaged in driving compartment and shall be energized when the pump is engaged and the pumping mode of operation so that the pump system can be operated the parking brake is released. from the pump operator’s position. 18.10.7.4 When the “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator is energized, the “OK 18.10.4.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving to Pump” indicator shall not be energized. compartment and on the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump 18.10.7.5 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump shift has been successfully completed. operator’s panel that is energized when the “OK to Pump” indicator is 18.10.4.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving energized or when the parking brake is engaged. compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission 18.10.8 Stationary Pumps Driven Through Transfer Case PTOs — is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. Automatic Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with 18.10.4.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump an automatic chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or engine through the transmission’s main driveline and through a transfer case, that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. and the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components 18.10.5 Stationary Pump Driven Through Transmission-Mounted PTO, are engaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the pumping system Front-of-Engine Crank Shaft PTO, or Engine Flywheel PTO — Manual can be operated from the pump operator’s position. Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with an manual chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by a transmission-mounted 18.10.8.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel PTO, and compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only with the chassis completed. transmission in neutral, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that 18.10.8.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving the pump drive system components are engaged in the pumping mode of compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission operation so that the pump system can be operated from the pump operator’s is in pump gear, the transfer case drive to the chassis wheels is in neutral, position. and the parking brake is engaged. 18.10.5.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving 18.10.8.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump compartment and on the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode or shift has been successfully completed. that the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged. 18.10.5.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving 18.10.9 Stationary Pumps Driven Through Transfer Case PTOs — compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged and the parking brake is Manual Chassis Transmissions. Where the apparatus is equipped with a engaged. manual chassis transmission, the water pump is driven by the chassis engine 18.10.5.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump through the transmission’s main driveline and through a transfer case, and operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode the apparatus is to be used for stationary pumping only, an interlock system or that the parking brake is engaged. shall be provided to ensure that the pump drive system components are DRAFTengaged in the pumping mode of operation so that the pumping system can 18.10.6 Stationary and “Pump and Roll” Pump — Automatic Chassis be operated from the pump operator’s position. Transmissions. Where the water pump is driven by a transmission- mounted (SAE) PTO, front-of-engine crankshaft PTO, or engine flywheel 18.10.9.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving PTO, and the apparatus is designed to be used in both the stationary compartment to indicate that the pump shift has been successfully pumping mode and the “pump and roll” pumping mode with the automatic completed. chassis transmission in neutral for stationary pumping and in a road gear for pump and roll pumping, an interlock system shall be provided to ensure that 18.10.9.2 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving the pump drive system components are properly engaged in the pumping compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the transfer case drive to mode of operation so that the apparatus can be operated in either stationary the chassis wheels is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. or pump and roll pumping mode. 18.10.9.3 A “Throttle Ready” indicator shall be provided at the pump 18.10.6.1 A “Pump Engaged” indicator shall be provided both in the driving operator’s panel that indicates that the apparatus is in “OK to Pump” mode compartment and at the pump operator’s panel to indicate that the pump shift or that the parking brake is engaged. has been successfully completed. 18.10.10 Pump Operator’s Panel Engine Speed Advancement — Automatic Chassis Transmission. An interlock system shall be provided to 18.10.6.2 Indicators. prevent advancement of the engine speed at the pump operator’s panel unless 18.10.6.2.1 An “OK to Pump” indicator shall be provided in the driving the chassis transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged or the compartment to indicate that the pump is engaged, the chassis transmission apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” mode. is in neutral, and the parking brake is engaged. 18.10.11 Pump Operator’s Panel Engine Speed Advancement — Manual 18.10.6.2.2 An “OK to Pump and Roll” indicator shall be provided in the Chassis Transmission. An interlock system shall be provided to prevent driving compartment and shall be energized when the pump is engaged, the advancement of the engine speed at the pump operator’s panel unless the chassis transmission is in road gear, and the parking brake is released. parking brake is engaged or the apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” mode.

916 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 18.10.12 Parallel/Series Control. 18.12.1.2 The instruments and controls required by 18.12.1 shall be placed so as to keep the pump operator as far as practicable from all discharge and 18.10.12.1 With parallel/series centrifugal pumps, the control positions for intake connections and in a location where they are visible and operationally parallel operation (volume) and series operation (pressure) shall be indicated. functional while the operator remains stationary. 18.10.14.2 The control for changing the pump from series to parallel, and 18.12.1.3 Any instrumentation exposed to the elements shall be vice versa, shall be operable at the pump operator’s position. weatherproof. 18.10.13* Pressure Control System. 18.12.1.4 The pumping engine oil pressure and engine-coolant temperature 18.10.13.1* A system shall be provided that, when set in accordance with indicators shall be equipped with audible and visual warnings. the manufacturer’s instructions, will automatically control the discharge 18.12.1.5 All engine operation indicators on the pump operator’s panel shall pressure to a maximum of 30 psi (20 kPa) pressure rise above the set be in addition to those on the vehicle’s instrument panel. pressure(s) when all discharge valves are closed no more rapidly than in 3 seconds, and no more slowly than in 10 seconds, during the following 18.12.2 Master Pump Intake and Discharge Pressure Indicating conditions: Devices. (1) Over a range of pressures from 70 psi to 300 psi (500 kPa to 20 kPa) net 18.12.2.1 Master pump intake and pump discharge pressure indicating pump pressure with intake gauge pressure between –10 psi and 185 psi (–70 devices shall be located within 8 in. (200 mm) of each other, edge to edge, kPa and 1300 kPa) and discharge gauge pressure between 90 psi and 300 psi with the intake pressure indicating device to the left of or below the pump (600 kPa and 2000 kPa) discharge pressure indicating device. (2) With initial engine and pump controls set to produce a range of flows 18.12.2.1.1 The intake pressure indicating device shall read from 30 in. Hg from 150 gpm (550 L/min) to the rated capacity of the pump (100 kPa) vacuum to at least a gauge pressure of 300 psi (2000 kPa). 18.10.13.2 If the pump is equipped with a relief valve system where the 18.12.2.1.2 The discharge pressure indicating device shall read from a system does not control engine speed, the system shall be equipped with a gauge pressure of 0 psi or lower to a gauge pressure of at least 300 psi (2000 means to indicate when the system is in control of the pressure. kPa). 18.10.13.2.1 If the pump is equipped with a governor system that controls 18.12.2.1.3 Pressure indicating devices shall not be damaged by a 30 in. Hg engine speed, an indicator shall show when the system is turned on and (100 kPa) vacuum. whether it is controlling the engine speed or pump pressure. 18.12.2.1.4 Pressure indicating devices shall be marked with labels that 18.10.13.2.2 Either system shall be controllable by one person at the pump read “Pump Intake” for the intake pressure indicating device and “Pump operator position. Discharge” for the discharge pressure indicating device. 18.10.13.3 If the system discharges water to the atmosphere, the discharge 18.12.2.1.5 Where analog gauges are used, there shall be at least a 1-in. shall be in a manner that will not expose personnel to high-pressure water (25-mm) diameter differential in viewing area between the master gauges streams. and the individual discharge gauges, with the master gauges being the larger. 18.10.14* Priming Device. A priming device shall be provided and 18.12.2.1.5.1 The accuracy of gauges shall be a minimum of Grade 1A as controlled from the pump operator’s position. defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. 18.10.14.1 The priming device shall be capable of meeting the requirements 18.12.2.1.5.2 Numerals for master gauges shall be a minimum of 0.25 in. of 18.2.3.2 and 18.2.3.3. (6.4 mm) high. 18.10.14.2 The priming device shall be capable of operating with no 18.12.2.1.5.3 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi lubricant or a biodegradable nontoxic lubricant. (70 kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). 18.10.15 Protection of Pump Controls. All pump controls and devices shall be installed so as to be protected against mechanical damage or the 18.12.2.1.5.4 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure effects of adverse weather conditions on their operation. pulsation dampened, be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. 18.11 Pump Engine Controls. 18.12.2.1.6 If digital master pressure indicating devices are used, they shall 18.11.1* A throttle control that holds its set position shall be provided to meet the requirements of 18.12.2.1.6.1 through 18.12.2.1.6.3. control the pump engine speed. 18.12.2.1.6.1 The digits shall be at least 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) high. 18.11.2 The throttle control shall be located not higher than 72 in. (1800 mm) nor lower than 42 in. (1067 mm) from the operator’s standing position 18.12.2.1.6.2 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in with all instruments in full view. increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). 18.12 Instrumentation. 18.12.2.1.6.3 Digital master pressure indicating devices shall have an accuracy of ±3 percent over the full scale. 18.12.1 Pump Operators Panel. 18.12.3 Discharge Outlet Instrumentation. 18.12.1.1* The following controls and instruments shall be provided and installed as a group at the pump operator’s panel: 18.12.3.1 A flowmeter or a pressure indicating device shall be provided for each discharge outlet 11/ in. (38 mm) or larger in size and shall be marked DRAFT2 (1) A master pump intake pressure indicating device with a label to indicate the outlet to which it is connected. (2) A master pump discharge pressure indicating device 1 18.12.3.2* Any discharge outlet 3 /2 in. (90 mm) or larger that is equipped (3) A pumping engine tachometer with a flowmeter shall also be provided with a pressure indicating device. 18.12.3.3 The pressure indicating device or flowmeter display shall be (4) A pumping engine coolant temperature indicator located adjacent to the corresponding valve control with no more than 6 in. (5) A pumping engine oil pressure indicator (150 mm) separating the pressure indicating device or flowmeter bezel and the valve control midpoint or centerline. (6) A voltmeter 18.12.3.4 If both a flowmeter and pressure indicating device are provided (7) The pump pressure control(s) for an individual discharge outlet, the pressure indicating device shall be located within 6 in. (150 mm) of the valve control midpoint or centerline, and (8) The pumping engine throttle the flowmeter display shall be adjacent to and within 2 in. (52 mm) of the (9) The primer control pressure indicating device bezel. 18.12.3.5 Pressure indicating devices shall be connected to the outlet side (10) The water tank to pump valve control of the valve. (11) The water tank fill valve control 18.12.3.6 Flowmeters shall display flow in increments no greater than 10 (12) The water tank level indicator gpm (38 L/min). 18.12.3.7 Where analog pressure gauges are used, they shall have a minimum accuracy of Grade B as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. 917 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

5 18.12.3.7.1 Numerals for gauges shall be a minimum /32 in. (4 mm) high. 18.13.2.1 Conditions for Test. 18.12.3.7.2 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi (70 18.13.2.1.1 The test site shall be adjacent to a supply of clear water at least kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures 4 ft (1.2 m) deep, with the water level not more than 10 ft (3 m) below the at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). center of the pump intake, and close enough to allow the suction strainer to be submerged at least 2 ft (0.6 m) below the surface of the water when 18.12.3.7.3 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure pulsation connected to the pump by 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose. dampened, be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. 18.13.2.1.2* Tests shall be performed when conditions are as follows: 18.12.3.8 If a digital pressure indicating device is used, they shall meet the (1) Air temperature: 0°F to 110°F (–18°C to 43°C) requirements of 18.12.3.7.1 through 18.12.3.7.3. (2) Water temperature: 35°F to 90°F (2°C to 32°C) 18.12.3.8.1 The digits shall be at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) high. (3) Barometric pressure: 29 in. Hg (98.2 kPa), minimum (corrected to sea 18.12.3.8.2 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in level) increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). 18.13.2.1.3 Engine-driven accessories shall not be functionally 18.12.3.8.3 Digital pressure indicating devices shall have an accuracy of ±3 disconnected or otherwise rendered inoperative during the tests. percent over the full scale. 18.13.2.1.3.1 If the chassis engine drives the pump, the electrical loads and 18.12.3.9 Each flowmeter shall be calibrated to an accuracy of ±5 percent conditions specified in 13.14.3.4 shall be applied during the pumping portion when flowing the amount of water shown in Table 18.12.3.9 for the pipe size of this test. in which it is mounted. 18.13.2.1.3.2 If the vehicle is equipped with a fixed power source driven by the same engine that drives the fire pump, it shall be running at a minimum Table 18.12.3.9 Flowmeter Calibration Flow for Each Pipe Size of 50 percent of its rated capacity throughout the pumping portion of the pump test. Pipe size Flow 18.13.2.1.3.3 The following devices shall be permitted to be turned off or In. mm gpm L/min not operating during the pump test: 1 25 40 150 (1) Aerial hydraulic pump

1 1 /2 38 90 340 (2) Foam pump 2 52 160 600 (3) Hydraulically driven equipment

1 (4) Winch 2 /2 65 250 950 (5) Windshield wipers 3 75 375 1400 (6) Four-way hazard flashers 4 100 625 2400 18.13.2.1.4 All structural enclosures, such as floorboards, gratings, grills, 5 125 1000 4000 and heat shields, not furnished with a means for opening them in service shall be kept in place during the tests. 6 150 1440 5500 18.13.2.2 Equipment. 18.13.2.2.1 Suction Hose. 18.13.2.2.1.1 The suction hose shall be of the appropriate size for the rated 18.12.4 Each pressure indicating device or flowmeter, and its respective capacity of the pump [see Table 18.2.4.1(a)]. display, shall be mounted and attached so it is protected from accidental damage and excessive vibration. 18.13.2.2.1.2 A suction strainer and hose that will allow flow with total friction and entrance loss not greater than that specified in Table 18.2.4.1(b) 18.12.5 Connections for test gauges shall be provided at the pump operator’s or Table 18.2.4.1(c) shall be used. panel. 18.13.2.2.2 Sufficient fire hose shall be provided to discharge the rated 18.12.5.1 One test gauge connection shall be connected to the intake side of capacity of the pump to the nozzles or other flow measuring equipment the pump, and the other shall be connected to the discharge manifold of the without exceeding a flow velocity of 35 ft/sec (10 m/sec) [approximately 500 pump. 1 gpm (2000 L/min) for 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose]. 18.12.5.2 The test gauge connections shall have a 0.25-in. (6.4-mm) 18.13.2.2.3 Where nozzles are used, they shall be smoothbore, and the standard pipe thread, shall be plugged, and shall be marked with a label. 3 inside diameters shall be from /4 in. to 2 1/2 in. (19 mm to 63.5 mm). 18.13 Required Testing. 18.13.2.2.4 Test Gauges. 18.13.1 Pump DRAFTCertification. 18.13.2.2.4.1 All test gauges shall meet the requirements for Grade A gauges as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments, and 18.13.1.1 The pump shall be tested after the pump and all its associated shall be at least size 3 1/2 per ASME B40.100. piping and equipment have been installed on the apparatus. 18.13.2.2.4.2 A mercury manometer shall be permitted to be used in lieu of 18.13.1.1.1 The tests shall include at least the pumping test (see 18.13.2), a pump intake gauge. the pressure control system test (see 18.13.3), the priming device tests (see 18.13.4), and the vacuum test (see 18.13.5). 18.13.2.2.4.3 The pump intake gauge shall have a range of 30 in. Hg (100 kPa) vacuum to zero for a vacuum gauge, or 30 in. Hg (100 kPa) vacuum to a 18.13.1.1.2 If the apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the water tank to gauge pressure of 150 psi (1000 kPa) for a compound gauge. pump flow test (see 18.13.6) shall be included. 18.13.2.2.4.4 The discharge pressure gauge shall have a gauge pressure 18.13.1.1.3 The tests results shall be certified by an independent third-party range of 0 psi to 400 psi (0 kPa to 2800 kPa). certification organization. 18.13.2.2.4.5 Pilot gauges shall have a gauge pressure range of at least 0 psi 18.13.1.2 Test Plates. to 160 psi (0 kPa to 1100 kPa). 18.13.12.2.1 A test plate shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel 18.13.2.2.4.6 All gauges shall be calibrated in the month preceding the tests that gives the rated discharges and pressures together with the speed of the using a dead weight gauge tester or a master gauge meeting the requirements engine as determined by the certification test for each unit, the position of for Grade 3A or 4A gauges, as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges the parallel/series pump as used, and the governed speed of the engine as and Gauge Attachments, that has been calibrated within the preceding year. stated by the engine manufacturer on a certified brake horsepower curve. 18.13.2.2.5 All test gauge connections shall include a means for “snubbing,” 18.13.12.2.2 The plate shall be completely stamped with all information at such as needle valves to damp out rapid needle movements. the factory and attached to the vehicle prior to shipping. 18.13.2.2.6* The engine speed-measuring equipment shall consist of 18.13.2 Pumping Test. a nonadjustable tachometer supplied from the engine or transmission 918 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA electronics, a revolution counter on a checking shaft outlet and a stop watch, 18.13.5.4 The engine shall not be operated at any speed greater than the or other engine speed-measuring means that is accurate to within + 50 rpm governed speed during this test. of actual speed. 18.13.6 Water Tank to Pump Flow Test. 18.13.2.3 Procedure. 18.13.6.1 A water tank to pump flow test shall be conducted as follows: 18.13.2.3.1* The ambient air temperature, water temperature, vertical lift, elevation of test site, and atmospheric pressure (corrected to sea level) shall (1) The water tank shall be filled until it overflows. be determined and recorded prior to and after each pump test. (2) All intakes to the pump shall be closed. 18.13.2.3.2* The engine, pump, transmission, and all parts of the apparatus shall exhibit no undue heating, loss of power, or other defect during the (3) The tank fill line and bypass cooling line shall be closed. entire test. (4) Hose lines and nozzles for discharging water at the rated tank to pump 18.13.2.3.3 The pump shall be subjected to a 3-hour pumping test from draft flow rate shall be connected to one or more discharge outlets. consisting of 2 hours of continuous pumping at rated capacity at 100 psi (700 (5) The tank to pump valve(s) and the discharge valves leading to the 1 kPa) net pump pressure, followed by /2 hour of continuous pumping at 70 hose lines and nozzles shall be fully opened. 1 percent of rated capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump pressure, and /2 hour of continuous pumping at 50 percent of rated capacity at 200 psi (1400 (6) The engine throttle shall be adjusted until the required flow rate –0+5 kPa) net pump pressure. percent is established (see 19.3.2). 18.13.2.3.3.1 The pump shall not be stopped until after the 2-hour test at (7) The discharge pressure shall be recorded. rated capacity, unless it becomes necessary to clean the suction strainer. (8) The discharge valves shall be closed and the water tank refilled. 18.13.2.3.3.2 The pump shall be permitted to be stopped between tests in order to change the hose or nozzles, clean the strainer, or add fuel for the (9) The bypass line shall be permitted to be opened temporarily, if pump drive engine. needed, to keep the water temperature in the pump within acceptable limits. 18.13.2.3.3.3 The capacity, discharge pressure, intake pressure, and engine (10) The discharge valves shall be reopened fully and the time noted. speed shall be recorded at least every 15 minutes but not less than three (11) If necessary, the engine throttle shall be adjusted to maintain the times for each test sequence. discharge pressure recorded as noted in 18.13.7.1(7). 18.13.2.3.3.4 The average net pump pressure shall be calculated and (12) When the discharge pressure drops by 10 psi (70 kPa) or more, the recorded based on the average values for discharge and intake pressure. time shall be noted and the elapsed time from the opening of the discharge 18.13.3 Pressure Control System Test. The pressure control system on the valves shall be calculated and recorded. pump shall be tested as follows: 18.13.6.2 Volume Discharge Calculation. (1) The pump shall be operated at draft, delivering rated capacity at a 18.13.6.2.1 The volume discharged shall be calculated by multiplying the discharge gauge pressure of 100 psi (700 kPa). rate of discharge in gallons per minute (L/min) times the time in minutes (2) The pressure control system shall be set in accordance with the elapsed from the opening of the discharge valves until the discharge pressure manufacturer’s instructions to maintain the discharge gauge pressure at 100 drops by at least 10 psi (70 kPa). psi (700 kPa) ±5 percent. 18.13.6.2.2 Other means shall be permitted to be used to determine the (3) All discharge valves shall be closed no more rapidly than in 3 seconds’ volume of water pumped from the tank such as a totalizing flow meter, time and no more slowly than in 10 seconds’ time. weighing the truck before and after, or refilling the tank using a totalizing flow meter. (4) The rise in discharge pressure shall not exceed 30 psi (200 kPa) and shall be recorded. 18.13.6.3 The rated tank to pump flow rate shall be maintained until 80 percent of the rated capacity of the tank has been discharged. (5) The pump shall be operated at draft, pumping 50 percent of rated capacity at a discharge gauge pressure of 200 psi (1400 kPa). 18.13.7* Manufacturer’s Predelivery Test. (6) The pressure control system shall be set in accordance with the 18.1 3.7.1 The manufacturer shall conduct a piping hydrostatic test prior to manufacturer’s instructions to maintain the discharge gauge pressure at 200 delivery of the apparatus. psi (1400 kPa) ±5 percent. 18.13.7.2 The test shall be conducted as follows: (7) All discharge valves shall be closed no more rapidly than in 3 seconds’ (1) The pump and its connected piping system shall be hydrostatically time and no more slowly than in 10 seconds’ time. tested to a gauge pressure of 250 psi (1700 kPa). (8) The rise in discharge pressure shall not exceed 30 psi (200 kPa) and (2) The hydrostatic test shall be conducted with the tank fill line valve, the shall be recorded. bypass line valve if so equipped, and the tank to pump valve closed. 18.13.4 Priming Device Tests. With the apparatus set up for the pumping test, the primer shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s (3) All discharge valves shall be open and the outlets capped. instructions until the pump has been primed and is discharging water. (4) All intake valves shall be closed, and nonvalved intakes shall be capped. 18.13.4.1 ThisDRAFT test shall be permitted to be performed in connection with (5) This pressure shall be maintained for 3 minutes. priming the pump for the pumping test. Chapter 19 Water Tanks 18.13.4.2 The interval from the time the primer is started until the time the pump is discharging water shall be noted. 19.1 Application. If the fire apparatus is equipped with a water tank, the provisions of this chapter shall apply. 18.13.4.3 The time required to prime the pump shall not exceed 45 seconds. 19.2 Tank Construction. 18.13.4.4 An additional 15 seconds shall be permitted in order to meet the requirements of 18.13.4.3 when the pump system includes an auxiliary 4-in. 19.2.1 All water tanks shall be constructed of noncorrosive material or other (100-mm) or larger intake pipe having a volume of 1 ft3 (0.3 m3) or more. materials that are protected against corrosion and deterioration. 18.13.5 Vacuum Test. The vacuum test shall consist of subjecting the 19.2.2* The water tanks shall have a means to permit complete cleaning of interior of the pump, with all intake valves open, all intakes capped or the tank. plugged, and all discharge caps removed, to a vacuum of 22 in. Hg (75 kPa) by means of the pump priming device. 19.2.3* If the water tank is independent of the body and compartments, it shall be equipped with a method for lifting the tank(s) off of the chassis. 18.1.3.5.1 At altitudes above 2000 ft (600 m), the vacuum attained shall be permitted to be less than 22 in. Hg (75 kPa) by 1 in. Hg (3.4 kPa) for each 19.2.4 Tanks shall be cradled, cushioned, spring-mounted, or otherwise 1000 ft (305 m) of altitude above 2000 ft (600 m). protected from undue stress resulting from travel on uneven terrain, in accordance with the tank manufacturer’s requirements. 18.13.5.2 The vacuum shall not drop more than 10 in. Hg (34 kPa) in 5 minutes. 19.2.5* All water tanks shall be provided with baffles or swash partitions to form a containment or dynamic method of water movement control. 18.13.5.3 The primer shall not be used after the 5-minute test period has begun. 19.2.5.1 If a containment method of baffling is used, a minimum of two transverse or longitudinal vertical baffles shall be provided. 919 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 19.2.5.1.1 There shall be a maximum distance of 48 in. (1220 mm) between 19.4.3.3* The valve shall be capable of regulating flow and shall be any combination of tank vertical walls and baffles. controllable from the pump operator’s position. 19.2.5.1.2 Each baffle shall cover at least 75 percent of the area of the plane 19.5 Mobile Water Supply Apparatus. If the apparatus is designed to be a that contains the baffle. mobile water supply apparatus, the requirements of this section shall apply. 19.2.5.2 If a dynamic method of partitioning is used, the tank shall contain 19.5.1 External Fill. An external fill connection leading directly to the vertical transverse and longitudinal partitions. tank shall be provided. 19.2.5.2.1 The vertical partitions shall be secured to the top and bottom of 19.5.1.1* The external fill connection shall permit a minimum filling rate of the tank. 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) from sources external to the unit. 19.2.5.2.2 The longitudinal partitions shall extend a minimum of 75 percent 19.5.1.2 The external fill connection shall be provided with a removable or of the tank length. accessible strainer, a shutoff valve capable of being throttled, a minimum 30-degree sweep elbow positioned downward, and a closure cap or plug. 19.2.5.2.3 The partitions shall be arranged in such a manner that the vertical plane of each partition shall create cells for which no dimension 19.5.1.3 Any 3-in. (75-mm) or larger valve shall be a slow-operating valve. shall exceed 48 in. (1220 mm). 19.5.1.4 A check-type device shall be permitted to be substituted for the 19.2.6 Clean-out Sumps. modulating and slow-operating valve in those operations where the flow rate is to be controlled at the source. 19.2.6.1 One or more clean-out sumps shall be provided. 19.5.2* Water Transfer. Single or multiple tank connections that meet the 19.2.6.2 A 3-in. (75-mm) or larger removable pipe plug shall be furnished requirements of 19.5.2.1 and 19.5.2.2 shall be provided. in each sump. 19.5.2.1 The tank connection(s) shall be capable of allowing water to be 19.2.6.3 If the sump is used for the tank to pump line connection, the design transferred from the tank to an external use to the right, left, and rear of the shall prevent sludge or debris in the sump from entering the pump. fire apparatus. 19.2.7 Water Level Indicator. 19.5.2.2* Each tank connection shall be capable of emptying 90 percent of the tank capacity at a minimum average rate of 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) with 19.2.7.1 An indicator shall be provided that shows the level or amount of the apparatus on level ground. water in the tank(s). 19.2.7.2 If the apparatus is not equipped with a pump, the indicator shall be 19.6 Water Tank Capacity Certification. visible at the inlet valve position. 19.6.1* The manufacturer shall certify the capacity of the water tank prior 19.3 Tank to Pump Intake Line. to delivery of the apparatus. 19.6.2 The certified capacity shall be recorded on the manufacturer’s record 19.3.1 If the apparatus is equipped with a pump, the water tank shall be (see 4.19.1) connected to the intake side of the pump with a valve controlled at the pump of construction , and the certification shall be provided to the operator’s position. purchaser when the apparatus is delivered. 19.3.2 Certified Capacity. Chapter 20 Aerial Devices 19.3.2.1 If the water tank has a certified capacity of less than 500 gal (2000 20.1* General Requirements. L), the piping and valve arrangement shall be capable of delivering water to 20.1.1 If the apparatus is equipped with an aerial ladder, the aerial device the pump at a minimum rate of 250 gpm (1000 L/min). and apparatus shall meet the requirements of Sections 20.2 through 20.6 and 19.3.2.2 If the water tank has a certified capacity of 500 gal (2000 L) or Sections 20.17 through 20.25. greater, the piping and valve arrangement shall be capable of delivering 20.1.2 If the apparatus is equipped with an elevating platform, the aerial water to the pump at a minimum rate of 500 gpm (2000 L/min) or the rated device and apparatus shall meet the requirements of Sections 20.7 through capacity of the pump, whichever is less. 20.12 and Sections 20.17 through 20.25. 19.3.2.3 The flow required by 19.3.2.1 and 19.3.2 shall be sustainable while 20.1.3 If the apparatus is equipped with a water tower, the aerial device and pumping a minimum of 80 percent of the certified tank capacity with the apparatus shall meet the requirements of Sections 20.13 through 20.25. apparatus on level ground. 20.2 Aerial Ladder Requirements. 19.3.3* An automatic means shall be provided in the tank to pump line that prevents unintentional back-filling of the water tank through that line. 20.2.1 The aerial ladder shall consist of two or more ladder sections that, together with the steps and platforms on the apparatus body, provide 19.3.4 Connections or outlets from the tank(s) to the pump shall be designed continuous egress for fire fighters and civilians from an elevated position to to prevent air from being entrained while pumping water from the tank. the ground. 19.4 Filling and Venting. 20.2.2 The rated vertical height of an aerial ladder shall be at least 50 ft (15 m) and shall be measured in a vertical plane with the ladder at maximum 19.4.1* Fill Opening. A convenient covered fill opening designed to prevent elevation and extension from the outermost rung of the outermost fly section spillage shall be provided. to the ground. 19.4.1.1 The fillDRAFT opening shall be designed to allow the insertion of a 21/ -in. 2 20.2.3 The rated horizontal reach of an aerial ladder shall be measured in a (65-mm) hose with coupling. horizontal plane from the centerline of the turntable rotation to the outermost 19.4.1.2 The cover shall be marked with a label that reads “Water Fill.” rung on the outermost fly section with the aerial ladder extended to its maximum horizontal reach. 19.4.1.3 A screen that is easily removed and cleaned shall be installed in the opening. 20.2.4 Height and reach dimensions shall be taken with the aerial ladder mounted on a chassis meeting the aerial manufacturer’s minimum 19.4.1.4* The cover, or another device, shall open as a vent to release recommended fire apparatus specifications, with the fire apparatus on pressure buildup in the tank. level ground, and with the stabilizers deployed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 19.4.2 Vent/Overflow Outlet. 20.2.5 The ladder rungs shall be equally spaced on a maximum 14-in. (350- 19.4.2.1 A vent/overflow outlet that is sized to allow water to be drawn from mm) centers and minimum 11.75 in. (300 mm) centers and shall have a skid- the tank at a rate at least equal to that required in 19.3.2 shall be provided. resistant surface or covering. 19.4.2.2* The vent/overflow outlet shall be designed to direct any water to 20.2.5.1 Where covering is provided, it shall not twist and shall cover at behind the rear axle so as not to interfere with rear tire traction. least 60 percent of the length of each rung. 19.4.3* Tank Fill Line. If the apparatus is equipped with a pump, a valved 20.2.5.2 Where round rungs are furnished, the rungs shall have a minimum tank fill line shall be provided. 1 outside diameter of 1 /4 in. (32 mm) including the skid-resistant surface or 19.4.3.1* Where the water tank has a capacity of 1000 gal. (4000 L) or less, covering. the tank fill line shall be at least 1 in. (25 mm) nominal inside diameter. 20.2.5.3 Where rungs other than round are furnished, they shall have a 2 2 19.4.3.2* Where the water tank has a capacity greater than 1000 gal (4000 cross-sectional area not less than 1.2 in. (775 mm ); a maximum outside L), the fill line shall be at least 2 in. (52 mm) nominal inside diameter. dimension of the cross-sectional area (height or width) of 3.2 in. (81 mm), 920 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA including the skid-resistant surface or covering; and a minimum outside 20.2.13.3.1 All valves, pressure regulators, and gauges shall be protected 3 dimension of /4 in. (19 mm), including the skid-resistant surface or covering. from accidental damage. 20.2.5.4 The minimum design load for each rung shall be 500 lb (200 kg) 20.2.13.3.2 The piping or hose system between the air cylinder(s) and the 1 distributed over a 3 /2-in. (89-mm) wide area at the center of the length of secondary aerial ladder operator’s position shall be installed so as to prevent the rung with the rung oriented in its weakest position. damage due to abrasion, bending, pinching, or exposure to excessive heat. 20.2.6 There shall be a minimum of 18 in. (460 mm) in width inside the 20.2.13.4 Holders shall be provided for the storage of the breathing air aerial ladder between the rails measured at the narrowest point, excluding equipment when it is not in use. any mounted equipment. 20.2.13.5 A low air warning system shall be provided that shall monitor the 20.2.7 Obstructions Below the Ladder. air volume and shall provide an audible and visual warning at both the upper and lower control stations when the air volume is at or below 20 percent. 20.2.7.1 Where a solid obstruction below the ladder is wider than 12 in. (300 mm), a minimum clearance of 7 in. (180 mm) between the centerline of the 20.2.13.6 The quality of the breathing air shall meet the requirements of rung and the obstruction shall be provided. NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection. 20.2.7.2 Where the solid obstruction below the centerline of the ladder is 12 in. (300 mm) or less in width, the standoff between the centerline of the 20.2.13.7 All components of the system that the breathing air will be in rung and the obstruction shall be permitted to be less than 7 in. (180 mm), contact with shall be cleaned of oil, grease, contaminants, and foreign provided there is at least 6 in. (150 mm) of rung width and 7 in. (180 mm) of material. depth below the centerline of the rung on each side of the obstruction. 20.3 Aerial Ladder Rated Capacity. 20.2.8 Top rails shall be provided on the ladder, shall have a minimum width of 1 in. (25 mm), and shall be at a minimum height of 12 in. (300 mm) 20.3.1 The rated capacity of the aerial ladder shall be a minimum load of above the centerline of the rungs excluding the outermost two rungs of the 250 lb (114 kg) carried on the outermost rung of the outermost fly section outermost fly section. with the aerial ladder placed in the horizontal position at maximum extension. 20.2.9 Two folding steps with surfaces that meet the skid-resistant requirements of 15.7.3 shall be provided on the ladder for use by the ladder 20.3.1.1 The aerial ladder shall be capable of operating in any position pipe-monitor operator. while carrying its rated capacity on the outermost rung of the outermost fly section. 20.2.9.1 Each folding step shall have a minimum design load of 500 lb (200 kg) and shall be a minimum of 35 in.2 (225 cm2) in area. 20.3.1.2 If the aerial ladder has a permanently mounted water delivery system, the 250 lb (114 kg) rated capacity shall be determined without water 20.2.9.2 A single step that has a minimum design load of 500 lb (200 kg) in the system. and a minimum area of 100 in.2 (650 cm2) shall be permitted to be used in place of the two steps. 20.3.2 The rated capacity of the aerial ladder shall be a minimum load of 250 lb (114 kg) carried on the outermost rung of the outermost fly section 20.2.10 Provisions shall be made so that the personnel working on the with the aerial ladder at 45 degrees to the horizontal and at maximum ladder can attach fall protection harnesses. extension while discharging water at rated capacity through the full range of monitor or nozzle movements as permitted by the aerial manufacturer. 20.2.11 The apparatus shall be equipped with steps that meet the skid resistance requirements of 15.7.3 or with rungs that provide a path at any 20.3.3 Rated capacities in excess of 250 lb (114 kg) shall be stated in degree of elevation from the bottom rung of the aerial ladder to the ground. increments of 250 lb (114 kg) and shall be in addition to any fire-fighting equipment installed on the aerial ladder by the manufacturer. 20.2.11.1 Steps, with the exception of the ground to the first step, shall be spaced on no more than 18-in. (460-mm) centers. 20.3.4* If the aerial ladder is rated in multiple configurations, the manufacturer shall describe these configurations, including the rated 20.2.11.2 Handrails shall also be provided within reach at each step capacity of each, in both the operations manual and on a plate at the location. operator’s control station. 20.2.12 With the stabilizers set, the aerial ladder shall be capable of being 20.4 Aerial Ladder Operating Position. raised from the bedded position to maximum elevation and extension and rotated 90 degrees. 20.4.1 Indicating devices that are lighted and marked with a label shall be visible from the operator’s position and shall indicate the following: 20.2.12.1 Two or more of these functions shall be permitted to be performed simultaneously. (1) Rungs are aligned for climbing 20.2.12.2 The functions described in 20.2.12 shall be accomplished within (2) Aerial ladder is aligned with the travel bed 120 seconds if the aerial ladder has a rated vertical height of 110 ft (34 m) or less. 20.4.2 A system that is lighted and marked with labels shall be visible from the operators position to indicate the elevation, extension, and rated 20.2.12.3 The functions described in 20.2.12 shall be accomplished within capacities. 180 seconds if the aerial ladder has a rated vertical height over 110 ft (34 m). 20.4.3 Voice Communication System. 20.2.13* Where a breathing air system is provided, it shall supply breathing air for a minimum of one person at the secondary aerial ladder operator’s 20.4.3.1* A weather-resistant two-way voice communication system shall DRAFTbe provided between the aerial ladder operator’s position and the tip of the position and shall meet the requirements of 20.2.13.1 through 20.2.13.7. ladder. 20.2.13.1 The system shall include storage for at least 200 ft3 (5.6 m3) of breathing air and shall meet the requirements of Section 25.5. 20.4.3.2 The speaker/microphone at the tip shall allow for hands-free operation. 20.2.13.2 Piping System. 20.5 Aerial Ladder Operating Mechanisms. 20.2.13.2.1 All components of the piping system shall be designed for a pressure rating of three times the working pressure that they are expected to 20.5.1 Elevation. A power-operated system for elevating and lowering the carry. aerial ladder under all the rated conditions of loading shall be provided. 20.2.13.2.2 The piping system shall be arranged with a high-pressure 20.5.1.1 Where hydraulic components are utilized, they shall meet the regulator at the air supply that shall limit the air pressure in the piping up the requirements of Section 20.19 and shall be designed to prevent damage at the aerial device to the pressure required to supply 125 psi (862 kPa) at the outlet top and bottom limits. point. 20.5.1.2 An automatic locking device(s) shall be provided so that the 20.2.13.2.3 All piping, valves, and components shall be fabricated of desired elevated position can be maintained. corrosion-resistant materials and shall be sized for the number of outlets 20.5.1.3 A locking device shall be provided that will retain the aerial ladder provided at the secondary aerial ladder operator’s position. in the bed when the fire apparatus is in motion. 20.2.13.2.4 A pressure relief valve set to relieve the pressure at 11/ times the 2 20.5.2 Rotation. A power-operated turntable shall be provided that shall working pressure of the piping system in the event of regulator failure shall allow continuous rotation in either direction under all the rated conditions of be provided on the downstream side of the high-pressure regulator. loading. 20.2.13.3 Damage Prevention. 20.5.2.1* The turntable rotation bearing shall be accessible for lubrication and retorquing of bolts. 921 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 20.5.2.2 The turntable rotation mechanism shall be equipped with an 20.6.1.6 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump capable of supplying automatically applied brake or self-locking drive that provides sufficient the required flow and pressure, a permanent valved connection shall be braking capacity while all power systems are nonfunctioning to prevent provided between the pump and the waterway system. turntable rotation under all rated conditions of loading. 20.6.1.7 A flowmeter shall be installed in the waterway, with a display on 20.5.3 Extension. A power-operated system for extending and retracting either the pump operator’s panel or the aerial ladder operator’s control panel. the fly section(s) under all the rated conditions of loading shall be provided. 1 20.6.1.8* A 1 /2-in. (38-mm) minimum drain valve shall be provided at the 20.5.3.1 Where hydraulic components are utilized, they shall meet the low point of the waterway inlet system. requirements of Section 20.19. 20.6.1.9 If the apparatus has a fire pump and normal operations are to 20.5.3.2 An automatic locking device shall be provided so that the desired supply the waterway through the pump, a cap meeting the requirements of position of extension can be maintained. 16.7.4 shall be provided on the external inlet. 20.5.3.3 Rollers, pulleys, and roller guides shall be equipped with self- 20.6.2* Where a prepiped waterway is not provided, the following lubricating bearings or readily accessible grease fitting. equipment shall be furnished:

1 3 1 20.5.3.4 Slide pads, rollers and bearings, when used, shall be readily (1) Ladder pipe with 1 /4-in. (32-mm), 1 /8-in. (35-mm), and 1 /2-in. accessible for replacement. (38-mm) tips that can be attached to the aerial ladder 20.5.3.5 When wire rope, chains, or cables are used to extend the ladder (2) Sufficient length(s) of 3-in. (75-mm) or larger attack hose sections, the system shall be redundant with a minimum of two wire ropes, complying with the requirements of NFPA 1961, Standard on Fire Hose, to chains, or cables used per ladder section. reach between the installed ladder pipe and the ground with at least 10 ft (3 m) of hose available on the ground with the ladder at full extension 20.5.3.6 A means shall be provided to prevent damage to the extension system at full retraction or full extension. (3) One hose strap for each ladder section 20.5.4* Secondary Operator’s Position. If a secondary aerial ladder (4) Halyards to control the ladder pipe from ground level operator’s position is located at the tip of the outermost fly section, the following shall apply: 20.6.2.1 A bracket for carrying the detachable ladder pipe shall be provided on the apparatus and shall be designed so that the ladder pipe clamps will not (1) The lower control shall override the aerial tip control station. have to be readjusted to secure the pipe to the aerial ladder. (2) The lower control station shall have a momentary switch that enables 20.6.2.2 The horizontal traverse of the detachable ladder pipe shall not the tip controls when closed and disables the tip controls when opened or exceed the aerial ladder manufacturer’s recommendations. released. 20.6.2.3 The ladder pipe shall be capable of swiveling 135 degrees from a (3) The maximum speed of the ladder functions measured at the tip shall be line parallel to the ladder and down. as follows when operated from the tip control station: 20.7 Elevating Platform Requirements. (a) Rotation at 2 ft/sec (0.6 m/sec), when fully extended at 0 degrees elevation 20.7.1 The elevating platform shall consist of an elevated tower of two or more booms or sections equipped with a passenger-carrying platform(s) (b) Elevation and lowering at 1 ft/sec (0.3 m/sec) assembly. (c) Extension and retraction at 0.5 ft/sec (0.15 m/sec) 20.7.2 The rated vertical height of the elevating platform shall be measured in a vertical plane from the top surface of the platform handrail to the (4) The step(s) for the tip operator shall be designed to keep the operator’s ground, with the platform raised to its position of maximum elevation. feet from protruding through the outermost fly section. 20.7.3 The rated horizontal reach of the elevating platform shall be 20.6 Aerial Ladder Water Delivery System. measured in a horizontal plane from the centerline of the turntable rotation 20.6.1* Where a prepiped waterway is provided, the waterway system shall to the outer edge of the platform handrail, with the elevating platform be capable of flowing 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) nozzle extended to its maximum horizontal reach. pressure at full elevation and extension. 20.7.4 Height and reach dimensions shall be measured with the 20.6.1.1 For ladders with a rated vertical height of 110 ft (34 m) or less, the elevating platforms mounted on a chassis meeting the elevating platform friction loss (total system loss less head loss) between the monitor outlet and manufacturer’s minimum recommended fire apparatus specifications, with at a point below the waterway swivel shall not exceed 100 psi (700 kPa) at the fire apparatus on level ground, and with the stabilizers deployed in 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) flow with the ladder at full horizontal extension. accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 20.7.5 Where the rated vertical height of the elevated platform is 110 ft (34 20.6.1.2 A preset relief valve that is capable of protecting the waterway m) or less, the elevating platform, with stabilizers set, shall be capable of system by relieving pressure through the dumping of water to the being raised from the bedded position to maximum elevation and extension environment shall be provided. and rotated 90 degrees within 150 seconds. Two or more of these functions 20.6.1.2.1 Such dumping shall be through a system of piping terminating in shall be permitted to be performed simultaneously. an area away from the operator’s position. 20.7.6 Platform Construction. 20.6.1.2.2 TheDRAFT discharge end of the piping shall not have a threaded 20.7.6.1 The platform shall have a minimum floor area of 14 ft2 (1.3 m2). connection. 20.7.6.2 A continuous guard railing, a minimum of 42 in. (1070 mm) high, 20.6.1.3 A permanently attached monitor shall be provided. shall be provided on all sides. 20.6.1.3.1 The monitor shall be capable of swiveling at least 135 degrees 20.7.6.2.1 The railing shall be constructed so there are no horizontal or from a line parallel to the ladder and down. vertical openings below it greater than 24 in. (610 mm) in either dimension. 20.6.1.3.2 The monitor shall be capable of horizontal traverse at least 45 20.7.6.2.2 There shall be a minimum of two gates providing access to the degrees from each side of center. platform. 20.6.1.3.3 Positive stops shall be provided to prevent the swivel or traverse of the monitor from exceeding the aerial ladder manufacturer’s 20.7.6.2.3 Each gate shall be provided with a self-engaging latch. recommendation. 20.7.6.2.4 The use of a vertical-opening or inward-opening, self-closing 20.6.1.3.4 If a power-operated monitor is provided, the primary controls gate or door for access to and from the platform shall be permitted to meet shall be at the aerial operator’s position, and those controls shall be capable the continuous railing requirement. of overriding all other monitor controls. 20.7.6.3 A kick plate of not less than 4 in. (100 mm) high shall be provided 20.6.1.3.5* A permanently installed monitor/nozzle shall not present an around the floor and shall be permitted to swing with the gate. obstacle for access to or from the tip of the ladder. 20.7.6.4 The steps and the floor of the platform shall be provided with skid- 20.6.1.4 A 1000-gpm (4000-L/min) nozzle shall be furnished. resistant surfaces that meet the requirements of 15.7.3. 20.6.1.5* The water system shall be arranged so it can be supplied at ground 20.7.6.5 Drain openings shall be provided to prevent water accumulation on level through an external inlet that is a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm) in size. the platform floor. 20.7.6.6 Heat Shield. 922 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 20.7.6.6.1 A heat reflective shield shall be provided on the front, sides, and 20.9.1 There shall be two control stations, one to be known as the platform bottom of the platform. control station and the other as the lower control station. 20.7.6.6.2 If necessary, openings for the movement and operation of the 20.9.1.1 All operational controls shall be operable from both of these water monitor shall be permitted in the front heat shield. positions. 20.7.6.7 Water Curtain System. 20.9.1.2 The lower control station shall be located so as to facilitate observation of the platform while operating the controls. 20.7.6.7.1 A water curtain system capable of providing a cooling spray under the entire floor of the platform and flowing a minimum of 75 gpm (284 L/ 20.9.1.3 The lower station controls shall be capable of overriding the min) shall be provided. platform station controls. 20.7.6.7.2 The system shall be controlled by a single, quick-acting valve 20.9.2 Voice Communication System. with an actuator accessible from the platform. 20.9.2.1* A weather-resistant two-way voice communication system shall 20.7.6.8 Provisions shall be made so that the personnel working on the be provided between the platform control station and the lower control platform can attach fall protection harnesses. station. 20.7.7 Where a breathing air system is provided, it shall supply breathing 20.9.2.2 The speaker/microphone at the platform control station shall allow air for a minimum of two persons on the platform and shall meet the for hands-free operation. requirements of 20.7.7.1 through 20.7.7.7. 20.10 Elevating Platform Operating Mechanisms. 20.7.7.1 The system shall include storage for at least 400 ft3 (11 m3) of breathing air and shall meet the requirements of Section 25.5. 20.10.1* Power-operated elevating and extending devices designed and powered to allow multiple movements of the elevating platform booms 20.7.7.2 Piping System. or sections simultaneously under all rated conditions of loading shall be provided. 20.7.7.2.1 All components of the piping system shall be designed for a pressure rating of three times the working pressure that they are expected to 20.10.1.1 Where hydraulic components are utilized, they shall meet the carry. requirements of Section 20.19. 20.7.7.2.2 The piping system shall be arranged with a high-pressure 20.10.1.2 An automatic locking device(s) shall be provided so that the regulator at the air supply that shall limit the air pressure in the piping up the desired elevated position can be maintained. aerial device to the pressure required to supply 125 psi (862 kPa) at the outlet point. 20.10.1.3 Provisions shall be made to prevent damage at top and bottom limits. 20.7.7.2.3 All piping, valves, and components shall be fabricated of corrosion-resistant materials and shall be sized for the number of outlets 20.10.2 An automatic platform-leveling system shall be provided so that provided in the platform. the platform, together with its rated load, is supported and maintained level in relation to the turntable or horizontal regardless of the positions of the 1 20.7.7.2.4 A pressure relief valve set to relieve the pressure at 1 /2 times the booms or sections. working pressure of the piping system in the event of regulator failure shall be provided on the downstream side of the high-pressure regulator. 20.10.3 A power-operated turntable shall be provided that allows continuous rotation in either direction under all the rated conditions of loading. 20.7.7.3 Damage Prevention. 20.10.3.1* The turntable rotation bearing shall be accessible for lubrication 20.7.7.3.1 All valves, pressure regulators, and gauges shall be protected and retorquing of bolts. from accidental damage. 20.10.3.2 The turntable rotation mechanism shall be equipped with an 20.7.7.3.2 The piping or hose system between the air cylinder(s) and the automatically applied brake or self-locking drive that provides sufficient platform shall be installed so as to prevent damage due to abrasion, bending, braking capacity while all power systems are nonfunctioning to prevent pinching, or exposure to excessive heat. turntable rotation under all rated conditions of loading. 20.7.7.4 Holders shall be provided for the storage of the breathing air 20.10.4 A locking device shall be provided that will retain the elevating equipment when it is not in use. platform booms or sections in the bed when the fire apparatus is in motion. 20.7.7.5 A low air warning system shall be provided that monitors the air 20.11 Ladders on the Elevating Platform. volume and provides an audible and visual warning at both the upper and lower control stations when the air volume is at or below 20 percent. 20.11.1 If the raising and extending booms or sections incorporate a ladder or ladder sections, the ladder shall meet the requirements of 20.2.1, 20.2.5 20.7.7.6 The quality of the breathing air shall meet the requirements of through 20.2.8, 20.2.10, 20.2.11, and Section 20.4. NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection. 20.11.2 The transition step between the top rung of the ladder and the platform shall not be greater than 18 in. (457 mm). 20.7.7.7 All components of the system that the breathing air will be in contact with shall be cleaned of oil, grease, contaminants, and foreign 20.12 Elevating Platform Water Delivery System. On elevating platforms material. of 110 ft (34 m) or less rated vertical height, a permanent water delivery system shall be installed. 20.8 ElevatingDRAFT Platform Rated Capacity. 20.12.1 The water delivery system shall be capable of delivering 1000 20.8.1 The rated capacity of the elevating platform shall be a minimum of gpm (4000 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) nozzle pressure with the elevating 750 lb (340 kg), with no water in the water delivery system, in any position platform at its rated vertical height. of operation. 20.12.2 Friction loss (total system loss less head loss) between the monitor 20.8.2 The rated capacity of the elevating platform shall be a minimum outlet and a point below the waterway swivel shall not exceed 100 psi (700 of 500 lb (227 kg), with the water delivery system full of water but not kPa) at a flow of 1000 gpm (4000 L/min). discharging, in any position of operation. 20.12.3 One or more permanently installed monitors with nozzles capable 20.8.3 The elevating platform shall be capable of delivering a minimum of discharging 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) shall be provided on the platform. of 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) from the platform with the booms or sections and the monitors and nozzles positioned in any configuration allowed by 20.12.3.1 The monitor(s) shall be supplied by the permanent water system. the manufacturer while carrying a minimum load of 500 lb (227 kg) on the 20.12.3.2 The monitor(s) shall allow the operator to control the aimed platform. direction of the nozzle through a rotation of at least 45 degrees on either side 20.8.4 All rated capacities shall be stated in increments of 250 lb (114 of center and at least 45 degrees above and below horizontal. kg) and shall be in addition to any fire-fighting equipment installed on the 20.12.3.3 The horizontal and vertical traverse of the monitors shall not elevating platform by the manufacturer. exceed the elevating platform manufacturer’s recommendation. 20.8.5 If the elevating platform is rated in multiple configurations, the manufacturer shall describe these configurations, including the rated 20.12.3.4* A slow-operating valve shall be provided at the base of any capacity of each, in the operations manual and on the plates at the operator’s monitor. control stations. 1 20.12.4 If a hose connection is provided, it shall be a minimum 2 /2-in. (65- 20.9 Elevating Platform Operating Positions. mm) nominal diameter valved connection. 923 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 20.12.5* The water system shall be arranged so it can be supplied at ground 20.15.3 If the water tower has a rated water delivery capacity of 3500 level through an external inlet that is a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm) in size. gpm (14000 L/min) or less, a power-operated turntable shall be provided that shall allow continuous rotation in either direction under all the rated 20.12.6 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump capable of supplying conditions of loading. the required flow and pressure, a permanent valved connection shall be provided between the pump and the waterway system. 20.15.3.1* The turntable rotation bearing shall be accessible for lubrication and retorquing of bolts. 20.12.7 A flowmeter shall be installed in the waterway with at least one display on the pump operator’s panel or at the elevating platform operator’s 20.15.3.2 The turntable rotation mechanism shall be provided with position. an automatically applied brake or self-locking drive that is capable of preventing turntable rotation under all rated conditions of loading while all 20.12.8 A preset relief valve capable of protecting the waterway system by power systems are nonfunctioning. relieving pressure through the dumping of water to the environment shall be provided. 20.16 Water Tower Water Delivery System. 20.12.8.1 Such dumping shall be through a system of piping terminating in 20.16.1 A permanent water system shall be installed capable of delivering an area away from the operator’s position. 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) nozzle pressure with the water tower and nozzle positioned in any configuration permitted by the 20.12.8.2 The discharge end of the piping shall not have a threaded manufacturer. connection. 20.16.2 For water towers with a rated vertical height of 110 ft (33.5 m) or 20.12.9 Waterway Drains. less, the friction loss (total system loss less head loss) between the monitor 1 outlet and a point below the waterway swivel shall not exceed 100 psi (700 20.12.9.1* A 1 /2-in. (38-mm) minimum drain valve shall be provided at the low point of the waterway system. kPa) at a flow of 1000 gpm (4000 L/min). 20.16.3 A permanently installed monitor with a nozzle(s) capable of 20.12.9.2 Additional drains shall be provided to drain any portions of the covering a discharge range of at least 300 gpm to 1000 gpm (1100 L/min to waterway that do not drain to the low point of the system. 4000 L/min) shall be provided at the top of the water tower and supplied by 20.12.10 If the apparatus has a pump and normal operations are to supply the the permanent water system. waterway through the pump, a cap meeting the requirements of 16.7.4 shall be provided on the external inlet. 20.16.3.1 The monitor shall be powered so as to allow the operator(s) to control its aimed direction. 20.13 Water Tower Requirements. 20.16.3.2 If the water tower has a rated water delivery capacity of 3500 gpm 20.13.1 The water tower shall consist of two or more booms designed to (14,000 L/min) or less, the monitor, as distinct from the supporting boom, telescope, articulate, or both, and a waterway designed to supply a large shall allow the operator to control the aimed direction of the nozzle through capacity elevated water stream. a rotation of at least 45 degrees either side of center and at least 30 degrees above and 135 degrees below the centerline of the boom. 20.13.2 The rated vertical height of the water tower shall be measured in a vertical plane from the discharge end of the nozzle to the ground, with the 20.16.3.3 The horizontal and vertical traverse of the monitor shall not nozzle raised to its position of maximum elevation. exceed the water tower manufacturer’s recommendation. 20.13.3 The rated horizontal reach of the water tower shall be measured in a 20.16.4 If a variable pattern spray nozzle is provided, a control shall be horizontal plane from the centerline of the turntable rotation to the end of the provided at the operator’s position to select the desired stream pattern. nozzle, with the water tower extended to its maximum horizontal reach. 20.16.5* The water system shall be arranged so it can be supplied at ground 20.13.4 Height and reach dimensions shall be taken with the water tower level through an external inlet that is a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm) in size. mounted on a chassis meeting the water tower manufacturer’s minimum recommended fire apparatus specifications, the fire apparatus on level 20.16.6 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump capable of supplying ground, and stabilizers deployed in accordance with the manufacturer’s the required flow and pressure, a permanent valved connection shall be instructions. provided between the pump and the waterway system. 20.13.5 The water tower, with stabilizers set if required, shall be capable of 20.16.7 A flowmeter shall be installed in the water delivery system with being raised from the bedded position to maximum elevation and extension the display on either the pump operator’s panel or the water tower operator’s and rotated 90 degrees within 105 seconds. Two or more of these functions control panel. shall be permitted to be performed simultaneously. 20.16.8 A preset relief valve capable of protecting the waterway system by relieving pressure through the dumping of water to the environment shall be 20.14 Water Tower Rated Capacity. provided. 20.14.1 The water tower shall be capable of delivering a minimum water stream of 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) from the water tower 20.16.8.1 Such dumping shall be through a system of piping terminating in nozzle with the booms or sections and nozzle positioned in any configuration an area away from the operator’s position. permitted by the manufacturer. 20.16.8.2 The discharge end of the piping shall not have a threaded 20.14.2 The rated capacity shall include the weight of the charged waterway connection. and the maximum nozzle reaction force. 1 20.16.9* A 1 /2-in. (38-mm) minimum drain valve shall be provided at the 20.14.3 If the DRAFTwater tower is rated in multiple configurations, the low point of the waterway system. manufacturer shall describe these configurations, including the rated 20.16.10 If the apparatus has a pump and normal operations are to supply the capacity of each, in the operations manual and on the plate at the operator’s waterway through the pump, a cap meeting the requirements of 16.7.4 shall control station. be provided on the external inlet. 20.15 Water Tower Operating Mechanisms. 20.17 Control Devices. 20.15.1 Power-operated elevating and extending devices shall be provided. 20.17.1 Controls shall be provided at the driver’s position to transfer power 20.15.1.1 They shall be so designed and powered to allow multiple to the aerial device. movements of the water tower booms or sections simultaneously under all 20.17.2 A visual signal shall be provided at the driver’s position to indicate rated conditions of loading. when the operating mechanisms are engaged. 20.15.1.2 Where hydraulic components are utilized, they shall meet the 20.17.3 An interlock shall be provided that prevents operation of the aerial requirements of Section 20.19. device until the parking brakes have been set and the transmission has 20.15.1.3 An automatic locking device(s) shall be provided so that the been placed in neutral or the transmission is in the drive position with the desired elevated position can be maintained. driveline to the rear axle disengaged. 20.17.4 A power-operated governed engine speed control shall be provided 20.15.1.4 Provisions shall be made to prevent damage at top and bottom to limit the operating speed of the aerial device apparatus engine to within limits of elevation and extension. the operating parameters as determined by the manufacturer and this 20.15.2 A lock shall be provided that will retain the water tower booms or standard. sections in the bed when the fire apparatus is in motion. 20.17.4.1 An interlock shall be provided that allows operation of the engine speed control only after the parking brakes have been set and the transmission is in neutral. 924 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 20.17.4.2 Where the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, any high 20.18.5 Lighting shall be provided at the base of the aerial device and shall idle speed control shall be automatically disengaged when the fire pump is be arranged to illuminate the aerial device in any position of operation. operating. 20.18.6 A spotlight of not less than 75,000 candlepower (1,000,000 lumens) 20.17.5* An interlock system shall be provided to prevent the following: shall be provided on the apparatus by which the operator shall be able to observe the effect of the stream from the ladder pipe or monitor nozzle. (1) Rotating the aerial device until the stabilizer(s) is in a configuration to meet the stability requirements of Section 20.21 20.18.7 Provisions shall be made so that in the event of failure of the primary operating power source, an auxiliary source of power shall be (2) Movement of the stabilizers unless the aerial device is in the travel readily available that is capable of returning the aerial device to the road position travel position. 20.17.6 Controls at the operator’s position shall be lighted, marked with a 20.18.8 Where the operation of the aerial device is accomplished by label, and conveniently arranged. hydraulic means, the system shall prevent motion of the aerial device in the 20.17.6.1 These controls shall allow the operator to perform the following: event of any hydraulic hose failure. 20.18.9 Where the operation of the aerial device is accomplished by means (1) Elevate and lower the aerial device other than hydraulic, the system shall be designed to prevent motion of the (2) Extend and retract the aerial device, if applicable aerial device in the event of a power failure. (3) Rotate the aerial device in either direction, if applicable 20.18.10 All components used to stabilize the apparatus that the aerial device is mounted on shall be designed to prevent instability in the event of a (4) Operate the intercom, if applicable hydraulic hose failure or a power failure. 20.17.6.2 A method shall be provided to prevent unintentional movement of 20.18.11 Where the design of the aerial device incorporates a knuckle, the the aerial device. knuckle shall be as follows: 20.17.6.3 Each control shall allow the operator to regulate the speed of (1) Equipped with position lights or continuously illuminated by boom elevation, extension, and rotation of the aerial device within the limits lights determined by the manufacturer and this standard. (2) Painted with reflective paint or provided with reflective striping 20.17.6.4 Each control shall be arranged so it can be operated by an operator with a gloved hand without disturbing any other control(s). 20.19 Hydraulic System. 20.17.7 Where a three-lever system is used to control the basic functions 20.19.1 The nonsealing moving parts of all hydraulic components whose of the aerial device, the levers shall be distinctively different from the other failure results in motion of the aerial device shall have a minimum bursting controls on the panel and arranged adjacent to each other with the extension strength of four times the maximum operating pressure to which the control being the left lever, the rotation control being the center lever, and the component is subjected. elevation control being the right lever as shown in Figure 20.17.7. 20.19.1.1 Dynamic sealing parts of all hydraulic components whose failure Figure 20.17.7 Control Lever Arrangement. results in motion of the aerial device shall not begin to extrude or otherwise fail at pressures at or below two times the maximum operating pressure to [Existing Figure 18-17.6 , 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] which the component is subjected. 20.17.7.1 The aerial device shall extend when the extension control is 20.19.1.2 Static sealing parts of all hydraulic components whose failure pushed up or forward (away from the operator). results in motion of the aerial device shall have a minimum bursting strength of four times the maximum operating pressure to which the component is 20.17.7.2 If the rotation control has a forward/backward orientation or an subjected. up/down orientation, the turntable shall rotate clockwise when the rotation control is pushed up or forward (away from the operator). Otherwise, the 20.19.2 All hydraulic hose, tubing, and fittings shall have a minimum rotational control handle shall move in the direction of rotation. bursting strength of at least three times the maximum operating pressure to which the components are subjected. 20.17.7.3 The aerial device shall lower when the elevation control is pushed up or forward (away from the operator). 20.19.3 All other hydraulic components shall have a minimum bursting strength of at least two times the maximum operating pressure to which the 20.17.8 Where a multifunction control lever is furnished, it shall move in the components are subjected. direction of the function it controls, where possible. 20.19.4 The hydraulic system shall be provided with an oil pressure gauge at 20.17.9 Where a two-lever system is used, the extension control shall be the lower operating position. to the left and a combination lever for rotation and elevation shall be to the right. 20.19.5 Hydraulic Reservoir. 20.17.10 All controls regulating the movement of the aerial device shall 20.19.5.1 A means for checking and filling the hydraulic reservoir shall be automatically return to the neutral position upon release by the operator. readily accessible. 20.17.11 When electric over hydraulic aerial device controls are 20.19.5.2 The fill location shall be conspicuously marked with a label that incorporated, a readily accessible, manual means of overriding the electric reads: “Hydraulic Oil Only.” controls shall be provided. DRAFT20.19.5.3 The manufacturer shall provide instructions for checking and 20.18 Safety. filling the hydraulic reservoir. 20.18.1* If the operator’s position is on the turntable, the turntable platform 20.19.6 The hydraulic system components shall be capable of maintaining, shall be provided with a railing at least 42 in. (1070 mm) high. under all operating conditions, oil cleanliness and temperature that complies with the component manufacturer’s recommendations. 20.18.1.1 The railing design shall be capable of withstanding a force of 225 lbf (1000 N) applied at any point from any direction without permanent 20.19.7* The hydraulic system shall have adequate cooling for continuous 1 deformation. operation of not less than 2 /2 hours. 20.18.1.2 Where the operator’s position is equipped with an operator’s 20.19.8 An hourmeter shall be provided that records any time the aerial seat, the seat shall be provided with a railing or an armrest capable of device hydraulic system is engaged. withstanding a force of 225 lbf (1000 N) applied at any point from the inside of the seat. 20.20 Structure. 20.18.2* Any aerial device operator’s position at ground level shall be 20.20.1* All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that arranged so that the operator is not in contact with the ground. are made of a ductile material shall have a design stress of not more than 50 percent of the minimum yield strength of the material based on the 20.18.3 A sign(s) shall be placed at any ground level operator’s position to combination of the rated capacity and the dead load, which is equivalent to a warn the operator(s) of electrocution hazards. 2:1 safety factor. 20.18.4 Where the aerial device includes moving cylinders or other moving 20.20.2 All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that are parts, these shall be arranged so as to provide hand clearance, or hand guards made of a nonductile material shall have a design stress of not more than shall be provided to prevent injury to the operator. 20 percent of the minimum ultimate strength of the material, based on the combination of the rated capacity and the dead load, which is equivalent to a 5:1 safety factor. 925 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 20.20.3 Wire ropes, chains, and attaching systems used to extend and retract 20.22.2.3 All NDT procedures shall be fully documented with respect the fly sections or booms shall have a 5:1 safety factor based on ultimate to the extent of the examination, the method of testing, and the inspection strength under all operating conditions allowed by the manufacturer. techniques. 20.20.3.1 The factor of safety for the wire rope shall remain above 2:1 20.22.2.4 All testing shall be performed by ASNT Level II NDT during any extension or retraction system stall. technicians or by an ASNT Level I technician under the supervision of an on-site Level II technician, all of whom have been certified in the test 20.20.3.2 The minimum ratio of the diameter of wire rope used to the methods used in accordance with ASNT CP-189, Standard for Qualification diameter of the sheave used shall be 1:12. and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel. 20.21 Stabilization. 20.22.3 Welder Certification. 20.21.1* The stability requirements defined in 20.21.2 and 20.21.3 shall 20.22.3.1 Welds for all structural load supporting elements shall be be met by the apparatus that the aerial device is mounted on when that performed by certified welders under the guidelines of AWS D1.1, Structural apparatus is in a service-ready condition but with all normally removable Welding Code — Steel; AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code — Aluminum; items such as water, hose, ground ladders, and loose equipment removed. and AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code — Sheet Steel. 20.21.1.1 Items mounted on the aerial device by the manufacturer shall 20.22.3.2 Welding performed by fabricators and welders approved by remain mounted. the Canadian Welding Bureau to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) W47.1, Standard for Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel 20.21.1.2 Stabilizers shall be provided, if required, to meet the stability Structures, or CSA W47.2, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of requirements of 20.21.2 and 20.21.3 Aluminum, shall be considered as equivalent. 1 20.21.2 The aerial device shall be capable of sustaining a static load 1 /2 times its rated capacity in every position in which the aerial device can be 20.22.3.3 Welding performed by machines shall be considered equivalent to placed when the apparatus is on a firm and level surface. welding performed by certified welders. 20.22.4 The manufacturer and the installer shall establish applicable 20.21.3 Sloping Surface. welding quality assurance procedures for all weldments. 20.21.3.1 The aerial device shall be capable of sustaining a static load 11/ 3 20.22.4.1 Methods of nondestructive testing shall be described in the times its rated capacity in every position in which the aerial device can be manufacturer’s quality assurance procedures and shall be as recommended placed when the apparatus is on a slope of 5 degrees (8.7 percent) downward Guide for the Nondestructive Inspection of Welds in the direction most likely to cause overturning. by AWS B1.10, . 20.21.3.2 If other capabilities, such as a means of turntable leveling, are 20.22.4.2 The manufacturer shall designate the welds to be examined, the provided to minimize the effect of the sloping surface, those capabilities extent of examination, and the type of testing. shall be permitted to be utilized for the purpose of determining whether the 20.22.5 Nondestructive Testing Procedure. apparatus meets this stability requirement. 20.22.5.1 All ultrasonic inspections shall be conducted in accordance with 20.21.4 If a stabilizer system is provided, it shall meet the requirements of the following ASTM standards: 20.21.4.1 through 20.21.4.4. (1) ASTM E 114, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Straight- 20.21.4.1 If the stabilizer system is power operated, the controls shall be Beam Examination by the Contact Method arranged so that the operator can view the stabilizers in motion. (2) ASTM E 797, Standard Practice for Measuring Thickness by Manual 20.21.4.1.1 An audible alarm, of not less than 87 dBA measured at any Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Contact Method position the stabilizer can be in, shall sound when a stabilizer is moving. 20.22.5.2 All magnetic particle inspections shall be conducted in 20.21.4.1.2 An indicator(s) shall be provided to denote when the apparatus accordance with ASTM E 709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle is operable within the manufacturer’s range of level conditions. Examination. 20.21.4.1.3 Where the rated vertical height of the aerial device is 110 ft (34 20.22.5.3 All liquid penetrant inspections shall be conducted in m) or less, all stabilizers shall be deployed from the stored position to the accordance with ASTM E 165, Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant operating position within 90 seconds. Examinations. 20.21.4.2 The ground contact area for each stabilizer shall be such that a 20.22.5.4 All radiographic inspections shall be conducted in accordance unit pressure of not greater than 75 psi (500 kPa) will be exerted over the with ASTM E 1032, Standard Test Method for Radiographic Examination of ground contact area when the apparatus is fully loaded and the aerial device Weldments. is carrying its rated capacity in every position permitted by the manufacturer. 20.22.5.5 All electrical conductivity measurements shall be conducted 20.21.4.2.1 The requirement defined in 20.21.4.2 shall be permitted to in accordance with ASTM E 1004, Standard Practice for Determining be accomplished with stabilizer pads in conjunction with the permanently Electrical Conductivity Using the Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Method. mounted stabilizer shoes to meet the loading requirement of 75 psi (500 kPa) or less. 20.22.5.6 All hardness readings shall be conducted in accordance with the following ASTM standards: 20.21.4.2.2 At a minimum, the stabilizer shoe shall be capable of swiveling on an axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of the apparatus. (1) ASTM E 6, Standard Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing 20.21.4.3 All DRAFTstabilizers that protrude beyond the body of the apparatus shall be striped or painted with reflective material so as to indicate a hazard (2) ASTM E 10, Standard Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic or obstruction. Materials 20.21.4.4 All stabilizers that protrude beyond the body of the apparatus (3) ASTM E 18, Standard Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and shall be provided with one or more red warning lights located either on the Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials stabilizer or in the body panel above the stabilizer visible on the side of the apparatus where the stabilizer is located. (4) ASTM E 92, Standard Test Method for Vickers Hardness of Metallic Materials 20.22 Quality Control. (5) ASTM B 647, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of 20.22.1 The manufacturer and installer shall have in effect a complete and Aluminum Alloys by Means of a Webster Hardness Gauge documented quality control program that will ensure complete compliance with the requirements of this standard. (6) ASTM B 648, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Aluminum Alloys by Means of a Barcol Impressor 20.22.2 The quality control program shall include 100 percent nondestructive testing of all critical structural components of the aerial 20.22.5.7 All acoustic emission inspections shall be conducted in device. accordance with the following ASTM standards: 20.22.2.1 The manufacturer shall determine the types of nondestructive (1) ASTM E 569, Standard Practice for Acoustic Emission Monitoring of testing (NDT) to be conducted. Structures During Controlled Stimulation 20.22.2.2 The procedures used for NDT shall comply with the applicable (2) ASTM E 650, Standard Guide for Mounting Piezoelectric Acoustic standards defined in 20.22.5. Emission Sensors 20.23 Instruction Plates and Signs.

926 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

1 20.23.1 Plates and signs that provide operational directions, warnings, and 20.24.2.8.3 A load of 1 /3 times the rated capacity shall be suspended from cautions shall be installed in positions visible to the operator(s). the tip of the aerial ladder or the platform of the elevating platform when it is in the position of least stability. 20.23.1.1 Instruction plates shall describe the function and operation of each control. 20.24.2.8.4 The apparatus shall show no signs of instability and the test shall not cause permanent deformation of any components. 20.23.1.2 Warning and caution signs shall indicate hazards inherent in the operation of the aerial device including, but shall not be limited to the 20.24.3 If the aerial device is an aerial ladder, the test defined in 20.24.3.1 following: through 20.24.3.2 shall be conducted. (1) Electrical hazards involved where the aerial device does not provide 20.24.3.1 With the aerial ladder out of the cradle in the fully extended protection to the personnel from contact with, or in proximity to, an position at zero degrees elevation, a test load shall be applied in a horizontal electrically charged conductor direction normal to the ladder centerline. (2) Electrical hazards involved where the aerial device does not provide 20.24.3.1.1 For aerial ladders with a pre-piped waterway, a 350-lb (160-kg) protection to ground personnel who contact the apparatus when it is in test load shall be applied at the ladder tip. contact with energized electrical conductors 20.24.3.1.2 For aerial ladders without a pre-piped waterway, a 220-lb (100- (3) Hazards from stabilizer motion kg) test load shall be applied at the ladder tip. (4) Hazards that can result from failure to follow manufacturer’s operating 20.24.3.2 The turntable shall not rotate and the ladder shall not deflect instructions beyond the what the manufacturer’s specification allows. 20.23.2 Labels shall disclose the following information relative to the aerial 20.24.4 Aerial Device Water System Test. device: 20.24.4.1 If the aerial device is equipped with a permanent water system (1) Make and has a rated vertical height of 110 ft (34 m) or less, standard model flow test data shall be provided to the purchaser. (2) Model 20.24.4.2 If the water system has been modified from the standard model (3) Insulated or noninsulated configuration, a new flow test shall be conducted to determine that the friction loss in the water system between the base of the swivel and the (4) Serial number monitor outlet does not exceed 100 psi (700 kPa) with 1000 gpm (4000 L/ (5) Date of manufacture min) flowing and with the water system at full extension. (6) Rated capacity 20.24.4.3 A flow test shall be conducted to determine that the water system is capable of flowing 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) nozzle (7) Rated vertical height pressure with the aerial device at full elevation and extension. (8) Rated horizontal reach 20.24.4.3.1 Where the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump designed to supply the water system, the test shall be conducted using the onboard fire (9) Maximum hydraulic system pressure, if applicable pump. (10) Hydraulic oil requirements (change quantity and type), if applicable 20.24.4.3.2 The intake pressure to the fire pump shall not exceed 20 psi 20.24 Certification Tests. The completed apparatus with the aerial device (140 kPa). shall be tested to the criteria defined in this section and the test results 20.25* Manufacturer’s Predelivery Test. If the aerial device is equipped certified by an independent third-party certification organization. with a permanent water delivery system, the manufacturer shall, prior to 20.24.1 The aerial device shall be inspected and tested in accordance with delivery of the apparatus, hydrostatically test the piping for the waterway the requirements of NFPA 1914, Standard for Testing Fire Department system, including the monitor, at the maximum operating pressure required Aerial Devices, including all nondestructive testing, prior to being subjected to flow 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) at 100 psi (700 kPa) nozzle pressure at to the tests defined in 20.24.2 through 20.24.4. maximum elevation and extension. 20.24.2 Stability Test. Chapter 21 Foam Proportioning Systems 20.24.2.1 The apparatus that the aerial device is mounted on shall be in a service-ready condition and shall be placed on a firm, level surface. 21.1* Application. If the fire apparatus is equipped with a foam proportioning system, it shall comply with the applicable sections of this 20.24.2.2 All normally removable items such as water, hose, ground chapter. ladders, and loose equipment shall be removed, but items mounted on the aerial device by the manufacturer shall remain mounted. 21.2* Requirements by Type of Foam Proportioning System. 20.24.2.3 If having the stabilizers extended is part of the configuration, the 21.2.1* Eductor System. An eductor foam proportioning system shall meet stabilizers shall be deployed to the point where the interlock system allows the requirements of 21.3.1 through 21.3.6, 21.3.8, Sections 21.4 through 21.6, operation of the aerial device. 21.9, and 21.10.

1 20.24.2.4 A load of 1 /2 times the rated capacity as specified by the 21.2.2* Self-Educting Master Stream Nozzle. A self-educting master manufacturer shallDRAFT be suspended from the tip of the aerial ladder, or the stream nozzle shall meet the requirements of Sections 21.3, 21.4, 21.6, 21.9, platform of the elevating platform, when it is in the position of least stability. and 21.10. 20.24.2.5 If the manufacturer specifies a rated capacity while water is 21.2.3* Intake-Side System. An intake-side foam proportioning system flowing, then one times the water load and the worst case nozzle reaction shall meet the requirements of Sections 21.3 through 21.6, 21.9, and 21.10. shall be added to the stability test weights. 21.2.4* Around-the-Pump System. An around-the-pump foam 1 20.24.2.6 For a water tower, the stability test shall include 1 /2 times proportioning system shall meet the requirements of Sections 21.3 through 1 the weight of the water in the system and 1 /2 times the maximum nozzle 21.6, 21.9, and 21.10. reaction force when it is in the position of least stability. 21.2.5* Balanced Pressure System. A balanced pressure foam 20.24.2.7* The apparatus shall show no signs of instability and the test shall proportioning system shall meet the requirements of Sections 21.3 through not cause permanent deformation of any components. 21.10. 20.24.2.8 If the aerial device is an aerial ladder or an elevating platform, the 21.2.6* Direct Injection Systems. A direct injection foam proportioning stability shall be further tested as defined in 20.24.2.8.1 through 20.24.2.8.4. system shall meet the requirements of Sections 21.3 through 21.7, 21.9, and 21.10. 20.24.2.8.1 The apparatus that the aerial device is mounted on shall be placed on a firm surface sloping downward at 5 degrees (8.7 percent grade) 21.2.7* Water-Powered Direct Injection Foam Proportioning System. in the direction most likely to cause overturning and shall be configured as A water motor or water turbine foam proportioning system shall meet the defined in 20.24.2.2. requirements of Sections 21.3 through 21.7, 21.9, and 21.10. 20.24.2.8.2 If having the stabilizers extended is part of the configuration, 21.3 Design and Performance Requirements of a Foam System. the stabilizers shall be deployed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

927 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 21.3.1* The proportioning system shall be capable of proportioning foam 21.5.2.4 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure pulsation concentrate(s) in accordance with the foam concentrate manufacturer’s dampened be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have recommendations for the type of foam concentrate used in the system over internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. the system’s design range of flow and pressures. 21.5.3 If digital pressure indicating devices are used, they shall meet the 21.3.2 The purchaser shall specify the following: requirements of 21.5.3.1 through 21.5.3.3. (1) Range of water flows and pressures 21.5.3.1 The digits shall be at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) high. (2) Proportioning rates 21.5.3.2 Digital pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). (3) Types of concentrate(s) (Class A, Class B, etc.) 21.5.3.3 Digital pressure indicating devices shall have an accuracy of ±3 (4) Brand and viscosity of concentrate percent over the full scale. 21.3.3 The apparatus shall be capable of supplying the power required by 21.5.4 Each pressure indicating device or flowmeter, and its respective the foam proportioning system in addition to the requirements of the other display, shall be mounted and attached so it is protected from accidental power-dependent systems installed on the apparatus. damage and excessive vibration. 21.3.4* Components that are continuously wetted with foam concentrate 21.5.5 A gauge(s) shall be provided for balanced pressure foam shall be constructed of materials that will not be damaged in form, fit, or proportioning systems that simultaneously indicates water pressure and foam function, when exposed to foam concentrates, including the adverse effects concentrate pressure. of corrosion, formation of harmful solids, deterioration of gaskets and seals, binding of moving parts, and deterioration of the foam concentrate caused by 21.6 Atmospheric Foam Concentrate Tank. If the foam proportioning contact with incompatible materials. system incorporates an atmospheric foam concentrate tank, the requirements of 21.6.1 through 21.6.12 shall apply. 21.3.5 The foam proportioning components that can be flushed with water after use shall be constructed of materials that do not corrode after being 21.6.1 The foam concentrate tank or tanks shall be constructed of flushed with water and allowed to dry. These components shall also be noncorrosive materials or other materials that are protected against constructed of materials resistant to deterioration by foam concentrates. corrosion or deterioration and that will not be adversely affected by the foam concentrate to be stored in the tank. 21.3.6 The foam concentrate supply line shall not collapse under any operating conditions specified by the manufacturer of the foam 21.6.2 Swash Partitions. proportioning system. 21.6.2.1 All foam concentrate tanks shall be provided with swash partitions 21.3.7 A means shall be provided to prevent water backflow into the foam arranged such that the maximum dimension perpendicular to the plane of proportioning system and the foam concentrate storage tank. any partition shall not exceed 36 in. (900 mm). 21.3.8 A device that consists of a removable element that does not restrict 21.6.2.2 The swash partition(s) shall extend from wall to wall and cover at the full flow capacity of the foam supply line shall be provided on the foam least 75 percent of the area of the plane of the partition. concentrate supply side of the foam proportioner to prevent any debris that might affect the operation of the foam proportioning system from entering 21.6.3 The foam concentrate tank shall be provided with a fill tower or the system. expansion compartment having a minimum area of 12 in.2 (7500 mm2) and having a volume of not less than 1 percent of the total tank volume. 21.3.9 Flush Lines. 21.6.3.1 The fill tower opening shall be protected by a completely sealed 21.3.9.1 A foam concentrate system flush line(s) shall be provided as airtight cover. required by the foam system manufacturer. 21.6.3.2* The cover shall be attached to the fill tower by mechanical means. 21.3.9.2 A means shall be provided in the flush line(s) to prevent water backflow into the foam concentrate tank or water tank during the flushing 21.6.3.3 The fill opening shall incorporate a removable screen with a mesh 1 operation. not to exceed /4-in. (6-mm) and shall be arranged so that foam concentrate from a 5-gal (19-L) container can be dumped directly to the bottom of the 21.3.9.3 Where the foam proportioning system is connected to more than tank to minimize aeration without the use of funnels or other special devices. one foam concentrate storage tank, provisions shall be made to flush all common lines to avoid contamination of dissimilar foam concentrates. 21.6.4 The fill tower shall be equipped with a pressure/vacuum vent that enables the tank to compensate for changes in pressure or vacuum when 21.4 Controls for Foam Systems. filling or withdrawing foam concentrate from the tank. 21.4.1* The foam proportioning system operating controls shall be located 21.6.4.1 The pressure/vacuum vent shall not allow atmospheric air to at the pump operator’s panel and shall be identified as required by 21.9.2. enter the foam tank except during operation or to compensate for thermal fluctuations. 21.4.2 Foam proportioning systems that require flushing after use shall be provided with controls accessible to the operator to completely flush the 21.6.4.2 The vent shall be protected to prevent foam concentrate from system with water according to the manufacturer’s instructions. escaping or directly contacting the vent at any time. 21.4.3 Foam proportioning systems that incorporate foam concentrate 21.6.4.3 The vent shall be of sufficient size to prevent tank damage during metering valves shall have each metering valve calibrated and marked with filling or foam withdrawal. a plate to indicateDRAFT the rate(s) of the foam concentrate proportioning available as determined by the design of the system. 21.6.5 The foam concentrate tank shall not be equipped with an overflow pipe or any direct opening to the atmosphere. 21.4.4 Foam proportioning systems that incorporate automatic proportioning features shall be equipped with controls that enable the 21.6.6* The foam concentrate tank(s) shall be designed and constructed to operator to isolate the automatic feature and operate the system. facilitate complete interior flushing and cleaning as required. 21.5 Foam System Pressure Indicating Devices, Flowmeters, and 21.6.7 Tank Drain. Indicators. 1 21.6.7.1 A minimum /2-in. (13-mm) valved drain shall be provided at the 21.5.1 The displays of all pressure indicating devices, flowmeters, and other lowest point of any foam concentrate tank. indicators (e.g., fluid level indicators) shall be located so that they are visible 21.6.7.2 The drain shall be piped to drain directly to the surface beneath the from the pump operator’s position and shall meet the requirements of 4.10.3. apparatus without contacting other body or chassis components. 21.5.2 If analog pressure gauges are used, they shall meet the requirements 21.6.8* The foam concentrate tank shall be constructed and installed to be of 21.5.2.1 through 21.5.2.4. independent of the apparatus body. 21.5.2.1 The gauge shall have a minimum accuracy of Grade B as defined in Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. 21.6.9 The foam concentrate discharge system design shall prevent the ASME B40.100, siphoning of foam concentrate. 5 21.5.2.2 Numerals for master gauges shall be a minimum of /32 in. (4 mm) high. 21.6.10 Labels. 21.5.2.3 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi (70 21.6.10.1 A label that reads “Foam Tank Fill” shall be placed at or near any kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures foam concentrate tank fill opening. at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). 928 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 21.6.10.2* A label shall be placed at or near any foam concentrate tank fill (1) Foam classification type (Class A, Class B, or Class A and B) opening that specifies the type(s) of foam concentrate the system is designed to use, any restrictions on the type(s) of foam concentrate that can be used (2)* Types of foam concentrate(s) compatible with system design (see with the system, and a warning message that reads “Warning: Do Not Mix operating manual.) Brands and Types of Foam.” (3) Proportioning rate (percent) 21.6.11 The foam concentrate tank outlet connection shall be designed and located to prevent aeration of the foam concentrate and shall allow (4) Maximum/minimum water flow (gpm) withdrawal of 80 percent of the foam concentrate tank storage capacity under (5) Maximum/minimum operating pressure all operating conditions with the apparatus on level ground. 21.9.4 Operations and Maintenance Manual 21.6.12 The foam concentrate tank inlet connection, if provided, shall prevent aeration of the foam concentrate under all operating conditions. 21.9.4.1 Two copies of an operations and maintenance manual shall be provided. 21.7* Foam Concentrate Pump. If the foam proportioning system is equipped with a foam concentrate pump, the requirements of 21.7.1 through 21.9.4.2 The manual shall include a complete diagram of the system together 21.7.5 shall apply. with operating instructions, system foam concentrate capabilities, original system calibration, and details outlining all recommended maintenance 21.7.1 The foam concentrate pump shall operate without cavitation when procedures. delivering maximum rated flow. 21.10* Foam Proportioning System Accuracy. 21.7.2* The materials of construction for the foam concentrate pump shall be corrosion-resistant and compatible with the type of foam concentrate(s) 21.10.1 The foam proportioning system shall be accurate throughout the listed on the plate required in 21.9.3. manufacturer’s stated range of flow(s) and pressure(s). 21.7.3 Drivetrain components that transmit power to the foam concentrate 21.10.2* The accuracy of the foam proportioning system shall be tested by pump shall be in accordance with the apparatus manufacturer’s design the apparatus manufacturer prior to delivery of the apparatus. performance provided on the plate required in 21.9.3. 21.10.2.1 Systems designed to produce foam solution at ratios of less than 1 21.7.4 A means to relieve excess pressure in the foam concentrate pumping percent shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of –0+40 percent. system shall be provided to protect the foam concentrate pump from damage. 21.10.2.2 Systems designed to produce foam solution at ratios of 1 percent or 21.7.5* Foam concentrate pumps that are intended to be supplied from greater shall proportion foam concentrate to an accuracy of –0+30 percent or an external source of foam concentrate shall be provided with an external 1 percentage point, whichever is less. valved intake and discharge connection. 21.8 Pressure Vessel Foam Concentrate or Foam Solution Tanks. If the Chapter 22 Compressed Air Foam Systems foam proportioning system incorporates a pressure vessel foam concentrate tank, or the foam solution is contained in a pressure vessel, the requirements 22.1* Application. If the fire apparatus is equipped with a compressed air of 21.8.1 through 21.8.8 shall apply. foam system (CAFS), it shall comply with the applicable sections of this 21.8.1 If the tank is charged with a compressed gas or a pressurized liquid, chapter. and it falls within the scope of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 22.2 General Requirements. Section VIII, Division 1, it shall be designed, fabricated, and stamped in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel 22.2.1* A foam proportioning system shall be used and shall comply with Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for the rated pressure. the applicable requirements of Chapter 19. 21.8.2 Foam proportioning system piping and components shall be designed 22.2.2 The total CAFS rating shall be expressed in terms of air and water 1 to withstand a minimum of 1 /2 times the maximum working pressure of the flow. pressure vessel and shall be tested to the working pressure of the pressure vessel after installation. 22.2.2.1 The airflow shall be expressed in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM) [cubic meters per minute (SCMS)] and shall be based on the 21.8.3 The pressure vessel tank shall be protected against corrosion from continuous flow capacity of the compressed air source(s) at a minimum the foam concentrate or water stored in the tank. gauge pressure of 125 psi (862 kPa). 21.8.4 If the tank is equipped with a gravity fill (has a fill cap), the fill 22.2.2.2 The water flow shall be expressed in gallons per minute (gpm) opening shall be a minimum 2-in. (52-mm) inside diameter. [liters per minute (L/min)] at a gauge pressure of 125 psi (862 kPa). 21.8.4.1 The fill cap shall be equipped with nontapered threads and a 22.2.3 The apparatus shall be capable of supplying power for operating the compressible gasket. CAFS at its rated capacity while simultaneously providing power to all other power-dependent systems installed on the apparatus. 21.8.4.2 Special wrenches or tools required to tighten the fill cap shall be supplied by the manufacturer and shall be mounted adjacent to the fill cap. 22.2.4* On a CAFS, the water pump and air pressures shall be automatically balanced within ±10 percent up to the rated pressure of the air compressor. 21.8.4.3 A safety vent hole shall be located in the fill cap so that it vents the 1 tank pressure while at least 3 /2 threads remain engaged. 22.2.5* A means shall be provided on the CAFS for the operator to relieve all pressure from the system after the system has been deactivated. 21.8.5 A minimum 1/ -in. (13-mm), manually operated, valved vent shall be DRAFT2 provided on all pressure vessel tanks. 22.3 Compressed Air Source. 21.8.6 If the pressure vessel is charged with a compressed gas or a 22.3.1 The compressed air source operating in clean environmental pressurized liquid, a relief valve that meets the applicable requirements of conditions shall be designed to provide a continuous rated air supply for the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, shall a duration of 6 hours without needing adjustment, adding lubrication, or be installed on the pressure vessel and set to prevent the vessel pressure from changing air filters. exceeding 110 percent of the maximum allowable working pressure. 22.3.2 Relief Valve. 1 21.8.7 A minimum /2-in. (13-mm), manually operated, valved drain connection shall be provided on all pressure vessel tanks. 22.3.2.1 The compressed air system shall be equipped with a relief valve that is set to prevent the compressed air system from exceeding 110 percent of the 21.8.8 A device indicating the internal pressure of the pressure vessel shall maximum allowable working pressure of the system. be located at the operator’s position. 22.3.2.2 The outlet of the relief valve shall be routed to an area that does not 21.9 Labels, Plates, and Instructions. expose personnel to air blasts or cause the creation of dust. 21.9.1 An instruction plate shall be provided for the foam proportioning 22.3.3 If the possibility exists for moisture to build up in the compressed air system that includes, at a minimum, a piping schematic of the system and system, the system shall be equipped with moisture traps and drains. basic operating instructions. 22.3.4 If a holding, surge, or separator tank (DOT tank or ASME pressure 21.9.2 Each control, gauge, and indicator necessary to operate the foam vessel) is provided, it shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.169, “Air receivers,” or proportioning system shall be marked with a label as to its function. equal for the rated pressure. 21.9.3* A plate, located at the operator’s position, shall provide the following information pertaining to the operating specifications of the foam proportioning system: 929 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 22.3.4.1 Transportable air tanks shall comply with 49 CFR 178.37, 22.8.1 A plate indicating the identification, function, and operation shall “Specification 3AA and 3AAX, seamless steel cylinders,” or 29 CFR be provided for each control, gauge, and indicator required to operate the 1910.169, “Air receivers.” Relief valves shall be of the ASME type on ASME compressed air foam system. cylinders and of the DOT type on DOT cylinders or equal for the rated pressure. 22.8.2 A label shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that gives the rated continuous flow capacity of the compressed air source at a gauge 22.3.4.2 Valves installed on air tanks shall meet the requirements of the pressure of 125 psi (862 kPa). Compressed Gas Association or equivalent standards regarding pressure and usage with compressed air. 22.8.3 An instruction plate shall be provided at the pump operator’s panel that states the following: 22.3.4.3 If the installation utilizes DOT cylinders, a label shall be placed on the operator’s panel indicating the test date stamped on the cylinders and the (1) Open and close valves slowly. date the cylinders will next require testing. (2) Do not run with just air/water. 22.4* Air Mixing. (3) Shut off air when foam tank is empty. 22.4.1 An automatic means shall be provided to prevent the backflow of water or foam solution into the compressed air source, air into the water (4) Be prepared for high nozzle reactions — open nozzle slowly. pump, and both water and air into the foam proportioning equipment. 22.9* Manufacturer’s Predelivery Tests. The manufacturer shall conduct 22.4.2 A means of mixing air and foam solution that provides for a the following tests prior to delivery of the apparatus. homogeneous mixture of compressed air and foam solution shall be provided 22.9.1 CAFS Capacity Rating Test. on the CAFS. 22.9.1.1 The operation of the water pump and the compressed air source 22.5* Compressed Air System Piping. The discharge plumbing shall be shall be tested simultaneously to determine the integrity of the system and to configured to minimize the use of elbows or abrupt turns. ensure that the power available is capable of operating these components of 22.6 Air Source Controls. the CAFS simultaneously. 22.9.1.1.1 The compressed air source shall be operated at its flow capacity 22.6.1 All compressed air source controls shall be located at the pump at a minimum gauge pressure of 125 psi (862 kPa), and the water pump shall operator’s panel and shall be identified with a plate in accordance with the discharge 2 gpm (7.6 L/min) of water at 125 psi (862 kPa) net pump pressure requirements of 22.8.1. for every 1 SCFM (0.000472 SCMS) of compressed air discharge. 22.6.2 Compressed air systems that require flushing after use shall be provided with controls that are accessible to the operator and enable 22.9.1.1.2 The discharge shall be through at least two separate discharge the operator to completely flush the system with water according to the openings, one discharging air only and the other discharging water only. manufacturer’s instructions. 22.9.1.2 One or more lines of fire hose of sufficient diameter shall be provided to allow discharge of the required amount of water from the pump 22.7 Foam System Pressure Indicating Devices, Flowmeters, and to a nozzle or other flow-measuring equipment without exceeding a flow Indicators. velocity of 35 ft/sec (10.7 m/sec) [approximately 500 gpm (2000 L/min) for 1 22.7.1 The displays of all pressure indicating devices, flowmeters, and 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose]. indicators (e.g., fluid level indicators) shall be located so they are visible 22.9.1.2.1 The discharge shall be measured using a smoothbore nozzle and from the pump operator’s position and shall meet the requirements of 4.10.3. pilot tube or other equipment such as flowmeters, volumetric tanks, or weigh 22.7.2 If analog pressure gauges are used, they shall meet the requirements tanks. of 22.7.2.1 through 22.7.2.4. 22.9.1.2.2 Test gauges shall meet the requirements of 16.13.2.2.4 and 22.7.2.1 The analog pressure gauge shall have a minimum accuracy 16.13.2.2.5. of Grade B as defined in ASME B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments 22.9.1.3 The airflow rate shall be measured using a pressure and . temperature compensated flow-measuring device. 22.7.2.2 Numerals for master gauges shall be a minimum of 5/ in. (4 mm) 32 22.9.1.3.1 The airflow shall be measured in SCFM at a minimum gauge high. pressure of 125 psi (862 kPa). 22.7.2.3 There shall be graduation lines showing at least every 10 psi (70 kPa), with major and intermediate graduation lines emphasized and figures 22.9.1.3.2 The airflow-measuring device shall have been calibrated for at least every 100 psi (700 kPa). accuracy within the previous 3 months. 22.7.2.4 Analog pressure gauges shall be vibration and pressure pulsation 22.9.1.3.3* The air discharge outlet shall have nothing attached directly to it dampened, be resistant to corrosion, condensation, and shock, and have except the test device(s). internal mechanisms that are factory lubricated for the life of the gauge. 22.9.1.4 The water pump and the compressed air source shall be started and 22.7.3 If digital pressure indicating devices are used, they shall meet the the rated flows and pressures as specified in 22.9.1.1.1 shall be established requirements of 22.7.3.1 through 22.7.3.3. and maintained. 22.7.3.1 The digits shall be at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) high. 22.9.1.4.1 The system shall be run for 1 hour. 22.7.3.2 DigitalDRAFT pressure indicating devices shall display pressure in 22.9.1.4.2 Readings of the airflow rate and pressure and the water pump increments of not more than 10 psi (70 kPa). pressure and discharge rate shall be taken at least every 10 minutes. 22.9.1.5 Failure of any component of the CAFS to maintain air and 22.7.3.3 Digital pressure indicating devices shall have an accuracy of ±3 water pressures and discharge volumes at or above the system rating shall percent over the full scale. constitute failure of the test. 22.7.4 Each pressure indicating device and flowmeter, and its respective display, shall be mounted and attached so it is protected from accidental 22.9.2* Standby Run Test. damage and excessive vibration. 1 22.9.2.1 One 200-ft (60-m) line of 1 /2-in. (38-mm) hose shall be connected 22.7.5 If flowmeters are provided, they shall meet the requirements of to the discharge of the CAFS and shall be stretched out on level ground. 22.7.5.1 and 22.7.5.2. 22.9.2.2 A quarter-turn valve of the same nominal size as the hose shall be 22.7.5.1 Flowmeter displays shall be located at the pump operator’s panel installed at the discharge end. and shall indicate the airflow in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM) 22.9.2.3 The hose shall be restrained immediately behind the valve at the [cubic meters per minute (SCMS)] and indicate the water flow in gallons per discharge end to prevent uncontrollable movement when the valve is opened. minute (gpm) [liters per minute (L/min)]. 22.9.2.4 Operating as a CAFS, with a gauge pressure air output at 125 psi 22.7.5.2 Flowmeters shall be rated to a hydrostatic burst gauge pressure of (862 kPa), a foam flow shall be established in the hose line. 500 psi (3400 kPa) if located on the pressure side of the system. 22.9.2.5 With the water tank at the half full level, the valve at the discharge 22.7.6* A pressure indicating device shall be provided for the compressed end of the hose shall be shut no faster than in 3 seconds and no slower than air source. in 10 seconds. 22.8 Labels and Instruction Plates.

930 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 22.9.2.6 The engine(s) speed shall be maintained for 10 minutes without 23.3.2.3 In addition to the bonding required for the low-voltage return discharging water, air, or foam solution from the CAFS and without operator current, each body and each driving or crew compartment enclosure shall be intervention. bonded to the vehicle frame by a copper conductor. 22.9.2.7 A bypass line shall be permitted to be opened temporarily, if 23.3.2.3.1 The conductor shall have a minimum amperage rating of 115 needed, to keep the water temperature in the pump within acceptable limits. percent of the nameplate current rating of the power source specification label as defined in Section 310.15, “Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0-2000 22.9.2.8 At the end of 10 minutes, the valve shall be reopened no faster than Volts,” of NFPA 70. in 3 seconds and no slower than in 10 seconds. 23.3.2.3.2 A single conductor that is sized to meet the low-voltage and line 22.9.2.9 Either damage to the system that affects its rated performance voltage requirements shall be permitted to be used. characteristics or the lack of a fire stream immediately upon opening the hose line shall constitute failure of this test. 23.4 Power Source General Requirements. The following requirements shall apply to all line voltage power sources. Chapter 23 Line Voltage Electrical Systems 23.4.1 All power source system mechanical and electrical components shall be sized to support the continuous duty nameplate rating of the power source. 23.1* Application. Where any part of a line voltage electrical system is provided as a fixed installation, the applicable requirements of this chapter 23.4.2 The power source shall be shielded from contamination that will shall apply. prevent the power source from operating within its design specifications. 23.4.3 Guards shall be provided to protect personnel from moving parts and 23.2 General Requirements. any surface with a temperature of 131°F (55°C) or higher. 23.2.1 Any fixed line voltage power source producing alternating current 23.4.4 For power sources of 8 kW or larger, the power source manufacturer (ac) line voltage shall produce electric power at 60 cycles ±5 cycles. shall certify that the power source is capable of supplying the continuous 23.2.2 Conformance with the National Electrical Code®. duty rating on the power source specification label at 120°F (49°C) air intake temperature. 23.2.2.1 All components, equipment, and installation procedures shall conform to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, except where superseded by 23.4.5 Access shall be provided to permit both routine maintenance and the requirements of this chapter. removal of the power source for major servicing. 23.2.2.2 Where the requirements of this chapter differ from those in the 23.4.6 The power source shall be located such that neither it nor its NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, the requirements in this chapter shall mounting brackets interfere with the routine maintenance of the fire apply. apparatus. 23.2.3* When available, line voltage electrical system equipment and 23.4.7 The instrumentation shall be permanently mounted at an operator’s materials included on the apparatus shall be listed and used only in the panel. manner for which they have been listed. 23.4.7.1 The instruments shall be located in a plane facing the operator. 23.2.4 All equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the 23.4.7.2 Gauges, switches, or other instruments on this panel shall each have manufacturer’s instructions. a label to indicate their function. 23.2.5 Location Ratings. 23.4.8 Instrumentation. 23.2.5.1 Any equipment used in a dry location shall be listed for dry 23.4.8.1 If the power source is rated at less than 3 kW, a “power on” locations. indicator shall be provided. 23.2.5.2 Any equipment used in a wet location shall be listed for wet 23.4.8.2 If the power source is rated at 3 kW or more but less than 8 kW, a locations. voltmeter shall be provided. 23.2.5.3 Any equipment, except a power take-off driven generator, used in 23.4.8.3* If the power source is rated at 8 kW or more, the following an underbody or underchassis location that is subject to road spray shall be instrumentation shall be provided at an operator’s panel: either listed as Type 4 or mounted in an enclosure that is listed as Type 4. (1) Voltmeter 23.2.5.4* If a power take-off driven generator is located in an underbody or underchassis location, the installation shall include a shield to prevent road (2) Current meters for each ungrounded leg spray from splashing directly on the generator. 23.3 Grounding and Bonding. (3) Frequency (cycle) meter 23.3.1* Grounding. Grounding shall be in accordance with Section 250.34 “Portable and Vehicle-Mounted Generators,” of NFPA 70, National (4) Power source hourmeter Electrical Code. 23.4.9 An instruction plate(s) that provides the operator with the essential 23.3.1.1 Ungrounded systems shall not be used. power source operating instructions, including the power-up and power- down sequence, shall be permanently attached to the apparatus at any point 23.3.1.2 Only stranded or braided copper conductors shall be used for where such operations can take place. grounding and DRAFTbonding. 23.4.10* Operation. 23.3.1.3 An equipment grounding means shall be provided in accordance with Section 250.62, “Grounding Electrode Conductor Material”; Section 23.4.10.1 Provisions shall be made for placing the generator drive system 250.118, “Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors”; and Section 250.54, in operation using controls and switches that are identified and within “Supplementary Grounding Electrodes,” of NFPA 70. convenient reach of the operator. 23.3.1.4 The grounded current-carrying conductor (neutral) shall be 23.4.10.2 Where the generator is driven by the chassis engine and engine insulated from the equipment grounding conductors and from the equipment compression brakes or engine exhaust brakes are furnished, they shall be enclosures and other grounded parts. automatically disengaged for generator operations. 23.3.1.5 The neutral conductor shall be colored white or gray in accordance 23.4.10.3 Where the generator is driven by the chassis engine and an with Section 200.6, “Means of Identifying Grounded Conductors,” of NFPA automatic fan clutch is furnished, the fan shall be engaged for generator 70. operations. 23.3.1.6 Any bonding screws, straps, or buses in the distribution panelboard 23.4.10.4* Any control device used in the generator system power train or in other system components between the neutral and equipment grounding between the engine and the generator shall be equipped with a means to conductor shall be removed and discarded. prevent unintentional movement of the control device from its set position in the power generation mode. 23.3.2 Bonding. 23.4.11 If there is permanent wiring on the apparatus that is designed to 23.3.2.1 The neutral conductor of the power source shall be bonded to the be connected to the power source, a power source specification label that is vehicle frame. permanently attached to the apparatus at the operator’s control station shall provide the operator with the information detailed in Figure 23.4.11. 23.3.2.2 The neutral bonding connection shall only occur at the power source. 931 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 23.6.2.5 Hydraulic Components. Power Source Specification Label 23.6.2.5.1 A hydraulic system filter and strainer shall be provided and shall Operational Category Continuous Duty Rating be located in a readily accessible area. Rated voltage(s) and type (ac or dc) 23.6.2.5.2 Hydraulic hose shall meet the hydraulic pump manufacturer’s recommendations for pressure, size, vacuum, and abrasion resistance. Phase Rated frequency 23.6.2.5.3* Hydraulic fittings shall meet the hydraulic pump manufacturer’s recommendations for pressure, size, and the type of hose used. Rated amperage 23.6.2.5.4* Where the hydraulic hose comes into contact with other Continuous rated watts surfaces, the hose shall be protected from chaffing. Power source engine speed 23.6.3* Fixed Auxiliary Engine-Driven Generators. 23.6.3.1 The generator shall comply with Article 445, “Generators,” of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Figure 23.4.11 Power Source Specification Label. 23.6.3.2* Power sources powered by a non-chassis engine shall include the following equipment or shall be installed as follows:

23.4.12 The power source, at any load, shall not produce a noise level that (1) Power sources shall be installed so that fumes, vapors, heat, and exceeds 90 dBA in any driving compartment, crew compartment, or onboard vibrations do not enter the interior passenger compartment. command area with windows and doors closed, or at any operator’s station (2) Power sources shall have the exhaust outlet piped to the exterior and on the apparatus. located so that exhaust is directed away from any operator’s position. 23.5 Chassis Engine Driven Generators. Where the generator is driven by (3) Generators 8 kW and over shall be equipped with a high-temperature the chassis engine, the requirements in 23.5.1 through 23.5.3 shall apply. automatic shut down system and low oil automatic shut down. 23.5.1 A “Generator Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the driving (4) Generators shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s compartment to indicate that the generator shift has been successfully installation requirements for ventilation and service accessibility. completed unless the generator is always engaged. (5) Generators installed in compartments requiring the compartment 23.5.2 An “OK to Operate Generator” indicator shall be provided in the doors to be open during operation shall be equipped with a compartment driving compartment to indicate that the generator is engaged, transmission door interlock system, or the compartment shall be equipped with a high- is in the proper gear (automatic transmissions only), and the parking brake is temperature alarm. engaged unless the generator is always engaged and operating. (6) Generators installed in compartments on slide trays and designed for 23.5.3 An interlock system shall be provided to prevent advancement of operation in the “slide out” position shall have interlocks to assure such the engine speed in the driving compartment or at any operator’s panel operation or the compartment shall be equipped with a high-temperature unless the transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged, or the alarm. apparatus is in the “OK to Pump” or “OK to Operate Generator” mode. (7) Permanently installed generators shall have easily accessible engine oil 23.6 Additional Power Source Requirements. The requirements in 23.6.1 drain provisions or piping to a remote location for oil changing. through 23.6.5.3 are specific to the defined type of line voltage power source. (8) Generators located away or remote from the main operator’s area (top 23.6.1 Direct Drive (PTO) Generators. of apparatus, over pump, hidden in body, etc. shall have a remote operating 23.6.1.1* The generator shall comply with Article 445, “Generators,” of panel with required instrumentation, start and stop controls, and other NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. controls necessary for safe operation. 23.6.1.2* The main propulsion engine shall have a governor capable of 23.6.3.3 Fuel System. maintaining the engine speed within the limits required by the generator to 23.6.3.3.1 Fuel lines shall be protected from chaffing at all wear points. meet the frequency control specifications. 23.6.3.3.2 If the fuel source is shared with the apparatus engine, a separate 23.6.1.3 An interlock shall prevent engagement of the generator unless the fuel pickup system shall be provided that is arranged to ensure that the parking brake is engaged. generator cannot utilize more than 75 percent of the fuel tank’s capacity. 23.6.1.4* Where the chassis engine drives the generator and electronic 23.6.3.4 Exhaust System. engine throttle controls are provided, an interlock shall prevent engine speed control from any other source while the generator is operating. 23.6.3.4.1* The exhaust piping and discharge shall be located or shielded to prevent thermal damage to the apparatus or equipment. 23.6.1.5 The transmission’s PTO port and PTO, or the split shaft PTO, and all associated drive shaft components shall be rated to support the 23.6.3.4.2 Where parts of the exhaust system are exposed so that they can continuous duty torque requirements of the generator’s full rated load as cause injury to operating personnel, protective guards shall be provided. defined on the power source specification label. 23.6.3.4.3 Silencing devices shall be provided and shall not create exhaust 23.6.1.6 A labelDRAFT indicating the chassis transmission shift selector position to backpressure that exceeds the limits specified by the engine manufacturer. be used for generator operation shall be provided in the driving compartment and located so that it can be read from the driver’s position. 23.6.4* Belt-Driven Generators or Alternators Supplying a Dedicated Inverter. 23.6.1.7 Where the generator is driven by the chassis engine and transmission through a split shaft PTO, the driving compartment 23.6.4.1 A means shall be provided to engage and disengage the generator. speedometer shall register when the generator drive system is engaged. 23.6.4.2 A voltmeter shall be provided at the operator’s panel for all sizes of 23.6.1.8 Where the generator is driven by the chassis engine and systems of this type. transmission through a split shaft PTO and chassis transmission retarders are furnished, they shall be automatically disengaged for generator operations. 23.6.4.3 The belt drive system shall be rated to drive the generator or alternator at the system performance label rating. 23.6.2 Hydraulically Driven Generators. 23.6.5 Line Voltage Systems Derived from Apparatus Low-Voltage 23.6.2.1* The generator shall comply with Article 445, “Generators,” of Power Supply Systems. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 23.6.5.1* Where a line voltage power source derives its input energy from 23.6.2.2* A means shall be provided to activate the hydraulic generator the apparatus low-voltage electrical system, the system shall be installed in system. strict compliance with the requirements of Chapter 11. 23.6.2.3 A hydraulic generator system shall operate at all engine speeds, or 23.6.5.2 The alternator and/or battery system shall be adequate to provide an automatic engine speed control system shall be provided. power to the power source for continuous operation for a minimum of 2 hours at full output. 23.6.2.4 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump driven by the chassis engine, the generator shall be capable of output at idle as specified on the power source specification label. 932 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 23.6.5.3 A means that works in coordination with other engine speed 23.9.3 For fixed power supplies, all conductors in the power supply assembly controls and interlocks required by this standard shall be provided to shall be Type THHW, THW, USE, THWN, or XHHW stranded conductors advance engine speed to obtain the power stated on the power source enclosed in nonmetallic liquidtight flexible conduit rated for a minimum of specification label. 194°F (90°C). 23.7* Portable Generator Installations. The generator shall comply with 23.9.4 For portable power supplies, conductors located between the power Article 445, “Generators,” of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. source and the line side of the main overcurrent protection device shall be Type SO or Type SEO with suffix WA flexible cord, rated for 600 volts at 23.7.1 Any portable generator that can be operated while mounted on the 194°F (90°C). apparatus shall be as follows: 23.10 Overcurrent Protection. Manually resettable overcurrent devices (1) Installed so that fumes, vapors, heat, excessive noise, and vibrations do shall be installed to protect the line voltage electrical system components. not enter interior driving or crew compartments or damage the generator during operation 23.10.1 Power Source Protection. A main overcurrent protection device shall be provided that is either incorporated in the power source or is (2) Have the exhaust outlet located so that exhaust is directed away from any connected to the power source by a power supply assembly. operator station located on the apparatus and guarded to protect the operator 23.10.1.1 The size of the main overcurrent protection device shall not 23.7.2 If the portable generator is remotely mounted, it shall have a remote exceed 100 percent of the nameplate amperage rating on the power source operator’s control station that shall provide a means for starting and stopping specification label or the rating of the next larger available size overcurrent the generator and monitoring the same instrumentation as is required for protection device, where so recommended by the power source manufacturer. fixed power sources. 23.10.1.2 If the main overcurrent protection device is subject to road spray, 23.7.3 Wiring for Portable Generator Installations. Wiring installed for the unit shall be housed in a Type 4 rated enclosure. the purpose of facilitating the distribution of power from a portable generator installation shall conform to the following additional requirements. 23.10.2 Branch Circuit Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection devices shall be provided for each individual circuit and shall be sized at 23.7.3.1 Circuit conductors shall be sized in relation to the system not less than 15 amps in accordance with Section 240.4, “Protection of performance specification label rating and shall be protected by an Conductors,” of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. overcurrent device commensurate with their amperage capacities. 23.10.2.1 Any panelboard shall have a main breaker when the panel has 23.7.3.2 There shall be a single output connector cord with all of the six or more individual branch circuits, or the power source is rated 8 kW or conductors in the cord sized to carry a minimum of 115 percent of the larger. nameplate amperage. 23.10.2.2 Each overcurrent protection device shall be marked with a label to 23.7.3.3 If there is not an overcurrent protection device at the power source, identify the function of the circuit it protects. the output connector cord shall not exceed 72 in. (2 m) in length and shall be connected to an overcurrent protection device. 23.10.2.3 Dedicated circuits shall be provided for any large appliance or device (air-conditioning units, large motors, etc.) that requires 60 percent 23.7.3.4 The size of the main overcurrent protection device shall equal the or more of the rated capacity of the circuit to which it is connected and that nameplate amperage rating on the power source specification label or the circuit shall serve no other purpose. rating of the next larger available size overcurrent protection device where so recommended by the power source manufacturer. 23.10.3 Panelboards. All fixed power sources shall be hardwired to a permanently mounted panelboard unless the following situations exist: 23.7.4 If a connecting plug is required, it shall be sized in relation to the system and conform to NEMA configurations for plugs. (1) All line voltage power connections are made through receptacles on the power source and the receptacles are protected by integrated overcurrent 23.8 Line Voltage Supplied from an External Source. devices 23.8.1* If the apparatus is equipped with a fixed power inlet (shoreline (2) Only one circuit is hardwired to the power source, which is protected by inlet), it shall be a permanently mounted, flanged surface inlet (male an integrated overcurrent device recessed–type receptacle with cover) sized in accordance with the anticipated load and wired directly to the system or device to be powered or 23.10.3.1 The panel shall be visible and located so that there is unimpeded wired to a transfer switch where required by 23.8.2. access to the panelboard controls. 23.8.2 Transfer Switch Applications. 23.10.3.2 All panelboards shall be designed for use in their intended location. 23.8.2.1 A transfer switch shall be required to isolate one power source from the other where a circuit(s) is intended to be supplied from more than 23.11 Wiring Methods. Fixed wiring systems shall be limited to the one power source. following: 23.8.2.2* Transfer equipment, including transfer switches, shall operate (1) Metallic or nonmetallic liquidtight flexible conduit rated at not such that all ungrounded conductors of one power source are disconnected less than 194°F (90°C) before any ungrounded conductors of the second power source are connected. (2) Type SO or Type SEO cord with a WA suffix, rated at 600 volts at not less than 194°F (90°C) 23.8.3 The apparatus shall have a label permanently affixed at the power inlet that indicatesDRAFT the information shown in Figure 23.8.3. 23.11.1 Electrical cord or conduit shall not be attached to chassis suspension components, water or fuel lines, air or air brake lines, fire pump piping, hydraulic lines, exhaust system components, or low-voltage wiring and shall be arranged as follows: Shore Power Inlet (1) Separated by a minimum distance of 12 in. (300 mm) from exhaust piping or shielded from such piping Line voltage volts (2) Separated from fuel lines by a minimum distance of 6 in. (150 mm) Current rating amps 23.11.2 A means shall be provided to allow “flexing” between the driving and crew compartment, the body, and other areas or equipment whose movement would stress the wiring. Figure 23.8.3 Power Inlet Label 23.11.3 Electrical cord or conduit shall be supported within 6 in. (150 mm) 23.9 Power Supply Assembly. of any junction box and at a minimum of every 24 in. (600 mm) of run. 23.9.1 The conductors used in the power supply assembly between the output 23.11.3.1 Supports shall be made of nonmetallic materials or corrosion- terminals of the power source and the main overcurrent protection device resistant or corrosion-protected metal. shall not exceed 144 in. (4 m) in length. 23.11.3.2 All supports shall be of a design that does not cut or abrade the 23.9.2 All power supply assembly conductors, including neutral and conduit or cord and shall be mechanically fastened to the apparatus. grounding conductors, shall have an equivalent amperage rating and shall be sized to carry not less than 115 percent of the amperage of the nameplate 23.11.4 Only fittings and components listed for the type of cord or conduit current rating of the power source. being installed shall be used. 23.11.5 Splices shall be made only in a listed junction box. 933 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 23.11.6 Additional Requirements for Type SO or Type SEO Cord 23.12.5.2 All receptacles located in a dry location shall be of the grounding Installations. type and shall be at least 12 in. (300 mm) above the interior floor height. 23.11.6.1 Where Type SO or Type SEO cord is installed in a compartment, 23.12.5.3 No receptacle shall be installed in a face-up position. it shall be installed on the ceiling surface or shall be enclosed in a metal conduit or enclosure with a minimum thickness of 16 MSG. 23.12.5.4 The face of any wet location receptacle shall be installed in a plane from vertical to not more than 45 degrees off vertical. 23.11.6.2 Where Type SO or Type SEO cord penetrates a metal surface, rubber or plastic grommets or bushings shall be installed. 23.12.5.5 Receptacle Label. 23.11.7 Wiring Identification. 23.12.5.5.1 Each receptacle shall be marked with a label indicating the nominal line voltage (120 volts or 240 volts) and the current rating in amps 23.11.7.1 Each line voltage circuit originating from the main panelboard of the circuit. shall be identified. 23.12.5.5.2 If the receptacle is dc or other than single phase, that 23.11.7.2 The wire or circuit identification shall either reference a wiring information shall also be marked on the label. diagram or wire list, or shall indicate the final termination point of the circuit. 23.12.5.6* All receptacles and electrical inlet devices shall be listed to UL 498, Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, or other 23.11.7.3 When prewiring for future power sources or devices exists, the recognized performance standards. unterminated ends shall be marked with a label showing their wire size and intended function. 23.12.5.7 Receptacles used for dc voltages shall be rated for dc service. 23.12 Wiring System Components. 23.13 Cord Reels. All cord reels shall be rated for continuous duty and installed to be accessible for removal, cord access, maintenance, and 23.12.1 Only stranded copper conductors with an insulation rated for at least servicing. 194°F (90°C) shall be used. 23.13.1 The power rewind cord reel spool area shall be visible to the 23.12.1.1 Conductors in Type SO or Type SEO cord shall be sized in operator during the rewind operation, or the reel spool shall be encapsulated accordance with Table 400.5(A) of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. to prevent cord from spooling off the reel. 23.12.1.2 Conductors used in conduit shall be sized in accordance with 23.13.2 Rollers or guides shall be provided, where required, to prevent Section 310.15, “Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0-2000 Volts,” of NFPA damage to the cord at reel spools or compartment openings. 70. 23.13.3 Rewind Provision. 23.12.1.3 Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum conductors shall not be used. 23.13.3.1 Manually operated reels shall have a hand crank. 23.12.2 All boxes shall conform to and be mounted in accordance with Article 314, “Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; 23.13.3.2 Power rewind–type reels shall have the control in a position where Fittings; and Manholes,” of NFPA 70. the operator can observe the rewinding operation. If a reel is in an enclosure or out of direct view, the cord entry point to the enclosure shall be visible to 23.12.2.1 All boxes shall be accessible using ordinary hand tools. the operator of the reel control. 23.12.2.2 Boxes shall not be permitted behind welded or pop-riveted 23.13.3.3 The rewind control or crank shall not be over 72 in. (1830 mm) panels. above the operator’s standing position. 23.12.2.3 The maximum number of conductors permitted in any box shall 23.13.3.4 The rewind control shall be marked with a label indicating its be in accordance with Section 314.16, “Number of Conductors in Outlet, function and shall be guarded to prevent accidental operation. Device, and Junction Boxes, and Conduit Bodies” of NFPA 70. 23.13.4* The reel shall be designed to hold 110 percent of the capacity 23.12.3* All wiring connections and terminations shall provide a positive needed for the intended cord length. mechanical and electrical connection. 23.13.5* The wire size shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, National 23.12.3.1 Connectors shall be installed in accordance with the Electrical Code, Table 400.5(A). manufacturer’s instructions. 23.13.6* Electrical cord shall be Type SEOOW-A, Type SOOW-A, or Type 23.12.3.2 Wire nuts or insulation displacement and insulation piercing STOOW-A. connectors shall not be used. 23.13.7* A label that indicates the following information shall be provided in 23.12.4* Each switch shall indicate the position of its contact points (i.e., a visible location adjacent to any permanently connected reel. open or closed) and shall be rated for the continuous operation of the load being controlled. (1) Current rating 23.12.4.1 All switches shall be marked with a label indicating the function (2) Current type of the switch. (3) Phase 23.12.4.2* Circuit breakers used as switches shall be “switch rated” (SWD) or better. (4) Voltage DRAFT(5) Total cord length 23.12.4.3 Switches shall simultaneously open all associated line voltage conductors. 23.13.8 Where a power distribution box is hardwired to the end of a cord that is stored on a fixed cord reel or other fixed storage means, the requirements 23.12.4.4 Switching of the neutral conductor alone shall not be permitted. in 23.13.8.1 through 23.13.8.6 shall apply. 23.12.4.5 Line voltage circuits controlled by low-voltage circuits shall be wired through properly rated relays in listed enclosures that control all 23.13.8.1 The remote power distribution box shall be listed for use in a wet nongrounded current-carrying conductors. location. 23.12.5 Receptacles and Inlet Devices. 23.13.8.2* The distribution box shall be as follows: 23.12.5.1 Wet and Dry Locations. (1) Protected from corrosion 23.12.5.1.1* All wet location receptacle outlets and inlet devices including (2) Capable of being carried with a gloved hand those on hardwired, remote power distribution boxes, shall be of the (3) Designed to keep the exterior electrical components above 2 in. (51 mm) grounding type, provided with a wet location cover, and installed in of standing water accordance with Section 210-7, “Branch Circuit Receptacle Requirements,” of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 23.13.8.3* Inlets, receptacles, circuit breakers, or GFCI devices shall not be mounted on the top surface of the horizontal plane. 23.12.5.1.2 All receptacles located in a wet location shall be not less than 24 in. (600 mm) from the ground. 23.13.8.4 Branch circuit breakers shall be installed in the remote power distribution box if the overcurrent device protecting the feed cord to the 23.12.5.1.3* Receptacles on off-road fire apparatus shall be a minimum of box is too large to protect the wiring supplying the devices plugged onto the 30 in. (750 mm) from the ground. distribution box.

934 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 23.13.8.5* Remote power distribution boxes shall have a light on the box to 23.16.2 Dielectric Voltage Withstand Test. indicate the power is on. 23.16.2.1 The wiring and permanently connected devices and equipment 23.13.8.5.1* The light shall be visible in a 360-degree plane from a shall be subjected to a dielectric voltage withstand test of 900 volts for 1 minimum of 200 ft (60 m) in complete darkness. minute. 23.13.8.5.2 The light shall be mechanically protected to prevent damage. 23.16.2.2 The dielectric tester shall have a 500 volt-amperes (VA) or larger transformer, with a sinusoidal output voltage that can be verified. 23.13.8.6 The hardwired portable cord connection to the box shall have strain relief and meet the intended usage requirements. 23.16.2.3 The testing shall be performed after all body work has been completed. 23.14 Scene Lighting Systems. Where fixed scene lights are supplied, the requirements in 23.14.1 through 23.14.4 shall apply. 23.16.2.4* The test shall be conducted as follows: 23.14.1 All scene lights shall be provided with a lens or a means for (1) Isolate the power source from the panel board, and disconnect any solid preventing damage from water spray and shall be listed for wet location state low-voltage components. usage. (2) Connect one lead of the dielectric tester to all the hot and neutral 23.14.2 Handle on Lights. busses tied together. 23.14.2.1 If the light is adjustable, a handle shall be provided. (3) Connect the other lead to the fire apparatus frame or body. 23.14.2.2 The design of the light shall not allow the temperature of the (4) Close any switches and circuit breakers in the circuit(s). handle to exceed 131°F (55°C). (5) Apply the dielectric voltage for 1 minute in accordance with the testing 23.14.3 The manufacturer of the device shall type certify that the scene light equipment manufacturer’s instructions. has been tested and complies with the vibration testing requirements of SAE J575, Test Methods and Equipment for Lighting Devices and Components for 23.16.3* The electrical polarity of all permanently wired equipment and Use on Vehicles Less Than 2032 mm in Overall Width. receptacles shall be tested to verify that wiring connections have been properly made. 23.14.4 If manually operated floodlights are not operable from the ground, access steps that meet the requirements of Section 15.7 and handrails that 23.16.4 Electrical light towers, floodlights, motors, fixed appliances meet the requirements of Section 15.8 shall be provided to allow the user to including cord reels, and portable generators shall be operated at their full reach the floodlights. rating or capacity for 30 minutes to assure proper operation. 23.15 Power-Operated Light Mast. 23.16.5* Operational Test of Fixed Power Source. 23.15.1* General. 23.16.5.1 If the apparatus is equipped with a fixed power source, the apparatus manufacturer shall perform an operational test on the fixed power 23.15.1.1 The mast shall be designed to sustain the intended tip load with at sources. least a 125 percent safety factor. 23.16.5.2 The testing of the fixed power source shall be witnessed, and 23.15.1.2 The mast shall withstand a minimum of a 50-mph (80 kph) wind the results of the tests of the fixed power source shall be certified by an in a raised, unguyed position. independent third-party certification organization. 23.15.2* Installation and Operational Requirements. 23.16.5.3 Test Procedure. 23.15.2.1 The mast shall be capable of being raised within 2 minutes. 23.16.5.3.1 The prime mover shall be started from a cold start condition and the line voltage electrical system loaded to 100 percent of the wattage 23.15.2.2 Where the installation precludes the operator from seeing the light specified on the power source specification label. in its nested position, a means shall be provided to allow the operator to align the light for nesting when the operator is at the operator’s position. 23.16.5.3.2 Testing with a resistive load bank shall be permitted. 23.15.2.3* Appropriate warning labels on the hazards of electrocution shall 23.16.5.3.3 The power source shall be operated in the manner specified be installed. by the apparatus manufacturer as documented on instruction placards or in operation manuals. 23.15.2.4 A means shall be provided to prevent operations that could cause damage to the power supply conductors. 23.16.5.3.4 The power source shall be operated at 100 percent of the continuous rated wattage as specified on the power source specification label 23.15.2.5 In the event of a failure of the light tower’s raising system while for a minimum of 2 hours. the tower is deployed or being deployed, a means shall be provided to limit the rate of descent in order to prevent injury to equipment or personnel. 23.16.5.3.4.1 Wattage shall be maintained at or above the continuous rated wattage during the entire test. 23.15.2.6 A secondary means of control shall be provided to allow for emergency lowering of the mast. 23.16.5.3.4.2 Voltage shall be maintained within ±5 percent of the voltage specified on the power source specification label during the entire test. 23.15.2.7 Where the tower is powered by the chassis air brake system, the air supply shall be from an auxiliary air circuit that is equipped with a 23.16.5.3.4.3 Frequency shall be maintained within ±5 cycles of the pressure protectionDRAFT valve and an auxiliary air tank(s). frequency specified on the power source specification label during the entire test. 23.15.2.8* An automatic deenergizing means shall be provided so there is 1 no electrical power to the mast or to the light wiring when the mast is in a 23.16.5.3.5 The following conditions shall be recorded at least every /2 hour stowed position. during the test: 23.15.2.9 The hazard warning light required in Section 13.11 shall be (1) The power source output voltage, frequency, and amperes illuminated whenever the light tower is not in the stowed position. (2) The prime mover’s oil pressure, water temperature, and transmission 23.15.2.10 The operational envelope of the mast shall be automatically temperature, if applicable illuminated whenever the mast assembly is being raised, lowered, or rotated. (3) The power source hydraulic fluid temperature, if applicable 23.15.3 Labeling. (4) The ambient temperature and power source air inlet temperature 23.15.3.1 An instruction plate showing the operation of the mast and operational warning signs shall be provided at the operator’s position. 23.16.5.3.6 The electrical loads and conditions specified in 13.14.3.4 shall be applied during the testing unless an auxiliary engine drives the power 23.15.3.2 A label shall be provided at the operator’s position to indicate the source. following: 23.16.5.3.7 If the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump, the 2-hour (1) Extended tower height from the ground operational test of the fixed power source shall be completed with the fire pump pumping at 100 percent capacity at 150 psi (1000 kPa) net pump (2) Bulb replacement data pressure. The test shall be permitted to be run concurrently with the pump 23.16* Electrical System Testing. certification test required in 16.13.1. 23.16.1 The wiring and associated equipment shall be tested by the 23.16.5.3.8 Prime Mover Driven Accessories. apparatus manufacturer or the installer of the line voltage system. 935 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 23.16.5.3.8.1 Accessories driven by the power source prime mover shall not 24.9.1* The interior surfaces shall be designed to sustain the usage expected be functionally disconnected or otherwise rendered inoperative during the in a command area. line voltage electrical tests. 24.9.2 The interior surfaces of command areas shall be free of sharp corners, 23.16.5.3.8.2 The following devices shall be permitted to be turned off or projections, and edges not operating during the fixed power source test: 24.9.3 Floor surfaces shall be capable of being routinely cleaned. (1) Aerial hydraulic pump 24.9.3.1 Floor mats or coverings shall be durable and removable for cleaning. (2) Foam pump 24.9.3.2 Floor surfaces, walking surfaces, and access steps shall comply (3) Hydraulically driven equipment with Section 15.7. (4) Winch 24.9.3.3 Access handrails shall comply with Section 15.8. (5) Windshield wipers 24.9.4 Dry-type greaseboards, corkboards, chalk-type boards, or similar bulletin- or command-type wall surfaces shall be fastened in place and shall (6) Four-way hazard flashers be replaceable. 23.16.5.3.9 If the line voltage power is derived from the fire apparatus’s low- 24.10 Communications and Electrical Consoles. voltage system and is the primary source for line voltage, the power source shall not be shed by a load management system during the two-hour test. 24.10.1* The communications equipment shall be installed in accordance with the component manufacturer’s instructions and manuals. 23.16.6 The results of each test shall be recorded on an appropriate form and provided with the delivery documentation 24.10.2 Installation of radio and communications equipment shall conform to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) standards and requirements. Chapter 24 Command and Communications 24.10.3 If a radio or electrical console is provided, it shall be enclosed on all sides to afford protection to equipment mounted in it. 24.1 General. If the fire apparatus is equipped with a separate communications area or if it is used as a totally dedicated command 24.10.3.1 The front surface shall be hinged or bolted in place. apparatus, it shall meet the requirements of this chapter. 24.10.3.2 Additional hinged or removable panels shall be provided, as 24.2* Location. required, for access to equipment. 24.2.1* The command center shall be enclosed within a vehicle crew area 24.11* Computer Equipment and Installation. or body. 24.11.1 All computer equipment shall be installed in a manner to reduce 24.2.2* The size of the command center located in a body shall be a shock, vibration, and mechanical injury. minimum of 25 ft2 (2.3 m2) of floor space. 24.11.2 All equipment not used during transit such as computer equipment 24.3* Climate Control. shall be stored in cabinets or mounted to comply with 14.1.10. 24.3.1 The command area shall be provided with a heater capable of 24.11.3 Computer Electrical Outlets. maintaining the temperature at a minimum of 60°F (16°C) with the fire 24.11.3.1 Electrical outlets specifically for computer use, whether 12 volt apparatus’s doors closed. or 120 volt, shall be marked with a label for their intended usage and power 24.3.2 If an air conditioner is provided, it shall be capable of maintaining a output. minimum temperature of 20°F (11°C) below ambient down to 72°F (22°C) 24.11.3.2 The outlet shall be tested by the apparatus builder to insure they with the fire apparatus’s doors closed. meet the voltage and amperage specified on the label. 24.4* Noise Levels. When the fire apparatus is stopped with major 24.12 Video Equipment and Installation. operational components in operation, the noise levels in the command area shall not exceed 80 dBA. 24.12.1 The purchaser shall detail the exact video equipment that is to be mounted on, and used with, the apparatus. 24.5 Lighting Levels. 24.12.2 The storage of video equipment shall be in enclosed cabinets, with 24.5.1 The command area shall have a switch control at the door entry area padding to prevent mechanical injury and quick release straps to hold the for general entry lighting or automatic dome lighting. equipment in its designated storage area. 24.5.2* Lighting levels during command operations shall provide a 24.12.3 If a video monitor is provided, it shall be mounted so as to prevent it continuous 100 lumens/ft2 (1000 lx) in the command area. from being damaged during transit. 24.6 Command Working Surfaces and Countertop. 24.12.4 If the equipment is to be externally mounted, mounting brackets 24.6.1* Horizontal working surfaces shall be smooth and shall have corners and outlet plugs shall be installed as necessary to accommodate the outside and edges that will not cause injury or damage when rubbed up against. mounting of video equipment. 24.12.5 Roof access ladders, steps, and safety railings shall meet the 24.6.2 Chair-levelDRAFT work surfaces shall be 28 in. to 30 in. (710 mm to 760 requirements of and be installed as required by Chapter 15. mm) above the floor. 24.6.3 Stand-up work surfaces shall be 36 in. to 40 in. (900 mm to 1000 Chapter 25 Air Systems mm) above the floor. 24.7 Seating in Command Center. 25.1 Application. 24.7.1* If seating is provided in the command center and that same seating 25.1.1 Where a breathing air system or a utility air system is mounted on fire is used during mobile operations (moving over the highway), the seat(s) and apparatus, the requirements of this chapter shall apply. crew area(s) shall comply with Section 14.1. 25.1.2 This chapter shall not apply to a compressed air foam system (CAFS). 24.7.2 Storage shall be provided for all seating that is not permanently mounted in the fire apparatus so that the seating can be stored in such a way 25.2* Provisions Applying to All Air Systems. as to protect all passengers while the fire apparatus is in motion. 25.2.1* Compressor and booster supplied systems shall be capable of 24.7.3 A visible label shall be attached to each nonpermanently mounted storage and operation in any ambient temperature between 32°F and 110°F seat indicating that the seat is not to be used while the fire apparatus is in (0°C and 43°C). transit and is to be stored during that time. 25.2.2 Cascade systems shall be capable of storage and operation in any 24.8* Cabinets and Equipment Storage. Cabinets for the storage of ambient temperature between 0°F and 110°F (–18°C and 43°C). equipment shall be designed and engineered to contain the equipment during 25.2.3 The air system shall be designed so that it can be stored and operated periods of transit. in environments with relative humidity up to and including 100 percent. 24.9 Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Surfaces. 25.2.4 All materials used in the air system shall be corrosion resistant or treated to resist corrosion unless the finished product will be in continual contact with a noncorrosive lubricant. 936 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 25.2.5 Assembly and Installation Practices. 25.2.9 Operator’s Panel and Controls. 25.2.5.1 Installation of low-voltage electrical components shall meet 25.2.9.1 The air operator’s panel containing gauges, instruments, and valves the requirements of Chapter 13, and installation of line voltage electrical shall face the operator’s position and shall be lighted in compliance with components shall meet the requirements of Chapter 23. 4.10.1. 25.2.5.2 Hot Surfaces. 25.2.9.2 Any instrument that is to be used as a basis for manual control shall be visible and controlled from the operator’s position. 25.2.5.2.1 Surfaces over 142°F (61°C) shall be covered with a thermal insulating material or shall be mechanically guarded to protect the operator. 25.2.9.3 Accessory gauges or controls that are not critical to the mission of the air system shall be permitted to be mounted remotely from the operator’s 25.2.5.2.2 If covering or guarding the surface affects the operation of the panel or at another location where they can be monitored. component, a label shall be provided that states “Caution: Hot Surfaces When Operating.” 25.2.9.4 Pressure gauges or other devices shall not be mounted directly on lines where excessive vibration is likely to be present. 25.2.5.3 The air system shall be designed and constructed to withstand the stresses, vibrations, and other conditions incident to being mounted on a fire 25.2.9.5 With the exception of direct connected process instruments (e.g., apparatus and being used in mobile service. pressure gauges), instruments shall not use instrument piping or electrical conduit for support. 25.2.5.4 Locking Devices. 25.2.9.6 Any gauge shall be capable of reading at least 10 percent but not 25.2.5.4.1 All screws, pins, bolts, or other fasteners whose failure would greater than 50 percent higher than any safety relief valve settings on lines create a hazardous condition for personnel or equipment shall be equipped supplying those gauges. with locking devices. 25.2.10 Maintainability. 25.2.5.4.2 Safety wire, self-locking nuts, cotter pins, lock-washers, and liquid-locking compounds shall be acceptable. 25.2.10.1 The design of the air system shall provide for maintainability by including, but not necessarily being limited to, the following maintainability 25.2.6 Breathing Air Systems. objectives and technical and operational constraints: 25.2.6.1 Each part utilized in the fabrication of the air system and its (1) The design shall be such that faults can be isolated to allow access to components shall be designed for use in compressed breathing air service removable assemblies or components. at pressures, temperatures, and flow rates that will be encountered during actual air system operation. (2) Fuses, if used, shall be readily accessible. 25.2.6.2 Discharge air from a compressor shall pass through a purification (3) The physical arrangement of components shall be such that they can system prior to distribution. be inspected, serviced, calibrated, and, if necessary, adjusted without being removed and with minimum disturbance to other parts. 25.2.6.3 Prior to the initial air quality test and commissioning, the breathing air system shall be purged with pure air until moisture and other (4) The design shall be such that inspection, service, and replacement can contaminants have been removed. be accomplished using a minimum of special tools and support equipment. 25.2.7 General Piping and Installation. (5) Test points shall be provided to facilitate malfunction isolation and the connection of calibration instrumentation. 25.2.7.1 All pneumatic fittings, tubing, and hose shall be rated for the maximum allowable working pressure that could be encountered, with a test (6) If equipment requires oil or other liquid drainage, it shall be provided safety factor of not less than 4:1. with a remote drainage system that is equipped with a control valve, threaded plug or cap, and a label to note usage. 25.2.7.2 All pneumatic fittings, tubing, and hose shall be corrosion resistant or treated to resist corrosion. 25.2.10.2 If special tools are required to service or maintain the air system, those tools shall be supplied by the manufacturer. 25.2.7.3 No threaded close nipples shall be used. 25.2.11 Labels and Plates. 25.2.7.4 Plugs shall be bar stock type with hex heads. 25.2.11.1 All major components and accessories shall be identified with a 25.2.7.5 All piping and tubing shall be blown clean with clean, dry air label. before it is installed. 25.2.11.2 Caution and warning signs shall be affixed where necessary. 25.2.7.6 When making up threaded piping joints, the sealant shall be applied to the thread in a manner that will prohibit entry of the sealant into 25.2.11.3 Instruction plate(s) shall be installed, as applicable, to advise the the piping system. operator on the proper adjustment or setting of controls for safe operation. 25.2.7.7 Pipes or tubes installed, but not connected, shall have the ends 25.2.11.4 Controls, gauges, valves, and other equipment shall be marked closed with threaded caps or plugs to prevent the entry of foreign material. with a label indicating their function. 25.2.7.7.1 Air connections on equipment or panels shall be provided with 25.2.11.5 All controls and valves shall have a label to indicate movement a threaded dust cap on a safety chain or shall be a quick disconnect-type direction. fitting. DRAFT25.2.11.6* The major component manufacturers and installers of the air 25.2.7.7.2 The cap or the quick disconnect-type fitting shall have a safety system shall provide electrical diagrams and air piping drawings that factor of 4:1. document the system and its operation. 25.2.7.8 All rigid piping compressed air lines shall be clamped to a rigid 25.2.11.6.1 All symbols used shall be described in a key chart on the body or chassis component at a minimum of every 16 in. (400 mm) and drawing. within 4 in. (100 mm) on each side of a coupling or elbow. 25.2.11.6.2 All diagrams and drawings shall be delivered with the fire 25.2.7.8.1 Rigid piping shall run in an orderly manner with a minimum of apparatus. bends and elbows. 25.2.11.6.3 The following information shall be shown: 25.2.7.8.2 The piping installation shall provide room for maintenance and repairs with access panels provided where applicable. (1) The general arrangement of the air system, including air storage, air compressor (if provided), air panel, SCBA fill station (if provided), and air 25.2.7.9 Any rigid piping or flexible lines that run through a compartment inlets and outlets shall be protected with removable mechanical protection to prevent wear or damage from equipment stored in the compartment. (2) The electrical wiring arrangement and controls, denoting shore-power, low voltage, and line voltage equipment 25.2.8 Flexible Hose. (3) The air operator’s control panel surface showing all controls, gauges, 25.2.8.1 Flexible hose shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent cuts, valves, outlets, and other specified equipment including the labeling on the abrasions, exposure to damage, excessive temperatures, damage from loose panel and controls equipment, and excessive bending. (4) The air piping arrangement with air flow direction indicated and 25.2.8.2 The hose shall be installed in a manner that permits removal of showing all valves, gauges, controls, cylinders or vessels, and furnished the hose without removal of major vehicle components or vehicle-mounted equipment equipment. 937 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 25.2.12 Documentation. manufacturer’s operating temperature range while it is operating in an ambient temperature range between 32°F and 110°F (0°C and 43°C). 25.2.12.1 Two complete sets of documentation that cover the operation and maintenance of the system shall be provided. 25.3.3.2.1 The final stage installer of the air compressor shall submit air system arrangement drawings, air flow schematic drawings, body drawings, 25.2.12.2 The documentation shall be permitted to be in printed or and other pertinent data to the air compressor assembler for written approval. electronic format, audio-visual format, or a combination thereof. 25.3.3.2.2 A copy of this approval shall be retained by the final assembler 25.2.12.3 Nomenclature for switches, controls, and indicators shall be in apparatus documentation. consistent with that used on the diagrams required in 25.2.11.6 and on equipment nameplates. 25.3.3.3 The temperature of the compressed air shall not exceed 20°F (11°C) above ambient when measured at the discharge nozzle of the 25.2.12.4 The manuals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the compressor aftercooler. following: 25.3.4 A relief valve shall be provided after each stage of compression. (1) An illustrated parts lists 25.3.5 If interstage condensate traps are provided by the compressor (2) A schedule of maintenance and adjustment checks manufacturer, they shall be plumbed to the final separator and to an automatic condensate drain system which shall be plumbed to a reservoir to (3) A lubrication schedule collect the discharged liquids. (4) Troubleshooting information to enable a technician to locate trouble and to make repairs or adjustments to the equipment 25.3.6 Compressor Controls. 25.3.6.1 All compressors shall have automatic audible and visual alarms (5) Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping the and controls at the main operator’s panel that shut down the compressor and equipment prevent automatic restart when any of the following conditions occur: 25.2.13 Training and Instruction. (1) Low oil level or low oil pressure 25.2.13.1* If a breathing air system without a compressor/purification system is provided, the contractor shall provide training to fire department (2) Discharge air temperature is higher than recommended by the personnel manufacturer (3) Moisture in the compressed air at the purification system outlet exceeds 25.2.13.1.1 This training shall include: 24 ppm (1) Complete system component familiarization/walk around (4) Carbon monoxide level within the processed air exceeds 10 ppm (2) A complete review of the system and its safety features 25.3.6.2* All compressors shall be equipped with the following: (3) A review of all operation, service, and maintenance documentation (1) An air pressure switch that controls the maximum operating pressure (4) Hands-on familiarization of the safe operation of the fill station and air management panel, including actual SCBA filling, air reel operations and (2) Interstage pressure gauges after each compression stage other pertinent operations of the system (3) Final stage pressure gauge 25.2.13.1.2 The trainer shall be certified by the air compressor system (4) Oil pressure gauge on pressure lubricated compressors or an oil level assembler as qualified to perform such training. indicator or device on nonpressure oil-type compressors 25.2.13.2* If a breathing air system that includes a compressor/purification (5) Electric, nonresettable hourmeter(s) system is provided, a representative of the breathing air system manufacturer shall provide training to fire department personnel. 25.3.6.3* Compressors with electric motors shall be equipped with the following: 25.2.13.2.1 The training shall include the items defined in 25.2.13.1.1. (1) Magnetic motor starter with motor overload protection 25.2.13.2.2 The training shall also include the following: (2) Protective control to prevent automatic restart after power loss has been (1) A review of the compressor/purification system operations and restored maintenance including the operations and maintenance documentation and the name, address, and phone number of the local distributor 25.3.6.4 Compressors with gasoline and diesel engines shall be equipped with the following: (2) Procedures to change purification cartridges (1) Means to allow the engine to be started, idled, and run with the (3) Hands-on familiarization of the safe operation of the compressor and compressor disengaged or unloaded purification system (2) Electric, nonresettable hourmeter to record engine operating hours 25.2.13.3 The Fire Department shall designate one or two individuals that are to be the focal points for all of the breathing air system training and 25.3.7 The compressor and driver assembly shall be mounted to a equipment indoctrination. subassembly with shock mounts to provide vibration dampening. 25.2.13.4 TheDRAFT Fire Department shall designate where the training is to take 25.3.7.1 The compressor frame shall have provision for safe handling or place. lifting. 25.3* Breathing Air Compressor. 25.3.7.2 Frames for compressors with V-belt drives shall include a means to adjust the V-belt tension. 25.3.1 The purchaser shall determine the working pressure and capacity required from the compressor and state those requirements in the purchase 25.3.8 The air compressor shall have a label affixed in a conspicuous specifications. location showing the name and address of the manufacturer, serial number and model number, the date of manufacture, and the rated capacity. 25.3.2 Compressor Intake. 25.4 Purification System. If the compressed air system is to supply 25.3.2.1* The air intake shall be located where it will not be contaminated breathing air, a purification system that meets the requirements of 25.4.1 by the exhaust of the fire apparatus or the exhaust of the gasoline or diesel through 25.4.7 shall be installed. engines used to power the compressor or other components on the apparatus. 25.4.1* If the processed air is to be used as breathing air, the purification 25.3.2.2 If an extended air intake pipe is used, it shall be installed in system shall produce breathing air that meets the requirements of NFPA accordance with the compressor manufacturer’s specifications. 1989, Standard On Breathing Air Quality For Fire And Emergency Services Respiratory Protection. 25.3.3 Cooling. 25.4.2 If the processed air is to be used for underwater diving, the 25.3.3.1 The final installer shall assemble and install all components in purification system shall produce breathing air that meets the requirements accordance with the component manufacturers’ instructions and shall of Grade E breathing air as specified by CGA G-7.1, Commodity test the final assembled system in accordance with this standard and the Specification for Air operating parameters of the component manufacturers. . 25.4.3 The purification system shall be capable of producing the required 25.3.3.2* Provisions shall be made by the final installer to ensure there air quality at full capacity of the compressor for a minimum of 50 hours with is adequate cooling to keep the air compressor within the compressor inlet air of 80°F (27°C) at saturation. 938 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 25.4.3.1 The purification system shall be equipped with purifier cartridges 25.5.8.2.2 Air tanks shall be mounted in such a fashion to permit visual and filter elements. inspection of external surfaces and emergency access to shutoff of tank valves. 25.4.3.2* The design of the purification system shall permit replacement of the purifier cartridges without disconnecting piping or other components. 25.5.8.2.3 The air tank location shall be away from any heat-producing devices such as the generator engine or exhaust. 25.4.3.3 The purifier system shall be protected from mechanical damage caused by loose equipment stored on the apparatus 25.5.9 Air Tank Valve Control and Monitoring. 25.4.4 A relief valve shall be provided in the purification system, set no 25.5.9.1 A slow-operating valve(s) shall be provided to control airflow into higher than 10 percent above the maximum allowable working pressure. and out of the storage system (if applicable). 25.4.5 A mechanical separator shall be provided and shall be piped to the 25.5.9.2 A separate inlet connection shall be provided so that the storage automatic drain system. system can be refilled from a remote source. 25.4.5.1 A check valve shall be installed between the mechanical separator 25.5.9.2.1 The inlet connection fitting shall be compatible with the rated and the remainder of the purification system. pressure of the storage system as specified by CGA G-7, Compressed Air for Human Respiration, and shall be equipped with a dust cap with a chain and 25.4.5.2 The mechanical separator and the purifier housings shall be “pin hole” to release leaking pressure when not in use. designed for a 4:1 safety factor at their maximum allowable working pressure. 25.5.9.2.2 A check valve or a line valve shall be provided on the inlet connection. 25.4.5.3 The mechanical separator and the purifier housings shall be corrosion resistant or treated to resist corrosion. 25.5.9.3 Gauges shall be provided to allow for monitoring pressures from the air storage system or individual air tanks specified by the authority 25.4.6 An upstream valve and pressure gauge shall be installed ahead of the having jurisdiction. purifier to control and monitor depressurization before service. 25.6* Air Booster Systems. 25.4.7 A pressure regulator valve (back pressure regulator or minimum pressure valve) with a minimum setting of 2000 psi (14000 kPa) shall be 25.6.1 Line valves shall be provided at the air control panel or on the air installed in the purification system downstream of the mechanical separator booster to control the booster inlet air supply line and the booster discharge and purifier housings. airflow. 25.4.7.1 A piping connection shall be provided downstream of the pressure 25.6.2 A pressure gauge shall be provided on the supply line and the regulator valve to provide an air sample for the air quality monitors. discharge line from the booster. 25.4.7.2 A line valve shall be installed on the purifier outlet to isolate the 25.6.3 A safety valve or high-pressure switch shall be installed on the purifier from the remainder of the system during inspection, maintenance, discharge side of the air booster. and repairs. 25.6.4 The pressure setting on the safety valve or high-pressure switch shall 25.5 Air Storage Systems. not exceed the maximum allowable working pressure of the booster, the booster’s distribution piping, or the air system components. 25.5.1* Air tanks (DOT tanks or ASME pressure vessels) shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.169, “Air receivers.” 25.7 Air Supply Regulation. Air supply regulation shall include the following provisions on an operator’s air control panel: 25.5.2 Transportable Air Tanks. (1) One air pressure gauge marked with a label that reads: “Supply 25.5.2.1 Transportable air tanks shall comply with 49 CFR 178.37, Pressure” between the air supply line valve and the pressure self-relieving “Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless steel cylinders,” or 29 CFR, regulator 1910.169, “Air receivers.” (2) One slow-operating air supply valve on the intake supply line 25.5.2.2 Relief valves shall be of the ASME type on ASME cylinders and of the DOT type on DOT cylinders or equal for the rated pressure. (3) One self-relieving adjustable pressure regulator equipped with a device to prevent unintentional adjustment 25.5.3 Valves installed on air tanks shall meet the requirements of the Compressed Gas Association regarding pressure and usage with compressed (4) One air pressure gauge downstream of the pressure regulator air. (5) One pressure relief valve preset at not over 10 percent above the 25.5.4 Air tanks shall be permanently stamped or identified in accordance pressure regulator output setting with DOT or ASME regulations. (6) A warning label installed next to the pressure regulator to indicate 25.5.5 If the installation utilizes DOT cylinders, a label shall be placed on or working pressure setting and that a relief valve will release at 10 percent near the operator’s panel that provides the following: higher than the working pressure (1) The original cylinder test date stamped on the cylinders 25.8 Air Control Panel. (2) The recommended testing interval 25.8.1 The air control panel and system piping arrangement for a compressor-supplied breathing air system shall allow the operator to perform (3) Five additionalDRAFT open spaces, appropriately labeled, for the user to enter the following functions: actual retesting dates (1) Fill the storage system directly from the compressor/purification 25.5.6 The manufacturer’s test date (month and year) on each air tank shall system be current within 12 months of the apparatus delivery date. (2) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from the compressor/purification system 25.5.7 Air tanks shall be marked with a label that reads: “High Pressure ____ psi Breathing Air.” (3) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from the storage system/air booster 25.5.8 Air Tank Mounting. (4) Utilize the “cascade method” or “bulk fill method” of filling SCBA cylinders, as desired 25.5.8.1 Air tanks shall be mounted in an arrangement that will hold the tanks in all types of mobile use. (5) Bypass filling of the storage system to “top-off” SCBA directly from the compressor/purification system 25.5.8.1.1 A protective device(s) shall be provided to protect the air tank valve(s) and associated piping from damage as a result of accidental impact. (6) Regulate the maximum SCBA fill pressure 25.5.8.1.2 The protective device(s) shall not prevent access for operation (7) Meter airflow to control the SCBA fill rate with a slow-operating valve and inspection. (8) Take an air sample to check air quality (at panel or at end of air reel 25.5.8.2 The air tank mounting shall facilitate removal of air tanks for hose, if applicable) inspection, testing, or service. 25.8.2 When a cascade system is installed, an air control panel and system 25.5.8.2.1 Air tanks shall be installed so that all air tanks, control valves, piping arrangement shall allow the operator to perform the following and associated piping are readily accessible. functions: (1) Fill the storage system directly from a remote air compressor

939 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (2) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from a remote air compressor (1) Utility air or breathing air (3) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from the storage system (2) Operating pressure (4) Fill SCBA cylinders directly from a booster pump that is supplied by (3) Total hose length the storage system, if provided (4) Hose size (ID) (5) Utilize the “cascade method,” the “bulk fill method,” or both for filling SCBA cylinders, as appropriate to the design of the system 25.10.6 Air Supply to Air Reel. (6) Regulate the maximum SCBA fill pressure 25.10.6.1 The following equipment shall be provided on the intake air supply line to the reel where the air supply gauge pressure is up to 150 psi (7) Meter airflow to control the SCBA fill rate with a slow-operating valve (1000 kPa): (8) Take an air sample to check air quality (at the panel or at the end of an (1) One air pressure gauge air reel hose, if applicable) (2) One slow-operating air supply valve 25.9 SCBA Fill Station. (3) One check valve 25.9.1 If SCBA or SCUBA air cylinders are to be refilled from a fire apparatus-mounted air system, the system shall meet the following 25.10.6.2 The following equipment shall be provided on the intake air requirements: supply line to the reel where the air supply gauge pressure is between 151 psi (1000 kPa) and 300 psi (2000 kPa): (1) The system shall fully enclose the cylinder during filling to contain the fragments if a cylinder ruptures. (1) One air pressure gauge upstream of the air pressure regulating device (2) The system shall fully enclose the refill lines to the cylinders. (2) One slow-operating air supply valve (3) The system shall direct the concussive air blast away from the operator (3) One adjustable pressure regulator equipped with a device to prevent and bystanders. inadvertent or accidental adjustment (4) A fill station within an enclosed crew area shall have provisions to vent (4) One downstream pressure gauge [0 psi to 500 psi (0 kPa and 3400 kPa) the concussive air blast to the exterior of the fire apparatus. range] (5) A means shall be provided to prevent SCBA or SCUBA cylinders from 25.10.6.3 The following equipment shall be provided on the intake air being refilled unless the system is in the “cylinder fill operation position.” supply line to the reel where the air supply gauge pressure is over 300 psi (2000 kPa): (6) A warning sign shall indicate the hazards inherent in the operation of filling SCBA or SCUBA cylinders. (1) One air pressure gauge upstream of the air pressure regulating device 25.9.2 Pressure gauges, pressure regulating devices, and controls shall be (2) One slow-operating air supply valve provided to allow the operator to control the SCBA cylinder fill pressure and (3) One adjustable pressure regulator equipped with a device to prevent fill rate on each SCBA fill hose. inadvertent or accidental adjustment 25.9.3 A valve(s) on a fill line(s) shall be a slow-operating valve. (4) One downstream pressure gauge 25.9.4 A separate bleeder and flow restriction device shall be provided on (5) One preset pressure relief valve set at not over 10 percent above each SCBA fill hose. maximum working pressure 25.9.5 Testing and Certification. 25.10.7 The inlet to an air hose reel with an operating gauge pressure of over 25.9.5.1 The manufacturer of the enclosed air refill station shall type test a 300 psi (2000 kPa) shall have a flow limiting device, such as a velocity-type standard production model to validate the design. valve, or a manually adjustable orifice-type valve. 25.9.5.1.1 The test shall include pressurizing a 1-hour SCBA cylinder rated 25.10.7.1 The device shall be adjusted to restrict excessive flow and shall be at a gauge pressure of 4500 psi (30,000 kPa) to failure. located or covered to prevent readjustment. 25.9.5.1.2 If the system provides for simultaneously refilling of multiple 25.10.7.2 The metering device shall not be used for normal shutoff valve cylinders, the other chambers shall contain air cylinders of equal size filled purposes. to a gauge pressure of 4500 psi (30,000 kPa) during the test. These cylinders 25.10.8 The final assembler of the air hose reel, piping, and valve system shall not rupture during the test. shall test the system at the maximum operating pressure of the system for 10 25.9.5.2 The testing shall prove that the air refill station is capable of minutes with no pressure loss. containing all fragments of a failed cylinder so as to protect the operator and not rupture cylinders in adjacent chambers and prove that the venting 25.10.8.1 This test shall include the hose, if supplied, on the reel. provisions direct the air concussive release away from the operator. 25.10.8.2* A permanent label shall be installed adjacent to the air reel controls to indicate the operating pressure range and the type of air provided, 25.9.5.3 All test results shall be certified by an independent third-party low-pressure utility air [gauge pressure under 300 psi (2000 kPa)], low- certification organization.DRAFTpressure breathing air [gauge pressure under 125 psi (800 kPa)], or high- 25.10* Air Hose Reels. pressure breathing air [gauge pressure over 300 psi (2000 kPa)]. 25.10.1* Any permanently mounted air hose reel shall be certified by the 25.10.9 Air Reel Installation. reel manufacturer for use at the maximum expected working pressure with a 25.10.9.1 Reels installed in concealed locations shall be accessible for safety factor of at least 4:1. maintenance and servicing, hose access, and reel removal. 25.10.2 The air hose reel swivel joint, connecting feed hose, check valve, 25.10.9.2 Rollers and guides shall be installed, where necessary, to prevent and air supply equipment shall be rated for the maximum working pressure damage to the hose at the reel spool or compartment openings and to allow with a safety factor of at least 4:1. deployment and rewinding of the hose. 25.10.3 The air hose reel shall be designed to hold at least 110 percent of the 25.10.9.3 Reels shall be installed in such a manner so as not to expose the intended hose length with a minimum capacity of 100 ft (30 m). operator to the rewind components. 25.10.4 Size of Fluid Path. 25.10.9.4 Manually operated reels shall have an operable hand crank with 1 its central midpoint or centerline located not over 72 in. (1.8 m) above the 25.10.4.1 The air hose reel shall have a minimum of /2-in. (13-mm) ID fluid path with a full flow-style swivel joint and a hose connection designed and ground or platform that is designed to serve as the operator’s standing sized to match the hose intended to be used. position. 1 25.10.9.5 Switches for power rewind-type reels shall be located in a position 25.10.4.2 The air hose reel shall have a minimum /2-in. (13-mm) ID fluid path for low-pressure [gauge pressure of 0 psi to 300 psi (0 kPa to 2000 that allows the operator to safely rewind the hose. kPa)] reels, or 1/ -in. (6.5-mm) ID fluid path for high-pressure reels [gauge 4 25.10.9.5.1 The rewind control shall not be over 72 in. (1.8 m) above the pressure over 300 psi (2000 kPa)]. operator’s standing position. 25.10.5 The reel shall be marked with a plate to indicate its intended use and the following: 940 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA 25.10.9.5.2 The rewind control shall be marked with a label indicating its 25.13.3.2 A pressure relief valve set to relieve the pressure at 10 percent function and shall be guarded to prevent accidental activation. above the desired operating pressure shall be installed on the downstream side of the regulator. 25.10.10* Low-Pressure Breathing Air Reel. 25.13.4 All valves, pressure regulators, and gauges shall be protected from 25.10.10.1 The regulation of the output pressure from the breathing air reel accidental damage. shall be at the reel or at an air control panel. 25.13.5 The piping or hose system between the air cylinder(s) and point 25.10.10.2 No shutoff valves or flow control valves shall be installed of use shall be installed to prevent damage due to abrasion, bending, or downstream of the pressure regulator except at the end of the hose. pinching. 25.10.10.3 The low-pressure breathing air supply shall be equipped with a 25.13.6 A holder or box shall be provided for the storage of the breathing air low air pressure audible warning device on the air supply. equipment when it is not in use. 25.11 Air Hose. 25.13.7 A low air warning system shall be provided that monitors the air 25.11.1* All air hose and couplings supplied shall comply to their intended volume and provides an audible warning when the air volume is at or below application and shall have a pressure rating equal to or greater than the 20 percent. highest pressure expected to be encountered as input to the hose with a test 25.14* Testing. safety factor of at least 3:1. 25.14.1 The complete air system shall be tested by the final system installer 25.11.2 Where the hose is attached to an air reel, it shall be done in a after its installation on the fire apparatus is complete, using the testing manner that allows for its removal. procedure prescribed by the system manufacturer. 25.11.3 Discharge Ends. 25.14.2 The following items shall be tested or verified on all air systems: 25.11.3.1* The discharge end of any breathing air hose shall have a threaded (1) Pressurize the storage system to its maximum operational pressure and connection. check all connections made as a part of the installation for leaks with a leak 25.11.3.1.1 If no other fittings are installed at the end of the hose, a detection device, which could include bubble fluid or electronic means. temporary protective cap shall be installed to prevent internal contamination (2) Visually verify the relief valve set points and working pressure of the air of the hose during shipping. storage vessel. 25.11.3.1.2 If the discharge end of hose will terminate with a threaded (3) Verify the accuracy of all pressure gauges. connection when in use, it shall be equipped with a slow-operating valve. (4) Fully test the operational capabilities of the fill station as established by 25.11.3.1.3 If the threaded end of the hose terminates in a quick connection the manufacturer of the fill station. fitting, a slow operating valve and protective cap shall not be required. (5) Seal all fill adapter connections to eliminate the introduction of 25.11.3.1.4 Connections to hose shall comply with 25.2.7. contaminants prior to shipment. 25.11.3.2 The discharge end of utility air hose shall have either a threaded 25.14.3 If the system’s air supply includes a compressor/purification system, connection and slow-operating valve or a quick connection fitting. the following additional items shall be tested or verified: 25.11.4 Color Coding. (1) Confirm that the fluid levels are at the manufacturer’s recommended 25.11.4.1 The ends of the hose shall be color coded or marked with a label to levels including the lubricant and coolant, if liquid cooled. designate the operating pressure of the hose. (2) Verify the expiration date of the purification filters and cartridges and 25.11.4.2 If color coding is used, coding shall be as follows: that they have been installed as required by the manufacturer of the system . (3) Operate the air compressor for a minimum of two hours or the period (1) Blue — utility air hose up to a gauge pressure of 300 psi (2000 kPa) required to completely fill the on-board air storage cylinders or vessels, (2) White — breathing air hose up to a gauge pressure of 300 psi (2000 whichever is longer. kPa) (4) Confirm that all compressor interstage pressures are within guidelines (3) Yellow — breathing air hose from a gauge pressure of 301 psi to 3000 as established by the compressor manufacturer. psi (2001 kPa to 20,000 kPa) (5) Confirm the operation of the compressor shutdown switch at the (4) Red — breathing air hose over a gauge pressure of 3000 psi (20,000 pressure requested by the purchaser. kPa) (6) Confirm the set point of the final pressure safety relief valve and 1 pressure maintaining valve. 25.11.5* Low-pressure breathing air hose shall be a minimum /2 in. (13 mm) ID with a maximum hose length of not more than 300 ft (90 m). (7) Confirm the factory set limits of all electrical shutdown devices 25.11.6 Utility air hose shall be of a flexible type, with a scuff abrasion- including low oil pressure, automatic condensate drain system, high air resistant outer covering. temperature, excessive processed air moisture, high carbon monoxide, and motor amperage draw. 25.11.7 The hose shall be oil resistant and shall be compatible with oil, alkalis, kerosene,DRAFT paraffin, grease, and salt solutions. (8) Perform a cooling airflow test in the compartment where the compressor is installed and assure the flow meets the compressor 25.11.8 The hose connections for utility air hose shall not be the same as for manufacturer’s requirements. low-pressure breathing air hose or high-pressure air hose. 25.14.4 Air Quality. 25.12* Low-Pressure Utility Air Supply. Where the non-emergency use air outlets are supplied by the chassis air brake system, the air supply shall 25.14.4.1 Prior to delivery of the apparatus to the end user, the final system be from an auxiliary air circuit that is equipped with a pressure protection installer shall draw an air sample from the system and submit the sample to valve (PPV) and auxiliary air tanks. be tested in accordance with NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection. 25.13 Remote Breathing Air Systems. Remote breathing air systems for pump panels or other remote locations shall comply with 25.13.1 through 25.14.4.2 The breathing air shall meet the air quality standards defined in 25.13.6. NFPA 1989. 25.13.1 A breathing air system shall be designed to supply breathing air for 25.14.5 If the system has a compressor/purification system, the person a minimum of two personnel at the specified location. performing the tests for the final system installer shall have been trained by the compressor/purification system manufacturer and shall be able to provide 25.13.2 The system shall include storage for at least 400 ft3 (11 m3) of proof of such training. breathing air and shall meet the requirements of Section 25.5. 25.14.6 The results of all tests including the air quality analysis shall be 25.13.3 All components of the piping system shall meet the requirements of documented and shall be included in the documentation that is given to the Section 25.2. purchaser upon acceptance of the fire apparatus. 25.13.3.1 The piping system shall be arranged with an air regulator that 25.15 Initial Delivery. The contractor shall deliver the apparatus with all shall limit the air pressure in the piping to the desired operating pressure. air cylinders, piping, hose, reels, and other fixed equipment charged with breathing air to a gauge pressure of at least 100 psi (700 kPa).

941 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Chapter 26 Winches 26.4.2.2 The control shall be located at the end of an electrical cord that is a minimum 25 ft (7.6 m) long and that plugs into a receptacle near the winch 26.1 General. If a chassis-mounted winch is installed on the apparatus, it location or shall be integrated into a hand-held transmitter operating on a shall meet the requirements of this chapter. Federal Communications Commission-approved radio frequency for the 26.1.1* The winch shall be designed for the intended use and shall be winch control device. installed in accordance with winch manufacturer’s recommendations. 26.4.3 Hydraulic Tanks. 26.1.2 All winches shall be equipped with rollers, guides, or both to prevent 26.4.3.1 The hydraulic fluid tank shall be sized to prevent overheating of the damage to the winch wire or synthetic rope or the apparatus. fluid or cavitation of the hydraulic pump at its maximum output level. 26.1.3 All rollers and guides shall be designed to match the winch capacity 26.4.3.2 The tank shall permit visual checking of the fluid level and easy and rope size. refilling. 26.2* Winch Wire or Synthetic Rope. 26.4.3.3 The fill point shall have a label permanently attached near the fill 26.2.1 The winch shall have a minimum wire rope or synthetic rope length point stating the hydraulic oil quantity and type. of 75 ft (22 m). 26.4.3.4 A drain plug shall be installed to permit complete draining of the 26.2.2 The wire rope shall be of a type and size recommended by the winch tank. manufacturer. 26.4.3.5 A tank return line diffuser shall be installed in the tank. 26.2.3 The wire rope assembly, including all hardware such as clevises, 26.4.3.6 A tank swash partition shall be installed in the tank between the hooks, and snatch blocks provided for attachment to the winch, shall have a suction and return lines. design load rating greater than the line pull capacity of the winch. 26.4.3.7 A vent shall be supplied and shall be designed to prevent dirt and 26.3 Electric Powered Winches. moisture from entering the tank. 26.3.1 Controls. 26.4.4 The system shall be equipped with necessary filters and strainers to 26.3.1.1* Operation of the electric motor shall be by means of a hand-held keep the hydraulic fluid within the cleanliness requirements necessary for control with forward, neutral, and reverse positions. operation of the hydraulic system. 26.3.1.2 The control shall be located at the end of an electrical cord that is a 26.4.5* The winch shall be equipped with clutch assembly to permit free- minimum 25 ft (7.6 m) long and that plugs into a receptacle near the winch spooling and quick removal of wire or synthetic rope. location or shall be integrated into a hand-held transmitter operating on a 26.4.5.1 This control shall be accessible without reaching under the Federal Communications Commission-approved radio frequency for the apparatus. winch control device. 26.4.5.2 If the winch is installed under the apparatus, it shall be remotely 26.3.1.3 A free-spooling clutch shall be provided in addition to the remote controlled. control device if the winch is not visible to the operator. 26.4.6 The hydraulic winch engagement controls shall be located in the 26.3.2 Power Supply. driving compartment. 26.3.2.1 Dedicated power and ground circuits shall be utilized. 26.4.6.1* A “Hydraulic Winch Engaged” indicator shall be provided in the 26.3.2.2 Wiring shall be sized in accordance with the winch manufacturer’s driving compartment to indicate that the hydraulic pump engagement has installation instructions and shall comply with Chapter 11 of this standard. been successfully completed. 26.4.6.2 An “OK to Operate Winch” indicator shall be provided in the 26.3.2.3 The power supply line shall be equipped with a resettable circuit driving compartment to indicate that the winch is engaged, transmission is protection device and properly sized for the winch’s power requirements. in the proper gear (automatic transmissions only), and the parking brake is 26.3.3 Removable Electric Winches. engaged. 26.3.3.1 Electric winches that are temporarily attached to the apparatus 26.4.6.3 An interlock system shall be provided to prevent advancement (at sides, rear, or front) shall meet the same requirements as permanently of the engine speed in the driving compartment or at any operator’s panel mounted winches. unless the transmission is in neutral and the parking brake is engaged, or the apparatus is in the “OK to Operate Winch” mode. 26.3.3.2 The attachment to the apparatus shall be with quick-release devices. 26.3.3.3 The attachment system on the apparatus shall meet the Annex A Explanatory Material requirements of Section 15.11 Annex A is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is 26.3.4 Electric Power for Removable Winches. included for informational purposes only. This annex contains explanatory material, numbered to correspond with the applicable text paragraphs. 26.3.4.1 The electrical power supply(ies) from the apparatus to the removable winch shall terminate at a quick disconnect receptacle with a A.1.1 The term “new” as applied in this standard is intended to refer to the connector plug. original construction of a fire apparatus using all new materials and parts. 26.3.4.2 The receptacleDRAFT shall have a label indicating its use. A.1.3.1 The requirements of this standard apply to fire apparatus that has a GVWR of 10,000 lb (4500 kg) or greater. While the standard was not 26.3.4.3 The power cord from the receptacle to the winch shall be sized for written specifically to cover vehicles below that size, fire departments should the power requirements of the winch. consider using those portions of this standard that address safety issues with 26.3.4.4 The power cord shall be highly flexible and shall be protected from smaller emergency vehicles. This would apply particularly to the restraint of mechanical damage. equipment in the driving and crew areas and to providing adequate optical warning devices and reflective striping to increase the visibility of the 26.4 Hydraulic Winches. vehicle. 26.4.1 Hydraulic Hose. A.1.4 It is not intended that this standard be applied retroactively to existing apparatus. However, if major renovations are made to an existing piece of 26.4.1.1 All hydraulic hose shall be designed for hydraulic pressures apparatus, it is suggested that the apparatus be brought into line with this encountered for the specified hydraulic components. standard as closely as possible. NFPA 1912, Standard for Fire Apparatus Refurbishing 26.4.1.2 Hose shall be a wire braided–type with a female swivel on one end. , covers the requirements for refurbishing a fire apparatus. A.1.6 Metric units of measurement in this standard are in accordance with 26.4.2 The forward-neutral-reverse hydraulic control for the winch shall the modernized metric system known as the International System of Units be electrically operated to permit remote control of the hydraulic winch (SI). The liter, a unit that is outside of but recognized by SI, is commonly operations. used in international fire protection where more precision is desired. Table 26.4.2.1 Operation of the hydraulic winch shall be by means of a hand-held A.1.6(a), Table A.1.6(b), and Table A.1.6(c) provide conversions factors as an control with forward, neutral, and reverse positions. aid to the user where more precision is desired.

942 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Table A.1.6(a) Conversion Factors (inch-pound to metric units) A.3.2.1 Approved. The National Fire Protection Association does not approve, inspect, or certify any installations, procedures, equipment, or materials; nor does it approve or evaluate testing laboratories. In determining 1 gallon per minute (gpm) = 3.785 liters per minute (L/min) the acceptability of installations, procedures, equipment, or materials, the 1 imperial gallon per minute = 4.542 liters per minute (L/min) authority having jurisdiction may base acceptance on compliance with (igpm) NFPA or other appropriate standards. In the absence of such standards, said authority may require evidence of proper installation, procedure, or use. 1 pound per square inch (psi) = 6.895 kilopascals (kPa) The authority having jurisdiction may also refer to the listings or labeling practices of an organization that is concerned with product evaluations and is 1 inch of mercury (in. Hg) at = 3.368 kilopascals (kPa) thus in a position to determine compliance with appropriate standards for the 32° F (0°C) current production of listed items. A.3.2.2 Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The phrase “authority 1 inch (in.) = 25.40 millimeters (mm) having jurisdiction,” or its acronym AHJ, is used in NFPA documents 1 foot (ft) = 0.305 meter (m) in a broad manner, since jurisdictions and approval agencies vary, as do their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the authority having 1 cubic foot (ft3) = 0.0283 cubic meter (m3) jurisdiction may be a federal, state, local, or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief; fire marshal; chief of a fire prevention 1 square inch (in.2) = 645.2 square millimeters (mm2) bureau, labor department, or health department; building official; electrical inspector; or others having statutory authority. For insurance purposes, 1 mile per hour (mph) = 1.609 kilometer per hour (kmph) an insurance inspection department, rating bureau, or other insurance company representative may be the authority having jurisdiction. In many 1 pound (lb) = 0.454 kilogram (kg) circumstances, the property owner or his or her designated agent assumes 1 horsepower (hp) = 0.746 kilowatt (kw) the role of the authority having jurisdiction; at government installations, the commanding officer or departmental official may be the authority having 1 candle power = 12.566 lumens jurisdiction. 1 pound per cubic foot (lb/ft3) = 16 kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) A.3.2.4 Listed. The means for identifying listed equipment may vary for each organization concerned with product evaluation; some organizations 1 footcandle (fc) = 10.764 lux (lx) do not recognize equipment as listed unless it is also labeled. The authority having jurisdiction should utilize the system employed by the listing organization to identify a listed product. A.3.3.42 Compound Gauge. On most gauges, zero equals atmospheric pressure. Gauges typically measure pressure above atmospheric pressure in Table A.1.6(b) Conversion Factors (metric to inch-pound units) pounds per square inch (psi) (kPa) and below atmospheric pressure in inches of mercury (Hg) (kPa). 1 liters per minute (L/min) = 0.264 gallon per minute (gpm) A.3.3.43 A CAFS consists of a compressed air source, pressurized source of 1 liters per minute (L/min) = 0.22 imperial gallon per minute foam solution, and discharge hardware. (igpm) A.3.3.46 Contractor. The contractor might not necessarily manufacture 1 kilopascal (kPa) = 0.145 pound per square inch (psi) the fire apparatus or any portion of the fire apparatus but is responsible for the completion, delivery, and acceptance of the entire unit. 1 kilopascal (kPa) = 0.2953 inch of mercury (in. Hg) at 32° F (0°C) A.3.3.56 Eductor. The pressure at the throat of a venturi is below atmospheric pressure, allowing foam concentrate or other fire fighting agent 1 millimeters (mm) = 0.0394 inch (in.) at atmospheric pressure in storage to flow into the water stream. 1 meter (m) = 3.279 feet (ft) A.3.3.57 Electric Siren (Electromechanical). Only one type of warning 1 cubic meter (m3) = 35.34 cubic foot (ft3) sound can be produced by electric sirens, but the level or pitch can be varied by the speed of the motor. 1 square millimeters (mm2) = 0.00155 square inch (in.2) A.3.3.60 Electronic Siren. Varied types of warning sounds can be 1 kilometer per hour (kmph) = 0.622 mile per hour (mph) produced by electronic sirens, such as a wail, yelp, or simulated air horn. 1 kilogram (kg) = 2.2 pound (lb) A.3.3.79 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). It is a requirement of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration that the GAWR be posted in 1 kilowatt (kw) = 1.34 horsepower (hp) the vehicle on a permanently affixed label. The axle system includes, but is not limited to, the axle, tires, suspension, wheels, frame, brakes, and applied 1 lumens = 0.08 candle power engine torque. 1 kilogram per cubic meter = 0.062 pounds per cubic foot (lb/ft3) A.3.3.80 GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating). A combination (kg/m3) vehicle is a tractor trailer–type vehicle having three or more axle systems (a multiaxle installation is one system). When the trailer is detachable, the 1 lux (lx) DRAFT= 0.092 footcandles (fc) GCWR limits the axle system(s) maximum load for any replacement trailer. A.3.3.81 Grade. A 45-degree slope is equal to a 100 percent grade. A.3.3.85 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). It is a requirement of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration that the GVWR of a Table A.1.6(c) Useful Conversion Factors vehicle be posted in the vehicle on a permanently affixed label. The GVWR can be equal to or less than the sum of the front GAWR and the rear GAWR. 1 gallon per minute (gpm) = 0.833 imperial gallons per minute The in-service weight or gross vehicle weight should always be equal to or (igpm) less than the GVWR. 1 imperial gallon per minute = 1.2 gallon per minute (gpm) A.3.3.105 Maximum Pump Close-Off Pressure. Multistage series/ (igpm) parallel pumps are measured with the pump in the pressure (series) setting. 1 foot (ft) of water = 0.433 pound per square inch (psi) A.3.3.107 Miscellaneous Equipment Allowance. Miscellaneous equipment allowance does not include the weight of fixed generators, 1 pound per square inch (psi) = 2.31 feet (ft) of water hose reels, cord reels, breathing air systems, or other major equipment or components specified by the purchaser to be permanently mounted as 1 metric ton (mton) = 1000 kilogram (kg) received from the apparatus manufacturer, nor does it include the weight 1 kilopascal (kPa) = 0.01 bar of suction hose, fire hose, ground ladders, or personnel required by this standard. 1 bar = 100 kilopascals (kPa) A.3.3.113 Net Pump Pressure. When operating from a hydrant, the net pump pressure is typically less than the discharge pressure. For example, if the discharge pressure gauge reads 150 psi (1034 kPa) and the intake (suction) gauge reads 20 psi (138 kPa), the net pump pressure equals 130 psi (896 kPa). When operating from draft, the net pump pressure will be above 943 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA the discharge pressure. For example, if the discharge pressure gauge reads is different than prolonged stationary operations. Apparatus might require 145 psi (1000 kPa) and the intake (suction) gauge reads 10 in. Hg (34 kPa) special lubrication systems for engines and other modifications to ensure the vacuum, the net pump pressure will be 150 psi (1034 kPa) (1 in. Hg = 0.5 psi apparatus will not be damaged by operation on the increased grades. = 3.4 kPa). A.4.13.3 The temperature conditions, either hot or cold, where the fire A.3.3.120 Optical Source. An optical source can consist of a single optical apparatus will be used or stored should be considered in the design of the fire element or a fixed array of any number of optical elements whose geometric apparatus. If the fire apparatus will be used in conditions that exceed 110°F positioning relative to each other is fixed by the manufacturer of the optical (43°C), additional cooling of the engine, pump, and other components might source and is not intended to be modified. be necessary. Likewise, if the unit is to be used or stored in subfreezing conditions, special system drains, engine heaters, or other special A.3.3.126 Portable Generator. The device has an integral distribution components might be required to prevent damage or to allow continued use. panel with overcurrent protection and receptacle outlets. A.4.14(2) Although this standard recognizes the need for the fire apparatus A.3.3.130 Preconnected Hose Line. A preconnected hose line is to be able to accelerate to a high speed while traveling on public roads, commonly called a bucket line, cross lay, or mattydale. caution should be taken as to how fast the fire apparatus will travel. A.3.3.141 Quint. The primary purpose of this type of apparatus is to Consideration should be given to limiting the maximum speed the fire combat structural and associated fires, and to support fire fighting and apparatus can obtain for safety. rescue operations by positioning personnel handling materials, providing Where fire apparatus has to operate off paved roads, all-wheel drive, a two- continuous egress, or discharging water at positions elevated from the speed rear axle, an auxiliary transmission, or an automatic transmission, ground. or any combination of these, might enhance the fire apparatus’s off-road A.3.3.152 Special Services Fire Apparatus. These services could be capability. rescue, command, hazardous material containment, air supply, electrical A.4.14(3) The purchaser should specify the performance required on generation and floodlighting, or transportation of support equipment and grades in excess of 6 percent. The occasional exposure to excessive grades is personnel. different than if it is an everyday occurrence. A combination of steep grades and narrow, winding roads might require consultation with manufacturers A.3.3.157 Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (SCFM). prior to finalizing the apparatus specifications and then the designation of Standard temperature and pressure are 60°F (15°C) and 14.696 psi (760 mm special road tests. If apparatus will be subjected to a class of service not Hg or 29.92 in. Hg). normally encountered, a manufacturer cannot be expected to anticipate the need without sufficient specification details. A.3.3.165 Turning Clearance Radius. An aerial fire apparatus might have a larger overall clearance diameter if measured at a forward-most point of A.4.15.1 Purchasers might want to specify that all routine lubricant and the aerial device. fluid level checks be performed from ground level to reduce the risks of injury from falling from apparatus. A.3.3.166 Turntable. Some turntables contain an operator’s control station. A.4.17.1 Where the point of delivery is over 2000 ft (600 m) of elevation A.3.3.168 Type 4 Rating. Equipment rated NEMA Type 4 will be and a fire pump is provided, the pumping engine overload test described in undamaged by the formation of ice on the equipment. 16.13.3 should be performed to ensure that the engine will develop adequate power at point of delivery. This test should be performed with the pump A.4.3 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to provide the contractor supplied from draft per Table 16.2.4.1(a), with the net pressure maintained at with sufficient information to enable the contractor to prepare a bid and a 165 psi (1100 kPa). complete description of the apparatus the contractor proposes to supply. Completion of the Purchasing Specification Form in Annex B should provide A.4.18 It is important for the purchaser and contractor to agree on the the information required in the various sections of this document. format that the documentation is to be delivered in. It is also important that the purchaser consider the long-term ramifications of the changing media A.4.9.1 The engine compartment and the underside of the vehicle are not technology if electronic format is used for delivery of the documentation. considered areas of normal non-maintenance operation. Software and hardware will need to be maintained over the years to utilize A.4.10.2 All required signs, plates, and labels should be highly visible and electronic documentation. placed on the vehicle where they are not subject to wear and tear damage. A.4.19.2.4 Suppliers of components and equipment installed or supplied A.4.11.1 The attachment of electric, air, hydraulic, and other control lines by the contractor often supply operations and maintenance documents with and hoses should be with removable mechanically attached fastening those components or equipment. This standard requires that the contractor devices. The attachment of such equipment with adhesive or glue on clamps pass along these documents to the purchaser. The purchaser should specify if or clips has been found to be inadequate for long-term performance on multiple copies of these documents are required. fire apparatus. The use of plastic ties to bundle wire harness and hoses are A.5.4 Fire departments should carefully evaluate their water supply needs permissible but should not be used to attach such items to a cab, body, frame, and the available water delivery systems when considering water tank size. or other major structure. Three hundred gallons (1100 liters) is a minimum tank size and might not A.4.12.2.1 The distribution of the weight between the front and rear wheels meet the needs of the department. Fire departments servicing areas with should be a major consideration, as improper design will seriously affect the wide hydrant spacing or areas with no hydrants should strongly consider handling characteristics of the fire apparatus. Too little weight on the front increasing the water tank size. The department should choose a water tank wheels can cause a front-end skid and, over bumpy roads, could cause the size that will best support efficient and effective fireground operations. front of the fire apparatus to veer from side to side. At the very least, it will A.5.5 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate be difficult to keep the fire apparatus under control. Too much weight on the the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment front wheels willDRAFT reduce the traction of the rear wheels and can result in a to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications rear-end skid or difficulty in traveling over unpaved roads or in mud. so the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly A.4.12.2.3.1 It is critical that the purchaser provide the manufacturer the accommodated within the design of the apparatus. equipment inventory and mounting locations for equipment on the apparatus. A.5.6 Hose storage areas are not required to be contiguous. The purchaser This should include existing equipment and estimated future equipment should consider arrangements for hose storage that will best support their to be carried. The projections of total equipment payload and mounting operational procedures. The purchaser should also consider specifying some locations are essential for proper engineering of a new fire apparatus. It is type of cover for the hose compartment(s). Hinged or removable covers the responsibility of the purchaser to properly load the fire apparatus and might be advantageous. place equipment to comply to GVWR, front to rear weight distribution, and right to left load balance of this standard. A.5.7 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.), might not maximize a community’s grading A.4.12.2.3.3 The projections of total equipment payload and mounting by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should locations are essential for proper engineering of a new fire apparatus. check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for A.4.13.1 The power generated by internal combustion engines can decrease information on what tools and equipment should be carried to maximize with an increase in altitude. The loss varies with the type of engine, the fuel their community’s grading. it uses, and the amount of air inlet supercharging. If the apparatus is going A.5.7.1.2 Where there are no ladder trucks in service, pumpers should to be regularly used at elevations above 2000 ft (600 m), the manufacturer normally be equipped with a 35-ft (10.7-m) extension ladder. It might needs to know the operating elevation to provide an engine that will deliver be advantageous to standardize on the 35-ft (10.7-m) extension ladder, proper performance. (See Section 4.3.) regardless of available ladder truck service. The purchaser should consider A.4.13.2 Although the purchaser needs to specify grades in excess of 6 specifying an extension ladder length that will allow the ladder tip to extend percent (see Section 4.3), the fire department should evaluate where the apparatus will be expected to operate in a stationary position on such grades. The occasional exposure to excessive grades while moving over roadways 944 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA a minimum of 2 ft (0.6 m) above or into a hazard area to be an accessible and 1000 ft (180 m to 300 m) of hose might be desirable to utilize the available visible emergency egress. pumping capacity. Additional hose capacity might also be desirable for pumps rated at less than 500 gpm (2000 L/min). A.5.7.2.3 The size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) relates to pump certification only. Other sizes of suction hose, compatible with local Hose storage areas are not required to be contiguous. The purchaser operations, could be used and should be specified if they are desired. should consider arrangements for hose storage that will best support their operational procedures. The purchaser should also consider specifying some A.5.8 See A.5.7. type of cover for the hose compartment(s). Hinged or removable covers A.5.8.2 Many departments now find it useful to use large diameter supply might be advantageous. hose [4 in. (100 mm) or 5 in. (125 mm)] to effectively move water from its A.6.6 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., source to the fire scene. Fire departments serving areas with wide hydrant nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.) might not maximize a community’s grading spacing or areas with no hydrants often find it desirable to carry additional by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should hose. check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for 1 information on what tools and equipment should be carried to maximize It is recommended that the department carry at least 200 ft (60 m) of 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose for handline operation. If the operations of the department their community’s grading. are geared to using multiple large handlines from single apparatus, the A.6.6.2.3 The size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) relates 1 department should consider carrying more 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose and to pump certification only. Other sizes of suction hose, compatible with local additional nozzles. Likewise, the amount and size of hose used to supply operations, could be used and should be specified if they are desired. large stream devices should be considered in planning the amount and size of hose to be carried. A.6.7 See A.6.6. The department should evaluate its needs and choose the size and amount of A.6.7.3 The requirements of service in different communities will hose that will best support its operation and then discuss those hose storage necessitate additions to the equipment required. The operational objective needs with the contractor to ensure the fire apparatus hose storage space will is to arrive at the scene of the emergency with the necessary equipment for be properly laid out and of sufficient size to accommodate the department’s immediate life safety operations and emergency control. needs. The mandatory equipment required to be carried on the initial attack fire A.5.8.3 The requirements of service in different communities will apparatus weighs approximately 350 lb (159 kg). This leaves a remaining necessitate additions to the equipment required. The operational objective capacity of approximately 550 lb (249 kg) for storage of optional equipment is to arrive at the scene of the emergency with the necessary equipment for while staying within the allowance of 900 lb (408 kg) for the smallest immediate life safety operations and emergency control. GVWR chassis. The purchaser should advise the contractor if equipment in excess of the allowance in Table 12.1 is to be carried so that the contractor The mandatory equipment required to be carried on the pumper fire can provide a chassis of sufficient size. (See Sections 4.3 and 12.1.) apparatus weighs approximately 600 lb (270 kg). This leaves a remaining capacity of approximately 1400 lb (635 kg) to 1900 lb (860 kg) depending The following list of additional equipment is recommended to be carried on on the volume of cabinetry for storage of optional equipment. The purchaser initial attack fire apparatus. The equipment list provided does not detail each should advise the contractor if equipment in excess of the allowance in Table item sufficiently for purchasing purpose. The purchaser should clarify the 12.1 is to be carried so that the contractor can provide a chassis of sufficient detailed specifications for these items. size. (See Sections 4.3 and 12.1.) (1) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead axe. The following list of additional equipment is recommended to be carried on pumper fire apparatus. The equipment list provided does not detail each item (2) One fire service claw tool. sufficiently for purchasing purpose. The purchaser should clarify the detailed specifications for these items. (3) One 8-ft (2.4-m) or longer pike pole. (1) One fire service claw tool. (4) One smoke ejector, 5000 ft3/min (142 m3/min) minimum capacity. If (2) One smoke ejector, 5000/ft3 min (142 m3/min) minimum capacity. If electrically driven, a suitable adapter cord should be supplied to fit standard electrically driven, a suitable adapter cord should be supplied to fit standard house “U” ground outlets and extension cords and outlets on generators used house “U” ground outlets and extension cords and outlets on generators used in fire departments. in fire departments. (5) One 10-ft (3-m) attic ladder and mounting brackets. The ladder should (3) One crowbar [36 in. (1 m) minimum] with brackets. meet the requirements of NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design 7 Verification Tests for Fire Department Ground Ladders. (4) One pair of insulated bolt cutters with /16-in. (11-mm) minimum cut. (5) One Halligan-type tool with brackets. (6) One crowbar [36 in. (1 m) minimum] with brackets. (6) One 21/ -in. (65-mm) hydrant valve (screw-type gate). 7 2 (7) One pair insulated bolt cutters with /16-in. (11-mm) minimum cut. (7) One double-gated reducing leader wye, sized to fit hose used in department. (8) One Halligan-type tool with brackets. 1 (8) Two shovels (one pointed and one scoop). (9) One 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hydrant valve (screw-type gate). (9) Four hose straps. (10) Two shovels (one pointed and one scoop). (10) One 125-ft (38-m) length of utility rope having a breaking strength of at least 5000 lb (2268 kg). (11) Two hose straps. (11) One 3000-WDRAFT (minimum) portable generator. (12) One 125-ft (38-m) length of utility rope having a breaking strength of (12) Two 500-W portable lights. at least 5000 lb (2268 kg). (13) Two cord reels with minimum 200-ft (60-m) cord on each with (13) One 3000-W (minimum) portable generator. connectors that are compatible with lights, generator, and smoke ejector. (14) One portable pump. (14) Two 500-W portable lights. (15) Toolbox with hammers, wrenches, screwdrivers, and other assorted (15) Two cord reels with minimum 200-ft (60-m) cord on each with tools. connectors that are compatible with lights, generator, and smoke ejector. (16) Master stream appliance, 1000 gpm (4000 L/min) minimum. (16) Toolbox with hammers, wrenches, screwdrivers, and other assorted (17) Foam delivery equipment compatible with onboard foam system. tools. (18) One hose clamp. (17) Foam delivery equipment compatible with onboard foam system. A.6.4 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate (18) One hose clamp. the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications, A.7.4 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate so the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment accommodated within the design of the apparatus. to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications so that the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly A.6.5 It should be recognized that apparatus of 500 gpm (2000 L/min) rated accommodated within the design of the apparatus. 1 pump capacity or more normally require more than 300 ft (90 m) of 2 /2-in. 1 (65-mm) hose to utilize their pumping capacity and their 2 /2-in. (65-mm) or A.7.5.1 The purchaser might want to specify the location and the larger discharge connections. For example, the 300-ft (90-m) load provides arrangement of the hose storage area to allow carrying the hose only 150-ft (45-m) lines from the two outlets of a 500-gpm (2000-L/min) preconnected to the tank inlet. apparatus. Experience has shown that, with large capacity pumps, 600 ft to 945 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA The purchaser should consider specifying some type of cover for the hose as requirements for additional ground ladders are added, space for other compartment. Hinged or removable covers might be desirable. equipment can become limited. A.7.6 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., A.8.7.2 The following list could be used as a ground ladder complement: nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.) might not maximize a community’s grading by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should (1) One attic ladder a minimum of 10 ft (3 m) in length check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for information on what tools and equipment should be carried to maximize (2) Two roof ladders (with folding roof hooks) a minimum of 16 ft (4.9 m) their community’s grading. in length A.7.6.3 The size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) relates to (3) One combination ladder a minimum of 14 ft (4.3 m) in length pump certification only. Other sizes of suction hose, compatible with local (4) One extension ladder a minimum of 24 ft (7.3 m) in length operations, could be used and should be specified if they are desired. (5) One extension ladder a minimum of 35 ft (10.7 m) in length A.7.7 See A.7.6 A.8.8 See A.8.7. A.7.7.2.2 The purpose of a mobile water supply apparatus does not include attack fire fighting. However, if a pump is provided, the provisions A.8.8.2 Axes and long-handled ventilation, salvage, and overhaul poles are of handlines will allow limited fire-fighting capability, particularly in now available with wood, fiberglass, or plastic handles. The fire department protecting the apparatus if this becomes necessary. should specify which material should be used for making the handle. A.7.7.3.1 The requirements of service in different communities will The requirements of service in different communities will necessitate necessitate additions to the equipment required. The operational objective additions to the equipment required. The operational objective is to arrive at is to arrive at the scene of the emergency with the necessary equipment for the scene of the emergency with the necessary equipment for immediate life immediate life safety operations and emergency control. safety operations and emergency control. The mandatory equipment required to be carried on the mobile water supply The mandatory equipment required to be carried on the aerial fire apparatus fire apparatus weighs approximately 700 lb (318 kg). This leaves a remaining weighs approximately 1000 lb (454 kg). This leaves a remaining capacity capacity of approximately 300 lb (136 kg) for storage of optional equipment of approximately 1500 lb (681 kg) for storage of optional equipment while while staying within the allowance of 1000 lb (454 kg). The purchaser staying within the allowance of 2500 lb (1135 kg). The purchaser should should advise the contractor if equipment in excess of 1000 lb (454 kg) is to advise the contractor if equipment in excess of 2500 lb (1135 kg) is to be be carried so that the contractor can provide a chassis of sufficient size. (See carried so that the contractor can provide a chassis of sufficient size. (See Sections 4.3 and 12.1.) Sections 4.3 and 12.1.) The following list of additional equipment is recommended to be carried on The following list of additional equipment is recommended to be carried on mobile water supply apparatus. The equipment list provided does not detail aerial fire apparatus. The equipment list provided does not detail each item each item sufficiently for purchasing purpose. The purchaser should clarify sufficiently for purchasing purpose. The purchaser should clarify the detailed the detailed specifications for these items. specifications for these items. (1) One fire service claw tool (1) Three portable floodlights (500 W). (2) One crowbar [36 in. (1 m) minimum] with brackets (2) Two shovels (round point).

7 (3) One pair of insulated bolt cutters with /16-in. (11-mm) minimum cut (3) Two electric cord reels with 200 ft (60 m) of 12-gauge, 3-wire cord with connectors that are compatible with lights, smoke ejectors, and onboard (4) One Halligan-type tool with brackets generators. 1 (5) One 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hydrant valve (screw-type gate) (4) Three 2-wire to 3-wire adapters. (6) Two shovels (pointed, long handle) (5) One smoke ejector, 5000 ft3/min (142 m3/min) minimum capacity. If electrically driven, suitable adapter cord should be supplied to fit standard (7) Four hose straps house “U” ground outlets and extension cords and outlets on generators used (8) One 125-ft (38-m) length of utility rope having a breaking strength of at in fire departments. least 5000 lb (2268 kg) (6) Two 10-ton (9000 kg) hydraulic jacks. (9) One portable pump (7) Two 20-ton (18,000 kg) hydraulic jacks. (10) One low-level strainer for use with portable tanks (8) One pair of insulated wire cutters capable of cutting No. 6 gauge wire. (11) Toolbox with hammers, wrenches, screwdrivers, and other assorted tools (9) Four additional salvage covers, at least 12 ft × 18 ft (3.6 m × 5.5 m). (12) One water transfer device to be used between portable tanks (10) Two floor runners, at least 3 ft × 18 ft (1 m × 5.5 m). (13) One 1500-gal (6000-L) (minimum) collapsible, portable tank (11) Four mops. A.8.3 The purchaser should consider the department’s need for hard or soft (12) Four brooms. suction hose if DRAFTa fire pump is installed and should specify the appropriate (13) Four squeegees with handles. hose to meet this need. (14) Two mop wringers with buckets. A.8.5 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment to be (15) One roll 15-lb (6.8-kg) tar paper or plastic sheeting at least 8 mil thick. carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications so that the apparatus manufacturer can properly accommodate the equipment within the (16) Twelve standard sprinkler heads (assorted temperatures and types). design of the apparatus. (17) Two claw hammers, each with assorted nails. A.8.6.1 If the aerial fire apparatus is to carry hose, the purchaser needs to specify the amount and size of hose to be carried and any special (18) One heavy-duty stapler. requirements for the location in which it is to be carried. (19) Six sprinkler stops or wedges. A.8.7 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., (20) One set of sprinkler head wrenches for the type of heads carried. nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.) might not maximize a community’s grading by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should (21) Two pairs of safety goggles. check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for information on what tool and equipment should be carried to maximize their (22) One power saw (chain or heavy-duty rotary type). community’s grading. (23) Four assorted handsaws. A.8.7.1 The fire department should study its needs for ground ladders, evaluating which ladders will be arriving at a fire scene with pumpers as (24) One portable thermal cutting unit designed for cutting metal. well as aerial fire apparatus. Many communities have multiple three- and (25) One rescue-type tool with extension rams and assorted lengths of four-story buildings around which a power-operated aerial device cannot chain. be positioned and that require longer or additional extension ladders to support fire-fighting operations. However, it should be recognized that (26) One set of air bags. 946 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (27) One deodorizer unit, power operated. objectives for which the quint is being purchased. The purchaser should advise the contractor if equipment in excess of 2500 lb (1135 kg) is to be (28) One water pickup vacuum. carried so that the contractor can provide a chassis of sufficient size. (See Sections 4.3 and 12.1.) (29) Assorted rolls of tape (duct tape, electrical tape, cellophane tape, etc.). A.10.3 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate (30) One pneumatic rescue cushion. the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment (31) One stokes basket. to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications so that the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly (32) One gas shutoff wrench. accommodated within the design of the apparatus. (33) One submersible-type pump. A.10.4 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.) might not maximize a community’s grading (34) Two pairs of lineman’s gloves with leather glove protectors. by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for (35) Four bale/mattress hooks. information on what tools and equipment should be carried to maximize (36) Two four-tine forks. their community’s grading. (37) Two blankets. A.10.4.2.3 The size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) relates to pump certification only. Other sizes of suction hose, compatible with local (38) One block and tackle. operations, could be used and should be specified if they are desired. (39) One life gun with ammunition. A.10.5 See A.10.4. (40) One water shutoff wrench. A.10.5.2 The mandatory equipment required to be carried on a special service fire apparatus weighs approximately 200 lb (91 kg). This leaves a A.9.2.2 Paragraphs 20.6.1 or 20.12.1 require a flow of 1000 gpm (4000 remaining capacity of approximately 1800 lb (817 kg) for storage of optional L/min) with a nozzle gauge pressure of 100 psi (700 kPa) and a pressure loss equipment while staying within the allowance of 2000 lb (908 kg) for the not exceeding 100 psi (700 kPa). smallest GVWR chassis. The purchaser should advise the contractor if equipment in excess of the allowance in Table 12.1 is to be carried so that A.9.5 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate the contractor can provide a chassis of sufficient size. (See Sections 4.3 and the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment 12.1.) to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications so that the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly Special service fire apparatus can be designed to provide a wide variety accommodated within the design of the apparatus. of support functions (rescue, command, hazardous material containment, A.9.6 Many departments now find it useful to use large diameter supply air services, electrical generation and floodlighting, and transportation of hose [4 in. or 5 in. (100 mm or 125 mm)] to effectively move water from its support equipment and personnel). Because of this variety, the required list source to the fire scene. Fire departments serving areas with wide hydrant of equipment is minimal and the purchaser needs to develop an appropriate spacing or areas with no hydrants often find it advantageous to carry equipment list based on a review of the functions and operations that the additional hose. The hose storage area provided for in this standard is a apparatus will be expected to support. minimum to accommodate the smallest size of the amount of hose required The following two lists of equipment are provided for consideration where to be carried. The department should evaluate its needs and choose the size a fire apparatus is to support rescue operations and hazardous materials and amount of hose that will best support its operation and then discuss containment operations. The equipment lists provided do not detail each item those hose storage needs with the contractor to ensure the fire apparatus hose sufficiently for purchasing purpose. Purchaser should clarify the detailed storage space will be properly laid out and of sufficient size to accommodate specifications for these items. the department’s needs. The equipment on the following list should be considered when deciding Hose storage areas are not required to be contiguous. The purchaser what to carry on a rescue apparatus: should consider arrangements for hose storage that will best support their operational procedures. The purchaser should also consider specifying some (1) 500 ft (150 m) of plastic “emergency scene” or equivalent crowd type of cover for the hose compartment(s). Hinged or removable covers control tape. might be desirable. (2) Forty-eight 30-minute road flares. A.9.7 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.) might not maximize a community’s grading (3) Twelve road hazard traffic control devices. by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for (4) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead axe. information on what tools and equipment should be carried to maximize (5) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) pickhead axe. their community’s grading. (6) One 6-ft (2-m) pike pole or plaster hook. A.9.7.2.3 The size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) relates to pump certification only. Other sizes of suction hose, compatible with local (7) One 8-ft (2.4-m) or longer nonconductive pike pole. operations, could be used and should be specified if they are desired. (8) One crowbar [36 in. (1 m) minimum] with brackets. A.9.8 See A.9.7. (9) One pair of insulated bolt cutters with 7/ -in. (11-mm) minimum cut. DRAFT16 A.9.8.2 It is recommended that the department carry at least 200 ft (60 1 (10) One Halligan-type tool with brackets. m) of 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose for handline operation. If the operations of the department are geared to using multiple large handlines from single 1 (11) Two shovels (one pointed and one scoop). apparatus, the department should consider carrying more 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose and additional nozzles. Likewise, the amount and size of hose used to (12) Two 12-lb (5.4-kg) sledgehammers. supply large stream devices should be considered in planning the amount and size of hose to be carried. (13) Two Class I life safety harnesses meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components. A.9.8.3 The requirements of service in different communities will necessitate additions to the equipment required. The operational objective (14) 150 ft (45 m) of general-use life safety rope meeting the requirements is to arrive at the scene of the emergency with the necessary equipment for of NFPA 1983. immediate life safety operations and emergency control. (15) 150 ft (45 m) of light-use life safety rope meeting the requirements The mandatory equipment required to be carried on the quint fire apparatus of NFPA 1983. weighs approximately 700 lb (318 kg). This leaves a remaining capacity of approximately 1800 lb (817 kg) for storage of optional equipment while (16) One 150-ft (45-m) length of utility rope having a breaking strength staying within the allowance of 2500 lb (1135 kg). The list of equipment of at least 5000 lb (2268 kg). required to be carried on a quint contains all the equipment required on a pumper as well as the life safety rope and additional wheel chocks. It is (17) One box of tools to include the following: recommended that the purchaser review the list of equipment required to be (a) One hacksaw with three blades carried on an aerial fire apparatus (see 8.8.2) as well as the lists in A.5.8.3 and A.8.8.2 for other tools and equipment needed to meet the functional (b) One keyhole saw (c) One 18-in. (457-mm) pipe wrench

947 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (d) One hammer (10) Six vapor-protective suits meeting the requirements of NFPA 1991, Standard on Vapor-Protective Ensembles for Hazardous Materials (e) One pair of tin snips Emergencies (f) One pair of pliers (11) Twelve liquid splash-protective suits meeting the requirements of NFPA 1992, Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Ensembles and Clothing (g) One pair of lineman’s pliers for Hazardous Materials Emergencies (h) Assorted types and sizes of screwdrivers (12) Twenty-four pairs of disposable boot covers (i)Assorted adjustable wrenches (13) Twenty-four pairs of disposable glove liners or inner gloves (j) Assorted combination wrenches (14) Forty-eight pairs of disposable chemical protective gloves — gloves (18) Two salvage covers, each a minimum of 12 ft 14 ft (3.7 m 4.3 m). should be of three different materials as a minimum (19) One 4000-W (minimum) portable generator. (15) Six additional SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency (20) Two 500-W portable lights. Services (21) Two cord reels with minimum 125 ft (38 m) of 10-gauge, 3-wire (16) One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA cord on each with connections that are compatible with lights and generator. (17) Ten traffic cones, 18 in. (0.5 m) minimum height (22) One smoke ejector, 5000 ft3/min (142 m3/min) minimum capacity. If electrically driven, suitable adapter cord should be supplied to fit standard (18) Four rolls 1000-ft × 3-in. (300-m × 76-mm) banner tape house “U” ground outlets and extension cords and outlets on generators used (19) Two rolls 6 mil (0.152 mm) minimum 10-ft ×100-ft (3-m × 30-m) in fire departments. plastic sheeting (23) Two 10-ton (9000 kg) hydraulic jacks. (20) Two rolls 2 in. (51 mm) wide duct tape (24) Two 20-ton (18,000 kg) hydraulic jacks. (21) Two decontamination containment pools (25) One roll 15-lb (6.8-kg) tar paper or plastic sheeting at least 8 mil (0.203 mm) thick. (22) One decontamination shower (23) Two 50-ft (15-m) lengths of heavy-duty garden hose with adapters (26) Two pairs of safety goggles. for connection to a fire pump (27) One power saw (chain or heavy-duty rotary type). (24) Two spray nozzles with garden hose thread (28) Four assorted handsaws. (25) Four 30-gal (100-L) open-top containers with sealed covers (29) One portable cutting device. (26) Four long-handle scrub brushes (30) Resuscitator equipment with oxygen administration capability and spare cylinders. The equipment should be compatible with the performance (27) Twenty 50-gal (190-L) capacity heavy-duty garbage bags of cardiopulmonary resuscitation. (28) One assortment decontamination solution (31) One powered rescue tool capable of cutting and spreading with (29) Four round point shovels associated accessory equipment. (30) Four portable explosionproof hand lights with mounting brackets (32) Shoring of various sizes and lengths. (31) Four nonspark, plastic, square point shovels (33) One 10-ft (3-m) and one 15-ft (4.5-m) log chain with hooks. (32) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) flathead axe or forcible entry tool (34) One minimum 4-ton (3500 kg) hydraulic porta-power kit. (33) Two street brooms (35) One set of air bags. (34) Two floor squeegees with handles (36) Assorted rolls of tape (duct tape, electrical tape, cellophane tape, etc.). (35) One 6-lb (2.7-kg) sledgehammer (37) One stokes basket. (36) Two nonspark bung wrenches (38) One gas shutoff wrench. (37) One gas shutoff wrench (39) Two pairs of lineman’s gloves with leather glove protectors. (38) One pair 24-in. (0.6 m) bolt cutters (40) Two blankets. (39) One drum upender (41) One block and tackle. (40) One nonspark 28-in. (0.7 m) crowbar Equipment on theDRAFT following list should be considered if the primary use of (41) One plug and patch kit the apparatus is for hazardous material containment: (42) One tool box (wrenches, sockets, screwdrivers, minimum 100 units) (1) One copy of U.S. DOT North American Emergency Response Guidebook, current edition (43) Six MC #306/DOT #406 dome clamps 3 (2) One copy of U.S. Coast Guard Chemical Hazard Response (44) 400 pads 18 in. × 18 in. × /8 in. (450 mm × 450 mm × 9.5 mm) Information System (CHRIS), manual or equivalent reference guide hydrophobic polypropylene-type absorbents (3) One copy of American Association of Railroads Emergency Action (45) 150 lb (68 kg) of dry granular or loose absorbent in ruptureproof 5- Guide, or equivalent reference guide gal (19-L) containers that can be disposed of by approved methods (4) One NFPA Fire Protection Guide to Hazardous Materials, or (46) Four 10-ft (3-m) sorbent booms equivalent reference guide (47) 50 lb (22.7 kg) dry “lime” in ruptureproof 5-gal (19-L) containers (5) Two pairs of binoculars (48) One manually operated product transfer pump with minimum 15 (6) One gas detection instrument per OSHA standards gpm (57 L/min) capacity and appropriate hose (7) One radiation-monitoring instrument (49) One 55-gal (208-L) drum (UN-1A2) (8) One pH test kit (50) One 85-gal (322-L) drum (UN-1A2) (9) One colorimetric chemical detector tube kit with 20-chemical A.11.3.2 Paragraphs 20.6.1 or 20.12.1 require a flow of 1000 gpm (4000 minimum detection capability L/min) with a nozzle gauge pressure of 100 psi (700 kPa) and a pressure loss not exceeding 100 psi (700 kPa).

948 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.11.6 Additional compartmentation might be required to accommodate occupied by generators, reels, air systems, ladders, hose, and so forth that the size, shape, and weight of special equipment. Any special equipment are not in the miscellaneous equipment allowance. Total equipment weight to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications so varies significantly depending on the density of the equipment and how that the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly tightly the fire department chooses to pack it. accommodated within the design of the apparatus. Overloading. Overloading of the vehicle by the manufacturer through design A.11.7 Many departments now find it useful to use large diameter supply or by the purchaser adding a great deal of equipment after the vehicle is in hose [4 in. or 5 in. (100 mm or 125 mm)] to effectively move water from its service will materially reduce the life of the vehicle and will undoubtedly source to the fire scene. Fire departments serving areas with wide hydrant result in increased maintenance costs, particularly with respect to the spacing or areas with no hydrants often find it desirable to carry additional transmissions, clutches, and brakes. Overloading can also seriously affect hose. The hose storage area provided for in this standard is a minimum to handling characteristics, making steering particularly difficult. accommodate the smallest size of the amount of hose required to be carried. The department should evaluate its needs and choose the size and amount of Under Loading. Brake equipment on heavy vehicles can be sensitive to the hose that will best support its operation and then discuss those hose storage weight distribution of the vehicle. Specifying a GVWR significantly greater needs with the contractor to ensure that the fire apparatus hose storage than the intended in-service weight can lead to poor brake performance, space will be properly laid out and of sufficient size to accommodate the chatter, and squeal. Purchasers who specify configurations with limited department’s needs. compartment volume on a high capacity chassis should consult the manufacturer to ensure that a vehicle with an under-loaded condition will not Hose storage areas are not required to be contiguous. The purchaser result. should consider arrangements for hose storage that will best support their operational procedures. The purchaser should also consider specifying some Fire apparatus should be able to perform its intended service under adverse type of cover for the hose compartment(s). Hinged or removable covers conditions that might require operation off paved streets or roads. Chassis might be advantageous. components should be selected with the rigors of service in mind. A.11.8 The recommended minimum equipment listed in this standard (i.e., A.12.1.2 A weight of 250 lb (114 kg) for a fully equipped fire fighter is used nozzles, hose, ladders, etc.) might not maximize a community’s grading elsewhere in NFPA standards. The 200 lb (91 kg) per person used here does by the insurance rating authority. Individual fire departments should not include the weight check with the insurance rating authority for their state or jurisdiction for of SCBA and tools carried by a fire fighter, as the weight of this equipment is information on what tools and equipment should be carried to maximize accounted for elsewhere. their community’s grading. A.12.2.1 The standard does not contain any minimum for size of engine A.11.8.1.3 The size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a) relates because the size of the engine needs to be chosen to correspond with the to pump certification only. Other sizes of suction hose, compatible with local conditions of design and service. operations, could be used and should be specified if they are desired. Many fire departments have favored high-torque low-speed engines for A.11.9 See A.11.8. fire department service because such engines have good performance characteristics both when powering the apparatus through city traffic A.11.9.2 It is recommended that the department carry at least 200 ft (60 and when driving the pump. However, high-speed engines are frequently 1 m) of 2 /2-in. (65-mm) hose for handline operation. If the operations of employed for fire apparatus, particularly in the case of commercial vehicle the department are geared to using multiple large handlines from single chassis. Where high-speed gasoline engines are selected for use in fire 1 apparatus, the department should consider carrying more 2 /2-in. (65-mm) apparatus that might have to operate off paved highways, it is recommended hose and additional nozzles. Likewise, the amount and size of hose used to that either a two-speed rear axle with high numerical ratio in low range or an supply large stream devices should be considered in planning the amount and auxiliary transmission be specified. size of hose to be carried. A.12.2.1.1 The maximum governed speed is established by the engine A.11.9.3 The requirements of service in different communities will manufacturer as a safe limit of engine speed. The governor or electronic fuel necessitate additions to the equipment required. The operational objective control system should prevent the engine from exceeding the safe speed. is to arrive at the scene of the emergency with the necessary equipment for Most engine manufacturers allow a plus tolerance of 2 percent for maximum immediate life safety operations and emergency control. governed speed. The mandatory equipment required to be carried on the mobile foam fire A.12.2.1.3 A shutdown beyond the control of the pump operator during fire- apparatus weighs approximately 700 lb (318 kg). This leaves a remaining fighting operations can result in loss of water flow from the pump that could capacity of approximately 1300 lb (590 kg) for storage of optional equipment severely endanger personnel. Automatic fuel line safety shutoff as required while staying within the allowance of 2000 lb (908 kg). The purchaser by DOT regulations is not considered an automatic engine shutdown. should advise the contractor if equipment in excess of 2000 lb (908 kg) is to be carried so that the contractor can provide a chassis of sufficient size. (See A.12.2.1.4.1 An increase in engine speed provides increased alternator Sections 4.3 and 12.1.) output, increased engine cooling, increased air conditioner output, and increased output or performance from other devices which derive their A.12.1 The carrying capacity of a vehicle is one of the least understood power from the chassis engine. features of design and one of the most important. All vehicles are designed for a maximum GVWR or maximum total weight, which should not be A.12.2.1.4.2 The intent of the interlock is to ensure that the chassis engine exceeded by the apparatus manufacturer or by the purchaser after the vehicle speed cannot be advanced without disengaging the driving wheels of the has been placed in service. For tractor-drawn vehicles, the in-service weight apparatus either at the transmission (having it in park or neutral) or by of the apparatus should not exceed the GCWR. There are many factors that having a split shaft PTO fully engaged in the correct position to drive the make up the rated GVWR, including the design of the springs or suspension component. system, the ratedDRAFT axle capacity, the rated tire and wheel loading, and the A.12.2.2.1 Where a regular production model commercial chassis is used, distribution of the weight between the front and rear wheels. it is recommended that the heavy-duty radiator option be included when Water Tank. One of the most critical factors is the size of the water tank. such is available. Radiators with bolted top and bottom tanks and removable Water weighs approximately 8.3 lb/gal (1 kg/L). A value of 10 lb/gal (1.2 kg/ side braces, if available, are considered preferable. Optional features that L) can be used when estimating the weight of the tank and its water, making might be desirable include a coolant conditioner, radiator sight gauges, a 500-gal (2000-L) tank and its water about 2.5 tons (2400 kg). and automatic radiator shutters, any of which if used should be of a type approved by the engine manufacturer. Miscellaneous Equipment. If the finished apparatus is not to be overloaded, the purchaser should provide the contractor with the weight of equipment to Where local environmental extremes exist — that is, high humidity be carried if it is in excess of the allowance shown in Table 12.1. (See Section and temperatures or extreme low temperatures — the purchaser should 4.3) specifically state under what environmental conditions the apparatus is expected to operate. Large Compartment Capacity. The manufacturer is only obligated by the standard to provide a miscellaneous equipment allowance in compliance A.12.2.3.1 Full flow oil filters are mandatory with some diesel engines. with the minimum allowance listed in Table 12.1. Purchasers who specify vehicles with large compartment capacity should work closely with the A.12.2.4.1 A manual emergency engine shutdown might be provided in vehicle manufacturer to ensure that the GVWR is sufficient to carry the addition to the normal engine shutoff switch. It could be of the type that intended equipment. A vehicle with average compartment loading will will close off either the air supply or the exhaust gas flow of the engine. The have a miscellaneous equipment weight of about 8 lb/ft3 (125 kg/m3) of activation mechanism should be provided with a guard and marked with a compartment space available for miscellaneous equipment. A very lightly sign that reads “Emergency Shutdown.” Provisions to prevent restarting of loaded vehicle could have as little as 4 lb/ft3 (65 kg/m3). A heavily loaded the engine without a special reset procedure should be included. vehicle can reach 12 lb/ft3 (200 kg/m3). This volume does not include space A.12.2.4.1.1.1 Caution needs to be used as air intake filters might affect the engine manufacturer’s air restriction requirements.

949 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.12.2.4.1.1.3 The extent to which air inlet protection is required could A.12.3.2.3 The angle of approach or departure affects the road clearance depend on specific fire department operations. of the vehicle going over short steep grades such as would be found in a driveway entrance, crossing a high crowned road at a right angle, or in A.12.2.4.1.2 To prevent engine shutdown due to fuel contamination, off-road service. Too low an angle of approach or departure will result in dual filters in parallel, with proper valving so that each filter can be used the apparatus scraping the ground. Figure A.12.3.2.3 shows the method of separately, might be preferable. The purchaser should specify if dual filters determining the angle (in this case) of departure. The angle of approach are desired. Installation of two or more pumps should be designed so that (front of vehicle) is measured in the same fashion. failure of one pump will not nullify the performance of the others. It should be remembered that commercial vehicles are designed for over-the-road In the illustration, the line AT represents the circumstance when the tailboard operation, and the fuel system and battery are at least partially cooled by the is the determining lowest point. The line BT represents a circumstance flow of air resulting from the motion. where the tail board is not the lowest point: in this case it is a fuel tank. The angle of departure is shown as XA or XB. To determine the angle of A.12.2.4.1.3.1 With the use of diesel engines, the concern for vapor lock departure, a thin steel strip is placed up against the rear of the tires or a common with gasoline engines does not exist, and electric fuel pumps are string can be stretched tight from one rear tire to the other. By eyeing and not usually compatible for connection in series with a diesel engine fuel determining the lowest point (the tailboard, fuel tank, or other equipment or system. As a result, when an electric fuel pump is specified with a diesel component) that would make the smallest angle of departure, use a plumb engine, it is arranged as a fuel priming pump only. When not properly bob hung from this location to determine the location of this point on the marked with a label or when the control valves are not properly set, the ground. Mark this point on the ground (point of the plumb bob). Measure auxiliary priming system can cause the diesel engine to lose its prime. the vertical distance from the ground to where the plumb bob was hung In addition, operation of a priming pump during diesel engine operation (distance V). Measure the horizontal distance from the plumb bob point to can boost fuel inlet pressure to the engine’s fuel system. This could cause in front of the steel strip or to the string running from rear tire to rear tire erratic engine behavior and loss of engine speed control. Control systems (distance H). Divide the vertical distance (V) by the horizontal distance for priming pumps should allow only momentary operation and prevent the (H). The ratio of V/H is the tangent of the angle of departure. Knowing this operation of the pump while the engine is operating. ratio, the angle of departure can be determined from a table of trigonometric functions of angles or from a math calculator. Since the standard requires A.12.2.5.1 Emissions from exhaust discharge pipes should be directed away a minimum angle of departure of 8 degrees and the tangent of 8 degrees from any fire-fighting tools since such emissions contain an oily substance is 0.1405, if the ratio of V divided by H is 0.1405 or larger, the angle of that could make the tools difficult to handle and possibly dangerous to use. departure is 8 degrees or greater. A.12.3.1.5 Adequate braking capacity is essential for the safe operation of fire apparatus. While this subject is normally covered in state highway regulations, it should be noted that fire apparatus might have a special problem as compared with normal vehicles of the same gross vehicle weight. Fire apparatus could be required to make successive brake applications in a short period of time when attempting to respond to alarms with minimum loss of time. Thus, the problem of brake “fade” and braking capacity could be critical unless the brakes provided take into account the service requirements. Air actuated brakes are recommended for fire service vehicles of over 25,000 lb (11,000 kg) GVWR. �

Where air brakes are provided, it is important that they be of a quick buildup � type with dual tanks and a pressure regulating valve. The rated compressor �� capacity should be not less than 12 ft3 min (0.34 m3 min) for this class of �� �� service. Air brakes require attention to guard against condensation in the air �� lines, such as might occur in areas subject to changes in climate affecting the moisture content of the air. Automatic moisture ejection of nonfreezing type �� is recommended. Air pressure drop should be limited to normal air losses. �� The presence of the following conditions indicates the need for immediate service: Figure A.12.3.2.3 Dimensions for Determining Angle of Departure. (1) Air brake pressure drop of more than 2 psi (14 kPa) in 1 minute for single vehicles or more than 3 psi (21 kPa) in 1 minute for vehicle A.12.3.3 Where automatic transmissions are used, the power takeoff combinations, with the engine stopped and the service brakes released applications could present problems, especially when dual PTO drives are required. In some instances, the PTO drive can only be engaged in torque (2) Air pressure drop of more than 3 psi (21 kPa) in 1 minute for single converter range with resultant chances of overheating with prolonged use. If vehicles or more than 4 psi (28 kPa) in 1 minute for vehicle combinations, high engine rpm occurs, there is the possibility, if the vehicle is accidentally with the engine stopped and the service brakes fully applied left in gear, of the output torque overcoming the parking brake and moving A.12.3.1.6 There have been occurrences of the driver becoming disabled the vehicle. Proper operational instructions are essential with automatic while driving a fire apparatus. The purchasers might want to specify the transmissions. placement of the parking brake control to a location where it can be reached A.12.3.4.1 Where a large capacity fuel tank is desired, as in the case of from the officer’s seat or require a second control so the officer could stop apparatus designed for rural service, the capacity should be specified by the the vehicle if the driver became disabled. purchaser. A.12.3.1.8 Purchasers of apparatus should consider equipping the apparatus A.12.3.5 If the purchaser wants the hooks or rings to be accessible without with an auxiliaryDRAFT braking system. Fire apparatus commonly make repeated having to open compartment doors, the specifications should state that fact. stops from high speeds that cause rapid brake lining wear and brake fade sometimes leading to accidents. A.13.1 This chapter defines the requirements for alternators, batteries, load management, and instrumentation to detect incipient electrical system Auxiliary braking systems are recommended on apparatus that are failure. The intent is to require an electrical system that will operate the exposed regularly to steep or long grades, are operating in congested areas apparatus using power supplied by the alternator, shed nonessential electrical where repeated stops are normal, or are responding to a high number of loads where necessary, and provide early warning of electrical failure in time emergencies. to permit corrective action. Examples of auxiliary braking systems include engine retarders, A.13.2.1 The 125 percent requirement for wiring and circuits is intended to transmission retarders, exhaust retarders, and driveline retarders. These provide end users a minimum amount of extra electrical circuit capacity. It is devices have various levels of effectiveness on braking. In addition, the not the intent to have the final stage manufacturer replace the standard OEM systems can be activated by various means and settings, both automatic and chassis manufacturer’s wiring to meet the 125 percent requirement. It is also manual in operation. The purchaser should carefully evaluate all auxiliary not the intent of this requirement to have electrical accessories purchased braking systems based on truck weight, terrain, duty cycle, and many other by the apparatus manufacturer rewired to meet the 125 percent requirement. factors. Electrical device manufacturer-supplied wiring can be used to the point Some auxiliary braking devices should be disconnected when the apparatus where it connects to apparatus manufacturer’s installed wiring. is operated on slippery surfaces. Follow the auxiliary braking device A.13.2.6 It is the intent of 13.2.6 to provide a unique means of identifying a manufacturer’s recommendations for proper instructions. wire or circuit to prevent confusing it with another wire or circuit if electrical A.12.3.2.1 Fire departments with vehicles that could be subject to system repairs become necessary. If a color coding scheme is used instead of continuous long mileage driving need to specify tire rating for continuous some other unique identification, that color should not be reused for a wire in operation in place of intermittent operation. any unrelated circuits within the same harness. However, 13.2.6 covers low- voltage wiring only and does not apply to shielded cables commonly used for communication purposes or wiring used in line voltage circuits. 950 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.13.3.2 The minimum alternator size is developed using the loads required Procedures are included to measure the radiation from a single device or the to meet the minimum continuous electrical load. Most apparatus will entire apparatus. Compliance could be determined through actual tests on actually have loads exceeding the minimum requirements of this standard. the completed apparatus or predictions based on tests previously conducted The purchaser should review the maximum current output of the alternator on similarly equipped apparatus. If compliance certification is required, it versus the load study supplied for the apparatus from the manufacturer for should be so indicated in the apparatus specifications. on-scene and responding modes. A.13.8.1 The upper-level optical warning devices provide warning at a A.13.3.3(7) The purchaser should analyze the electrical loads that need to distance from the apparatus and the lower-level optical warning devices be maintained to fulfill the mission of the apparatus and define those loads provide warning in close proximity to the apparatus. (See Figure A.13.8.1.) for the manufacturer of the apparatus. The purchaser needs to understand, however, that there is a limit to the output capacity of an alternator system on the apparatus’s engine and this standard requires that the apparatus Figure A.13.8.1 Upper and Lower Level Optical Warning Zones. be capable of maintaining the minimum continuous electrical load under [Existing Figure A-11-8.1, 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] the conditions defined in 13.3.2. When that load is exceeded and larger A.13.8.7.3 Under typical conditions, the specified optical warning system alternators are not available, the purchaser and the manufacturer need to provides effective, balanced warning. In some situations, however, the safety work together to determine how to reduce the minimum continuous electrical of the apparatus can be increased by turning off some warning devices. For load to that which can be sustained under the conditions defined in 13.3.2. example, if other vehicles need to pass within close proximity to the parked A.13.3.4 The unexpected shutdown of a fire apparatus at a fire can place apparatus, the possibility of distracting other drivers can be reduced if the fire fighters in mortal danger and seriously impact the fire attack. With headlights and lower-level warning lights are turned off. When responding computer-controlled engines and transmissions as well as electric valves in snow or fog, it could be desirable to turn off forward-facing strobes or and other controls, an electrical system failure could result in an immediate oscillating lights to reduce visual disorientation of the apparatus driver. and total shutdown of the apparatus. The low-voltage monitoring system is The intent of the warning light system is to provide full coverage signals intended to provide an early warning of an impending electrical failure and through the operation of a single master switch when either responding or provide enough time to permit operator intervention. blocking the right-of-way. There is no intent to prevent the use of lower A.13.3.6.1 Reduced crew sizes have forced the apparatus operator to assume levels of warning when the apparatus driver believes such reductions are many new fireground tasks in addition to that of operating apparatus. Even appropriate, given the vehicle’s mission, the weather, or other operational if the operator is at the apparatus, he or she is too busy with higher priority factors. Additional switches downstream of the master switch can be tasks to pay much attention to monitoring the condition of the electrical specified by the purchaser to control individual devices or groups of devices. system. Purchasers might want to specify traffic flow-type lighting such as amber Electrical loads on modern fire apparatus frequently exceed the alternator directional indicators for use in alerting approaching motorists of blocked or capacity and can be supplied only by the deep discharge of the apparatus partially blocked highways. batteries. The high-cycle batteries that are designed to provide the large A.13.8.11 When a component such as a flasher or power supply is used amount of amperage to crank modern diesel engines are severely damaged to operate more than one optical source, the optical sources should when deeply discharged. The automatic load management is intended to be connected so that the failure of this component does not create a protect the electrical system from needless damage while maintaining the measurement point without a warning signal at any point in any zone on operation of essential devices. either the upper or lower level. Although a single optical source can be used It is important that the priority of all managed loads be specified by the to provide warning signals into more than one zone, the possibility of a total purchaser so that, as electrical loads are disconnected from the apparatus’s signal failure at a measurement point is increased when the same flasher electrical systems, they are shed in an order least likely to affect emergency or power supply is used to operate multiple optical sources, each providing operations. Optical warning devices in excess of the minimum required in signals into more than one zone. this standard can and should be load managed. A.13.8.12 Flashing headlights are used in many areas as warning lights and A.13.4 Batteries on fire apparatus should be larger than those used on provide an inexpensive way to obtain additional warning to the front of the commercial vehicles because in addition to starting the vehicle, they need apparatus. Daylight flashing of the high beam filaments is very effective and to provide the supplemental energy to power high-amperage, intermittent is generally considered safe. Nighttime flashing could affect the vision of operation devices such as mechanical sirens and electric rewind hose reels. oncoming drivers as well as make driving the apparatus more difficult. Batteries usually have two ratings: “cold cranking amperes,” which In some jurisdictions, headlight flashing is prohibited or limited to certain determine the size engine that can be started, and “reserve capacity,” which types of emergency vehicles. If flashing headlights are employed on fire provides a measure of the total power that can be provided at a much lower apparatus, they are to be turned off when the apparatus headlights are on. constant rate of discharge. Fire apparatus batteries should be sized to have They should also be turned off along with all other white warning lights enough cold cranking amperage and reserve capacity to restart the engine when the apparatus is in the blocking mode. after being substantially discharged. Steady burning headlights are not considered warning lights and can be A.13.4.4.4 Overheating of a battery will cause rapid deterioration and illuminated in the blocking mode to light the area in front of the apparatus. early failure; evaporation of the water in the battery electrolyte can also Consideration should be given, however, to avoid shining lights in the eyes of be expected. Batteries in commercial chassis are often installed to take oncoming drivers. advantage of the cooling effect of the flow of air from motion in over-the- A.13.8.13 The minimum optical warning system should require no more road operation and could be subject to overheating when the apparatus is than an average of 40 amps for the operation of the upper-level and lower- operated in a stationary position, such as during pumping operations. level devices in the blocking mode. On apparatus whose length requires A.13.4.5 The powerDRAFT cord from the onboard charger or battery conditioner midship lights, no more than 5 amps of additional current should be required should only be plugged into a receptacle protected by a ground-fault circuit for the operation of each set of midship lights. Optical warning systems interrupter (GFCI) at the shoreline origination point. drawing more than 40 amps might necessitate modification of the electrical system specified in Section 13.3 in order to supply the additional power A.13.4.6.4 The purchaser might want to consider a second “battery on” pilot required. light on the outside of the apparatus to warn that the batteries are on when the apparatus is parked in the fire station. See Figure A.13.8.13(a) and Figure A.13.8.13(b) for sample illustrations of an optical warning system on a large fire apparatus. A.13.4.7 Sequential switching devices are sometimes used to minimize the load placed on the electrical system during apparatus start-up for an emergency response. Figure A.13.8.13(a) Sample Illustration Showing the Front and Left Sides of an Apparatus Using an Optical Warning System. A.13.7 SAE J551/2, Test Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio [Existing Figure A-11-8.12.3(a), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] Disturbance Characteristics of Vehicles, Motorboats, and Spark-Ignited Engine-Driven Devices, provides test procedures and recommended levels Figure A.13.8.13(b) Sample Illustration Showing the Rear and Right to assist engineers in the control of broadband electromagnetic radiation Sides of an Apparatus Using an Optical Warning System. and in the control of radio interference resulting from equipment installed [Existing Figure A-11-8.12.3(b), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] on the apparatus. Adherence to the recommended levels will minimize the degradation effects of potential interference sources on fireground communication equipment or other devices susceptible to electromagnetic A.13.8.13.5 The zone totals reflect the combined performance of the interference. individual optical warning devices oriented as intended on the apparatus when viewed along the perimeter of a circle of 100 ft (30.5 m) radius from the geometric center of the apparatus.

951 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA The zone total is the sum of the optical power of all optical sources suspension-style seat in this duty profile provides a smoother ride and projecting signals of permissible color into the zone as measured at 5-degree reduces fatigue from long hours in the seats. In contrast, the operator of a increments along the horizontal plane passing through the optical center fire apparatus is typically making short runs with fast acceleration, quick H throughout the 90 degrees included in the zone (19 data points). The maneuvers, and sudden braking. The bouncing motion of the suspension seat calculation of zone totals assumes that all optical sources are mounted at the could hinder the driver’s ability to maintain precise control of the throttle, geometric center of the apparatus. With the optical center of each optical brake, steering wheel, and other driving controls. source oriented as installed, the optical power contributed by every optical source at a given point is taken from the test report and added together to Selection of seating options should be made with consideration to the determine the total optical power at that point. The zone total is the sum of frequency of time that the driver will spend in the vehicle each day, and the optical power at the 19 measurement points in the zone. The upper- and whether the department SOP requires or encourages the occupant of the seat lower-level optical sources are calculated independently. to be equipped with head gear during travel. The use of headgear reduces headroom and increases the chance of injury should the vehicle encounter The engineering basis of this section permits both the design and unexpected road undulation or speed bumps. The effect of such road certification of an optical warning system by mathematical combination conditions during high-speed operation might be intensified by the action of of the individual test reports for any number of optical warning devices of a seat suspension. Potential for injury is greatly increased by failure to use different color, flash rate, optical source, and manufacturer. or properly adjust the seat belt. Using the test reports provided by the device manufacturer, the contribution Proper seat adjustment is another issue that should be addressed by the fire of optical energy from each optical source is determined for every data department SOPs if apparatus are equipped with suspension seats. Too much point. The total candela-seconds/minute of optical energy is determined at pressure in a suspension seat air bag will reduce static headroom height each point and then the zone totals are calculated and compared to Table and will negate the potential benefits of the suspension. Too little pressure 13.8.13.5. will cause the seat to bounce excessively. The proper amount of pressure is dependent on the weight of the occupant. Departments where multiple A.13.8.14 The minimum optical warning system should require no more drivers share an apparatus must consider that adjustments should be made than an average of 35 amps for the operation of the devices in the blocking between each shift. Seat adjustment should not be postponed until the driver mode. is exiting the station on the way to a call. A.13.8.16 In a few cases, a manufacturer might wish to type certify by The H-point is the mechanically hinged hip point of the torso and thigh on actual measurement of the optical warning system on an apparatus. the devices used in defining and measuring vehicle seating accommodation in SAE J826, Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Certification of the actual measurement of the performance of the optical Accommodation warning system is made with each optical source either mounted on the . It is an imaginary point located in two-dimensional space apparatus or on a frame duplicating the mounting of the device on the above the seat cushion. The H-point is measured using a tool that simulates apparatus. The performance of the system can be directly measured along a human hips and torso of a specific size and weight. The H-point will the perimeter of a circle with a 100-ft (30.5-m) radius about the geometric vary with the size, shape, and material of the seat back, seat frame, and center of the apparatus. Each optical warning device used should be certified seat cushion. If H-point data is not available, it can be approximated by by its manufacturer as conforming to all of the requirements of this standard measuring 5 in. (130 mm) ahead of the seat back and 3 in. (75 mm) up from pertaining to mechanical and environmental testing. Photometric testing of the non-depressed seat cushion surface. the system should be performed by qualified personnel in a laboratory for A.14.1.9.1 SCBA units and other equipment stored in the crew compartment such optical measurements. can cause injuries to occupants of the compartment if they fly around the The test voltages and other details should be as called for in this standard compartment as the result of an accident or other impact. for the photometric testing of individual optical warning devices. The A.14.1.13.1 If the purchaser does not specify seating for personnel in an elevation of the photometer, however, could be set at the elevation that enclosed body area, a secondary means of escape is not required. If the maximizes the performance of the upper-level devices and at a second purchaser “might” install such seating in the future, then it is recommended different elevation that maximizes the performance of the lower-level that the secondary escape provisions be provided when apparatus is devices. purchased. With the optical center of each device oriented as installed, the sum of the A.14.3 The purchaser should consider specifying remote controls on the actual value of the optical power contributed by every optical source is then mirrors to facilitate correct mirror adjustment. Where necessary, heated determined at each measurement point. The zone total is the sum of the mirrors should also be considered. optical power at the 19 measurement points in the zone. A.14.3.1 With the requirements for fully enclosed driving and crew Measurements are made to determine all of the optical requirements of this compartments, the potential for heat buildup in these areas is greater. The standard including the optical power at each of the required measurement purchaser should be aware of this condition and might wish to specify points, the zone totals at the horizontal plane passing through the optical ventilation fans or air conditioning to keep the ambient temperature in the center, and the zone totals at 5 degrees above and below the horizontal driving and crew compartment(s) lower. plane passing through the optical center. Any upper-level warning devices mounted above the maximum height specified by the manufacturer(s) should A.14.3.3 The purchaser should realize that local conditions or operating be tested to demonstrate that at 4 ft (1.2 m) above level ground and 100 ft procedures could cause the passenger to project into the sight pattern of the (30.5 m) from the mounted device, the optical energy exceeds 50 percent of driver and therefore cause vision obstructions. Seats should be arranged the minimum required at the horizontal plane passing through the optical so that SCBA and any passengers wearing protective clothing do not cause center. vision obstructions. Movement of the passenger should be considered when installing radios, computers, and other equipment so that forward movement A.13.9.1.2 If the purchaser wishes to have the siren controls within or shifting is reduced to a minimum and does not block the driver’s vision. convenient reachDRAFT of persons riding in both the right and left front seat positions, they should specify that. In some apparatus, multiple control A.14.4.3 In many areas, the overall height of the vehicle needs to be switches might be necessary to achieve convenient reach from the two restricted in order to clear bridges, station doors, and so forth. The tiller positions. If other signal devices, such as an additional siren, bell, air operator’s compartment roof is normally the highest point on the vehicle. horn(s), or buzzer are desired, the type of device and its control location Careful consideration should be given to the packaging of the tiller body in should also be specified. deciding ground ladder and body compartmentation design to achieve the required seat head height. A.13.11.2 Manually operated floodlights on telescoping poles are not required to be tied into the hazard light in the driving compartment. If the A.15.1.1 Compartmentation that is sized to meet the size, shape, and weight purchaser wishes that these devices be tied into the hazard light or otherwise requirements of special equipment might be required. Any special equipment equipped with an indicator to warn the operator the floodlights are in the up to be carried on the apparatus should be identified in the specifications so position, they should specify that in their purchase specification. that the apparatus manufacturer can ensure the equipment will be properly accommodated within the design of the apparatus. A.13.14.1 The purchaser might desire to have the entire low-voltage electrical system and warning device system certified by an independent A.15.2 The purchaser needs to provide the apparatus manufacturer with the third-party certification organization. details of and any special needs for communication equipment such as radio size, power consumption, and location(s) for communication equipment. A.14.1.3 The purchaser will need to define how many seating positions are required to carry personnel and might wish to specify the arrangement of the A.15.3.1 Fire fighter injuries resulting from climbing on apparatus to seating positions. Canopy cab extensions with patio door-type closures or retrieve, store, and operate equipment can be minimized if specifications separate telephone booth-type personnel enclosures are acceptable means for require that equipment be accessible from ground level. Examples of ways providing fully enclosed seating positions. to reduce the need to climb on the apparatus include, but are not limited to, using powered equipment racks, using remote control deck guns, lowering A.14.1.7.1 Suspension-style seats have been developed for long-haul of storage areas for preconnected attack lines and using pull-out trays, using truck operations where the operator is driving for many hours at a time. slide-out or pull-down storage trays, and providing for the checking of fluid Acceleration and braking is controlled, with an eye to fuel economy. The levels from ground level. 952 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.15.3.2 Where equipment other than that originally mounted on the involve personnel rescue that require the receiver and its anchorage to be apparatus is to be carried, the user of the vehicle should ensure that the designed using higher safety factors. equipment is securely attached to the vehicle with appropriate holders. A.15.12.2 If the unit is going to be moved on and off a chassis periodically, A.15.5 SCBA units are typically stored in crew seats, behind bench seats, the purchaser might wish to specify lifting eyes or forklift slots to facilitate and on walls, doors, or shelves of storage compartments. its movement. The area where the complete SCBA unit is to be mounted should be arranged A.16.2.3.2.4 Parallel operation can be referred to as “volume,” and series to prevent damage to hose, straps, belts, facepiece, regulator, and other operation can be referred to as “pressure.” attachments. This should include prevention of wear and tear on the delicate facepiece due to vehicle movement. The facepiece should be stored in a A.16.2.4.1 At an altitude of 2000 ft (600 m), the actual (uncorrected) nylon or plastic bag to prevent such abrasion. atmospheric pressure equivalent to the sea level reading of 29.9 in. Hg (101 kPa) is 27.8 in. Hg (94.1 kPa). Storage of spare hose assemblies, facepieces, regulators, and other SCBA pack accessories should be in a clean and dry area, away from heat- The values given in Table 16.2.4.1(b) and Table 16.2.4.1(c) are representative producing devices or mechanical damage. Preferably, the equipment should values of pressure losses due to flow entrance, velocity, and friction sources be stored individually in plastic or noncorrosive bins with dustfree covers. through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose (including strainer) of the diameter The contents of each bin should be marked with a label on the exterior. indicated. A.15.5.5 SCBA cylinders should always be stored with valve assemblies The basis of the tables on friction loss is tabular data from 1953 testing and atop the cylinder. other accumulated data and testing. In 1976, this data was reviewed and incorporated in Table 16.2.4.1(b). The data does include a velocity head A.15.5.6 SCBA cylinders should be stored with valve assemblies exposed component and the values do account for bending as the actual values were to the compartment opening or storage area to permit inspection of valves or derived from suction hose bent from the suction intake into the test pit. gauges. A.15.6.5 The purchaser should consider specifying additional doors or A.16.2.4.2 Where the community to which the apparatus is to be delivered removable panels for service, maintenance, or replacement of components in is at a considerably higher altitude than the factory or other test location, the fire pump installation. sufficient excess power should be provided to compensate for the fact that the power of a naturally aspirated internal combustion engine decreases with A.15.7.1 Ascending into and descending from certain types of driving and elevation above sea level. The performance of a fire pump can be adversely crew compartments is ergonomically difficult and has resulted in falls and affected by the design of the suction piping or the addition of valves to the subsequent fire fighter injuries. When designing and specifying apparatus, it suction side of the pump. Losses due to additional piping or valves that are is strongly suggested that chassis and apparatus manufacturers be consulted added to the fire pump suction can be calculated and used to determine pump concerning available alternatives in order to make driving and crew performance. compartment access as ergonomically convenient and as safe as possible. A.15.7.1.2 The intent of step size and placement requirements is to ensure A.16.3.4 A separate pumping engine could use the vehicle chassis battery that the fire fighter’s foot will be supported 7 in. to 8 in. (175 mm to 200 system, or it could have a separate set of dedicated batteries. Battery mm) from the toe when the foot is placed on the step in the normal climbing charging and electrical supply should be designed to meet this standard, position. The leading edge is not necessarily the side opposite the fastening whichever system is used. location. A.16.4.3 Each component in the driveline has a continuous duty torque A.15.7.3 Apparatus are constructed with surface areas that are not intended rating. At this level of usage, each component also has a design life expressed to be used as stepping, standing, and walking areas. These include cosmetic as hours of use at rated torque. The design life of some components can and protective coverings on horizontal surfaces. During the design stage of be substantially less than the remaining drive system components. An the vehicle, purchasers should designate which areas are stepping, standing, hourmeter activated by the pumping system and marked with a label should or walking areas. It is important that proper materials are selected for the be provided to log the number of hours of drive system usage. application and local conditions. A.16.5.1 Pumps and piping frequently required to pump salt water, water When selecting stepping, standing, and walking surfaces, the purchaser with additives, or other corrosive waters should be made of bronze or other should take into consideration the long-term use of the vehicle. The slip corrosion-resistant materials. For occasional pumping of such water, pumps resistance of certain surfaces might deteriorate over time. It is also important made of other materials are satisfactory if properly flushed out with fresh for the user to properly maintain or replace slip-resistant materials as they water after such use. Where corrosive water is being pumped and the pump deteriorate over time. and piping are not made of corrosion-resistant materials, the placement of anodes in the pump might minimize the corrosive effects. A.15.8.4 Handrails should be mounted in a way to minimize the chances of damage or removal from brushing by objects such as trees. The term “all bronze” indicates that the pump’s main casing, impeller, intake and discharge manifolds, and other principal components that are exposed to A.15.9.2 Corrosion protection, commonly known as undercoating, might the water to be pumped, with the exception of the shaft bearings and seals, be advantageous in areas where climatic conditions or road treatment will are made of a high-copper alloy material. It is preferable to use similar corrode vehicle components. The material, its application method, and materials for the pump and piping. the areas to be protected should be carefully specified so the corrosion protection will adequately protect the vehicle’s cab and body sheet metal Corrosion effects are proportional to the mass relationship of bronze to iron. components subject to corrosive conditions that could be encountered in the It is, therefore, preferable to use similar materials for the pump and piping. user’s area. Where both iron and bronze are used, it is preferable to keep the mass of the DRAFTiron larger than that of the bronze. A.15.9.2.3 The purchaser should give consideration to the choice of paint color(s) as it relates to the total vehicle conspicuousness. A.16.6.1 Intakes can be larger than the size of the suction hose specified in Table 16.2.4.1(a). It is also advantageous to have valves on one or more of the A.15.10 Apparatus provided with booster hose and reel assemblies should intakes. The purchaser should specify if larger intakes are to be provided and have power rewind capability. However, if a manual rewind is provided, if any of the intakes are to be equipped with valves. attention should be paid to the location of the hand crank. It should be placed in a location that allows the operator to rewind the hose onto the reel without Intakes at the front or rear of the apparatus, or otherwise specially situated, having to climb onto the apparatus. might not allow drafting rated capacity at rated pressure. The purchaser should specify the flow rates required from auxiliary intakes, especially If the apparatus is to be used or stored in subfreezing conditions, the reel front and rear intakes or other intakes located 10 ft (3 m) or more away from should be equipped with an air chuck mechanism to allow connection of an the pump. When provided, the purchaser should also consider requiring the external source of compressed air to facilitate removal of water within the manufacturer to certify the actual flow rates from auxiliary intakes. booster hose assembly. This mechanism should be located on the discharge side of the booster reel valve. A.16.6.1.3 Pressurizing a valved suction inlet could create a dynamic water hammer that might cause a hose or fitting failure resulting in injury or death A.15.10.1 The purchaser should specify whether a single or split hose bed is to anyone in the immediate vicinity. Valves should be opened and closed desired, and any special arrangements desired for preconnected hose lines. slowly. A.15.10.3 It is also recommended that the purchaser consider specifying A.16.6.2.2 Sizing of the openings of the strainer(s) is intended for debris some type of cover for the hose compartment. Hinged or removable covers of generally uniform dimensions. It is recognized that debris of nonuniform might be advantageous. dimensions — that is, long in relation to cross section — might be able to pass through the strainer(s) while not being able to pass through the pump. A.15.11 Trailer hitch type receivers are commonly used as anchor points for both removable winches and rope operations. Removable winches are A.16.6.5 The bleeder valve should be used prior to the removal of a hose or intended for equipment recovery operations only. Rope operations could a cap or other closure connected to an intake. The bleeder valve should also 953 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA be used while filling a hose connected to an intake with water. Failure to use A.16.10.3.1 Completion of the pump shift might require that the chassis the bleeder valve in these situations might result in serious injury or death. transmission be shifted into pump gear. A.16.7.1 The flows listed for each outlet size are minimum and are for rating A.16.10.13 The purpose of a pressure control system is to control the purposes only. If piping and valving are sufficient, much higher flows for a discharge pressures in order to protect fire fighters who are operating hose given outlet size might be achievable. streams as well as to protect discharge hose from damage in the event attack hose streams are shut off or other valves are closed, reducing flow rates. A.16.7.2.2 In order to provide standardization, National Hose threads are required. Adapters can then be used to adapt to locally used hose The system could consist of a discharge relief valve, a pressure regulator that connections. controls the speed of the pump, an intake relief valve, or any combination of these devices. Pressure control systems will relieve excess pressure when A.16.7.3 If flows greater than 200 gpm (750 L/min) through preconnected valves are closed in a normal manner, but some water hammer conditions lines are needed, piping from the pump to preconnected hose lines should could occur due to valves being closed so quickly that the system cannot be larger than 2 in. (52 mm) in order to keep the friction loss to a reasonable respond fast enough to eliminate damage to equipment. Proper fireground level. If additional preconnected lines are wanted, the location and hose size procedures are still required. should be specified. A.16.10.13.1 Pressure control systems can be supplied in the following A.16.7.5.2 Control of discharges on apparatus are now available in pull-type forms: actuators, trunnion or swing valves, cable control, gear-operated hand wheel control, and hydraulic, air, and electric operators. These are available with (1) Integral with the pump and supplied by the pump manufacturer either quick-operating and slow-operating valve mechanisms. The nozzle and hose reaction and “operational effort” for high-flow or high-pressure (2) As an external system of components supplied by the apparatus discharges are critically important to many fire departments. Due to the manufacturer variations in type of individuals or characteristics of operators involved with pump operations, a purchaser should carefully evaluate valve controls. (3) As an external control system provided by a pressure control Slow-closing gear operated and other power-operated valves should be manufacturer considered for valves 3-in. (75-mm) and larger. Pressure governors control the engine speed, which relates directly to the net A.16.7.9 Where possible, discharge outlets should be positioned in an area pump pressure; if the speed is raised, the pressure goes up; if the speed is away from the pump operator’s position. lowered, the pressure goes down. Discharge relief valves control pressure by passing water from the discharge A.16.9.1 Ideally, having no intake or discharge connections at the operator’s side of the pump back into the intake side of the pump. This type of system position would simplify and improve safety for the operator. If complete works in a pressure differential of approximately 70 psi to 90 psi (50 kPa to removal of these connections is impractical, the reduction and careful 60 kPa) between the intake and discharge sides of the pump. If the pressure placement of these connections, with operator safety in mind, would improve differential relief valve is not present, the discharge relief valve might not the situation considerably. control a pressure rise completely. Many fire departments have found it useful to color code the labels used to identify the various discharge and intake controls. While this process can If either a discharge relief valve or a pressure governor are used with high simplify pump operations, it can also create confusion if a pattern is not incoming inlet pressures, an intake relief valve or total control system must followed on all apparatus in the department. For standardization, the color be added. coding scheme in Table A.16.9.1 is recommended for all new apparatus In the case where an intake relief valve is selected, it must be of sufficient labels, as applicable. size and response time to handle the pump performance range. It must also be easily controlled by the pump operator so that this incoming pressure can Table A.16.9.1 Color Scheme for Labels on Discharge and Intake be adjusted for each incident. For best results, the operator should set the Controls intake relief valve to operate at 90 psi (60 kPa) below the desired discharge operating pressure. Preconnect #1 or front bumper jump line Orange* The pressure control system should be certified by the appropriate Preconnect #2 Red* manufacturer or an independent third-party certification organization. Due to the importance of these systems, the purchaser might wish to have Preconnect #3 or discharge #1 Yellow* performance tests conducted on the installed system. Preconnect #4 or discharge #2 White* A.16.10.14 Departments that need to attain a draft while conducting operations off tank water will find that adding a primer selector valve or Discharge #3 Blue second priming control valve to allow attaining a draft on the outboard side Discharge #4 Black of the gated pump suction valve will eliminate the danger of cavitation while supplying attack lines. A vacuum line is run to the outboard side of the valve Discharge #5 Green and connected through a selector valve to the primer. Side, front, and rear selector settings can be arranged to allow priming off any side of the unit Deluge/deck gun Silver with one primer. Water tower Purple A.16.11.1 The electronic throttle control systems that are currently available will provide greater flexibility for the operator because they can be set like a Large-diameterDRAFT hose Yellow with white border traditional throttle or a pressure governor. Foam line(s) Red with white border A.16.12.1.1 A pumping engine fuel level indicator or red warning light 1 indicating when the fuel level falls below /4 of the capacity of the tank(s) Booster reel(s) Gray should be provided on the pump operator’s panel. Inlets Burgundy A.16.12.3.2 The rated operating pressure of large-diameter supply hose

* is substantially less than that of attack fire hose. Therefore, an individual Since the vast majority of fires are extinguished using preconnected lines, a pressure gauge is required to allow the operator to control the discharge fire department should give consideration to matching the hose jacket color to pressure even where a flowmeter is provided. the color of these labels. Fire departments using this system have reported that A.16.13.1.2.3 The purchaser might wish to have an independent third-party an improvement in fireground operations was achieved. certification organization certify the test results, particularly where the pump is required to meet extended continuous duty pumping applications.

A.16.10 The indicator lights and interlocks specified in this section are A.16.13.2.1.2 Where tests are performed inside a structure or elsewhere that minimum. Some manufacturers or users might choose to add additional has limited air circulation, carbon monoxide monitoring equipment should indicator lights or interlocks. be used. Such equipment should be checked and calibrated regularly and should include a suitable warning device. A.16.10.1.2 Pumps are operated from the side, top, front, or rear of the vehicle, and stationary pumping requires that there is no power applied to A.16.13.2.2.6 If a counter speed shaft is not provided, the engine speed can the wheels while pumping. Therefore, it is essential that any controls that be read with a photo-tach or strobe light off a rotating element. could apply power to the wheels while pumping be equipped with a means to A.16.13.2.3.1 Annex A of NFPA 1911, Standard for Service Tests of Fire prevent dislocation of the control from its set position in the pumping mode. Pump Systems on Fire Apparatus, shows a test data form for recording the A.16.10.2.1 Completion of the pump shift might require that the chassis test readings and other necessary data. transmission be shifted into pump gear. 954 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.16.13.2.3.2 Where an engine is operating at or near full power while that will not trap water, causing serious damage if the water is subsequently stationary, the heat generated could raise the temperature of certain chassis frozen. or pumping system components above the level that, when touched, can cause extreme discomfort or injury; however, as long as the apparatus can be A.17.5.1 The purchaser should indicate the number, size, and location of the operated and used satisfactorily for the required duration of the test under pump intake connections or combination of connections desired. The types such conditions, it should be considered acceptable. of pump intake connections are as follows: The suction lift can be determined by either measuring the negative pressure (1) External intake (vacuum) in the pump intake manifold by means of a manometer, or other suitable test gauge that measures vacuum accurately, or by adding the (2) Direct supply line from the water tank vertical lift and the value of friction and entrance loss from Table 16.2.4.1(b) (3) Supply line from the discharge side of the fire pump or Table 16.2.4.1(c). To be accurate, gauge readings should be corrected for the difference between the height of the gauge and the centerline of the pump A.17.6 The purchaser should indicate the size, number, and location of intake, but usually this is not a significant amount and could be ignored. the pump discharge connections desired. The types of pump discharge Thus, the net pump pressure can be calculated by using the following connections are as follows: formula: (1) Discharge line(s) for nonpreconnected hose lines Inch-pound units: (2) Discharge line(s) to preconnected hose lines P = D + (H × 0.5) (3) Discharge line(s) to booster reel(s) (if provided) or P = D + 0.43 (L + F) A.17.6.3.1 In order to provide standardization, National Hose threads are required. Adapters can then be used to adapt to locally used hose Where: connections. P = net pump pressure (psi) A.17.9.4 A separate pumping engine could use the vehicle chassis battery system, or it could have a separate set of dedicated batteries. Battery D = discharge pressure (psi gauge) charging and electrical supply should be designed to meet this standard, whichever system is used. H = manometer reading (in. Hg) A.18.2.3 This pump and its ratings are designed for high-flow applications, L = vertical lift (ft) primarily from hydrants, required for large industrial or refinery fires. These F = friction and entrance loss (ft of water) pumps are not designed for all the applications that a fire pump is designed to meet. These pumps might not be ideally suited for low flow, on and off operations, or prolonged standby periods. Metric units: A.18.2.4.1 At an altitude of 2000 ft (600 m), the actual (uncorrected) atmospheric pressure equivalent to the sea level reading of 29.9 in. Hg (101 Pm = Dm + Hm kPa) is 27.8 in. Hg (941 kPa). or P = D + F + 9.8 L The values given in Table 18.2.4.1(b) and Table 18.2.4.1(c) are representative m m m m values of pressure losses due to flow entrance, velocity, and friction sources Where: through 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose (including strainer) of the diameter indicated. Pm = net pump pressure (kPa) The basis of the tables on friction loss is tabular data from 1953 testing and D = discharge pressure (kPa ) m other accumulated data and testing. The data does include a velocity head H = manometer reading (kPa) component and the values do account for bending as the actual values were m derived from suction hose bent from the suction intake into the test pit. L = vertical lift (meter) m A.18.2.4.2 Where the community to which the apparatus is to be delivered F = friction and entrance loss (kPa) is at a considerably higher altitude than the manufacturer’s facility or other m test location, sufficient excess power should be provided to compensate for the fact that the power of a naturally aspirated internal combustion engine decreases with elevation above sea level. The performance of a fire pump A.16.13.8 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being can be adversely affected by the design of the suction piping or the addition certified by an independent third-party certification organization, the of valves to the suction side of the pump. Losses due to additional piping or purchaser might wish to specify that these tests also be certified by the valves that are added to the fire pump suction can be calculated and used to independent third-party certification organization. determine pump performance. A.17.1 Auxiliary pumps come in a variety of different styles; gear, piston, A.18.3.3 A separate pumping engine could use the vehicle chassis battery and centrifugal designs are available. Where centrifugal designs are system, or it could have a separate set of dedicated batteries. Battery specified, the purchaser also has to select if it is to be a single stage, series charging and electrical supply should be designed to meet this standard, only multistage, or series/parallel multistage-type pump. whichever system is used. The purchaser DRAFTshould indicate the type of operation and performance A.18.4.3 Each component in the driveline has a continuous duty torque required from the auxiliary pump. Auxiliary pumps are predominantly for rating. At this level of usage, each component also has a design life expressed fighting grass fires or other small blazes. Low capacity with high pressure as hours of use at rated torque. The design life of some components can through 3/4-in. (19-mm) or 1-in. (25-mm) booster hose is commonly used be substantially less than the remaining drive system components. An for these fires. Pump and roll is often required. hourmeter activated by the pumping system and marked with a label should A.17.3 Various types of pump drive systems are available. These pumps are be provided to log the number of hours of drive system usage. often driven by power takeoff units attached to SAE PTO openings on the A.18.5.1 Pumps and piping frequently required to pump salt water, water chassis transmission. There are also front of engine PTO systems, flywheel with additives, or other corrosive waters should be made of bronze or other PTO systems, split driveline PTO systems, and separate engine drive corrosion-resistant materials. For occasional pumping of such water, pumps systems. made of other materials are satisfactory if properly flushed out with fresh A.17.3.1 The volume and pressure that can be obtained safely depends on water after such use. Where corrosive water is being pumped and the pump the torque capacity of the apparatus’s transmission or transfer case, power and piping are not made of corrosion-resistant materials, the placement of takeoff, and pump driveline. In most cases, the torque rating of the PTO will anodes in the pump might minimize the corrosive effects. determine the maximum pump performance. Power takeoff manufacturers The term “all bronze” indicates that the pump’s main casing, impeller, intake assign a torque rating to their products. This torque rating is based on and discharge manifolds, and other principal components that are exposed to intermittent service, as in operating the PTO at the full torque limit for a the water to be pumped, with the exception of the shaft bearings and seals, period of 5 minutes or less. For continuous duty, the intermittent torque are made of a high-copper alloy material. It is preferable to use similar rating is devalued 30 percent. materials for the pump and piping. A.17.3.2 Sustained operations at either high volume, high pressure, or Corrosion effects are proportional to the mass relationship of bronze to iron. both high volume and high pressure could cause excessive heating of the It is, therefore, preferable to use similar materials for the pump and piping. transmission lubricant. In order to maintain lubricant temperatures below the Where both iron and bronze are used, it is preferable to keep the mass of the component manufacturer’s published limits, it might be necessary to employ iron larger than that of the bronze. oil-to-oil or oil-to-water heat exchangers. The latter should be of a type 955 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.18.6.1 Intakes can be larger than the size of the suction hose specified in Table 18.2.4.1(a). It is also advantageous to have valves on one or more of the Table A.18.9.1 Color Scheme for Labels on Discharge and Intake intakes. The purchaser should specify if larger intakes are to be provided and Controls if any of the intakes are to be equipped with valves. Discharge Label Color Intakes at the front or rear of the apparatus, or otherwise specially situated, might not allow drafting rated capacity at rated pressure. The purchaser Preconnect #1 or front bumper jump line Orange* should specify the flow rates required from auxiliary intakes, especially Preconnect #2 Red* front and rear intakes or other intakes located 10 ft (3 m) or more away from the pump. When provided, the purchaser should also consider requiring the Preconnect #3 or discharge #1 Yellow* manufacturer to certify the actual flow rates from auxiliary intakes. Preconnect #4 or discharge #2 White* A.18.6.1.3 Pressurizing a valved suction inlet could create a dynamic water hammer that might cause a hose or fitting failure resulting in injury or death Discharge #3 Blue to anyone in the immediate vicinity. Valves should be opened and closed slowly. Discharge #4 Black A.18.6.2.2 Sizing of the openings of the strainer(s) is intended for debris Discharge #5 Green of generally uniform dimensions. It is recognized that debris of nonuniform Deluge/deck gun Silver dimensions — that is, long in relation to cross section — might be able to pass through the strainer(s) while not being able to pass through the pump. Water tower Purple A.18.6.5 The bleeder valve should be used prior to the removal of a hose or Large-diameter hose Yellow with white border a cap or other closure connected to an intake. The bleeder valve should also be used while filling a hose connected to an intake with water. Failure to use Foam line(s) Red with white border the bleeder valve in these situations might result in serious injury or death. Booster reel(s) Gray A.18.7.1 The flows listed for each outlet size are minimum and are for rating purposes only. If piping and valving are sufficient, much higher flows for a Inlets Burgundy given outlet size might be achievable. * Since the vast majority of fires are extinguished using preconnected A.18.7.2 In order to provide standardization, National Hose threads lines, a fire department should give consideration to matching the hose are required. Adapters can then be used to adapt to locally used hose jacket color to the color of these labels. Fire departments using this connections. system have reported that an improvement in fireground operations was A.18.7.3 If flows greater than 200 gpm (750 L/min) through preconnected achieved. lines are needed, piping from the pump to preconnected hose lines should be larger than 2 in. (52 mm) in order to keep the friction loss to a reasonable level. If additional preconnected lines are wanted, the location and hose size A.18.10.13 The purpose of a pressure control system is to control the should be specified. discharge pressures in order to protect fire fighters who are operating hose streams as well as to protect discharge hose from damage in the event attack A.18.7.5.2 Control of discharges on apparatus are now available in pull-type hose streams are shut off or other valves are closed, reducing flow rates. actuators, trunnion or swing valves, cable control, gear-operated hand wheel control, and hydraulic, air, and electric operators. These are available with The system could consist of a discharge relief valve, a pressure regulator that either quick-operating and slow-operating valve mechanisms. The nozzle controls the speed of the pump, an intake relief valve, or any combination and hose reaction and “operational effort” for high-flow or high-pressure of these devices. Pressure control systems will relieve excess pressure when discharges are critically important to many fire departments. Due to the valves are closed in a normal manner, but some water hammer conditions variations in type of individuals or characteristics of operators involved could occur due to valves being closed so quickly that the system cannot with pump operations, a purchaser should carefully evaluate valve controls. respond fast enough to eliminate damage to equipment. Proper fireground Slow-closing gear operated and other power-operated valves should be procedures are still required. considered for valves 3-in. (75-mm) and larger. A.18.10.13.1 Pressure control systems can be supplied in the following A.18.7.9 Where possible, discharge outlets should be positioned in an area forms: away from the pump operator’s position. (1) Integral with the pump and supplied by the pump manufacturer A.18.9.1 Ideally, having no intake or discharge connections at the operator’s position would simplify and improve safety for the operator. If complete (2) As an external system of components supplied by the apparatus removal of these connections is impractical, the reduction and careful manufacturer placement of these connections, with operator safety in mind, would improve (3) As an external control system provided by a pressure control the situation considerably. manufacturer Many fire departments have found it useful to color code the labels used to Pressure governors control the engine speed, which relates directly to the net identify the various discharge and intake controls. While this process can pump pressure; if the speed is raised, the pressure goes up; if the speed is simplify pump operations, it can also create confusion if a pattern is not lowered, the pressure goes down. followed on all apparatus in the department. For standardization, the color coding scheme in Table A.18.9.1 is recommended for all new apparatus Discharge relief valves control pressure by passing water from the discharge labels, as applicable.DRAFT side of the pump back into the intake side of the pump. This type of system works in a pressure differential of approximately 70 psi to 90 psi (50 kPa to A.18.10 The indicator lights and interlocks specified in this section are 60 kPa) between the intake and discharge sides of the pump. If the pressure minimum. Some manufacturers or users might choose to add additional differential relief valve is not present, the discharge relief valve might not indicator lights or interlocks. control a pressure rise completely. A.18.10.1.2 Pumps are operated from the side, top, front, or rear of the If either a discharge relief valve or a pressure governor are used with high vehicle, and stationary pumping requires that there is no power applied to incoming inlet pressures, an intake relief valve or total control system must the wheels while pumping. Therefore, it is essential that any controls that be added. could apply power to the wheels while pumping be equipped with a means to prevent dislocation of the control from its set position in the pumping mode. In the case where an intake relief valve is selected, it must be of sufficient size and response time to handle the pump performance range. It must also A.18.10.2.1 Completion of the pump shift might require that the chassis be easily controlled by the pump operator so that this incoming pressure can transmission be shifted into pump gear. be adjusted for each incident. For best results, the operator should set the A.18.10.3.1 Completion of the pump shift might require that the chassis intake relief valve to operate at 90 psi (60 kPa) below the desired discharge transmission be shifted into pump gear. operating pressure. The pressure control system should be certified by the appropriate manufacturer or an independent third-party certification organization that is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Due to the importance of these systems, the purchaser might wish to have performance tests conducted on the installed system.

956 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.18.10.14 Departments that need to attain a draft while conducting When the tanks are made as one unit with the body and compartments, the operations off tank water will find that adding a primer selector valve or material used is important. It should be corrosionproof and a material that second priming control valve to allow attaining a draft on the outboard side does not easily sweat. of the gated pump suction valve will eliminate the danger of cavitation while supplying attack lines. A vacuum line is run to the outboard side of the valve A.19.2.5 The design of a water tank can be a very critical factor in the and connected through a selector valve to the primer. Side, front, and rear handling characteristics of fire apparatus. If water is free to travel either selector settings can be arranged to allow priming off any side of the unit longitudinally or laterally in a tank, as would be the case if the tank were with one primer. half full, a tremendous amount of inertia can be built up that will tend to force the fire apparatus in the direction the water has been traveling. When A.18.11.1 The electronic throttle control systems that are currently available the water reaches the end of the tank, this sudden application of force can will provide greater flexibility for the operator because they can be set like a throw the fire apparatus out of control and has been known to cause fire traditional throttle or a pressure governor. apparatus to turn over or skid when going around a curve or coming to a sudden stop. The only methods for preventing such an accident are to A.18.12.1.1 A pumping engine fuel level indicator or red warning light restrict or disrupt the movement of the water so that the inertia will not build 1 indicating when the fuel level falls below /4 of the capacity of the tank(s) up in one direction. This is done with the installation of swash partitions should be provided on the pump operator’s panel. in a manner to either contain the water in smaller spaces within the tank (containment method) or disrupt its momentum by changing its direction of A.18.12.3.2 The rated operating pressure of large diameter supply hose motion (dynamic method). The partitions in a containment system create is substantially less than that of attack fire hose. Therefore, an individual compartments that are interconnected by openings between them so that air pressure gauge is required to allow the operator to control the discharge and water can flow at the specified rate when filling and emptying the tank. pressure even where a flowmeter is provided. The partitions in a dynamic A.18.13.2.1.2 Where tests are performed inside a structure or elsewhere that system are often staggered in an arrangement designed to change the has limited air circulation, carbon monoxide monitoring equipment should direction of the water and turn it into a turbulent motion that absorbs much be used. Such equipment should be checked and calibrated regularly and of its own energy. should include a suitable warning device. A.19.3.3 A check valve installed in the tank to pump line is the most A.18.13.2.2.6 If a counter speed shaft is not provided, the engine speed can common method used to prevent water from backflowing into the tank at an be read with a photo-tach or strobe light off a rotating element. excessive rate if the pump is being supplied from a hydrant or relay pumper and the tank to pump line valve has been inadvertently left in the open A.18.13.2.3.1 Annex A of NFPA 1911, Standard for Service Tests of Fire position. Pump Systems on Fire Apparatus, shows a test data form for recording the 1 test readings and other necessary data. A hole up to /4 in. (6 mm) is sometimes provided in the check valve to release steam or other pressure buildup. A.18.13.2.3.2 Where an engine is operating at or near full power while stationary, the heat generated could raise the temperature of certain chassis A.19.4.1 Where rapid filling of the water tank from an external use is or pumping system components above the level that, when touched, can desired, the purchaser should consider an inlet directly into the qtank that cause extreme discomfort or injury; however, as long as the apparatus can be is capable of allowing the tank to be filled at a rate of 1000 gpm (4000 operated and used satisfactorily for the required duration of the test under L/min). Where such a fill connection is provided, it should conform to the such conditions, it should be considered acceptable. requirements of 19.4.4. The suction lift can be determined by either measuring the negative pressure A.19.4.1.4 An excessive flow rate when filling a tank could result in a (vacuum) in the pump intake manifold by means of a manometer, or other pressure buildup in the tank that could cause permanent damage or failure. suitable test gauge that measures vacuum accurately, or by adding the vertical lift and the value of friction and entrance loss from Table 18.2.4.1(b) A.19.4.2.2 A vent/overflow outlet is necessary so that overpressurization or Table 18.2.4.1(c). To be accurate, gauge readings should be corrected for does not occur within the tank while it is being filled. However, water is the difference between the height of the gauge and the centerline of the pump likely to spill out of the vent/overflow while the fire apparatus is moving intake, but usually this is not a significant amount and could be ignored. (e.g., accelerating, decelerating, or cornering). The fill tower and vent/ Thus, the net pump pressure can be calculated by using the following overflow outlet should be arranged so that water spillage is minimized and is formula: directed behind the rear tires. A.19.4.3 Consideration should be given to providing an additional pump Inch-pound units Metric units cooling/recirculation line that is automatic in operation, as pumps on fire apparatus are often left unattended and a line that is automatic in operation will ensure the pump does not overheat. P = D + (H × 0.5) Pm = Dm + Hm or or A.19.4.3.1 If a larger fill line is desired, the buyer should consult with the P = D + 0.43 (L + F) Pm = Dm + Fm + 9.8 Lm manufacturer on construction of the tank inlet location and any required reinforcement or alternation of the tank baffles. It is necessary to design the Where: Where: tank with venting and overflow capability for the maximum fill rate.

P = net pump pressure (psi) Pm = net pump pressure (kPa) A.19.4.3.2 See A.19.4.3.1. D = discharge pressure (psi gauge) D = discharge pressure (kPa) A.19.4.3.3 A locking-type ball valve, globe valve, needle valve, or other m type capable of regulating flows should be used. A gate valve is not

H = manometer reading (in. Hg) Hm = manometer reading (kPa) recommended. DRAFTA.19.5.1.1 Where large filling rates are used, fill connections should be L = vertical lift (ft) L = vertical lift (meter) m equipped with a diffuser inside the tank to minimize potential structural damage. It is important that the purchaser evaluate how the apparatus will be F = friction and entrance loss (ft Fm = friction and entrance loss of water) (kPa) used and define the location and type of fittings desired on this tank fill. Where rapid filling of the water tank on another type of apparatus from an external use is desired, the purchaser should consider an inlet directly into A.18.13.7 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being the tank that is capable of allowing the tank to be filled at a rate of 1000 gpm certified by an independent third-party certification organization, the (4000 L/min). Where such a fill connection is provided, it should conform to purchaser might wish to specify that these tests also be certified by the the requirements of 19.5.1. independent third-party certification organization. A.19.5.2 It is important that the purchaser evaluate how the apparatus will A.19.2.2 Water tanks should have provisions that would allow for be used and define the location(s) and types of fittings for these outlets. complete inside cleaning for flushing. The purchaser should indicate in the Where rapid dumping of the contents of the water tank to an external use is specifications if access to the interior of the tank is required. desired on other types of apparatus, the purchaser should consider an outlet A.19.2.3 Water tanks can appear in several different configurations such directly into the tank that is capable of allowing water to be transferred from as round, elliptical, rectangular, or T-shaped. Handling characteristics of the tank at an average rate of at least 1000 gpm (4000 L/min). the apparatus can be greatly affected by its vertical and horizontal center of A.19.5.2.2 Additional methods might be desired to improve the off-loading gravity. The purchaser should indicate the filling and dumping rates required rate of gravity dumps. These methods include a jet assist or a pneumatic if these rates exceed the requirements of this standard and any other local pump. Control should be from the pump operator’s position. Two types of jet needs and let the apparatus manufacturer design the tank shape to best meet assists can be used, one directed into the throat of the gravity dump and the the axle loading and center of gravity requirements. other a peripheral jet system. Figure A.19.5.2.2(a) shows how the traditional jet is installed. A smooth-tipped “jet” nozzle is supplied by a pump that is capable of delivering at least 250 gpm (1000 L/min) at a gauge pressure of 957 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

3 1 150 psi (1000 kPa). Nozzle jets range in size from /4 in. to 1 /4 in. (19 mm A.20.6.1 The arrangement of the waterway could be a telescoping pipe to a to 33 mm). The diameter of the tip will be determined by the capacity of the fly section or a nontelescoping pipe to the tip of the base section. pump being used and the diameter of the discharge piping and dump valve. A.20.6.1.3.5 The tip of an aerial ladder should be capable of being The peripheral application of jet assist nozzles has proven highly effective. positioned up to a window or other location to allow fire fighters and This approach utilizes two or more jets installed in the sides of the discharge civilians to climb onto the aerial ladder easily. It might be preferable to keep piping just outside the quick dump valve. In addition to the reported the monitor behind the last rung of the fly section to protect it in the road discharge advantages of peripheral discharge streams, the externally fed position. system is easier to plumb and has fewer maintenance problems. The jets, installed 25 degrees to 30 degrees from the piping wall, contact more surface A.20.6.1.5 The arrangement of the external inlet should be specified by the area of the discharging water, thereby increasing water discharge efficiency. purchaser based on the intended local operation in supplying water to the Because the water is drawn through the dump valve, less turbulence is waterway. created and the eddy effect often present with traditional in-line jets If the normal operations are to supply the waterway through the external is overcome. Nozzles made by welding reducer pipe fittings work very inlet, a valve should be provided where large diameter hose is to be used. A effectively as jets. Flow rates of 2000 gpm (8000 L/min) have been obtained 1 valved three- or four-inlet siamese should be provided when 2 /2-in. or 3-in. using a 300-gpm (1100-L/min) pump to supply two 3/4-in. (19-mm) (65-mm or 75-mm) supply lines are used. Attention should be given to the nozzles in a 6-in. (150-mm) dump valve configuration. Figure A.19.5.2.2(b) inlet arrangement to limit friction loss. Also, if the apparatus is equipped shows a diagram of a peripheral jet assist arrangement. with a fire pump and the purchaser wants to use the auxiliary inlet as a A pneumatic system can be used to pressurize a tank and assist in expelling discharge, a slow-operating valve needs to be installed in the riser to the water. The vacuum pumps can also be used for filling the tank. swivel. A.20.6.1.8 Where freezing conditions are expected, an automatic drain Figure A.19.5.2.2(a) Traditional Internal Jet Dump. valve should be specified in order to drain the waterway when water is not [Existing Figure A-17-5(a), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] flowing. A.20.6.2 If the purchaser wants extra length on the hose, a two- or three- Figure A.19.5.2.2(b) Peripheral Jet Assist Arrangement (top view). inlet siamese, or a shutoff at the base of the ladder, these should be specified. [Existing Figure A-17-5(b), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] The purchaser might also wish to specify a 500-gpm (2000-L/min) minimum spray nozzle.

A.19.6.1 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being certified The size of hose used to supply the ladder pipe has been considered by the by an independent third-party certification organization, the purchaser aerial ladder manufacturer in the design of the ladder. Use of larger size might wish to specify that the water tank capacity also be certified by the hose could overload the ladder with excessive weight and should be avoided independent third-party certification organization. without consulting the aerial ladder manufacturer first. A.20.1 If the purchaser intends to suspend personnel or equipment from The hose should be fastened in a straight line up the middle of the aerial the aerial device using ropes, cables, or chains, the purchaser should inform ladder. Hose straps not only secure the hose in place but take the strain off the manufacturer of the intended use in order to determine proper mounting couplings and fittings that might otherwise fail and cause injury. devices and locations as well as associated capacities. Equipment users have the potential to overload the aerial device components if improper methods Where the purchaser wants pulleys and cables for vertical control of the are used. stream from the turntable, the purchaser should specify these. A.20.2.13 If the fire department expects to engage in operations where they A.20.9.2.1 A two-way communication system at two positions on the will need to supply remote breathing air from the system on the aerial ladder apparatus is considered a minimum. Depending on the configuration of the to fire fighters working away from the end of an aerial ladder, such as during apparatus, the purchaser might want to consider communication systems at a rescue operation in a fuel or chemical tank, coal bin, or silo storage tower, additional positions such as the pump panel. it will be necessary to be able to supply breathing air for at least two persons. A.20.10.1 Position lights on the outer corners of the platform can be helpful A.20.3.4 Ladder capacity ratings are established in many different operating in providing increased visibility of the platform’s location from the ground positions other than full extension and zero degrees elevation. Ladders are operator’s position. often rated at higher tip capacities as elevation angles increase or when A.20.10.3.1 See A.20.5.2.1. the ladder is not fully extended. Most manufacturers provide distributed load capacities (several persons) depending on the ladder’s extension A.20.12.3.4 Because the water system can be closed at both the top and and elevation. Combination ratings that include capacity at the tip while bottom of the waterway, the purchaser might want to require a vacuum relief discharging water are normally provided. These can vary with elevation and valve. extension and are examples of multiple configurations. It is important that the manufacturer clearly define for the user the ladder’s rated capacity in A.20.12.5 The arrangement of the external inlet should be specified by the various positions and operation modes. purchaser based on the intended local operation in supplying water to the waterway. If the normal operations are to supply the waterway through the A.20.4.3.1 A two-way communication system at two positions on the external inlet, a valve should be provided where large diameter hose is to be 1 apparatus is considered a minimum. Depending on the configuration of the used. A valved three- or four-inlet siamese should be provided when 2 /2- apparatus, the purchaser might want to consider communication systems in. or 3-in. (65-mm or 75-mm) supply lines are used. Attention should be at additional positions, such as at a pump panel or at the monitor operating given to the inlet arrangement to limit friction loss. Also, if the apparatus is position on the ladder. equipped with a fire pump and the purchaser wants to use the auxiliary inlet DRAFTas a discharge, a slow-operating valve needs to be installed in the riser to the A.20.5.2.1 Turntable bearing bolts are required to be checked and retorqued swivel. at regular intervals. The apparatus body should be constructed so as to make this task relatively simple by unbolting access panels, ladder slides, and other A.20.12.9.1 Where freezing conditions are expected, an automatic drain obstructions. Space should be provided for checking and torquing of the valve should be specified in order to drain the waterway when water is not bearing bolts above and below the turntable using the appropriate tools. flowing. A.20.5.4 The controls located at the tip of an aerial ladder are primarily A.20.15.3.1 See A.20.5.2.1. intended to perform the final positioning of the aerial ladder in rescue or other fire-fighting operations. These controls are not intended to replace the A.20.16.5 The arrangement of the external inlet should be specified by the lower control position as the primary operating position for the aerial ladder. purchaser based on the intended local operation in supplying water to the Where the tip control is used, the operator(s) needs to use caution due to the waterway. If the normal operations are to supply the waterway through the following potential problems: external inlet, a valve should be provided where large diameter hose is to be 1 used. A valved three- or four-inlet siamese should be provided when 2 /2- (1) Tip control operators need to be aware of personnel who are on the in. or 3-in. (65-mm or 75-mm) supply lines are used. Attention should be ladder sections behind them. given to the inlet arrangement to limit friction loss. Also, if the apparatus is equipped with a fire pump and the purchaser wants to use the auxiliary inlet (2) Lower control operators need to remain in position and deactivate the as a discharge, a slow-operating valve needs to be installed in the riser to the tip controls when anyone is moving on the ladder. swivel. (3) Tip control operators need to take care to place their feet on the steps at A.20.16.9 Where freezing conditions are expected, an automatic drain valve the tip to avoid injury to their feet from the moving ladder sections below. should be specified in order to drain the waterway when water is not flowing. (4) Tip control operators need to be belted in position to protect against A.20.17.5 It might be desirable to provide an override system to deactivate abrupt or unexpected ladder movements. the interlocks when it is necessary to operate the device with reduced payload or reach. Where an override system is specified, it should require 958 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA the action of a person in addition to the operator to deactivate the interlock The following terms are not used in this document but are associated with system. Where an override system is provided, it is also advisable to provide foam systems and are included here to aid understanding. an indicator at all aerial device operating positions to warn the operator that the override controls have been activated. Aerated Foam. The end product of a discharge of foam solution and air. A.20.18.1 If the operator’s position is located on the turntable, the Aspirate. To draw in air; nozzle aspirating systems draw air into the nozzle operator should have at least 5 ft2 (0.46 m2) of standing and working space to mix with the agent solution. exclusive of other space required. The purchaser should specify any special Aspirated Foam. The end product of a mechanically induced air stream that requirements for the operator’s position or for other space required on the is drawn into the foam solution at atmospheric pressure to create foam. The turntable for personnel to stand or work. aeration is generated by the energy of the foam solution stream. A.20.18.2 Aerial ladder operational controls should be located such that the Automatic Regulating Proportioning System. A proportioning system that operator can see the tip of the aerial ladder in all operating positions. The automatically adjusts the flow of foam concentrate into the water stream to operator’s position is often located on the turntable. maintain the desired proportioning ratio. These automatic adjustments are A.20.19.7 While this standard requires the hydraulic system to have made based on changes in water flow or conductivity. adequate cooling for continuous operation for 21/ hours, prolonged 2 Batch Mix. operations under adverse environmental conditions could cause the hydraulic The manual addition of foam concentrate to a water storage oil to rise in temperature beyond its recommended temperature range. The container or tank to make foam solution. purchaser might wish to specify an indicator and alarm that warns the Foam Blanket. A body of foam used for fuel protection that forms an operator if the fluid temperature begins to overheat. insulating and reflective layer from heat. A.20.20.1 Structural safety factors are widely recognized terms in good Injector. A device used in a discharge or intake line to force foam engineering practice but can be unfamiliar to those using this standard. concentrate into the water stream. The following combination of loads should be evaluated to determine Manually Regulated Proportioning System. A proportioning system that compliance with this standard. To clarify, the terms are defined as follows: requires manual adjustment to maintain the proportioning ratio when there is DL = Dead Load Stress. Stress produced by the aerial device structure and a change of flow or pressure through the foam proportioner. all materials, components, mechanisms, or equipment permanently fastened Proportioning Ratio. The ratio of foam concentrate to water, usually thereto. If this equipment is installed by the manufacturer before delivery, it expressed as a percentage. is included in the dead load. Equipment added to the aerial device by the fire department that exceeds the manufacturer’s recommendations needs to be Surface Tension. The elastic-like force in the surface of a liquid that tends to subtracted from the rated capacity. bring droplets together to form a surface. RL = Rated Capacity Stress. Stress produced by the rated capacity of Wetting Agent. A chemical that reduces the surface tension of water and the aerial device applied at the tip of the fly section for an aerial ladder causes it to spread and penetrate more effectively than plain water, but does [minimum 250 lb (114 kg) at an elevation of zero degrees and full extension] not foam. or on the platform of an elevating platform apparatus [minimum 750 lb (340 kg) at an elevation of zero degrees and full extension]. A.21.2 Foam proportioning systems can be designed with the following features: WL = Water Reaction Stress. Stress produced by nozzle reaction force and the weight of the water in the water delivery system. (1) The ability to proportion different types of foam concentrate including Class A and Class B foam concentrates FY = Material Yield Strength. The stress at which a material exhibits a specified permanent distortion or set. (2) The ability to proportion foam concentrate at fixed or variable proportioning ratios (1) With no water in the system, the aerial device positioned at full extension, zero-degree elevation, and loaded at the rated capacity, the (3) The ability to proportion foam concentrate into single or multiple criterion for structural safety is as follows: the stress produced by two times discharge outlets the dead load stress (DL) plus the stress produced by two times the rated capacity stress (RL) should not exceed the material yield strength (FY). (See (4) The ability to supply foam solution and water simultaneously from formula that follows.) This is a 2:1 safety factor. multiple discharge outlets 2 × DL + 2 × RL < FY (5) Manual or automatic foam proportioning system operation (2) With water flowing in the system and the aerial device in the position A.21.2.1 In-line eductor foam proportioning systems are installed in the that creates the highest stress, the criterion for structural safety is as follows: water pump discharge as a permanently installed device or as a portable the stress produced by two times the dead load stress (DL) plus the stress device. Water is forced through the eductor venturi by water pump discharge produced by two times the rated capacity stress (RL) plus the stress produced pressure, creating a vacuum that causes foam concentrate to be pushed by by the water reaction stress (WL) should not exceed the material yield atmospheric pressure into the eductor (into the water stream) at the design FY (See formula that follows.) rate of the device [see Figure A.21.2.1(a)]. By design, a nonrecoverable strength ( ). pressure drop of 30 percent or greater is required for eductor operation. 2 × DL + 2 × RL + WL < FY The maximum recovered pressure, including friction loss and static head pressure, is nominally 65 percent of the inlet pressure to the eductor. The Other combinations of loading including wind loads, ice loads, and impact in-line eductor is a manually regulated proportioning system. loads can be included as additional live loads in determining structural DRAFTA variable flow bypass eductor system is a modification of the in-line safety factors and rated capacities. eductor foam proportioning system. An eductor is placed in a bypass line A.20.21.1 Water, hose, ground ladders, and equipment on the apparatus all around the mainline water flow control valve so that when the valve is provide stability when they are in place. However, at a fire, this equipment adjusted to produce water flow through the bypass eductor, foam concentrate and water is often is drawn into the eductor (into the water stream) [see Figure A.21.2.1(b)]. removed. Therefore, stability needs to be measured under worst conditions, The foam solution in the bypass line is then joined with the mainline water which is with the equipment removed. flow downstream of the water flow control valve. The variable flow bypass eductor is a manually regulated proportioning system. A.20.24.2.7 The lifting of a tire or stabilizer on the opposite side of the apparatus from the load does not necessarily indicate a condition of A variable pressure eductor is another modification of the in-line eductor instability. foam proportioning system. This type of eductor is designed to automatically adjust the area of the eductor venturi to compensate for changes in water A.20.25 The purchaser might wish to specify that this test be conducted pressure at the inlet of the device. The variable pressure eductor is a with the certification tests required by 20.24 and the test results be certified manually regulated proportioning system. by the independent third-party certification organization. A.21.1 It is important for the purchaser to understand the types and Figure A.21.2.1(a) In-Line Eductor Foam Proportioning System properties of mechanical foam and its application to specify a foam [Existing Figure A-19-2.1(a), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] proportioning system properly. Specific information regarding foam concentrates and their application is available in NFPA 11, Standard for Figure A.21.2.1(b) Variable Flow Bypass Educator System Low-Expansion Foam. Information on foam concentrates for Class A fires [Existing Figure A-19-2.1(b), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] is available in NFPA 1150, Standard on Fire-Fighting Foam Chemicals for Class A Fuels in Rural, Suburban, and Vegetated Areas.

959 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.21.2.2 Self-educting master stream nozzles are mounted on the discharge Figure A.21.2.5(a) Pressure Proportioning Balanced Pressure side of the pump. These devices comprise a complete foam proportioning Proportioning System. system consisting of a foam proportioner and application device (nozzle). [Existing Figure A-19-2.5(a), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] Self-educting master stream nozzles have the following operating characteristics: Figure A.21.2.5(b) Bypass Balanced Pressure Proportioning System. [Existing Figure A-19-2.5(b), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] (1) Operator-adjustable foam solution rates of 3 percent or 6 percent

1 Figure A.21.2.5(c) Demand Balanced Pressure Proportioning System. (2) Minimal pressure drop, approximately 1 percent to 2 /2 percent of inlet pressure [Existing Figure A-19-2.5(c), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] A.21.2.3 An intake-side foam proportioning system is a manually regulated system. An in-line device, installed in the water pump intake line, provides A.21.2.6 Direct injection foam proportioning systems utilize a foam a connection through a foam concentrate metering valve to the foam concentrate pump to inject foam concentrate directly into the water pump concentrate tank. The vacuum created by the water pump allows atmospheric discharge. Foam proportioning system operation is not affected by water pressure to push foam concentrate directly into the pump intake. Hydrant or pump intake pressure or interrupted while refilling the foam concentrate relay operation is not possible with this type of foam proportioning system. tank. Direct injection foam proportioning systems are generally automatic A.21.2.4 Around-the-pump proportioning systems operate with an eductor regulating proportioning systems. installed between the water pump discharge and the intake. A small flow Automatic flow sensing direct injection foam proportioning systems utilize of water from the water pump discharge passes through the eductor, which an in-line flowmeter(s) to monitor the system operating conditions. System creates a vacuum that causes foam concentrate to be pushed into the eductor operating data is transmitted to an electronic control, which controls the and discharged into the pump intake. Around-the-pump foam proportioning proportioning ratio. The following two different flow sensing systems are systems require a pressure differential of 30 percent to 50 percent of inlet available. pressure for efficient operation. (1) An electronic control receives electronic signals corresponding to the A manual around-the-pump proportioning system utilizes a manually proportioning ratio from the control panel and water flow data from the adjustable foam concentrate metering valve to control the proportioning flowmeter. The electronic control then commands the foam concentrate ratio. [See Figure A.21.2.4(a).] pump module to deliver foam concentrate at the proportional rate. [See Figure A.21.2.6(a).] A flowmeter sensing around-the-pump proportioning system utilizes a flowmeter sensing system to monitor total solution flow and foam (2) An electronic control receives electronic signals corresponding to the concentrate flow. The flow data is transmitted to an electronic control that foam concentrate flow from a foam concentrate flowmeter, the proportioning controls the proportioning ratio through a foam concentrate metering valve. ratio from the control panel, and water flow data from the water flowmeter. [See Figure A.21.2.4(b).] The electronic control controls the proportioning ratio through a foam [See Figure A.21.2.6(b).] A conductivity sensing automatic variable metering around-the-pump concentrate metering valve. proportioning system utilizes electrical conductivity meters to sense the A conductivity sensing direct injection foam proportioning system utilizes foam solution percentage and provide feedback from the control sample an electrical conductivity meter(s) to sense the proportioning ratio at the module. Data from the electrical conductivity meters is transmitted to an water pump discharge(s) and transmits this information to an electronic electronic control that controls the proportioning ratio through a foam control that controls the proportioning ratio through a metering valve. A concentrate metering valve. [See Figure A.21.2.4(c).] second electrical conductivity meter provides feedback from the control sample module to the electronic control. Foam pump pressure is maintained at a pressure higher than water pump pressure to ensure injection of the Figure A.21.2.4(a) Manual Around-the-Pump Proportioning System. See Figure A.21.2.6(c).] [Existing Figure A-19-2.4(a), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] concentrate. [

Figure A.21.2.4(b) Flowmeter Sensing Around-the-Pump Figure A.21.2.6(a) Single Meter Flow Sensing Direct Injection Foam Proportioning System. Proportioning System. [Existing Figure A-19-2.4(b), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] [Existing Figure A-19-2.6(a), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] Figure A.21.2.4(c) Conductivity Sensing Automatic Variable Metering Figure A.21.2.6(b) Dual Meter Flow Sensing Direct Injection Foam Around-the-Pump Proportioning System. Proportioning System. [Existing Figure A-19-2.4(c), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] [Existing Figure A-19-2.6(b), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] Figure A.21.2.6(c) Conductivity Sensing Direct Injection Foam A.21.2.5 Balanced pressure foam proportioning systems are installed on Proportioning System. the discharge side of the water pump. Two orifices discharge water and foam [Existing Figure A-19-2.6(c), 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] concentrate into a common ratio controller (proportioner) located in the water pump discharge. By adjusting the area of the orifices to a particular ratio, the percent of injection can be controlled if the intake pressures are A.21.2.7 In a water motor foam proportioning system, a water motor drives equal. The method of controlling or balancing the foam concentrate pressure a positive displacement foam concentrate pump. The water motor can be with the water pressure varies with different balanced pressure system of either a positive displacement type or a turbine type. Water motor foam designs. The two basic types of balanced pressure systems are systems proportioning systems are automatic regulating proportioning systems. without a foamDRAFT concentrate pump and systems with a concentrate pump. Balanced pressure foam proportioning systems are generally automatic Where a positive displacement water motor drives the foam concentrate regulating proportioning systems. pump, the ratio of the water motor displacement to the displacement of the foam concentrate pump is the ratio of the desired foam solution. A positive Balanced pressure systems without a foam concentrate pump are referred displacement water motor proportioning system requires no external power. to as “pressure proportioning systems” [see Figure A.21.2.5(a)]. These [See Figure A.21.2.7(a).] systems utilize a pressure vessel with an internal bladder to contain the foam concentrate. When in operation, water pump pressure is allowed to enter the A water turbine-driven foam proportioning system uses a water turbine to pressure vessel between the shell and the internal bladder to exert pressure power a positive displacement foam concentrate pump. Flowmeters sense on the internal bladder. The foam concentrate is forced out of the bladder to the foam concentrate pump output and the water flow, sending signals to an the foam proportioner at a pressure equal to the water pump pressure. electronic control that controls the proportioning ratio by adjusting the water turbine speed. [See Figure A.21.2.7(b).] There are two basic types of balanced pressure foam proportioning systems that utilize a foam concentrate pump, a bypass system, and a demand system. Foam proportioning system operation is not affected by water pump intake Figure A.21.2.7(a) Water Motor Foam Proportioning System. pressure or interrupted while refilling the foam concentrate tank in these [Existing Figure A-19-2.7(a),1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] types of foam proportioning systems. Figure A.21.2.7(b) Water Turbine-Driven Flow Sensing Direct Injection The bypass system utilizes a valve in the foam concentrate pump Foam Proportioning System. recirculating line that balances the foam concentrate and water pressure by [Existing Figure A-19-2.7(b). 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] bypassing excess foam concentrate. [See Figure A.21.2.5(b).] The demand system is designed to control the speed of the foam concentrate pump resulting in control of the pump discharge pressure to achieve a balance of foam concentrate and water pressure within the system. [See Figure A.21.2.5(c).] 960 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.21.3.1 Foam proportioning systems that inject foam concentrate into the To use a refractometer to determine percent of foam solution, a base water pumping system at a higher pressure than the water pressure have the calibration curve needs to be prepared. The following equipment is required: potential to force foam concentrate or foam solution into an external water source. This condition will occur when there is no water flowing and the (1) Four 100-ml or larger plastic bottles with caps foam proportioning system is activated in the automatic mode. Backflow prevention devices, or any device that creates additional friction loss in the (2) One measuring pipette (l0 ml) or syringe (10 cc) system, should be installed only with the approval and specific instructions (3) One 100-ml or larger graduated cylinder of the foam proportioning system manufacturer. (4) Three plastic-coated magnetic stirring bars A.21.3.4 Most foam concentrate manufacturers differentiate in the materials they recommend between those foam proportioning system components that (5) A refractometer are designed to be flushed with water after operation and those components that are intended to be continuously wetted with foam concentrate. (6) Standard graph paper A.21.4.1 It is desirable to have a visual indicator on the operator’s panel that (7) A ruler or other straight edge shows that the foam proportioning system is in the “operating” or the “off” Using the water and foam concentrate from the system to be tested, three position. A visual means of indicating positive foam concentrate flow at the known foam solution samples are made up using the 100-ml or larger operator’s panel is also helpful. graduated cylinder. These known foam solution samples should include the A.21.6.3.2 Suitable means to attach the cover to the fill tower could include following: use of a threaded cap or a hinged cover with a mechanical latching device. (1) The nominal intended percentage A.21.6.6 On apparatus where a single foam storage tank is used, provisions should be made to flush the tank and all foam concentrate plumbing to avoid (2) The nominal intended percentage plus 1 percent contamination of dissimilar foam concentrates when switching types or (3) The nominal intended percentage minus 1 percent brands. If the nominal intended percent is one percent or less, the three samples A.21.6.8 The foam concentrate tank(s) can be an integral part of the water should be as follows: tank. (1) The nominal intended percentage A.21.6.10.2 Different types and brands of concentrates can be incompatible with each other and should not be mixed in storage. Concentrate viscosity (2) The nominal intended percentage plus 0.3 percent varies with different types of products and temperatures. (3) The nominal intended percentage minus 0.3 percent A.21.7 The foam concentrate pump is a very critical component of both balanced pressure and direct injection foam proportioning systems. The water required is placed in the 100-ml or larger graduated cylinder Positive displacement pumps are recommended for several reasons. leaving space for the foam concentrate. Using the pipette or syringe, the Positive displacement pumps are relatively slow in speed when compared to required foam concentrate samples are carefully added to the water. Each centrifugal pumps, which is advantageous with viscous foam concentrates measured foam solution is poured from the 100-ml or larger graduated that are difficult to shear. Centrifugal pumps can become air bound when cylinder into a 100-ml or larger plastic bottle. Each bottle should be marked trying to pump viscous foam concentrates, which results in a complete with a label indicating the percent solution it contains. A plastic-coated shutdown of the system. The self-priming feature of positive displacement magnetic stirring bar is added to the bottle. The bottle is capped and shaken pumps allows them to draw foam concentrate from drums or any external thoroughly to mix the foam solution. source without priming the pump. An alternate method for making up three foam solution samples is to use a A.21.7.2 Corrosion-resistant materials are materials such as brass, copper, very accurate scale. When a very accurate scale is used, only small amounts monel, stainless steel, or equivalent materials. of water and foam concentrate are required. To use the scale method, the density of the foam concentrate needs to be known. Look at the data sheet A.21.7.5 A suitable suction device is required to operate from an external or the MSDS for the foam product density. For example, to make 100 ml of source such as 5-gal (19-L) pails, 55-gal (208-L) drums, and portable tanks a 3 percent foam solution using a foam concentrate with a density of 1.04, or containers. measure 97 g of water into a beaker and add 3.12 g of foam concentrate to the beaker (1.04 3 g = 3.12 g). A.21.9.3 It is desirable for in-line eductor systems to have a label that indicates the system flow rate, the maximum usable hose length, the hose After the foam solution samples are thoroughly mixed, a refractive index size required, the nozzle type, and allowable elevation changes. reading is taken of each percentage foam solution sample. This is done by placing a few drops of the solution on the refractometer prism, closing the A.21.9.3(2) It is necessary for the operator to familiarize himself or herself cover plate, and observing the scale reading at the dark field intersection. with the specific types of foam concentrates the foam proportioning system Since the refractometer is temperature compensated, it could take 10 seconds manufacturer has designed the system to operate with and proportion to 20 seconds for the sample to be read properly. It is important to take all accurately. The foam proportioning system might require modification or refractometer readings at ambient temperatures of 50°F (10°C) or above. recalibration if a foam concentrate is introduced into the system that was not intended for use in the system by the manufacturer. Using standard graph paper, the refractive index readings are plotted on one axis and the percent of concentration on the other. This plotted curve serves A.21.10 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being certified as the known baseline for the test series. The solution samples should be set by an independent third-party certification organization, the purchaser might aside in the event the measurements need to be checked. wish to specify that these tests also be certified by the independent third- party certificationDRAFT organization. Sampling and Analysis. Foam solution samples are collected from the proportioning system using care to make certain that the samples are taken A.21.10.2 There are four methods for testing a foam proportioning system at an adequate distance downstream from the foam proportioner being for calibration accuracy. tested. Refractive index readings of the samples are taken and compared to Test Method 1. Water Is Substituted for Foam Concentrate. The foam system the plotted curve to determine the percentage of the collected test samples. is operated at the water flow rates at which the system is to be tested. Water Test Method 3. Foam Concentrate Pump Output Is Measured Directly. is used as a substitute for foam concentrate. The substitute water for the foam With some direct injection systems, it is possible to directly measure foam concentrate is drawn from a calibrated tank instead of foam concentrate from concentrate pump output. With the foam system in operation at a given the foam concentrate tank. The volume of water drawn from the calibrated water flow rate, either using foam concentrate or water as a substitute for tank divided by the volume of water pumped over the same time period times foam concentrate, the output of the foam concentrate pump is measured by 100 represents the percentage of foam the foam proportioner is producing. diverting that output into a calibrated container for direct measurement over Test Method 2. Foam Percent Is Determined by Use of a Refractometer. a measured period of time. An alternative is to measure the foam concentrate With the foam system in operation at a given flow, a solution sample is flow or water substitute with a calibrated meter. collected from each outlet. The foam concentration solution is measured Test Method 4. Foam Percent Is Determined by Use of a Conductivity using a refractometer to measure the refractive index of the collected foam Meter. The conductivity test method is based on changes in electrical solution sample. This method might not be accurate for AFFF or alcohol- conductivity as foam concentrate is added to water. Conductivity is a very resistant foam and certain other types of foam that typically exhibit very low accurate method provided there are substantial changes in conductivity as refractive index readings. Also, the refractometer method should not be used foam concentrate is added to the water in relatively low percentages. Since when testing foam percentages of 1 percent or lower because the accuracy, salt or brackish water is very conductive, this method might not be suitable at best, for determining the percent of foam concentrate in a foam solution due to small conductivity changes as foam concentrate is added to salt or when using a refractometer is ±0.1 percent. For this reason, the conductivity brackish water. It is necessary to make foam and water solutions in advance method could be a preferable test method where AFFF, alcohol-resistant to determine if adequate changes in conductivity can be detected if the water foam, or foam in 1 percent or less concentration (Class A foams) is to be source is salty or brackish. This method cannot be used when the water tested. 961 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA base has more total solids than the foam concentrate. The following three (1) The nominal intended percentage methods can be used to determine the foam percentage by the conductivity method: (2) The nominal intended percentage plus 0.3 percent (1) Direct Reading Conductivity Method. The following equipment is used (3) The nominal intended percentage minus 0.3 percent to perform this method: The water required is placed in the 100-ml or larger graduated cylinder (a) Two 100-ml or larger containers leaving space for the foam concentrate. Using the pipette or syringe, the required foam concentrate samples are carefully added to the water. Each (b) One direct reading foam solution conductivity meter measured foam solution is poured from the 100-ml or larger graduated cylinder into a 100-ml or larger plastic bottle. Each bottle should be marked Procedure. A sample of the water to be used in the test is obtained using one with a label indicating the percent solution it contains. A plastic-coated of the 100-ml or larger containers. The conductivity meter head is immersed magnetic stirring bar is added to the bottle. The bottle is capped and shaken in the water sample and the meter display set at zero. If the direct reading thoroughly to mix the foam solution. foam solution conductivity meter is mounted in a discharge line, the meter should be set at zero with plain water flowing. An alternate method for making up three foam solution samples is to use a very accurate scale. When a very accurate scale is used, only small amounts If the conductivity meter manufacturer does not indicate that the percentage of water and foam concentrate are required. To use the scale method, the of foam solution can be read directly for the foam concentrate being used, a density of the foam concentrate needs to be known. Look at the data sheet calibration curve needs to be developed. The calibration curve might show or the MSDS for the foam product density. For example, to make 100 ml of that the direct meter readings are correct for the foam concentrate being used a 3 percent foam solution using a foam concentrate with a density of 1.04, or it might indicate that the calibration curve needs to be used when that measure 97 g of water into a beaker and add 3.12 g of foam concentrate to foam concentrate is used. the beaker (1.04 3 g = 3.12 g). The foam proportioning system is operated and a sample of the foam After the foam solution samples are thoroughly mixed, the conductivity of solution produced by the system is collected using the other 100-ml or larger each solution is measured. The instructions that come with the conductivity container. The conductivity meter head is immersed in the foam solution meter should be consulted to determine proper procedures for taking sample and the percentage of the foam solution is read on the meter display. readings. It is necessary to switch the meter to the correct conductivity range If the conductivity meter is mounted in a discharge line, the percentage of setting in order to obtain a proper reading. Most synthetic-based foams used the foam solution is read on the meter display while foam solution is being with fresh water result in foam solution conductivity readings of less than discharged. 2000 mscm. Protein-based foams generally produce conductivity readings Conductivity Comparison Method. in excess of 2000 mscm when fresh water is used to make the foam solution. (2) The following equipment is used to Due to the temperature-compensation feature of the conductivity meter it perform this method: could take a short time to obtain a consistent reading. (a) Two 100-ml or larger containers Once the solution samples have been measured and recorded, the bottles (b) Conductivity meter reading in microsiemens per centimeter (mscm) should be set aside for control sample references. The conductivity readings then should be plotted on the graph paper. It is most convenient to place Procedure. A sample of the water to be used in the test is obtained using the foam solution percentage on the horizontal axis and the conductivity one of the 100-ml or larger containers. Using the conductivity meter, the readings on the vertical axis. conductivity valve of the water sample is determined. A ruler or straight edge can be used to draw a line that approximates The foam proportioning system is operated and a sample of the foam connecting all three points. While it might not be possible to connect solution produced by the system is obtained using the other 100-ml or larger all three points with a straight line, they should be very close. If not, the container. Using the conductivity meter, the conductivity value of the foam conductivity measurements should be repeated and, if necessary, new solution sample is measured. control sample solutions should be made until all three points plot in a nearly straight line. This plot serves as the known base (calibration) curve to be The conductivity value of the water sample is subtracted from the used for the test series. conductivity value of the foam solution sample and the result is divided by 500 to obtain the percent of foam concentrate in the foam solution. Sampling and Analysis. Foam solution samples are collected from the proportioning system using care to be sure the sample is taken at an adequate distance downstream from the foam proportioner being tested. Using foam Conductivity of foam solution � conductivityof water � percent of foam solution samples that have been allowed to drain from expanded foam can 500 produce misleading conductivity readings; therefore, this type of sample should not be used to determine percent of foam solution. NOTE: Five hundred is used as the divisor assuming that the conductivity When test samples have been collected, their conductivity is measured and meter units are mscm. Other units of conductivity can be used but the value the percent of foam solution is determined from the base curve prepared of the divisor (500) will need to be adjusted. from the control sample foam solutions. (3) Conductivity Calibration Curve Method. A hand-held conductivity A.22.1 The following terms are not used in this document but are meter is used to measure the conductivity of foam solutions in microsiemen associated with compressed air foam systems and are included here to aid in units. understanding. The following equipment is used to perform this method: Chatter. An unacceptable flow condition wherein air is not fully mixed with the foam solution. (a) Four 100-mlDRAFT or larger plastic bottles with caps High-Energy Foam Generator. A foam generator that uses a large amount (b) One measuring pipette (10 ml) or syringe (10 cc) of external energy to aerate the foam. (c) One 100-ml or larger graduated cylinder Low-Energy Foam Generator. A foam generator that uses energy of the foam stream to aerate the foam. (d) Three plastic-coated magnetic stirring bars Mixing Chamber. A device used to produce fine, uniform bubbles in a short (e) A portable temperature-compensated conductivity meter distance as foam solution and air flow through it. (f) Standard graph paper Scrubbing. The process of agitating foam solution and air in a confined space such as a hose, pipe, or mixing chamber to produce tiny, uniform (g) A ruler or other straight edge bubbles. Procedure. A base calibration curve is prepared using the water and foam Slug Flow. concentrate from the system to be tested. Three standard solutions are made The discharge of distinct pockets of water and air due to the using the 100-ml or larger graduate. These known foam solution samples insufficient mixing of foam concentrate, water, and air in a compressed air should include the following: foam system. Surge. The sudden decompression of a discharge line caused by the rapid (1) The nominal intended percentage opening of the discharge appliance. (2) The nominal intended percentage plus 1 percent A.22.2.1 It is preferable that the concentrate proportioning system be (3) The nominal intended percentage minus 1 percent automatic, inject into the discharge side of the pump, and proportion at a minimum water flow of 2 gpm (8 L/min). If the nominal intended percent is one percent or less, the three samples should be as follows: 962 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA A.22.2.4 It is recommended that compressed air not be injected into the (b) If dc is required, the nominal operating voltage and the maximum water/foam discharge piping until the flow of water/foam solution has been operating current should be provided. For special equipment, the required established in the discharge piping. The nozzle reaction at the end of a quality of the dc power should also be stated, including the upper and lower hose can be quite high if just air or air and water with no foam solution is limits of voltage and the amount of ripple voltage. flowing in the discharge line. The nozzle reaction could be a safety issue with an operator that is not expecting or not properly braced to withstand (2) The required minimum continuous output wattage of the electrical this reaction force. The reaction force is substantially reduced when a foam source or sources that power the system, or if more than one type of current solution is flowing in the discharge hose. or voltage is required, the maximum output wattage for each type of current or voltage A.22.2.5 Pressure in the form of compressed air can remain trapped in a CAFS as a result of deactivating the system. It is important for the operator (3) If an earth grounded system is required, the details of grounding rods, to relieve any pressure in the foam proportioning system and connected hose plates, clamps, or other means to establish bonding of the apparatus and the lines before disconnecting hose lines or performing any operation that opens power source to the earth the system to atmosphere. Generally, the line voltage electrical system should be sized based on the A.22.4 If the expansion ratio is to be tested, the following equipment and total amount of fixed and portable equipment that is likely to be operated test procedures are recommended: at the same time. In view of the increasing use of line voltage devices on apparatus, the provision of a line voltage electrical system of sufficient (1) Gram scale, 1500 g capacity accurate to 0.1 g capacity is strongly recommended. Where line voltage equipment use is extensive, a separately driven generator is recommended. (2) One 1000-ml container that can be struck at 1000 ml (a 1000-ml graduated cylinder cut off at 1000 ml works well) Where only incandescent lighting is involved, ac or dc power can be used. Where other electrical devices such as motor-driven equipment or electronic The empty container is placed on the scale and the scale is set to zero. Using equipment are involved, single-phase ac power at 60 cycles is normally the container, a full sample of foam is collected and the foam is struck at the required. However, because of the substantial reduction of size and cost 1000-ml level. The container is placed on the scale and the mass is read in that results from three-phase operation, ac motors larger than 5 hp are grams. usually designed to operate on three-phase ac current. Attempting to operate 100 electrical equipment using the wrong type of electrical power will almost Expansion � always damage the electrical equipment. foam mass in grams

The foam mass in grams assumes that 1 g of foam solution occupies 1 ml Figure A.23.1 Typical Line Voltage Electrical System. of volume. [Existing Figure A-21-1, 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] A.22.5 Any components of the piping system exposed to pressurized air from the CAFS should be designed for a burst gauge pressure of at least 500 If premises wiring or other fixed wiring systems are to be powered by the psi (3400 kPa). generator, the installation should be preplanned and in accordance with A.22.7.6 Some systems provide automatic regulation of the water NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, for that intended purpose. Grounding flow; however, instrumentation is still useful to the operator. Even of the system should comply with Section 250.20, “Alternating-Current automatic systems have adjustments and performance limits that warrant Circuits and Systems to Be Grounded,” and other applicable sections of instrumentation. Where the system design does not allow for such automatic NFPA 70. regulation, or where the operator has the ability to control water flow or airflow, air and water flowmeters are necessary for the operator to monitor A.23.2.3 Portable line voltage electrical equipment added by the fire the operational performance of the CAFS where the nozzle person cannot department should also be listed and utilized only in accordance with the be seen. Where pumping long hose lays or pumping to great heights, the manufacturer’s instructions. operator needs to know what is flowing in order to be certain the proper A.23.2.5.4 While a splash shield will lessen the amount of road spray that product is being delivered. reaches the generator, it will not protect the generator if the apparatus is A.22.9 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being certified driven through deep water. Care should also be taken if the apparatus is by an independent third-party certification organization, the purchaser might driven off-road as a splash shield is not a skid pan and will not protect the wish to specify that these tests also be certified by the independent third- generator from physical abuse. party certification organization. A.23.3.1 Because of the non-earth grounded nature of apparatus-mounted line voltage equipment and the wet environment in which it operates, great A.22.9.1.3.3 Care should be taken to avoid injuries to personnel from the care should be taken in the use and maintenance of such line voltage circuits discharging airstream. Only those persons actually conducting the tests and equipment. Ground fault protection for personnel should be furnished should be in the test area, and they should wear protection for their ears, through an assured equipment grounding conductor program in accordance eyes, and face from noise and dust during the airflow test. with Section 527.5(B) “Use of Other Outlets,” of NFPA 70. All cord sets, A.22.9.2 The person conducting the test should check with the manufacturer receptacles, and electrical equipment should be maintained in accordance of the hose being used to ensure the hose has been approved for use with with NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment CAFS. Maintenance. A.23.1 A typical electrical system might consist of a generator system that This protection can be supplemented by the use of ground-fault circuit is bonded to the chassis frame rail. Conductors making up the power supply interrupters (GFCIs). These GFCIs should be attached to the end of assembly include the neutral conductor (N), grounding conductor (G), and distribution cords and located close enough to the equipment being operated DRAFTthat the GFCIs can be conveniently reset in the event they trip. Locating line voltage conductors (L1, L2, L3). The power supply assembly also includes a manually resettable, main power source overcurrent protective device. GFCI devices as close as possible to the end of a cord will reduce tripping caused by stray capacitance and leakage associated with long cord lengths The neutral conductor of the power supply assembly is grounded to the and multiple connections. generator frame. This is the only location that the neutral conductor is grounded in the entire system. The power supply assembly terminates at the While this arrangement is desirable for fire service operating conditions and panelboard for distribution to the rest of the system. Figure A.23.1 shows a does protect fire fighters who are operating tools and lights downstream of typical system on a fire apparatus. the GFCIs, it should be realized that no ground fault protection is provided between the electrical source and the GFCIs. It is the responsibility of the purchaser to provide the contractor with sufficient information to enable the contractor to supply an electrical system A.23.4.8.3 The instrumentation should be protected from vibration that that will meet the needs of the fire department. can lead to false readings. Particular attention should be paid to reed-type cycle indicators. Digital electronic instrumentation should be selected For each piece of line voltage electrical equipment installed on the apparatus that incorporates sample times and intervals that accurately report system or operated using the apparatus line voltage electrical system, the purchaser performance under varying conditions. should provide the following information: A.23.4.10 The indicator lights and interlocks specified in this section are (1) The type of electrical current required, that is, alternating current (ac), minimum. Some manufacturers or users might choose to add additional direct current (dc), or either ac or dc, as follows: indicator lights or interlocks. (a) If ac is required, the nominal operating voltage, the maximum A.23.4.10.4 Generators are operated from the side, top, front, or rear of amperage, and whether it is single-phase or three-phase should be provided. the apparatus, and stationary operation requires that there is no power For electronic equipment and some motors, the required quality of the ac applied to the wheels while operating. Therefore, it is essential that any power should also be stated, including the upper and lower limits of voltage and the allowable variation of frequency and wave form.

963 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA generator system controls, which shift the apparatus out of the road mode of A.23.6.4 Belt-driven generator systems use a voltage regulator and a operation to place the generator system into operation, be equipped with a generator driven off the propulsion engine. The complexity of modern engine means to prevent dislocation of the control from its set position in the power drive belt configurations limit power output to about 6000 watts. This system generation mode. will generally maintain acceptable voltage, but the frequency will vary with engine speed. Motor loads should not be powered by this type of power A.23.5.1 Completion of the generator shift might require that the chassis supply. transmission be shifted into the proper gear (split shaft PTOs only). An alternative system uses a separately driven alternator to supply electrical A.23.6.1.1 A PTO generator system typically consists of a propulsion energy to an inverter, which in turn produces line voltage electrical power. engine, a controller to regulate the propulsion engine’s speed, an appropriate These systems are separate from, and do not affect, the performance of PTO arrangement, drivetrain components, a generator, and other the low-voltage electrical system. These systems are voltage regulated and miscellaneous parts. provide ample power for scene lighting. Due to the belt-driven configuration, When a generator and fire pump are both direct driven by the same engine the system is still subject to low voltage at idle conditions, which could and are both operated at the same time, fire pump performance is limited to damage motors. the generator set speed, and pump pressure is controlled by a pressure relief A.23.6.5.1 A brief description of several different types of systems follows. valve. All of these systems can overload the low-voltage electrical system and cause Due to variable engine speeds causing uncontrolled voltage and frequency the load management system to terminate the generation of line voltage. As variation, direct drive generators are not acceptable for fire apparatus where a result, the amount of line voltage power that can be supplied, at any given “generate and roll” capability is required. Hydraulically driven or separate time, is totally dependent on the other higher priority demands placed on the engine driven generators are suited for these applications. low-voltage system. Dynamic Power Inverter. A dynamic power inverter converts alternator A.23.6.1.2 Where possible, the generator PTO system should be prevented output power to 120 volts ac (or 120/240 volts ac). Power is electronically from engaging if engine speed is above idle. inverted to ac. Usually the largest system of this type is 7500 watts. Voltage PTO gear ratios and engine governor components should be selected and frequency control are typically very good. and matched to provide an engine speed high enough to maintain rated Static Power Inverter. performance of the alternator and air-conditioning system (if provided). A static power inverter converts 12-volt to 14-volt Engine speed should be high enough to maintain rated performance of the dc power to 120-volt ac (or 120/240 volts ac) power. Power is electronically low-voltage electrical system. Continuous excessive engine speed will result inverted to ac. Usually the largest system of this type is 2000 watts. Voltage in premature generator drivetrain component failure and unnecessary fuel and frequency control are typically very good. consumption. Motor-Driven Generators. A motor-driven generator system converts 12-volt dc power to 120-volt ac (or 120/240 volts ac) power. The 12-volt The purchaser should consider the specification of a means to automatically dc motor drives an ac generator. Typical power ratings are less than 1600 disconnect the generator or reduce engine speed to idle in the event of engine watts. Voltage and frequency control are less precise than some of the other overspeed. systems available. These types of systems are suited to providing electric A.23.6.1.4 Operations in conjunction with a fire pump, aerial device, or power while the apparatus is in motion. other component driven off the fire apparatus’s engine could require special Transformers. Transformer systems convert energy from the alternator that or alternate interlock systems. is then rectified to 120-volt dc power. Typical installations provide 1000 A.23.6.2.1 A hydraulic generator system generally consists of a variable watts. Output voltage is directly dependent on input voltage. Input voltage is displacement hydraulic pump deriving its power from the propulsion dependent on engine and alternator speed. engine, a controller to regulate the hydraulic fluid flow rate, a hydraulic A.23.7 Portable generator systems are generally designed with an integral motor driving the generator, hydraulic fluid cooler, reservoir, and other fuel tank and controls in one modular package. This allows the system miscellaneous parts. to be picked up and transported to a remote location from the apparatus. All hydraulic generator systems have a window of operation (speed range). Generators designed for portable use should be accessible for removal. When selecting the power output of the hydraulic generator system, its speed These generators are generally not suited for “enclosed” compartment range should be compared to the operating window of the fire apparatus’s operation or should be mounted on a slide out tray for adequate ventilation. engine and the PTO ratios available. By selecting the hydraulic generator Such installations require interlocks or a high temperature alarm to assure system and PTO ratio to match the application, electrical power can be generator is operated in “slide out” condition. provided over a wide operating range. The generator performance specifications should be evaluated carefully The selected PTO should have a gear ratio that will allow the widest possible to ensure the required level of performance can be met. Article 445, range of engine speeds without over-speeding the hydraulic pump. “Generators,” of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, requires that overcurrent protection be provided on portable generators. Where possible, engagement of the generator PTO system should be prevented if engine speed is above idle. A.23.8.1 The purchaser should specify the location on the apparatus for the power inlet. Consideration should be given to placement of the power inlet so A.23.6.2.2 This means can be either a mechanical or hydraulic device. that it disconnects if the apparatus is moved forward. A.23.6.2.5.3 The use of 90-degree fittings should be avoided. A.23.8.2.2 This paragraph differs from the requirements in NFPA 70, National Electerical Code, in that this standard does not permit two sources A.23.6.2.5.4 Hose runs should not include “S” turns that would allow air to to be simultaneously connected together. be trapped. DRAFTA.23.12.3 Common connectors and terminations that comply with these A.23.6.3 Engine-driven generator systems use an internal combustion requirements include the following: engine close coupled to a generator. Some installations are capable of producing power while the apparatus is in motion. Generators used in these (1) Welded or brazed connectors applications should be specifically designed for mobile applications. Remote generator controls in the driving compartment should be considered and (2) Crimped connectors specified if desired. (3) Soldered connections that are mechanically secured before soldering A.23.6.3.2 The purchaser should consider the following additional remote instruments where a prime mover, other than the propulsion engine, is used (4) Screw-type positive pressure connectors to drive a generator: (5) Ring terminals (1) Prime mover tachometer (6) Hooks (2) Oil pressure gauge and low-pressure indicator light and audible alarm (7) Upturned spade (3) Engine temperature gauge and high-temperature indicator light and (8) Crimped-on pins audible alarm (9) Other methods providing a positive mechanical and electrical The purchaser might want to specify a high temperature indicator to help connection that are acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction troubleshoot automatic shutdowns. A.23.12.4 The following switch terminology can be helpful in A.23.6.3.4.1 Emissions from exhaust discharge pipes should be directed understanding the different types of switches. away from any fire-fighting tools since such emissions contain an oily substance that could make the tools difficult to handle and possibly One Pole (1P) or Single Pole (SP). A switch device that opens, closes, or dangerous to use. changes connections in a single conductor of an electrical circuit. 964 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA Two Pole (2P) or Double Pole (DP). A switch device that opens, closes, or permanently connected. Any cord reel with one or more outlets should be changes connections in both conductors of the same circuit. rated at 15 amps or greater. Two Circuit (2 CIR). A switch device that opens, closes, or changes For heavy loads such as large smoke fans and hydraulic rescue tool power connections in a single conductor of two independent circuits. plants, the purchaser should consider 240 volt units instead of 120 volt units. This will allow the use of smaller cords and reels. For example, a 150 ft reel Single Throw (ST). A switch that opens, closes, or completes a circuit at to supply a HRT power plant that draws 15 amps at 240 volts would require only one of the extreme positions of its actuator. 14 gauge wire. The same power unit in a version to run on 120 volts would Double Throw (DT). A switch that opens, closes, or completes a circuit at draw 30 amps and would require 10 gauge wire. both extreme positions of its actuator. Cord reels for three-phase power or other specialized applications should be Normally Open (NO). A switch in which one or more circuits are open designed with the assistance of a qualified electrical engineer. when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position. Table A.23.13.5 Wire Size† for Various Electrical Cord Lengths Normally Closed (NC). A switch in which one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position. Circuit Cord Length Switches are rated for the type of load they are designed to control. Switch Ampacity 50 ft 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft ratings include the following: (45 m) (60 m) (75 m) (90 m) (15 m) (30 m) (1) Resistive 5 16 16 16 16 16 14 (2) Inductive 7.5 16 16 16 16 16 14 (3) Horsepower (i.e., motor loads) 10 16 16 16 16 14 14 (4) Tungsten (i.e., incandescent lamp loads) 15 14 14 14 14 12 12 (5) Alternating current 20 12 12 12 12 12 10 (6) Direct current 25 12 12 12 12 10 10 The ampere rating of a given switch is dependent on the type of load. In particular, switches used to control dc circuits should have the appropriate 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 dc rating. 35 8 8 8 8 8 8 A.23.12.4.2 In lieu of a switch-rated circuit breaker, a standard circuit breaker could be used with a separate switching device. 40 8 8 8 8 8 8 A.23.12.5.1.1 The purchaser should specify the number and location of 50 6 6 6 6 6 6 receptacles that are needed to operate the devices to be powered by the † system. The purchaser should specify the NEMA number (if applicable), Wire size as AWG manufacturer, and style of the receptacles desired. For other than NEMA- type receptacles, the purchaser should additionally specify the wiring configuration. A.23.13.6 The cord on the reel should be provided with a disconnect means within 18 in. (457 mm) from the reel for cord removal if the cord is 8 AWG A.23.12.5.1.3 If the off-road fire apparatus is to ford water, the receptacle or smaller. distance should be increased above 30 in. (750 mm). The purchaser should review the proposed height for any receptacles on the apparatus and specify A.23.13.7 The purchaser might want to color code the cord or cord reel to a higher mounting height if desired. identify the voltage. A.23.12.5.6 While NEMA configurations as defined in NEMA WD-6, A.23.13.8.2 It might be advantageous to specify a remote power distribution Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements, are recommended to promote box that has a provision for hanging the unit from a door or ladder. compatibility of equipment A.23.13.8.3 Consideration should be given to the use of GFCI devices during mutual aid operations, other configurations are in use and have been mounted in the remote power distribution box to provide additional adopted by various fire departments. protection to personnel using equipment powered through the box. Acceptable NEMA-type plug and receptacle configurations for various ac A.23.13.8.5 The lamps used in this application should be rough service voltage and current ratings are shown in Figure A.23.12.5.6. type. Scene lighting around the remote power distribution box can be provided with an integral, mechanically protected light fixture. Figure A.23.12.5.6 Common NEMA Plug Configurations. A.23.13.8.5.1 For increased visibility, reflective tape can be applied to the [Existing Figure A-21-10.5.5, 1999 edition of NFPA 1901, no change] distribution box. A.23.15.1 The purchaser should specify the type of rotation, telescopic, pan and tilt operations, and other features that are required. The letter “R” DRAFTfollowing the configuration number indicates a receptacle, and the letter “P” denotes a plug. For example, the nonlocking, 15-ampere, A.23.15.2 When the light mast is mounted above the apparatus driving grounding receptacle found in most homes is configuration 5-15R and and crew compartment or the body, a brush and tree limb guard should be accepts a three-prong plug in the configuration of 5-15P. considered to protect the mast and floodlights. Locking-type plugs and receptacles are designed to prevent accidental A.23.15.2.3 To reduce the electrocution hazards associated with the disconnection when subjected to moderate pull-apart loads. Neither locking operation of masts above the apparatus, the purchaser should consider nor nonlocking connectors are designed to withstand the loads that can be specifying a slide-out operator’s platform, a wireless remote control, or both. created when pulling long cords up buildings and stairs. A.23.15.2.8 The lighting assembly should be supported when it is in A.23.13.4 A suggested minimum capacity of a reel is at least 100 ft (30 m) a transport mode in order to prevent damage to lighting assembly from of cord rated to carry 20 amps at 120 volts ac. When sizing the reel, extra vibration. capacity should be provided when multiple receptacles are attached to the cord stored on the reel. A.23.16 The purchaser should consider the range of temperatures in which the power source is to be operated. If extreme conditions are anticipated, the A cord reel to supply a single 120 volt circuit requires three collector purchaser should specify any specific test conditions that are desired. rings and three conductors in the cord, for line, neutral, and ground. If the power source has 120/240 volt outputs, as most power sources do, a A.23.16.2.4 Solid state equipment is generally hi-pot tested by the second equivalent circuit with the same rating only requires one additional manufacturer. It is very important to connect all hot and neutral busses conductor as the neutral and ground can be common to both circuits. Thus together so that no current flows through connected loads. with approximately 25 percent more reel space and cord cost, the cord reel can supply twice the number of lights or other loads. A.23.16.3 The fire department should check the polarity of the wiring in a building prior to interconnecting the fire apparatus mounted electrical A.23.13.5 Table A.23.13.5 lists the suggested cord size for cord reels based system to the electrical system in a building. on the desired circuit ampacity and the cord length. The ratings for 5 amps, 7.5 amps, and 10 amps should only be used where an appropriate load is A.23.16.5 Commercially available smaller or intermittent duty low-cost power sources generally are advertised with power ratings tested under 965 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA the most favorable operating conditions. Also, some power sources are To allow a specified number of SCBA users to be deployed without advertised at peak output or intermittent duty ratings, rather than continuous interruption, as many as three times that number of SCBA units should duty output. be available on the scene. That allows for backup personnel to have their equipment in readiness to immediately relieve those personnel who have Where a power source will be subjected to higher than ideal operating exhausted their air supply as well as providing extra units in the event of temperatures, or the advertised rating is not a continuous duty rating, the failures or equipment problems. apparatus manufacturer should de-rate the power source and provide the de- rated data on the power source specification label. The power source should The resupply rate of SCBA cylinders on the scene could be accomplished then be tested at this de-rated condition. It is important that the power source by an air compressor alone, air cascade alone, or a combination of each type specification label on the apparatus meets the fire department requirements of system with a booster system. The users should determine the supply rate for power source output as it indicates the rating to which the power source and duration, then determine what system will meet this requirement. is tested. An analysis of the existing fire department SCBAs and breathing air system A.24.2 The command center could be an area of the crew compartment, should be performed to determine what needs, if any, exist. This analysis the apparatus body, or a portion of either of these areas. The environment should include the following: for the area is subject to wide variations in size, noise levels, facilities, and appointments. Command areas in enclosed body areas could be designed (1) SCBA units: type, quantity, designed duration to accommodate several personnel. It is common to separate the crew or equipment areas from command areas. A separate entry and enclosed area (2) Extra SCBA cylinders: type, quantity, designed duration might be required by the purchaser. (3) Air storage system capability A.24.2.1 If a separately enclosed area is desired, the purchaser should (4) Air compressor capability specify the arrangements desired and whether a locking door is necessary. A.25.2.1 Special operating conditions such as high temperatures or cold A.24.2.2 The exact layout, design, and usage of the command area should weather operations might require special equipment modifications or design be determined by each purchaser for each fire apparatus. requirements by component manufacturers and body manufacturers. Fire departments need to be specific in stating their operating temperature range A.24.3 If such equipment is to be thermostatically controlled automatically, and special requirements. Due to high intake air flow with breathing air the purchaser should so state. Powered or nonpowered ventilation equipment compressors, special provisions should be made for moisture separator should be provided as required by the purchaser. freeze protection in very cold weather operations. A.24.4 Supplemental floor, wall, and ceiling acoustical material should be A.25.2.11.6 The purchaser might wish to require the air compressor added where required to reduce noise levels below 80 dBA. assembler and final stage installer of the proposed air system to provide A.24.5.2 Command areas in the driving or crew compartments should be drawing of the air equipment arrangement, operator’s panel layout, and air provided with 120-volt lighting systems to reduce 12-volt loads. piping to allow pre-purchase evaluation of the operational characteristics of the system proposed. A.24.6.1 Removable Plexiglas or wired safety glass-type surfaces can be added to the top of work surfaces. A.25.2.13.1 If the apparatus is equipped with a breathing air system such as an air cascade system or air booster system, the purchaser might still wish A.24.7.1 The seating equipment and arrangement can vary considerably. to require the system manufacturer rather than just the contractor to provide The equipment could include swing-down seats, stools, permanent chairs, or on-site training on those systems. Expectations for training should be portable chairs, as required. carefully defined in the purchase specifications. A.24.8 The enclosures for cabinets or storage areas could be roll-up-type A.25.2.13.2 Due to the extremely complicated nature of breathing air doors, hinged doors, or sliding doors, with protective latches to hold the compressor systems, training is a critical component of the safe use of the doors closed in transit. Synthetic netting could also be used in lieu of cabinet system. Expectations for training should be carefully defined in the purchase doors. specifications. A.24.9.1 The interior surfaces should be bright and easily cleaned. A.25.3 Selection of the type of drive for a compressor is one of the most important decisions that has to be made when choosing an air compressor. A.24.10.1 The purchaser needs to provide the manufacturer of the The compressor drive determines the cost of the compressor, installation apparatus with all the details of the equipment that is to be installed in the requirements, type of operating controls and procedures, and frequency communications area regardless of who is to install the equipment so that the and cost of routine service and maintenance. The type of compressor drive area can be laid out properly and appropriate cabinets and consoles can be also affects the cost of the fire apparatus when special generators, hydraulic provided to house this equipment. systems, PTOs, or other provisions have to be made in order to power the The purchaser should also specify the number, size, and type of conduits compressor. The following compressor drives are available: for wiring and antennas from the communications area to the driving (1) Electric drive compartment, power supply area, exterior surfaces, or secondary operational or control panels that are necessary to support the installation of equipment (2) Hydraulic drive by persons other than the body manufacturer. These conduits should have a pull wire installed to pull future wiring into place. (3) Gasoline or diesel drive A.24.11 Due to the cost of complying with the special power and installation (4) PTO drive (direct drive) requirements for most computer equipment, the use of office-type computers and peripheralsDRAFT in mobile applications is not cost-effective. Consideration (5) Dual drives should be given to the use of laptop equipment. This equipment was designed Dual drives, such as electric and hydraulic or electric and diesel, are to be transported and used in less than ideal environments. Laptop computers sometimes advantageous so as to permit mobile operation using one drive and printers can be powered from the vehicle’s 12-volt dc power supply or and in-station operation using the electric motor. The ability to operate in- from a 120-volt ac power supply. Laptops run off an internal battery that is station with an electric motor prevents leaving a running vehicle outside in rechargeable by one of these two power resources. The input power purity order to refill empty SCBA cylinders and air system storage vessels. requirements are not that difficult to meet. If filling is to be accomplished with both a compressor and an air storage The purchaser should obtain technical assistance from the manufacturer of system in a simultaneous operation, the amount of SCBA fills in the first 1 the computer equipment that is selected. The manufacturer’s engineering to 2 hours would be increase considerably. The number of SCBA fills from staff can advise the purchaser and the builder both in the areas of initial the air storage system should be calculated and added to the air compressor installation and actual start up of the installed computer system. fill rate. The total fills per hour would have to be an estimate since the A.25.2 The type of fire department air system and its size is determined by compressor could be refilling the air storage system during SCBA connection the number of SCBA units that will be used simultaneously, the number of and disconnection. SCBAs available, and the length of the event requiring the use of SCBA. If ONLY an air compressor is to be used for refilling SCBA cylinders, the The number of users wearing SCBAs simultaneously should be considered minimum size of the air compressor system needed can be determined based under both peak demand and continuous demand. Peak demand is the on the number of SCBA cylinders that need to be refilled per hour to meet maximum number of simultaneous SCBA users needed under the worst incident demand requirements. Table A.25.3(a) or Table A.25.3(b) can assist emergency conditions for which the fire department feels preparation is in determining the compressor size. necessary. Continuous demand is the minimum number of simultaneous SCBA users necessary to maintain operations for a long-term duration.

966 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Table A.25.3(a) Compressor Capacity Requirements (FAD) — US Table A.25.3(b) Compressor Capacity Requirements (FAD) — Metric customary units units Desired Type SCBA Desired Type SCBA SCBA Fills SCBA Fills per Hour 2216 psi 4500 4500 psi 2250 psi 3000 psi per Hour 15000 31000 310 155 200 45 cf psi 45 88 cf 72 cf 80 cf kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa cf 1275 L 1275 L 2500 L 2000 L 2250 L 5 3.8 3.8 7.4 6.0 6.7 5 108 108 210 170 190 10 7.5 7.5 14.7 12.0 13.4 10 212 212 416 340 380 15 11.3 11.3 22.0 18.0 20.0 15 320 320 623 510 566 20 15.0 15.0 29.4 24.0 26.7 20 425 425 833 680 756 25 18.8 18.8 36.7 30.0 33.4 25 532 532 1040 850 946 30 22.5 22.5 44.0 36.0 40.0 30 637 637 1020 1020 1133 35 26.5 26.5 51.4 42.0 46.7 35 750 750 1190 1189 1323 40 30.0 30.0 58.7 48.0 53.4 40 850 850 1360 1359 1512 45 33.8 33.8 66.0 54.0 60.0 45 957 957 1529 1529 1699 50 37.5 37.5 73.4 60.0 66.7 50 1062 1062 2078 1699 1889 55 41.3 41.3 80.7 66.0 73.4 55 1170 1170 2285 1869 2078 60 45.0 45.0 88.0 72.0 80.0 60 1274 1274 2492 2039 2265 65 48.8 48.8 95.4 78.0 86.7 65 1382 1382 2701 2209 2455 70 52.5 52.5 102.7 84.0 93.4 70 1487 1487 2908 2379 2645 75 56.3 56.3 110.0 90.0 100.0 75 1594 1594 3115 2549 2832 80 60.0 60.0 117.4 96.0 106.7 80 1699 1699 3324 2718 3021 85 63.8 63.8 124.7 102.0 113.4 85 1807 1807 3531 2888 3211 90 67.5 67.5 132.0 108.0 120.0 90 1911 1911 3738 3058 3398 95 71.3 71.3 139.4 114.0 126.7 95 2019 2019 3947 3228 3588 100 75.0 75.0 146.7 120.0 133.4 100 2124 2124 4154 3398 3777 Note: Typically, a single fill station is limited to approximately 40 SCBA cylinder refills per hour (per operator), normally with two to four fill hose. An additional fill station should be added for each additional 40 SCBA cylinders that are to be filled per hour. A.25.3.2.1 To reduce or prevent contaminated air from entering the compressor, consider the following: (1) Park the fire apparatus as far from the scene as is practical and attempt A.25.4.1 The purchaser might require a quality of air other than that used to remain upwind from smoke or chemical fumes. for fire fighting. In those situations, it is important that the purchaser specify the standards that such air quality has to meet. (2) Direct or extend fire apparatus and other engine exhaust outlets away from the point of compressor intake. Locate the air intake to the compressor A.25.4.3.2 The purification system should be located where it is easily as remotely as possible. accessible for service, preferably on slide-out tracks or in location where purifier cartridges and filter elements can be installed from the top. These A.25.3.3.2 Special air flow engineering, supplement fans, additional units can be remote mounted from the air compressor and operator’s panel. doors, and vents might be required for the release of heated air from the air compressor during long periods of operation. A.25.5.1 In some states in the United States, the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the Department These could include automatic operating doors in the roof of the apparatus, of Labor have been interpreted to require that DOT cylinders be used for manually opened roof doors, large electric driven exhaust fans, and so forth. mobile systems to transport air on state highways. If DOT cylinders are These extra provisionsDRAFT installed by the final stage installer could ensure not required by state regulations, ASME cylinders should be utilized if there is adequate cooling to keep the air compressor within the compressor the design of the apparatus presents a severe difficulty to the removal of manufacturer’s operating temperature range. cylinders for testing. A.25.3.6.2 A final stage pressure gauge might also be desired at the air A.25.6 Booster-type high-pressure air compressors, used in conjunction control panel, in addition to the gauge near compressor. The hourmeter with air tank storage arranged for air cascading, serve the purpose of could be located either at the compressor or the main operator’s panel. extracting greater quantities of air from high-pressure air storage systems. Interstage pressure gauges should be mounted at the compressor location. By adding a high-pressure air booster/amplifier to the system, the yield can Oil gauge or level indicator should be located at the compressor, with alarms be increased by over 100 percent. located at the main air operator’s panel. A.25.10 The size of the air supply piping, air compressor output, air hose A.25.3.6.3 The purchaser should consider a shorepower connection to size, and size of auxiliary storage reservoirs are of critical importance for permit external electric power supply to the electric motor. If a shore power supplying utility air-powered tools, confined space breathing air, and high- connection is provided, it is important to have a transfer switch to allow the pressure air supplies to remote locations. The purchaser needs to specify user to power the air compressor independently from either the onboard the following information about the air reels that are to be installed on the generator or shorepower. apparatus so that the manufacturer can design an appropriate system:

967 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA (1) Source of air supply to the air reel A.26.1.1 Winches are classified by manufacturers for different applications and uses. The purchaser might wish to specify winches meet requirements (2) Operating pressure range desired of SAE J706, Rating of Winches. Winches installed on fire apparatus are not designed nor suited for lifting or lowering personnel in rescue applications. (3) Type of air desired (low- or high-pressure, utility, or breathing air) Winches rated at under 20,000 lbf (89 kN) on fire apparatus are not designed (4) Cubic foot (cubic meter) of air output or cubic foot (cubic meter) of air for removal of apparatus from “buried” off-road conditions. A heavy-duty per minute required by air tools or equipment to be used and whether to be wrecker should be used for towing and lifting of fire apparatus. used alone or in combination A.26.2 Most electric (12-volt or 24-volt dc) winches used for fire apparatus (5) Specific air tools, air bags, and other devices to be used from the air applications are rated at between 5000 lb (22.2 kN) and 12,000 lbf (53.4 system kN) line pull. Smaller winches of the removable type might be specified by the purchaser. Hydraulic driven winches are typically rated for 6000 lb to The use of chassis air brake systems for utility air tools is not recommended. 30,000 lb (26.7 kN to 133.5 kN) line pull. Air brake system-supplied air outlets should be used only for nonemergency applications. Rescue air tools, air bags, or other emergency uses should not A.26.3.1.1 There is virtually no control over the speed of a single speed be supplied from air brake systems but from a high-pressure cascade tank electric winch — that is, the winch runs at the speed the load dictates, faster system or a high-capacity utility air compressor especially designed for with light loads and slower with heavy loads. air tool usage. SCBA or SCUBA air cylinders are suitable for intermittent air supply with limited airflow requirements. Where used for this purpose, Two-speed electric winches provide only for preselection of the winch gear additional SCBA cylinders should be defined and segregated on the fire ratio — that is, one gear ratio for pulling heavy loads, a second for light apparatus for such usage. loads — and are not designed for shifting under load to improve line speed. A.25.10.1 Generally, reels for use with air tools or air bags will be rated to a A.26.4.5 A fast-idle switch should also be provided. The switch should be gauge pressure of 300 psi (2000 kPa), while reels for use with high-pressure interlocked with the neutral position of the transmission to prevent accidental breathing air cascade systems will be rated to a gauge pressure of 6000 psi movement of the apparatus. (40,000 kPa). A.26.4.6.1 Completion of the engagement might require that the chassis To assist in differentiating different air pressures on reels on the same transmission be shifted into the proper gear (split shaft PTOs only). apparatus or on multiple apparatus within the fire department, it is suggested Annex B Specifying and Procuring Fire Apparatus the reels be painted distinctive colors. Suggested colors are as follows: This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is Blue — reels for utility air hose up to a gauge pressure of 300 psi (2000 included for informational purposes only. kPa) B.1 General. The purchase of new fire apparatus involves a major White — reels for breathing air hose up to a gauge pressure of 300 psi investment and should be treated as such. Fire apparatus are complex (2000 kPa) mechanical equipment that should not be purchased in a haphazard manner. A purchase should be made only after a detailed study of the fire Yellow — reels for breathing air hose from a gauge pressure of 301 psi to department’s apparatus needs, taking into consideration other equipment the 3000 psi (2001 kPa to 20,000 kPa) department owns or plans to buy. Red — reels for breathing air hose over a gauge pressure of 3000 psi The local fire chief and fire department staff know the conditions under (20,000 kPa) which the apparatus will be used. However, competent advice should A.25.10.8.2 Typical mechanic’s air tools consume between 35 ft3/min and also be obtained from knowledgeable and informed sources such as other 90 ft3/min (1 m3/min and 2.5 m3/min) of air. This rate of consumption is experienced fire service personnel, trade journals, training instructors, well beyond the capacity of most air compressors used to charge the chassis maintenance personnel, and fire equipment and component manufacturers. air brake system. For this reason, tools supplied from the chassis air system The fire insurance rating authority should also be consulted. deplete the air supply quickly and will not operate for more than a few minutes. Air tools operated from a high-capacity system, such as that used The study should look not only at current operations and risks to be protected for breathing air, will operate much longer before the source is depleted. but also at how these might change over the life of the fire apparatus. Departments with specific tools and estimated operation durations should B.1.1 Writing the Specifications. This standard provides the minimum provide the manufacturer with the air capacity requirements of those tools technical requirements that new fire apparatus are expected to meet. It is and the expected duration, including to what extent that is an intermittent recognized that many purchasers will desire additional features of operation operation, so that the manufacturer can provide the appropriate air source to over and above these minimum requirements. The requirements in this meet those needs. standard, together with the annex material, should be carefully studied. Details, such as anywhere that the apparatus being specified needs to exceed A.25.10.10 The intent of the low-pressure breathing air reel is to supply the minimum requirements or where a specific arrangement is desired, breathing air through up to 300 ft (90 m) of breathing air hose at an should be carefully defined in the specifications for the apparatus. This operating gauge pressure of 125 psi (862 kPa) at the outlet point for might include special performance requirements, defining the number of connection to specific types of breathing apparatus. These arrangements seats and the seating arrangement for fire fighters riding on the apparatus, or provide for a longer operating duration in toxic or oxygen-deficient providing space for extra hose or equipment the apparatus will be required atmospheres. to carry. Completion by the purchaser of the form shown in Figure B.1.1 A.25.11.1 The purchaser should evaluate conditions under which utility air should assist the purchaser in developing their specifications and provide the hose, high-pressure air hose, or low-pressure breathing air hose could be information required in the various sections of this document. used and adviseDRAFT the contractor if special hose is required. B.1.1.1 The first consideration in the design of a fire apparatus is the fixed A.25.11.3.1 The discharge end of any breathing air hose could have various equipment components. These major “support function” components could fittings, threads, or quick connections installed on the threaded end of represent the most concentrated and heaviest load elements of the vehicle. the discharge hose. The purchaser needs to specify the particular hose It is vital that these elements be laid out early in the initial designs and be termination, thread size, valve control, quick connection fitting, expected situated on the vehicle to provide for the following: application of hose, and other pertinent information if the manufacturer is to provide appropriate connections. (1) Good load distribution A.25.11.5 Confined space low-pressure hose supplying multiple users or (2) Balance (both front to rear and right to left) hose lengths greater than 300 feet (90 m) could require larger hose sizes. (3) Low center of gravity A.25.12 The size of the air supply piping, chassis air compressor cubic These fixed components could be located in exterior compartments or in feet per minute rating, and auxiliary air reservoir(s) cubic foot capacity the interior of the vehicle to be functional and organized in a layout to be are of critical importance in supplying non-emergency application utility user-friendly in emergency applications. Specifically, the following fixed air outlets. These air outlets could be used to fill truck tires, pressurized equipment are examples of this: water fire extinguishers, and so forth. Such air brake connections are not intended to be used for rescue air bags, air tools, air reels, and other rescue (1) Electrical generators applications, due to their limited duration, volume, and pressure. Air supply for low-pressure utility applications should be from dedicated air (2) Water tanks, fire pumps, and other fire-fighting equipment compressors or air cascade storage tanks. (3) Air cascades or compressors A.25.14 If the tests of some components of the apparatus are being certified by an independent third-party certification organization, the purchaser might (4) Reels of all types wish to specify that these tests also be certified by the independent third- party certification organization. 968 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

APPARATUS PURCHASING SPECIFICATION FORM Procurement Issues Date of bid opening: Purchaser’s name and address:

Contact name and telephone number:

Sealed bid envelope information, address, and identification marking:

The bidder is to honor the bid price for days. If an interim inspection trip(s) to the assembly plant is to be provided, indicate the number of trips and the number of participants: How many service and operation manuals are to be provided? Where is the delivery of the apparatus to occur?

Where and when is the acceptance to occur?

The operation and service training is to be conducted at for persons for days. Specify the details of any special payment plan or schedule required:

Is an approval drawing required? � Yes � No Is a bid bond required? � Yes � No What percent of the bid price? Is a performance bond required? � Yes � No What percent of the bid price? If an extendedDRAFT warranty on specific components is required, indicate which components and the length of the warranty:

Is a warranty bond required? � Yes � No In what amount?

NFPA 1901 (Page 1 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form.

969 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

�������������������������������� ���������������������������������������������������

����������������������������������������������������������� � ����������������������������������������������������������������������� � ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� � ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� � �������������������������������������������������������������������������� � ������������������������������� � ������������������������������������������� � ������������������������������������������ ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��������� ���� ����������������������������������������������������������������������

����������������������������������������������������������

�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

���������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

����������������������������

�������� ����������������������������¹⁄₂����������������������� ������� �¹⁄₂������ �������DRAFT�¹⁄₂������ ������� �¹⁄₂������ ������� �¹⁄₂������ ������� ������� ���������

NFPA 1901 (Page 2 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

970 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Testing and Acceptance If independent certification of tests is required for the pump system, aerial device, or other systems, what independent testing organization is to certify the tests?

Is anyone to witness the manufacturer’s predelivery tests?

Where are the road tests to be conducted?

What tests will the contractor be required to perform on delivery?

Apparatus Type — Chapters 5 through 11 This apparatus is to be used as a: � Pumper fire apparatus (see Chapter 5) � Initial attack fire apparatus (see Chapter 6) � Mobile water supply apparatus (see Chapter 7) � Aerial fire apparatus (see Chapter 8) � Quint fire apparatus (see Chapter 9) � Special service fire apparatus (see Chapter 10) � Mobile foam fire apparatus (see Chapter 11) � Other What DRAFTfunctions or services is this apparatus to perform?

Specify the maximum number of persons to ride on the apparatus:

NFPA 1901 (Page 3 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

971 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

������������� (See 5.7.2, 6.6.2, Section 7.6, 9.7.2, 10.4.2, and 11.8.1) Is suction hose required? � Yes � No Soft or hard: Size and length: Connection type and size: Mounting arrangement, bracket style, and location:

�������������� (See 5.7.1, 6.6.1, Section 8.7, 9.7.1, and 10.4.1) Specify the ground ladders to be carried on the apparatus:

������ ������ ���� ����������������������������������

Indicate whether a specific type or brand of ladder is desired:

������������������� �������� ���������� �����������������

The breathing apparatus is to be supplied by the � contractor � purchaser. SpecialDRAFT requirements for the breathing apparatus or its mounting:

��������������������������������(See Sections 5.8, 6.8, 7.7, 8.8, 9.8, 10.5, and 11.9) Miscellaneous equipment allowance if it exceeds the standard’s minimum weight:

NFPA 1901 (Page 4 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

972 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

• Attach a list of equipment and tools to be supplied by the contractor with the apparatus stating the item, quantity, where it is to be mounted or carried, the weight of each item, and its dimensions (L × W × D). • Attach a list of equipment and tools to be supplied by the fire department to be carried on the apparatus stating the item, quantity, where it is to be mounted or carried, contractor’s responsibility for mounting, the weight of each item, and its dimensions (L × W × D). • Attach a list of equipment and tools that might be carried on the apparatus in the future stating the item, quantity, the desired mounting location or compartment where it is likely to be carried, the weight of each item, and its dimensions (L × W × D). • Attach a list of fixed and permanent components required on the apparatus stating the item, quantity, weight of each, and dimensions (L × W × H), as well as the location where it is to be carried. If reserve compartment space is required to accommodate the equipment in the list above, indicate those requirements:

Chassis and Vehicle Components — Chapter 12 Desired chassis make and model or style:

Specify the desired location of the engine: Type of propulsion engine: Is an electric fuel pump or repriming pump required? � Yes � No Specify any special lubrication system requirements:

Specify any special cooling system requirements:

Type of coolant required: Is a manual emergency engine shutdown required? � Yes � No Type of fuel filters required:

Type of air filters required:

Specify the exiting location of the exhaust system: SpecifyDRAFT the type of brake system required:

Is an auxiliary brake system required? � Yes � No Specify the type: Specify the style and type of tires required:

NFPA 1901 (Page 5 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

973 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Indicate whether cast spoke, steel disc, or aluminum wheels are required:

Are rear fender liners required? � Yes � No Are tire chains to be used? � Yes � No Should the apparatus be designed to operate off paved roads? � Yes � No Specify whether an increased underbody clearance is required:

Specify whether a greater angle of approach is required: Specify whether a greater angle of departure is required: Specify the steering wheel’s required angle turning if it exceeds the standard’s minimum:

Specify whether a drive axle traction control or no-spin differential is required:

Specify whether rear wheel steering is required: Specify whether a special suspension system is required: Is an automatic or manual transmission required?

Specify the fuel tank capacity required: gal Must tow hooks be accessible without opening compartment doors? � Yes � No Are a rear license plate bracket and light required? � Yes � No Special cab trim features:

Low-Voltage Electrical Systems and Warning Devices — Chapter 13 Indicate whether a battery charger, conditioner, or a polarized receptacle is to be provided: If a built-inDRAFT battery charger or conditioner is provided, indicate the required charging rate: Specify the location of the receptacle for the battery charger or conditioner:

Is a second “battery on” pilot light on the outside of the vehicle required? � Yes � No Where? Is a dual battery system required? � Yes � No NFPA 1901 (Page 6 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

974 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���������������������������

������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

������������������������� �������� ��������������� ����� ������������������� ����������� ������������������� ������������������� ������������������� ���������������

�����������������������������������������

���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �����������������������������������������������������

����������������������������������������������������������������������������

DRAFT����������������������������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������

����������������������������������������������������������������������

NFPA 1901 (Page 7 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

975 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Is a special hearing protection system required? � Yes � No Make, model, or type: Special requirements:

Specify any special arrangements required for carrying tools or equipment within the driving or crew area:

Specify any special step or handrail arrangements required:

If a tiller-steered apparatus is to be provided, specify the type of communication system required between the tiller operator and the apparatus driver:

Is a tilt or telescoping steering column required? Specify any extra cab instrument panel features required:

Specify the type and style of driving compartment mirrors:

Body, Compartments, and Equipment Mounting — Chapter 15 Body material:

Compartment capacity required: ft3 Specify any special compartment features required: SpecifyDRAFT whether a special compartment floor material or covering is required: Specify the type and style of compartment doors required:

Specify the style of door latches, locks, or stays required:

NFPA 1901 (Page 8 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

976 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Specify the type of compartment lighting required:

Radio equipment to be used: Make and model: Mounting location for radio: Mounting location for control(s) and speaker(s):

Type of body tread plate material required:

Type of step and platform material required:

Color of apparatus: Striping and decoration required:

Miscellaneous body trim:

Is a cab and body rustproofing treatment required?

����������������������������������������� (See Sections 5.6, 6.5, 7.5, 8.6, 9.6, and 11.7)

������ ���� �������� �����������

������������������������������������������ (See Sections 5.6, 6.5, 7.5, 8.6, 9.6, and 11.7) ������DRAFT���� �������� �����������

If a hose bed cover(s) is desired, specify type:

Is the fire-fighting system to be a slip-on unit? � Yes � No

NFPA 1901 (Page 9 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

977 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Specify the lifting arrangement required:

Specify the anchoring system required:

Fire Pump — Chapter 16 Industrial Supply Pump — Chapter 18 Is a fire pump required? � Yes � No Is an industrial supply pump required? � Yes � No Pump rated capacity: gpm Number of pump stages required: Pump type: Pump location: How is the pump to be driven? Type of engine to drive pump if other than the chassis propulsion engine:

Pump testing authority:

If pump and roll is required, specify: Flow gpm at psi Vehicle speed mph Type of primer system:

Special pump performance requirements: If altitude over 2000 ft (610 m), specify altitude: If lift over 10 ft (3 m), specify lift: If through more than 20 ft (6 m) of suction hose, specify length: Do local water conditions require special materials for pump construction and piping?

Location of pump operator’s panel: Pump panel and gauge panel material: Type ofDRAFT intake and discharge valve controls desired:

Specify the size of the master gauges:

Are individual line pressure gauges required? � Yes � No If yes, are there any special requirements?

NFPA 1901 (Page 10 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

978 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Are individual line flowmeters required? � Yes � No If yes, are there any special requirements?

Are any special gauges, instruments, or other features required at the pump operator’s panel?

Are special pump and piping features required to deal with extremely low temperatures?

Is the intake relief system to be adjustable at the pump panel? � Yes � No If no, where:

Is a pump pressure governor or a relief valve to be supplied?

������������ Indicate for each pump intake: ���� ������������������ �������� ������������

Are special adapters required on the pump intakes?

����������������� List the 2¹⁄₂-in. or larger discharge outlets required: ��������DRAFT���� ������������������ �������� ����������������

NFPA 1901 (Page 11 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

979 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

��������������������������������������������� �������� ���� ������������������ �������� ����������������

If a deck gun is required, indicate: Type: Mounting location: Piping size and arrangement: Is pump panel color coding required? � Yes � No Is a booster reel required? � Yes � No How many reels? Location: Hose size and length: Reel rewind type: Piping to reel:

��������������������������� Is an auxiliary pump required? � Yes � No Type of auxiliary pump operations:

Auxiliary pump performance:

Type of auxiliary pump:

How is the auxiliary pump to be driven?

AuxiliaryDRAFT pump location:

Is the auxiliary pump to be connected to the fire pump? � Yes � No Do local water conditions require special materials for pump construction and piping?

NFPA 1901 (Page 12 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

980 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

��������������������������������� ���� ������������������ �������� ������������

�������������������������������� �������� ���� ������������������ �������� ����������������

Where are the auxiliary pump controls to be located?

Is a booster reel required? � Yes � No How many reels? Location: Hose size and length: Reel rewind type: Piping to reel:

������������������������ Is a water tank required? � Yes � No Water tank capacity (See Sections 5.4, 6.3, 7.3, 8.4, and 9.4): Tank construction material:

Is an internal coating required? � Yes � No Is a removableDRAFT tank lid required? � Yes � No Type of tank level indicator(s): Location of additional tank level indicators:

Tank to pump flow rate required: Pump to tank fill rate required:

NFPA 1901 (Page 13 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

981 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Is a tank dump valve required? � Yes � No If yes: Style of valve: Size: Performance required: Location: Type of connector: Is a direct tank fill required? � Yes � No If yes: Style of valve: Size: Performance required: Location: Type of connector:

Aerial Devices — Chapter 20 Is an aerial device required? � Yes � No Indicate whether the aerial device is to be an aerial ladder, elevating platform, aerial ladder platform, or water tower:

Aerial Ladder Rated vertical height required: ft Rated horizontal reach required: ft Capacity rating (tip load) required: lb (250-lb minimum) Location of any secondary speaker/microphone required on the aerial ladder:

Is a prepiped waterway required? � Yes � No If yes, to what ladder section is the pipe to be extended?

What brand and model of monitor is required (must flow at least 1000 gpm at 100 psi)?

If the monitor is power operated, are additional sets of controls beyond those required at the ladder operatorDRAFT’s position required? � Yes � No If yes, where? What make and model of nozzle is required?

Indicate the external inlet arrangement desired, including size, type, and number of inlets, and valving arrangement:

NFPA 1901 (Page 14 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

982 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Is a three-lever or a single-lever control system required?

List any aerial ladder equipment or features required:

Elevating Platform and Aerial Ladder Platform Rated vertical height required: ft Rated horizontal reach required: ft Capacity rating (tip load) required: lb (750-lb minimum) Is a breathing air system to be supplied to the platform? � Yes � No If yes, are there any special requirements, brands, or models for the components of the breathing air system desired?

Specify the number of monitors to be supplied on the platform: What brand and model of monitor is required (must flow at least 1000 gpm at 100 psi)? What make and model of nozzle is required?

Is a hose connection to be provided on the platform from the water delivery system? � Yes � No If yes, what size? Are any special arrangements to be provided for hose lines from the platform water delivery system?

Indicate the external inlet arrangement required, including size, type, and number of inlets, and valving arrangement:

Is a three-leverDRAFT or a single-lever control system required?

List any elevating platform equipment or features required:

NFPA 1901 (Page 15 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

983 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Water Tower Is the water tower to be telescoping, articulating, or both?

Rated vertical height required: ft Rated horizontal reach required: ft Indicate waterway capacity required if in excess of 1000 gpm:

What brand and model of monitor is required (must flow at least 1000 gpm at 100 psi)?

What make and model of nozzle is required?

Where are the monitor and nozzle controls to be located?

Indicate the external inlet arrangement desired, including size, type, and number of inlets, and valving arrangement:

Is a three-lever or a single-lever control system required?

List any water tower equipment or features required:

Foam Proportioning System — Chapter 21 Is a foam proportioning system required? � Yes � No Type of foam(s) to be used:

Foam concentrate storage capacity: DischarDRAFTge Outlets to Be Used with Foam and Their Performance Discharge Performance

NFPA 1901 (Page 16 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

984 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Type of foam system required:

Is an outside foam system inlet or pickup required? � Yes � No Type:

���������������������������������������� Is a CAFS required? � Yes � No What is the total SCFM required? What type of compressor and driver is required?

What is the total water pump capacity required?

Specify the type of system controls and interlocks required:

����������������������������������������������������������������

��������� ����������� ��������������������

Specify whether automatic water and air pressure tracking is required:

Specify whether an airflow meter is required (SCFM): Specify the type of wet/dry control required:

������������������������������������������� Is a line voltage (120/240-volt) electrical system required? � Yes � No Type ofDRAFT generating source (ac or dc, cycles): Capacity of generating source:

Location of generating source:

Mounting of generating source:

NFPA 1901 (Page 17 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

985 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

����������������������������

����������������������

�������� ���������� ������������������� ��������

����������������������������������

������������������ ���������������

���������������������������������

���������� �������� ������������ �������������

���������������������

������ ������ ������ ������ ����������������� �������� �������DRAFT ���������������������� ���������������� ������������ �������������

��������������������������������������������������������� � ��������������������������������������������

NFPA 1901 (Page 18 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

986 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Command and Communications — Chapter 24 Is a separate command area required? � Yes � No Is the area to be enclosed by walls and doors?

Size of the area length width or ft2 Number of persons to be seated and able to work in the area: Is special lighting required?

What communications equipment is to be operational in the command and communications area?

List the make, model, and whether the contractor or purchaser is to provide and install the equipment:

What computer equipment is to be operational in the command and communications area?

List the make, model, and whether the contractor or purchaser is to provide and install the equipment:

What other equipment is to be operational in the command and communications area?

List the make, model, and whether the contractor or purchaser is to provide and install the equipment:

Is external video equipment to be used on the apparatus? � Yes � No If yesDRAFT, where is it to be mounted? Air Systems — Chapter 25 Is an air system required? � Yes � No What is the function of the air system? � Refill SCBA cylinders � Supply remote breathing air � Supply high-pressure breathing air hose � Supply utility air

NFPA 1901 (Page 19 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

987 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Is a cascade system to be supplied? � Yes � No How many SCBA cylinders are to be filled? What is the size of the cylinders to be filled? ft3 To what pressure are the cylinders to be filled? psi Is a compressor required? � Yes � No If yes, what free air delivery (FAD) rating is required? ft3 at psi Is a SCBA refill station required? � Yes � No If yes, what is the location of the refill station?

Number of refill lines: Is a fragmentation box required? � Yes � No

Air Hose Requirements For each air hose required, specify the following: (a) Discharge flow required in ft3/min (b) Discharge pressure required in psi (c) Whether breathing air or utility air is to be supplied (d) Length of hose in ft (e) Whether hose is to be stored on a reel (f) Mounting location of reel, if applicable (g) Fitting or device at the end of the hose

Winches — Chapter 26 Is a winch required? � Yes � No What is the single line pull rating required? What is the wire rope length required? Is the power source for the winch to be electric or hydraulic?

Specify the winch location:

Type ofDRAFT control required:

Location of control:

NFPA 1901 (Page 20 of 20)

B.1.1 Purchasing Specification Form. (continued)

988 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA B.1.1.2 A major support function of any fire apparatus, no matter the type, is community. The specifications should clearly identify the arrangement for the portable equipment. This is why this document places so much emphasis furnishing the training, including where it is to be provided, its duration, on final GVWR and carrying capacity of the completed vehicle, which and what training aids, such as video tapes or training manuals, are to be includes both fixed and portable equipment. furnished. The listings of portable and fixed equipment are so variable, depending on the B.1.1.8 The purchaser should also define in the specifications the warranty mission of the vehicle, that the fire department needs to measure and weigh desired for the completed apparatus. The warranty is a written guarantee their specific equipment. of the integrity of the apparatus or its components that defines the manufacturer’s responsibility within a given time period. The warranty The fire department should classify the equipment as follows: is sometimes extended for a second warranty period beyond the terms of the basic warranty for specific components, such as the engine, pump, (1) Existing — equipment they currently own that will be carried frame, water tank, and so forth. If a secondary manufacturer is involved in (2) Proposed — new equipment that will be carried as the apparatus goes in modifying components that are warranted by the original manufacturer, the service responsibility for warranty work should be clearly understood by the original manufacturer, the secondary manufacturer, the contractor, and the purchaser. (3) Future — equipment that might be carried in the future B.1.1.9 The purchaser might want a warranty bond to ensure that any In this way, a chassis with an adequate GVWR can be provided to ensure that warranty work will be performed, even if the apparatus manufacturer the vehicle will not be overloaded in the future. should go out of business. A warranty bond is a third-party secured bond established by the manufacturer before delivery of a vehicle to guarantee B.1.1.3 After determining the list of present, proposed, and future equipment, workmanship, quality of material, or other stated performance of the vehicle the fire department should analyze the “actual” cubic footage (cubic meters) of components. space necessary for the equipment. The actual usable space in compartments also should be considered, in addition to the individual cubic feet (cubic B.1.1.10 Finally, it is recommended that the fire chief, fire department meters) for each item of equipment to be carried. The following factors might staff, or committee assigned to develop the specifications consult with the increase the required cubic footage (cubic meters) of storage space required purchaser’s attorney, engineer, and other appropriate officials for assistance and thus the size of the vehicle body: in developing the detailed specifications. (1) Compartment door and box pan interference B.1.2 Obtaining and Studying Proposals. When the specifications are complete, they should be distributed to apparatus manufacturers and (2) Mounting implications contractors with a request for bids or proposals to furnish the specified apparatus. The request should specify a date, time, and place for the (3) Compartment shelving formal opening of the bids. This date should allow at least 1 month for (4) Slide trays the engineering departments of apparatus manufacturers to study the specifications and estimate the cost of the apparatus. More time could be (5) Components of the body such as compartment flanges, notches, and other required if engineering drawings of the proposed apparatus are required. interferences that affect removal of equipment from compartments B.1.2.1 The request also should state the time period during which the (6) Ventilation of generator, air compressor, or other equipment purchaser expects the bidder to honor the bid price and whether a bid bond is required. A bid bond guarantees that if a contract is offered to the bidder B.1.1.4 Where local operating conditions necessitate apparatus of unusual within the defined time period, the bidder will enter into the contract under design, the purchaser needs to define carefully the special requirements the terms of the bid. in the specifications. Height, width, under-vehicle clearance, wheelbase, turning radius, length, and so forth might occasionally need special attention. B.1.2.2 It is recommended that a pre-bid meeting be held between the For example, a community with many narrow, winding streets should have purchaser of a piece of fire apparatus and the apparatus manufacturers apparatus capable of readily negotiating switchbacks without delay. or their agents prior to the official release of the apparatus specifications. Such a meeting is designed to allow for a detailed review of the draft B.1.1.5 This standard is designed to ensure sound equipment that is capable of specifications by all present at the meeting. Problems with the specifications, good performance, with the inclusion of restrictive features only where needed ideas on how to provide the purchaser with the desired apparatus in other to specify minimum requirements. The tests are an important feature and the ways, clarification of the purchaser’s intent, and other questions can be results should be carefully analyzed to ensure that the completed apparatus resolved prior to the formal bid process. The meeting can often solve meets the specified performance. misunderstandings or problems prior to their occurrence. Since the passage of Public Law 89-563, the National Traffic and Motor B.1.2.3 With a performance specification, it is usually possible to obtain Vehicle Safety Act of 1966, the federal government has adopted certain motor more favorable bids, since there is genuine competition and the specifications vehicle safety standards applicable to all manufacturers of trucks, including are not overly restrictive. The bid should be accompanied by a detailed fire apparatus. It is unlawful for a manufacturer to deliver a truck not in description of the apparatus, a list of equipment to be furnished, and compliance with these federal standards. These federal safety standards are other construction and performance details, including, but not limited to, frequently changed, and their provisions make the incorporation of certain estimated weight, wheelbase, principal dimensions, transmission, and axle features and devices mandatory. Apparatus manufacturers face substantial ratios. The purpose of the contractor’s specifications is to define what the penalties for infraction of these rules and, therefore, cannot build apparatus contractor intends to furnish and deliver to the purchaser. to specifications that would require them to perform unlawfully or to delete required items or to include any that are illegal. B.1.2.4 Manufacturers’ proposals might include amendments and exceptions. Frequently, these changes are offered to meet price requirements Additional requirements are placed on both apparatus and engine or because individual manufacturers prefer to build apparatus in a manner manufacturers DRAFTby the Clean Air Act, which is enforced by the Environmental more convenient to them. If the intent of the original specification is not Protection Agency (EPA). These EPA standards have resulted in major changed and the bid is favorable, the purchaser should consider accepting changes in the performance of many engines. Neither the engine manufacturer these amendments with the approval of the purchasing authority. On the nor the apparatus manufacturer are permitted to modify engines once they are other hand, extreme care should be taken to avoid allowing exceptions that certified to EPA standards. Because of the EPA standards, it is often necessary merely devalue the apparatus and give one bidder an advantage. to install larger engines than might have been previously used in order to obtain the same apparatus performance. B.1.2.5 The purchaser should study the proposals, look for deviations from the specifications, and obtain clarification where necessary. If the purchaser B.1.1.6 Many apparatus purchasers find it favorable to provide for an interim has specifically provided for alternatives when calling for bids, extra care inspection at the apparatus assembly plant. The advantages of such a provision should be exercised when evaluating the proposals, as combinations of include the opportunity to evaluate construction prior to final assembly and complicated bid information will need careful analysis. The financial painting. The specifications should detail the particulars of such an inspection arrangements, a delivery date, and the method of delivery should be trip. stipulated and agreed to by the purchasing authority. The chief of the fire department (or a designated representative) normally B.1.3 Awarding the Contract. With the award of a contract, it is important exercises the acceptance authority following satisfactory completion of for the purchasing authority to understand exactly who the contract is with tests and inspections for compliance with purchase specifications. The and the nature of the relationship with the apparatus manufacturer. Some specifications should provide details of delivery expectations, including the apparatus manufacturers work through a dealer network where the dealer desired training, the required acceptance tests, and who is responsible for the purchases the apparatus from a manufacturer, including taking title, and then various costs associated with the delivery and acceptance. resells the apparatus to the purchasing authority. Other manufacturers work B.1.1.7 Training of designated fire department personnel is essential to through sales agents or representatives who solicit and negotiate a contract ensure that the purchaser and user are aware of, and instructed in, the proper between a purchasing authority and a manufacturer but who never take title operation, care, and maintenance of the apparatus acquired. This training to the apparatus. This difference can affect where the responsibility lies for should provide the initial instruction on the new apparatus. The training is the proper fulfillment of the contract. typically delivered by a qualified representative of the contractor in the user’s 989 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA B.1.3.1 Some purchasing authorities require a performance bond as part C.1.2 An Excel spreadsheet that contains the information shown in Figure of the contract. A performance bond is a bond executed in connection C.1 can be downloaded from the FAMA website, www.fama.org, and with a contract that guarantees that the contractor will fulfill all of the customized to show only the equipment a department expects to carry. undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements contained in There are additional columns on the spreadsheet to assist the fire department the contract. Should the contractor fail to meet the terms of the contract, the in maintaining records of the equipment it carries on the apparatus. bonding company will be responsible for the difference in cost between the original contract price and the new price of the apparatus when it has to be Annex D History of NFPA 1901 supplied by another contractor. This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is B.1.3.2 Before signing a contract, the purchaser should make certain that included for informational purposes only. the successful bidder has a complete and thorough understanding of the specifications. If there are any disagreements, these should be resolved D.1 History of Specification. in writing and made part of the contract. If any changes are agreed upon, A report of the NFPA Committee on Fire Engines adopted at the 1906 they should be stated in writing and be signed by both parties. The contract NFPA Annual Meeting included many of the provisions and test procedures should not be signed until the fire chief (or a designee) and the purchasing since followed in standards for fire department pumping apparatus. authority are satisfied. At the convention of the International Association of Fire Engineers in B.1.4 Acceptance. 1911, the Committee of Exhibits conducted some performance tests on B.1.4.1 When the apparatus is ready for delivery and acceptance, the automobile pumping engines. The following year, with the assistance of purchaser has a responsibility to check the completed apparatus carefully engineers of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, tests were conducted against the specifications, the contract, and the requirements of this on pumping engines discharging under net pump pressures of 120 psi, 200 document to ensure all that was required is being delivered. This includes psi, and 250 psi. By the 1913 convention of the International Association of witnessing any required acceptance tests and verifying that the gross Fire Engineers, the committee had developed a standard test procedure of vehicle weight and the axle weight distribution are within the chassis and specified duration. axle ratings. The Delivery Inspection Form shown as Figure B.1.4.1(a) and The first national specification on municipal fire apparatus was NFPA the As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet shown as Figure 19, Automobile Fire Apparatus, Suggested Specifications for Combination B.1.4.1(b) can be useful in the inspection process. The weight analysis of in- Pumping Engine and Hose Wagon, and was adopted by the National Fire service fire apparatus is critical to the safe operation of the apparatus. Protection Association in 1914. This was followed in 1916 by specifications adopted by NFPA covering an automobile combination chemical and hose B.1.4.2 The purchaser also should arrange for any training included as part wagon and an automobile service ladder truck. These specifications received of the delivery and ensure that it is properly delivered. the endorsement of the Committee on Fire Department Engineering of the Only when the purchaser is totally satisfied that the contract has been International Association of Fire Engineers and were adopted and published fulfilled should payment be authorized. in 1920 by the National Board of Fire Underwriters. The work of the original NFPA Committee on Automobile Apparatus was suspended in 1920. A new NFPA Committee on Municipal Fire Apparatus was organized in 1938, and NFPA adopted revised editions in 1938, 1939, and 1942. In 1948, Table B.1.4.1 Typical Hose Weight Data the present Committee on Fire Department Equipment was organized. The scope of the committee was broadened to include fire department tools Nominal Hose Diameter Weight per Unit Length and appliances as well as motorized fire apparatus for both municipal and in. mm lb per foot kg per meter rural service. There have been numerous revisions of the standard to keep it abreast of current practice, and editions were issued in 1949, 1950, 1951, 1 25 0.30 0.45 1952, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1960, 1961, 1963, and 1965. 1 1/ 38 0.38 0.57 The work of this committee has been an outstanding example of 2 cooperation among the various fire service organizations concerned with 3 1 /4 44 0.43 0.64 standards for fire department apparatus and equipment. A chief engineer of the former National Board of Fire Underwriters was chairman of the original 2 50.8 0.50 0.75 committee. A very significant contribution of the National Board for over half a century was the listing of thousands of pump and engine combinations 2 1/ 65 0.70 1.04 2 that met the specified pumper performance requirements. Recognition is 3 76.2 1.00 1.49 also due the various insurance rating and inspection bureaus, most of which are now part of the Insurance Services Office, whose representatives have 1 witnessed the acceptance tests of apparatus built under these specifications. 3 /2 90 1.20 1.79 4 100 0.85 1.27 The International Association of Fire Chiefs has actively participated in this work since 1912. A fire chief has served as chairman of the committee 4 1/ 114.3 0.90 1.34 responsible for these specifications since 1938. In 1952, the Technical 2 Committee of the Fire Apparatus Manufacturers Association was reactivated 5 125 1.10 1.64 and has made significant contributions to each subsequent edition of these specifications. 6 150 1.35 2.01 In 1965, the American Insurance Association (AIA), who replaced the DRAFTNational Board of Fire Underwriters, decided to terminate its field testing Annex C Weights and Dimensions for Common Equipment by Rating Bureaus and record-keeping by the AIA. The Fire Department Equipment Committee in conjunction with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is (UL) and the Technical Committee of the Fire Apparatus Manufacturers included for informational purposes only. Association worked with AIA to transfer the testing program to UL. This program appeared in the standard in the 1966 edition and has been an C.1 The NFPA in cooperation with the Fire Apparatus Manufacturers accepted testing program. Association (FAMA) has provided the worksheet shown as Figure C.1 for use by the purchaser in calculating the portable equipment load anticipated Further revisions were completed and editions issued in 1967, 1968, to be carried on the apparatus. In order to ensure the apparatus chassis is 1969, 1970, 1971, and 1973. In 1975, the numerical designation of the capable of carrying the installed equipment (pump, tank, aerial device, etc.) document was changed to NFPA 1901 in a general renumbering of public fire plus the specified portable equipment load with an appropriate margin of protection standards, and the name was changed to Standard on Automotive safety, the purchaser should use this worksheet to provide apparatus vendors Fire Apparatus. Partial revisions were made and new editions were issued in with the weight of the equipment they anticipate carrying when the apparatus 1979 and 1985. is placed in service. In 1991, NFPA 1901 was extensively rewritten and split into four C.1.1 The approximate measurements and weights of equipment that are documents. These documents covered pumper fire apparatus (NFPA 1901), commonly available and used during fire department operations are listed initial attack fire apparatus (NFPA 1902), mobile water supply fire apparatus on the worksheet. The purchaser should fill in the number of units of each (NFPA 1903), and aerial ladder and elevating platform fire apparatus (NFPA piece of equipment they anticipate carrying in the column title Quantity and 1904). multiply that by the weight per unit to get the total weight. The dimensions of each piece of equipment are given to assist in planning compartment size or the location on the fire apparatus. Where the purchaser desires to carry specific equipment in a specific compartment, that compartment designation should be shown in the column titled Compartment Location.

990 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

NFPA 1901 ���� ��� Paragraph ����� ����������� ������ ������ ���

12.3.1.1 Brakes Anti-lock brake system functions. � � � 12.3.1.6.2 Brakes Parking brake grade holding certification provided. � � � 12.3.1.7 Brakes Stopping distance capability certification provided. � � � 12.3.1.8 Brakes Auxiliary braking system functions (required above � � � 36,000 lb GVWR). 12.3.2.3 Approach angle Angle of approach at least 8 degrees. � � � 12.3.2.3 Departure angle Angle of departure at least 8 degrees. � � � 13.8.16 Warning lights Manufacturer’s certification provided. � � � 13.8.12.1 Warning lights — responding No yellow lights in Zone A in the “calling for right � � � of way” mode. 13.8.12.1 Warning lights — responding No white lights in Zone C in the “calling for right � � � of way” mode. 13.8.12.1 Warning lights — blocking No white lights in any zone in the “blocking right � � � of way” mode. 13.9.1.1 Audible warning Sirens certified to SAE J1849. � � � 15.9.3 Reflective trim Side of vehicle has stripe at least 4 in. high and � � � 50 percent of vehicle length long. 15.9.3 Reflective trim Front of vehicle has stripe at least 4 in. high and � � � 25 percent of the front width wide. 15.9.3 Reflective trim Rear of vehicle has stripe at least 4 in. high and � � � 50 percent of the vehicle width wide. 15.7.1.1 Step height First step no more than 24 in. and no more than � � � 18 in. between any other step. 15.7.1.2 Step size All steps have minimum area of 35 in2. 15.7.1.3 Step size All steps have 8 in. clearance between leading edge � � � and any obstruction. 15.7.1.2 Step size All steps can have a 5-in. diameter disk placed on � � � them without overlapping the edge. 15.7.1.4 Ladder rungs All ladder rungs have at least 7 in. between them � � � and the body or other obstruction. 15.7.2 Step capacity Steps, platforms and ladders survive a 500-lb load � � � without permanently bending. 15.7.3 Step surfaces Step surface slip-resistance documentation provided. � � � 15.8.1 Handrails Handrails are provided at each entrance to a driving � � � or crew compartment. 15.8.1 Handrails Handrails are provided at each position where steps � � � or ladders for climbing are provided. 15.8.3 DRAFTHandrails All handrails have a diameter greater than 1.00 in. � � � and less than 1.62 in. 15.8.3 Handrails All handrails have 2 in. of clearance to any other � � � surface. 15.8.4 Handrails All handrails are design to reduce the possibility � � � of hand slippage. 5.3.3 Pump operator’s panel Platform for pump operator provided — pumper. � � �

NFPA 1901 (Page 1 of 4)

Figure B.1.4.1(a) Delivery Inspection Form

991 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

NFPA 1901 ���� ��� Paragraph ����� ����������� ������ ������ ���

8.3.1 Pump operator’s panel Platform for pump operator provided — aerial. � � � 9.2.3 Pump operator’s panel Platform for pump operator provided — quint. � � � 11.3.3 Pump operator’s panel Platform for pump operator provided — mobile foam. � � � 20.18.2 Aerial operator’s station Platform for aerial device operator provided. � � � 16.7.9 Pump operator’s panel All discharge connections at pump panel are � � � 2.5 in. or less. 16.9.2 Pump operator’s panel All gauges, intakes, outlets, and controls are � � � illuminated. 13.10.3.3 Pump operator’s panel Priming lubricant or reservoir area is illuminated. � � � 13.10.3.3 Pump operator’s panel Pump compartment is illuminated. � � � 16.11.2 Pump operator’s panel Engine throttle is between 42 in. and 72 in. above � � � operator platform. 16.12.1 Pump operator’s panel The instruments listed in 16.12.1 are all located on � � � the pump panel. 16.12.1.3 Pump operator’s panel Visible and audible warnings are provided for low � � � engine oil pressure and high coolant temperature. 16.12.2.1 Pump operator’s panel Master intake and pump discharge gauges no more � � � than 8 in. apart edge to edge. 16.12.2.1 Pump operator’s panel Master intake is located to the left of the pump � � � discharge gauge. 16.12.2.1.4 Pump operator’s panel Gauges are labeled as “pump intake” and “pump � � � discharge”. 16.12.3.2 Pump operator’s panel Discharge instrumentation is within 6 in. of � � � the control. 14.1.3.4 Warning placards A seat belts required placard is visible from every � � � seating position. 14.1.2 Warning placards Cab occupant capacity placard provided and visible � � � to the driver. 14.3.4.1 Warning placards Placard indicating the height of the vehicle is visible � � � to the driver. 5.3.4 Warning placards Electrocution hazard placard is visible to pump � � � operator — pumper. 8.3.2 Warning placards Electrocution hazard placard is visible to pump � � � operator — aerial. 9.2.4 Warning placards Electrocution hazard placard is visible to pump � � � operator — quint. 11.3.4 Warning placards Electrocution hazard placard is visible to pump � � � DRAFT operator — mobile foam. 20.18.3 Warning placards Electrocution hazard placard is visible to aerial � � � device operator. 13.7.4 Warning placards Placard warning that riding is prohibited should be � � � visible at rear platform. 13.7.4 Warning placards Placard warning that riding is prohibited should be � � � visible at cross walkway. 16.6.1.3 Warning placards If inlet at pump operator’s position is valved, a serious � � � injury or death placard is visible.

NFPA 1901 (Page 2 of 4)

Figure B.1.4.1(a) Delivery Inspection Form (continued)

992 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

NFPA 1901 ���� ��� Paragraph ����� ����������� ������ ������ ���

13.11 Hazard light Red light in driving compartment flashes if the � � � parking brake is released and compartment doors are open. 13.11 Hazard light Red light in driving compartment flashes if the � � � parking brake is released and a ladder or equipment rack is down. 13.11 Hazard light Red light in driving compartment flashes if the � � � parking brake is released and a powered light tower is raised. 13.11 Hazard light Red light in driving compartment flashes if the � � � parking brake is released and outriggers are not stowed. 13.11 Hazard light Red light in driving compartment flashes if the � � � parking brake is released and other hazard is deployed. 13.10.1 Work lighting Rear of apparatus is illuminated for working. � � � 13.10.1.1 Work lighting Hose bed is illuminated for working. � � � 13.10.2 Ground lighting Ground lighting is provided at areas where personnel � � � will be stepping or climbing. 13.10.2.1 Ground lighting Ground lighting illuminates automatically with the � � � cab doors. 4.10.1 Controls and gauges All controls, switches, instructions, gauges, and � � � instruments needed for operation are illuminated. 14.1.1 Cab occupant protection Driving and crew compartment(s) is fully enclosed. � � � 14.1.3 Driving and crew compartment Seat belts are provided for each driving and crew � � � occupant protection compartment occupant. 14.1.6 Driving and crew compartment Noise level maximum 90 db certification provided. � � � occupant protection 14.1.7 Driving and crew compartment Headroom at each seating position meets 14.1.7 � � � occupant protection guideline. 14.1.9.1 Driving and crew compartment Each SCBA bracket is provided with a retaining � � � occupant protection device. 14.1.9.2 Driving and crew compartment SCBA bracket test documentation provided. � � � occupant protection 14.1.10.1 Driving and crew compartment All equipment required to be used during a response � � � occupant protection is contained or fastened. 14.1.10.2 Driving and crew compartment Equipment mounting documentation provided. � � � occupant protection 13.9.2 Driving and crew compartment Audible warning devices and sirens are mounted � � � DRAFToccupant protection low and in front of vehicle. 4.9.2 Personnel protection Isolation or insulation is provided to protect personnel � � � from electrical shock. 4.9.1 Personnel protection Guards or shields are provided around hot, moving, � � � or rotating parts. 15.4.2 Powered equipment rack The rack has a device to lock it in the stowed position. � � � 15.4.4 Powered equipment rack Operator can watch the rack from the controls while � � � it is being deployed.

NFPA 1901 (Page 3 of 4)

Figure B.1.4.1(a) Delivery Inspection Form (continued)

993 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

���������� ���� ��� ��������� ����� ����������� ������ ������ ���

15.4.6 Powered equipment rack The rack is equipped with lights that flash when it � � � is not stowed. 15.4.7 Powered equipment rack The rack has reflective devices to make it more � � � visible when deployed. 15.6.2 Pump compartment Pump compartment access — no dimension less � � � than 18 in. 24.6.2 Work surfaces Chair level work surfaces are 28 in. to 30 in. above � � � the floor. 24.6.2 Work surfaces Stand-up work surfaces are 36 in. to 40 in. above � � � the floor. 25.9.5 SCBA fill station Test documentation or certification is provided. � � � 25.14.4 Air purification Test documentation or certification that pure air is � � � being produced is provided. 16.13.8 Tank and piping capacity Hydrostatic piping test documentation provided. � � � 19.3.2 Tank and piping capacity Tank-to-pump capacity documentation provided. � � � 19.6 Tank and piping capacity Tank capacity certification provided. � � � 20.25 Tank and piping capacity Aerial piping test documentation provided. � � � 13.14.3.2 Electrical 12-volt Reserve capacity test documentation provided. � � � 13.14.3.3 Electrical 12-volt Alternator performance test at idle documentation � � � provided. 13.14.3.4 Electrical 12-volt Alternator performance test at full load � � � documentation provided. 13.14.4 Electrical 12-volt Low voltage alarm test documentation provided. � � � 13.15 Electrical 12-volt Load analysis documentation provided. � � � 23.4.11 Electrical 110-volt Nominal generator rating chart located at the � � � pump panel. 12.3.4.2 Engine and fuel tank Label is provided at the fuel fill to indicate type � � � of fuel. 12.3.4.1 Engine and fuel tank Certification provided that fuel tank is of sufficient � � � size to meet 12.3.4.1. 12.2.1.5 Engine and fuel tank Engine manufacturer’s installation approval � � � documentation provided. 4.19.2 Documentation and manuals Chassis operation and maintenance manual provided. � � � 4.19.2 Documentation and manuals Pump operation and maintenance manual provided. � � � 4.19.2 Documentation and manuals Aerial device operation and maintenance manual � � � provided. 4.19.2 DRAFTDocumentation and manuals Aerial device load chart provided. � � � 4.19.2 Documentation and manuals Wiring diagram provided. � � � 4.19.2 Documentation and manuals Lubrication chart provided. � � � 4.19.2 Documentation and manuals Parts replacement information provided. � � � 12.1.3 Documentation and manuals Federal Motor Vehicle Safety label. � � � 4.19.3 Documentation and manuals Major component manufacturer’s manuals provided. � � � 4.19.1 Documentation and manuals Required manufacturer’s data provided. � � �

NFPA 1901 (Page 4 of 4)

Figure B.1.4.1(a) Delivery Inspection Form (continued)

994 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

AS DELIVERED WEIGHT ANALYSIS CALCULATION WORKSHEET

������������������������������������������

� � � � � � � � � ��

������ ������ ���������� ������� ������� ���� ��������� ����

� �������������������������������

����� ����������� ������ ������������ ��������� ��������� ������ � �������������� ������������� �� �=� � �������������� ������������� �� �=� � �������������� ������������� �� �=�

����� ����� � �������������� ��������� �� �=� � �������������� ��������� �� �=� � �������������� ��������� �� �=�

������ � �������������� ������������ �� �=�

� �������������� ������������ �� �=� � �������������� ����� �� �=� � �������������� ����� �� �=�

�������� �������� ��������� ���������� �������� ���� ������ � ������������������� �� ��� �=�

������

� ��������������������������������� �����������������

� ��������������������������������DRAFT �������������������������

� ������������������� ����������������������������������������

� �������������������������

NFPA 1901 (Page 1 of 2)

Figure B.1.4.1(b) As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet.

995 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Axle Weight Rating Verification Quantity Rating GVWR Front Rear Tiller

����� ����� �� �=� � ���� �� �=� ������ �� �=�

���� ����� �� �=� � ���� �� �=� ������ �� �=�

���� ����� �� �=� � ���� �� �=� ������ �� �=�

���������� ����� �� �=� � ���� �� �=� ������ �� �=�

� ������������������ ��������������������������������

Instructions for completing the As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet ���� ���������������������������������������� ���� ������������������ ���������������������� ���� ������������������������������������� ������������������������� ��������������������������������������� ������������� � ������������������������������������ ����������������������������������� � ������ ������������ � ��������������������������������������� � ���� ��������������������������� ������������������������������������ � ���������������������������������������� ���� ���������� ������������������������������ ������������������������������������������� ������������������������������������������� ���� ���������������������������������������� ����������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ������������������������������������������ ����������������������������������� ����������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ������������������������������ ���������������� ������������������������������������������ ������������� � ���� ���������������������������������� ����������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ������������������������������������� ���� ���������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ������������������������������������ ������������������������������������ ������������������������������������� ���� ������������������������������������������ �������������� ���� ������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� � ������ ������������������������������� ����������������������������������� � ������������������������������������� ������������� �������������������� ������������������������������������������ � ���������������������������������� �������������������������������������� ���������������������������������� ������������������������������������������ ��������������������������������������� ����������������������������������������� �������������������� ������������������� ���������������DRAFT����������������� ��������� ���������������������������������������� �������������������������������������� � ������������� ��������������������������� ��������������������������������������������� ������������������������������������������� ������������������������������������������� ������������������������������������� �������������������������������������� ��������������������������������������������� ���� ������������������������������������������ �������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ���������������������������������������� ���� ����������������������������������������� ���� ��������������������������������� ������������������������������� ��������������������������������������� �������������������������������������� ������������������������������������������� ����������������� ��������������� ���������������

�����������������������

Figure B.1.4.1(b) As Delivered Weight Analysis Calculation Worksheet. (continued)

996 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

������������������������������������������������������������

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location

Ground Ladders Ladder, A-frame Combo, 14 ft 20.5 × 6.25 × 116 33 Ladder, attic 2.5 × 1.5 × 137 14 Ladder, combo folding 20 × 7.75 × 102 28 (Little Giant type) Ladder, extension, 2 section, 14 ft 21 × 5 × 115 53 Ladder, extension, 2 section, 16 ft 21 × 5 × 129 59 Ladder, extension, 2 section, 20 ft 21 × 5 × 144 66 Ladder, extension, 2 section, 24 ft 21 × 5 × 171 75 Ladder, extension, 2 section, 28 ft 22 × 5.75 × 199 114 Ladder, extension, 3 section, 28 ft 25 × 8.25 × 160 145 Ladder, extension, 3 section, 30 ft 25 × 8.25 × 174 158 Ladder, extension, 3 section, 35 ft 25 × 8.25 × 188 170 Ladder, folding, 8 ft 22.5 × 5.5 × 96 38 Ladder, folding, 10 ft 30.75 × 5.5 × 120 47 Ladder, Fresno, 10 ft 13.5 × 5 × 87 41 Ladder, Fresno, 12 ft 13.5 × 5 × 101 46 Ladder, Fresno, 14 ft 13.5 × 5 × 115 51 Ladder, roof, 12 ft, with hooks 19.25 × 2.75 × 144 36 Ladder, roof, 14 ft, with hooks 19.25 × 2.75 × 168 42 Ladder, roof, 16 ft, with hooks 19.25 × 2.75 × 192 48

���������� Hook, dry wall, 6 ft Head 7.25 × 5.5 × 5 8 Handle 64.75 × 1.5 ID Hook, dry wall, 8 ft Head 7.25 × 5.5 × 5 10 Handle 88.75 × 1.5 ID Pike pole, 6 ft 1.5 × 72 6 Pike pole, 8 ft 1.5 × 96 8 Pike pole, 10 ft 1.5 × 120 10 Pike pole, 12 ft 1.5 × 144 12 Pike pole, closet hook, 3 ft 1.5 × 36 5

���� Hose, boosterDRAFT, ³⁄₄ in. × 100 ft 0.75 × 1200 59 Hose, booster, ³⁄₄ in. × 50 ft 0.75 × 600 30 Hose, booster, 1 in. × 100 ft 1 × 1200 79 Hose, booster, 1 in. × 50 ft 1 × 600 41 Hose, DJ, 1.5 in. × 50 ft (roll) 3 × 18.5 18 Hose, DJ, 1.75 in. × 50 ft, 3.25 × 18.5 19 w/ 1.5-in. couplings (roll) Hose, DJ, 2.5 in. × 50 ft (roll) 4.5 x 20 32

NFPA 1901 (Page 1 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus.

997 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Hose, DJ, 2 in. × 50 ft, 3.75 × 18.5 20.5 w/ 1.5 in. couplings (roll) Hose, DJ, 3 in. × 50 ft, 5.25 × 20 40 w/ 2.5-in. couplings (roll) Hose, forestry, 1 in. × 100 ft (roll) 1.5 × 32 20 Hose, LW, cotton, 1.5 in. × 100 ft (roll) 3.25 × 30 22 Hose, LW, cotton, 1.5 in. × 50 ft (roll) 3.25 × 15 11.5 Hose, LW, cotton, 2 in. × 50 ft, 3.75 × 15.5 14 w/ 1.5-in. couplings (roll) Hose, LW, cotton, 4 in. × 100 ft, 5.75 × 24 68 w/ Storz couplings (roll) Hose, LW, cotton, 5 in. × 100 ft, 6.75 × 25 84 w/ Storz couplings (roll) Hose, LW, Nitrile Jacket, 3.25 × 40 33 1 in. × 100 ft (roll) Hose, LW, Nitrile Jacket, 3.25 × 20 18 1 in. × 50 ft (roll) Hose, LW, Nitrile Jacket, 3.75 × 21 24 2 in. × 50 ft (roll) Hose, LW, Nitrile Jacket, 4 in. × 100 ft, 5.75 × 24 75 w/ Storz coupling (roll) Hose, LW, Nitrile Jacket, 5 in. × 100 ft, 6.75 × 26.5 97 w/ Storz coupling (roll)

Suction Hose Hose, hard suction, 2.5 in. × 8 ft 3 × 96 22 Hose, hard suction, 2.5 in. × 10 ft 3 × 120 27 Hose, hard suction, 3 in. × 10 ft, 3.5 × 120 35 w/ 2.5-in. couplings Hose, hard suction, 4 in. × 10 ft 4.5 × 120 42 Hose, hard suction, 4.5 in. × 10 ft 5.5 × 120 58 Hose, hard suction, 5 in. × 10 ft 6 × 120 87 Hose, hard suction, 6 in. × 10 ft 7 × 120 102

Strainers Strainer, barrel, 2.5 in. 3.25 × 6.3 3.5 Strainer, barrel, 4 in. 5.25 × 15.25 10.5 Strainer, barrel, 4.5 in. 6.75 × 15.25 12.5 Strainer, basket, 3 in. 4.75 × 15.25 9.5 StrainerDRAFT, basket, 4 in. 5.75 × 15.25 11.25 Strainer, floating, 4.5 in. 7 × 21.5 × 26.5 26 Strainer, floating, 5 in. 7 × 21.5 × 26.5 26 Strainer, floating, 6 in. 7 × 21.5 × 26.5 31 Strainer, low level, 5 in. 16 × 13 × 12 20 Strainer, low level, 6 in. 16 × 13 × 12 20 Strainer, rope, 20 ft × 0.5 in. 2 × 2 × 4 1

NFPA 1901 (Page 2 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

998 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location

Portable or Folding Tank Tank, portable, 1000 gal 99 × 7 × 30 125 Tank, portable, 2000 gal 135 × 7 × 30 165 Tank, portable, 3000 gal 159 × 7 × 30 185

Nozzles Deck gun, mounted, 2.5 in., 15.5 × 17 × 18.5 22.5 manual type Deck gun, portable, 2.5 in., 22.25 × 25 × 21 38 manual type Nozzle, booster, 1 in. aluminum 2.5 ID × 9.6 4.3 Nozzle, booster, 1 in. brass 2.5 ID × 9.6 3.6 Nozzle, cellar, 1.5 in., brass 5 ID × 5 7.5 Nozzle, cellar, 2.5 in., brass 7 ID × 5 9.5 Nozzle, chimney, w/ accessory bag 20 × 12 × 6.5 15 Nozzle, foam attachment, 1.5 in. 6 ID (bottom) × 3 ID (tip) 4.8 × 15.9 Nozzle, foam, 2.5 in., w/ pickup tube 4.5 ID × 40.5 4.5 Nozzle, foam, deck gun, Pick up 7.1 19 w/ pickup hose Nozzle 6 × 7 Nozzle, fog, deck gun 6 ID × 10 11.9 Nozzle, forestry, 1 in. 2 ID × 6.8 1 Nozzle, handline, 1.5 in. aluminum 2.5 ID × 9.9 4.4 Nozzle, handline, 1.5 in. brass 2.5 ID × 9.9 6.5 Nozzle, handline, 2.5 in. aluminum 3 ID × 12 6.4 Nozzle, handline, 2.5 in. brass 3 ID × 12 8 Nozzle, piercing, 1.5 in. 51.5 × 1.5 × 6.5 11 Nozzle, play pipe, w/ shaper, 2.5 in. 3 ID × 11.25 8 Nozzle, play pipe, w/ shaper, 3.5 ID × 3 1.5 deck gun, 2.5 in. aluminum Nozzle, play pipe, w/ shaper, 3.5 ID × 3 3.5 deck gun, 2.5 in. brass Nozzle, playpipe, 2.5 in. aluminum 10 × 1.5 × 7 5.8 (Coupling 3.5 × 2) Nozzle, playpipe, 2.5 in. brass 10 × 1.5 × 7 11.1 (Coupling 3.5 × 2) Nozzle, stacked tips, aluminum, 2.5 in. 3 ID × 9 4 Nozzle, stackedDRAFT tips, brass, 2.5 in. 3 ID × 9 8 Nozzle, stacked tips, deck gun, 3.5 ID × 16.75 4 aluminum, 2.5 in. Nozzle, straight tip, 1.5 in. Shut off 2.5 × 4.9 2.5 aluminum, w/ shut-off Tip 1.5 × 4.5 Nozzle, straight tip, 1.5 in. Shut off 2.5 × 4.9 5.8 brass, w/ shut-off Tip 1.5 × 4.5 Nozzle, water curtain, 2.5 in. 10 × 3 × 10 13

NFPA 1901 (Page 3 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

999 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location

Adapters, Fittings, Caps Adapter, 4 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 3.75 × 6 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 4 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 3.5 × 7.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 4 in. STZ × 5 in. STZ, 3.75 × 7.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 4.5 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 3.75 × 6.5 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 4.5 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 3.5 × 7.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 5 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 3.5 × 6 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 5 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 4 × 7.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 6 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 3.5 × 8.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 6 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 4 × 8.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, 6 in. F × 6 in. STZ, 4 × 8.75 ID 2.5 aluminum Adapter, double female, 1.5 in., 3 × 2.5 ID 1 aluminum Adapter, double female, 1.5 in., brass 3 × 2.5 ID 2 Adapter, double female, 2.5 in., 3.25 × 4 ID 1 aluminum Adapter, double female, 2.5 in., brass 3.25 × 4 ID 4 Adapter, double male, 1.5 in., 2.5 × 2 ID 0.5 aluminum Adapter, double male, 1.5 in., brass 2.5 × 2 ID 1 Adapter, double male, 2.5 in., 3 × 4 ID 2 aluminum Adapter, double male, 2.5 in., brass 3 × 4 ID 1 Adapter, reducer, 1.5 in. F × 1 in. M, 1.5 × 3 ID 0.5 aluminum Adapter, reducer, 1.5 in. F × 1 in. M, 1.5 × 3 ID 1 brass Adapter, reducer, 2.5 in. F × 1.5 in. M, 2 × 4 ID 0.5 aluminum AdapterDRAFT, reducer, 2.5 in. F × 1.5 in. M, 2 × 4 ID 3 brass Elbow, 2.5 in. F × 2.5 in. M, 6.5 × 4.5 ID 4.5 30 degree, brass Elbow, 2.5 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 7.5 × 6 ID 6 30 degree, aluminum Elbow, 2.5 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 7.5 × 7.5 ID 6.5 30 degree, aluminum

NFPA 1901 (Page 4 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1000 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Elbow, 3 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 30 degree, 7.5 × 6 ID 6.5 aluminum Elbow, 3 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 30 degree, 7.5 × 7.5 ID 7 aluminum Elbow, 4 in. F × 4 in. STZ, 30 degree, 8 × 6 ID 8 aluminum Elbow, 4 in. F × 5 in. STZ, 30 degree, 8 × 7.5 ID 8.5 aluminum

Intake valves Intake valve, external, 5 in. F 11 × 8.5 ID, 8 × 6.75 ID, 22.5 × 4 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, aluminum 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 5 in. F 11 × 8.5 ID, 8 × 6.75 ID, 63.5 × 4 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, brass 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 5 in. F 11 × 8.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 22.5 × 5 in. M, w/ relief valve, aluminum 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 5 in. F 11 × 8.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 63.5 × 5 in. M, w/ relief valve, brass 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 5 in. F 11 × 8.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 22.5 × 5 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, aluminum 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 5 in. F 11 × 8.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 63.5 × 5 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, brass 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 6 in. F 11 × 9.5 ID, 8 × 6.75 ID, 22.5 × 4 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, aluminum 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 6 in. F 11 × 9.5 ID, 8 × 6.75 ID, 63.4 × 4 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, brass 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 6 in. F 11 × 9.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 22.5 × 5 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, aluminum 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 6 in. F 11 × 9.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 63.5 × 5 in. STZ, w/ relief valve, brass 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 6 in. F 11 × 9.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 22.5 × 6 in. M, w/ relief valve, aluminum 6 × 3 × 2.75 Intake valve, external, 6 in. F 11 × 9.5 ID, 8 × 7.75 ID, 63.5 × 6 in. M, w/ relief valve, brass 6 × 3 × 2.75

Hose equipment Intake, valve, gated, 4.5 in. F 11 ID × 7 11.5 × 2.5 in. M, aluminum Siamees, gated, 5 in. F × (3) 2.5 in. F 10.5 × 12 × 6 29 SiameesDRAFT, gated, 6 in. F × (3) 2.5 in. F 10.5 × 12 × 7 29 Valve, hydrant, 2.5 in. F × 2.5 in. M, 10.75 × 4.75 × 7.75 5.5 aluminum Valve, hydrant, 2.5 in. F × 2.5 in. M, 10.75 × 4.75 × 7.76 14 brass Water thief, gated, 2.5 in. F × 2.5 in. M, 10.25 × 10 × 6 11 × (2) 1.5 in. M, aluminum Water thief, gated, 2.5 in. F × 2.5 in. M, 10.25 × 10 × 6 23.5 × (2) 1.5 in. M, brass

NFPA 1901 (Page 5 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1001 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Wye, gated, 1.5 in. F × (2) 1 in. M, 4.75 × 6 × 3.25 1.75 aluminum Wye, gated, 2.5 in. F × (2) 1.5 in. M, 7.75 × 8.25 × 5 4.5 aluminum Wye, gated, 2.5 in. F × (2) 1.5 in. M, 7.75 × 8.25 × 5 8.5 brass Wye, gated, 4 in. STZ distribution, 15 × 8.75 × 11.25 24 w/ relief valve Wye, gated, 4 in. STZ distribution, 15 × 8.75 × 11.25 24 w/ relief valve

Foam Equipment Eductor, foam, 1.5 in. F × 1.5 in. M 2.75 ID × 9.5 9.5 Eductor, foam, pickup tube 1 ID × 159 7.5 Foam, Class A, 5-gal pail 14.5 × 11.25 ID 45 Foam, Class B, 5-gal pail 14.6 × 11.25 ID 45 Foam system, CAFS, wheeled 55.5 × 31 × 35 602 Foam system, CAFS, skid 43 × 27 × 27 577

Fire Ground Hand Tools Axe, flat head, 6 lb. Head 8.75 × 5.25 × 1.25 8 Handle 1.5 ID × 33 Axe, pick head, 6 lb. Head 11.5 × 5.25 × 1.25 8.5 Handle 1.5 × 33 Crow bar, steel, 36 in. 36 × 4 × 0.75 3.5 Pry bar, steel, 48 in. 48 × 1 × 1 12.5 Tool, Halligan Body 29 × 2.5 × 1.75, 10.5 Point 4.25 × 1 × 1, Flat 3.25 × 1.75 × 0.75

Long Hand Tools Shovel, scoop, 48 in. D-handle 11 × 9 × 3, 4.5 Handle 49 × 1.5 ID Shovel, square end, 48 in. D-handle 9 × 11 × 3, 4 Handle 49 × 1.5 ID Shovel, round end, 48 in. D-handle 11.5 × 8.5 × 3, 4 Handle 49 × 1.5 ID Hammer, sledge, 10 lb. Head 6.75 × 2.75 × 2.75 13.5 DRAFTHandle 1.75 ID × 33 Fire Extinguishers Extinguisher, carbon dioxide, 15 lb. Extinguisher 26 × 6.75 ID 44.5

(CO2), Class C Horn 11 × 4 ID Extinguisher, dry chemical, 10 lb., 21.5 × 5.25 ID 17 Class ABC Extinguisher, dry chemical, 20 lb., 25 × 7.5 ID 30 Class ABC

NFPA 1901 (Page 6 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1002 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Extinguisher, foam, pressurized, 24.25 × 7 ID 26 2.5 gal, Class B Extinguisher, metal-X, 20 lb., Class D 27.75 × 16 ID 53 Extinguisher, water, pressurized, 24.25 × 7 ID 27 2.5 gal, Class A

Hose and Coupling Equipment Hose bridge, steel 23 × 32 × 6 42 Hose, clamp, manual 29.5 × 1.75 × 9.75 15 Hose, hoist, edge protector 12 × 6 × 6 7 Hose, jacket, 2.5 in. 13 × 5.5 ID 16.5 Hose, jacket, 3 in. 15 × 6 ID 26.75 Hose, roller, air remover 20 × 5.5 × 3 5.5 Hose, strap 6.5 x 5 × 0.5 0.5 Mallet, Rubber Head 4 × 2 ID 2.5 Handle 12 × 1 ID Wrench, hose, booster, pin lug 11.5 × 3.75 × 0.5 0.5 Wrench, hose, spanner 11.5 × 3.75 × 0.5 0.5 Wrench, hydrant Head 6 × 3.75 × 1 5 Handle 16.5 × 0.75 ID Wrench, large diameter hose, LDH 4 × 3.75 × .5 0.5 Wrench, spanner, combination 11.5 × 3.75 × 1 0.5 Wrench, spanner, folding 5.25 × 2 × .5 0.5

Smoke Ejectors Fan, smoke ejector, 16 in., electric Fan, smoke ejector, 20 in., electric Fan, smoke ejector, 24 in., electric Fan, smoke ejector, 30 in., electric Fan, smoke ejector, positive pressure, 19 × 18.75 × 12.75 48 electric Fan, smoke ejector, positive pressure, 18.75 × 24.5 × 24.75 92 gas Holder, fan, smoke ejector, door bar 25 × 4.5 × 3 6.5

Traffic Control Equipment Traffic DRAFTcones, plastic 8 × 8 × 3.5 10.5 Traffic flares, case 16.5 × 6.75 × 7.5 27 Tape, barrier, plastic roll 3.5 × 6.75 ID 3.5 Vest, reflective 12 × 4.75 × 2 0.5

NFPA 1901 (Page 7 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1003 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location

Small Rescue or Entry Equipment Bolt cutter, manual, 30 in. 29.25 × 6.25 × 1.25 13 Hose, air, utility, low pressure, 600 × 0.75 ID 5.5 w/ couplings Ram, battering, steel, w/ handles 20 × 6 ID 20 Saw, cut off 19 × 14 × 15 35 Tool, cutter, panel 7 × 1 × 0.5 0.5 Tool, entry, “K tool” 4 × 3 × 2 2.5 Tool, entry, rabbit hydraulic 24 × 18 × 8 28

Small Hand Tools Chisel, coal, 1 in. × 12 in. 12 × 1 ID 1 Chisel, cold, ¹⁄₂ in. × 6 in. 6 × 0.5 ID 0.5 Chisel, cold, ¹⁄₄ in. × 6 in. 6 × 0.25 ID 0.5 Chisel, cold, ³⁄₄ in. × 10 in. 10 × 0.75 ID 0.5 Cutter, glass, Glazier’s swivel cutter 12 × 4 × 6 4 Drill, electric, hammer, 16.5 × 4.5 × 9 7 battery powered File, metal, 10 in. 10 × 0.75 × 0.25 0.5 Hammer, ballpean, 12 oz. Head 3.5 × 1 ID 1 Handle 12 × 1 ID Hammer, ballpean, 16 oz. Head 3.75 × 1 ID 1.5 Handle 12 × 1 Hammer, ballpean, 24 oz. Head 3.75 × 1.25 ID 2 Handle 12 × 1 Hammer, ballpean, 36 oz. Head 4 × 1.25 ID 2.5 Handle 12 × 1 Hammer, claw Head 5 × 1.25 ID 2.2 Handle 13 × 1.25 ID Knife, cutter, seat belt 4 × 2 × 0.25 0.5 Knife, putty, ¹⁄₄ in. 7.25 × 1.25 × 0.5 0.5 Knife, utility 6 × 1.25 × 0.75 0.5 Pliers, arc joint, 10 in. 10 × 2.25 × 0.5 0.5 Pliers, arc joint, 16 in. 16 × 4.5 × 0.5 0.5 PliersDRAFT, diagonal cutting, 8 in. 8 × 2 × 0.5 0.5 Pliers, lineman’s, 8 in. 8 × 2 × 0.5 0.5 Pliers, needle nose, 6in. 6 × 2 × 0.5 0.5 Pliers, slip joint, 8 in. 8 × 1.75 × 0.5 0.5 Pliers, Vise Grip, 10 in. 10 × 2 × 0.5 1 Punch, center 4 × 0.25 ID 0.5 Punch, window, spring loaded 5 × 0.5 ID 0.5 Saw, drywall 8.5 × 1 ID 0.5

NFPA 1901 (Page 8 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1004 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Saw, hand hacksaw, w/ spare blades 18.5 × 4 × 1 1.5 and wire blades Saw, hand, crosscut 28 × 6 × 1 1.5 Screwdriver, Phillips, #2 × 6 8 × 1.25 ID 0.5 Screwdriver, Phillips, #3 × 8 10.25 × 1.25 ID 0.5 Screwdriver, slotted, ¹⁄₄ × 2.5 2.5 × 1 ID 0.5 Screwdriver, slotted, ¹⁄₄ × 6 8 × 1 ID 0.5 Screwdriver, slotted, ³⁄₈ × 12 12 × 1.25 ID 0.5 Screwdriver, slotted, ⁵⁄₁₆ × 8 10 × 1.25 ID 0.5 Shears, metal, snips 9.5 × 2.5 × 0.75 0.5 Socket, spark plug 2.75 × 1 ID 0.5 Tape, measure, roll 3.25 × 3.25 × 1.25 0.5 Tool box, metal, 20 in., hand tools 20 × 8 × 9 10.5 Tool, axe, hand Head 5.5 × 3.75 × 0.75 3.5 Handle 11.75 × 1.5 × 1 Wrench, adjustable, 12 in. 12 × 3 × 0.25 1.5 Wrench, adjustable, 8 in. 8 × 2 × 0.25 0.5 Wrench, adjustable, 10 in. 10 × 2.5 × 0.25 1 Wrench, combination, metric, 13 × 12 × 1 2.5 open end, 8 mm to 18 mm (11 piece) Wrench, combination, SAE, 13 × 12 × 1 2.5 open end, ⁵⁄₁₆ in. to 1 in. (11 piece) Wrench, gas, shutoff 8 × 1.5 × 0.5 0.5 Wrench, hand chain 12 × 2 × 1 1.75 Wrench, pipe, adjustable, 18 in. 18 × 3 × 0.5 6 Wrench, ratchet, ³⁄₈ in. drive, 9.75 × 7.5 × 3 3.5 metric 8 mm to 18 mm (24 piece) Wrench, ratchet, ³⁄₈ in. drive, 9.75 × 7.5 × 2 3.5 SAE ³⁄₈ in. to ³⁄₄ in. (24 piece) Wrench, tire, lug 27.75 × 1 ID 4.5

Miscellaneous Equipment Gauge, air pressure, tires 6.25 × 1 × 0.5 0.5 Sprinkler, wedges, set 3 × 0.75 × 1 0.5 Elevator, key 8.25 × 0.25 ID 0.5 Hooks, DRAFThay bail Hook 10 × 0.5 ID 1.5 Handle 3 × 4.5 × 0.5 Tool, hand, fork, 4-tine Tines 12 × 8.75 × 0.5 3.5 Handle 48 × 1.5 ID Wrench, water main, shut off 8 × 1.5 × 0.5 0.5 Tool, man hole cover, lifter 44.1 × 10.2 × 6.7 35.5 Pump, portable, water, small gasoline 17.5 × 16 × 19.5 50

NFPA 1901 (Page 9 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1005 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Saw, chain, gasoline 61 cc, Engine 16.75 × 9.5 × 11.25 19 w/ 19-in. bar Bar 19 × 3.75 × 0.25 Brush, foxtail 8 × 1 ID 0.5 Intercom, system, w/ four headsets Junction boxes 6.75 × 31.5 5.25 × 2.5, 5.25 × 3.6 × 3.1, 7 × 4.3 × 3.1, 8.25 × 5.75 × 4.75 Headset 8.5 × 7.5 × 3 MRE 12 × 7.5 × 2.5 2 Tent, fire shelter 10 × 6 × 3.5 3.5 Wheel chocks, large 21 × 10.25 × 5.75 22 Wheel chocks, small 10 × 10.25 × 5.75 11

Electrical Equipment —Low Voltage Battery, cable puller 4 × 2.5 × 0.5 2 Battery, jumper cables 10 × 12 × 2.5 8 Flashlight, small, w/ batteries 10.25 × 2.25 ID 1.5 Lantern, head lamp type 3 × 4 × 2 1.5 Lanterns, portable, battery powered 11.5 × 4.5 × 6.5 6.5

Personnel Equipment Belt, safety, ladder type 15 × 5 × 1.75 4.5 Harness, safety 12 × 4 × 4 2.5 Light, sticks, Cyalume (box) 6 × 6 × 8 1 Masks, dust, box 8 × 5 × 5 1 Rope, life line, bail out bag 7.5 × 7.5 × 3.5 2 Water, canteen, 2 qt 7.5 × 3.5 × 8.5 2 Water, container, 5 gal, w/ water 20 × 12.5 ID 40 Water, container, 5 gal, w/o water 20 × 12.5 ID 8

Personnel Gear Clothing, parkas 20 × 30 × 4 3 Gear, entry suit, fire 34 × 24 × 23 50 Gloves, disposable, box 10 × 5 × 3 1.5 Gloves, leather, pair 9 × 4.5 × 0.75 0.5 Gloves, lineman, rubber 18 × 6 × 1 3 Gloves,DRAFT neoprene, 8 in. pair 12 5 2 1 × × Gloves, PVC, 8 in. pair 6.5 × 5.5 × 2 0.5 Gloves, rubber, Nitrile, 8 in. pair 7.5 × 4.5 × 1.25 0.5 Goggles, safety 6 × 3.5 × 2.5 0.5 Helmet, hard hats 12.5 × 8 × 7 Helmet, tool, rescue 10 × 9 × 7 1.5

NFPA 1901 (Page 10 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1006 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location

SCBA Equipment and Cylinders SCBA, alarm, PASS 2 × 3.25 × 1.5 0.5 SCBA, cylinder, 4500 psi 30 min, spare 22.5 × 7 ID 17 SCBA, pack, 4500 psi cylinder, 22 × 14 × 7 30.5 w/ PASS and mask

Instruments Detector, heat 1 × 1.75 × 6 0.5 Monitor, carbon monoxide 3.75 × 1.75 × 1 0.5 Monitor, gas, combustioble 5.75 × 6 × 3.25 2.5 Monitor, oxygen 2 × 3.25 × 1.25 0.5 Electrical, voltage tester 3 × 8 × 1.5 2.5 Detector, gas 8.25 × 3.75 × 3.25 3.5 Radiation, Geiger counter 5.75 × 2.75 × 1.5 1 Detector, Dosimeter 2.75 × 5 × 1.5 0.5 Detector, microwave leak 6 × 2.5 × 1.25 1.5 Kit, sample gathering 21 × 17 × 8.5 23

Hydraulic Rescue Tools and Equipment HRT, cutter, aircraft type 28.2 × 11 × 7.3 39 HRT, hose, spare 16 ft 2 × 16 ID 8 HRT, hose, spare 30 ft 3 × 16 ID 16.5 HRT, manifold block 16 × 8 × 5 15 HRT, pump, electric, simo 28 × 9.5 × 20.7 176 HRT, pump, electric, single 22 × 9.5 × 20.7 133 HRT, pump, gas 22 × 17.5 × 20.7 123 HRT, ram, long 35 × 3.1 × 7 36.5 HRT, ram, medium 22 × 3.1 × 7 24.5 HRT, ram, short 15 × 3.1 × 7 18 HRT, reel, and hose, 50 ft 25 × 20 × 20 100 HRT, spreader, large 33.25 × 5.5 × 8.25 62 HRT, tool, combination 33 × 11 × 6.3 38 HRT, tool, electric combination 33.5 × 10.2 × 6.8 50 HydraulicDRAFT, tool, Porta-Power, 10 ton 3 × 19 × 5 10.5 Air Rescue Equipment and Bags Air bag, controller 19.5 × 14.5 × 5.5 13 Air bag, high pressure, 6 × 6 6 × 6 × 1.2 1.5 Air bag, high pressure, 8 × 8 8 × 8 × 1.2 2.5 Air bag, high pressure, 15 × 15 15 × 15 × 1 11.5 Air bag, high pressure, 17 × 17 17 × 17 × 1 12.5 Air bag, high pressure, 22 × 22 22 × 22 × 1 23

NFPA 1901 (Page 11 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1007 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Air bag, high pressure, 24 × 24 24 × 24 × 1 26 Air bag, high pressure, 27 × 27 27 × 27 × 1.2 33.5 Air bag, high pressure, 30 × 30 31 × 31 × 1.2 41 Air bag, high pressure, 36 × 36 36 × 36 × 1.2 57 Air bag, low pressure 27.5 × 27.5 × 2.3 20 Air bag, pressure regulator 7 × 6 × 4.5 3 Air chisel, set, w/ air cylinder 26 × 11.5 × 11.5 32 Air tool, drill 9.5 × 8.5 × 3.5 5 Air tool, hammer 9.5 × 2.5 ID, 7.75 × 2.25 ID 5.5 Hose, air, low pressure, 50 ft 22 × 11 × 3 5.5 Reel, air, low pressure, with 20.5 × 18 × 19.5 12 100-ft hose

Shoring and Cribbing Equipment —Trench Rescue Cribbing, wood, 2 × 4 × 18 1.5 × 3.25 × 18 1.5 Cribbing, wood, 4 × 4 × 18 3.25 × 3.25 × 18 3.5 Cribbing, wood, 2 × 4 × 36 1.5 × 3.25 × 36 3 Wedges, wood, 4 × 4 × 18 3.25 × 3.25 × 18 1.5

Water Rescue Equipment Harness, rescue, body type 16 × 8 × 8 5 Harness, rescue, chest type 6 × 9 × 2 1.5 Life preserver, personal flotation 21 × 15 × 3 2.5 device

Jacks, Come-along, Block and Tackle, Chains Jack, mechanical, long highlift 48 × 8 × 2 30 Jack, hydraulic, bottle type 5 ton 4.5 × 5 × 9 12 Jack, hydraulic, bottle type 12 ton 5.5 × 5.5 × 9.5 18 Jack, hydraulic, bottle type 20 ton 6 × 6.5 × 11 31 Plate, outrigger 24 × 24 × .5 30 Pulley, swivel side 6 × 4 × 1.5 1 Tool, figure 8 7 × 6 × 0.75 1.5 Chain, steel, 6 ft with hooks 11 × 7 × 3.5 16.5 Chain,DRAFT steel, 10 ft with hooks 14 × 7.5 × 4 21.5 Chain, shortener 8.75 × 2.5 × 0.75 3 Chain, shackle 6 × 4 × 1.5 1 Chain, steel, 20 ft with hooks 9.5 × 5.75 × 5.25 34 Chain, shackle kit 21 × 14 × 5 13.5 Winch, manual, come along 18.5 × 7 × 5 12.5 Straps, extrication, w/ quick release 7 × 5 × 2 2 buckles

NFPA 1901 (Page 12 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1008 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location

Rope Rescue Equipment — High Angle Rescue Carabiner, locking 4.4 × 4.4 × 0.5 0.5 Harness, body 16 × 8 × 8 5 Harness, chest 6 × 9 × 2 1.5 Rope, ¹⁄₂ in., Kernmantle, 200 ft, 11 × 11 ID 22 water rescue Rope, ¹⁄₂ in., nylon, 200 ft 27 × 9 ID 12.5 Rope, ³⁄₈ in., nylon, 200 ft 26 × 8 ID 9.5 Rope, ⁵⁄₈ in., Kernmantle, 200 ft, 29 × 12 ID 26 water rescue Rope, 50 ft, w/ throw bag 15 × 6 ID 4.5 Rope, ascender device 2.5 × 9 × 4.5 1.5 Rope, descender device 16 × 3 × 1 2 Rope, nylon, ¹⁄₂ in. x 100 ft utility 16.5 × 10.5 ID 22.5 Rope, pulley block, double 5 × 9 × 3 2 Sling, nylon 48 × 1 × 0.5 1

Cutting Equipment Cutter, Arc Air 17 × 18 × 6.5 42 Cutter, pedal 8.5 × 2.75 × 3 6 Torch, cutting, acetylene 22.5 × 12.5 × 10 32.5

Hazmat-Related Items Absorbent, oil dry 36 × 24 × 10 15 Absorbent, pads, 100 17 × 19 × 18 19 Absorbent, Vermiculite 12 × 12 × 12 7.5 Broom, Teflon Broom 36 × 4.25 × 4 4 Handle 58.5 × 1 ID Bucket, plastic, 5 gal 14.25 × 12 ID 2 Caulking, gun 22.5 × 2.5 ID 2 Handle 4.25 × 4.25 × 0.75 Drum, salvage, 8 gal 16.75 × 14 ID 12 Drum, salvage, 10 gal 16.75 × 14.5 ID 13.5 Drum, salvage, 110 gal 31 ID × 45 53 Drum, DRAFTsalvage, 20 gal 21.75 ID × 16.75 15.5 Drum, salvage, 30 gal 21.75 ID × 28.25 17.5 Drum, salvage, 55 gal 25 ID × 37.5 23 Drum, salvage, 85 gal 31 ID × 43.25 47 Drum, sling 57 × 2 × 0.5 21 Drum, tank 33.75 × 23.1 ID 81 Hazmat, tank kit 33.75 × 23.1 ID 75

NFPA 1901 (Page 13 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1009 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Neutralizer, acid, 1 gal 12.25 ID × 15 50 Neutralizer, caustic, 1 gal 12.25 ID × 15 42 Shovel, non-sparking Shovel 10 × 11 × 2 2 Handle 28 × 1 ID Shovel, polypropylene Shovel 10.5 × 14 × 2 3 Handle 24.5 × 1 ID Shower, decontamination 21 × 21 × 40 4 Squeegees, Teflon Squeegee 3 × 2.25 × 1 3.5 Handle 72 × 1 ID Suit, Level A hazmat 34 × 21 × 8 21 Suit, Level B hazmat 14 × 13 × 9 3 Suit, Level C hazmat 13 × 6.5 × 1.75 1 Towels, bath, terry, 20 × 36 16 × 6 × 3.75 1

Stretcher and Patient Control Equipment Back board, long 71 × 17.75 × 1.5 17.5 Back board, short 32 × 16 × 0.75 3 Body, pouch 17 × 14 × 1 6.5 Extraction device, KED 34 × 11 × 5 6.5 Neck brace, C-collar 23 × 10 × 6 3.5 Stretcher, folding 39.5 × 24.25 × 9.25 60 Stretcher, scoop 73 × 16.75 × 2 21 Stretcher, stokes basket 80.5 × 22 × 8 38 Stretcher, stokes, 4-point 4 × 8 × 5 3.5 attachment bridle

Medical and EMS equipment Blanket, disposable 9.5 × 6 × 0.75 0.5 Blanket, fire, w/ bag 20 × 19 × 2 5.5 Blanket, wool 19 × 13 × 2.5 4.5 Defibrilator, cardiac, 12 lead monitor 23.5 × 9.5 × 13 24 Medical, air way kit 13.75 × 5 × 4.5 4 Medical, ambulance bag 22 × 13.5 × 8.5 9 Medical, burn kit 13 × 9 × 5 2.5 Medical, drug bag 19.25 × 10.5 × 12 24 Medical,DRAFT first aid kit, 25 unit 10.5 × 7.5 × 2 5 Medical, OB kit 9.5 × 7.5 × 3.5 1 Medical, rescue breather 4.75 × 4 × 2 0.5 Medical, snake bite kit 5 × 3 × 1.5 0.5 Medical, splints 36 × 14 × 5 4 Medical, squeeze bag mask 8.5 × 5.5 × 5.5 0.5 Medical, suction, portable 15 × 8.25 × 8.75 12

NFPA 1901 (Page 14 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1010 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Medical, trauma kit 27 × 19 × 10 14.5 Medical, V-vac 13 × 7 × 5 1 Oxygen, cylinders, D 4.25 ID × 19.5 8 Resuscitation, respirator, oxygen 9 ID × 4.5 1.5 Medical, V-vac 13 × 7 × 5 1 Oxygen, cylinders, D 4.25 ID × 19.5 8 Resuscitation, respirator, oxygen 9 ID × 4.5 1.5

Electrical Equipment Cord, electric, 50 ft #12/3 17 × 5 × 2.75 2 Electrical, “Hot Stick” 20.5 × 1.75 ID 1.25 Electrical, pigtail/adapter 1.5 ID × 8 1 Generator, portable 25.8 × 18.9 × 19.1 147 Junction box, electric, distribution 8.5 × 6.25 × 7.5 5.5 Light, flood, tripod 72 × 4.5 ID 30 Light, portable, 500 watt 13 × 8.5 × 13 9.5 Reel, electric, portable with cord 20 × 16 × 9 27 Saw, electric, Sawzall 18 × 6 × 3 8.25

Gasoline, Engine, Spare Parts (Small Engine and Tools) Container, safety can, 2.5 gal 11.5 × 11.5 ID 6 Electrical, tape 0.75 × 3.5 ID 0.5 Engine, air filter 3.25 × 4.5 ID 0.5 Engine, fuel filter 2.75 × 1 ID 0.5 Engine, oil filter 3.25 × 3 ID 0.5 Engine, oil, 1 quart 8.5 × 4.25 × 2.25 2 Engine, spare O-rings, 10 1.25 × 2.5 ID 0.5 Engine, spark plug 2.75 × 0.75 ID 0.5 Funnel, plastic 9 × 5 ID 0.5 Rags, mechanics 16.75 × 11.5 × 8.25 5 Saw, blade, extra 10 blades 12.25 × 0.5 × 0.5 0.5 Saw, wood, extra chain (gas) 10.5 × 2 × 0.5 0.5 Sprayer, Silicone 8.5 × 2.5 ID 41

Non-SparkingDRAFT Tools Tools, non-sparking, drum wrench 15 × 2.5 × 2.25 3 Tools, non-sparking, hammer Head 3 × 1 ID 1.5 Handle 12 × 1 ID Tools, non-sparking, kit 14.25 × 12. ID 19 Tools, non-sparking, knife 6 × 1.25 × 0.75 0.5 Tools, non-sparking, pipe wrench 8 × 2.5 × 0.75 5

NFPA 1901 (Page 15 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1011 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Tools, non-sparking, pliers 8 × 1 × 0.5 0.5 Tools, non-sparking, putty knife 9 × 3 × 1 1.5 Tools, non-sparking, screw driver 7.5 × 1 ID 0.5 Phillips Tools, non-sparking, screw driver 7.5 × 1 ID 0.5 straight Tools, non-sparking, wrench, 12 × 1.75 × 0.5 1.5 adjustable

Special Wild-land Equipment Axe, brush Head 9 × 5 × 1 7 Handle 36 × 1.5 ID Broom, fire swatter Swatter 11.5 × 15 × 0.25 5.5 Handle 60 × 1.25 ID Extinguisher, water pump can 17 × 15 × 7 14 Pick, clay Head 16.5 × 3 × 0.5 9 Handle 1.5 ID × 36 Rake, fire Rake 12 × 3.5 × 1 4.5 Handle 60 × 1.75 ID Tool, Pulaski Head 13.25 × 4.75 × 1 6 Handle 33.25 × 1.5

Salvage Equipment Broom, household Broom 11 × 11 × 1.75 1.5 Handle 46 × 1 ID Broom, push, long handle Broom 19 × 4 × 3 4.5 Handle 50.5 × 1 ID Bucket, mop, w/ ringer 17.25 × 16 × 21.5 18.5 Mop, long handle Mop 21 × 7.75 × 2 5.5 Handle 60.25 × 1 ID Nails, assorted, can 6 × 5 × 5 5 Plastic, roll, 100 ft × 20 ft 48 × 10 ID 11 Pump, electric, sump 11 × 7 ID 19 Squeegee, long handle Squeegee 3 × 2.25 × 1 4 Handle 72 × 1 ID Stapler, construction type 8 × 6 × 0.75 2 Tape, duct 2 × 7 ID 2 Tarp, floorDRAFT runner 36 × 12 ID 22 Tarp, salvage covers 9 ID × 30 9 Vacuum, water 27 × 15.75 ID 18.5

Reference and Communication Binoculars, eye 4.4 × 4.6 × 1.8 1.5 Book, CHRIS manual 11.5 × 11.25 × 6.5 16 Book, DOT reference 7.5 × 5.25 × 0.75 1

NFPA 1901 (Page 16 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

1012 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA

Total Weight Weight Compartment Equipment Description Dimensions (in.) (lb) Quantity (lb) Location Book, map 11.5 × 9.5 × 2.75 6 Book, medical guide 11 × 9 × 0.5 1 Book, NFPA Hazmat handbook 14 × 9 × 1.5 4 Book, phone 10.75 × 9 × 2 4.5 Book, Railroad Emergency Action 11 × 8.5 × 2 2.5 Guide Camera, Polaroid or digital 6.8 × 4.2 × 6.4 1.5 Clip board 13.75 × 9 × 1.5 2 Computer, desktop 25 × 17.5 × 16.25 66 Computer, laptop 11 × 13 × 1.6 8 Fax, machine 15 × 14.25 × 15.75 24.5 Megaphone, bull horn 14.5 × 11.5 × 9 3.5 Radio, hand 7.5 × 2.25 × 1.25 1.5 Telephone, cell 7.75 × 2 × 2.75 2.5

NFPA 1901 (Page 17 of 17)

Figure C.1 Worksheet for Determining Equipment Weight on Fire Apparatus. (continued)

Significant changes to the 1991 edition included requiring total enclosure Annex E Informational References of driving and crew areas, limiting the maximum stepping height, requiring access handrails, and requiring additional warning lights and reflective striping. The minimum pump size for a fire pump on a pumper was raised to E.1 Referenced Publications. The following documents or portions thereof 750 gpm, and the minimum water tank size was set at 500 gal. The documents are referenced within this standard for informational purposes only and also addressed line voltage electrical systems and foam systems for the first are thus not part of the requirements of this document unless also listed in time. Chapter 2. The test and delivery data requirements were updated to ensure that more E.1.1 NFPA Publications. National Fire Protection Association, 1 of the performance requirements of the standards were tested as part of Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101. the delivery process and that proper documentation was provided to the purchaser. Appendix A was expanded to provide more discussion of the NFPA 11, Standard for Low-Expansion Foam, 2002 edition. requirements in the standard, and a new appendix was added to provide NFPA 70, National Electrical Code®, 2002 edition. a form that a purchaser could use to define the information needed by the contractor to properly design, build, and deliver the fire apparatus. NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance, 2002 edition. Recognizing that much apparatus is multifunctional and that the process of maintaining separate documents for the traditional types of fire apparatus did NFPA 1150, Standard on Fire-Fighting Foam Chemicals for Class A Fuels not always address the need for nontraditional types or use of fire apparatus, in Rural, Suburban, and Vegetated Areas, 1999 edition. the committee combined the four documents back into a single fire apparatus standard for the 1996 edition and organized the standard to cover not only the NFPA 1906, Standard for Wildland Fire Apparatus, 2001 edition. traditional types of fire apparatus but also multifunctional and nontraditional use apparatus. New chapters were added to cover compressed air foam NFPA 1911, Standard for Service Tests of Fire Pump Systems on Fire systems, air systems,DRAFT command and communication areas, and winches. Apparatus, 2002 edition. Many requirements were added throughout the document to improve the NFPA 1912, Standard for Fire Apparatus Refurbishing, 2001 edition. safety for fire fighters using the apparatus. These requirements included NFPA 1931, Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire limiting the height of controls to 72 in. (2 m) above the standing position of Department Ground Ladders, 1999 edition. the operator, requiring equipment in driving and crew areas to be securely fastened or in a compartment, increasing work lighting around the apparatus, NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing and better grouping of pump controls to keep the operator away from the Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, 2002 edition. intake and discharge outlets. The low voltage electrical chapter was totally rewritten to require load analysis and load management if the total connected NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System load cannot be supplied by the vehicle’s alternator. The requirements for Components, 1995 edition. warning lights were also rewritten to provide for different lighting when “calling for right-of-way” versus “blocking right-of-way.” Requirements for NFPA 1991, Standard on Vapor-Protective Ensembles for Hazardous warning lights were increased to provide more visibility of the fire apparatus. Materials Emergencies, 2000 edition. New requirements were added for powered equipment racks, SCBA and NFPA 1992, Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Ensembles and Clothing cylinder storage, pump and plumbing access, and slip-on fire-fighting for Hazardous Materials Emergencies, 2000 edition. modules. The baffling requirements for water tanks were changed to allow for Fire Protection Guide to Hazardous Materials, 12th edition, 1997. either containment or dynamic baffling to be used. As a fundamental change in the aerial device chapter, water towers were redefined as aerial devices with E.1.2 Other Publications. elevated stream capability only. If water towers have a ladder on them, they are considered aerial ladders. Requirements were also added for secondary E.1.2.1 Association of American Railroads Publication. Association of controls at the tip of an aerial ladder if such controls are provided. American Railroads, 50 F Street, NW, Washington, DC 20001. Emergency Action Guide, 1990.

1013 NFPA 1901 — May 2003 ROP — Copyright, NFPA E.1.2.2 NEMA Publication. National Electrical Manufacturers E.1.2.4 U.S. Coast Guard Publication. U.S. Coast Guard, Department of Association, 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209. Transportation, Washington, DC 20241. WD-6, Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements, 1988. Chemical Hazard Response Information System (CHRIS), Volumes 1–3, Hazardous Chemical Data, 1992. E.1.2.3 SAE Publication. Society of Automotive Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. E.1.2.5 U.S. Government Publication. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. SAE J551-2, Test Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Vehicles, Motorboats, and Spark-Ignited North American Emergency Response Guidebook, 2000. Engine-Driven Devices, 1994. E.2 Informational References. (Reserved) SAE J706, Rating of Winches, 1999. E.3 References for Extracts. SAE J826, Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation, 1995. NFPA 1, Fire Prevention Code, 2000 edition. SAE J1849, Emergency Vehicle Sirens, 1995. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code®, 2002 edition. NFPA 1500, Standard on Fire Department Occupational Safety and Health Program, 2002 edition

DRAFT

1014